Google
This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at |http: //books .google .com/I
I
\tk- F-r. TIL 3. 2 9Zi
FRENCH GRAMMAR
WITH
EXERCISES. ''''
Price \0s, 6d»
GUIDE
TO THE
FRENCH LANGUAGE;
ESPECULLY DEVISED FOR PERSONS WHO WISH TO
STUDY THAT LANGUAGE
WITHOUT THE ASSISTANCE OF A TEACHER.
BT
J. J. P. LE BRETHON.
THE TENTH EDITION, REVISED AND CORRECTED,
Br L. SANDIER,
PBOPESSOR OF L.\NGUAa£6, AND MEUBER OF THE HISTORICAL INSTITUTE OF FRANCE.
WITH A KEY TO THE EXERCISES.
ADOLESCENTIAM ALKSX 3VCWDVU KgT KT LAUDABILK.— CiCeTO,
LONDON: ROBERT BALDWIN,
47, PATERNOSTER-ROW.
1847.
LONDON
Printed by William Clowes and Sons,
SuQford Street.
PREFACE.
The study of the French language, in this country^ has become
so essential a feature in the character of modern education^ and
so intimately associated with the advancing civilization of the age^
as to render its easy acquisition a matter deserving urgent
attention. No apology therefore can be reasonably required for
the issue of a carefully revised and amended edition of the
standard Grammar of M. Lc Brethon.
It is very much to be regretted, that in nearly every French
Grammar, professedly written to give the English student
a thorough knowledge of French, there should be such a
number of ill-arranged and unclassified rules, which bewilder and
dishearten the learner, unless he be endowed with a mind of mor^
Ihan ordinary capacity. Now, one effect of this improper ar-
rangement of the rules is, that the pupil, presuming a knowledge
of the French language to be unattainable, without close and
arduous study, becomes discouraged, and, if he be compelled to
proceed through this dreaded labyrinth of rules, he does so hope-
less of ever attaining any proficiency; and the result is, that
under circumstances so unfavoufable and prejudicial, little or no
progress is made* Hence, the many months — ^nay, the many
years — frequently devoted by young persons to the study of the
French language, at the end of which, they give it up in despair
of ever learning anything worthy to be called French. Should
we not, then, endeavour to obviate this general want of success,
mainly, if not entirely, arising from the absence of care and judg.
ment in the selection of the books intended for their use ? The
way to learning should be made smooth and easy of ascent : it is
important, therefore, that the rules of Grammar should be properly
VI PREFACE
arranged and classified^ so as to lead the student to a gradual,
but thorough knowledge of the language which it is his desire
to obtain.
During my long career as a teacher of the French language
in England, which has extended over a period of nearly twenty
years^ I have invariably made it a point, to examine carefully
every book connected with my profession which I could possibly
procure. The experience I have thus acquired, has led me to
this conclusion, that the Grammar of M. Le Brethon is superior
to all other French Grammars, hitherto published, whether
regarded as to the simplicity of its arrangement, or its adaptation
to the most ordinary or the loftiest mind. It is a work of great
merit — being methodical, plain, easy, and complete. This, I am
aware, is a very high eulogium to pronounce upon any work,
especially upon a Grammar ; but I feel convinced that a careful
and unprejudiced perusal of the book will at once establish the
accuracy of my opinion.
Throughout this Grammar, the student will find the most
ample directions ; indeed, they accompany him, as he progresses
through the various rules and exercises, explaining whatever
may appear doubtful or difficult in the construction of the lan-
guage, and guiding him to the close of his studies, with a fulness
and amplitude that tender it utterly impossible that considerable
advance should not have been made in its acquisition. It is a
happy feature in the arrangement of this Grammar, that the
method is adopted of constantly placing before the eye of the
pupil, figures referring to the rules through which he has passed,
and only a partial knowledge of which he may have acquired.
The result is, that the nature and peculiar properties of the rules
become deeply impressed upon his mind, by the facility thus
afforded of recurring at once to them, if necessary, instead of
having, as in niost other Grammars, to peruse many pages before
obtaining the desired information. It may be affirmed, then,
that any person, of even ordinary capacity, who has attentively
studied this Grammar, cannot fail to have acquired a competent
knowledge of French.
PREFACE. Vii
It is generally admitted that the French language is the best
adapted for the expression of whatever is light, delicate^ or
amusing, and the happiest language for the exercise of the con-
versational powers. Hence, in all large towns in Europe^ French
is quite familiar to the higher circles of society, and by tacit con-
vention^ whenever well-educated men of different nations meet
together, French is at once the language adopted.
To those who aim at enriching their minds by acquainting
themselves with the beauties of literature, French is of the
greatest importance, as the writings of the ancient and modem
authors of France abound in passages of the utmost sublimity
and grandeur.
To the tourist, a knowledge of this universal language is abso-
lutely necessary ; it will minister to his comforts whilst abroad,
and add materially to the stock of information he may accumulate
during his journey.
To those persons whose business avocations are at all identified
with foreign commerce, French will be found invaluable ; and it
is unquestionably true, that young men acquainted with this lan-
guage are more readily engaged by merchants than those who
are ignorant of it.
There are also considerations of an entirely different character,
which may induce others to enter upon its study. The political
prominence of France — ^her intimate connection with England —
the growing importance of the commercial relations between the
two countries, and their mutual interests, feelings, and sympathies
in the advancing civilization of the world, render French an inter-
esting and important study to every intelligent Briton.
In conclusion, I would reiterate the sentiment so happily
embodied in the language of a modern author, that, as long as
any person confines his own study, solely to his native tongue, he
cannot understand it perfectly, or ascertain with accuracy its
poverty or richness, its beauties or defects. He who cultivates
other languages, as well as his own, gains new instruments to
increase the stock of his ideas, and opens new roads to the temple
of knowledge. He draws his learning from pure sources, con-
> Xn PREFACE.
verses with the natives of other countries, without the assistance
of an interpreter, and surveys the contents of books without
being under the necessity of an implicit reliance on translations.
He may unite the speculations of a philosopher with the acquire-
ments of a linguist ; he may compare different languages, and
form just conclusions with respect to their beauties and defects,
and their conformity with manners and institutions. He may
trace the progress of national refinement, and discover by a com-
parison with their corresponding terms, that the history of lan-
guage, inasmuch as it developes the efforts of human genius, and
the rise and advancement of its inventions, constitutes an im-
portant part of the history of man.
L. SANDIER,
( i>^ )
DIRECTIONS.
Let the student begin at the first part of the Introduction to the French
language, page 27 ; comparing the French with the English, and endea-
vouring to form some idea of the difference between the two languages.
Then, let him read, two or three times over, as far as page 32. Having
arrived at page 32, let him translate it with the assistance of the English
by its side, and so on to page 58.
. Rule 1, page 32, corresponds with rule 1, page 62 : underneath it is an
exercise — ^which the pupil should write after having well read and under-
stood the said rule, observing a similar plan with each succeeding one. The
numbers referring to the rules in the first part of the Introduction, agree
throughout with those in the second part.
After a few lessons, I would advise the pupil to translate ' Ferrin's
French Fables,' the easiest book for beginners; next to which comes
' Wanostrocht*s Eecueil choisi.' Those who have not a good memory
will do well to write out the English translation of either book, which,
with the aid of tlie Index found in both of them, is an easy task. After
having written a dozen ftibles, he will be accustomed to the finding of
words, and already know a good many ; he may then cease writing his
translations, as he will easily read the fables ih English with the assistance
of the Index,
Pupils naturally being very anxious to learn pronunciation, I would
recommend the master to teach them, first, the various sounds of the
French alphabet, particularly the vowels, which differ more than ^con-
sonants from the English sounds. The next step is to teach them to read
the verbs, beginning at page 106, and requesting particular attention to
the numbers prefixed to them, all of which refer to excellent rules on
pronunciation at the beginning of tlie grammar. Des CaiTth'es* Dialogues
shoAld now be given to the pupils, and they miglit be taught to read a
number of familiar words with which they soon become acquainted. The
printing of the Dialogues greatly facilitates pronunciation, ^silent letters
X DIRECTIONS.
being in italics. I would strongly advise the teajcher, in the generality
of cases, not to accustom pupils to repeat any thing from memory, at
least for the first three months, as it is a very tedious task to remember
words of a foreign language, before knowing how to pronounce them
properly. This part of the study of French — I mean pronunciation —
will, in time, become the easiest, if the pupil be not made to learn it in
too hurried a manner. Very great assistance will be derived from
attending to the rules found at the first and following pages of the
Grammar, as it is beneficial to learn pronunciation by rules, as well as by
hearing the different sounds from a native of France. Exemplifications
should also be given, and to do this effectually, the teacher should have
some knowledge of English pronunciation ; corresponding sounds between
French and English existing for all the words, with only a few exc^**
tions. In order, however, to facilitate this, it is my intention shortly to
bring out a pronouncing-book which, I trust, will answer the purpose
satisfactorily.*
It will now please and encourage the learner to compose short and easy
sentences, on the most common topics ; doing this on all the verbs will be
found very beneficial. As soon as a sufRcient knowledge of pronunciatioa
is acquired, it is time to begin, at page 62^ reading in French, at sight, the
exercises previously written. It will be well, at the same time, to trans-
late * De Porquet's Trt&Bor de PEcolier Fran9ais,' that is, making English
into French,^ a most essential point to be obtained, as we suppose pupils
anxious to speak French. After having gone through * Perrin's Fables,'
or * Wanostrocht's Recueil choisi,' let the learner translate * Blanchard's
Petit voyage autour du monde,*t a very interesting little work. Or, if he
be anxious to begin at once reading our standard French authors, here is
a list of a few very instructive and captivating works :
T«IWmaque, by Fenelon ;' Numa Pompilius, by Florian ; les Incas,
Belisaire, by Marmontel ; Histoire de Charles XII., Roi de Su^e, His-
toire de Pierre-le- Grand, Siecle de Louis XIV*, Vie de Louis XV.,
Essai sur les Moeurs et TEsprit des Nations, by Voltaire J; Voyage
du jeune Anacharsis en Grece, by Barthelemy ; Voyages en Syrie et en
Egypte, by Volney ; Histoire des R«5volutions Romaines, de Suede, et de
♦ The Modern French Pronouncing Book, or Parisian Pronunciation exemplified
through the medium of English Sounds ; to which is added, a Translating-Book for
Beginners, vitb notes. By Louis Sandier.
t A new edition, revised and corrected, with grammatical and explanatory i^tes.
By h* Sandier. This work may be advantageously used by most beginners.
X The style of Voltaire is the easiest and the most free from idioms among French
authors.
DIRECTIONS. XI
Portugal, by Vertot ; Les Tiagedies de Corneille, de Bacine, de Voltaire ;
Les Comedies de Moliere, with notes by Gombert*
Meanwhile, the pupil is supposed to b^ve written the exercises in the
grammar, as £ir as page 104 ; then he should read the third pert of the
grammar, on syntax, extending from page 179 to 270, at least four
pages a week, and also commit to memory the idioiaatical senteQcei» at
page 258, and following. In the mean time, it is proper he should write
the exercises of the third part, beginning at page 271. Simply reading
them will answer the same purpose with some pupils ; the discrimination
must here be left to the judgment of the teacher. The time for composing
letters is now come, first writing them in English, (but taking care to use
only short and simple sentences,) and translating them into French,
observing the parsing of ea(^ word, and never forgetting that the chief
and fundamental rules of grammar are the same in all languages.
I suppose the learner pretty well acquainted with the pronunciation by
this time, and would advise him to read every day, aloud and slowly, a
page or more of a French book ; it would be an advantage if he heard it
read previously by a French person. This being strictly followed up, his
ear would become accustomed to the sound of the language, and enable
him to und^tand better when addressed in French. Let him remove
his ^'mauvaise honte," and speak French whenever he can; and even
supposing his mistakes may occasionally excite a smile, there is nothing to
make him feel ashamed, for it would be unreasonable to expect him to
speak a foreign language as correctly as he speaks his own.
Pupils desirous of teaching themselves-^rand parents or teachers wishing
to give instruction in French, but not feeling fully competent to the
task — will do well to procure the Key to Le Brethon's Grammar, which
contains excellent directions for their guidance. It may also be placed
with advantage in the hands of those who. having already a knowledge of
French, experience any difficulty in understanding grammatical construc-
tion ; they may use it as a translating book, by which they will often
learn the arrangement and agreement of words.
A most important point in teaching, and one which cannot be too
firequently dwelt upon, is that of studying the disposition and peculiar
temperament of the pupil, and apportioning lessons accordingly ; as what
we do with pleasure is invariably better done. Let the teacher be mild
and encouraging : if he conciliate his pupils, his success will be by far
greater than any exhibition of ill temper at their dulness or inattention
could possibly produce ; gentle reasoning, "with patience and forbearance,
mu&t ultimately succeed. At the same time, let the teacher remember,
Xil DIRECTIONS.
that his mildness must not degenerate into want of firmness ; he should be
courteous, yet reserved— endeavouring to cultivate that regard which
ought ever to exist in the relation of the pupil towards the master.
Punctuality and regularity of attendance are most essentially requisite—-
as well on the part of the learner, as on that of the teacher — ^and without
these, only very unsatisfactory prog^ress can be expected.
* It is not sufficient that young people have good books, a good method,
and even a good master, if this master be unsupported by heads of schools
and parents. A great evil existing in many scholastic establishments is,
that pupils have no school time allowed for their French lessons ; they
must learn them whenever they can — often, indeed, during their hours of
recreation. It may be' naturally expected, therefore, that few of them do
so with pleasure, because they regard the study of French as an encroach*
ment on those hours which, they imagine, ought to be exclusively
devoted to leisure. This is an evil which ouglit to be immediately
remedied.
An erroneous idea prevails with some persons that the study of French
interferes with other studies: on the contrary, it is actually a great
assistant. By learning the French grammar, the pupil must become
more thoroughly acquainted with his own ; the parts of speech, as I have
before observed, being essentially the same in all languages ; and different
French words, in many instances, not only explain peculiar shades of one
English word to which, otherwise, his attention would, perhaps, never
have been attracted, but exhibit the real meaning and etymology of many
other words derived from the French. Then, too, the pronunciation of a
foreign language by making his organs more flexible, soften his articu-
lation when pronouncing his mother-tongue. As, however, in learning
languages, we do not confine ourselves to words only, but learn them con-
nectedly to form sentences and express the ideas of the author we read, we
must, necessarily, enlarge our minds by this repeated intercourse ^vith the
works of genius.
L. S.
THE ALPHABET.
1 HE FRENCH LANOUAQE is composed of twcnij/'Jive letters, viz
A pron<
ounccd ah like
a in art.
B
bay
6
6ay.
C
say
s
«ay.
D
day
d
day.
E
ay
a
ale.
F
f
f
dea/.
G
zhay*
1
H
ash
h
asA.
I
ee
m
I
field.
J
zhee*
1
K
kah
C
cart.
L
I
I
ell.
M
m
m
gem.
N
n
n
pen.
old.
P
pay
P
jpay.
ku
1
11
, oyr
r
to err.
s
s
8
ble^^.
T
lay
t
bailor.
U
u
9
V
vay
V
t?eil.
X
eeks
X
sir.
Y
ee-grayc
the same sound lis t.
Z
zeyd
2
zed.
These are the names l^y which the letters are called in french ; but in
that language, as well as in the english, the sound of several of them
varies according to their position with other letters, as will appear by the
following^ observations.i
* To giyc this letter its proper sonnd, tbe h must be pronounced aspirate.
1 The sound of ^ and j, in english, is foiined of 4)! so general, jud^e, are pro-
nounced general, djudge; leave out the sound of d in french, and you will have the
proper sound.
2 There is no word in the english language in which the sounds of the french q
and u are to be found, and no combination of characters can give an idea of the
pronunciation of these two letters. The person who has them to pronounce, must
shut his lips quite close, leaving only a small opening in the middle, as if he were
going to blow a flute.
t It is perhaps unnecessary to observe, that in a treatise of this kind, the minutest
precision must not be expected. There are simple sounds which no combination of
characters can exactly express : every person who knows any thing of languages
must be sensible of this.
t 4E
2 PRONUNCIATION
OF VOWELS.
The French reckon three sorts of vowels.
Tlie simple, a, c, i, o, w.
The compound, oz, ao, «!«, ea, coi, e«M, et, eu, eo, oe, ou.
The nasal, 0771^ a/i, em^ en, im, in, aim, ain, ein, om, on, inn, vn
OF SIMPLE VOWELS.
a, e, I, 0, u,
1 Each of these letters has two sounds common to both languages ;
English wor^s in which the same sound is f omul
One short, as a in natte, paw, a in pat,
e hette, beet. e bet.
i Jixe, fixed, i fix.
o hotte, dorser, o hot.
u mur, wall, u see note 2.
The other long; as & in pctte, ^ paste, a in pall.
£ bHe, I . beast, e bear.
i fit, > marked ' 3 might do, i field.
5 hdie, I lajTdlord,' o liope.
ii mUr, J ripe, u see note 2 and 3.
N. B. The beauty of french pronunciation depends upon a clear and distinct arti-
2 To the two sorts of e abovementioned, must be added e mute, as in
cela, that, pronounced sla.
demande, requires, dmand.
des mesures, measures, daymsur.
This e, ah you see, has no sound, but it generally affects the sound ot
the penultima, by rendering it longer, if it be a vowel, or by giving a
sound to the consonant which, without it, would be silent ; for ex,
6maim^, mascul. loved,ispronoun. aymay, like^i
i joli, pretty, ZAoZ/i, 4 t>short.
u rti, seen, vu, u)
e in aimh, femin. loved, is pronoun, avmay^, like ^1
i joUe, pretty, zholee, i Mong
u vue, seen, vA, dj
petit, mascul. little, is pronoun, p^t, see note 4.
grand, great, gran,
pris, taken, pree.
but petite, femin. little, is pronoun, ptift.
grande, great, grand,
prise, taken, preez.
In un bon chien, a good dog, the n has only a half sound.
In une bonne chienne, a good bitch, the n has sl/uU sound, fi
N. B. e mute is distinguishect from the two others, by its not being accented ; it is
never pronounced at the end of words, but when e begins a word, it is always sounded
whether it be accented or not.
3 A vowel with a circumflex is pronounced as long again as it would be without it.
4 Sound the liitter t as sharp as you can, sharper, if possible, than y in pretty,
5 To give n its full articulation, you first press the tip of the tongue against the root
of the luwer teeth, then raise it up quickly to the rooi of the mouth. In the pronun-
ciation of the above nasal vowels, the articulation of n must end, when the tip of the
tongue is at the root of the lower teeth, without any motion towards the roof cf the
mouth ; this is what is here meant by a half sound.
PRONUNCIATION 3
OF SIMPLE VOWELS.
In the monosyllables, je, me, fe, /c, «c, ccj de, ne, que, this c has some- S
times a weak guttural sound, similar to that of e in dau^hter^ ngter^
because the consonant can fiot be pronounced without a feeble articu*
lation of a vowel ; but it is always dropt in conversation and in familiar
reading, when it can be done without embarrassing the pronunciation.
The manner in which this is effected is easy. With the last syllable of
the preceding word, pronounce the consonant to which e mute belongs,
and the e^ thus unsupported, will remain silent ; ex.
Quand me ferez^voos le plaisir de me prater ce livre que je vous ai demand^ ?
pronounce, kam fraye vocl pUiyzeer dum praytays Uvr kwzh voozaifd mandof f
But there must not be any pause between the words, and the junction
must be as smooth as possible.
Observe only, that a syllable ending in e mute, can not attract the
consonant of another e mute, without giving to the first e a gentle gut-
tural sound, like that of e in daughter, so as to render the pronunciation
easy; ex.
Je ne puis pas vous le dire, puis que je ne le sais pas.
pron. zhen fmeepaw tool 4eer, pueesk zhen lugh say paw.
But carefully avoid pronouncing it like an accented ^, for there is not
any pronunciation more ridiculous.*
Among the simple vowels is also reckoned y, which however does 4
not increase their number, since its sound is the same as that of i. The
peculiar use of this letter is to divide the syllable in which it is found,
into two distinct syllables ; it is equivalent to ii ; as.
pays.
country,
pron.
p(ty-ee.
cUoyen^
citlsen.
citway-eeytn.
soyona.
let us be,
swoy-eeon.
joyeux.
joyful,
zhwoy-eeugh.
Except in the words derived from the greek and latin, where y is kept
to shew the etymology of the word, and is pronounced like one i only ; as,
Egypte, E^ypt, ayzheept,
tyramde, tyranny, teerarmee.
etymologie, etymolofi^y, ayteemolozhee,
mytkologie, mythology, meetolozhee.
* In the pronouncing of this e consists much of the neatness and elegance of a true
Trench accent. In the southern provinces of France, especially iuGuyenne and Gascogne,
they pronounce it like the acnte or short k, which gives them thai affected pronun-
ciation, so much ridiculed by the rest of the inhabitants of France, under the name of
accent gascan. For tliis reason a foreigner will sooner understand a native o{ Bordeaux,
than a native of Parts, and may often understand the former, without being able to
understand the latter, though if he understands the latter, he will undoubtedly under-
stand the former. It is the frequent dropping of this e which makes a foreigner believe
that the French speak fast, for, in reality, tne French, taken in general, do not pro-
nounce their wuras faster than other people do ; but by dropping this letter, they link
two, three, or four words together, and so go quicker through a sentence than a fo-
reigner does, who gives a full sound to every e he meets with. Foreigners should pay
particular attention to this, as nothing is more difficult to get- rid of than a bad accent.
n 2
-u.-
4 PRONUNCIATION
OF COMPOUND VOWELS
ai, ao, aUf ea, eai, eau^ et, eoy eu^ oe^ ou.
Th:s sort of vowel is foraied by the association of several simple
vowels, which produce together, a sound different from that which they
produce separately.
O at
'. > sounded like k short, i. e. ay ; as.
f'oi, 1 have, pronoance zhay.
je unangeaif I ate, zhmanzhay,
5 tti-^i ^ sounded like ^ long, i. e. aye; as,
aie^ I j^avaisy I had, zhavc^e.
aient, > J'a««» I n^ay i^ave. rAacy
• / t^ aient, they may have, eel-z-aye.
. ' I j^^ mangeais, I was eating, zhmanzhaye,
eaient, ) iu nagcaient, they were swimming, ed nazhaye.
^ ao, found only in aoilt, august ; toon, oxfly ; faony fawn ; paon, peacock.
pronounced oow, ton, fan, pan, (see nasal vowels.)
^'* > final, sound like o short, or au, in laurel; as,
eau, water o.
peau, skin, ;)o.
8 a2£, 1 followed by a consonant in the same word, sounded like 6
eau, J long, or au in hautboy ; as,
eaux, waters, d.
aiifoiU, as much, ttan,
9 <?a, the e has no sound, but gives g the soft sound of ^', or zh ; as,
jean, John, sAan.
mangea, ate^ maiiz^.
10 ^'> pronounced like ei in reigrn ; or ai in ram ; as,
reine, queen rain,
peine, pain, pain.
1 1 ^0, in geo, the e has no sound, but softens that of g into zh; as,
george, ^eorge, zhorzh,
gedUer, jailer, zMleeai/.
12 w» the nearest idea which I can give of cm, is that of c, in her, agree-
ably to Walker s pronunciation of that word, viz. hur.
feu, fire, feu,
peu, little, peu.
N. B. e has no sound in the monosyllables,
e«i, eus, euJt, edmes, eCtes, eurcnt, eusse, had ; pronounce u, H, u, Hm, Ht, ur, uss.
13 o^> pronounced c; the o having no sound; and the words in which it
was found formerly being now generally spelled without it ; as,
caw, heart, keur.
oeuvres, works, euvr,
14 on, pronounced like oo in cooky hooky look; as,
coup, blow, hoo.
bout, end, boo,
15 N. B. If one of the vowels is accented, or marked over with two dots (••),
the vowels form distinct syllables, and are pronounced separately ; as,
Jliau, scourge, flay-o.
ndireti. ingenuousness, na-ivtay.
PRONUNCIATION O
OF NASAL VOWELS.
amy an, em, en, im, in, aim, ain, ein, ofn on, um, un,
have all the same sound, thai of en in encore, or an in want, ob- 1 G
serving to g^ve the n only a half sound ; See note 5.
ambition, ambition, anbisecon
empire, empire, anpeer.
en/ant, child, _ an/an.
anglais, englisli, angUtye.
vengeance, revenge, vanzhance,
vmement, ornament, omum-an,
en has the sound of en in when, giving n only a half sound ; See note 5. 17
1, In foreign names ; as,
mentor, mentor, mentor,
2. At the end of words ; as,
examen, examination, egzamen,
hien^ well, beeyen.
entretitti, conversation, antrut^ycn.
N. B. ent has no sound at the end of the third person plural of IS
verbs ; as,
t75 eurent, they had, eel z-ur,
iUfurent, they were, eel fur.
ils aim^ent, they loved, eel-zaymayr,
have all the same sound, a sound similar to that of in in fine, 19
giving n only a half sound ; See note 5.
inmarfait, imperfect, ineparfay.
iiymi, infinite, inefini.
cou^H, consin, fiMUi;. comane,
fin, end, fine,
faim, hunger, fine,
pain, bread, pine,
sein, boson), sine.
But if 271, either in the first or last syllable of a word, is followed by a 20
vowel, it is sounded like the english preposition iri; as,
inaccessible, inaccessible, inaksessible.
inutile, useless, inutil.
fine, fine, fin.
cousine, cousin, /^mtn. coozin.
badine, playful, bad-in.
'^' I are sounded like on in wont, observing always to give n only a 21
^'*' I half sound ; See note 5.
compter, to coant, contay,
doiyon, dungeon, don-zAon.
pigeon, pigeon, peezkon.
mangeons, let us eat, man-zkon.
N. B. The English are apt to open their mouths too much in pmnouncing on, by
which means, instead of sounding it like on in wont, they sound it like an in umnt.
'Jliey should guard ag-ainst this.
um, \ have all the same sound ; but no exact idea can be given of it, 22
un, > unless it be that of un in fungus ; observing not to give n its
eun, J full sound ; See note 5.
parfum, perfume, parfun.
chacun, each, shak-un.
Ajeun, fnstinfir, azhun.
6
PRONUNCIATION
OF DIPHTHONGS.
\
23 Diphthongs are a union of several vowels, which, though they produce
^ different sounds, are pronounced at the same breath ;
•)
I
ia, sounded like ya in yard, ex.' fiacre.
«<•»
\au,
Uu,
iou,
iarUA
ient, j
ten,
ion,
oe
€ue
em
oin
oitan
ouen
oua,
out
ua, '
ve,
«»,
uin
■■■]
ve
yo
york.
yoke.
you
yon.
yan,
yen,
yon.
whey
whey.
woa,
tvoin,
wan want.
tra
wi
water,
without.
In pronouncing this u
Y shut your lips as direct-
ed in note 2.
J'
pied,
fiofe,
tmmler,
dieu,
chiourme,
priant,
paiient,
bien,
actum,
bolfie,
fouet,
moi, toif
bourgeois,
soin,
huange,
rouen,
louage,^
oui, r^oui,
nuage^
'ecuelle,
hii, fruit,
juin,
hackney-coach,
foot,
vi»l,
to meWy
god,
a galley crew,
prayingj
patient,
well,
action,
box,
whip,
I, thou,
burgess,
care,
praise, .
rouen,
hiring,
yes, rejoiced,
dtoud,
porringer,
him, fruit,
June,
feeyacr,
pee-ay,
feeol.
meeolav.
dee-vgh,
sheeoorm.
preeyan.
pawceeyan.
beeyen.
akseeyon.
bwheyt,
fwhey.
mwoa, twoa.
boorzhwoa.
suMiin.
Iwanzh,
rwan.
hcoih,
we, rayziucee,
nuaih.
aykuayl.
lui^frui, no. 4.
zkuine.
6 To remove the embarrassment which learners find in the pronunciation of ot. which
is sometimes pronounced like the diphthong oi, and sometimes like the coropouna vowel
at, iu words which are entirely similai*, 1 have through all this work spelled with ot
the words which are pronounced woay and with at, those which are pronounced ay.
It will perhaps be argued that this is contrary to the opinion of the french academy.
I respect the opinion of the french academy, as much as any man can do, when it is
consonant to reason ; but the opinion of no man, let his rank apd talents be ever so
eminent, nor of any corporation of men, however pompous their afppellation may be,
can be put in competition with reason. Now is it reasonable that two sounds so very
different should be expressed by one sign ; exposing the learner to innumerable mis-
takes, when by the mere change of a single letter, another sign can so easily be
formed, which removes every difficulty ? The following words, for instance, are given
to a foreigner to pronounce, or even to a native of France, who never heard them pro-
nounced before :
Francis, dano\$, su&doia, chino'is, bourgeois, chamois, /oi. paroisse,perfo\t, &•€.
Frangois, anglois, hoUandois, japonois, bougeois, charmois, foible, paroisse, pevfoit, efc.
The stranger is told how to pronounce the words in the first line ; he pronounces
them well ; he goes on confidently to the second line, naturally thinking that the same
letters ought to produce the same sound : what must his astonishment be, when he is
tuld that oi in the words contained in the second line is pronounced quite differently
from what it is in the words contained in the first, the first being pronounced troa,and
the second ay ; and how much greater will his surprise be still, when he finds that
even in the same word such as voyoi«, croyois, ^c. (see rule 4) ot has two diflferent
sounds, the first syllable being pronounced woa and the second ay* And have you
no means, the stranger will say, of removing this insuperable difficulty? Yes. we
have, and a very easy one too ; you have only to chans^e o into a in the words which
are to be pronounced ay, and the whole difficulty will vanish ; but the french aca>
demy do not approve of it. Oh ! never mind the french academy, the stranger will
say. Nor do the French, it seems, mind it much, for these great censors of the lan-
guage have the mortification to see that, in almost every book now printed in France,
this diphthong is spelled contrary to their arrogant and unreasonable decision. In
vain they will say that at does not express the exact sound that we wish to express ;
if it removes a great difficulty, if nothm^ better is oflTered. if it is the best reprcseuta*
tive of this sound that we can find, and is a sign which nobody can mistake, we must
be satisfied with it, till the french academy deign to favour us with a better. — (Set
Dictionnaire PhihtophiqKf, art. A.)
PRONUNCIATION
OF CONSONANTS.
General Rules,
The french language admits of two modes of pronunciation : oiie for
poetry and oratory, the other for (fonversation.
In repeating verses^ and in oratorical discourses, the Jinal consonant ^ *
of a word is generally sounded, when the word which follows it begins
with a vowels or h mute ; as,
D'unpinceau delicat, V artifice agr'eable,
Du plus afreux ol^et^fait un objet aimable.
Ds8 dons exlirieurs VtodformiU lus^e,
Mais Cesprit a toujours une nouveUe grace.
The above lines must be read in the following manner ;
• Dun paineso daylika lartifice agrayable,
Duplut'offrevL-z-obzhayfaif't-un'Oozhay't-aymable.
Day don-zextayrieur luni^onnitay lasa.
May layspri-t-a toozhoor-z-un noavayl grass.
In conversation, the ear alone being consulted, opinions greatly differ. ^^
Some are for sounding the final consonant of every word, when the word
which follows it begins with a vowel ; others, and this seems to be the
opinion of the best informed persons, maintain that the final consonant of
a word should be sounded on the initial vowel of the next, only when
the two words are so connected that the second word is necessary to
complete the sense ; such as,
Article and noun ;
tm errant,
eet hiver,
d son (ige,
les arises,
des hommes,
Adjective before the noun ;
ben outrage,
grand espace,
petit homme,
gros oiseau,
beaux habits.
Pronoun with the verb, and verb with the pronoun;
il est, he is,
est-U 1 is he ?
sont-elles 7 are they ?
nous avotis, we have,
you have some,
nave they got them ?
a child,
this winter,
at his a^e,
the artihces,
of men,
good work,
f^reat space,
ittle man,
large bird,
fine clothes,
vous en avez,
les ont-ils 7
u n-at^an,
s-t-cevayr,
d so-n&zh,
lay-z-art\fiss,
day-z-om.
bo-n-oovrazh.
gran-t-ay^ass
vti-t-om.{7)
frd-Z'Owyzo,
dz-abee.
t'U-aye.
oye-t-il 7
son-t-ell7
noO'Z-avon.
voo-z-an- avaye
lay-z on-t-eel'
Preposition with the noun, pronoun, or verb that follows it ;
snna amis, without friends,
avee elle, with her,
en allant, in going,
■chez eux, to their house,
apris avoir, after having,
Adverb before the adjective or participle ;
bien hnnnSte, very honest,
plus hfibile, more clever,
tr^-aimable, very lovely,
fort utile, very useful,
trop *gnorant, too ignorant,
N. B. There are a few other instances in which a final consonant
may be sounded on the following vowel, but they can hardly be reduced
(7) ^V'e Ronnd tbe final consonant of an adjective upon a noon, but not the final consonant of a noun
npon an adjective ; so, though
petit enfant^ is pronounced pti-t anfan.
enfant aimable could not be prononnced anfan-t-aymable^ bnt anfan nymahle.
sitn-z-amee,
atayk-elL
an-allfin,
shay-z-ugh,
apray-z-arour
beeyen-onayt
plu-z-ah-btU.
tray-z-aymable
for-t'UttlU
irO'P'inyoran.
8 PRONUNCIATION
OF CONSONANTS.
General Rules,
to rules, as it chiefly depends on the number of letters of the same sound
that follow one another. The surest way for a foreigner is to confine
himself to the general rules which apply to nine-tenths of the words the
final consonant of which is to be sounded on the following vowel. The
rest must be learned from the conversation of well informed persons.*
^^ The foregoing instances excepted, the final consonant of words, in
general, has no sound in french. See the particular rules for consonants
under their respective heads.
Ill ■ I I ■■ ■ ■ M ' ■ ■
«
* As in music, it is the diversity of sounds that produces melody ; so it is with
languages. The union of the final consonant of some words, to the initial vowel of
the word which follows them, being done to disencumber the language of too great
a number of monosyllables, and to render it more mdodious by a greater variety of
sounds ; the rule given by soine persons, that every word ending with a consonant
should be joined to the following word, when it begins with a vowel, is totally erro-
neous, and produces the very effect which this union is intended to remove. It is true,
that in reading verses, the final consonaht is generally joined to the following vowel,
to preserve the measure of the verse ; and, inpublic speeches, the consonants are
also often sounded at the end of words, to give a stronger impulsion to the air, and
to be heard at a greater distance ; but in familiar reading, ana in conversation, this
is carefully avoided by all unaffected people.
If any authority be necessary to support what I advance here, I trust that oiVabbt
d*Olivetf one of the most distinguished members of the french academy, will be sufid-
cient to convince every man of candour, since it implies the opinion of the most en-
lightened part of that bod v. This philosophical grammarian, in his treatise on french
prolsody, (a work which has been, and ever will be the admiration of the learned,)
before he speaks of the effect which certain nasal terminations have in repeating
verses, remarks, art. 3. parag, 5
Je commence par dire que cette observation ne regarde point ceux qui ^crivent en prose,
car la prose sov^re les hiatus f pourvu qu'ils tie soient, ni trop rudeSy ni trop frequents.
Us cantribuent m^me H donner au discours ttn certain air naturel, et nous voyons en ^et
que la co^persation des honnetes gens est pleine d'hiatus volontaires qui sont tcUement
autorisis par I'usage, que si Von parloit autrementy cela seroit d'un pMant, ou d'un provin-
cial. Par exempUy lorsqu^un acteur rScite ces vers de la premij^e scene dAthaliCy Je viens
c^l^brer avec vous la fameuse journ6e, &c, Pensez-vous ^tre saint ? il protwnce
comine s'U yavoit; C^16br6-r-avec vous pensez-vou-z-^tre« Mais dans la simple
conversation, I'usage veut qu*on prononoe comme s*il y avoity c616br6 avec vous — pensez-
vou dtre, &c. And art. 2, he says On le croira si Von veut ; au moins est-it certain
qiCau thi&tre ce n*est pas chose rare qu^un acteur, et surtout une actiice dont les talents somt
admir'es fasse adopter un mauvcds accent, une prononciation irr'egidiere, d'oU naissent insen-
siblement des traditions locales qui se perpitnent, si personne n^est aitentif d les combattre*
These are the words of a man, for whose opinions the french academy had the great-
est deference ; a man who, at their request, had made this subject one of his parti-
cular studies, and who had consulted upon it, as he himself declares, all the men of
taste and learning'with whom he was acquainted ; and they never were contradicted,
but by persons, who, being fond of appearing singular, affect in conversation the em-
phatic tone of the stage, without considering whether they are speaking prose or
verse, (most of the frencn plays are in verse J or by those who, looking upon singu*
larity as au accomplishment, mimic their ridiculous affectation.
Dans une nation qui est une par rapport au gouvemementy U ne pent y avoir dans sa ma-
nikre de parler qvCun usage UgilimCy celui de la cour et des gens de lettres, d. qui elle doit des
encouragements; tout autre usage qui s^en^carte dans la prononciation, dans Us termi-
naisoHSy ou de queUju^autre fagon que ce pmsse etre, ne fait ni une langue, ou un idi&me
d. party ni un dialecte de la langue nationale ; c^est un patois ahandonne d. l<t populace des
provinces, et chaque province a le sien. Girard synon. frauQ. ait, Langue, iJingage, ^c
f By hiattis is meant a broken sound.
PRONUNCIATION
9
OF CONSONANTS*
Particular Rules,
B
6 is sounded at the end of proper names ; as,
job^ joD, pronounce zkah,
Jacob, Jacob, zhakob.
At the end of common names b is found only in
plomb, lead, pron. pUm.
radoub, refitting, radoob,
C
This letter has two sounds common to both languages.
1 . That ofk as in case, pronounced kase,
2. That of « as in cease, sease.
c before a, o, u, has the sound of k,
cay ka, car, for, kar,
CO, ko, cour, yard, koor.
cUfkti, calotte, breeches, kulot. (u, see note 2.)
c before e, i, or before a, o, u, with a cedilla, this mark {f) under it;
has the sound of s ; as,
fa, sa, facade, front, fasad,
ety se, ceder, to yield, payday,
ci, si, ceci, this, seec. (t, see note 4.)
fo,so, gargon, boy, garson,
fM, su, refu, received, rsu, («, see note 2.)
c final is generally sounded, and has the sound of k ; as,
' avec, with, avayk.
public, public, pubieek. {Uf see note 2.)
except the following words, in which c final has no sound ;
broc, pore, clerc, unmare, blanc, franc, jonc, ironc, almanac, estomac, tabac.
ajug, pork, clerk, 8 ounces,white,frank, rush, trunk,almanack, stomach, tobacco
pron.oi'o, par, clayr, mar, hUm, fran^* zkon, tron, abnana, aystoma, taha,
cc, before e, i ; the first c has the sound of k, the second that of s ; as,
succis, success, suksaye.
accident J accident, akseedan.
Before a, o, u; cc liave only one sound, that ofk; as.
accabler.
1
akablay.
akonpieer.
akusay. (m, see note 2.)
pron.
to crush,
accomplirf to accomplish,
accuser, to accuse,
ch, generally pronounced sh ; as,
chirurgien, surgeon, sheeruzheyen.
architecle, architect, arsheefayct.
ch has the sound of k in the following words ;
Christ, Chretien, ehoriste, archange, archestre, chroni^ue, chronologic,
Christ, christian, chorister, archangel, orchestre, chronicle, chronology.
ukrist, krayieeyen, koreest, arTcanzIi, orkaystf, kroneek, h-onolozhee,
D
d final has no sound ; as,
froid, cold, fricoy,
chaud, hot, show,
except^t the end of a word which is pronounced at the same breath with
another word beginning with a vowel, then d has the sound of t ; as,
apprend'il'/ doeshelcarn? apran-t-eeif
quaiui il vient, when he comes, kan-t-cel vieyen.
d, or even dd, in the body of a word, is sounded :< as,
adjectif, adjective, adjecteef,
addition, addition, addeeseeon.
• c, in the adjectives blanc and franc^ followed by a noun beginning with a vowel,
has the sound of k; as. Dm blanc au noir, pronounce du blan-k-o-noir, Frtmc itourdi,
pron. fran k-aytoordee, (i, sec note i,^
10 PRONUNCIATION
OF CONSONANTS
F
j final is generally sounded ; as,
chef^ chief, sAaj/.
«er/j sinew, nayrf,
haufy ox, 6ufi/.
flPM/, egg, u^.
cxcppt in defy key, ctoy.
6011/5, oxjeo, 6i2Wi.
a>M/5, egg8, (Jg-A.
and if pronounced at one &rea^A with a word beginning with a consonanf,
chef'd'aunre. master-piece, ahaydi'ugvrei
nerf de bonify cow-skm, a rod, mtyr d bvgf.
bocufsaUj salt beef, bushsaUiy,
mtffrais^ new egg^ ughfraye.
^ / is sounded in neiff at the end of a sentence ; as,
j'en ai neufy I have got nine, zhan-ay nugf. (fu, s. rale 12. ^
un liobit nei{f, a new suit, un-abee nugf,
joined to a noun beginning with a consonant, y* has no sound ;. as,
neufUvreSy nine livres, nu^A ^rtr. (^u, see rule 12.)
dix^neuf sow, nineteen pence, dees nugh soo,
joined to a noun beginning with a vowel, /* has the sound of v; as,
^ neuficus, nine crowns, nugh-v-aykdL, (ti, see n. 2.)
vingt-ne^if hrnnmesy twenty-nine men, vyngtnugf'Vom,
G
^ g final has no sound ; as,
long, long. Urn. (ouy see rule 21.)
«'»"^' 1?'°"^' f^»» I (aw, see rule 16.)
rangy rank, rtiny J ^ * '
_^ except in long acch, long fit, longaksey,
sang et eaUy blood and water, sank- ay o.
de rang en rangy from rank to rank, drunk-an ran,
g before e, «, has the soft sound of zh, or s in pleajiurey or 2 in azure,
gey zliay, gin^ral, general, zhaynayral,
giy zhefy gigoty log of mutton, zku^ego,
g before a, o, », has the hard sound of ^ in god; as,
gfh g<h garfony boy, garson, (on, see rule 21.)
goy go, gorge, throat, gorzh.
g^h g^j gu6rxry to cure, gayreer,
- N. B. ^ form only one sounds that of ^ hard; as,
gutrir, to cure, gayreer.
guerrcy war, gayrr.
guide, guide, ghied,
^ except the following words, in which gii have each a dUtinct sound ;
aiguiUe, ai^Ulony atguisery arguery cigu'ey aigWBy ambiguey ambiguity.
needle, stmg, to whet, toargue,hemlock,sharp,ambiguous,ambigui(y.
pron, aygueeUyaygueaUonyaygueesayyarguayy seegHy aygdy anbeegHy ambeegueetay
gna, sound gnya, ]
£7i^> gnye, I observing to sounds the n as much as possible
gniy gnyiy [ through the nose ; as,
gnoy gnyoy J
campagnardy countryman, kanpagnyar.
accompagniy accompanifd, akmpagnay,
compagniey company, konpagnee, «
ignorant ignorant, eegnyoran.
PRONUNCIATION
u
OF CONSONANTS
There are two sorts of h both in french and in eng^lish ; the one aspi-
rate^ which requires an effort of the breath ; as,
tUroSf hero, hayrow,
hasardf hazard. hazar»
the other mute, which has no sound, and serves only to shew the ety
mology of the word ; as,
hotmeur^ honour, anhur, (eu, see rale 12.)
hiatoiref history, eesttcoyr,
S. B. These two sorts ofh are often embarrassing to the learner ; they are marked
in dictionaries, bat one should always bear some characteristic mark in writing. The
k mute that occurs through the subjoined exercises will be preceded by an apostrophe.
cA, pronounced sh ; as,
chat,
chose,
ph, pronounced f; as,
phrase,
philosophe,
rh, sounded r ; as,
rh^torique,
rhume,
ih, sounded t ; as,
thomas,
m^thode.
cat,
thing.
sentence,
philosopner,
rhetoric,
cold,
thomas,
method,
sha, (see c.)
shoz.
fraz.
feelasof.
raytoreeck.
rhugm, (ti, see note 2.)
tomaw,
maytod.
I
J, pronounced zh, or like 8 in pleasure, leisure, or « in azure ; as,
jttrdin, garden, zhardine. {in, sei* rub? 19.)
jour, day, zhoor.
K
k, the same sound in french as in english ; as,
kan, kan, kan. (an, see rale IG.)
Stockholm, sto<:kholm, itokobn*
I final is g^enerally sounded ; as,
ael, salt,
Jil, thread,
cheval, horse.
sayh
feeL (t, see note 4.;
skcaL
except 6arii, chenil, coutU, fusil, fenil, fits, gril, ouHl,percilj mmrcU, sodl.
barrel , kennel, ticking,gun, hayloft, son, gridiron, tool, parsley,eyebrow,drunk.
Dron. baree, shnee, kootee, fiaee^fnee, fee, gree, ootee,persee, soorsee^ ioo,
L In the pronouns il, il», gome sound the I in all instances ; others
sound it only when it is followed by a vowel ; opinions being divided, / in
t/. Us, followed by a consonant, may either be pronounced or dropt ; as,
il a, he has, eel-a,
il dit, he says, eel dee, or ee dee, (t, s. n. 4.)
ils ont, they ha?e, eel-zon, or eez-on.
Us disentf ^hey say, eel deez, or ee deet.
In conversation / is not sounded in
quelque^ some, knyk.
qiieuju^un, somebody, kaykun,
U, in general are both sounded the same as in english ; as,
allif^orie, allegory, al-laygoree,
iUustre^ illastrious, illustr, (u, see note 2.)
But U pr?ceded by i in .the middle, and at the end of words, must
c
12
PRONUNCIATION
OF CONSONANTS.
be sounded like ill in the word miUion; as,
X
also il in
pteilleur,
OouteiUe
famiUey
haiaiUej
avril,
babil,
travailf
soleilj
gentil homtne,
belter,
bottle,
family,
battle,
april,
peril,
prattling,
labour,
sun,
meylhttr.
hooteyll,
fameeU.
baiauUU
avrcelL
payreeU.
babeel.
travauiU.
soleyll,
zhanteeUom.
(and all words
lending in aiL
nobleman,
except the foUpwing words, in which one I only is sounded ; ^
argille, distille, imb^ciUe, miUe, ville, pupiUe, tranquiUe*
clay, distil, imbecile, thousand, town, pupil, quiel
liTon. arzheel, deestecl, inebayceel, meel, veel, pupeel, trankeei,
M
772, at the end of a word, and in the first syllable of words beginning
with com, has only the half sound of n. See note 5.
/aim,
hunger,
fine, (in, see rule 19.)
nom.
name,
non. (onf see rule 21.)
compliment.
compliment.
conpleeman, (jan, rule 16.)
m has no sound in
damnery
to damn,
dawnay ; and derivatives.
solemnelf
solemn.
solaneL
automne,
autumn,
dton.
but m has a full sound in
automnal,
autumnal,
dtomnaL
mnnistw.
amnesty, •
amneestee.
caUmnie,
slander.
calomnee.
hymne,
hymn.
heemn.
indemniser,
to indemnify.
inedamneesay.
indannite,
indemnification.
inedamnceiay.
agam£mnonj
agamemnon.
agamemnon.
somnambule.
sleep-walker,
somnanbul, (see note 2.)
mm, only one sound ; as,
hommCy
man.
om.
femme,
woman,
fam.
except in the first syllable
of the words beginning with imm; as.
immnrtel,
immortal.
im-mmi:aifl.
immense.
immense.
im-manss.
N
What has been said of m may be applied to w.
n, at the end of a word, or in the first syllable of words beginning
with con, has only a half sound. See note 5.
pain,
vin,
condition,
nn, only one sounded.
ann6e,
connakre, •
bread.
wine
?.
condition,
year,
to know,
H^i* 1 (in, s. rule 19.)
oondeeseeon, {on, rule 21.)
anaye,
conaytr.
except the following words, in which nn are both sounded ;
annotation, annotation, an-notasseon,
annueU annual, an-nuel ; and derivatives.
annuUi, to annul, an-niday
inn£, innate, in-nay,
innoter, to innovate, tit not'ajy ; and derivatives.
I
PRONUNCIATION 13
OF CONSONANTS.
P
p final is not sounded, even when il is followed by a vowel ; as
mi Imp, a wolf, un loo. (u. seo note 2.)
ce drop eH bon, this cloth is good, sdra aye oon»
except in cap, cap^ cap.
cep, stock of a vine, sayp,
p in trop and beaucoup, joined to a word beginning with a vowel, is
sounded; as,
trop entet^f too obstinate, tro-p-antaytay,
beoiicoup ^tudid, much studied, bokoo-p-aytudeeay,
followed by a word beginning with a consonant, p has no sound ; as
irop shtpidcy too stupid, iro stupeed, (u, see n. 2.)
beaucoup d'qf aires, much business, bokoo duffayr,
p is sounded in
baptismal, sceptique, September, septentrion, accepter, excepter.
baptismal, seeptick, septembre, north, to accept, to except,
pron. bapteesmal, saypteech, sayptanbr, sayptantreeon, a/tsayptay, cksayptay.
but p is not sounded in
oapthne, cotnpte, exempt, prompts manuscript, sept, temps,
baptism, account, exempt, quick, manuscript, seven, time,
pron. bataym, contf egzan, pron, manuscree, sayt, tan,
pp, one only sounded ;
apparence, a])pearance, aparans^i.
appartenir, to belong, apartneer,
ph, sounded y*; as,
sphere, sphere, s/ayr,
phUosophie, pnilosophy, feelosqfee.
Q
q final is found only in coq and cinq ;
q is sounded, and has the sound ofk in
coq, cock, cok.
coq ii Vdne, idle talc, coh a lawn*
but it is not sounded in
coq d'inde, turkey-cock, co dynd. (in, see rule 19.)
q in cinq substantive, is sounded k ; as,
nn cinq de pique, a five of spades, un synk dpeeck-
H cinq pour cent, at five per cent, a synk poor san.
trois et deuxfotU cinq, three and two are five, troa-z-ay dughfon synk,
in cinq, prefixed to a noun, and pronounced at the same breath with
it, q is sounded if the noun begins with a vowel ov h mute; as,
ctft^ hammes, five men, synk om. (in, s. rule 10.)
vingt'cinq 6cus, twenty-five crowns, vyngt synk aykQ.
if the noun to which cinq is prefixed, begins with a consonant, q is not
sounded ; as,
cinqgarcons, five boys, sine karson.\f . „. , -„ %
cinqyUl^, five girls. sinefeelL ](^«fi^ru\el9,)
qu has only one sound, that of k; -as»
qui, who, kee. (i,'see note 4.)
quatre. four, katr,
quaUte, qvialiiy, kaleetay,
marquis, marquis, tnarkee,
except the following words, in which qu are pronounced kto : as in
english :
aqnuttique^iquateur, quadrature, quadruple, quadrupede, quadragenaire,' quarto,
aquatic, equator, quadrature,qnadruple,quadrupea, forty years old, quarto
pron. ahcateek, aykwater, kwadratur, Kwadruple, kicadrupayd, kivadrazhaynayr, kwarto.
V
14 PRONUNCIATION
OF CONSONANTS.
R
r is sounded at the end of all words ; as,
coTy for, because, kar.
poWy for, pour,
parvenir, to arrive, parvneer.
except the words ending in er or ier^ of more than one syllable, in whicti
the r has no sound, but it gives to e the sound of ^ shorti i« e. ay ; as
aimer, to love, aytnay.
icoliei'f scholar, aykoleeav,
and in monsieur^ sir, tnoseeugh,
r is not sounded in noire, voire, quatre, joined to a noun beginning
with a consonant ; as,
notre maison, our house, jiot mayzm* {on, rule 21.)
voire cliapeau, ^^^^ ^^^t ^^^ shapo.
quatre Uvres, four livres, kat leevr.
but r is sounded when notre, voire, quaire, are joined to a noun begin-
ning with a vowel ; as,
notre ami, our friend, ^lotr-amee,
votre honneur, your honour, voti^-onhur. (eu, see rule 12.)
quaire Sous, four crowns, hatr-aykd,
and in notre p^e, our father, notr-payr, lord's prayer.
notre dame, our lady, notr-dam, virgin mary.
r is always sounded in
le ndtre, ours, Inowtr,
le vttre, yours, Icowtr,
rr, only one is sounded ; as,
arriver, to arrive, areevay,
arroser^ to water, arozay,
except in the first syllable of the words beginning with irr; as,
hrSgulur, irregular, ir-raygtdeeay.
irr^prodiabk, irreproachable, ir-rayprosfvwL
S
This letter has two sounds common, to both languages, the first hard
or aspirate, like c soft ; as,
somme, sum, sum,
the other soft or liquid; like z ; as,
rose, rose, roze*
5, at the beginning of a word, or in the body of a word, when it is pre-
ceded or followed by a consonant, is always pronounced hard or aspirate,
-as,
salut, safety, salu. (u, see note 2.)
souper, supper, soopay,
personne, nobody, payrson*
s, between two vowels in the body of a word, or at the e7id of a word,
which is to be pronounced at Ihe same breath with another word begin-
ning with a vowel, has the sound of z ; as,
raison, reason, rayson. (on, see rule 21.)
plaisir, pleasure, pUtyzeer,
trois heureh, three hourS) troa-z-hur.
mes en/ants, my children, may-z-a?t/cin. {an, rule 16.)
in other instances, sjinal has no sound ; but renders the syllable long ;
trouvas-iu'J didst thou find? troovaw tu'/ (U, see n* 2^
tes amis, thy friends, taye-z-amee,
revenus, retumed| rughvnL{&ee note 2.)
except at the end of greek and latin names which have been adopted
PRONUNCIATION
OF CONSONANTS.
in the freiich language ; as,
15
pdris, pans, the trtgauy
v^usf venus,
also in as, ace.
pawreess,
vayfotSi
tnars*
ass.
visy screw,
lis, lily,
abes, aluos,
mars, inarch,
but not in fteur de hi, flower de lace,
veess.
leess.
aloaps.
marce*
fiithr dlee.
S3 have only one sounds but always aspirate
; as.
assurer, to assure,
ressentir, to resent.
asuray. (u, see note 2.)
rsanteer
sc before e, i, have only one sound, that of*
aspirate; as.
sceptique, sceptif-k,
science, science,
saypteeck.
seeanss.
9c before a, o, n, I, r, have the sound of sk ;
as,
scandale, scandal,
skandal.
gascon, gascon,
scorbut, scurvy,
sculpteur, scuiptor,
esclave, slave,
scrupttle, scruple,
gaskon.
skorbu. (tt, see note 2.)
skulptur,
ausklav.
skrupul, (n, see note 2.
T
t has two sounds, both found in satiety, pronounced society.
t at the beginning of words has the same sound in french as in englisli,
table, ^ table, tabl.
tiimdU^, timidity, teemeedeetay.
in the body of a word t followed by i, has generally the sound of c;
patieTue, patience, pawceeanss,
action, action, akceeon.
except the following words, in which t retains its own sound ;
bastion, question, partie, matiere, iiions, 4tiez, sortions, sortlez, entier.
bastion, question, part, matter, were, were, went out, went out, entire
pron. basleeon, kaysteeon, partee, mateeayr, ayteeon, ayteeaye, sorteeon, sorteeaye, anteeay
ewtiirement, chr^tien, ehrHientS, aouHe/n, entretien, ilretient.
entirely, christian, Christendom, support, maintenance, he retains,
pron. anteeayrman, crayteeyen, krayteeantay, sooieeyen, antrughteeyen, U rughteeyen,
and the words ending in tik, and tier ; as,
amJti6,
friendship.
ameeteeay.
chAtier,
to chastise,
shawteeay.
t final is not sounded ;
as,
tout.
all. .
too.
Uest,
it IS,
eel aye.
fait.
done.
fay.
except in est, ouest,
east, west, -
ayst, west.
Ust, dot
ballast, dower.
layst, dot.
brut, correct.
rough, correct,
brut, corrayct.
unfatfUnsot,
a fop, a fool,
unfat, un'sot.
pact, exact.
pact, exact.
pact, egzact.
and when it ends a word which must be pronounced at the io/ms
breath with another word beginning with a votoel ; as,
est-eUe'! is she? aye-t-elU
tout Ufaitt quite, toot-ofay, (see gen. rule.)
but never in et, and, (conjunction) ay.
16 PRONUNCIATION
OF CONSONANTS.
t is sounded in sept, kuity substantives ; as. .
ten aej^, a seven, vn sayi. (u, see note 2.)
un hwt^ an eight, un hueet.
in sept J huit, vingt, cenU joined to a noun, t is sounded when the nomt
which follows it begins with a vowel; as,
sept enfants, seven children, sayt-a^fam
huii amis, eight friends, hueet-amee. (see gen. rule.)
if the noun begins with a consonant t has no sound ; as,
sept nacireSt seven ships, say naurveer,
cent chevaux, a hundrea horses, san shvd,
tt, only one sounded ; as,
attirer, to attract, ateeray,
frotteVf to rub, frotay.
V has the same sound in french as in english ; as,
vanitS, vanity, vaneetay,
vivacitif vivacity, veevacectny
This letter has three sounds, viz. gz, ks^ and z.
In the first syllable of a word x followed by a vowel, is sounded gz ; as,
exemple, example, egzanple.
exister, to exist, egzeestay,
followed by a consonant^ it is sounded ks ; as,
excis, excess, ayksaye.
exposer, to expose, ayksposay*
X is also sounded ks in
sex, axe, sex, axle, sayks^ nks,
fluxion, fluxion^ flukseeon. (it, see note 2.)
axiome, axiom, dJcseeom,
siyx,phcenix, stjx,phGrnix, steeks, fayneeks,
index, poUux, index, polIux, inedeJcs, polbiks.
alexandre, alexanaer, alayksandr,
X has the sound of s aspirate in
nx, dix, six, ten, sees, dees,
dix-sepi, seventeen, deessayt,
soixante, sixty, soassant,
X filial generally has no sound ; it only renders the syllable long ; as,
heaux, fine, 66.
liexix, places, leeiigh,
except when it ends a word which js pronounced at the same breath
with another word beginning with a vowel, then it is sounded i ; as,
six amis, six friends, see-z-amee. ,
beaux yeux, fine eyes, bd-z-yetigh, (general rule.)
and when it is followed by iSmej or iemement; as,
deuxUme, second, dughziem.
sixiimement, sixthly, seezeemman.
Z
z has the same sound in french as in english ; as,
zele, zeal, zayl,
z final has no sound ; but renders the syllable long.
vous avez, you have, voo-z-avaye,
vous parlez, you speak, voo parlayc,
except in chez, a{ one's house, followed by a vowel ; as,
chez dU, at her house, shay-z-eU,
PROSODY, 17
GR
PRONUNCIATION OF SYLLABLCJ.
By prosody is meant the manner of pronouncing each syllay3 fe^U-
(arly, t. e. according to what each syllable taken separately requires.
It is certain that some diversity must be observed in the pronunciation
of syllables, otherwise the language would be perfect monotony ; there
are then divers inflexions of the voice, some which raise the tone, some
which lower it, and this is what grammarians call prosodical accent,*
GENERAL RULES.
Hut if, in tliese words, the e mute were changed into a masculine ^, then the penul-
tim:i would become short ; as Her, to tie ; loiter, to praise ; niier, to shadow.
11. When a vowel ends a syllable, and is followed by another vowel, which is not
€ mute, that syllable is short ; as cr^e, created ; ftal, trusty ; cictionj action ; kiCiTf to
hatr ; dirii^, endowed ; titer, to kill.
IIL Every syllable ending with any consonant but «, .r, or z, is short ; as, site, 5ack ;
Uv, lake ; tUtly salt ; irentUil, fan ; fHim, hunger ; parfiimf perfume ; seKn, bosom ; soKn,
care ; gatf^Sn, boy ; dip, cape ; nectdr, nectar; pdt, pot ; aUrt, fate, ^c.
IV. Every syllable ending with f, x, or z, is long ; dessaes, sacks ; dea tch, salts ; dei
pott, pots ; mon/tlf, my son ; la poiar, peace ; la voix, the voice ; U ntz, the nose.
V^. Between two vowels, the last of which is mute, the letter « or x lengthens the
peuultima; as, exidse, extasy; diocise, diocese; il pe^, he weighs; betJse, foolish-
ness ; /raiicAtte, cnnduur ; rose, rose: Spouse, spouse ; ruse, cunning ; recluse, recluse;
flise, glad ; tkese, thesis ; rase, vessel.
And it then generally happens, that the antepenultima becomes short ; as Us'extHsie,
he falls into extasy ; pKS^e, weighing ; ipoiisee, married, Ifc, for the french prosody
requires that the pcnuitima be strong, if the final is mute, and that the pcnultima be
weak, if the voice rests upon the final.
VI. An « or an T sounded, preceded by a vowel, and followed by a consonant, always
renders the syllable short ; as, jUspe, jasper ; miisque, mask ; dstre, star ; burtHstpte,
burlesque ; /uti^s^e, fatal; jf(ste, track; t^tsque, risk; pUste, post; brOaqiu, abrupt;
fOste, just ; wtrhe, beard ; bUrque, bark ; bcrceau, cradle ; infirme, infirm.
But when there are two rr^ if the two together form only an indivisible sound, the
RvUable is always long ; as, arrit, arrest ; barre, bar ; bisarre, whimsical ; tonnicrre,
thunder ; Sctorre, to be hatching, 8^c,
VII. When the nasal vowels am, an, em, en, im, in, aim, ain, ein, om, on, vm,
LN, are followed by a consonant, which is neither m nor n, and which begins another
syllable, they are long ; as, ainsi, thus 4 jdmbe, leg ; jdmbon, ham ; crdtate, fear ; trem-
bier, to tremble : peindre, to paint ; joindre, to join ; tbmber, to fall ; hiimble, humble, ^e.
If m or n be doubled, it renders the syllable short to which the first of the doubled
consonant belongs ; as, Mmme, man ; jlmme^ ^oman ; ipigrHmme, epigram ; qu'il
pritme, let him take ; coiu^ne, consonant ; per^itme, person, nobody.
PARTICULAR RULES.
A
A, the first letter of the alphabet, is long ; as, un petit i, a little a; Une sail nt a ni
b, he knows neither a nor 6.
A, the preposition, is short ; as, ie suts d Parts, I am at Paris ; yicris it Rome, I write
to Rome ; as is also a in the third person singular of the verb avoir, to have ; il d tie
beaux Itorts, he has fine books ; U d Hi, he has been ; U d parU, he has spoken.
At the beginning of a word a is long, in acre, sour ; age, age ; ame, soul ; aae, ass ;
apre, harsh ; arrhes, earnest money ; as, ace, ^c.
* This mark ( ' ) is intended to show that the syllable is Umg ; this other ( *') that it
Is shtrt; and the doubtftil syllables are marked with a gntee accent thus C)'
18 ' PRONUNCIATION
OF SYLLABLES.
These instances excepted, a is short, whether it makes A syllable of itself; as in
iipoiret apostle ; or is followed by a double consonant, as in dpprendre, to learn ; or by
two consonants which are different, as in Ult^r^t altered ; Hrgument, argument.
At the end of a word a is very short in the preterite and future tenses of verbs ; as,
U airnH, he loved ; H chantH^ he sung ; U aimerd, he will love ; U chanterd, be will sing.
In the articles W, the ; mdyVny; ttLy thy ; »tf, his. In the adverbs ^Hy here ; W, there ;
dijdy already. A little more stress is laid upon the a, in substantives borrowed from
foreign languages ; as, sofdy sofa; duplicatd, duplicate, ^c.
ABE, always short; as, ardbe, arabian ; except astroUbe, astrolabe ; crabe, crab.
ABLE, short in all adjectives ; as, aimdble, amiable^; capUble, capable, fyc. long in most
substantives ; as, cable, cable ; fable, fable ; sable, sand ; and in these verbs, on vCac-
cable, I am overwhelmed ; je mensdble, I stick in the sand ; U hdble, he brags.
ABRE, always long; as, aabre, sabre; Use cahre, he rears ; also in the masculine
termination ; se cabrer, to rear; deWnr^, in tatters.
AC, always ^hort ; as site, sack ; ldc,\ake ; trictrdc, back-gammon. See III. Gen. Rul.
ACE, long, in grace, favor ; espace, space ; Idcer, to lace ; dilacer, to unlace.
These words excepted ; aceis short ; as, gldce, ice, looking-glass ; preface, preface.
ACHE, long, in Idche, coward ; tache, task ; reldche, relaxation ; j« mdche, I chew.f
As also in the masculine terminations mdcher, to chew ; reldcher, to relax, ^c«
In all other instances ache is short; as, tUche, a spot ; moustUche, whisker; vdche,
cow ; il se cdche, he conceals himself ; U arrUche, he pulls out, Sfc,
ACLE, long, in U rdcle, he scrapes ; U dSbacle, the ice is breaking ; these two wordb
excepted, ACLB,i8 doubtful; as, ord^le, oracle; mirdcle, miracle ; obstiicle, obstacle.
ACRE, long, in acre, tart ; but short in all other words ; as, didere, deacon ; Jidcre,
hackney-coach ; dcre, an acre ; sdcre du rot, the king's coronation.
ADE, always short, as, s^r^n^fde, serenade ; cascdde, cascade ; fdde, tasteless ; Uper^
tudde, he persuades ; U s'ivdde, be makes his escape.
A ORE, short in Iddre, leprous : but long in cadre, frame ; escadre, squadron ; even
when the word ends wilh e mascul. as, madri, speckled ; encadrer, to frame.
AFE, APHE, always short ; as, cardfe, decanter ; Spitdphe, epitaph ; agriffe, clasp.
AFREj AFFRE, loug, in qfrc, fright ; bdfre, gluttony ; short in all other instances ; aSj
hdiitfre, gash ; si^e, ravenous.
AFLE, long ; as, rafie, a royal pair at dice ; j'^rafle, I scratch ; and the same quantity
is preserved when e final is short ; as, rafler, to sweep away ; irafier, to scratch slightly.
AGE, lon|^ in the word age^ age ; but so short in all the rest that we dwell a little upon
the penultima; partdge, division ; ixoantdge, advantage, ^c.
AGNE, always short, except in the verb gagner, to gain ; je gagne, I gain.
AGUE, always short, bdgue, ring ; ddgue, dagger ; vdgue, wave, vague.
approaci
AiE, always long ; as, hdie, hedge ; plate, wound ; vrdie, true. See I. Gen. Rule.
AYE, short ; as, vous dyez, you may have ; vous pdyex, you pay ; vous bigdiyez, you
stammer. See II. General Rule.
The reason of this difference between aie and aye is, that aie makes only one syl-
lable, and that Y, which is equivalent to ii, dividing the word into two syllables, these
words are pronounced as if tnev were spelt ai-iez, pauiez, higai-iez, the first syllable
of which is pronounced like 6 short, (bee ai, compound vowel.)
aigne, always short : ^B,chatdigne, chestnut; je ddigne, I deign; il se bdigne, he is
bathing ; on le sdigne, they are bleeding him.
A 16 RE, always short; as, digre, tart ; tntffgre, lean ; vindigre, vinegar, ^c.
AIL. General Rule. When a word ends with I liquid, the syllable is short; as,
iventdil, fan ; gouvemdil, rudder: the a being the only vowel which is heard in the
penultima, and the i serving only to soften the sound of the following consonant.
This is also the case in the three following paragraphs.
f Formerly written Xasche, tasche, with a mute s, to show that they are long. This
is now supplied by a circumflex accent, and it should not be omitted over these words,
as the pronunciation of a word sometimes alters its meaning.
PRONUNCIATION 19
OF SYLLABLES.
AILI.E, short in meddiUe, medal; and in the following verbs ; j« detmUe, I retail;
fimdiUe^ I enamel ; je trovdUle, 1 work ; but it is lon^ in all other words ; as, je rdiUe,
I jeer ; t/ baitte, he yawns ; il braille, he brawls ; il nmdiUe, he makes poor verses.
AiLLET, AiLLiR, short ; Si3,mililleif mallet; pHiUetf pale coloured ; jdUlirf to spout;
assdUlir, to assault.
AiLLON, short in mddiUUoii, medallion ; batUiUon, battalion ; tuna ^mHiUons, we ena-
mel ; ditdilUnu^ let us detail ; tnwitilUms, let us work. These words excepted, aillon
is long ; -as, haiUon, tattered clothes ; bdiUon, gag ; nous taiUonSf we cut, Sfc,
AIM, AIN. See III. and VII. General Rules.
AIHE. This termination is found only in the verb ci(mer, to love ; which is short
RSffatmef I love ; tu dUmeSf thou loves t, fyc.
AiNE, long, in hdine, hatred ; chdlne, chain ; gdine, sheath ; je traine, I draw, and
their derivatives. These instances excepted, aine is short; as, capitUinef captain ;
font&ine, fountain ; semdine, week ; Idine, wool.
AIR, AIRE. The first is doubtful in the singular; as, fitir, the air^ cMir, flesh ;
ieldir, lightning, Sfc, The second is long ; as, une pdire, a pair ; la chdtre, the pulpit.
Ais, Aix, AisE, aisse, all loug ; BS,palais, palace ; fatdis, I had ; fStdis, 1 was ; un
franfdis, a frenchman ; pdix, peace ; foumdite, furnace ; cdisse, chest.
AIT, AiTE, both short; as, lUit, milk ; attrUit, charm ; retrUite, retreat, 4^. except U
plait, he pleases ; U nditj it springs ; il repdit, he feeds ; lefdiU, the summit.
AiTRE, alwavs long ; trdftre, traitor ; mdtire, master ; and other terminations of tho
same sound, tnough spelt differently ; as, paraltre, or patAitre, to appear, 8fC,
ALE, ALLS, always short; eigdle, cicada; scandUle^ scandal: une mallei a trunk;
une bdlU, a ball ; except hkle, sunburning ; paUy pale ; un male, a male ; un rale, a
rail ; and the derivatives of these words, tnou{{h the final syllable be masculine ; as,
kdU, parched by the sun ; rdler, to rattle ; pdlir, to grow psue ; pdieur, paleness.
AM, AN. See III. and VII. General Rules.
AME, always short ; ddme, lady ; rUme, oar, ream, ifc, except in the following words ;
dme, soul ; i^fdme, infamous ; blame, blame ; il se pame, he swoons ; un brdme, a bra-
min ; and in all the preterite tenses of verbs ; as^ nous aimdmes, we loved ; nous
ehanidmes, we sang ; nous parldmes, we spoke ; nousjoudmes, we played^ fyc.
ANB, ANNE, always short ; as, cabUne, cotiage ; orgHne, organ, ifc, except due, ass ;
erdne, skull ; les mdnes, the manes ; de la mdnae, manna ; une mdnne, a basaet.
ANT. See III. General Rule. N. B. In the word comptant there is a difference ;
when a participle, it is long ; fiB,jemesuis trompi en comptdni Vargent, I made a mis-
take in counting the money ; and it is short when used as a substantive or adverb ;
tLSfiladu comptHnt, he has ready money ; payer comptdnt, to pay in ready money.
AP, always short ; as, cHpy cape. See III. General Rule.
APE, APPE, always short ; pdpe, pope ; tritpe, trap ; grjtpe, a bunch ; onfrdppe, some-
body knocks ; except rdpe, a rasp ; and rdper, to rasp, in which it is lodg.
A PRE; cdpre, caper; dpre, tart; the only two words of this termination, are longi
AQOE, always short, except |iagii««, easter } and Jacques, James.
AR, always short $ as, cdr, for; nectttr, nectar. See III. General Rule.
ARBE. General Rule. Every syllabic which finishes witli r, and is followed by
another syllable beginning with a consonant, is short ; as, bdrbe, beard ; bdrque, bark;
6crceau, cradle ; ia/irme, infirm ; ^rdre, order, Sfc,
ARE, long ; as, barbdre, barbarous ; je prSpdref I prepare ; but when the last syllable
is not mute, are is short ; as, 4gdri, strayed ; pripUroMt, preparing ; barbdrie, barbary.
ARRE. General Rule. Whatever vowel precedes two rr, if the two together ibrm
only one sound, the syllable is long ; as, drtvt, arrest ; bdrre, bar ; tonnerre, tnunder, ifc,
A HI, ARIE, always short ; as, mdri, husband ; ptfri, wa^er ; Mdrie, Mary ; barbd*'ie,
barbary ; except, nourtdri, uproar ; tndrri, sorry ; iqudrri, squared.
AS, commonly long, as there are Tew words terminated in this manner in which the
4 is not sounded very open, whether the s be pronounced ; as in PaUds, Pallas ; ds,
ace ; or whether it be mute, as in tds, heap ; tu as, thou hast ; tu aimds, thou lovedst.
. ASE, always lon;^; as, base, basis; Pegdse, Pegasus; emphdse, emphasis; extdse,
extasy ; rdser, to shave ; jdser, to chatter. See V. General Rule.
ASPE, General Rule. An s sounded, preceded by a vowel, and followed by a con^
•onant, always renders the syllable short; tiSfmdsqtte, mask. See VI. General Rule*
20 PKONUNCIATIOX
OF SYLLABLES.
AssE, short; except in the substantives basse, base; casae, cassia; cUsse, class;
icJiasses, stilts ; passe, pass ; nasse, bow-net ; tasse, cap ; chasse^ shrine ; masse, niafss ;
in the feminine adjectives basse, low, base ; grdsse, fat ; Idsse, weary ; nnd in the fol-
lowing verbs ; il amasse, he collects ; U ei^lmsse, he inchases ; U easse, he breaks ; il
posse, he passes ; il compdsse, he measures ; with their compounds.
All these words retain their quantity, even when the termination, instead of being
mute, is masculine ; as, chassis, sash ; cdsser, to break ; passer, to pass.
Add to these the first and second persons singular, and the third person plural of
verbs, terminated in &S8€, Sisses, dssent, in the subjunctive ; aa,faimas8e, 1 might love ;
tuaimdsses, thou mightest love ; ils aimdssent, they might love.
AT, long in the substantives bat, a pack-saddle; viiit, mast; appa^, bait; degat,
havock ; and in the third person singular of the perfect of the subjunctive il aimdt, he
might love ; il chantdt, he mi^ht sing ; il parldt,ne might speak, e^c*
In all other substantives, in adjectives, and in the present oi the indicative, at is
short ; ^3,avodit, counsellor ; hlUt, splendour ; plUt, flat, a dish ; on se hUt, people fight.
ATE, always short, except in hate, hnste ; pdU, dough ; il gate, he spoils ; il nidte,
he masts; ildimdte, he dismasts; and in the second person plural of the preterite
tenses of verbs, terminated in ates; as, vous aimdtes, you loved ; vous parldtes, you spoke.
ATRE, short in qyJUtre, four ; and in lMtr€,\,o beat, with its derivatives, abttttre,\jo pull
down ; combiittre,io fight, ^c.
Tht'se in$«tances excepted, atre is always long; as, idolatref idolatrous ; tli^atre,
theatre ; opinidtre, obstinate ; empldtre, plaster, tfc,
AU, compound vowel. When this vowel forms a syllable which is followed by a
mute termination, it is long; as, duge, through ; autre, other ; dime, ell ; pdume, tennis.
It is also long when in the last syllable oi a word it is followed by a consonant ; as,
hdut, high ; chdud, hot ; chdux, lime : faux, false ; except Piitd, Paul.
But AU is doubtful when it precedes a masculine sellable ; as, dubade, serenade ;
Undace, audacity ; dutomne, autumn ; dugmenter, to increase ;. duteur, author ; and
when it is final ; H.s,joydu, jewel ; cotedu, hillock ; eoutedu, knife.
AVE, short in rUve, radish ; cUve, cellar ; on pHve, they are paving ; but oflener long;
as, entrdte, shackles ; grdve^ grave, serious.
But when v instead of being followed by e mute, is followed by a masculine sylla-
ble, the preceding syllable is short ; sls, grUvier, gravel ; aggrdver, to aggravate.
BRAVE preceding its substantive is short ; as, un brdve homme, a well-behaved
man ; but long when it comes after it ; as, vn homme brdve, a brave or courageous man.
AY RE, always long; as, hdtre, harbour; caddvre, corpse.
AX, AXE, always short ; as, Ajdx, Ajax ; thordx, thorax ; bordx, borax ; Hxe, axle ;
tdxe, tax ; paralUtxe, parallax.
E
The French distinguish three sorts of «, which express different sounds ; the differ-
ence of which is perceived in fertnet^, firmness ; lumnitetS, honesty.
The first e in each of these words, is long, the second mute, and the third short.
E mute is also called feminine ; the others are called masculine.
There is no accent over e mute, the short requires an accute accent, and the long a
grave, or a circumflex, but it is found sometimes without any of tliese signs, as ap*
pears in the first syllable of the word fermet^.
With respect to e mute, it is sufficient to know that it never be^ns a word, and
that it is seldom found in several consecutive syllables; for if it is found in some
compound words, such as revenir, to return ; redevenir, to become again ; entretenir,
to entertain ; at least this never happens at the end of a word ; thus the e which is
mute or feminine in the penultima oi the infinitive of verbs ; as, appeler, to call ; peser,
to weigh ; mener, to load ; devoir, to owe ; concevoir, to conceive, becomes masculine,
or is changed into the diphthong oi, in the tenses which end with« mute; fapptUe,!
call ; il piise, he weighs ; ii m^e, he leads ; Us doivent, they owe ; ils con^vent, Sfc,
For the same reason, thoug^h we make e mute in chapelain, chaplain ; chandelier,
candlestick ; celui-ci, this ; jatme, I love ; je chante, I sing ; we sound it in chapille,
chapel ; chandtUe, candle ; celle, that ; aimJU-je, do I love P cliante-je, do I sing ?
For such is the genius of the frcnch language, that the penultima be strong, if the
final is mute, and that the penultima be weak, if the voice rests upon the final.
• Formerly spelt with an s mute, to show that they are long ; as, bast, mast, U
aimasty vous aimasteSf &c. This is now supplied by a circumflex accent, h&t, m&tt &c,
PRONUNCIATION 21
OP SYLLABLES.
EBLR^ EBRR, £C, ECE, always short; aa,hitblefWSii\YfOTi',funtbre,moumiu\; bee,
bill; nt^cfj niece.
ECHE, lonff and very open in biche, spade ; Uche, thin slice ; gr'icche, noisy ; vedie,
fislurif^ ; peche, peach ; il empeche, lie prevents ; il d^pccJie, he dispalches ; il ^ricne, lie
preaches. Short in caUche, calash ; Jleche, arrow ; mtche, match ; crtdiCj crib ; seelie,
dry, the cuttle-fish ; br^che, breach ; on ptche, people sin.
EOLE, ECT, ECTE, DRE, EDB, EDER, all sliort ; as, aiicUt age ; resptct, respect ; insccie,
insect ; cidre, cedar ; remcdej remedy ; ctder, to yield ; posscder, to possess, S^-c.
e'e. General Jvule. The penultima vowel of all words ending with e mute, is
long ; as, pensee, thought ; armie, army ; je lie, 1 tie. See I. General Rule.
E'E'. General Rule. When a vowel ends a syllable, and is followed bv anotiier
vowel which is not e mute, that syllable is short; as, crtS, created ; /taf, liusly;
action, action ; hiCir, to hate ; tner, to kill, ifc. See II. General Rule.
EF, EFFE; the first is short ; as, cktf, chief; brtf, brief, short. The second long;
^j tr^'*ifCy graft, the rolls ; je gri^'e, I graft.
EFFLE, long, in nifle, medlar ; short in tf6fle, trefoil, club.
^ EGE, EGLE. The first long ; as, sacritige, sacrilegious ; college, college ; siege, seat,
siege. The other short ; as, rtgU, rule ; scigle, rye, S^c,
EONE, EIGNE. The first is doubtful ; as, r^ne, reign ; dudgne, duenna. The other
is short; 2iB,pcigne, comb ; entidgne, sign; quilfHgnet let him pretend.
EG BE, EG UK, short ; as, nigre, negro; inttgre, upright; btgxie, a stammerer ; coUtgue,
colleague ; il alUgue, he alleges, ^c.
EiL, EiLLE, short; as, soUUi sun; somintU^ sleep; ab'Hlle, bee; bout'tille, hoiile; the
only exceptions are, viiille, old woman ; rietUard, old man ; vieillesse, old age.
EIN, El NT. Sec III. and VII. General Rules.
EiNE, short; as, vtine, vein; p^ine, pain; the only exception is riine, queen.
EINTE, always long; as, att'einte, stroke ; /einte, feint.
EL, always short ; as, se2, salt ; crtiel, cruel, S^c, See III. General Rule.
ELE. ei.le^ long in zele, zeal; poile, frying pan; frile, frail ; pele-niele, confusedly ;
grhle, nail ; 1/ se/ele, it cracks ; la brebis bhle, the sheep bleats.
These instances excepted, ele, elle, is always snort; as, modcle, model ; fidtU,
faithful ; reb^^Uet rebellious ; mtrtdle, mortal, ^c.
EM, EN. See III. and VII. General Rules ; and sound the final consonant in ittmn
item; BithUem, Bethlehem ; anien, amen ; hpmen, hymen; examen^ examination.
EME, doubtful in crimt, cream ; short inje seme, I sow ; il shne, he sows ; and long
ij ail other words; as, bapteme, baptism; diac/^/fie, diadem ; 7»tm«, even, fyc.
ENE, long in chine, oak; cene, the lord's supper; scent, scene; gtne, rack; aUne,
awl ; rene, rein ; frene, ash-tree ; arcne, area ; pene, the bolt of a lock ; and in the pro-
per names, Athines, Athens; Diogenes, Diogenes; Mieene, Maecenas, ^c. but short in
p/ienomtne, phcenomenon; ib^e, ebon^r; etrennc, new year's gift ; qu'il jtrenne, let him
take ; qu'U vitnne, let him come ; and in all words in which the consonant is doubled.
EPE. EPRB, always long; as, guepe, wasp; crepe, crape; vepres, vespers; except
Icpre, leprosy.
EpTE, EPTRE, ECTRE, always short; as, prdcepte, precept; U accrpte, he accepts,
sceptre sceptre ; spictre, spectre.
EQUE, ECQiiE, always short ; as, grccque, greek ; bibliotheque, library ; obtcaues, fu-
neral, ^c, except iteque, bishop : arclieveque, archbishop.
ER is short in Jupiter, Jupiter; fAicifer, Lucifer ; ^f/t^, aether ; clier, dear ; cancer,
cancer ; pater, the lord's prayer; magister, a country schoolmsster ; fratir, a surgeon s
npprentice; and Inn^ in fir, iron; er\fer, heW; Ufer,]\g\\i^ mcr, sea; amir, bitter;
kiver, winter; bat it is doubtful in the infinitive of verbs when the r is sounded with
the following vowel, as is always the case in repeating verses.
ERBE, ERCB, ERSx, ERCHE, ERCLE, RBDE, ERDRE, all short. See the General Rulr
nnder abbe.
ERP, BRT, doubtful : as, conchi, concert; ouvirt, open; disirtj desert, wilderness;
il perd, he loses ; le v^rd, green, Sfc,
22 PRONUNCIATION
OF SYLLABLES.
ERE, doubtful ; as, chimire, chimera ; p^e, father ; nncire^ sincere ; U espere, he
hopeS; S^c, but long in the third person plural of the perfect tense of verbs ; aSj t^
dtitrentf they went ; Us parlirent, they spoke ; ils chanttrent, they sang, S^c^
EROE, ERGUE, ERLE, SEME, ERNE, ERPE, all short. See ARBE, General Rule.
ERR, always long when agreeably to the general rule, the two rr form only one In-
divisible sound; as in gwrre, war; tonnarre, thunder; nous verrons, we shall see;
short when the two rr are pronounced separately ; as, irreur, error; t^rreur, terror, 8fc,
BRTE, ERTRE, ERVE, all short. See ARBE. General Rule.
LssE, long in confisse^ confession ; presse, press ; comprisse, compress ; ejcprisse, ex-
press ; cesse, ceasing; on s'empresse, they are eager; ilproftsse, he professes.
These instances excepted, esse is short ; as, tendrtsse, tenderness ; paresse, laziness ;
carcsse^ caress ; jeuiiZsse, youth, Sfc,
esque, este, estre. See VI. General Rule.
ET, long in arreit, a decree ; behet, a simpleton ; /orc#, forest; eenit, broom; prit,
teady ;appret, preparation; acquitf acquisition; intertt, interest; tlist, he is.*
These instances excepted, et is short; as, cad&tf younger, junior; bidtt, pony; tt
and; siyet, subject; brocJiH, pike, ^c
ete, long in bete, beast ;/^^£, feast; arbdtctet a cross-bow; boete, box; tempete,
tempest; qucte, quest; conquite, conquest; enqiietej inquest; requite^ request, peti*
tion ; arrtte, fish-bone ; crete, crest, a coxcomb ; titet head ; in all other instances,
ete is short ; and the t is doubled ; as, toibt&tte, shelf, memorandum-book ; houtttte,
crook ; unless the etymology forbids doubling it, as, prophtte, prophet ; potte, poet.
Honn&te is short when placed before a noun ; as, un hmrn^te fiomme, an honest man ;
it is long when placed after ; as, un homme honncte^ a civil man.
Vous Stes, the second person plural of the present tense of itre, is either long or
short, as the poet chooses.
ETRE, long in etref a being, to be; salpetref saltpetre; ancetre, ancestor ; /m^e,
window; pritre, priest; champitre, rural; itctrCf beech; gvictres, spatterdashes.
In all other instances etre is shorty and t is doubled, unless the etymology pre-
vents it; as, dicmOttre, diameter; UpenHret he penetrates ; Uttrej letter; mUttre, to put.
' Eu, compound vowel, short in the singular, feu, fire ; bl&u, blue ; j^ game, sport ;
Vfftt, vow; nevhif nephew, Sfc.
EVE, long in ^eve, truce ; la greve, the sea-shore ; t{ rcve, he dreams ; and the pe-
nnltima of the verb rtver, remains long in all its tenses ; as, revery to dream ; je revait
1 dreamt; but eve is doubtful in/ev€, bean; br^vej brief, short ; ilacheve, he finishes;
1/ crkvCf it bursts ; t7 se Uve, he rises ; and the peuultima of these verbs is mute, if it
be followed by a masculine syllable ; as, achever, to finish ; il se levait, he was rising.
EUF, short ; as, oeu/, widower ; neuf, new ; un <guf, an egg ; un baeufy an ox.
N. B. The /is pronounced in all these words, in the singular, but not in the plural,
except in teufSf widowers.
EUIL, short ; as, 8e\iU, threshold ; fuuthM, arm-chair, ^TC. See III. General Rule.
EULE, long in m^iUe, grinding stone, mill'Stone. This excepted, eule is short; as,
sivUi single, alone ; gueuU, the name given to the mouth of beasts and fishes.
EUNE, long in jeune, fasting; and short in jetlne, young.
EUR, EURE. The first is short in the singular ; od^r, odour ; p^r, fear ; mtyt-ur, ot
age; and long in the plural odeurs, odours: but the second is doubtful, t. e.
If EURE ends a word pronounced at the same breath with another word, it is short;
as, la nurture partie^ the major part; une heure entUrej a whole hour. If ther'*' is no
word after it, to be pronounced at the same breath with it, it is long; as, cetteJUleest
mf^airej that girl is of age ; f attends depuis une keure, 1 have been waiting for an hour.
£VRE, doubtful; livre, lip; Misre, goat; liHrei hare; orfhwe^ gold or silver-smith.
EUX, EUSK, long; dxMXj two; prSciiuXj pridcuse, precious; crhiser, to dig, 8fc,
EX, always short ; as, exempk, example ; extirper, to extirpate ; s^xe, sex, SfC,
PRONUNCIATION 23
OF SYLLABLES.
I
An observation which may have already been made, but which wUl appear more obvious by
reading the rules on the three remaining vowels, is, that the number of dtort sylidbles is
much greater than of long ; therefore, in order to abbreviate this treatise, tlu>se terminations
will be omitted which are short without exception.
IDRE, long in hldre, written hydre, for the sake of the etymology, hydra; cidre, cider.
IE, diphthong, doubtful; as, miel, honey ; flel, gall ; fier, proud ; amltii, friendship;
carrUre, quarry; poussiire, dust; mien, mine; tlen, thine; dieu, god.
IE, dissyllable, long; as, vie, life ; saisie, seizure ; ilpne, he begs. See I. Gen. Rule.
lEN, when a dissyllable, the two syllables are short ; as, Jten, tie ; Pari^en, Pari-
sian ; when a diphthong, the syllable is doubtful ; as, U mien, mine ; rim, nothing, ^c.
lOE, doubtful; tlge, stalk; prodlge, prodigy; ItH^e, litigation ; veitlge, footstep; je
fiCchUgf, I bind myself: U s'ti\ffllge,m afflicts himself.
But lOE is short in the tenses of these verbs which do not end with e mute, as
s*obttger, to bind one's self; qffKgS, afflicted.
ILE, long in lie, island ; hutle, oil ; s/yle, stile ; tuUe, tile ; presqittUf peninsula.
IM, IN. See 111. and VII. General Rules.
IME, long in abime, abyss ; dime, tythe ; and in the first person plural of the prete-
rite tense of verbs ; as, noustHmes, we saw; nous rSpondimes, we answered.
ION, short ; as, action, action ; passion, passion. Sbe II. General Rule.
IRE, doubtful, empire, empire ; icrire, to write ; il souplre, he si^hs ; long in the
third person plural ot the periect tense of verbs ; ils puntrent, they punished ; iufirent,
short before a masculine termination; as, soupitrer, to sigh; dSArer, to wish, 8fc.
ISR, long ; as, remise, coach-house ; surprise, surprise ; yipuxse, I exhaust ; ils disent,
they say ; qu'ib tisent, let them read.
ISSE, always short ; as, saucXsse, sausage ; rigtisse, liquorice ; except in the perfect
of the subjunctive; as,jeftsse, I might do ; Us puntssent, they might punish, 8fc.
IT. lon^ only in the third person singular of the perfect of the subjunctive; as, U
dlt, ne might say; ilfit, he might do ; ilpunit, he might punish, 8fe,*
ITE, long in benlte, blessed ; gite, the seat of a hare ; vite, quick ; and in the second
person of the perfect of verbs; as, vousfites, you did ; vous vites, yoo saw, 8fc.
ITRE, long in ipitre, epistle ; huttre, oyster ; regxtre, register; but if regfistre is spelt
with s, the V is snort.
lYE, lon^ in the adjective feminine, formed from the masculine in if; as, tafdive,
late; eapnve, captive ;jutve, Jewess, ^c.
IV Ri, long in vivres, victuals ; short in vivre, to live i im Utre, a book, 8^c,
O
O, always short when it begins a word ; as, }kcaeion, occasion ; Meur, odour, 8fe.
except OS, bone ; oser, to dare ; osier, osier ; oter, to take awav ; otage, hostage ; as
likewise in liote, host, landlord ; though we say Mtel, hotel, and KiteUerie, an inn.
OBE, long in globe, globe ; and Uhe, lobe ; in every other instance ore is short; as,
rVfre, robe, gown ; if adrdbe, he robs.
ode, long in the verb roder, to ramble ; je rdde, I ramble ; short in all other instances ;
as, mMe, mode, fashion; antipMe, antipodes; piriMe, period, S^e,
OGE, always short; as, iUge, praise; horUge, clock; on difige, they derogate.
oi, diphthong, doubtful at the end of a word ; as, mai, me ; ro\, king ; /oi, faith ; em-
pUi, employment; short at the beginning; as, mMsson, harvest; miwtu, half.
OIE, long ; as, jdie, joy ; tme, silk ; qtCU voie, let him see, Sfc.
OIENT, termination of the third person plural of the imperfect of verbs, is long ; as,
Us atbient, they had; ils chantoient, they san^, 9^e. whilst the third person singular of
the same tense spelt oiT, is short; as, tl atHkt, he had ; il chantMt, he sang, 8fe,
oiN. See HI. and VII. General Rules.
oiRj oiRE, the first is doubtful ; as, espbir, hope ; devdir, duty, 8fc, the second long;
as, bbire, to drink ; gtoire, glory ; mSmaire, memory, 8fc,
* Formerly yvrititD fiat, dist, pvnist, with a mute s, now supplied by a circumflex.
24 PRONUNCIATIOH
OF SYLLABLES.
ois, always long:; whether it be a diphthong, as in fdis, time ; htturgcois, burgfess ,
Danbis, D.tue ; Suidbis^^ Swede, 8fc, or whether it be ust^d instead of thn coDipound
vowel Ai, Asj'^tliiSf vrfdtdis, I was; un Francois, or vn Fran^dis, a Frenchman, 8fc,
oiSE, oissE, oiTRE, oiVRH, all long ; Si8, framiwise, raspberry ; paroisse, parish ; cloi-
tre, cloister ; pdirre, pepper, ^c.
oiT, short ; as, U b^it, he drinks ; except U crbit, he grows ; and when it is used in-
stead of the compouod vowel ai; as, ilparbit, or ilparditf it appears.
OLE, always short ; as, ob)Me, obole ; id6le, idol ; bouss^le, sea compass ; except drole,
facetious ; pole, pole ; geole, jail ; mole, mole, pier ; role, a list, the part of an a( tor ;
contrele, control ; eiybUr, to wheedle, to decoy ; enrbler, to enlist, and the tenses de-
rived from these verbs ; U contrble, he controls ; Us enrblent, they enlist, S^'c,
OM, ON. See 111. and VII. General Rules.
OME, ONE, long; as, atomef atom ; axibme, axiom ; phantbfne, phantom ; trbne, throne,
8^c. except R)ime, Rome ; and the words in which the consonant is doubled, which
fullow the general rule ; as^ s6mme, sum ; p6mme, apple ; consbmte, consonant.
ONS, always long ; as, nous ainibns, we love ; fbnds, land, funds ; maubns, houses';
pbntSf bridges, fyc. See I\^ General Rule.
OR, always short; as, caU)ir, beaver; but^irf bittern, a blockhead ; ene^, yet, still ;
4/f'6rt, effort; but when or is followed by «, it is long ; as, hirs, out ; ators, then; U
corps, the body ; les tresbrs, the treasures. See IV. General Rule.
ORB, long; as, cmrbre, aurora; je deplore, I lament ; but observe thnt the penultima
of the verbs which have only one r, and which is long in the present of the indicative ;
as, je dicbre, I decorate; U s'ivapbre, it evaporates ; becomes short if the termination
is masculine; as, dhorer, to decorate; ivaph^i, evaporated, and that it remains long
in tenses in which the r is doubled ; as, il s'^vapbrraxt, it would evaporate, 8(C.
OS, osE, long; as, bs, bone; prbpos, discourse; d. prbpos, timely; dose, dose; chose,
thing; il bse, he dares. See iV. and V. General Rules.
ossE, long ; as, grbsse, big ; fbsae, pit ; t7 emlosse, he endorses ; even when the final
is masculine ; as, grbsseur, bigness ; grbssesse, pregnancy ; fbssi. ditch.
OT, long in imjibt, tax; tbt, soon; dSjHitf deposit; entrepot, store-house;$tf/)pdf, a sub-
servient agent ; rbt, roast meat ; itr^cbt, provost, sheriff".*
OTE, long in iidte, host, landlord ; cote, coast, rib; maltbte, exaction of taxes; jbte^ I
take away ; likewise when the final is masculine ; as, cbti, side ; ote, taken away.-f
OTRE. There arc only three words of this termination, viz. ayiHre, apostle ; noire,
our, ours ; voire, your, vours.
As to the first it is always long; but the two others are doubtful ; not that their
measure is arbitrary, for it depends upon the place which they keep in the sentence.
Notre and Votre are short, when like an article thev are prefixed to a substantive,
i. e. when used for our, your; and long when they themselves are preceded by an
article, and used as pronouns, i. 6. wlien used for ourj, yours ; so we &Ay,je8uis vMre
serciteur, I am your servant ; et moi le vbtre, I am yours. Cest-Ui vl&tre opinion, mats
la nbtre est que, Sfc. that is ;our opinion, but ours is that, Sfc. Les nbtres sont excellents,
mais lesrotres ne valent rien, ours are excellent, but yours are good for nothing.
If the final be mute, as in this sentence, je suis le tbtre, after which my ear expects
nothing more, then the voice wants a sup^rt, and not finding it in the final re, it takes
it in the penultima vo; but in this other, je suis vMre setxiteur, where after votre I ne-
cessarily expect a substantive, between which and votre there can be no intermission,
this substantive is destined to support my voice, and 1 pass quickly over votre.
Perhaps there is not in the french prosody a principle more extensive than this. A
doubtful syllable which is made short in the body of the sentence, is made long if it
comes at the end.
Sometimes even in conversation as well as in oratory, a long syllable becomes short,
by the transposition of the word ; for we say, un homme honncte, a civil man ; un
kotnme brave, a brave or courageous man; but we say, un konntte komme, an honest
man ; un brUce homme, a well-behaved man ; these instances have already been men-
tioned, (See K) but can so important rules be recalled too often ?
* Formerly spelt with an s mute, impost, rost, suppost, to show that the syllable is
lon^, this is now supplied by a circumflex.
t Formerly spelt hoste, coste, and when a syllable was to be pronounced shorty
the consonant was doubled ; as, kotte, dorser; cotte, petticoat, 8fc,
PRONUNCIATION 23
OF SYLLABLES.
ocoRE, oue, long; as, poudre, powder; mondre, to griod ; riaoiidre, to resolve, ire.
boiie, dirt; jouBi cbeek ; U hite, he praises, ^c. bat when ov is followed by a roascii-
line, instead of a feminine terminativ)n, it is short ; as, potidrS, powdered ; motUUf
ground ; roiU^ broken on the wlieel ; Iom, praised, Sfc,
ooiLLE, long in rouUUf rust; U dirouilU^ he gets off the rust; U emhroiuttef he em-
broils ; U ddlfrouiUef he unravels; but ouil is short when it is followed by a masculine
syllable; as, bro&iUonj bad paper or writing; brotiiUSy daubed ; rotiUUf rusty, ifc.
OULE, long in moiUe, mould, muscle; la foide, the crowd; il foule, he presses, he
tramples ; Uroide, he rolls ; U s'icroule, it falls down ; U se soi'de, he gets drunk.
ouiii!:, OURRE, the first is doubtful ; as, bravokre, bravery ; the second is long ; as, de
ia bourret cow hair; qu'dcoivrre, let him run; but if ou, instead of being followed by a
mute, is followed by a masculine syllable, then ou is short, notwithstanding the gene-
ral rule under arre; as, cofirrter, messenger; boiirrade, thrust, S^c. as likewise in the
futore and in the conditional tenses of verbs spelt with rr, in which the two rr are sound-
ed separately; as, je motirrai, I shall die; je cohrrai, I shall run ; j€ moUrraia, &c.
ODSE, lung; as, ipovae, bride; qu*eUe coxae, let her sew. See V. General Rule.
onssR, long in je poioH, I pnsh ; short in all other instances ; as, je totaae, I cough;
coii«m, cushion ; jnVasm, young chick, ifc,
OUT, long in aoiii, august ; covd, cost ; gout, ivAie ; mout, must, new wine.
OUTE, long in abaoute, absolution ; joute, tilt ; croiite, crust ; voute, vault; il coiite, it
costs ; il broiite, it gcazes ; jegoilte, 1 taste ; Va^oiUe, I add ; but ou is generally short,
when the syllable which follows it is masculine ; as, €fjotiter, to add ; coiUS, cost, fyc,
OUTRE, long in poiitre, beam ; and in couire, coulter, ploughshare ; short in all other
instances ; as, loiiire, otter ; oUtre, en oUtre, besides, ffe.
V
UCHE, long ; as, buehe, a log of wood ; riiche, hive ; en d^buche, they dislodge, 8fc,
bat u is short, if the final is masculine ; as, biicher, pile ; d^bUchd, dislodged, S^c.
VET, diphthong, found only in the word iciUUe, porringer, is short.
UK, dissyllable, always long ; as, vue, sight ; tortive, tortoise, 8fc* See I. Gen. Rule.
UOB, dcflbtful when the final is mute; as, deluge, deluge; re/kge, refuge; short,
when the final is masculine ; as, jiiger, to judge ; re/iigier, to take refuge, §c.
ui, diphthong, short before a masculine syllable ; as, biiisson, bush ; ctiisine, kitchen ;
rttisseoM, rivulet, Sfc.
UIE, long ; as, plme, rain ; trute, sow ; il s'ennuxe, he grows tired. See I. Gen. Rule
OLE, long in the verb brider, to bum ; je bride, I bum ; tu brides, thou burnest, 8fc.
UM, UN. See 111. and VII. General Rules.
UMES, long ; as, notes fumes, we were ; nous pumes, we could; nous refumes, we re
ceived ; nous apergumes, we perceived, fyc,
URE, always long ; as, augure, omen ; verdure, grass , parjure, perjurer, penury ; on
assure, they assure ; Hsfftrent, they were; but u is short if the final is masculine ; as,
augilrer, to conjecture ; parjUrer, to perjure; assM, assured.
USE, alwavs long ; as, muse, muse ; excuse, excuse ; ruse, canning ; see V. General
Rale , we also say, rus^, cunning ; but in the other words in whicn the final is mas-
culine, u is short ; as exctkser, to excuse ; rejtlsi, refused, ifc.
OCE, ussE, the first of these two terminations is confined to nouns, ^ind always short;
as, ptiee, flea; asttltee, craft, i^c, the second is confined to verbs, and is always long;
as, Jtf fusse, I were ; je pusse, I mi^ht ; ils fussent, they might be ; except PrUsse,
Prussia; and Rtisse, a Russian ; substantives in which ussR is short.
UT, short in all substantives; as, le bht, the end; un d^bilt, a beginning; except in
/til, a cask ; loi m^ut, a gun carriage ; short in the third person of the perfect tense ot
the indicative of verbs; as, ilfiit, he was ; il v^cUt, he lived ; long in the same person
and tense in the subjunctive ; as, ilfut, he might be ; il ticiU, he might live, 8;c,
UTB, UTEs, short in all substantives ; 6rKfe, 'brute, rough, ^c. except^u/e, flute ; al-
ways long in verbs : vous fuies, you were ; vous lutes, you read : vous refutes, you
received ; roiis apergutes, you perceived j 4rc.
It is not perhaps unnecessary to inform such readers as might be discouraged by the
multiplicity, or by the prolixity of these rules, that it is not requisite, in order to speak
freach with propriety, that they should be observed with a scrupulous nicety, which
few persons, if any, do. but he certainly speaks best who deviates the least from them
26
PRONUNCIATION
OV SYLLABLES.
HOMONYBJOUS, OR EQUIVOCAL WORDS,
THE MEANING OF WHICH IS DETERMINED BY THE ACCENT.
Aeret tart.
J line f awl.
BdiUer, to gape.
Bat, pack-saddle.
BdteUur, mountebank.
Bedut4, beauty.
Bete, beast.
Boite, box.
Bond, rebound.
Chair, flesh.
Chasse, shrinr.
eiair, clear.
Ccrps, body.
Cote, rib.
Cote, coast.
Cuxre, to boil or roast.
Faxte, summit.
Fite, feast.
Faxx, burthen.
Lefoie, the liver.
Unefoxs, once.
Farit, forest.
Je goute, I taste.
Grave, grave.
Hale, scorching of the Bun.
Hbte, host, landlord. —
Jeune, fast.
Tmcs, noose.
Udme, the soul.
Li'ga, legacy.
Lis, lily.
Mditre, ni^ter.
Male, male.
Masse, stock.
Mat, mast. ■
Mdtin, mastiff.
Mots, month.
Miir, ripe,
II n'tsty it is not*
II naxt, it springs.
Vdte, paste.
Paume, palm.
Pecluur, fisherman.
Picker, to fish.
Picker, peach-tree.
Pine, bolt.
Rot, roast meat.
Sds, sieve.
Seine, scene.
La Seine, the communion
Siir, sure, sure, certain.
Tdcke, task.
Tocher, to endeavour.
Te^^; head.
Vers, verse.
Virs, towards.
Virre, glass.
)
}
Acre, acre.
Halline, breath.
BUiller, to give.
ii 6cre, he beats.
Bdtelter, waterman.
Btittd, booted.
Btl^^e, beet.
11 b&Ue, he goes laote.
BUn, good.
CA^, dear.
Ckdsse, hunting.
C£^. clerk,
f Qh^f hunting horn.
I Cbr, a corn.
1 CMfe, petticoat.
Ctttr, leather.
Fo^fte, done.
jPa)(^ done, fact,
Lajfiii, faith.
Vnfoutt, a rod, a whi<>.
Fore*, gimblet.
Une goiUte, a drop.
Je grdve, 1 engrave.
ii<yi^, market.
Hme, scuttle.
Jetme, young.
LUc, lake.
LUme, blade.
La'(d, u^ly.
Lait, milK.
m, bed.
Mtttre, to put.
^/(^/^j mail, trunk.
Mdsse, mass, mace
iWtf, ray.
Mdtin, morning.
Ma^, me.
MtLr, wall.
iV^f, clean.
Prf**«, paw.
Plhnme, apple.
PeckeuT, smner.
Picker, to sin.
PiclU, sin.
/V)fne, punishment.
R»^ belch.
iS2t, her.
Saine, wholesome.
La, SetnCf the Seine.
Siir, sour.
T<ycA«, stain.
Tdcher, to stain.
'i tte, teat.
Ver, worm.
Fcrd, green.
{
}
( 27 ,
INTRODUCTION
An introduction
A LA
to the
LANGUE FRANfATSE
language freneh, **•
PREMIERE PARTIE.
Firtt part.
La lanoub PRAN9AI8E est compos^e des monies lettres ou
3%« language freneh^* is composed of the same letters or
caract^res que la langue anglaise^% except^ le W; mais la
characters as the english, except the vr ; but the
nonciatioii de ces lettres, n* est pas toujours la mAme dans
tn
the same
en francais:
freneh ;
J. K,
thecj hah,
X. Y,
eehSf eegrayc,
pro-
pro-
ces
these
tn
I,
V,
vajf,
L,
I,
M.
m,
z.
zeyd.
nuneiation of these '^ is not always
deux langues; elles se prononcent
two or in both languages; they are pronounced
A, B, C, D, E, F, G. H,
ah, bay, tag, day, ay, f, *1iay, ath,
N, O, P. Q. R, S, T. U.
«> 0, pay,, t, ayr, s, tay, f,
La LANGUE FRAN9AiS£^, ainsi que la langue anglaise^, est aussi
as well as is also
compos^e de nbuf sortes de mots qu' on^ appelle
composed of nine sorts of words which people call, or are called^
commun^ment les partieg etoraison; ces mots sont,
commonly the parts of speech ; these words are,
Le NOM, I'ARTICLE,
the noun, ^^ article,
le PRONOM. le VERBE,
the pronoun, the verb,
la PREPOSITION, la CONJpNCTION,
the preposition, the conjunction.
rADJECTIF,
the adjective,
TADVERBE,
the adverb.
riNTERJECTION.
the interjection.
* The figaies at the top of the words indicate the rule to which the different sorts of
words that compose the language are subject. The learner wiU do well to refer to these
rules until they are famiUar to him. They wiU be found at page 3i, and in the following
pages*
N, B, The english words are here placed Uterally under the freneh. It will require
Teij little knowledge Qf the english language to arrange them in the grammatical order
whscb they require. The person who is not capable of doing that, must study his own
language, oefore be attempts to leani French* t See note 9, page 1.
28 INTRODUCTION
CHAP. I.
DU NOM.
0/ the noun,
Tjut mot qui sert h exprimer 1** id^e d'* une substance, soit
Eiej-y word which serves to eapress the idea of a tubstance, either
rcelle, comme, homme, femmey cheved,' maison, soleiU lune ; ou id^ale,
real, as, man, woman, horse, house, sun, moon; or ideal,
cumme, dieu, del, homieur, vice, veriu, s' appelle NOM.
^'t godf heaven, honour, vice, virtue, it called a noun.
De ces mots appel^s NOMS, (quelques uns) ne conviennent qu'*
Of these words called nouns, wme — f belong to only
a une seule personne, ou k une seule cliose; comme, Jean^Jacques
to a single person, or to a single thing; as, John, james, '
Voltaire, Shakespeare, Londres, Paris, France^ Angleterre, la Seine,
Voltaire, shakespeare, london, parts, france, england, the seine,
les Alpes,8;c et ces noms s'* appellent Tioin^ propres,
the alps, ^*c. and these nouns are called names proper,^*
D'* autres conviennent k touts les fetres de la m^me espece ;
Some others belong to all — f beings of the tame kind;
comme, homme, femme, enfant, cheval, vache, oiseau, maison, ville,
as, man, woman, child, horse, cow, bird, houtCy city^
campagne, arbre,8^c. et ceux-ci s* appellent noms communs,
country, tree, S^c. and these are called names comwon,**
Dans cette derniere classe (on comprend) les noms com«
In thit last class (we*^ include or are included^ J the nouns com^
pos^s d* id^es abstraites"; comme, dieu, del, dme, vice, vertu^
pounded of ideas abstract: at, god, heaven, soul, vice, virtue^
amour, desir, honneur, plaisir, et autres semblables.
love, desire, honour, pleasure, and such like,
II faut consid^rer dans les? noms, 1e genre, et le 7iombre.
It is necessary to consider in ^-f nouns the gender, and the number,
II n*y a en fran^ais que deux genres; le masculin, et le f^minin
There - are in french only two genders ; the masculine, and the femintne.
Par MASCULIN (on veut** dire) le genre mdU^ ; comme, homme.
By masculine (toe mean or is meant^) the gender male ; as, man,
coa, chevcU, taureau, chien^ chat, bt'lier, houc, cerf, 8fc,
cock, horse, bull, dog, he cat, ram, he goat, stag, ^'c.
Par F^MiNiN (on veut^ dire) le genre femette^ ; coxnmc, femme.
By feminine (we mean or is meant^) the gender female; as, woman,
poule, jument, vache, chienne, chatle, brebis, chSvre, biche, S;c.
hen, mare, cow, bitch, she cat, ewe, she goat, hind, 8^c.
• When the monosyllables le, de, ne, se,je, me, te, la, que, are followed by a vowel or
A h mute, the vowel, e, a, is left out, and an apostrophe, this mark ('), put in its plac«*
t T*ie words marV.ed under with a dash, this mark (— }, are not expressed in english.
A LA LAMGUG FRAN(!A1SE* 1?0
DU NOM.
SjQS noms des autres 6tres vivants'* dont le soxe n' ent
The names of the other beings living (of which) the sex ** is
pascoiinu, (ainsi que) des 6tres inanimct^ q\i* (on*« appelle)
not known, (as well as) of the beings inanimatf which (peopU call or are called^)
com muniment choses, et qui sont de (ce que)
commonly things, and which are of (that which or what*'*)
les Anfflais appellent le genre neutre, appartiennent en francais
the engiuh call gender neuter,^* beUmg in french
& I* uit ou d /' autre de ces deux genres.
to the one or to the other of the§e tioo genders,
(II y a) en franqais comme en anglais, deux nombres; le sinoulier ,
There are in french as in english, ttvo numbers ; the singular,
quand on ne parle que d' un ^tre; comme, un' homme, une
when we — speak only of one being; as, a man, a
femme, une' ntaUon; le plurirr, quand on parte de plusieurs ^tres;
woman, a house; plural,* we*^ of several beings;
comme, des> hommes, des> femmes^ des' maisons.
ai, some men, some women, some houses,
Remarquez que le nombre plurier^ se forme en iran9ais comme en
Remark that is formed in as in
anglais, en ajoutant a au singulier; une' maison, des' maisons.
by adding s to the a house, some houses.
Except^ premi^reroent ; les noms qui (se terminent) en s ou en
Except, first ; the nouns which (terminate or end) in 8 or
X dont le plurier ne difltre point du singulier; ainsi on^ dit :
X of which — differs not from the so tee say ;
monJiU, mes Jils: un pois, des poh; une noix, des noix, &c.
my son, my sons; a pea, some peas; a nut, some nuts, &'c.
Secondement ; les noms dont le singiilier (se termine; en u, qui
Secondly ; the of which ends in u, which
demandent un x (au lieu) d' une s pour signe du plurier ; comme,
require an x instead of an b for the sign of the as,
un couteau, des couteaux ; le' jeu, les' jeu\ ; lieu^ lieux, Sfc,
a knife, some knivet the game, the games ; place, places, ^e.
r§\
Troisiemcfment ; les noms dont le singulier (se termiiie) en at.
Thirdly; cf which ends in al,
ail, qui changent /, ou il, en ux pour le plurier ; comme, 77ia\, mawx
ail, which change \, or i\, inio ux for as, ivil, evils,
cheva\, cht'vaux; gkneral, generaux; travaW, travaux, Sfc.
hu'se, horses; general, generah; work, works, 8fc,
* This word yon will n^enerally see in other grammars spelled pluriel; but as it iii
prononnred pbtrier, the same as singulier, I have thonght it proper to spcU it as it i^
pronounced, that it might be more easily remembered.
30 INTRODUCTION
CHAP ir.
PE L' ARTICLE.
Of the article.
Com me le m^me nom peut exprimer des* id^es difTi^renies, on'*'
As the tame noun may express N. B. ideas differentt^^ we
a adopts des" signes pour designer chacune de ces iddes.
have adopted N. B. signs to denote each of these ideas.
Ces signes se nomment en grammaire ARTICLE ; mais comme ils
These are called in grammar but as they
varient avec nos id^es, les' grammairiens ne s'accordent pas sur le
vary with our •— grammarians — agree not on
nombre, ni sur le nom qu' on doit donner k chaque signe en particulier.
nor narne whidi we ought to give to each sign in particular.
Cet accord n*est nullement n^cessaire, i] suffit d' en** savoir Tusage.
This agreement ^ is (by no means Jnecessary^ U suffices to of them know the use.
rOn verra) dans ce traits que j' ai augment^ le nombre des
(Jtwillbeseen*7)in this treatise that I have increased of the
signes appel^s article, parceque cela m'*' a paru ii^cessaire
called because that to me has appeared necessary
pour diminuer celui** des regies ; ainsi, j* appelle article des° mots
to diminish that of the rules ; soj I call — N. B. words
que (les uns) appellent pronom, que d'autres appelleut adjectif ;
which some call . pronounsy which others adjectives;
et je les** appelle ainsi, parceque ces mots sont touts destines au
and I them call so, because these are all destined to the
m^rae usage, et que les m^mes regies sont communes h touts.
tame use, and that rules common
(Afin qu') on*' pAt retenir ces signes plus aiscSment;
That people might retain these more easily;
je leur" ai donn^ des^ noms analogues h la
/ to them have given — N. B. names analogous to the
fonction qu' ils font dans la phrase; ainsi, j' appelle
office which they perform in the sentence; so, 1 call
LE, LA, LES ; DU, de LA, DES ; AU, & LA, AUX, article
THE ; of or from the ; to or at the,
defini^^^ parcequ' on** (se sert) de ces signes pour designer que
definite^ because we use — • these signs to denote that
le nom qui les** suit, est employ^ dans un sens dtfinP^y
noun which them follows ^ is used in a sensB definite;
comme, Apportez le* paint i^^' viande, les* habits,
aSf bring the oready the meat, the clotJies,
J* appelle DU, de LA, DES, article pariiiifi* parceque ces signes
I call SOME, partitive, because these
s'emploient h designer une portion de la substance, dont oa
are used to denote a portion of the stib^anee, ("tf which J w^
A LA LANGUE FRANfAISE. 31
DE L'aRTICLE.
parle; comme, Donnez'inoi du* pain, de la* viande, des* habits.
speak; as, give me some tyread, ioms meat, some clothes,
J' appelleUN, UNE, et touts les autres nonibres article numeral,
I call (a, an, one,) and all the other numbers numeral^^
lorsque ces sig^es s* emploient k nombrer les objets dont on
when these are tised to number objects of which we
parle ; com me, un* pain ; une* armee,
speak; as, a, or one loaf; an army or one army,
y appelle CE, CETTE, CES, article dSmonstralifi*
THIS, that; this, that; these, those, demonstrative^
parceque c* est au moyen de ces sig^es qu* on*« indique
because it is by the means of these that we point out
le lieu oh. est V objet dont on parle; comme,
the place where is the object of which we speak, or spoken of; as,
CE* pain, CETTE* viande, ces* habits,
this or that b^ead^ this or that meat, these or those clothes.
S appellcMON, MA, MES; TON, TA, TES; SON, SA, SES;
my; thy; his, or her, <w its;
NOTRE, NOS ; VOTRE, VOS ; LEUR. LEURS, article possessifi*
our; your; their; possessive, .
parceque ces signes s* emploient k designer la possession de V objet
because these are used to denote possession of
dont on parle ; comme, moxN* pai7i, ta* viande, ses* habits.
of which as, my bread, thy meat, his or her clothes,*
* Some win perhaps be surprised to find under the head article, words which hare
so long been consecrated to the class of pronouns. Though they certainly partake uf the
nature of pronouns, by denoting the persons, they in reality are articles, used for the
same purposes, in similar instances, and subject to the same rules as those words gene-
rally Imown by the name of article. If it be objected, that when I say My book^ the word
My is a pronoun, since it is the same as if I said, the book of Me. I answer, that as you
cannot change the nature of these words without substituting an article in their place,
they are as much articles as pronouns ; and if they have no afiinity at all to the syntax of
pronouns ^especially in french^ and their affinity to the syntax of articles is so great,
that the rules which are appUcaDle to one, are applicable to all ; why should not words,
which have so great an analogy to each other, be set in one point of view, rather than
send the learner from chapter to chapter for what he may, and ought to find in the same
page 1
** The genuine PRONQUai,'' says Harris, " always stands by itself, assuming the power
of a noon, and supplying its place j the genuine article never stands by itself ^vlI appears
at all times associated to something else, requiring a noun for its support, as much as
attributives or adjectives."— /Zermw, page 73.
Also Vabb^ d'Olivet : j'ai dit, en premier lieu que Tarticle est un adjectif; et si jo
n'avois pas craint d'entasser trop de cKoses a la fois, j'aurois volontiers ajoute que cet
adjectif est tiz6 de la classe des pronoms. Quand il pr^cdde un subst^tif on le nomme
ARTICIR ; La pMOt nouvelle sejoue demain ; et quand il precede ou suit un verbe, Je la
verrai, Voyes-lti, on 1' appelle pronom ; mais d ailleurs n'est-ce pas une chose qui con-
rient a la plupart des pronoms adjecttjs d'etre mis avant le NOM a I'exclusion de /'article
et avec la m6me proprUt^, comme quand je dis, ce papier, cette plume ; mon frere, votre
sxur, &c. — Kssais de Grammaire chap. 9.
e32
INTRODUCTION
CHAP. III.
DE UARTICLE, ET DU NOM.
Of the and of the
RiOLES G^ Nig RALES.
Rules general.^*
l.Nousavons*vutqu*(ilya)enfran9ais We have* teenf - (there are) - -
DEUX GENRES, Ic* mcLscuUn ct W fbminin ; two—, and ;
qu' (il y a) deux nombres4 le* singulier that( ) ,% —
et Ie> plurier } et npus avons vu§ que V and . — ; . — — — ^ the
article est un sij^ne qu* on*' met avant un> - is a sign which toe put before -
NOM, pour designer Tid^e qu' on*« veut expri- -, to denote the idea - we wish to
merparcenom; (2i present) (sou venez-vous) express by that -; now remember
que Ce* signe appel^ article, doit tOUJOUrs that this - called - must always
^tre du^ m^me genre et du meme nom- be (of the) samt — -
a* - - which follows it ; example,
singular, plural,
— -. — . — and — .
the father, the mother, the children,
of the — , of the — , of the — .
to th£ — , to the — , to the — .
a or one — , a or one — .
(this, tliat, •'t) (this, that -,) (these,
»ny — » 'ny — » w»y — . [those -,)
thy — , thy — , thy — .
(his, her-,) (his, her-,) (his, her-,)^
BRE que le^ nom qui le** suit ; exemple,
SINGULIER.
MASCULIN. FBMININ.
LE perCj
DU pere,
AU pere,
UN pere,
CE pere,
MON pcre,
TON pere,
SON pere,
NOTRE pere,
voTRE pire,
LEUR pcre,
DU pain J
PLURIER.
MASC. et Fl^MIN.
LEs enfants,
DEs enfanU,
Aux en funis.
LA mere,
de LA mire,
d LA wiere,
UNE mere,
CETTE 7werc,cEs enfanis,
MA mere, mes enfanU,
TA mere, tes enfanis,
SA mere, ses enfanis,
NOTRE mere, nos enfanis.
our
our-
our
your — , your ^, your — .
VOTRE mire, vos enfanis,
LEUR mere, leurs enfanis, thetr — , their — , their — .
dcLA viande, des Aa62Y*, «,;„« fc^gad, ,om« wMt, s(me clothes,
2. Nous (venons devoir) ^ que Tarticle We (have just seen) that —
doit toujours fttre du* mj^me genre, et must always be (- — ) — — , -
du^ m£me nombre que le* nom qui le** suit; (—) — « ^hick follows it ;
* The english words which express the meaning of the french are placed in the margin.
The words that have been frequently repeated, or which are the same in both languages,
are left out, and a dash, this mark ( — ), put in their places, that the learner may have au
opportunity to exercise his recollection.
t Page 28. t Page 29. § Page 30.
II I have frequently been aslced if, having only one word to express both His and her, we
do not often commit mistakes in the use of that word. No, we never do ; because this sign
always refers to a noun mentioned before, the gender of which we know ; So, when I say«
Monfrere a perdu son couteau, My brothe^ has bst his knife ; I know by Son that it is the
knife belonging to my brother, ma sociir a perdu son couteau, My sister has lost her knife ;
I know by this Son that it is the knife belonging to my sister. But suppose a gentleman and
a lady sat at table, and both let tlieir knives fall ; and a person said to a servant, Ramttsset
son couteau, meaning the knife of the lady, which knife would the servant pick up ? Indeed
he would not know, but a Frenchman would not express himself thus ; He would sAv :
Ramassei le couteau de monsieur. Pick up the gentleman's knife : or, Ramassez U couteau de
madame. Pick up the lady*s knife, by which all ambiguity would be avoided.
1 Rulel.
A LA LANGUE FKAN^AISE. 33
DE l' ARTICLE ET DU NOM.
cependant, comme la» langue fran9aise>* however m
demailde une^ certaine M^LODIE dans requires a certain mehdy m
Ia» liaison desf mots, et que la* rencontre - union (of the) -, - that - meeting
de DEUX VOYELLES dans de*^ petits mots of two vowelt - tomf mall words
tels que T' article, produit un son d^s- tuehas , produces a sound
agr^ble h V oreille ; lorsque le^ nom qui — to the ear ; when
suit r ARTICLE est SINGULIER, et qu' il follows " is -^t - that it
commence par une^ voyelle, ou par une" begins with a — , o>* with a
H muette, on*' emploie
L au lieu de h'E,
deV
CET
HON
TON
SON
99
99
>t
>*
DU,
AU,
CE ;
ma;
ta;
sa;
la;
c^eLA;
a la;
the;
ofifrom the;
to, at THE ;
this or THAT ;
my;
thy;
his, her, its ;
- mute, we** use
— instead of-^^ — ;
sans considSrer le oenre du nom qui without considering — (of the)
le«* suit ; exemple.
MASCULIN.
> « _»
L age, h
del/ dge,deL*
d L* dffe,d l'
get age,
MON dge^
ton dge,
BON dge^
FiUININ
idee, h* heure.
idee, deh* heure.
idSe, a i/ heure.
cettb idee, cette heure.
BiON idee, mon heure.*
TON idee, ton heure.
SON idie, son heure.
3. L' article se repete en fran^ais avant
touts les noms, suivant le genre et le
Dombre de chaque nom, quoique ces noms
soient dans la m^me phrase, et que 1'
article ne soit pas r^p^t^.en anglais; ex.
IjE pire, la mere, et les enfants sont id,
Je vou^ apporte du pain, de la
mande, de l' argent, et des habits.
II a invitS mon frire, ma soeur,
et ME8 cousins.*
follows tt** ; example,
the age, the idea, the hour,
of the — , of the — , of the — .
to the », to the — , to the — .
thisoithat^, this, that—, this, that —
my — , my — , my — s
thy —, thjf —, thy -~.
his or /wr— , his, her — , his, fcr- —
» — is repeated - — before
all - — (agreeably to) end -
- of each — •, though these -
are in — same sentence, -
— is M^ repeated in — ; ex.
- — , - — , and - — " are here.
J you** biHng some bread, wme
meat, sonu money, — some clothes.
He has -— my brother, my sister,
and my cousins.*
* Observe that two of the signs called article cannot be used before the same noun ; so
we say le brcu, the arm ; la main, Uio hand, LA dame, the lady, UNE dame, a lady : MAdame.
my lady, madam, Mrs. ; des (2ame<, «ome ladies ; M¥.sdames, ladies ; une demoiselle, a yoimg
lady ; des demoiselles, some young ladies ; M^emoiselUs, ladies ; but we do not say, lk
mon bras ; la ma main ; la madtune ; unb madame ; des mesdames ; la tfiademoiselle ;
one mademoiselle ; des mesdemoiselles ; because each of these signs fixing the proper
meaning of the noun, renders another sign superfluous.
2V. B. From tliis rule must be excepted the words monsieur and messieurs, which
though they are compounded of the noun siEUR, and of the article mon, Mes, will in some
instances admit of tne other articles ; for we say : le monsieur, the gentleman ; UN nuni'
flieur, a gentleman ; CE monsieur, this gentleman, &c. les messieurs, tlie gentlemen ; ces
m«nieurs, these gentlemen ; nos mcisieurs, our gentlemen. These few singulartties will
be learnt by custom.
34
INTRODUCTION
DE i/aRTICLB £T DU NOV.
REOLES PARTICULliRES.
Rules particular,^*
Cos ou tcn^^fait usage de I* article.
lnMtan€u(in which) Vfg** make use qf the article.
4. Uarticle ^tant un si^e destin^ h -— r being a iign intended t9
annoncer Tid^e du nom qui le** suit, ce denote 'idsa (of the)" foUowei^, .
signe serait superflu avant les noms qui, - fwmid be) superfluous which
n* appartenant qu* k un seul 6tre, pr6- belonging only te one being, pre-
sentent d'eux - monies une id^e Bxe^"; sent of themselves a -^ fixed;
c'est pour cette raison que les noms de it is for this reason that - names of
personnes et de viUes s'emploient, en persons -of towns are used, in
fran^ais comme en anglais, sana article; french as in english, without - ;
ainsi, nous disons ; m, we say ;
Tai vu Voltaire^ Paris, Londres. I have seen — , — , London.
Je parte de Voltaire, de Paris, de Land. J speak of — , — , — .
Je prkfere Locke h Volt. Paris h Lond. I vrefer — ro — , — to — .
5. Cette r^gle qui devrait 8*^tendre h Thurvletohickouglutoexundto
touts les noms dont I'id^ ne peut changer, a/i - — (of which) - - cannot change
n'est pas g^n^rale en fran^ais, comme elle m not general — ,asii
Test en anglais, puisque les noms de is "^, since - names of
pays demandeni Particle d^6ni» le, countries require le,
LA, les ; DU, de la, DES ; AU, d la, !»» les ; du, de la, des ; au, a la,
Aux, de m^me que les noms communs*^, •^*» *^* *«*»* « - ««"*« comnum,
ainsi, (quol qu*) on disc sans article ; w> though wt^ soy without — ,
J^ai vu Paris, Londres ; I have seen Paris, London ;
il faut dire avec Tarticle, «"« mvji say with - — -,
J*ai vu LE Portugal, la France, I have seen the — , Hie — ,
h'Espagne, h*Angteterre. the Spain, the England.
Je parte du Portugal, de la France, Iepeakofthe'-^,ofthe'^,
de h^Espagne, de i.* Angleterre. of the — •, of the — .
Je prSJdre i^Angleterre au Portugal, I prefer the -^ to the '^,
LA France d iIEspagne. the — to the — .
6. Mais les noms'< de pays perdent But countries lose
I'article, quand ils viennent apr&s les — , when they come after -
verbes qui d^signent demeurer, alter^ verbs - denott dwelUng, going,
venir^ lorsqae ces verbes sont accompagn^s coming, wSien •> -*• ar< attended
de la proposition en ou de ; car on dit: 6y - - en w de ; for we** say :
Je viens de France, n* Italic. 1 eomefiom — ,from Italy.
Je vais en HoUande, en Angleterre. 1 (go or am going) to — , to — •
J^ai demeurS en Espagne, en Portugal. • have lived in Spain, in — .
Et cette r^gle m^me a encore des And this rule even has still some
exceptions qu' on verra dans la demi&re '-^whidt we shall see in the last
partie, et que je n* ai pas voulu ., — have not (been willing)
rapporter ici, de peur d'embarrasser les to mention -, for fear - emoarrasting -
commenqants.v (II n* y a que) I'usage qui beginners.^ (his only) - custom widek
puisse rendre ces variations famili^res . can render these -^ — .
A LA LANGUB FRAN^AISE. S5
DB l'aRTICLB ST DU KOM.
7. Touts les noms communs^ emp\oj6s^ AU • name* e&mtnon}^ used
dans un senM genirat^ oa Us n'ont point inaurue'(intDhieh)th&yhaietuft
d'article en anglais; comme, bread is any -^ in englUh ; at, ^tLt^AO u
good; ou dans un sens pariiculier^ oh good; or ina-parttcu/ar CmwA^M)
* lis ont Tariicle the ; comine, the bread - hav€ — tHF. ; as, the bread
VITHICH I EAT IS GOOD, dcmandent V which I eat » good, re^ttirtftAa
article d^finiw le, la, lbs; du, de la, — rf«/ffttte le, la, les ; du, de la,
DEs; AU, d LA, AUX ; ex* des ; axi, k la, aux ; ex.
Sens g^n^raU*' ; T aime le paiuj la . _; / lUte bread,
viande^ lbs (pqmmes de ierre.) ,^^^ (appUsefthe earth, i. e.
Sens particulier^« ; T aime le pain^ potatoes.) - — ; - — tJie-^,
LA viande, les (pommes de terre) que the — , the — , which
vou» m*^*avez donnes. you me*^ have given.
Sens g^n^ral ; Je parle du pain^ de la — ; I speak of^, of
viande^ des (pommes de terre.) — , o/— .
Sens particulier ; Je parle du pain, de — ; — of the ^, of
LA viande f des (pommes de terre) que the -^t of the — which
nous avons achetks, we have bought.
Sens g6n€ral; Je prefere le fruit au — ; - prefer fruit to
pain, h LA viande, aux {pommes de terre.) —, to — , to—.
Sens particul. J e prefere i."^ fruit que — ; — the
fai a sovper, au pain, 2i la viande, et I have at — , to the — , to the — , —
AUX (pommes de terre) quefavais a diner, to the — which I had at dinner.
9. Si on veut ne designer qu' une' por- If we wish to denote only a por-
tion de la substance dont on** parle, il tionof — (of which )we*^ speak, we
faut employer avant le nom, un des sigiies must use before — , one (of the) sigm
partitifs^ DU, de la, des, exprim^s"* partitive du, de la, des, expressed
en anglais par some ; mais il est bon d' — ^ some ; but it is proper to
observer que le signe some s'omet tr^* observe that • -r some is left out very
sou vent, et que les signes du, de la, often, du, de la,
DES, doivent toujours s'exprimer. des, must always be expressed.
II parait que ce signe est le in^me que It appears that this — is- same -
celui** de Tarticle ddfini** op the, r^gi that*^of- ov the goLtmed
par le mot portion SOUS-entendu, et que by - word portion underuood, - which
nous avons ^t^ obliges d'admettre faute »« - been obliged to admit (for want)
d'un autre signe pour designer eette id^e ; of another — to denote this idea ^
ainsi, quand je dis ; eo, when I say :
n m^'a donne du paifi^ de la viande^ He m$** hat given some -, eome-^t
DBS (pommes de terre ;) same — ;
c' est comme si je disais ; it it at if ^ said ;
// m^ a donne une portion dv pain. He m^ hat - a portion of ^,
de LA viande, des (pommes de terre.) cf — , of—.
8.- Cette regie a deux exceptions. Ihit rule hat ttpoe*cepiums.
La premiere est que les signes partitifs" - first is that — partitive
du, tie LA, DBS, etant les monies du, de la, dea, being - saw
que ceux de Tarticle d^fini^ of the; at those of the — definitive or the
d2
3f6 INTRODUCTION
DE L*ARTICLE ET DU NOM.
quand un nom employ^ dans un sens when a noun uted in a ^
partitif^ est r^gi par un autre nom, il ne — is governed by another — , ice
faiit pas employer du, de la, DES, qui tnmt not use du, de la, des, which
rendraient Tid^e particuliere et ddsigne- (toould make) - idea - - (would
raient of the; il faut employer seulement denote^ of the ; we mmt use only
DE avant le nom ; ainsi, 11 faut dire; de before--^; to, we.mutt say ; .
II m^^a donne un morcemi de pain^ He m^ has given a piece of —,
une livre de viande; Non, un morceau du <^poundof—; not, a piece (of the)
pain^ une livre de la viande, — , — of the — .
J*ai une grande quantite de (pommes I have a great quantity of -^ ;
de terre :) Non, des pommes de terre. not, (of the) '^,
N. B. On doit comprendre dans cette We^ must include in this
r^gle les mots suivants** qui prennent de rule - words following which take de
avant le nom qui les** suit, quand ce nom before follows them, when - -
BEAUCOUP ;
TANf
autant; <
plus;
MOINS ;
TROp;
est employ^ dans un sens partitif^
ASSEZ \ ex. assez de pain,
{heaucoup de viande.
{beaucoup de gens,
{tant D*argent.
tant de pommes de terre,
{autant de pain,
[autant de gem,
plus DE viande,
moins D*argcnt,
Urop DE peine,
\trop D* en f ants,
PEU ; peu DE pain,
GU^RE ; guere p^ habits,
PAS, {pas D*argent,
point; (poijit D'amis,
JAMAIS ; jamais de repos,
10. La seconde exception est que si lenom
employ^ dans un sens partitif^^ est ae-
compagn^ d'un adjectif, et que cet adjectif
pr^c^de le nom, au lieu des stgnes du, de
LA, DES, avant le nom, on met de avant
t adjectif, sans considerer le genre ou le
nombre du nom qui l^ suit, et ce de avaiit
Tadjectif, d^signe la m^me id^e que les
signes du, de la, des, avant le nom ; ex.
roici DE bon pain^ D*exceltente viande,
de jeunes (pommes de terre,)
Mais si le nom priicede Tadjectif,* il
faut revenir, aux signes du, de la, des,
eton** doit dire;
Void Du» pain frais,^ de la* viande
excellente,^^ des» (pommes de terre) rSties,
is used in partitive ;
Enough ; ex, enough of bread.
Much,
Many J
So much,
So many ;
As much.
As many ;
More ;
Less ;
Too much,
Too many ;
Little, few;
) mttcA - meat ;
'many - people,
}so much • money ;
so many - potatoes,
}as much - bread ;
i
y.
I as many - people,
more • meat,
less - money.
\too mv^h - trouble
'too many - children
little .
Little, few ; few - clothes.
No. not; i«of money;
Knot •friends.
Never ; never • rest,
—- second -— is that if - noun
used in a sense partitive is
attended by an adjective, and that this •
precedes - — , instead (of the) — du, d€
la, des, before - — , we^ u«e de before
- — , without centering - -^ or •
— (of the) - which — if,** -this de -
- — , denotes - same idea as -
— du, de la, des, — - — ; — .
(Here is) some good — , some ,
some young potatoes.
But if ,'— precedes - — , we
must return to the — du, de la, des,
and we** must say ;
(Here is) new^ - —
excellent, roasted
• See niles 16 and 17.
A LA LANGUE FRAN^AISR. 37
DE PLUSIEUR8 N0M8 ENSEMBLE.
11. Quelquefois plusieurs nouiS (se Sometimes uveral —
rencontrent dans la m^me phrase, ay ant meet in " game sentence, having
une esp^ce de rapport ensemble ; com me, a kind of reference together; as,
quand je dis ; Le livre de pierre ; ces mots when I say ; The — of Feter ; these -
i^ PIERRE ajout^ k iivre, servent, outre V of Peter added to -, serve, besides ^
id6e de livre, h donner celle de possession, idea of^, to give that of possession,'
Les Aiiglais ont plusieurs manieres de The English have several ways of
placer ces noms en rapport. placing these nouns in reference,
Quelquefois ils les»* placent dans Y Sometimes they t*m»* place in the
ordre que les id^S consider^es S^part^- order that - - considered separately
ment se^ pr<$sentent ^ T esprit ; comme, themselves present to - mind ; as.
The BOOK of PETER ; The pen of the mas- ; 5
TER ; The crown of the king. .
Quelquefois ils renversent 1' ordre des ^'•reveru^'^ofthe
mots, et placent le nom du possesseur wcrds, name of the possessor
avant celui^ de la chose poss^dee ; before that of - thing possessed ;
comme, peter'« book ; the master'* at, ; - -^
PEN 5 the KINQ*S CROWN. — ,*
D*autres fois enfin, ils donnent k (I'un) At other times in short, - give to .
de ces noms la propri^t6 d'un adjectif; et - - nouns - property of an adjective, -
le^ placent avant la chose qu'il df^signe ; «* thing vshith it denotes ;
The street-door; london-porter ; a - — — ; — — ; -
GOLiy-WATCH; SILK-STOCKINGS. ; ,
Les Fran9ais au contraire n' ont qu' The Fren^ on the contrary have 0Hi,y
une manidre de placer ensemble ces oneway of placing together -
noms; fls placent invariablement le pre-' nowns; They ^ invariably - first,
tnier, le nom qui est le svjet du'' discovrs, . . which is - subject (of the J discourse.
et ces deux noms s'unissent ensemble •- two- are united «
par le moyen des signes de, du, de la, by • tneans (of the) signs -, -, - -,
DES, suivant que le nom est ou 'propre on ., according as-- is either proper ot
commun, dt^fini ou partitif; ainsi, dans common, definite or partitive; so, in
cet* exemple; peter'« book: le sujet du^ this-; --; thesulyect(ofthe)f
discours ^tant a book, et (non pas) peter, discourse being - ., and not -
on doit commencer la phrase par Uvre, wg** must begin - sentence by ^—^
et dire : Le livre^ Demande, le livre de . say : The ., Query, . - o/
qui ? R^ponse, de Pierre, Dans cet autre ; Ufhom? Ans, of Peter, In - other;
The master'* pen; le svjet du'' discours ; ^^(ofthej--
i^tant a pen ; on doit commencer la phrase being a-, we must begin - —
par PEN, et on doit dire; La plume, D. by ',~wennuisay; the pen, Q,
.a plume de qui ? R. du tnattre. - - ofwhsml A, of the master,
Et dans ces autres phrases : The street- — arter sentences : Ihe —
/)00R ; LONDON-BEER ; a GOLD-WATCH ^ —i--'^ ;-.-«.*-.;,
38 INTRODUCTION
DB PLUSIEURS NOMS ENSEMBLE.
silk-stockings; le sujet du^ discoiirs '^..(ofthe)^
f^tant DOOR, BEER, WATCH, STOCKINGS, 6«n^ ■—,—,—, —,
ces iDoU doivent se placer les premiers, these - mu*t be placed - first,
et on doit dire : we must say •
La* porte db la> rue, - door of- street,
De ]a" biere^ PS Londrea. Some beer of London.
Une* montre n'or. Des" ha$ de 9oie. . wateh of gold, - stockings of silk,
12. (II y a) des* CaS oa T* on ne pour- (There are) -instances (in which)
rait pas changer ainsi I'ordre des mots en could not change so - - (of the) - in
anglais, sans chftnger aussi Tidf^e qu' on englisk, without • also - - which w^
veut exprimer; par exemple, si, au lieu wish to express; for — , i/, instead
de dire; a WINE-QLASS ; a WATBB'POT ; of saying; : ;
on disait, a glass of wine; a pot of we saidy -- of - ; • - of
water; on^ exprimerait une id6e (tout- —; we should express an -
k-fait) difT^rente*' ; cependant ces noms quite different ; yet these nouns
demandent cet ordre en fran^ais, mais require this order in french, but
au lieu de les** unir par les signes de, du, instead of them uniting by --de, da,
de LA, DBS, on les^ unit par la pr6- de la, des, we them^ unite by - pre-
position A. Ceci arrive quand on position a. This Jiappens when we^
veut designer Vusage, et non la possession wish to denote - use,
de la chose dont on parle ; ex. - - • (of which) we speak ; ex,
Un verre A vin. Un pot A eau. A g^ M /<w »»«<• - ?otfitfw water.
Une CuiUer A the, De«* armes A feu, - spoon fit for tea.- arms fit to fire with
Un$ac A poudre, Un movUn A ventf A bag fit for pounder, A mill to be
Itumed by the %Dind,f
»* When ON comes after the conjunctions et, 81, ou, or any word ending in ov or on, or
between que and a verb beginning with con or com, the letter L' is generally placed before
ON, to soften the sound of these words which othem-ise would be disagreeable ; so we say ;
C'est un pays ou L'on vit a bou marck£ ; it is a country where people live cheap : On apprend
t)lus facilement les choses que L'on comprendf que celUs que L'on ne comprend pas ; people learn
more easily the things which they understand, than those which they do not understand:
fu on vitf ^c. qu'an comprend, &(o, would be harsh to the ear. But if these words were follow-
ed by LE, LA, LES, L' must not bo added to qn, as it would then cause the same discordance
which it is intended to remove ; so we say ; Si on ^ "savait. Not, Hi l'on te savait ; if people
knew it. On estimerait davantage la seietice, si on !a coimaissait. Not, si l'on la connaissait ;
people would esteem learning more, if they were acquainted with it.
JV. B, Some authors make frequent, use of this l' without any necessity.
t This rule is not without some excAptiona ; for we say ; un pet de chamhre ; a chamber-
pot. Une fille DE chambre ; a chamber-maid. Un bonnet DE nuil ; a night-cap. Un mou-
c/tot'r DE poc/i« ; a pocket-handkerchief. Un cheval DE carrosM, a coach-horse, &c. These
few exceptions will be learnt by reading, and in conversation.
N, B. Many of tliese compound names are expressed by a single word in french ; aa
Coach-man, Cocher ; Foot-man, Laquais ; Fisher-man, Picheur ; Fisli-market, Poissoiuierie ;
Fish-bone, ilrete; Water-fall, Cajcaiitf ; Counting-house, Compioir; Coach-house, i?emu«,-
Arm-chair, Fauteuil, &;c. These expressions are all found in the dictionaries, and will be
learnt by reading.
A LA LANGUE FRANfAISE. 39
CHAP. IV.
DES ADJECTIFS.
Quelquefbis on*« veut designer les Sometimes w*« with to denote
qualites des personnes, ou des choses dont qualitiet{pfthe)-oT{'-)things{of which)
on^ parle ; commc quand je dis : we** tpeak ; at when I tay :
Un} BON marif Une^ belle ^^TTime, A good hutband, A fine woman,
De^^ .lOLIS enfants^ Des fruits nt'RS;^ Some pretty children, Fruitt ripe ;
les mots boUt belle, jolis, fnUrs, qui ser- iheword^ good, fine, pretty, ripe,—
vent ^ designer la qualite des substances tervetodenate'quality(ofthe)^^
dont je parle, s'appelient ADJBCTIPS. (ofwhu^) - tpeek^ are called — .
13. L*adjectif doit 6tre du mImz -• mutt he ("of the) tame
GENRE et du MiME NOMBRE que le nom gender and (—)' number at
qu* il qualifie. which it qualifies.
Le f^inin d' tm adjectif se forme en - feminine ef an -it formed by
ajoutant e must au masculin ; ex. adding e mute to the • ; ex,
Voild un JOLi gar^'on ; il est Men (That it) a pretty hmf; he it well
HABILLE. dretted.
Voila une JOLie^lle; die est tres^bien C") • pretty gvtl; the - very foell
HABILLie. dressed.
Except d les adjectifs qiii (se terminent) Except - - that end
en e muet, qui sont les m^mes pour *** ^ mute, which are the sarne for
(le« deux) genres ; ex. both - ; ex.
Un JEUNE homme AIMABLE.'* - young man omieAle.
Une^ JEUNE femme aimable.^" • • woman -^^
Excepted aussi les adjectifs qui (se ter- - alto • - that end
minent) en a?, lesquels changent ip en se m x, which change x into 9m
pour le ft^minin ; ex. /•r -; ex.
Mon frere est paresbeuj?. My brother it Uay,
Ma sceur est parE8SEU«c. My sitter - lazy
Le plurier des adjectifs se forme de - plural (of the) - is formed tn
la m^me mani^re que celui des noms, en - tame manner at that (of the) -, by
ajoutant « ou j? au singulier ; ex. adding sim* z fto the) — ; ex.
Une JOhi'RjUle. D^^ JOIAZS JiUss. A pretty girL Some".
Un beau chapeau. De beaux chapeaux. A fine hat. Some fine hatt.
14. Quand un adjectif qualifie plusieurs When an • qualifiet teveral
noms du m^me genre, il doit 6tre dii '(ofthe)tame''itnutttbe(''-)
M iME genre que ces noms, et plurier ; ex. •— - « thote — , — ; ex*
Mon pere et mon frere sont occvvis. My father - - brother are imtpr
Ma mere et ma sceur sont occupies. My mc^er - - tkter - -.
15. Si un adjectif qualifie plusieurs If • - quoHfieS teieml
noms de genres differents,^^ V adjectif - of ^ different, - -
doit fetre masculin'* et plurier ; ex. must be masculine - - ; ex
Mon pere et vtd mere sont occupis. - - and .
40
INTRODUCTION
DBS ADJECTIFS.
16. En anglais les adjectifs se placent In englhh -• are placed
ordinairemeut avant le nom ; en fran- generally before -^infrenrh
qSLlS lis se placent APR^S le nom ; ex. they are placed after --i ex,
Un habit rouoe. Un chapeau noir. A coat red, • hat black,
Un^ tahle RONDE/ Un baton ROMPU. A table round, - ttiek broken.
17. De cette r^gle on doit excepter les
adjectifs, (beau, bel, belle ;) (bon,bonne ;)
QRAND ; (OROS, GROSSE ;) JEUNE ; JOLI ;
MAUVAIS ; MiCHANT ; . MEILLEUR ; II^ME ;
MOINDRE ; PETIT ; PLUSIEURS ; TOUT ;
(viEUX, viEiLLE ;) qul se placent
ordinairement avant le nom ; car on dit :
Un BON mari, Une belle femme,
De joLis enfants, Un g|ios arbre.
Une PETITE maison,.Un QRA^DJardin,
' Les mSmes mots qui servent k qua-
lifier les noms, servent aussi au moyen
des adverbes, h en** comparer les qualites.
Quand on compare ensemble deux
substances, la quality d* une de ces
substances est ou superieurCf ou infif-
rieuret ou egale k la quality de I* autre;
et ceci s* appelle comparatip; ou la
quality d' une de ces substances est
(au-dessus de) toutes les autres; et ceci
S' appelle SUPERLATIF.
IS. Le comparatif de svperioriti se forme
en mettant plus avant fadjectif ; ex.
Monfrere est plus grand que vous.
19. Le comparatif d* inferiorite se forme
par MOiNS, ou pas si avant Tadjectif ; ex.
Mon frere eat moins grand ou iH eat
PAS si grand que vous, •
20. Le comparatif d' egalite se forme
en mettant aussi avant I'adjectif ; ex.
Monfrere est aussi grand que vous,
21. Le superlatif se forme en ajoutant
r article aux particules comparatives^
PLUS, HOiNs; ex.
Mon frere est le plus grand.
Ma sceur est la moins grande,^
Vos aifants sont les plus grands,^
Mon meilleur ami. Sa plus belle robe*
From this — tiw** must except -
— Cfi^^y handsome ;) good y
(great, large, tall;) big; young ;prelly ,
bad; vncked; better; same;
less ; {little, small ;) several ; {all, whoU ;)
old; which are placed
generally before •-; foruesay :
• - hudnind, - - woman.
Stmt - children, - big tree,
• small house, • large garden.
• same — which serve to qua^
lify , - also (by the) means
(of the J -to( of them J compare .
When we compare together two
substances, of one of these
— is either superior, or infe-
ricr, or equal to "^ of the other ;
and this is called comparative ; or the
— of one of these — is
above all tlie others ; — this
is called superlative.
The — of superiority u formed
by putting plus before ; ex,
"is (more tall or taller J than -,
llie — of inferiority is formed
by moins or pas si ^-the — ; ex.
My — is less tall, or is not
so ttdl as — -.
The — of equality is formed
by putting aussi before ; ex.
My — M fl« tall as —
The — is formed by adding
the — (to the)
plus, moins ; ex.
My — is the most tall, or • tallest.
My — u the least tall.
Your - are - most tall, or - tallest,
'best friend, tier finest gow^.
A LA LANGUE PRAN^AISE. 41
CHAP. V.
DES PRONOMS.
Comme il serait souvent ennuyeux de As it would b$ often tedwut to
r^p^ter les m6mes noms, ou^ a adopt<$ ^-^ the same -, v>g** haoe adopted
certains petits mots pour representer ces certain small wards to represent these
noms, et que pour cette raison on^ a — ., . whieh for this reason we^ have
appel6s PRONOMS ; ainsi, quand je dis : called — ; so, when I say:
JE ou HOI ; ces mots je ou moi re- I or me ; these — I or me
pn^sentent mon nom ; tu, toi; nous; name; thou, thee, (we, us;)
YOU8 ; IL, LUI ; ILS, EUX ; ELLE, yoQ ; he,him; they, them ; (she.her;)
ELLES, repr^sentent les noms de quel- (they, them,) — names of
ques autres persomies. some other persons,
On^ distin^e les pronoms en per- hV distinguish the — into per-
SOMNELS, RELATIFS, P088E8SIFS, DiMON- sonal, relative, possessive, demon^
STRATIFS, INDiFINIB. strative, indefinite.
DES PRONOMS PERSONNELS**.
Les pronoms personnels** sont ceux The •— ^^* are such
de ces mots qui tiennent ordinairement of these - which heep usually
la place des personnel, ' rof'^9 ov are used instead of — .
On distingue en grammaire trtm per- We distinguish in ^ three
sonnet. La premiere personne est celle persons. The first person u that
qui parle; comme, jb stiis, nous sommes; who speaks; as, I am, v^e are ;
la Kconde personne est celle h qui on parle ; . secmd to whom we speak ;
commci TU «, vous Hes; et la troisieme «, thou art, you ar«; --third
personne est celle dont on parle ; comme, (of whom) we speak; as
IL ett^ ELLE est; ILS sont^ ELLES sont; he if, she -; they ore, they - ;
mus chacune de ces personnes est repr<S- hut eacn . these — is
sent^e par plusieurs mots difTt^rents**. represented by several - different^^.
Les pronoms qui repr<$sentent la pre^ The ^ which represent ~
miere personne sont je, hoi* ; bie, hoi* ; first — > are l* ; me* :
NOUS. (we, us.)
Ceux qui repr($sentent la seconde sont Those which -^ the second are
TU, TOI* ; TE, TOI* ; vous. thou* ; thee* ; you.
Ceux qui repr^sentent la troisUme sont Those which — the third are
IL, LUI* ; ILS, EUX* ; LE, LUI* ; he» ; they* ; him* ;
LES, LEUR*; pour le mas; ELLE. ELLES; them* ; for the — ; she, they;
LA, LUI* ; LES, LEUR* ; pour le fern ; her* ; them* ; forthe .;
mais ces mots ne (s*emploient) pas -in- but these - (are used) not
diff^remment I'un pour I'autre. indiscriminately the one for the other.
Pour rendfe ce sujet plus clair. To render this subject more clear,
il me** semble necessaire de diviser it (to nu^) seems necessary to divide
ces pronoms en nominatifi ou agents these -^ into — or agents
du verbe, et en objcts du verbe. (of the) verb, and into objects (^ -) — .
* These two words are expressed by the same word in engUsh, but they ^% ;iQt used
indiscriminstely in fresch, as will appear by tbe following rules.
42 INTRODUCTION
DES PR0N0M8 PERSONNELS.
Par nominatifs ou agents du verbe, je By — w^ (of the) - J
(veux dire) les mots qui dirigent Taction mean - wards wJdeh dheet the •
du verbe ; et par objets du verbe. les mots (of the)-; -hy objeeu(oftht) », -
qui en** re^oivent 1' action; ainsi, dans w&u^fo/tt**^rteenw- •; joytn
cette phrase, je voud** aime ; je est le tlm sentence, I you** lave, lU-
nominatif ou agent du verbe aime^ ct - or ^ («^ the) - looe^ .
vous en** est V objet; et dans cette autre, youfo/it«»^£i- -; . - thU other,
vous** M* aimez; vous est le nomiiiO' youmeiove; yoats
tif du verbe aimez ; et me en^ est V objet. (of the) - love ; - me (of »t**J is r -
Les pronoms ruiminaiifi^ sont pour la The — nonAnoHv^^ ate far .
premiere personne, je, moi, singulier ; first — I,nngular;
NOUS, plurier ; pour la seconde personne, weypkmd; -- second —
TU, TOI, singtdier; vous, plurier; thou, «n^wlar; you, piurai;
pour la troisieme au masculinj il, lui, "third (in the) nuxsailine,hey
singulier; ils, .eux, plurier; pour nngular; tkey, plural ; -
la troisieme au feminin, ELLE, siTZglZ- - t&ird f i» tA«J feminine, she, lin^i
/zer; elles, plurier; mais les mots 2ar; they, pZuroi; 6ut. >
je 07/ moi; TU ou TOI ; il oului; ils jeormoi; tuortcM; Uorloi; ils
ou EUX, (ne s' emploient pas) indiffd^- or eux, (are not used) indis-
remment 1* un pour V autre, cnndnatehf ih£ one Jbr the other.
22. JE, TU, il, ils, b' emploient Je, ta, il, ils, ar« uvd
(toutes les fois qu') il y a dans la phrase whenever there is in > sentence
un verbe qui peut s'accorder avec ces pro- a - which may agree with — ;
noms ; ex. je SuiSt TU es, il e^^, ils sont. -I am, thou art, he is, they are,
23. MOi, TOI, lui, eux, vs' em- Moi, toi, lui, eux, ar« u«<2
ploient lorsque ces mots sont joints k un wAmtAese- are joined toon*
autre substaiitif pour nominatif du mime ether — for -^ (of the) same
verbe, ou lorsque le verbe est sous-enten* .., or when — is understood ;
du ; ex. Qy,i est Id ? moi. Ce n* est pas ex. Who is there? L Jtisnot
MOI qui ai fait cela ; d est lui. Vous J who have done that ; it is he. You
et MOI nou^s irons. Toilet lui vou^ res* -1 will go. Thou-he<WZ
terez. Ce sont eux qui we** V^ ont dit, stay. It is they - me it** have told
N, B. NOUS, vous. SLLE, ELLES, N. B. I^ous, Tous, eUe, elles,
etant invariablement les miimes dans touts being invariably - same in all
les7 cas, ne prcbentent aucune difficultt^. instances, present no difficulty.
Les pronoms o6;e^« du verbe sont pour The (of the) — are far
la premiere personne me, moi, sing; . first -^ me, singular ;
NOUS, plur ; pour la seconde personne us, piuroZ; ;
TE, TOI, singul ; vous, plur ; pour thee, singular ; you, plural ; -
la troisieme personne au masculin, le, - third - in the masculine, him,
LUI* singul ; les, LEUO, eux, plur ; him singular ; them, plural ;
pour la troisieme personne au feminin (in the) feminine
LA, lui, elle, singul; les, leur, her, nn^uW ; them,
elles, plur; mais ces mots ne s'em- lihem plural; but theses are used
ploient pas indifft^remment. n«t indiscriminately.
A LA LANGUE FRANfAlSE. 43
DES PRONOMS FSBSONNELS.
•
Les pronoms objets du verbe se placent 27k« — — ("^ the) — an placed
tantdt avant^ et iaotot (tprei le verbe ; et umtHmu befere^ - - afUr - • ; -
le choix de ces mots depend de la place -cAoiceo/ — dependt vn - pUue
que ces pronoms occupent dans la phrase. ... keep in • aenteuoe.
24. Prenez pour r^gle g(Sn^rale^* que les
pronoms objets du verbe, se placent en
fran^ais avant le verbe qui le^ r<^git;
dans ces cas mb s' exprime par me,
et THEE par tb ; ainsi on dit :
U ME voit. ME voiUil ?
n TE voit, TB voit^U ?
n LE voit. LE voit-U ?
H LA voit, LA voii-il?
H NOUS voit, NOUS voit-U ?
II vous voit Yous voit'U ?
II LES voit, LES voit'il 9
Take for rule — that -
--* . (efthej ., art pJocMl ii»
— btfare - — ux&tcft -•• governe;
- tAcM tfifteiMet - ie ex pre eud -
// ne ME tH>i7 j9a«.
II ne TE V027 pox.
line LIB voit pas.
II ne LA voit pas.
II ne NOUS voit pas.
n ne VOUS voit pas.
n ne LES voit pas.
Ne HE voit-il pas ?
Ne TE voit-il pas ?
Ne LE voit'il pas ?
Ne LA voit'U pas ?
Ne NOUS voit'il pas ?
Ne VOUS voit'il pas ?
Ne LES voit'il pas ?
Heme teet.
Me
tees he?*
- thee -.
Thee
.?
. him -•
Him
-?
- her -.
Her
'?
- ns
Us
•
- you -.
You
-?
- them-*
Them
•
He me sees not. Me sees he not ?X
- thee - -,
Thee
. . •?
- him - -.
Him
- - - ?
- her - -
Her
. - - ?
- us - -,
Ua
- - - ?
- you - -
You
- - - t
- them - -,
Them
. . . ?
25. Observez senlement que si le verbe
qui r^git ces pronoms est compost d'un des
verbes auxiliaires^ avoir ou Atre^ et d'un
participe passe*^ les pronoms se placent
avant le verbe cnunliaire^, non entre le
verbe auxiliaire et le participe ; ainsi on dit :
II m' a vu.
II '^ a vu.
II L* a vu.
II l' a vue.
II NOUS a vas,
11 vous a vus.
II LES a vus.
line i^ a pas vu.
II net^ a pas vu.
II ne l' a pas vu.
It ne i! a pas vue.
M* a-t*'il vu ?
t' a-t-il vu ?
il a-t-il vu ?
L* a-t'U vue ?
NOUS a-t-U vus ?
VOUS a-t-U vus?
L£s a-t-U vus ?
Ne M* a^t*-il pas vu?
Ne 1^ a*t-il pas vu ?
Ne L* a-t'll pas vu ?
Ne h* a-t-'ilpas vue?
Observe only that if
- governs ' - is compounded - - (- -^
- auxiUary^^ have or be, and - -
participle pasi^^, - '—are placed
before - - — , not between -
- — ; so we say :
Heme has seen. Me has he -?$
- thee - -. Thee - -
- him* -
- her -
-us
- you -
- them -
Him
Her
Us
You
Them
// ne NOUS a pas vus, Neiiovsart-tlpasvus?
II ne VOUS a pas vus. NeyoVAa-t-Upasvus?
II ne LE^ a pas vus. Ne les a-t-U pas vus ?
Heme has fut teen. Mehashe *
- thee - - -• Thee - -
- him « - •• Him
• her • .' •. Hep - -
- us - - -. Us - -
- you - - -, You - •
- them* - -• Them - >
a
* The letter (t) has not any meaning here, it is added only to soften the pronunciation.
^ Proper english. Does he see nu, 6;c. t -^o^ henotseeme? S;c.
$ Proper englisb, Has he seen me, S^c, H Has he vot seen me ? 6fc,
44 INTRODUCTION
DBS PR0N0H8 PERSONNELS
26. Cette regie est sujette" h deux ThUruUUliabUtotwi
exceptions; la premier^ est que si on*« —; -fintUthatifwe^
commande, les pronoms se placent apres command, — are placed after
le verbe; alors on^ exprime me par "—; theHwe**expren^by
UOI, et THEE par TOI. moi, and ^-^ by toi.
27. Mais si le verbe defend^ les pro- Butxf — forbids,-^
noms rentrent dans la rfegle generale», et -^rehiminto , .
se placent avant le verbe; alors me s'ex- arep^edbefoie ; then-^is
prime par me, et thee par te ; ex. exprested (y me, — byte; ex.
Commandement.* D6fense.V Conlmanding Forbidding.
Regarde^Moi.^ Ne me r^^arrfe pas. look at me. Me look at not,
Regarde-TOi. Ne tb regarde pas. _ -thyself. Thyself--..
Regardez-Novs, Neiiovsregardezpas, _ -us. Us .
RegardeZ'YOVS. Ne vous regardez pas. — . yourself. Yourself - - -.
Regardons-j.^^. Ne le regardom pas. Let us look at him. Him Ut us not look ^
Ri^gardonS'LA, Ne la regardons pas her. Her
RegardonS'LEs. Ne les regardons pa% them. Them
28. Les pronoms ne sont pas toujours The -^ art not always
r^gis^ par les verbes ; ils sont sou vent govemedby the --; they are oflen
r6gis par une preposition qui les** unit which them*^ unites
au verbe qui les«* accompagne ; alors le (totla) tJiem*^ attends ; then -
pronom <5tant Tobjet de la proposition, et -- being the object of the—, ^
non Tobjet du verbe, il se place apres \a. not- •^( of the) -^^ it is placed after -
proposition; et me s'exprime par moi; — ; — is expressed by moi;
TH££. par toi; him par lui ; her — 6y toi ; — fcylui; —
par elle; them par eux; masc. ; par by eVLe, --by eux, —; by
elles ; fern. ; ex. elles, — ; ex.
riens a moi. Assieds-toi (prfes de) moi. Come tome. Sit thyself by me.
Nous parlions de toi . Allons avec lui. - were speaking - thee. Let us go ' liim
Je ne puis pas y alter sans elle. J cannot go there without her.
AveZ'Vous pense h eux, mas, ; & elle.b f. ? Haoe you thought of them 1
29. S'il arrive que pi usieurs pronoms If it happens that several -^
soient rtf gis par le m6me verbe, ils se are governed by - same — , they are
placent ensemble dans I'ordre qui. suit ; placed together in - oider -^follows -
Les pronoms de la premiere personne The first -^
ME, nous; ceux de la seconde te, me, nous;Ma» te,
vous ; et celui de la troisiSme se, se vous ; - that - - third se ; are
placent avarz^ touts les autres pronoms; placed before all- otW — ;
le, la, les, se placent avant lvi, le, la, les, lui,
LEUR, Y, EN ; lui, IrEUR, avant y, leur, y, en ; lui, leur, p— y,
EM ; et Y avant en. en ; - y — en.
Except^, lorsqu' on emploie moi, toi. Except, when we use moi, toi,
au lieu de me, te; car alors moi, toi, tnrtetwi o/ me, te; /ort^«n moi, to*,
se placent apres les autres pronoms. are placed after - other — .
Et lorsque moi ou toi rencontrent And %nhen moi or toi meet
le pronom en, ils se chan^ent en m*, — en, - are changed into m*
T*, et se placent avant en. Toutes ces t*,- are placed — en. All these
vari^tlQIlS se font pour la^ mtSlodie ; ex. — are made forf melody ; ex.
A LA LANGUE FRAN^AISE.
DE8 PROWUM8 PERSONNELS.
45
Pronomt avant /e verbe, regie 24 et 25.
PREMIERE PERSONNE.
Praiumu apr&s U verbe, regie S6,
tl ME LE donnat,
II ME LA donna ;
It ME LES donna ;
II M' EN donnu. ;
II NOUS LE donna ;
II NOUS LA donna ;
//NOUS LES (/onna;
II NOUS EN donna ;
J/ M' y a envoy t ;
U ME l' Y a e})iM)y^ ;
7/ ME LES Y a envoy£s;
II M' Y EN a envoye;
7/ NOUS raenooySe;
IliiOV»V Yaenvoy£;
U NOUS LES Y a envoys ;
II NOUS Y EN a eiwoyi;
II TE LK donna ,
r/TE LA (ionna,
// TE LE8 donna ;
II T EN d4mtia ;
// VOUS LE donna ;
II VOUS LA donna ;
II VOUS LES donna ;
II YOVSev donna;
IIT* Y a envoys ;
II TE l' Y a envoye';
II TE LES Y a envoy£s ;
II T* Y EN a envoye ;
nyOVSYaenvoyd;
II VOUS L' Y a envoys ;
II VOUSles Ya envoy £s;
II VOUS Y EN a envoys ;
Heme him or it* gave
- her or it* -.
• them -.
me some -.
VLB him or it*
- her (w it* -.
- them -•
- some -•
I>(mn«s*LE-MOI ;
D(mn«E-LA-MOI,
Donnez-LES-MOI -,
Donnez-M* EN ;
Donna-NOUS-LE ;
£>onn«z-NOUS-LA ;
DoMn«5-NOUS-LES ;
D(mn«.NOUSEN ;
' me there has sent, Envoyez-Y-MOl ;
- - it - - -. £nt;<)y«B-L*-Y-MOI ;
- - them - - -. Eni;oy«5-LES-Y-MOI ;
- - - some - -. Envoye»-Y'En-MOl ;
• us - - -. A£nvoyes*NOUS-y ;
- - it - - -. E»t»y«-NOUS-L'-Y j
- • them - • -. £/iW5^«2-NOUS-LES-Y ;
- - some • -. . Enwy«-NOUS-Y-EN ;
8EC0NDE PERSONNE.
He thee him or it*-. il«p»*^««it6-LE-T01 ,
her or it*
- them -.
thee some •.
you him or it -.
- her or it* -•
• them -•
• Sfome -•
thee there has sent
- it - - -.
- them - - -.
- there some • -.
you - - -.
" it - - ••
• them - - ••
- - some - -.
Repr^sente-LA-TOlj
il^^^sente-LES-TOi;
Repr^sente-T' en ;
^^^♦•^^"'^-VOUS-LE ;
Rqtr^senteZ'WOVS'LA ;
H4>r^«ent«x-V0US-LES ;
R^^r^sentet-YOVS'EH ;
Give it or him* me
- it or her* -.
• them •.
• me some.
- us, him or it.
• - her or it.
• - them.
- • some.
Send there mer
- it - -.
- them - -.
• - some -.
- - "•
- - it -.
• - them -.
- - - (some«}
Represent it( to thee. )
- her or it* (- -.)
- them (- -.)
- thee (of it.)
• yourself him or it.
- - hertirit.
- • them.
rranjpoit«5-VOUS-Y ; Carry yourself there.
// SE LE rappelU ;
U SE LA rappelle ;
II SE LES rappelle ;
II S' EN repent ;
II S' Y applique ;
II LE LUI a donn£ ;
Jl LA LCI a donn6e ;
II LES LUI a donnas ;
II IsE LEUR a donn£ ;
II LA LEDR a donn£e ;
II LES LEDR a dotm^s ;
II L* F,N avertit ;
II LES EN avertit ;
II \J Y envoya ;
1 1 LES Y envoya ;
II LE LUI Y env<3ya ;
II LA LUI Y envoy a ;
II LES LUI Y encoya ;
II LK LEUR Y envoya ;
II LA LEUR Y envoya ;
II LES LEUR Y envoya ;
II LUI EN envoya ;
II LEUR EN envoya ;
II LUI Y EN envoya ;
II LEUR Y EN envoya ;
11 Y EN envoya ;
In/orma;- VOUS-Y-EN ;
TROISIEME PERSONNE.
He to himself it recalls,
- • - her or it* -.
• - - them ••
-himself(o/it)r«pentr.
£ngiitre-t]iere(o/it. )
- (to it) applies.
it(U
tohimorher) --. Donnet-LE-LUl ;
• it, ner* (- -) - given. Donnez-hA-LVl ;
them (--)--. * Donn«s-LES-LUf ;
it, him (to them) - -. Donricz-LE-LtUR ;
her or it* (- -) • -. Dwinez-LA-LEUR ;
them (- -) - -. Don7ie2-LES-Li:uR
him (of it) wamedf Avertissez-h' en ;
them (of it) -.
him there sent ;
■ them - •.
• (to him or her)
.(-O...
.(--)...
it (to them) - -.
it (W her (--)- •.
them (- -) - -.
'to him or her)
-)
Avertissez-UES-EH ;
Envoyez-h* Y ;
Enroyez-LES-Y ;
Envoyez-LE-LOi-Y ;
En»oyez-LA-LUi-Y ;
Eni'oyes-LES-Lui-Y ;
Enyoyez-LE-LEDR-Y ;
£nroy«8-LA-LEUR-Y ;
Eravoyez-LES-LEUR-Y ;
Enooy «-LUI- EN ;
Enwiyez-LEUR-EN ;
£nw)yez-LUI-Y-EN ;
Envoyes-LEUR-Y-EN ;
Envoyez- Y-EN ;
Give it (tohim or her.)
- it or her* ( .)
- them ( .)
- - - (to them.) •
- it or her (- -.)
- - (- -.)
Wajm him (of it.)
- them (- -.)
Send him or it there
- them -.
• • - ( to him or her) -.
-her or it (--)-.
..(..)..
• it or him (•-)
- her or it* (- -) -
- them (--)-.
"to him) some.
to him) there -.
* See SOth rule.
46 INTttODtJCTlON
DBS PftONOMS PERSONNELS.
30. Comme (il n' y a) en fran<;ais que As (there are) infreiidi tmly
deux genres, 1e masculin et le riuiNiN, two genders, tha ^ and the --,
les pronoms ir, they, tbeu qui the — , -, -loAicA
(se rapportent) aux^ choses, et qui sont refer td^ things, and which are
du ^enre neutre*« en angrlais, (s' expri- (of the) ^neuter — , are expfested
ment) par il, elle, ils, ELLES ; by i\, ei)le, lis, elles ;
LE, LA, LES, de m6me que si on par- ^,lBL,leB,thesameasifwe**
lait des* personnes ; ainsi on dit ; en par- spoke oP--; so we say ; in
lant d'un homme ou d'un habit ; speaking - - man or - - coat ;
Il est bien fait ; He or it ii well made,
Je vous LE** montrerai. ^ yo"* it or him (wiU shew.)
En parlant d'une femme ou d*une Jieur ; woman - - - flower ;
Elle est belle ; Regardez-hk^. She or it is fine ; Ufek at her or it.
Remarquez que les mots LS^ la. Remark that — words le, Is,
LES, prononti sont pr^cis^ment les les, — , are precisely the
monies que le, la, les, article; mais wwi* « le, la, les, — ; hut
il est aise de ne pas les"* confondre. le, itiseatytonotthem^ confound. Le,
LA, LES, article est toujours suivi d'un la, les, —, is aiujoys/oiiwcftifcy a
nom ; lb, la, les, pronom est toujours noun; \e. Is, les -^ is always
prec^dtJ ou suivi d'un verbe; ainsi, dans preceded or folloioed by a^; so, in
cette phrase ; ^^w eentence ;
Void LE pere, la md^re, et les enfants ; (Here is) — , -nuther, •• children ,
LE, LA, LES est article. le, la, les is an article.
Et dans ces autres ; Je le** ©ow, je And - these others ; I him see, -
LA** vols, je LES** vois ; her -, - them - ;
Foye^r-LE", i?oyez-LA*, t?oyc2-LES*" ; See him, -her,' them;
LE, LA, LES est prouOHl. le, la, les isa'-^.
31. Les pronoms he, sue, tbet, TA^ — he, she, they,
HIM, HER, THEM s' cmploient quel- him, her, them, are used sometimes
quefois sans rapport h un nom exprimc^ without reference to a -^expressed
dans la phrase, mais avec rapport aux mots *» *^ — > but with — (to the) words
MAN, WOMAN, OU PEOPLE SOUS-CUtcnduS ; MAN, WOMAN, - PEOPLE UndCT^Ood ;
alors HE, HIM s* expriment par celOi; thennY.,mvL are expressed by celm-,
SHE, HER par CELLE ; THEY, THEM^ »HE, HER by Celle J THEY, THEM,
par CEUX ; ex. by ceux ; ex.
Celui d qui, c'est - It - dire, l'homme Hetoti'^wn, i. e., -man
d qui personne ne plait, est plus to wham nobody pleases, is more
malheUTeux que celui qui, i. e, que L* unhappy thanhe who, i.e., than the
HOMME qui ne plait a personne. man who pleases nobody,
Celle qui, c'est - & - dire, la femme She who, i. e., - woman
qui refuse un mart, n' est pas toujours who reftuee a husband, is w*t always
sdre dten trouver un autre. sure of finding another,
Ceux qui, e'est - ik - dire, lbs gens They wfc«», i- «•» - P«opl<
qui paraissent heureux^ ne /«•* sont pas who appear haprpy, so are tu^
toujours, always.
A LA LANOUE PRANf AISE. 47
DB8 PaONOMS RELATirS.
Le mot RELATIF signifie qui a rapport Tht - - meam tohieh has rtferenet,
Quoique touts les pronoms par leur Though all the prwujuns by their
nature soient rdatifs, c*est-&-dir6 aient nature be relative, i.e. have
du rapport h quelque substantif exprimt^ ume reference to some ^ exprested
ou sous-entendu, on^ a donn6 h (ceux-ci) <w — » peopU^ have given to these
le nom de relatifs, (k V exclusion) des the name of ^, exclusively (of f he)
autres, parcequ' lis servent plutdt h otUrs, because they -^rather to
rappeler Tidl&e des ^tres dont on^ a recall * idea (") beings of which we kav%
parle, qu' k les** rcpresenter. V«fc«», than to them**' represent.
Les pronoms relatifs^' SOnt qui, que, The — relative are qui, que,
DONT, QUOI9 QUEL, LEQUEL ; en dont, quoi, quel, lequel ; in
anglais WHOf whom^ whose, tbat^ «n^ii«A, —,—,—, —•
WBICH, WHAT. — , — .
Ces mots semblent ne presenter aucune These — seem • (to present) any
difficult^, cependant, comme le m6me difficulty, yet, as - same
mot est repnSsent^ par plusieurs mots word is represented by several —
differents'" dans (les deux) langues ; ils — ^^ in both languages ; they
embarrassent SOUVent les C0mmen9antS ; embarrau often the beginners ;
ainsi faites attention aux regies suivanies. so pay -^ (to the) -^following.
32. Quand who, that, which, Tr/i«n— ,— , — ,
SOnt le nomijiatif d'Mn verbe, ils s'expri- are the >— of a ^, tliey are expressed
ment par qui ; . by qm;
Quand whom, that, which, sont When — , •— , — , are
V objet d'un verbe, ils s'expriment par the '^ of a '—, tJiey are expressed by
QUE* ; que* ;
WHOSE, of WHOM, of WHICH, '~,of—',0f-^
s'exprimeot par dont. are expressed by dont.
N. B. QUI, QUE, DONT ne con- N. B. Qui, que, dont,
naissent ni genre ni nombre ; c'est-a- know neither -^ nor -^ ; that is to
dire, se disent ^alement des? personnes say, are said both of 7 —
et des choses, d'un ou de plusieurs; and of 7 things, of one or - several i
ainsi on dit ; so we say :
Vhomme qui, le cheval qui, U car- The man who, • horse that, -
ro»9e QUI est a la porte. coach which is at - door.
Vhomme que, le cheval que, hear- The — whom, the -^ that, the
rosae que Ttoua aeons rencontri. -— which - have met,
Vhomme dont, le cheval dont, le — Co/ whom,) — (0/ which)-
Camwse DONT je VOIU^ ai parle. - (of which) - (to t/oa") Aave spoken.
* Persons not yersed in grammatical terms are often at a loss to distinguish the object
from the nominative, i. e. when to express that, which by QUI, and when by QUE.
To these I will observe, that that, which are the nominative, and expressed by QUlj
when they are followed immediately by a verb ; as.
The coach that or which is at the door ; LecarroaseQVl est a laporte.
THAT, WHICH are the (Aject of the verb, and expressed by QUE, when, betweer. them
and the verb, there is a noun or a pronoun which is the nominatiye of the verb , as.
The coach that or which we have met ; LeearrossfQVE nous avons rencontrS.
48
INTRODUCTION
DES PRONOMS RBLATIFS.
33. Quelquefois WHOM^ . WHICH^ Sometimes -—, — ,
sont r%is par une proposition, et non par are governed by a — , and not
un verbe ; alors ils s'expriment,
WHOM par QUI, pour (les deux)
genres et (les deux) nombres ;
WHICH par /eQUEL, ^aquelle,
Ze«QUELS, /e.9QUELLES.
From WHICH par c^t/quel, de la*
QUELLE, cfeJ^QUELS, de^QUELLES.
To, at WHICH par auQUEL, d /a-
QUELLE, aUJ7QU£LS, aUiTQUELLES,
a — ; then they are erprased,
«— by qui, for both
— , and both — ;
— by lequel, laquelle,
lesqiiels, lesquelles.
From — ', by duquel, de la>
quelle, desquels, desquelles.
To, at — by auquel, a la-
quelle, auxquels, auxquelles, (agree
suivant le genre et le nombre du nom ably to) the — and the -^ (of the) -
auquel lis (se rapportent) ; ainsi on dit ;
Void les gens avec qui fai dink,
Le cheval sur lequel^c suU venu.
La chaise dans laquelle fetais,
Les chevaux AUXQUELS^e t^ai donnh*
to which they refer ; sowe say ;
(Here care) • people with whom - - dined,
- horte on which • am come or - came,
• chaise in which - was,
- horses to which - it** have given.
34. WHO, WHOM, WHOSE s'cm-
ploient quelquefois sans rapport k un
nom exprimO, mais par rapport au mot
PERSON sous-enlendu. Ces mots peu-
vent alors (se toumer) par what per'
SONf QUELLE PERSONNE, et s'eX-
priment par qui ; ex.
Qui vous^^ a dit cela? (c'est-k-dire,)
QUELLE PERSONNE t?oi«'* a dit cela ?
Je ne sais qui voits (voulez dire) ;
(c'est - k - dire) quelle personne vous
votdez dire J,
2 QUI OU d QUELLE PERSONNE CSt
cette maison ?
De QUI OU de quelle personne est-
elleJiUel
Dans les phrases interrogatives^,
WHICH demande trois distinctions.
35. Quelquefois which se joint
comme un adjectif au nom qui le^ suit,
c'est-k-dire sans le secours des' proposi-
tions ; comme, which man ? which.
carriage? which horses? alors which
s'exprime par quel, quelle, quels,
quelles, suivant. le genre et le nombre
du nom qui le"* suit ; ex.
De quel homme parlez-vous ?
Dans quelle voiture (melirai-je) ceci?
A QUELS chevaux b^ (dimnerai-je?)
are used -^ without reference to a
— expressed, but with — (to the) word
•— UTiderstood, These words
may then (be turned) into —
— -, quelle personne, and are ex-
pressed by qui ; ex.
Who you*^ has told that 1 i. e.
what — -■* — ?
I know not whom -— fnean,
i, e. wAat— •— •
t
To whom or - what — belongs
that house, (or whose house is that 1)
Of whom or - what — is
she daughter ? whose daughter - - ?
In — sentences interrogative^*
— requires three distinctions.
Sometimes — « jnned
like an - (to the) - which follows tt,~
i. e., wUhout the help (of the) — ;
as.
— ? ? tAw —
if expreseed by quel, quelle, queU,
quelles (agreeably to) and - —
(of-) — foUowsit*^; ex.
Of which man speak you ?
In which — (shall 1 put) this ?
To which horses it (shall 1 give ?J
■J
A LA LANGUE FRAN§A1SE. 49
DES PRONOMS RELATIFS.
36. Quelquefois which se joint Sometimes — is joined
comme un substantif au nom qui le** suit, like — (to the) noun -follows it *^
par le moyen d*une proposition; comme, by -means ; as,
WHICH of these men? which of the / —
carriages? ou il s'emploie sans 6tre suivi — ?oritiii«ed — being followed
d'un nom,, mais par rapport k un nom by — ,butwithreferencetoa—,
dont on a d6jk fait mention ; comme, It (of which) . . already made — ; as,-
is one of these men ; which is it ? alors ; .is-'i then
WHICH s'exprime par /eqUEL, Zo- which iierpre»ec26yleqiiei,
QUELLE, ZeSQUELS, ZesQUELLES ; Isquelle, lesquels, lesquelles ;
Of from WHICH par cZmQUEL, de la- -, - which, by duquel, de la-
QUELLE, (ZexQUELS, cZesQUELLES ; quelle, desquels, desquelles ;
7*0, at WHICH par atZQUEL, d la- -,- which 6^ auquel, d la*
QUELLE, at/i7QUELS, ai/J?QUELLES, quelle, auxquels, auzquelles,
(c'est-il-dire) Tarticle dOfini** Ze, Za, les; (i.e.) le,la, les;
dUf de iOy des ; au^ h la^ aux, suivant du,dela,des;au,ala,aux,(a£Teea6/2(rc
le genre et le nombre du nom, s' ajoute (--)—, is added
aux mots quel, quelle, quels, ftot^ej-— quel, quelle, quels,
QUELLES, comme s'ils Otaient eux-m6mes qvLeHea, as ifthey were themselves
des" noms ; ex. - * ^-^ »">""« ; ex,
DUQUEL de ces hommes parlez-vcus ? (Of which) — speaP you '/
LEQUEL est le plus grand ? Which is - most tall, or - tallest '/
LAQ UELLE des VoUures prdfereZ-VOUS ? Which (- -) carriages prefer you '/
LAQUELLE est la plus belle ? Which . - most fine, or - finest 7
LESQUELS de ces chevauj! aurons-nous ? Which of these - (shall have) we 'I
LESQUELS SOnt Ics m>eilleurs ? Which are the best /
37. Quelquefois le relatif which ren- Sometimes -relative which im-
ferme le mot that ou those sous-entendu, plies the understood,
comme, quand, en rtlponse k cette ques- as, wheti, in amwer to -question;
tion ; which horse shall I ride? Je '^ I
dis. Ride which you wUU c'est-^-dire, My. -,i.e.,
THAT WHICH you wiU ; WHICH daus > — -
ce sens s'exprinie par celui que, ma«. ; - seme is repressed ^ celui que, ma;. ;
CELLE QUE, f&m, ; CEUX QUE, mOAC, cell^ que, /em. ; ceux que, -
pL ; CELLES QUE, fem. plur, ; suivant - ; ceUes que, - - ; (agreeably to)
le genre et le nombre du nom auquel il '—(of the) — (to which) it
(se rapporte); ex. refers; ex.
Lequd de ces chevaux monterai^je ? Which (^11 ride) 1/
Montez celui QU* il VOUS^ plaira ? Ride which, i, e. that which . please.
Dans quelle voiture mettrai-je ceci ? in which carriage ($hall put)l this /
Mettez-le dans celle QUEje vous ai dit. Put tt in which, (.e. that which— to/c/.
Auxquels des gar^ons le donnerai-je ? (To which) (- -) boys it** (shall give) I '
DonneZ'U^ a CEUX que vous voudrez. Give it to which,i.e.those which- will*
WHATf (do m^me que) which, dc- '-,(a$weUai)—,
mande trois distinctions. • rtquiret three aittinctu^u.
50 INTRODUCTION
DES PRONOM8 RBLATIF8.
38. Quelquefois what 6e joint cotni* Sometimes -^u joined Uhe^
me un adjectif au nom qui le suit ; alors il — (to the) . ^ follows it^; then it
s'exprime par quel, quelle, quels, is expressed by quel, quelle, quels,
QUELLES de la m&me mani^re que queVLea, in the same manner as
wnictt ; ex. — ; ex,
De QUEL homme, de quelle voituref 0/what—,- what carriage,
de QUELS chevaux parlez-voui ? • wliat horses speak -^ '/
39. Quelquefois what s*emploie
absolument, c'est-k-dire, sand rapport a
un nom exprim^, mais avec rapport au
mot TBI NO sous-entendu ; alors what
peut se tourner par what titia'o, et
s'exprime par que, ou par quoi.
WHAT s'exprime par que, quaiid il
est V objet d'nn verbe ; com me,
QvK dites-iJOiLs? q\]E faites-vmis 9
WHAT s'exprime par quoi, quand il
est rtSgi par une proposition ; comme,
De QUOI parle-t-il? A QUOi pensez-v&us?
Ou employ^ comme inteijection ; ex,
Quoi ! vous nUtes pas encore levS,
40. WHAT s'emploie quelquefois au
lieu des mots that, which; comme,
quand on dit; Do what is just ; c'est-
h-dire, that which is just; alors
WHAT s'exprime par ce qui, quand
il est le nominaiif d'un verbe, et par ce
QUE, quand il en** est Vohjet ; ex.
Faites ce qui est juste,
Ce que je vou^ dis est vraL
Mais quand what dans le sens de
THAT WHICH cst r€g\ par les propo-
sitions OF, TO, (il faui) considOrer si la
proposition vient avant o\x apres what;
car, or what s'exprime par de ce qui,
nomin, ; par de ce que, objet; ex.
Parlez de ce qui ro?/i** regarde,
WHAT OF, s'exprime par ce dont ;
Ce dont je parte ne vous regarde pas,
TO WHAT s'exprime par a ce qui,
d CE QUE ; comme,
(Appliquez-vous) a ce qui est utile,
WHAT TO s*exprimc par ce d
QUOI ; comme,
Ce d QUOI il «' applique ripest P^ ^Uilc.
ituted
absehfUly, i. e.> vnthouit reference -
— — expressed, but with — (to the)
understood; then'"
may be turned into , -
is expressed by que, or by quot.
— is expressed - que, when it
is - ot^ect - - — ; as,
What My — ? —do—?
— is expressed - quoi,
— governed - • — ; as.
Of what speaks - 7 To what think - 21
Or used as an iuterjectioji ; ei.
What ! •— are not yet up,
— is used — in'
stead (of the) , — ; as^
when we*^ say ; — — . - — ^ that is
to say, — ; then
— is expressed by ce qui, when
it is of - — •, - - ce
que, — It {of it'^) is ; ex. .
Do that which or what -just.
That which or what • - say - tnie.
But when ^in • sense -
— — - governed 6y - —
-, -, (it is necessary) (to -) whether ».
— come: before or after — ;
for, - — is expressed by de ce qui,
— ; 6y de ce que, — ; ex.
Speak o/ what, i. e. of that which.'
concerns,
-^ ., if expressed by ce dont ;
. (ofwhich) - - or what - ^peak of -"not
. — --*- £y a ce qui,
d ce que ; as.
Apply to that which or wheA' useful,
— - if expressed byceh
quoi ; as,
'—to which • applies or what • - to • not -,
A LA LANGUG tTRAK^AISl-. SI
DE8 piioMOlis t*osslsissirB.
On appelle pronoms posses^tpb^ cer- lVi/**caU'~po8Kemveeeitam
tains mots qu' on^ emploie h d<$8igner ^whiehartuted^todeiutte
la possession des objets dont on^ parle. . — (of the) *> (i)fwkMi)wti**tfmk
Les pronoms possbssifbi* sont, The are^
MIEN, TIEN, BIBN, pOur le mcuc, ]MKne, tliine, his orln^n^for .
UIENNB, TIENNE, SIENNB^ /^. Mine, thine, bis &t hers, -^.
n6tre, v6trE, LEUR, serveht polir Ours, yours, theirs, ttrvefor
(let deux) genres, both genden.
N. B. Les pronoms POssESstPB^' sont N. B. The — — are
tOU jours pr^ed^S** de I'article d^fini** always preeetled by
le, la, les ; dii^ de la, des ; an, a la, le, la, les ; du, de U, des ; au, a la,
aux, de mftme que s'ils ^talent des noms; Aux, the tame as if they were noum
ainsi on^ dit ; eo we^ say ,
Le uiEN, la MiENNE, les MIENS, les
miennes. Mine.
Du mien, de la mienne, des miens,
des miennes. 0/mine.
Au MIEN, d la MIENBTE, aUX MIENS,
aux MIENNES. TV) mine.
Le TIEN, la TiENNE les TIEN8, les
TIENNES. Tliihe.
Du TIEN, de la tienn)b, des tibns,
des TIENNES. 0/ thine.
Au TIEN, d la TIENNE, tttlX TIENS,
aux TIENNES. To thine.
Ije aiENf la sienne^ les si ens, les
flIENNES. His, Hers.
Du siEN, de la siennb, des sienb,
cfe« SIENNES. 0/ his, o/ hers
Au siBN, d la bisnne, aux sienb,
aux SIENNES. To his, to hers.
Le n6trb, la n6trb, les n6tres. Ours.
Du n6trb, de la n6tre, dss n6tre8. O/ours.
Le v6trb, la v6tre, les y6trbs, Sfc. Yours.
Le LEUft, la LEUR, les lburs, Sfc. Theirs.
41. Les pronoms possebsifs^' s'accor- The — -^ agree
dent en genre et ^n nombre avec le nom {n gmuter - in number with - ^
qu'ils repi^sentent ; ex. lofctcA - rtpretent ; ex.
Voire cheval est meiUeur que le MIBN ; Your horse is better than mine ;
c*est-2L-dire, que mon cheval. i. e., than my — .
Ma maison est ntieux Silu^e que "LA My house- better ntuated than
SIENNB ; c'est-k-dire, que sa maison. his ; i. e., than his—.
Je prejere cette situation d la leur. 1 prefer this situation to theirs.
Fous avez pris mes gants, et moi, fai • have taken - gloves, • 1 have
pris LES v6tRE». — yours.
MSlez-VOU^ de VOS affaires, et ne Meddle yourself^ with your — , .
wnu^ mHez pas des n6tRES« yourself*^ meddle not with ours.
E 2
52
INTRODUCTION
DES PRONOMS P0S8ESSIFS.
42. Les Ang^lais emploient les pro- TheEnglishme
noms POSSESSiFs" mine, thine, his, — mine, thine, his,
HERSi OURS, YOURS, THEIRS, dans hers, ours, yours, theirs, in
des cas ou les Frani^ais font usage des some- (in which) — tnake%m(ofthej
pronoms personnels^' moi, toi, lui, moi, toi, lui,
ELL2, MOUS, VOUS, EUX, ELLES ; elle, nous, vous, eux, elles ;
c'est lorsque ces pronoms (se rencontrent) it ti whm meet
avec le verbe To he, ixRE, employ^ wUh - — to be, etre, used
dans le sens du verbe To belong, in the sense (of the)
appartenir; car alors mine s'exprime —; fm-then-'isexpresud
par a moi ; thine, par d toi ; 6y a moi ; — , 61/ a toi ;
HIS, par a
OURS, par
LUI ; HERS, par a elle ; his, 6y a lui ; hers, by a elle ;
a
NOUS
YOURS, par a ours, ^3^ a nous ; yours, % a
vous; THEIRS, par d eux, masculin ; vous ; theirs, 6y a eux, — j
par d ELLES, feminin ; ex.
Ce cheval est-il^ h vous ?
Qui, il est h. moi.
Je pensais qu! it etait k votre frere.
Qui vous^ a dit qii il etait h lui ?
Ne saveZ'Vous pas que tout ce qui est
ici €Jtt k MOI ?
Je pense que ces livres sont k eux.
lis ne sont pas k eux ; ils sont k nous.
hy a elles, — ; ex.
This horse is it** yours i. c. to you
Yes, it is mine i. e. to me.
J thought - if was to your bi'oiher.
Who - has told that it was his ?
Know - not that all that which is
here is mine 1
- think — are to them i. e, theirs.
They arfnot theirs ; - - ours.
43. Les Anglais font encore usage des
pronoms possessifs" mine, thine,
HIS, HERS, OURS, YOURS, THEIRS,
dans un autre cas oh. les Fran^ais
emploient Tarticle possessif mes, tes,
sEs, Nos, vos, leurs ; c' est dans
ces sortes d'idiotismes ; A friend op mink ;
A hook OF yours; dans ces cas mine
s'exprime par mbs ; thine, par tes ;
HIS ou HERS, par SES ; ours, par
NOS ; YOURS, par vos ; theirs,
par LEURS, qui, suivant jes regies sur
r article, se placent avant le nom ; ex.
Un de vos amis est venu ici,
Un de SES enfants est mort.
Un de Nos voisins me^ T a dit,
J'ai rencontrk un de leurs valets.
ThA — make still use (of the)
— — mine, thine,
his, hers, ours, yours, theirs,
in another instance (in which) - —
use - — — mes, tes,
ses, nos, vos, leurs ; it is •
' kinds of idioms ; A friend of mine ;
A hook of yours ; ---mine
M expressed by mes ; thine, • tes ;
HIS or HERS, by ses ; ouRS, -
nos; YOURS, -vos; theirs,
• leurs, -, (agreeably to) - - on
the — , are placed before - -; ex.
One of your friends* is come here,
Ojie of his children^ is dead.
One of our neighbours^ - it has told,
I have met one of their servants.§
• Or, a friend of yours. t Or, a child of his. t Or, a neighbour of ours, $ Oi, a
iervant of theirs*
A LA LANGUE FRANfAISE. 53
DES PRONOMS D^MONSTRATIFS.
On appelle pronoms DiMONSTRAXlFS" IVei'^eaU'^denumstrative
certains inots qui servent k indiquer les certain — which — toCpointoutJ'
cbjets dont on parle. — (of a>kich) «»*• speak,
Ces pronoms sont CELUI, CELLE ; Thete ce\m, celle\ (thUf that; J
ccux, CELLES, form^s des pronoms ceux,celle8;(t/i««e,tftofe,)/oi7n«d(-->—
perxoniieb^ ^lvi, elle, eux« elles^ — lui, elle, eux, elles,
auxquels on ajoute ce. (to which) we*^ add ee,
44. Les pronoms niMONSTRATiFs, de The ,the
m^me que les autres pronoms, s'accordent tame as - others, agree
en genre et en nombre avec le nom qu' in— and — with — which
ils repr^sentent ; ex. *hey represent ; ex,
Ce chevcU vaut mieux que celui, (c'est- This- it better than ih9X,ii,e.,)
2^-dire) le cheval que vous avez.vendu, the horse which -have sold,
Ceite maison est mieux situhe que cells, This - is better situated tJian that,
(c'est-k-dire) la majson ouje demeure, i.e., — house (in which)- live.
Vos livres sont plus amusants que •booh are more entertaining tlian
CEVX de votre somr, those .
Les rues de Paris ne sont pas si larges, The streets — are not so broad,
ni si commodes que CELLES de Londres. nor so commodious as those -London.
N, B, Les mots THia, these; N. B. Thtf— this, tiiese;
THAT, THOSE, Indiqueut une distinction that, those, (^pointoi/f J- —
locale** que les mots celui, celle, local^* which - - celui, celle,
CEUX, CELLES ne d^signent pas; ceux,celle8d«m)<enof ;
(c*est pourquoi) lorsqu* on** veut mar- therefore when we*^ wish
quer cette distinction en fran9ais, (il (to shew) that ,(itis
faut) ajouter aux mots celui, celle, necessary) (to add){to the)— celai,Cii\\e,
CEUX, CELLES, la particule adverbiale" ceux, celles, — adverhial^^
CI pour designer un objet proche, et (^h here,) to denote - olyect near, -
lA pour designer un objet 6\o\gn6 ; ex. CIhi there,) (far off); ex,
Ce cheval'Cl vaut mieux que CELUI-L A. This — here is better - that there.
Cette matson-Lk est mieux situee que That - there is better situated than
C ELLE- CI. this here.
Ces livres-Cl sont plus amusants que These—- here are more -^ than
CEUX-lA. those there.
Ces rueS'hX sont plus larges que celles -CI. 77mms . then are broader - these here .
45. CECI, CELA se trouvent aussi (Ceci,t^M;)(cela, tAat;)ar»/<mmf*
dans la classe des pronoms niMONSTRA- • - eUus (cfthe) .
TIFS*". Ces mots repr^sentent le sub- These
stantif CHOSE sous-eutendu, et peuvent thing underttood,' may
se toumer par cette chose-ci, 6« turned into this thing,
CETTE chose-lA ; ainsi quand je dis : th&t thing ; to when - - .*
Ceci est bo7i; c*est comme si je disais, Thisii jr«N£;itis(thesame)asif.niii
cette chose- CI est bonne. this thing . good,
Cela est mauvais; c'est-k-dire, cette That - fcod • i. e. tliat
chosb-l A est mauvaise. thing . ..
54 INTRODUCTION
D^S PRONOMS IND^FINIS,
Les pronoms ind^ finis son t des* mots The — indefinite are -^^-^ —
qui servent (ainsi que) les autres pronoms like -other —
h ddsig^ner les objets, mais d'une maniere to denote — ,butinQ, —
indt^termin^e" ; COmme quand je dis : indeterminate^^ ; as when I say :
On vient; QUEI«QU' VVVientj People come; SomOody comes ;
Ces mots on, qublqu'un, (bien qu'ils !rfi«e — people, somebody, t/um«*
se rapportent k quelque) personne, ne they refer to some— ,
designent personne en particuHer. ^<''»^*« ^^ C«»y ho^)tn particulwr.
Les pronoms ind£finis*« sont (en as- The are(rafiker
sez grand nombre,) comme on le** verra nMmeromt)aawt^it(sha}ltee
dans la seconde partie de ce traits ; mais part of this treatise } but
je lie parlerai jci que du pronom On, le I (will 8peak)hereo(Uy (of tlie)- On,
plus usit^ de touts. most used of all.
46. On d^signe qvdqtC un^ quelque On denotes BomehodY, some
personne, ei repr^sente les mots one, we, person, -represents one, we,
THEY, PEOPLE, employes dans un sens in- they, people, u«ed - « —
d^fini; ^insi, quand je dis: oif vient ; c*est — ; so, when I sfiy. one pomes i it is
comme si je disais, qu£LQU*un vient. (the same) as- ^ said, somebody — .
*
47. Les Anglais ont une autre maniere The English have another way
ind^finie*' de s** exprimer, au moyen du — to themselves— , (by the) means (--)
pronom ind^fini^' it, que les Fran^ais it, which the French
expriment par On ; ex. express by On ; ei.
On dit; on croit; OV rapporte. It is said; -is believed i- is reported >
48. Les expressions passives** ^tant The expressions passive being
contraires au g^nie de la langue frantjaise, contrary to the genius of ,
on y** suppl^e au moyen du pronom On ; we them supply (by the) - (of the) - On ,
ainsi, au lieu de dire comme les Anglais; so, instead of saying lihe — ;
j'aI ]fiT£ DIT que des nouvelles ont i6t£ I have been told that news has l>een
rcpuc* ; les Fran<jais disent ; • received; - — say ;
On m' a dit qu' on a re^u deffi nouvelles. One --told--, received'v-^- news.
Voilk ce qui rend Tusage du pronom (It is) that which renders -.(of the)
On si frdquent, que vous trouverez On so frequent, that you (will find)
(peu de*"-^) pages oil ce petit mot (ne few pages (in which)this small-
se** pr^sente) k V OS yeux. CitselfwUl not present) - - eyes.
Remarquez que On est toujours no- Remark that On is always
minaiif du verbe, et que, quoiqu* il nomiruitive (of the)— ,—, though u
repr^sente souvent les mots we, they, represents often — we, they,
PEOPLE, qui sont du nombre plurier*«, il people, which are (of the) ,it
demande toujours le verbe k la troisieme requires always — in -third
personne au singulier, comme on le** voit ^cinthej-^ as we it** see
dans ces exemples ; these — ,
On vient ; On dit ; On croit ; People come ; — say , - believe ;
On pense; Ovrapporte; On orefW, ^C. .think; —^epoii; ^ have received.
A LA LANGUE B'RANfAISE. 55
CHAP, VI.
DES VERBES.
Le TEKBR est un mat dont Tusage est Tk$ verb is — (of u^iekj • ttM«
de designer 1* existence^ ou V ciction dea todetwu — ^or — {of the)
^tres qui sont le sujet de nos pens^lis. , beings that are — ofourthonghts.
L' existence; comme, jb suis^ /exisie. 2^— ;«, I am, I exist,
L' action; comme, je parle, JK chante^ -— ; «, Ispeak, Ising,
JE marche, je 6ow, je mange, 8fc, • walk, - driak, - eat, ^c.
Toute action dem^nde un ag'en^, c'est- tjveri^^ requires- agent, that is
a -dire, un 6tre pour produire cette action, to say, -being to produce — ,
et cet agent s' appelleen grammaire le 'this-^iscaikdingramnuir'
nomindtifdn verbe. —fo/tiO— •
Nous avons vu page 41, qu* (ii y a) We have seen ^4t, that Cthere are)
/ro2f personnes, dont la premiere est celle three ^,( of which) -first -that
qui parle ; la seconde celle k qui oq whospeahf; — that to whom we
parle, et la troisiime celle dont on parle. speak^ - - tJiti-a . (ofwhum) - — .
49. Le verbe doit 6tre dif mSme rke -^ must be Cof the) same
nombre et de la m&ne personne que le — of'same—ut-
nominatif, et ceci s'appelleen grammaire — t'thisiscalUdin-^
accord du verbe avec son nomiuatif ; ex. agreement (of the) — with id—; et
J*apprends : TV apprends ; IL apprmd; ^ leam; thou leamest; he leams
ELLE apprend, ^^le leams,
MoN FRiRE apprend; ]^A SCBUR ap- -brother teams; 'sistei' leams.
prend.
Nous apprenons ; vous apprenez, - leam ; • leam^
Ils ou elles apprenneni; bxes fr^res -team; ^broihers
apprennent ; mes s(eurs apprennent. leam; - sisters leam.
Le nomiJiatif du verbe se place tantfit ^Ae— (.-) — & placed «nmetf ma
avant, et tantut apres le verbe. "'Z^^* " — «/*«* " — •
50. Dans les phrases qui ne sont pas In - seiitenees which are fwt
interrogatives, le nominatif se place avatit interrogative, — is placed before
le verbe ; ex. — ; «•
J* apprends bien ; tu apprends bien ; I leam well.; - leamest well ;
II apprend bien ; elle apprend bien. - leam* • ; - leams — .
MoN FRiRE apprend bien; ma sceur well; - —
apprend bien, .
Nous apprenons bien ; vous appre- - Uam - ; - leam
nez bien. well.
Ils apprennent bien; elles appren- -learn^; -leam
neut bien, well.
Mes FRiRES apprennent bien; mes '- well;-
soRURs apprennent bien. toell.
5() INTRODUCTION
DES VERBES.
Mum quand la phrase est interroga- But when ,
/ere, c* est -^ -dire, quand on fait une i.e., --osfc.
question, (il faut) considdrer si le no- 'f(iti8neceaary)(to ') whether -
minatif du verbe est un nom ou un "-(of the) noun or a
PRONOM* — .
51. Si, quand on^ fait une question^ Ift—wt^iuka—,
le nominatif du verbe est un pronom — (of the)
personnel}^ ou Je pronom indefini}^ on — ,«• on
ou CE, ces pronoms se placent en fran- or ce, these — are placed ^-^
^ais comme en anglais apres le verbe; ex. as ; ex.
ApprendS'JE* bien 9 Apprends-rv bien ? Learn i* well 7 Leamest thou — ?
^pprend-ih bien? Apprend-ELLE bien? Leamshe^J Learns she — 7
jipprenons-yovs ? Apprenez-Yovs bien? Learn we — 7 Leamyou — 7
Apprennent-iLS ? Apprennent-ELLES bien ? Learn they — 7 I^am they — 7
Que dil-OV ? E«^CE Id tout ? ^^hat say peopU 7 Is that all 7
52. Si, dans une phrase interrogative^^, If,ina sentence—,
le nominatif du verbe est un nom, on -^ (of the) noun,w^
place ce nom avant le verhe, de m6me —«Aii— before — , the same
que si la phrase n'dtait pas interrogative ; ««/ — was not — ;
mais pour marquer qu' on fait une qiuS' but to shew that we ask — ,
tion, on ajoute apr&s le verbe un des we add after — one (of the)
pronoms personnels*^ il, elle, ils, ou il, elle, lis,
ELLEs, suivant' le genre et le nombre du 3te]lest(agreeablyto)»—and —
nom qui est le nominatif du verbe; ex. (\*f the)— which (of the) — ; ex.
Votre FRERB apprend'lL* bien ? - brother learns he* well 7
Votre SGB UR apprend-ELhE bien ? - «"**«• Uams she — t
Vos FRiRES apprennent'lL8 bien ? - Brothers learn they — ?
Vos s(£URs apprennent'ELLES bien ? - asters leam they — 7
CHAP. Vll.
DES ADVERBES.
Nous avons vu page 55, que le verbe We have seen—, that —
est un mot qui sert k exprimer une action; ts •-- servesto express —
mais comme la mSme action pent se faire but as-' same — may be performed
de dijfferentes^ manieres, on^ a adopts in— manners, wn** have adopted
certains mots auxquels on^ a donn6 le (towhich) '- given-
nom d* ADVERBE, ' pour exprimer la , to express »
mani^re dont se fait cette action ;. comme, —(in which) is done this- ; as,
Je marche vite ; Tu marches lentement. - walk fast ; - walkest slowly
Nous parlous bien ; Vous parlez mal. - speak well ; - speak badly.
* When the i^nglish ask a question, they are obliged to have recourse to the signs do, does,
did ; as. Do I leam well ? Doest thou leam well ? Does he leara well 1 Does your brother leam
well 1 Does your sister leam well 1 Do we leam well ? Do you leam well 1 Do they leam
well ? Do your brothers leam well 1 Do your sisters leam well ? Did I leam well ? ^c. ;
the French, as you see, do not require any signs, and when these signs occur in engUsh, they
must be left out in french .
X LA LANGUE FRAN^AISE.
57
DES A.DVERBES.
Les mots VITE, LENTEMENT, ' BIEN, fast, slowly, well,
MAL sont des" ADVERBES. badly are - bn.b. adverbs
53. L'adverbe, ^tant (& regard du)
verbe ce que Tadjectif est ^ I'igard du
nom, c*est - & - dire, exprimant quelque
eirconstance du verbe, doit se placer im-
mediatement apres le verbe ; ex.
Je vis hier voire sceur.
Elle parte tr^s-bien fran^ais.
Elk aime fort Ict^ lecture,
54. Les adverbes se placent souvent en
anglais, indiff^remment avant ou apres le
verbe ; comme, / often see him^ or i
see him often, j very seldom spetdc to
Aim, or j speak to him very seldom ;
en fran^ais, touts ces adverbes doivent
se placer apres le verbe ; ex.
Je (me promenej souvent senl.
Je vais rarement a la ville,
Je vais toujours d la campagne.
55. Les adverbes nigatifs sont ne-pas ;
ME-point ; ne-plus ; ne-jamais ; ne-
auERE 3 ne-nullement ; ne se place
toujours avant le verbe, et pas, point,
PLUS, jamais, ou&re, nullement, com-
me les autres adverbes, se placent im-
roddiatement apres le verbe ; ex.
Je ne fi^'aime pas or point.
Je NB veiix plus la** voir,
Je NE lui^ parlerai jamais.
Jc N* y"* consens nullement.
Vous N* y** avez qu^re pense,
CHAP. vm.
- • being Cwith respect to the)
— tohat*^ . . 15 . — _ . -
— , i. e. expressing some
— Cqf the) — , must be placed
— after - — ; ex,
- saw yesterday - — .
- speaks very well french,
- likes much -' reading.
- -r- are placed often in
— , indiscriminately before or after ■
— ; as, - often - -, or -
— - often. - very seldom - -
— , or - - - - very seldom ;
in — , all these — must
be placed after ; ex.
- walk often alone,
- go seldom to town,
• ^0 always into • country.
The — negative are no, not ;
no, not ; no more ; never ; but
little ; by no means ; ne is placed
— before , - pas, point,
plus, jamais, guere, nullement,
^t^ • other — , are placed
immediately after ; ex.
- her** love not.
- will no more het^ see,
- (to her)** (will speak) never.
- (to it**) consent (by no means.)
- (of it) have (very little) thcught.
DES PROPOSITIONS.
Les propositions sont des^ mots The — are -^^-^ words
qui servent k exprimer le rapport que which — to express - relatian -
plusieurs mots de la m^me phrase ont several -of- same sentence have
les uns aux autres; comme quarid je dis ; the one (to the) other; as when 1 My
Je viens de Londres.
Je vais A BcUh aveg ma sceur,
Je passerai chez votre mere,
Je ne partirai pas sans vous^ voir.
- come from London.
- (am going) to — with - sister,
- (will call) upon - — .
- will not set out without •> seeing.
Les mots de. A, avec, chbz, sans, - - de, a, avec, chez, sans,
■ont des* propositions qui servent are-'N-^* — - —
58 INTRODUCTION
DES PRiPOSITIQNS.
h exprimer le rapport qu (il y a) entre reUtim - (ther$ UJ betwetin
le verbe qui les** pr^cMe, et le substantif them^ precedes,
qui les** suit, et k les** unir ensemble. • themfolhwt, - to - unite together
56. Les propositions se placent souvent — are placed of ten**
en anglais indiflRSremment avant ou apres • - ind'ucriminately ^or-
le substantif qu'elles rt^gissent ; comme, - — which they govern ; at,
With toliom were you? or. With whom- -J or,
fFhom were you with ? Whom - - with 1
Of what do you speak ? or, Of what /or,
fVhat do you speak op ? What of 1
En fran^ais, les propositions se placent In — , — are placed
toujours avav;t le mot qu'elies rOgisspnt ; ex. alway^ which - govern ; ex.
A\ EC qui eiait'il? de quoi parlez-vous? Withtrfcomtwu-'/ Of what epeak
CHAP. IX.
DES CONJONCTIONS.
Nous voyons page 57, que les prepo- We see • ST, that —
sitions servent k unir plusieurs mots en- — to unite tevftal • together,
semble pour en former une phrase; les to (of them) form -sentence; -
CONJONCTIONS servent k unir pin- — to unite several
sieurs phrases en une, et k exprimer le sentences in one, -to —
rapport qu'elles ont entre elles ; comme, relation which - • between them ; as
quand je dis : when I say :
JHrai a la vUle, sHlfait beau tems, - (sha^l go) to town, if it is fine tceather
Nous parlirons quand vous voudrez, - f«*aii set, out) when - like.
• Je nHrai pas (A bioins que) vous ne - (will go ) not unless -
veniez avec mot, come with me.
Lies mots si, quand, A MOINS quit - . si, quand, a moins que
sont des* conjonctions. are — • »■• — .
Vous verrez dans la derniere parti e de - (will see) in • last part
cet ouvrage, une liste des conjonctions this work, - list (of the) —
avec leurs diff^rents usages. with their various uses.
The learner having read the rules so far, must read them over again if he does not
understand them well. But as he must now have some general idea of the differeme in the
construction, or arrangement of words in the two languages, he should try at th^ same time,
to translate the following exercises into freneh. This will be the meant qf impressing the
rules on his mind. If the exercise on each rule is found too long, he has no need to write
any more than to be convinced that he understands it, and dwell only on such parts as •eem
to him the most dijicult. If his time is not entirely taken up with these exercises, he
should now peruse the verbs, that he may be able to go on without interruptton when he
comes to the exercises on the verbs, which he cannot write with ease or advantage before he
has a general knowledge of the conjugations.
r 59 )
AN
INTRODUCTION
TO
FRENCH GRAMMAR
PART U.
EXERCISES
ON THE
RULES
CONTAINED IN THE FIRST PART.^
The French language* as we have seen before, is like the
euglishi composed of NINE different sorts of words, commonly Hnown
by the iiamss of
NOUN, PRONOUN, PREPOSITION,
ARTICLE, VERB, CONJUNCTION,
ADJECTIVE, ADVERB. INTERJECTION.
• The rules of syntax are too numerous, too ftiU of exceptions, and exceptions of excep-
tions to be retained, or even understood all at once by tender or slow minus. The folloir-
mg exercises, upon the fundamental rules only, are intended to give a general idea oi
the language. The learner may write them whilst he is perusing the verbs, after which
he may pass to the other exercises, which iarJude «Tery thing &vt can be reduced into
rales in the french language.
60. AN INTRODUCTION
CHAP. T. •
NOUN.
Every word is called a noun which names a beings either real, as
S7//2, moouy earthy many hou9e, tree ; or ideal, a;», god^ heaven, honour , Sfc,
Nouns are distinguished into proper and common,
A noun proper, or proper name, is the christian or family name
of a person; as, John, James, Voltaire, Shakespear: of a river; as,
Ihe Thames, the Mersey: of a place; as, l^aris, London: of a county;
as, Middlesex, Lancashire : of a country ; as, England, France, Sfc.
Nouns common, or common names, are the names of beings in general,
of which we know several ; as, man, woman, child, house, tree, river,
city, country, horse, cow, sheep, dog, ^c.
N, B. In this class are comprised the abstract names of virtue, vice,
pleasure, pain, love, desire, fear, hatred, glory-, honour, and such like.
Two things are to be considered in nouns ; the gender and the number
The gender is the distinction between the sexes.
All nouns in french are either masculine or feminine.
By m,asculine is meant the m>ale being ; as, man, horse, bull, dog.
"By feminine is meant ihe female being; as, tpoman, mare, cow, bilch.
The names of beings whose sex is unknown, and of those inanimate
beings, called things, which are of the neuter gefider in english, are
either masculine or feminine in french, as custom has fixed it.^
There are ttvo numbers, the singular and the plural,
A noun is singular when we speak of one being only ; as, a book, un
livre; a house, une maison ; a tree, un arbre; a ship, un navire, &c,
A noun is plural when we speak of more than one,
N. B. The plural is generally formed in french as in english, by
adding s to the singular; as, des livres, book«; des maisons, houses;
des arbres, trees; desnavires, ship*, 8fc.
Except the nouns ending in 9 or jp in the singular, which are the
same in the plural : as, monJUs, my son ; mesjils, my sons ; une brebis,
a sheep ; des brebis, sheep ; une noix, a nut ; des noix, nuts ; une voix^
a voice ; des voix, voices.
Except also the nouns ending in u, which take x instead of s for the
sign of the plural number; as, chapeau, hat; chapeaun, hats; jeu^
game ; jeux, games, Sfc.
And the nouns ending in ai, ail, which change I or il into ttx for the
plural ; as, ma\, evil ; maux, evils ; cheval, horse ; chevaux, horses ;
^tfn^rai, general ; ^^n^raux, generals ; ^rat^ail, labour; ^raoaux, labours.
* The gender of these nouns is known by the termination ; rules are given in the syntax
how to discriminate it ; until then, in the introductory exerciseSi the nouns matculine will
be marked m,, the/emtntn«will be marked/.
TO FRENCH GRAMMAR.
CHAP. II.
ARTICLE.
61
The same noun admitting different meanings^ as for example ; tub
bread, the wine; some bread, some wine; this bread, that
wine; my breads thy bread, his bread; my wine, Sfc, it was
necessary to adopt some signs which would fix its proper meaning.
These sigjis, called article, are various, and generally receive their
appellation from the office which they perform in the sentence. They
are called in this treatise,
DEFINITE, that which defines the object ; as, the bread, the wine,
PARTITIVE, that which denotes a portion of the object ; as, some
bread, some toine.
NUMERAL, that which numbers the objects ; as, a or one shilling.*
DEMONSTRATIVE, that wh\ch points out the object; as, 7^£ri5 or that
bread, these or those clothes.
POSSESSIVE, that which expresses the possession of the object ; as, jrr
bread, thy bread, his bread, her bread, our bread, your bread,
THEIR bread; my wine, thy wine, his wine, ^c*
21ie signs called article, are declined infrench asfuU-ows:
DEFINIT.
THE;
SINGULAR.
1 ^ , "
Masculine, Feminine.
LE, LA.
PLURAL.
3
Meuc. and Fern,
LES.
Of, from
THE;
DU,
deLA,
DES.
To, at
THE;
AU,
h LA,
AUX.
PAR TIT.
SOME;
DU,
de LA,
DES.
NUMERAL
A, AN;
UN,
UNE,
DEMONS.
THIS, THAT;
CE,
CLTIE,*
THESE, THOSE;
...
• . • .
CES.
POSSESS.
MY;
MON,
MA,»
MES.
THY;
TON,
TA,
TES.
HIS, HER, ITS;
SON,
SA,
SES.
OUR;
NOTRE,
NOTRE,
NOS.
YOUR;
VOTRE,
VOTRE,
VOS.
THEIR ;
LEUR,
LEUR,
LEURS
* See note* page 31, to which might be sddod all the numbers, and the words
CHAQUB, eack; TOUT, every; PLUSIEURS, several; which exclude the article from the
noun, and have the same property as the words generally known by the name of artici p.*
62
AN iKfRODUCTION
CHAP, III.
ARTICLE and NOUN.
GENERAL RULES.
L The signs called articls are never used without a noun after them^
and they must be of the same gender and number as that noun; thiSy in
grammar^ is called agreement of the article with the noun; ex.
SINGULAR.
1 2
Feminine.
^ LA Mere,
The
of The
to The
A
The
of The
io The
Masculine.
le Pere,
DU
AU
UN
Le
DU
AU
Pere,
Pere.
Pere,
Pain.
Pain.
Pain.
Some DU Pain,
Pain.
MON Pdre.
This \
That]
CE
M?/
?
of My a de u on Pere.
to My fS d MON Pere^
My m MON Pain,
XifMy ^(feMON Pain.
to JWy f' d MOV Pajw.
if « g
Your
Their
TON Pawz.
SON Pai/i.
SON Paiji.
NOTRE Pafn.
votre Pain.
LEUR Pain.
the
of the
io the
a
the
of the
io the
gcZcLA Mere,
" ^ - ■ Mert
gaLA
g LA
^dei.k
: a LA
«oin£ (2eLA
this
that
UNE Merc.
Ffancfe.
Vidnde,
Viande.
Viande,
plcraI.
3
Masculine and Feminine.
}
CETTE Viande,
Mire.
my g MA
of my § rfe M A Mere,
io my
my
of my
io my
thy
his
her
our
?3 a MA
g MA
^deMX
• a MA
TA
SA
SA
Mere.
Viande.
Viande.
Viande.
Viande.
Viande.
Viande.
the
of the
to the
. the
of the
iothe
some
o
LEs Enfants.
DES Enfanis.
Aux Enfants.
i
M
B0
LES
OES
AUX
Habits.
Habits.
Habits.
DEB Habits.
CEs Habits.
NOTRE Viande.
your VOTRE Viande.
their leur Viande.
these \
those J
my I MES Enfants.
of my gJeMES Enfants.
to Tny B d MES Enfants.
my g MEs Habits,
of my grfeMEs Habits.
io my SdMEs Habits.
thy
his
her
our
your
H
a
H
as
TES
SES
SES
NOS
VOS
Habits.
Habits.
Habits,
Habits,
Habits,
their leurs Habits.
EXERCISE.
The father, the mother, the children. The good nature of the father,
pere, mere, enfants, * bon naturel m.
the tenderness of the mother, the civility of the children. Speak to the
• tendresse f. * civUM f. Parlez
father, tell it to the mother, give it to the children. The brother, the
ditee.le donnei^ frere.
* Before you prefix an article to a noun, never omit to consider,
1 Whether the noun which follows the article is nuueuline or feminins ;
2 Whether it is tingular or olural.
If the noun which follows tne article is nuuc, sing* use tue signs contained in the 1
column.
If the noun which follows the article ia f em, nng, use the ngns contained in thfi2 column.
If the noun which follows the article is plural, whether masculine or feminine, use the
signs contained in the 3 column.
t Observe also, that if the noun is singular in english, it miust be singular in french, and
if it is plural in english, it must be made plural in french, agreeably to the rules, page 60,
TO FRENCH GRAMMAR. 63
ARTicLS and koUn.
sister, the cousins. The complaisance of the brother, the modesty
ujnir, cousins. * complaisance f. * modestie t
of the sister, the kindness of the cdusins. The hor^e, the cow, the
* bont6L ch§val, vache,
dogs. The bridle of the horse, the horns of the cow, the ears of the
chiens, * bridB f. comes oreiltes
dogs. Bring it to the horse, give it to the cow, leave it to the dogs,
AfiporteZ'ie donnet-U laissex-le
The nose, the mouth, the eyes. The tip of the nose, the size of
• n«s, m. houche/S* yeux. * boutm., grandeur f,
the mouth, the beauty of the eyes. A glass, a spoon, a knife, a
heautii. • t/err«, m. cuiller,f, cout6au,m.
fork. Some wine^ «ofne beer, tome glasses. This dinner, this
fourchette, f. * vin, m, bih'e, f. * dtner, m.
table, these dishes. That cheese^ that bottle, those apples. My arnij
table /f» plats, fromage,m, bouteille,{. pommes, t bras, mi
m^hand, m^feet. Hwhat, ^is shirt, Af« stockings, ifcr apron,
• main, f. * < pieds, t chapeau, m. • vhemise, f. • 6a*. * tabjiier, m.
Aer gown. /*er scissarg. Our garden, our hous^^ our fields. Your
• ro6«, f. • ciseatLX, . jardin, m. tnaijon, f. champs.
umbrella, your watch, your gloves. JTieir coach, their servants,
parapluie, m. <^ montre, F. gants. earrosse, m, domestiques.
If the noun which follows the article is singular, and begins with aM
VOWEL, or H mute,! whether it is masculine or Feminine, use
l' I* le, la ; as, The g l' Enfant, m. l' Hiatoire. f.
deil 8 du, deLA; oi The tideh* Enfant. dejJ Histoire.
dh* ^ AU, d LA ; to The ^ d l' Enfant. a i! Histoire.
GET CE ; This or That a get Enfant. gette Histoire.
HON MA ; My § MON Enfant MbN Histoire.
TON ta; Thy § ton Eiifant. ton Histoire.
SON SA ; JTw or JETer * son Enfant, son Histoire.
EXERCISE.
TAtf air. TAe water. Jlfy slate. Her writing. His school. Her
• air. eau, • ardoise. ■ ieriture. • ^co^e. • -
school. 2%f« man. 2%^/ child. This tree. TAai bird. The ornament
' 'homme enfant. arbre, oiseau, omement
of the mind. The history of the year. The wing of the bird. He
esprit. ■ 'histoire ann£e. aile II
sacrificed his honour to the interest of the state. She has lost the
sacrifia 'honneur int^rSt ^t. EUe a perdu
aflfection of her friend. Her obstinacy is the cause of his inconstancy.
affection * ami. opiniAtreti est * cause f. ineonstance.
• See note • page 62. t See note • page 83.
X The h mute is marked in these exercises wiUi an apostrophe, this mark , before it.
64 AN INTRODUCTION
ARTICLE and NOUN.
O The signs called article must be repeated before every noun infrench
agreeably to the gender and number of each noun, though the nouns are
in the same sentence^ and though the article is not repeated in english ;
as.
The father, mother and children are (gone out,)
Le p^re, LA mere et les enfants sont sortis, i. e. the father, the Sfc,
Some bread, meat* money and clothes.
Du painj de la viandct de j.*argent et des habits, i. e. some bread, Sfc.
EXERCISE.
Bring the bread and butter"; the tea and coffee"; some milk or
Apportex * painm, et beurre;m, th6m, cafii m. * laitm^ou
cfeam' ; a cup and saucer" ; a knife and fork" ; some bread and
creme ; f. t(use f. ioucoupe ; f« eouteau m. fourchette ; f.
cheese" ; the dishes and plates" ; the beans and bacon" ; the pepper
fromage ; m. '* plat t assiette ; t feve t l^rd ; m. poivre m.
and salt". My brother and sister" are (gone out.) His father and
seL m. * frtre sontr sont sortis. — *
mother" are dead. She has lost her friends and relations".
sont morts, EUe a perdu amt't parent,^
M PARTICULAR RULES.
^ The nam^s of persons and places are used in french, as in english,
without article ; ex.
I like Voltaire, J'aime Voltaire,
London. Londres,
I speak of Voltaire, Je parle de Voltaire,
of London. de Londres.
I prefer it to Voltaire, Je le prefcre A Voltaire^
to London. A Londres.
Observe that de and A which are prefixed to Voltaire, Londres, are
not article9 ; they are prepositions used to unite the noun to the verb.
exercise.
I have read almost all the^ works *of Voltaire and *Rousseau.
J* ax lu. presque toutes csuvres * (a)
I am reading now the^ adventures of Telemachus the son of Ulysses
Je — ^ lis aprisent aventures TiUmaque — * fils X Ulysse
and Penelope. Have you ever been in London? Yes, 1 have, /. e., been.
(a) Fin^Urpe, Avez - vow jamais 6t6 a Oui, j'y ai tie
Is it as large as Paris ? London is much larger than Paris.
I^t-il aussi grand que est beaucoup plus grand que
London is ^Ae> largest city in Europe. Have you seen Naples? No;
plus grande ville £. de V vu Acn ;
I have been at Florence and Rome, but I have nof" been at Naples.
ai 6t6 a (a) maisje n*ai pas 6te
* A dash, this mark ( — ), under a word shews that the word is not expressed in french
agreeably to rules which wUl be seen in the last part of this work.
t See note t page 6f .
(a) The preposition must bo repeated before every noun in french, in the same way as
tho article > t See nota ♦ page 28.
TO FRENCH GRAMMAR. 65
ARTICLE and NOUN.
But the names tf countries and provinces which are used without O
an article in english^ require in french one of the signs le, la, les ;
Du, de LA, DEs; au, a la, aux, agreeably to the gender and number
of the noitn ; as,
I like Portugal, Taime le Portugal,
France, la France,
England. l' Anghterre,
I speak of Portugal, Je parle du Portugal,
of France, &c. de la Frajice, 8fc,
I prefer it to Portugal, Je le prefcre au Portugal,
to France, &c. k la France, Sfc,
exercise.
Italy* is the garden . of Europe*. France* is also a fine country ;
^Italie* est jardhi m. *Kurope4 France f. est aussi beaii jmys ; m.
it lies between Spain', Italy, Switzerland, Germany*, Ho]land^
elle (est sHuee) entre Kspagne, • Suisse, f. * AUemagne, Hollande, f.
and England*. Spain, with all the gold of Mexico* and Peru*, is
et AngLeterre. * avw tout * or Mejnqv.em. (a) P^rou,m, n'est
not^ so rich as France. Brazil* belongs to Portugal, Mexico to
pns si riche que * Brtsil m. appartient * m. *
Spain, Canada* to England, Martinique* and Guadeloupe* to France.
* Canada m, * Martinique f. Guadeloupe f. *
Observe however that the names of countries are used without the O
article in french, when they come after verbs denoting dwelling or
moYement, such as to be in, to live in, to co to, to come from;
In these instances, in, to are expressed by en, and from by de ; as.
He is in France. II est en France,
in England. en Angleterre,
He is going to France, II va en France,
to England. en Angleterre,
He comes from, France, // vient de France^
from England. d* Angleterre.
exercise.
My brother livles in Switzerland and my sister in France. I intend
demeure • * J* Caidessein)
to go to France and Italy, (as soon) as the war is over. I come
d* alter • • (a) austitdt que * guerre f, sera finie. Je viens
from Portugal, and I (am going) to Holland and England. Have you
• Je vais • • (a) Avez - innts
ever been to Spain ? No ; I (am going) to Turkey and to Greece,
jamais itt • "Son ; Je vais • Turquie • Grece,
whence I (will pass) into Spain. I would rather go to Italy.
(d" ott) je passei'ai en • J' ainerais mieux alter •
* The figures at the top of thd words or under the words, indicate the number of the
parajpiipk where the rule concerning that word is to be found ^ if you do not perfectly
recollect the rule, never omit to look for it, and read it Qvery time with the example.
t The parts of the world follow the same rules as the names of countries.
W
66 Aiy INTRODUCTION
ARTICLE and NOUN.
THE; LE» LA. L£S , DU» de LA» D£S ; AU, a LA, AUX.
/ j4fl common names tiBed in a general sense ; as, bread is ^ood ; or
in a PARTICULAR sense ; as, the bread which I eat is good, must hxivt
before them one of the definite signs le, la, les; du, de la, des ; au, d
LA, AUX, agreeabfy to the ^nder and number of the noun; ex.
general seTisCf no article in english before the noun,
I like bread, J*aime le pain,
meat, la viande,
money, l' argent^
clothes. les habits,
1 speak of bread, Je parte du pain,
of meat, ©y clothes. de la viande^ des habits.
I prefer it to bread, to meat, &c. Je leprefire au pain, k la viande, ^'c
PARTICULAR sense, in e?iglish the before the noun,
I like the bread ^ J'aime le pain \
the meat f ^ i la viande f .»^ .
<Ac money r ''*^«- i,' argent n""'^ "'•
the clothes) les habits J
I speak of the bread & meat I have. Je parte du pain et^e Lkviande quefai.
I prefer it to the bread & meat he hsLS,Jeleprefere a vpain et k la viande qiHl a.
Gold^ and silver^ are precious, but ^iron and steel^ are
^r * ^argent tout prScieux, mais fer m. ^acier sojit
EXERCISE.
more useful.
plus utUe$.
The gold and silver of Peru are purer'^ than those of ^Europe.
• a P^rot* m. sont (plus purs) que ceiue •
ModestyT and virtue are preferable to beauty and ^riches. I prefer
modestie f. Hertu f. sont prif^rabUs ^heautt f. {tk)richesse, Je pr^fere
the modesty and virtue of your sister, to the beauty and "riches of your
' ^ de > (a)
cousin. Peace* and plenty* make men* happy. (Let us preserve) the
coiLsine, paix f. ^abotidance rendent kommes heureux, eousei'vous ^
peace and plenty which we enjoy. Patience and perseverance are
" dont nous jouissons, f patience i, "tpersivirance i, sont-
necessary to happiness. I admire the patience and perseverance of
n^cessairet '^bonhenr, m. J' admire * fp • f.
your brother. Pride* and vanity are generally the cause of the mis-
^orgueil fvaniti f. ordinairement * cause f. * »»"/-
fortunes of men. (Let us go) into the garden to see if the fruit is
heur ^homme, atlons dans * fardin m. — voir si * fruit m. est
ripe. Which fruit do you" like best? Gooseberries or strawber-
mur. Quel — aimez - vmis lemienxt fgroseille ou.f fmise'!
ries ? I do not** like gooseberries ; I like cherries and peaches.
Je — n* aime pas • J' a»>i2e "^ cerise ^piche.
Children generallv like fruit. I prefer milk* and cheese to fruit.
enfant * en gitUral aiment ^ Je pr^fere lait m. ^frontage m. *
* Tlie figures annexed to tlie words indicate the rule which that word requires.
.' TO FRENCH GRAMMAR. 67
ARTICLK and NOUN.
OF exprmed fyy D£ ; tut by dn, di la, des.
Observe that the prtpontion of before a nofin med in a obneral q
sense, preceded by another noiin^ uted in a partitivb sense, cannot be
txpreued by du, de la, des, which would render the erpremon particular
and mean ov the, it must be expreued by de only^ without any regard
to gender or number ; as.
He gave me a pound q/* bread, II me doftna une livre de pain,
a piece q/^meat, un morceau de viande,
a bag of money, un sac d'* argent,
aheap o/' clothes. un toe n^ habite, ^
Not, Une livre dv pain; Un morceau de la viande, Sfc. which would
mean a pound of the bread ; a piece of the meat, Sfc,
N. B. In thii rule. mu$t be included the following word»^ whichj
though they have no sign after them in englinh, require the connective
particle de to unite them to the noun which follown them :
ASSEZ, enough;
ao.
A8Se2
DE pain.
BEAUcouF, much, many ;
Bcaucoup
DE viande.
coMBiEN, how much, how many;
combien
D* argent.
TANT, 80 much, so many ;
rant
D* habits.
AUTANT, as much, as many ;
jutant
DE pain.
PLUS, more ;
plus
DE viande.
MoiNS, less;
Moins
d' argent.
TROp, too much, too many ;
Trop
d' habits.
OUfc'RE.t}'*"^'-^'^'
peu
Guere
DE pain,
DE viande.
PAS, POINT, no, not;
pas, or point
, D* argent.
JAMAIS, never \
jamais
d' habits.
Not, assez du pain, Sfc, which would mean enough of the bread, 8fC.
EXERCISE.
I have bought a pair of boots, and two pairs o/* shoes. Drink a
J' ct aektU ^ poire f. * hotte, deux * $oulier. Buves ^
glass q^wine. Have a little patience*. This is (a day) of rest,
rerrem vin, Ayet unpeu n.b. q* gg^ (auJQurd*huijow)^ repot.
I have many things" to do. I have no money^ and I have very
bteueeup ehee^"^' a faire, Je n'ai ,pat argent*^'^- f ai tres-
few friends*. You have more property" ihah I have. I have not*»
peu anu. "•■• avez plus lien '^ *• que moi — Je n'ai pat
(so many) friends* as you. Your friends have (cu much) interest* as
taiU ^B- que ont autant cridit **•■• qu€
mine. Give me little wine* and much water*. You give me**
Uindens. Zhnnet-moi peu ^•*- eau.^'^ Vous me** dotinez
(too much) wine* ; you do not* give me** water enough*. I never
trop N.B. y^fuf _ n^ me*^ donnez pat assez. **•■• Je ««•*
drink wine* without putting a (good deal) of water* (into it**.)
lots jamais "•*• sans y** mettre — beaucoup "•■• —
* See note * p. 88. t Observe that gukbe is used only in negative sentences.
p 2
68 AN INTRODUCTION
ARTICLE AND NOUN.
SOME, ANY; DU, de LA, DES
y If you want to express only a part of the substance of which you are
speaking ; ojs some bread, some meat, Sfc. use before the noun one of
the partitive signs du, de la, dfs, agreeably to gender and number.
These signs are the same as those of the definite article of the ; as.
He gave me some bread, // me donna nv pain,
some meat, de la viande,
some money, de L* argent,
some clothes. des habits.
I. c. a portion of the bread, of the meat, of the money, of the clothes.
N. B. The sign some is often understood in english, before such nouns
as bread, meat, money, Sfc, but tfie sign which represents it in french,
cannot be omitted ; and it must be repeated before every noun ; as,
He gave me bread, meat, money, clothes ; i. e. some bread, some meat.
II me donna du pain, de la viande, de l* argent^ des habits.
exercise.
The dinner is on the table. Will you have meat'^'*"* or fish*^**?
diner m. est tur f. Vaulez-oou» — viande f. ou poisson m.?
Will you have some beef and cabbage ; some mutton and turnips? I
— bceufm, ^choux ; plur. mouton m. hiavet / Je
(shall e«t) some fish and potatoes. Bring me some salt and pepper.
mangerai Xpommes de terre.) Apportez-moi ul m. 'powre, m.
What will you drink? Will you have beer', or cider'? I (will drink)
Que voideZ'Vous boire 7 — bitre, f. ou cidre m. / Je boirni
some wine and water'. Put some bread and cheese, on the table.
vin m, *eau. Mettez pain m. ^fromage, m. sur f.
SOME, ANY expressed by de ; not by du, de la, des.
\ Q The partitive signs du, de la, des, require the noun immediately after
them ; therefore if a noun used in a partitive sense is preceded by an
ADJECTIVE, use DE before that adjective, for both genders and numbers,
instead o/du, de la, des, before the noun ; as.
He gave me very good bread, II me donna de tres-bon pain,
excellent meat, d' excellente viande,
fine clothes. de beaux habits.
EXERCISE.
(This is) ^excellent wine, but (that is) "very bad beer. Have you any
Voici excellent vin, tnaU voila tree - mauvaise biere, Avex - vom *®
good beer in France? No; but we have "•good wine and good brandy.
bowne biere en Non; nousavom Don ^^onneCeau-^-vie.)
Good small beer is better than bad wine. You must have fine
^^bonne petite biere eit meilleure que ^^mauoait devez avoir "6entt
fruit in France. Yes ; we have very fine fruit. {Are there) any large trees
en Oui ; avons ^^tree - beau Y a-t-il *• grands arbre
In your garde*? No; (There are only) young trees. Have you not
dans^ jardin'l Non ; (Un^yaqueJ ^^jeunes N* avez-vius pas
better pens to lend me? I have good pens, but bad«> ink.
^^eiHeurei plume a me*^ yriter »*/ /' oi ^%onnet mats mauvaise ena-e
T'O FRENCH GRAMMAR. 69
ARTICLE and NOUN.
How to place tfro nouns together.
TVhen two nouns come together, the French always place first the 1 1
noun which is the subject of discourse, with du, de la, des, de, or A,
before the second noun, agreeably to the sense in which it is used; as,
Petei^s book,
i. e, the book of Peter,-
Some London beer,
i, e. Some heer of London,
La plume du mattre.
Le livre de Pierre.
De la Here de Londres.
The master's pen,
i. e. the pen of the m,aster.
The street door,
t. e the door of the street,
A gold watch,
I. e, a watch of gold.
Some silk stockings,
i. e. Some stockings of silk.
La porte de la rue.
Une montre d' or.
Des has de Aoie,
exercise.
}
}
}
DE, 4tk rule, pro-
per tiames.
DV, de LA fTtkrulef
particmar seme.
DE, OF, Qth rule,
general serne.
Where is WilliamV hat'f? Have you seen MaryV apron'?
Oil est Guillaume chapeau m.l AveZ" vou$ vu Marie tablier m. ?
Will you drink a glass of Port* wine"? NatureV voice' proclaims
Voulez-voiu boire ven'e m. Oporto vin '/ Nature f. voix f. procUtme
godV power^. Ignorance' is the mother of errotf. Have you seen my
liieu pouvoir.m.. ^Ignorance mere ^erreur. va
father^ff horse' ? I (will wait for you**) at the garden gate', or (at the)
cheval 'i Je (voxu^ attendrai) a jardin m. porte, f. ou au
corner of my sister « house'. Shut the kitchen door', and open the
coin m, maison, f, Fermez ^cuisine f. porte, f, ouvree
parlour' window. Bring my gold* watch, and clean my silver® buckles.
salle f. "^fenetre, f. Apportez * or montre, f. nettoyez * argent boucle.
Sometimes however the order of the words could not bd changed in
english in the above manner, without changing also their meaning ; for
tx. A WINE glass. An INK bottle, A TEA spoon, could not be changed into
A glass of WINE, A bottle of ink, a spoon o/tea ; yet the nouns require
this order in french ; but instead of de betweai the tv)o nouns, we use A.
N. B. This is done when the first noun denotes the use of the other; as,
A wine glass, i, e. a glass used for wine. Un verre A vin.
A tea spoon> i. e. a spoon used for tea. Une cuiller kihfi.
EXERCISE.
Give me the wine" bottle, and the water" pot. Put some wine"
DenneZ'moi vin bouieille, f. eau pot. in. Mettez
glasses on the table. Bring the tea" board and the coffee" cups.
verre mr table, f. Appmtes th^ cabaret m. caje tas$e.
There is no powder* in my powder" bag. (Let us go) and sit
II n*y a pas poMrfrc^-B. ^atu sac. m. AUotis — (fious asseoir)
in the dining" room. Have you any fire" arms in your house?
dant diner chambre, f. Aiez ' /Vu arme maxsonf.t
12
70 ^ AN INTRODUCTION
CHAP. IV.
ADJECTIVE.
An ADJECTIVE is a word joined to a noun, to denote some quality or
circumstance belonging to that noun ; as, good bread, bad meat, &c.
It) The ADJECTiVK must be of the same gender and number as the noun
which it qualifies.
An adjective is made feminine by adding e mute to the masculine ; as,
(That is) a pretty boy. Voild un joli gargon.
(This is) a pretty girl. Void une sohiejille.
He is well dressed, II est bien habii.l!^.
She is very well dressed, Elle est tres-bien habill^^.
Except the adjectives ending in e mute, which are of both genders ; as,
Un jeune homme aimable. An amiable young man.
Une jeune femme AiMABiiE. An amiable young woman.
And the adjectives in jr, which change x into ssfor the feminine; as,
Monfrire est paresseut. My brother is lazy
Ma soeur est paresseu^c. My sister is lazy.
The PLURAL number of adjectives is formed like that of nouns^ by
adding s or x to the singular ; see nouns, pogc 60. ex.
Une JOLiE Jille, A pretty girl, Un bi&av chapeau, A^/je hat.
De JOhii&sjUles, Pretty girls. De BEAU<r chapeaux. Fine hats.
N. B. A past PARTICIPLE used to qualify a noun, or coming after the
vm'b to BE <o ejspress an action or the state of the noun, follows the same
. rules as an adjective; ex.
My brother is gone out. Monfrire est sorti.
My sister is gone out. Ma soeur est soRTie.
EXERCISE.
Your brother is diligent; your sister is diligenP^; your brothers are
est diligent; * ' $ont
diligenV^ ; your sisters are diligenP^, Your father is esteemed ; your mo-
• * • estim^ ;
ther is esteemed}^; your sons are esteemed: your daughters are esteemed.
• ^ fits "•' » fil^ »»•
That boy is very civil; that girl is very civil; these gentlemen are
* N tret . ciw/j * • ' mestieurt
yery civil; these ladies are very civile. Our man servant is lazy;
• * dame • — valet paresseux ;
our maid servant is lazy^; our men servants are lazy^^; our maid servants
servante • * — * * — ^
are lazy^. My son is very young ; my daughter is very young; my
• p'is . jeunfi} *
sons are very young ; my daughters arc very young. Your cousin is
* 1 €Ou^ne f.
very amiable; she is officious^ and complaisant}*,
aimable; die officiewi^ eomplaifant,*
• The masculine singular only of adjectives is here giren ; the learner must make the
adjectiye of tiie gender and number which the noun requires, agreeably to the above rules.
TO FRENCH GRAMMAR. 71
ADJECTIVE.
If an adjective qualifies sevehal nouns singular o/^e same gtnder, 14
that adjective must he oj the same gender as those nouns, and plural , as
Her fathei and her uncle are angry. Son pere ei son ancle sont fAch^s*
Her mother and her aunt are an^rj^. Sa mere et sa tante sont vkcHtes.
But if the nouns are of different genders, the adjective must be of I O
the MASCULINE gender, and in the plural number; as.
Her father and mother are angry. Son pere et sa mere sont vkcuis,
exercise.
My mother and sister are ready. His daug^hter and his niece are
» et ■ sont prit, " * fille niecB
civil and obliging. Her son and daughter are dead?*. The horse and
civil^^ obligeant,^* * fils • . mort,* ckeval
the cow have escaped}^ The gate and the door were open^*. The
vache (se sont^ ichappi.* ' barriere f. pmrti f, itatent ouoert,*
man and the woman were gone, I found a glass and a bottle broken,
^iaient parti*, Je trouvai verve m., houteillei, cats4,*
Adjectives are generally placed in english before the noun ; in french 1 U
they are placed after the noun ; as,
A red coat. A round table. A new house.
Un habit rouge. Une table ronde. line maison neuve.
Except these adjectives, which are generally placed before the noun ; 1 /
premier, \st ; second, 2d ; and all the adjectives of number.
BEAU, BEL, m,\Jine, mauvais, bad,
BELLE, fern, f handsome, MECUJLiiT, wicked,
BON, m. bonne, f. good, meilleur, better.
GRAND, great, large, moindre, less.
OROS, m, GRossE, f. big. PETIT, little, small.
JEUNE, young, TOUT, all, whole,
JOLi, pretty, vieux, m. vieille, f. old;'f
A good husband. A handsome woman. A pretty litUe bird.
Un BON mari. Une belle femme, Un joli petit oiseau.
EXERCISE.
England is b, fruitful country. The english^^ nation has made several
^Angielerre est ' fertile^* pays, m. . ^ anglais^^ nation f. a fait plusieurs^
useful^ discoveries. Your sister is a charming^ woman. She has the
utite^ ddcouverie, est * charmant^* femme, EUe a * '
most engaging^^ manners^ Does she^^ know the french^* language?
piiu engageant^^ manieres, f* •— fail - elle^^ ^ fraufai*^^ langue f. 1
I have met . her near the white^* house. She lives in a^ smail^f
Je P^^ai rencontrie ** (pres de) * blanche maison, f. demeure dans *■
house in a large garden. It is an old^f house, and (there is) a bad^ road
maison f. > *' jardin, m. C ert * vieille il y a chemin m.
to go (to it) but it is the bes£^ situation in this neighbourhood.
pour y** aller ** mail e' fit ^ meilleur^^ f. ds ^ voisinuge. m,
* A participle used to qualify u nouu, follows the same rule as an a^ective ; 13 ' "^
t Add to them meme, same, and plusieurs, several, which also come before the noun.
72 AN INTRODUCTION*
ADJECTIVE.
COMPARISON of ADJECTIVES.
The same words which serve to qualify nouns, serve also by the
means of certain adverbs to compare their qualities.
1 Q The comparative of superiority, more before the adjective, or r or
ER added to it, is formed in french by plus* before the adjective; as.
I am more strong, or stronger than you. Jesuis PLVsfort que vous,
1 Q The comparative of inferiority, less, or not so before the adjec
^ tive, is, formed by MoiNst, or pas si before the adjective; as,
I am less strong than you. Je suis moins fort que voiis,
I am not so strong as you. Je ne suis pas si fort ^ue vous,
OA The comparative of equality, formed by as before the adjective is
^formed in french by aussi before the adjective; as,
I am as strong as you. Je suis aussi fort que vous,
Q 1 The superlative most or least before the adjective, or st or est
^ ■*• added to it, is formed by adding le, la, les, to llie comparative words
plus, moins, agreeably to the gender and number of the noun; as.
My brother is the strongest, Monfrere est le plus fort.
My sister is the least strong. Ma sceur est la moins forte.
exercise.
The country is more pleasant than the town. My horse is younger
* campagne f. est ^® agriable que * ville, f, * eheval jeune "
and runs faster than yours. That* house is larger^* and more
court vite *• le voire. muUon^la f. grand *' ^*
convenient than this**, but this** is better built. You write better
commode celie-ci, celU-ci (b) bdtiM icrivez (b)
than I do, because you have ^^better pens. Vice' is l^ss dangerous
moi — , parceque (b) plume, f. Vice m. *• dangerettx
than hypocrisy'. She is not so handsome as her sister, but she is more
^hypocrisie, Kile n*est pas *• belle " saiur, elle est
amiable. She is as rich as you. She is the handso7nest woman in
aimaUe, *> riche «» ^ » belle « (c)
the town. Her father is the jprowrfest" man that I have ever known.
ville, f. orguexUeux^* que aie (d) jamais connu>,
• Except MEILLEUR, better; pire, wm^ ; adjectives, 1 ^.j^j^j^ ^^^ comparative of
MIEUX, better ; pis, worse; adverbs, > themselves
t Except MOINDRE, less ; adjective, J
(b) Beginners are apt to mistake the ^ords MEILLEUR & MIEUX, which are botk
expressed by BETTER.
MEILLEUR, better, is the comparative of BON, good, an adjective, and is added to
nouns ; as.
My pen is good, yours is better. Ma plume est bonne, lavotre est meilleure.
MiEUX, better, is the comparative of BIEN, well, an adverb, and is added to verbs ; as,
I write well, but you write better. J* icrk bien, mais vous derives mieux.
(c) IN, after a superlative, is expressed in french in the same manner as OF ; ex.
She is the finest woman in ths town. C* est la plus belle femme de LA vilU,
(d) QUI, QUE, DONT, after a superlative require the verb in the subjunctive ; as.
She is the finest woman T have ever seen. C* est la plus belle femsne que 7" All jamais vu4.
TO KKENCH GRAMMAR. 73
CHAP. V.
PRONOUN.
A PRONOUN. is a word used to represent a noun; as when I say, i,
instead of naming my own 7iame, thou, you, be, she, it, they,
instead of naming that of another being.
There are various sorts of pronouns, generally known by the names of
PERSONAL, RELATIVE^ POSSESSIVE, DEMONSTRATIVE, INDEFINITE.
OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS are either agents or nominatives of verbs, or they
are objects.
ITie mminat. are, I, THOU, HE, SHE, IT, WE, YE, YOU, THEY.
The objuts are, ME, THEE, HIM, HER, IT, US, YOU, THEM.
OF AGENTS or NOMINATIVE PRONOUNS.
fFhen i, thou, he, she, it, we, you, they, are the nominative ^^^
of a verb, i. e. when there is before or after them, a verb of the same
number and person thai agrees with thein, they are,
1. JE. HE, IT. IL.
THOU. TU. THEY,mas. ILS.
WE. NOUS. , SHE, IT. ELLE.
YOU. VOUS. THEY,f%m. ELLES.
N. B. TAe nominative pronouns keep the same place in the sentence
in french as in english ; ex.
. / have. Thou bast, ne has, &c. Have I? Hast Thou? Has he? Sfc.
J'ai. TV as. il a, S^c. ^wb? ^»-tu? ^-^IL? &c,
EXERCISE.
I speak. Thou writest. He plays. She sings. We walk. You danc»,
parte. 6cri$. joue. chante. marchons. dansn.
They study. Have you done? Is he come? Are they gone
etudient. Avez fiuif Ett venu? Sont partis f
If J, THOU, BE, SHE, WE, YOU, THEY, have not a verb to agree wiihji^
them, or if they are joined to another substantive,* they are,
HE. LUI.
THEY, mas. EUX.
SHE, IT. ELLE.
THEY, fern. ELLES. ex.
It is J who have done that. Cest moi qui aifait cela.
He and J have done that. Lui et moi nous avonsfait cela.
You and they have done that. Vous et eux vous avez fait cela.
ElOBRCISE.
Who has done that? It is not" J; it is he. It was neither
Qui a fait edal Ct n*est pas ^ e* est ^ Ce n*itait ni
he nor I, it was either you or they. He and / were together.
■» ni ■■ e' itait ou wt » ■■ ■• '^nous Hums) ensemble.
I can do that better than he. You can not do it** better than /.
•* puis favre cela (b) que ^ ne pouvex pas !«•* faire (b) ^ ' «»
/.
MOI.
THOU.
TOI.
WE.
NOUS.
YOU.
VOTJS.
* By stthtUintive is meant here every word which either names or represents a mnstanice
74
AN INTRODUCTION
PERSONAL PRONOUN.
OP OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS.
A TABLE skewing how the objective pronouns are expressed, according
to the place which they keep with the verb.
Befbre the verb. After the verb. After a preposition.
24, 25, 27, rules. 26 ruU. 28 ruU.
MOT.
TOI
ME,
to ME.
}
ME. MOI.
THEE,
to THEE.
}
TE. TOI,
HIMSELF,
«
HERSELF,
ITSELF,
►
SE.
THEMSELVES.
,
US,
to US.
.
Whether
24i
before or after the verb,
23, 26, 27 rules.
NOUS.
YOU,
to YOU.
}
VOUS.
HIM,
IT I mas.
}
r.E.
HER,
IT I fern.
}
LA.
THEM.
LES.
to HIM,
to HER. '
k
LUI.
to THEM.
LEUR.
of, frem, \1T,
fw, with ITHEM.
►
EN.
to, at, \IT,
in, by StHEM.
k
Y.(e)
SOI.
NOUS.
VOUS
LUI.
ELLE.
rEUX,f!i.
lELLES,/,
This table shews hi one point of view all the rules concerning tite
objective pronouns.
These pronouns, as you see in the table above, are sometimes governed
by verbs, and sometimes by prepositions.
When the objective pronouns are governed by a verb, they are placed
invariably before that verb. See rules 24, 25 and 27.
Except when the verb commands^ for then the pronouns must be placed
after the verb, and moi, toi must be used, instead of me, te. See rule
26.
If the pronouns are governed by a preposition, they are then independ-
ent of the verb, and must be placed after the preposition. See rule 28.
(e) EN, T, are also adverbs*of place, used, en for THENCE ; Y for THERE, thither,
and they follow the same rules as the pronouns.
on
> (^
CO
OB
CA
*y9
TO FHENCIl GUiVMMAU. iO
PRR80NAL PRONOUN.
The ORDER which the objective pronouns keep toiih the vbrb.
GENERAL RULE. ^.
When the pronouns Af£, thee^ rs, roir, Hijf, hbji, ir, thjbji, ^•'
are governed by a verb, the pronmins me, te, nous^ vous, le, la, les,
LUi, LEUR, EN, Y, whlch represent them, must be placed immediately
BEFORE that verb ; ex.
He sees me. II me voit. literally he me
thee, II TR voit, he thee
UB, II NOUS voit, he us
you. It VOUS voit, he you
him, or it. Il le voit, he him, or i7
Acr, or it, Il la wiY. he her, or i7
^em. // LES voit. he ^Aem
Does he see me? me voit-U ? me
thee? te voit-il? thee
U8? NOUS voit il? us
you? vous voit-il? you
him, or t7/ le voit-il ? him, or f^
Aer, or it? la voit-il? her, or f<
them? LES voit'il? them
He does not see me ; 4*^^. J/ 7ie me voit pas. he fne sees not.
Does he not see me? 8fc, . Ne me voit-il pas? me sees he not?
Does^ he not see thee ? Sfc. Ne te voit-il pas ? thee sees he not ?
BXBRCISB.
1 see you» I see him, I see her, I see them. Do you" see me ?
voi$ •* ■* ** ■* — voyei - wtu •*
Do you see ti« P Do you see him ? Do you see Aer ? Do you see
<Aem P I do not" know you, I do not know him, I do not know
•* — ne cannaisjKU ** — •• •* — . *»
Aer, I do not know them. Do you" not know me P Do you
•* — M •* — ne eonnaiues-voui poi •• 7 — *>
not know ui? Do you not know AfmP Do you not know her?
M W/ .^ 55 «^ 55 U
Do you not know them? I meet them sometimes, but I do not*
— * •* •*'/ rencontre ■* quelqtufoit, — ne
speak (to them). Have you seen your mother lately? I saw Aer
jHirlepas — leur*^. A vex vu depuUpeu'/ vu •*
yesterday. Did she" brin^ yoii any things? She brou|rht me a
kier, — apporta-t-elU ** queique ehml apporta **
new book. Did you" tell Aer that I wished to see AerP
nouoeau liore. m. — aitei'Vaut hti** que touhaitait — voir la** ?
I told Aer that we (should go) to see Aer on Sunday. What did
die I«i** que iriom — voir laU — dimanehe. Que
she" say to you ? She told me that she (would be) glad to see ut
dU-eUe — •« dit ** qu' eerait (bienaite) de voir •^
76
AN INTRODUCTION
literally he me
he thee
PERSONAL PRONOITN
The ORDER which tlie objective pronouns keep with the verb.
GENERAL RULE.
J^O If the OBJECTIVE pronouns MEy THEE, US, YOU, HIM, HER, JT,
THEM are governed by a verb compounded of the auxiliary verbs
HAVE, or BE, and of a participle past, the pronouns me, te, nous,
vous, LE, LA, LES, Lui, LEUR, EN, Y, which represent them, must
be placed before the auxiliary verb ; not between the auxilicry and
the participle ; as,
// m'* a rw.
// T* a vu.
II L* a vu,
II L* a vus.
II N ous a vus.
II VOUS a vus,
II LES a vus.
m' -fa-t'tlvu?
T* si't'il vu ?
L* Vi't'ilvU?
L* a-t'il vue ?
NOUS a-t'il vus?
VOUS a-t'il vus?
LES a-t-ilvus?
II ne M*a pas vu.
Ne M'a-<-i7 pas vu f
EXERCISE.
I have seen you. I have seen him, I have seen her, I have
He has seen me.
thee.
him, or it.
her, or it.
us.
you.
them.
Has he seen me ?
thee?
him, or it?
her, or it ?
us?
you ?
them?
He has not seen 7we ; Sfc.
Has he not seen me? Sfc.
p
CO
> »
9
he him, or it
he her, or it
he us
he you
he them
me
thee
him, or it
her, or it
us
you
them
he m£ has not seen.
me has he not seen ?
P3
a>
OB
ai
vu
u
vu
25*
vue
»•
seen them. Have you seen wie? Have you seen iw ? Have you seen
VUf
-4i;ea-^uu3 ra ■*' /
vus
vu
him ? Have you seen her ? Have you seen them ? Where have you
»*/ vue «*•? vus ^1 Oil
seen Am? I have met ,
vu *** ? rencontr6
him, at the door. He had
kd*
acait
seen
a poi-te, f.
(comino^ out) of the house. He has kept m£ all this while. I would
sortir * mataon. f, retenu ** fowt * temi. m. —
have told Aim*' that I wanted to go. I have told him^ that you
auravs dit lui $ que voulais, •— (m*en alter,) uit lui \ que
had forbid me to stop.\ I have heard you. Had you never**
aviez difendu •* de tn*arreter.^ entendu ** Neaviez ' vous jamais
seen him before? I had met him once or twice, but I had
vu UP* uuparavant? avals rencontre /«*** une ou deux fois, mais ne avuis
never" spoken (to him), and he had never" spoken (to me.) I have
jamais par IS — /«i** ne avait jamais — **
written (to him) this mornings, but he has not** yet answered me.
icrit ' — iwi** * matinf m. ne a pas encore (fait riponsej **.
• See note • page ?8. ♦ iStO note • pacje 4S. % See note (f) page 79,
TO FRENCH GRAMMAR. i I
PERSONAL PRONOUN.
The ORDER which the objective pronouns keep with the verb.
EXCEPTIONS. c%£t
1st Exception. fFheji the objective pronouns me, thee^ vst you. ^O
niM^ HER, IT, THEM are governed by the imperative of a verb used
ill a commanding sense^ i. e. without a negation^ the pronouns which
represent them, are placed immediately after the vertf ;
In these instances me is expressed by moi, and thee by toi.
But if the imperative is used in a forbidding sense, i. e. if it is ^§
attended by a negation, the pronouns must be placed immediately before
the verb, agreeably to the general rule ;
Then me is expressed by me, and thee by\E ; ex.
Imperative COMMANDING, 26 rule. Imperative FORBIDDING, ?7 rufe»
Look at me. Regarde-Moi. Ne me \j,^„„^^. „„, O
thyself Toi. NeTE ]'''^^r^^ P^'- g
Look at us. Regardez-^ovs. Ne nous L^ ^^^,^ |
yourself vous. iVevous i * jo
Let us look at him, or it, Regardons.i.^. Ne le
her, or it. la. Ne la
'thfm. LEs. Ne les
o
p
'regardons pas. ^
EXERCISE.
Speak to me. Do not» speak to me. Do not interrupt me. Warm
ParUz — ■• — ne pas — *7 — " iiUerrompez *^ Chauffe
thyself a little. Do not warm thyself (so much.) Write to her. Do
•• un peu. — ** •' ta7it, Kerivez — /mi**. —
not write to her. Send it (to him.) Do not send it to him.
M — «7 * Envoyez-l^ — /wi.*» — " le^^ IviV,
2d Exception. The objective pronouns are not always governed by ^9
verbs, they are sometimes governed by a preposition which some verbs
require to be united to the substantive* that follows them ; then the pro"
noun being the object of the preposition, and not the object of the verb
it is placed after the preposition, and we express
ME, by MOI. US, by NOUS.
THEE, by TOI. ' YOU, . by VOUS.
HIM, by LUI. THEM,m. by EUX.
HER, by ELLE. THEM, fern, by ELLES ; ex.
Was he speaking of me? Parlail-il de moi ?
I will not go with him. Je w' irai pas avec lui.
He is come without her. II est venu sans elle.
He applied to them. II dadreasa ^ eux, m. k elles, ^.f
exercise.
Come to me. I do not" care for thee. I went to her, and she
Vient a " — fi« m« soucie peu de * • allat *• et
sent me to him, I will not go unth them. I am tired of them,
fnvoya •* " — M irai avee » ennuy^ df «
Have you thought of me? I always** think of yon.
.4 rex pen$i d •• toiijours pense ^ •
• See note • page 73. t Tlii» is more fully explained in the third part of this work.
78
AN INTRODUCTION
29
PERSONAfi PRONOUN.
The ORDER wkieh SEVERAL objective pronouns k§ep togethbb.
When SEVERAL objective pronouns are governed by the same verb
they must be placed together in the following order :
Before the twr6, i4, «5 rxdet. After the verb, 26 ruU. Whether bef. or aft. the verb ;
ME
NOUS,^ LE.
VOUS l**-^* *•*» '^» **"' ^' *"• LES
HE, 'J Y. '
Whether before or after the vm^, U, 25, 26, 27 ru^c.
LE, 1
LA, fbef, LUI, LEUR, Y, EN.
LES, i
E. ]
ES,p
24, 25, 26, 27 ru/«.
ME, I
if. MOI, TOI. j£ >bef. BN.
^^HW-v.
EN.
LEUR,
Y, bef. EN.*
* Haying uniformly observed that the arrangement o£ several pronouru together is one
of those nues which learners find the greatest difficulty to attain, I hare given examples
shewing how several pronouns are placed together in all possible instances, by the means
of which errors may always be rectified.
BEFORE the verbf 24,25 rules. after the verb, 26 rule.
him or it to me.
her or it to me»
them tome,
me some,
him or it to us.
her or it to us
them to us,
us some,
me there.
FIftST PERSON.
11 ME LB dontM.
11 ME LA donna,
11 ME LES donna,
11 M' EN donna,
11 NOUS LB donna.
11 NOUS LA donna.
11 NOUS LES donna,
11 NOUS EN donna,
11 M' Y envoya.
him, her^ or it to me there. 11 ME l' y envoya.
them to me there,
me same there,
us there.
him, her, or it to us there,
them to us there,
some to us there.
He gave
He gave
He gave
He gave
He gave
He gave
He gave
He gave
He sent
He sent
He sent
He sent
He sent
He sent
He sent
He sent
He gave
He gave
He gave
He gave
He gave
He gave
He gave
He gave
He sent
He sent
He sent
He sent
He sent
He sent
He sent
He sent
THIRD PERSON,
He recalls him or it to hims^f. 11 SE le rappelie.
He recalls her or it to himself.
He recalls them to himself.
He repents cf tt, of them.
He applies himself toit to them.
IMPERATIVE COMMANDING.
VonneS'LE-MOl.
Donnet'LA'MOl.
DonneZ'LES'TAOl.
Donnet'M* en.
Donn«-NOUS-LE.
l^onn«-NOUS-LA.
Donn«-NOUS-LES.
i>0nn«z-NOUS-EN«
£n«02(es-Y-MOI.
Envoy es-L* Y-MOI.
Envoyez-LES-Y'MOl.
A'uwiyM- Y- EN-MOI.
£ntwyes-NOUS-Y.
£nw)y«-NOUS-L' Y,
11 ME LES Y envoya,
11 M* Y EN envoya,
11 NOUS Y envoya,
11 NOUS L' Y envoya,
11 NOUS LES Y envoya, Envoycz -NOUS-LES-Y.
11 NOUS Y EN envoya, , Envoyec-NOUS-Y-EN.
<
3
%
p.
3
r
him or it to thee,
her, or it to thee,
them to thee,
thee some,
him or it to you.
her or it to you,
them to you,
you some,
iiiee there.
SECOND PERSON,
11 TE LB donna,
II TE LA donna,
11 TE LES donna.
II T* EN dontia.
11 VOUS LE donna.
11 VOUS LA donna.
11 VOUS LES doima,
11 VOUS EN donna.
ft
11 T' Y envoya,
him, her, or it to thee t}ter§, 11 TE l' y envoya.
them to thee there • 11 TE LES Y envoya.
some to thee thei'e, // T' Y EN envoya.
ou there, 11 VOUS Y envoya,
im, her, or it to you there. II VOUS L* Y envoya.
them to yon there. ll VOUS lES Y envoya.
some to you there, 11 VOUS y en envoya.
IL SE LA raypelle.
11 SE LES rappelie,
11 S' EN repent.
11 9* Y applique.
Bepr6sente'LE-T0l.
Repr^senU'LA-TOl,
R^^sente-LES'TOIt
Repr^sente-T en.
Hepr£sente%' VOUS-LE.
jR^jentcs-VOUS-LA.
Rejprisentez'VOVS'LES,
B^^r^sentez-YOVS'Efi,
*
-I
CD
Traiuporfes- VOUS- Y .
In/onwt- VOUS- Y- Eh .
S
««
^
TO FRENCH GRAMMAR. 79
PBRSONAL PRONOUN.
The ORDER which beveral objective pronouns keep together.
BEFORE tht verb, 84, 25 rulet, after the verb, 26 -^U.
THtRD PERSON,
He has giren khn or it to Mm, to her* ll L£ tin a donnS, DonNet-LE-Liii. Q
He has given her or it to him, to }^er, 11 LA LUI a donn6e. Z)oun6x-LA-L(JI. 5'
He has given t^em to ftim, to her. i/ LES Lui a Wo?t»^9. Do/tiiez-LKS-Ll'l. Z.
He has given him or tt tojtkem, 11 LE leur a donn^, Donnet-hK-L^VR, ^
He has given }ier or ii .u (Kern. ll LA leur a dotui^e, Donnet-LA-LEUR. s
He has given them to tJiem. ll LES leor a donn£s, DonNex-L£S>LiaiR.
He warned him, or her of it, ll L' bn oo«rtit. Avertissez-U EN. -§
He warned them of it, ll LES en avertit, >(t>crtis«s-LES-EN.
He sent him, her or it there, ll U y envoy a. Envinf ei-h* Y. .
He sent them there, 11 L£S y envoya, £ntw^n-LES-Y. cp
He sent him or it to him^ to her there, ll LE LUI Y envoya, Enwyez-LK-LV i-Y.* p
He sent her or it to him, toher there, ll LA LUI Y envoya, Envoyez'LA'liM-Y, ^
He sent them to him, to her there, 11 LES LUl Y envoya. Envoy et^LKi^LVi-Y, ^'
He sent htm or tt to them there, ll LE leur y envoya, £nvo?/es-LP2-LEUR-Y. S*
He sent her or it to them there, ll LA LEUR Y enioya. £»voi/(a-LA-LEi)R-Y. S*
He sent them to them there. i/ LES leur Y e^ttoya. Eitro^es-LES-LkUR-Y, ^
lie sent some to him, to her, 11 hVl r.H envoya. Envoy ez-LVl-e.^. »•
He sent tome to them^ or them $ome, 11 LEUli en envoya, Eniv)i/e3-LEU K-en. ;*
He sent «ome to him, to her there, 11 LUI Y en envoya. £nt;oi/es-LUI-v-EN. ]^
He sent $ome to them there, . Jl LEUK Y en envoya, £ni;oye3-LEUR-Y»EN. »
He sent $ome (g) there. 11 Y en envoya, Ewvoyes-Y-EN,
EXERCISE.
I have brought you the book which I had promised you. Where
ai apporte ^ /ii;)*em. que avais promis ** Ou
is it? Shew i^me, I (will shew) iP*you (by and by.) Will you give
ett'ill MontreX'le ^ montrerai le ^ tantot, Voulet donne^
it^ me ? Give iP^ me, I can not give f/** you. It does not belong
U *• ? Donnex'le *• tie puis pas donner le ^ 11 — n' est pas
to me, I (will lend) i^ you, -Wl^en will you" lend i<** me?
a *• priierai le *• Qiiav-d — priteret'^ous le ••?
Lend it^ me now. I (will return) i(^ to you (to-morrow). I (will lend)
Pritet'le ■• a present, rendrai le — * demain, preterai
i(^ you next" week^. I (shall be) in the country then. I (will send)
le ^ prochaine semaine. f. serai ^ campagne f. alors, enverrai
them to you there. You will not find (any body) to bring them
** — ■• ,y •* — ne troitveret persontie pourapporter ■*
to me there, I (will take) them to you there myself. Has she given
— •• y •• porterai ** — ^ ■• woi-m^me. A-t^elle donn£
him^ any money? No; she has lent him^ a guinea. Tell Aer*
(0 • argent 7 Nan; pret6 (f) » gnin6e,i, Dites {€)
not to lend Aim** any more, for he will never return im her,
dene pas preter (f) (gj* davantage, car — «e** rendrajamak le (£)••
* Lui Y is grammatical, but i, ? , at the end of a sentence do not sound well, there-
fore, instead of Y for there, use la, and say lui lH instead of lui y.
(f) When a verb governs two substantives, either nouns or pronouns, one of them
has a preposition expressed or understood, but the preposition is generally understood
1>efore the pronoun which represents die person, in these instances him, BSR, must
be expressed by LCI, and thkm by leur, the same as when to is prefixed to them ; ex.
I will send him money, i. e. money to him ; Je lui enverrai de Pargent ;m>t Venverrai,
I have offered them some, i, e. some to them ; Je leu r bm ai tifert ; notje les kn at offert,
(g) Some, jny, implying of it, of thetn, understood after them, are expressed by en .
80 AN INTRODUCTION
Q^ PERSONAL PRONOUN.
OU Js there are only two genders infrench, the masculine and the femi-
nine, the NEUTER PRONOUNS iTy THEY, THEM must be expressed by il,
ELLE, iLs. ELLEs; LE, LA, LES, the Same a s HE, SHE, they; him, ueh,
THEM, masculine or feminine, agreeably to the gender of the noun which
they represent ; so we say :
Of a man or a tree.
Il est grand; je le vois. He or it is tall ; I see him, or it.
Of a woman or a flower;
Elle est belle ; regardez-LK. She or it is fine ; look at her, or il,{\\)
Of men or trees ;
Ils sont id; je les ai vns. They are here ; I have seen them.
Of women or flowers ;
Elles sont belles; je les admire. They are fine ; I admire them.
exercise.
You have a fine hat. It is new. I can not wear i7«*. It is
avex » beau chapeau. m. «* est neuf, ne saurais pmter *>(b) «*
too small. (Here is) another; try it^. This watch has cost me
trap petit. En vtnci unautn; essay ex *>(h) » montreta eoute **
a (gfood deal) of money", but it is not" good ; It does not go well.
— beancoup argeut,^-^' «>?i*«tptf5 bonne; ^ — ne vapasbien.
Get i(^ mended. Give it^ me. (That is) a good house; it
Faites "(h) raccommoder. Donnex (li) •• Voila » bonne maison ; f. »
is well built, but it is not well situated. It is too near the road. If
Men Wti,i8 »» bien $itu£ w » trap presde ro«te.f. Si
it was niine,« I (would sell) it**!^ Eat some of these grapes ;
" ttait (a moi) vendrais ^^h) Mangex (quelques-uns) * raisim ; m
they are good. I (would rather have) apples, if they were ripe.
*• ban, " J* aimerais mieux — *pomme<, f. "^ ttaient murj*
It is not the time for apples. Is it astonishing that they are
(i) n*est pas terns m. ties (i) itonnant qu* ^ne soieut
not" ripe? // (would be) an astonishing thing if they were.
pas ** (i) serait 6tonnante *• chose f. gu* •• lef assent,
-* - --r - _.^__. ■-!■■■■»■■ _■■■■_■ I ■■-LIIM
(h) Learners are scmietimes embarrassed how to discriminate it the ofyeet from tr
the ajr«»t or nominative, t. e. when to express /r by IL, elle, and when by le, la.
It is the agent, and expressed by il, elle, agreeably to the gender of the noun to
which it relates, when, if you were speaking otv^ person, you would use BE or she ; as.
He or IT is come. Il est venu. She or it will fall, elle tombera.
It is the object, and expressed by lf., la. agreeably to the gender of the noun, when,
if you were speaking ofvi person, you would use him or her ; as,
I see HIM or it, Je le vois. I know her or ir. Je la connau.
(i) Jr is often used in an impersonal sense, I. e, without reference to any substantire
mentioned in the sentence ; as, it is glorious, shameful, necessary, &c.
In these instances, it is always expressed by IL, or by CE.
Jr is expressed by il, if the verb is followed by an a(/;>rfit)« without a substantive ; as,
/r is glorious, shameful, necessary. IL est glorieux, honteiiXj nccessaire, 6^c,
It is expressed by ce, when the verb is followed by a tubetantivt, either with or with-
out an adjective ; as.
It is 1. IT is he. it is she. it is you. it is your brother, it is a shameful thing*
e'estmoi. c*est luu c'estelle. o'est roui, c^estvotrefrere. c'egtunechoeehonteuse.
TO FRENCH GRAMMAR. 81
PERSONAL PRONOUN.
//e, SHU, THEY, HI My HER, THEM, are sometiTKes used without q\
relation to any noun expressed before tlieniy but imply the words man,
WOMAN, or PEOPLE Understood; as,
He who IS honest is esteemed ; i. e. the man who is honest is &c.
Do vou know her whom I love? i. e. Vie woman whom I love?
In this sense they are expressed ;
He who is honest is esteemed. celui qui est honnete est estime.
Do you know her whom I love? ConnaisseZ'Vous celle quefaime?
N. B, celui, celle, ceux, aitd the relative qui, que, dont which
attends them, must not be separated, as the corresponding words sometimes
are in english; they must be placed together; as.
He knows men but little who relies on their promises.
Celui qui compte sur les promesses des hommes ne les connait guere ;
t. e. He who relies on the promises of men knows them but little (k).
exercise.
He who can live dishonoured does not deserve to live. He who
■^ qui Tpeut vivre d^shonore — " mdrite de "^
betrays a friend is unworthy of friendship. He can not be hap]yy
trahit ami m. indigne amitii, *^ ne saurait — etrejieuvenx
whose^ happiness depends on others. Do not" trust him who
a'oiitN.B. 7ifonheur m. depend des autre*, — ^'evous fiexpasa **
has deceived you. She (of whom) you speak (will come) (by -and by.^
trompi ** "* dont parlet vieadra " tantot.
She is not come fofwhom^) you (were speaking.) Do you" know her
•* eat ** venue N.B. partiex, — ConnaisseZ'Voits **
(of whom) we (are speaking?) They who prefer 'rfches to ^^honour
partem 7 *'^ prif event richesses *'honneur
are contemptible. They are mistaken whc^^ think that riches make
m^risable^K ** — $e trompetit ^•^' pensent qne ^ rendent
men? happy. Do you" know that gentleman? He is a physician.
homme heureux, — • Connaissez-'votu ^ monsieur'/ (1) medecin,
(That is) his wife. She is a fine woman. They are *®very honest people.
^oil^ 1 femme. (1) belle femme. (1) tres - honnetes gens,
(k) We may also say without changing the order of the words ;
Celdi-La ne connaU guere les hommes qui compte sur leurs promesses ;
or c' EST ne connaitre griire les hommes que de compter sur leure promesses ;
but these two modes of ezpressiop are more adapted to oratory than to conrersation.
(I) He, she, THEYr coming with the verb be followed by a substantive, are generally
expressed by CE, though the noun to which they refer has been mentioned before ; as,
He is a merchant. C'est un nigociant.
She is a milliner. Cest une marchande de modes.
They are great rogues. Ce sont de grands fripcns,
N. B. If the substantive which follows the verb denotes trade or profession, he, she,
THEY, may be expressed by il, elle, ils, elles, but the article must be Ujft out; as,
II est nigociant, Elle est marchande de modes.
But the learner will do well, in these instances, to use CE until he has seen the second
part of this book, in which this is more fully explained*
a
82
32
AN INTRODUCTION
RELATIVK PRONOUN.
WHO, WHOM, WHOSE, THAT, WHICH, WHA1\
QUI, QUE, DONT. QUOl, QUEL, LEQUEL.
14 ken WHO, whom, whose, that, which, comt after one or several
substantives which they particularize, thei/ are expressed,
U komme qui
^comes. Le cheval qui
La chaise qui
V /i07W7We QUE
Le cheval que }je lois.
9
WHO,
THAT,
WHICH;}
WHOM, ]
THAT, \
WHICH;]
WHOSE, ]
>QU1.
QUE.
(m)
The man who
Tlie horse that
The chaise which
The man whom
The horse which
The coach that
n'ient.
>I see.
I Of WHOM, ^DONT. The horse of which \l speak. Le cheval dont ^je yarU.
ntJ
LecarrosseqvE
The man of whom \ V ^o?«7nc dont]
The horse of which >1 speak. '^ • •
Of WHICH;] .The chaise o/tt?Ajc/iJ La chaise bo^t ^
N, B, QUI, QUE, DONT 7nust be placed immediately after the noun
to which they relate ; as,
Is the ship arrived which was expected ? 1 i. e. the ship which was
Le NAViRE Qu'on attendait est-il^ arrive ? j expected, is ii^ arrived ?
EXERCISE.
Do you^^ know the master who teaches me french?? THe scholars
— Connaxtsez'voui maitre ** enseigne •* fran^ais m, ? icolien m.
whom you have recommended to me are very diligent. (This is)
"* avei recommandh - ■* sont trea *■. Void
M
the person of whom I (was speaking.) Have you seen the ships ihat^
* perionne u ■■ pariah, vu * narire (m)
(are just) (come in ?) You have bought a book which^ is very dear.
vienuent d'arrivrl achet^ livrem, (m) est tres - cher.
The book which^ you have bought is very dear. The book of which
(m) »*
you speak is very dear. That house is sold which^ you wanted to buy.
parln * maison f. vendue ^'^ vouliez - acheter
The ladies you want to see are here. The gentleman is gone who^
dame(n) mndet voir id, m<nisieur parti '*•**•
has brought you a letter. He has lost all the money he had.
appovti ■* * lettre, f. perdu tout ■ ar|eiU(n) avait,
(m) Persons not versed in grammatical terms, are often at a loss to distinguish the
object from the nondnative, i. e. when to express that, which by QUI, and wh%a by que.
To these I will obserro, that that, which are the nominaiive, and expressed by QUi,
whentliey are followed immediately by a verb; as.
The coach that or which is at the door. Le carrosse QUI est a la porte.
That, which are the object of the verb, and expressed by QUE, when, between tliem
and the verb, there is a noun or pronoun which is the nominative of the verb ; as,
The coach that or which we have met. Le carroue que nous avons rencontri.
(n) The distinctive pronouns whom, that, WHiCH^are often left out in english ; as.
The man I saw ; for the man whom i saw; but the corresponding words QUI, QUE, DONT
n^ust always be expressed in french ; as,
The mnn I saw, i. e. whom I saw. L' homme QVEje vis.
The wine we drank, i. e. which we drank. Le vin que nous bdmes.
The woman I speak of, i. e. ofwhem 1 speak. Lafemme DOHfje parle.
33
TO FRENCH GRAMMAR. 63
RELATIVE PRONOUN.
After any preposition hut of, or a preposition synontfmous to it,
IFhom u expressed by QUI for both genders and numbers,
Masc. 8IN0. Fern. Mok. plur. Fern.
WHICH by UQVEh, /aQUELLE, /«« QUELS, /«« QUELLES ;
From WHICH by duQUEL, de laQVELLE^ d« QUELS, rfwQUELLES;
To, at WHICH ' by auQUEL, a iaQUELLE, aitxQUELS, auiQUELLES ;
agreeably to the gender and number of the noun to which it relates ; as.
The man with whom \ U homm^ avec qui
The horse 071 ti^Aic^ >I came. Le c^&a/ sur lequel >jevins.
The chaise in which J La chaise dans laquelle;
The man/rowi whom l*u' f ii ^^ homm£ de qui 1 ' f h
The horse from which ] ' Le cheval duqv el | <^ o a.
The man to whom 1 . •* -2^* homm>e k qui 1 •? » _.
The horse to which |he gave it. ^^ ^yi^^/ auQUEL \ ^^ l^ donna.
EXERCISE
You know the lady to whom I have spoken. The study to which
Connaissez dame " ai parU, * ^lude f. ^
he applies is not very usefuL The chair oji which you sit is
s*applique est ** tres - utile, chaise f. $ur ** (etee assis)
broken". The coach in which I came wa^ overturned. The people
rompu, NB. carrotte m. dans ■* vim fut renverti, gen* m.
with whom I was were very civil. (This is) the stick with which
avec ** ^tait ^taicnt civil^*, Voici batan m. *
he struck me. Where is the horse to which you have given the com ?
frappa ■*.(>** ®* avez donn^- * hvoine'l
Who, whom; wnosE used absolutely, i. e. without reference to any o4
noun m^niioned before, imply the word person understood.
Who, whom are then expressed by QUI ; as,
Who is there? i. e. what person is there? qui est Id?
I know whom you love, i. e. what persoji, 8fc, Je sais qui vous aimez.
Whose is expressed by db QUI, when it is used for of what person ;
and by A QUI, when it is used for to what person; a?,
Whose daughter is she ?
i. e. (ofwhai person) is she the daughter?
Whose house is that ?
i. e. (lo what person) does that house belong?^
^ EXERCISE.
Wh<ym did you send? Whom have you found? Whom did you
•* avez ** envoy i 7 ** avez trouv67 ■♦ avez
speak to" ? I know whom you are speaking of". Whose hat
parU a / sate ^ •— parlez de ^ chapeau m.
is this? Whose coach is that? I do not know whose it is.
est » y »* carrossem, ^ / — n« sait pas ^ ^
Whose son is he? Whose wife is she? Whose relations are they?
w file '! femme ? •* parent sontmiU 'f
G 2
DB QUI est-elie Jille?
A QUI e</ cette maUon?
84 AN INTRODUCTION
RELATIVE PRONOUN.
WHICH INTERROGATIVE.
In an interrogative sentence which requires three distinctions.
Which interrogative is either joined to the noun like an adjective,
i. e. without the help of a preposition ; as,
WHICH maTt? yruiCH carriage? which Aor»e9?
Or, like a substantive, joined to it by the preposition of ; as,
which of the men? which of the carriages? which of my horses?
Or like a pronoun used absolutely after the noun^ as,
It is one of these men ; which /« it?
35 Which interrogative yoi/icd like an adjective, /. e. without a prepo-
sition, to the noun to which it relates, is
Masc. sing Fern, Masc, PLUR. Fern,
WHICH; QUEL, QUELLE, QUELS, QUELLES ;
Of, from WHICH ; d«QUEL, rfeQUELLE, d«QUELS, d«QUELLES ;
To, at WHICH; a QUEL, a QUELLE, a QUELS, a QUELLES •
agreeably to the gender and number of the noun ; as.
Which man ] quel homme \
Which carriage >will you have? quelle voiture\vo%dcZ'Vous?
Which horses J quels chevaux]
06 Which interrogative joined by a preposition to the noun to which
it relates^ or coming after it absolutely, i. c. without a noun, is
Masc, sing. Fern, Masc, pi.UR. Fern.
WHICH ; le QUEL, /aQUELLE, les QUELS, les QUELLES
Of, from WHICH ; ditQUEL, de /aQUELLE, des QUELS, des Q UELLES
ro,at WHICH; ouQUEL, « /aQUELLE, atuQUELS, aiuQUELLES
agreeably to the gender and number of the noun; as,
^i^fcA of these men 1 .„ lequel rfe ce« Ao7nme» 1
^AicA of the coaches ^^J* ^^^ laquelle des tjotore* \vouleZ'Vous?
^AfcA of my horses J ^^^ iJEsqv^i.^demes chevaux]
Which is the tallest? lequel ed le plus hard?
Which is the finest ? laquelle est la plus belle ?
Which are the best? lesquels so?it les meiUeurs?
Qy Which sometimes implies the demonstrative pronoun that or
' THOSE understood, this demonstraiive word can not be omitted in frenvh,
and WHICH, as including the two words, is expressed by
CELUl ODE m.^^ ^^^ CEUX OCE m. 1^„„,^ ^^j^j -
CELLEque/. J CELLESque/.J
agreeably to the gender and number of the noun to which it relates; as,
Which of these horses shall I ride? Lequel de ces chevaux monterai-je?
Ride which you will, i. e. that which Montez celui que vous voudrez,
exercise.
Which book shall I read ? Which of these books shall I read ?
" livre m. — " lirai-je^' / ae i ai /
Read which you please. Which pen shall I make use of*^?
A^isez ^ Uvotis plaira, ** jtlumtL — •* me servirai'je de'i
TO FRENCH GRAMMAR. 85
RELATIVE PRONOUN.
IFhich of these pens shall I*^ make use of? Use which you will.
M • I — me Krvirai-je *• / Servez-'Vout de ^ voudrez,
fVhich boy shall P* give this to? fFhich of the boys shall I give
" garfon — donnerai'je ceci »«/ se ♦ i ai
this to ? Give it to which you like. Which lady is the handsomest ?
*•/ DonneZ'le ^ voudrez, " rfam« Mt fcW/c ** j
Which of these ladies is the handsomest? Which ladies do you
«;peak of"? To «rAfcA do you" give the preference? Which
parleZ'Vou^^ / ■• — donnez'votur^^ preference f. /
fruit do ypu» like best? Which of these fruits do you like best?
/ruit m. -7 aimeZ'Vatis lemieux'! • i — ?
Which is the ripest? Eat of which you like. Which road shall
est mur^^l Mangez voudrez. route £, —
we go by*«? Which of these roads shall we go by*«? Which
" iivrupar'f * " par'/
houFe shall we» go to? Which is the best*'? Go to «rA/cA
maiionf. — irons-nous **!' meilleur^ AUez a
you choose. Which door must I go through ? Which of these
v<mdrez. port* f. faut'il que je passe par^ '/
doors must I go through ? Go through which you please.
par *• '/ Passez par il vous plaira,
WHAT requires the same diitinction as WHICH.
What followed by a ?iouh, or relating to a noun mentioned 3o
before^ is expressed in the same manner as which ;
Masc. SING. Fern. Masc. PI.UR. Fem.
WHAT; QUEL, QUELLE, QUELS, QUELLES
Of, from WHAT; rf«QUEL, d*QUELLE, d«QUELS, c^QUELLES
To, at WHAT; a QUEL, o QUEL'LE, a QUELS, a QUELLES
agreeably to the gender and number of the noun; as.
What man j quel homme ]
What carriage >will you have? quelle voitureyvonlez-vous?
What horses J quels chevanx)
It is my opinion, what is yours ? Cest mon opinion ^ quelle est la voire?
exercise.
WJiat man has he employed ? What language do you^ like best ?
■• a«t-t7 employ 6 f * langue £, — aimez-'Vous le mifiux ?
What study do you" apply to»? What sort of books do
* itude f. — vous*^ appliquez-'Vous *^ ? " sorte f. • livre —
you" read? To what use shall I put it**? WTuU news
lisez'vow^^ ' ? ■■ usage ra, — ** mef trai-^V* /c ? •• nouvellef,
are you" speaking of? /iTAo/ is your sentiment? What is yours**?
— parJ«2-«mj** *• ? * «t «nf im«nt m. ? " ^ ,^|^ ^
* WHICH may here be either singular or pjurat, agreeably to the number that is meant
86 AN INTRODUCTION
RELA.TIVE PRONOUN..
39 WnAT used absolutely, L e, without reference to a noun mentioned^
implies the v)ord thing understood^ and is expressed by que or 6y quo i.
What is ejpj)ressed by QUE, when it is the object of a verb ; as,
What are you doing there ? que faites-vous Id ?
1 do not know what to say to her. Je ne sais que lui dire.
What is expnessed by QUOI, when it is governed by a preposition,
or used as a?i interjection; ex.
What do you meddle with'^ ? D^ quoi vous^ melez-vous^^ ?
What! you have not done yet. Quoi ! vous rHavezpas encore Jiiii,
exercise.
What do you want? What do you think of that? Whut shall
8» — »i cherchez f ^^ — *^ -pensez de cela ? » -*.
I do with this ? Do you know what this is made of? What
»» ferai de ceci ? -^ " saiez 8» ceci^ fait ^r ^
is it good for^? I do not know what you (are talking) about,
il hon d, f — " MW ■• partez de *».
What / are you not gone yet* ? What ! you do not answer me.
8* " parti encore? ^ ** rfyondez **.
4U What sometimes implies the demonstrative jsrowown that, and the
distinctive which ; it is then expressed,
Noni. What, ce qui ; Always do what is right ; i. e. that which is right.
Faites toujours cb qui est juste.
Obj. What, ce que ; What I say is true ; i. e. that which I say is true,
(m) CE QUE je dis est vrai.
But with the prepositions of, to, or any preposition that is synony-
mous to them, it is necessary to consider whether the preposition comes
before or after what ; for.
Of WHAT is de CE qui, II speak of what is true ; i. e. of that which
de CE que;JJc parte de ce qui est vrai.
What of is CIS dont ; as. What he speaks of is not true ; i. e. that of which
CE DONT il parte n*est pas vrai.
To WHAT is k CE qui, 1 You do not apply to tfj/ifl^s useful ; to that which
k CE que;/ Fbws ne vous appliquez pas a ce qui est utile*
What to is CEkquoi ; &s,What you apply to is not useful ; that to which
CE k quoi vous vous appliquez 7i*est pas utile.
EXERCISE.
Say what is true, and do what is just. What*^ we do hastily
Dites *® ett vrai, et faites *^ juste. (m) faiioru (a la h&te)
is often imperfect. Shew me what*^ you have done. Pay attention to
aouvent impiirfait. Montrez ^ (m) fait. FiUtes attenticn
what*^ I say to you. Are you sure of what*^ you say ? It is what vou
(m) dis - ^ Etes sur (m) ditesr C/est *»
may be sure of. I would not" trust to what^ he proposes. What
poiivezttre ^ nevoudrais pas mefier (m) propose, **
Masc, SING. Fern,
Masc, PLUR.
Fern,
le MIEN,
Za MIENNE,
. les
MIENS,
Us
MIENNES.
du MIEN, i
ie kx MIENNE,
des
MIENS,
des
MIENNES
flu MIEN,
a la MIENNE,
aux
• MENS,
aux
MIENNES
h TIEN,
la TIENNE,
les
TIENS,
les
TIENNES.
\U SIEN,
la SIENNE,
Us
SIENS, .
let
SIENNES.
{e NOTRE,
la NOTRE,
les
NOTRES,
les
NOTRES.
/» VOTRE,
la VOTRE,
Us
VOTRES,
les
VOTRES.
' le LEUR,
la LEUR,
les
LEURS,
Us
LEURS.
TO FRENCH GRAMMAR. 87
. RELATIVE PRONOUN.
yoii trust to is very uncertain. He complains of what*'' he has
vous vous fiez ^ est tris - incertain, te plaint (m) a
suffered. fFhat he complains of is right. They attribute it to what^
souffert, *® se plaint ^ juste. attribuent W* (m)
I have told you. What they attribute it to has never" happened.
dit ^ ^ •* n* est jamais \i,rrivi,
POSSESSIVE PRONOUN.
Ma
MINE.
OfJromMlNE.
To, at MINE,
THINE,
HIS.
HERS
OURS.
YOURS.
THEIRS.
The POSSESSIVE pronouns le mien, le tien, le sien, &c. must be of^ 1
the same gender and number a^ the noun which they represent ; as,
Your horse is better than hers, i. e. her horse.
Voire cheval est meilkur que le sien.
My house is not so fine as hisy i. e. his house.
Ma maison iH est pas si belle que la sienne.
Your histories are prettier than his, i. e. his histories.
Vos histoires sont plus joUes que les siennes.
EXERCISE.
Why do not" you" eat your cake ? Your brother has eaten his,
Pourquoi — ne mangeZ'Vous pas * gdieaum..? * a mangi *i
My sister has not eaten hers. I (will eat) mine (by and by). Your
c *? *^. mangerai *^ tantot. ^
lesson is shorter^® than Twt'we, but (I shall know) mine before you
le^on f. court^^ ** mais saurai *^ avant que
know yours. It is not* your business, it is his. My books are
taehUz *^ Ce n'est pas ^ affaire f. , e' est *^ livre m. soni
finer^' than yours and his. They are not finer than mine. Have
beaux *» 41 80 w » 4i
you cleaned my boots ? Yours and mine are clean**, but his are not.
dicrotic ' botte f. ? *^ ** dicretti^ ** ne U sont pas. .
The POSSESSIVE words mine, thine, his, hers, ours, yours, ^"^
THEIRS', do not always represent a 7ioun mentioned before them ; they
often come with the verb be used in the sense of belong, instead of
the PERSONAL pronouns me, thee* him^ her, usy you, them ; as
for example. This book is mine, i.e. belongs to jir£; in this sense
mine, thine, his, hers, ours, yours, theirs, are expressed by
88
AN INTRODUCTION
POSSESSIVE PRONOUN.
h Moi, h TOi, k LUi, a ELLE, h NOUS, a V0U8, a Eux, m. h ELLEs,/. as,
This book is mine, Ce livre est k moi ; t. e. belongs to me.
is thine,
is his.
is hers,
is ours,
is yours,
is theirs.
est k Toi ;
e«/ 2i LUI ;
e«^ a ELLE ;
est a NOUS ;
est k vous ;
to thee,
to him,
to her.
to us,
to you.
est k Eux ; m. k elles ; f. to them.
EXERCISE.
stick is mme, and this umbrella is his. It^ is neither
bdtan m. ^' ^ parapluie m. ^ n* est ni
yours nor M>, it is hers. Is this horse" yours ? It is not mine ;
" " " Ce chevalest'il^^ *«?
This
1
4t
nt
4f
M
4S
80
55
42
it is my cousin'«. If it was yours, what would you** do (with it) ?
«> (o) S' «> 4tait « » — /m>z-»oiM" en^ f
If it was mine, I (would sell) it^. I wish
•• ** vendrait **(^) touhaiterais qu'
it was (mr«.
4t5 ^/'^ POSSESSIVE pronouns mine^ thjse, jijs, H£A5, oitas, yours,
THEins, by an idiom peculiar to the english languxige^ are sometimes
joined to the noun to which they relate by the preposition of; as a
FRIEND OF MINE ; A BOOK OF YOURS ; Ihis POSSESSIVE pronouu Can not
he expressed by the possessive pronoun in french ; it must be expressed
by the possessive article mes, tes, ses, nos, vos, leurs, j9^ace(2 before
the noun, which must always be plural in french ; as.
A friend of mine,
of thine,
of his.
of hers,
of ours,
of yours.
of theirs.
un de MES amis ;
un de TEs amis;
un de SES amis;
un de SES amis;
un de Nos amis ;
un de vos amis ;
un de LEURS amis ;
i, e, one of my
one of thy
one of his
one of her
one of our
one of your
one of their
-a
> c
EXERCISE.
(This is) a relation of mine. He is a cousin of ours, A brother oj
Void * TparentiR, *•(!)««* *■
m.ine has married a sister of his. (That is) a child of theirs. I have
*■ a ipauU * ** VoUa enfant m. **
seen to-day a scholar of yours. I (shall dine) to-morrow with
vu (aujour ahm) icoliev m. ^ dinerai demain avec
a friend of ours, I have found a book of yours amongst mine.
** trouv^ livre m, *• parmi
It"^ is not mine ; it is my brother*^. It is a friend's of mine,
n'estpat « » (o) «» (o) «
41
(a) The poBsessioii denoted in english by adding s to the noun, is expressed in french
by a before it ; as, It is my father'*. Ilett a. mon pire} Not, U est de mon ptre.
TO FRENCH GUAMMAtt. 89
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN.
Ma$e, SIKO. fim. Mate, plur. Fern,
rjf^rJCELUI; CELLE. THOSE;}^'^^^ * CELLES.
The DEMONSTRATIVE pronOUHS CELUI, CELLE, CEUX, CELLES mitst be of^^
the same g^ender and number as the noun which they represent; as.
He has eaten his apple and that of his brother ; i. e. the apple of, &c.
// a mangi sa pomme et celle de son frere.
EXERCISE.
She has spoiled her hat - and that of her brother. He has torn
a g&ti * chapeaum, ** * d^'chiri
my gown and that of ray sister. Bring my shoes and those of my
* robe f, ** Apportez * soulien m. **
mother. (Look at) these' guineas and those which"* he has given us.
Regarda (p) guinies f. ♦* (in) a donniet, •*
N. B. The DEMONSTRATIVE toords TBiSy these; that, those
• imply a local distinction which celui, celle, ceux, celles do not
express; if you wish to make that distinction infrench, you must add to
these pronouns the adverbs ci, here ; and lA, there ; thus,
THIS; CELUI-ci, CELLE-ci. THESE; CEUX-«, CELLES-c/.
THAT; CELUI-M, CELLE-W. THOSE; CEUX-id, CELLES-(d; as.
This horse is better than thai ;
Ce cheval'Ci est meilleur que CELUi-lk ; i, e. this horse here — that there,
exercise.
That' horse is young, and this** is old, but I ^prefer this** to
(p) eheval-ld est jeune, "•■• vieux, mais prifere ''•■•
that**. These' girls dance much better than those**,
N.B. ^p) jiUe-ei dansent beaiieoup (b) "•*•
If THIS, THAT are not followed by a noun, nor relate to a noun 4o
rhentionedf they imply the word thutg understood,, and are expressed^
THIS by CECI ; THAT, by CELA ; as.
This is good, i. e. this thing is good. ceci est bon.
That is better, i. e. that thing is better, cela est meillear,
exercise.
Take this. Leave that. Have you seen this. That is very^ pretty.
Prenez *» Lamet ♦» v„ 45 « tra.joU,
(p) The demonstratiye words this, that, these, those, have three different proper-
tiei.
If THIS, THAT, THESE, THOSE are followed by a noun, they bare the property of a
demonstratiye articUf and are expressed by ce, cette, ces ; as,
Thi* bread, tAatmeat, thoee clotnes* Ce pain, cette viatide, ces habiti. See rule 1.
If THIS, that, these, those do not point out a noun after them, but repreeent one
mentioned before, they are pronouns, and are expressed by celui, celle, ceux, cillks,
agreeably to the fender and number of the noun which they represent (rule 44.) ; as,
He has eaten his apple & that of his brother. II a mangi sa pomme ^CELLEoesott frhe.
If this, that do not point out a noun after them, nor represent one mentioned before,
they may be considered as substantives, and are expressed this by CECI, that by cela.
3am i» good, but that is better. Ceci est bm, mais cela ett meilUur, (rule 45.)
90 AN INTRODUCTION
INDEFINITE PRONOUN.
4:0 ONEy WEj TUEYy PEOPLE, used in an indefinite sense, i. e. not
relating to any particular person, are expressed by On.
N, B. Observe that On is always the nominative of a verby and
though it represents we, they, people, which are plural, it requires the
verb in the third person singular ; as,
mL\ ' y rON dit; i. e. one says.
Thh/ say, people say. J • ' j
EXERCISE.
People are never" so happy nor so miserable as they imag^ine.
*^ n*est jamais si henreux ni liialheureut qu* ** s^imagine.
They say that we (are going) to have peace. They say so ; but can
*• dit que nous aliens - avoir "^paix, f. ** /«** ; pent
one believe it, when they (are making) such preparations for war7?
■*« croire le^^^quand **' fait tunt de priparatif pour giterre L'f
47
The following «7zd other like indefinite -expressions, are also ex-
pressed in french by On, with the verb in its active sense,
N. B. The verb is rendered active by leaving out the auxiliary verb
B£, and making the participle into a verb of the same tense and person
as the auxiliary verb is; ex.
It was said. on disait ; i.e. one said.'
// is reported. on rapporte ; one reports.
EXERCISE.
It is thought that (there will be) a war. It is said that hostilities
*7 pense qu* il y aura - guerre, *^ dit que ^hostiliUs
have already begun. It is supposed that the two fleets have met.
out dtja commence, *7 $* imagine que deuxflotte se sont rencontr^es.
4.0 The english passive verbs used indefinitely, require the active signifi^
cation in french, with On for nominative ; but observe that by adding on
to the sentence, the substantive,* which is the nominative of the verb in
english^ becomes its object in french ; as,
I have been told that news has been received; turn thu sentence thus,
One has told me that one has received news.
On m"'a dit qu* on a re^u des nouvelles,
FXSRCISE.
PVe have been told that you were married. / have been told so
*® dit' que 6tiez mariS. *" /«**
too, but that is not true. I vfhs advised to do it. I have not
aussif cela 7i' est pas vrai, *® avait conseilU de faire /«**. ^nea pas
been permitted to do it. Do you» know what is said of you ?
« permU de « - eavet - vowfi^ *• ^ dit d9 «/
What can be said of me? It is said that great news is
"• peut *' dire " ? *7 _ rfjt q^^ ^'^gi'andes nouvelles ^
expected. Have the letters been received which were expected ?
attend, « lettre *® rcfu " « attendait'/
* By substantive in bera meant every vford which either n«met or repreeents a wbsiance.
TO FRENCH GRAMMAR. 91
CHAP. VI.
VERB.
A VERB is a word which expresses either being or icting.
Being; as^ i am ; i exist ; rhou art; ue. is; uy brother is; we are, &c.
Acting ; as, / speak ; / blame ; i walk j j drink ; / sing, &c.
Every action requires an agent, i. e. a being to perfirm that action ;
this agent, in grammar, is called the nominative of the verb.
The VERB must be of the. same number and person as the agent or no- 49
miuative ; this is called agreement of the verb with its nominative ; ex.
Ip. J sing.
2p. Thou singest.
3p. He sings.
She sings.
My brother sings.
My sister shiga.
SINGULAR.
Je chantc.
Tu CHANTC*.
// CHANTe.
Elle CHANTC.
MonfrSre chantc.
Ma sceur chantc.
plural.
Nous CHANTOn*.
Vous CHANTeZ.
lis CHAJiTeflt.
Elle.8 CHANTent,
Mes freres chantc/i^.
Mes striirs chantcw^
§
»
3r»
EXERCISE.
I speak. Thou playest. He walks. She dances. My brother
parlei, jonet, marcher. danscr,
stays. My sister forgets. We blame. You study. They look. My
rester. oublieT. bldmer, ^tudier, regarder.
brothers call or (are calling.*) My sisters dispute or (are disputing.*)
appelQU disputer.
In a DECLARATIVE Sentence, i. e. when a question is not asked, the o\j
NOMINATE E of the verb is placed in french, as in english, before the
verb; as.
I sing.
Thou singest.
He sings.
She sings.
My brother sings.
My sister sings.
Je CHANTe.
Tu CHANTC*.
// CHANTe.
EUe CHANTe.
Mon frcre cHANxe.
Ma sceur chantc.
Nous CHANTO;W.
Vous CHANTfZ.
lis CHANTe/ii.
Files ciiKSTent,
Mes freres chantcti^.
Mes scenrs ghantctz^.
N Pi
He speaks french. She
par/er**
My sister speaks french.
parier**
EXERCISE.
I speak^ french. Thou speakest french.
parler frariQais, • purler*^
speaks french. My brother speaks french.
parler*'^ parLet**
We speak frencli. You speak french. They speak french. My bro-
parier** parser*' , parler*^
thers speak french. My sisters speak french. They speak it very well.
parler*^ parler*^ parler U^ tres - bien.
But when the sentence is interrogative, i. e. when d question is
asked, it is necessary to consider whether the nominative of the verb is a
noun or a pronoun.
* These two modes of expression are rendered in the same manner in french. See
the conjugations, page 112 and following.
51
52
92 AN INTRODUCTION
VERB.
Ify when a question w OAked^ the nominative of the verb is one of the
pronouns je, tu, il, elle, nous,- vous, ils, elles, on or ce, these
pronouns are placed infrenchy as the corresponding words are in enslish^
iinmediately after the verb; as.
Do (q) I sing^ well ? Chant'e - je hien ? i. e. sin^ I well ?
Doest thou sing well ? Chantes - tu hien ? singest thou well ?
Does he sing well? Chante-i*-iL Men ? sings he well ?
Does she sing well? CAan<e-t*-ELLE bien ? sings «Ae well ?
Do i£?e sing well? Chantons-uovs bien? sing t(?3 well ?
Do yoM sing well? Chantez - vous ftiVn ? sing you well ?
Do they sing well ? CAan^e/i^-iLS bien ? sing ^Acy well ?
Do Mfy sing well ? Chantent-ELLi^s bien ? sing they well ?
EXERCISE.
Do I speak** french well* ? Doest thou speak french well ? Does
(q) ** par/«r fran^ais bienf f (q) *» -parler*^ *■ f (qj
Ae speak french well ? Does ^Ae speak french well ? Do we speak french
well ? Do you speak french well? Do they speak french well?
//^ irAera we ask a question, the nominative of the verb is a noun,
that noun is placed before the verb in french, the same as when the
sentence is not interrogative; but to shew that a question is asked, one
of the personal pronouns il, elle, ils, elles, agreeably to the gender
and NUMBER of the noun, is placed immediately after the verb ; as.
Does my brother sing Mon fr^re chante-i-iL bien? i.e. lay b. sings he?
Does my sister sing % Ma soeur cAan^e- t-ELLE bien? My s, sings she
Do my brothers sing ^ Mes freres chantent-ihs bien ? My b, sing they
Do my sisters sing Mes soeurs cAa/i^cTt^ elles bien ? My s, sing they
EXERCISE.
Does my brother speak** french well* ? Does my sister speak french
(q) ** ^rUr franfaU Went f (q) *• por/er**
well ? Do my brothers speak french well ? Do my sisters speak
*3 ? (q) «« paWcr« « f (q) « pan«-*»
french well ? Does your son go to school now ? Does your daughter
» / (q) « va cL V6coU a^itsntf «
go to school now ? Do your sons go to school now ^ Do your
va ? (q) ** «'<>"* ^
daughters go to school now ? Do the 6oy** make any progress ?
*• vont f (q) gar^ons font • Tprogrit dIut.
Do the gi'rfe" make any progress ? Is all your famUy^ vrell ?
fillet ' r se porte toute famiUe U f
(q) The auxiliary words do, did, thaU^ will, should, irouU, mai;, nught are not ex-
pressed in french ; their meaning is implied in the termination of the verb.
* When It, ELLE, ON come after a verb ending with a vmcel, - t - is placed tetutun
these pronouns and the verb to soften the pronunciation.
t Place the adverb bien before/iTiTifau ; thus, bimfran^ais. See 53 ru?e.
TO FRENCH GRAMMAR. 93
CHAP. VII.
ADVERB
An ADVERB is a word added to a verb to denote the manner in which
an Action is performed ; as, / walk fast ; Be walks slowly ; you write
'WELL; she tm7e9 badly; the words fjst, slowly^ well^ badly,
which denote the manner in which ihe action of the verbs walk and
WRITE is performed, are adverbs.
The adverb being to tfie verb what the adjective is to the noun, i. e. OO
expressing some circumstance of the verb, mitst be placed immediately
after the verb which it modifies ; as,
I saw your sister yesterday. Je vis hier votre sceur.
She speaks french very well, Elle parle TRia-BiES frafi^ms.
I will come to see her soon, Je viendrai bientot la voir J*
EXERCISE.
You read french very well, I wish to learn it** fvery much,)
lisez 7fran^aU m, tris - bien^, touhaite - apprendre ^ fort^.
You will soon^ know it**, if you read the rules attentively^, I (will do)
-> bientSt murez ^ , lisez regies attentivement, ferai
what you have recommended to me carefully'^. We (shall go) into
*" recommandi - ** soigneusement, irons d
the country to-morrow, I hope you (will come) to see us ofltn^,
campagne f. demuin^. espere que vietidrez - voir ** sottvent.
Some adverbs may be placed in english either before or after the 04
verb which they modify ; as, I often see him, or I see him often,
I VERY SELDOM speak to him, or I speak to him very seldom ; but
ihe adverbs which represent them infrenchy must always be placed after
ihe verb ; as,
I often see him. Je le vois souvent.
I sometimes meet her. Je la rencontre quelquefois.
I seldom, speak to them. Je leur parle rarement.
exercise.
You always^ walk alone. I seldom^ go to town. I generally
Vous ioujouTS vous promenez seal, rarement vais a la ville, ordinairement
go into the country. I of ten^ think of you. You seldom^ come
vais a campagne f, souvent pense a ^ rarement venet
to see us now. I sometimes think that you soon^ (will forget)
- voir •* h present, quelquefvi^ pense que bientot otiblierez
US. You certainly^ can not think so. I sincerely^ wish that
•* eertainement pouvez ** penser ie** sineerement souhaite que
you may succeed. I heartily** wish you the same.
puissiez r^ussir, deboncamr souhaite ** la mime chose,
* llie perspicuity of a sentence often depends on the placing of the adverbs. These
sentences for example ; J'aim£ beaucoup a lire, and J*aime a lire beaucoup, though
formed of the same words, by changing the place of the adverb beaucoup, express two
different ideas. J*aime beaucoup a lire ; means, I am fond of reading ; J'aime it iirt
BEAUCOUP ; means, 1 like to read a great deal.
55
94 AN INTRODUCTION
ADVERB.
The NEGATIVE adverbs
NOy NOTy are ne — pas, ne — point
NO MORE,
}NE — ]
•PLUS.
NOT ANY more;
NEVER ; NE JAMAIS.
BUT LITTLE.
;NE — GUERE.
VERY LITTLE
BY NO means; ne NULLEMENT.
NE is always placed before ike verb, and pas, point, plus, jamais.
GUERE, NULLBMENT are placed immediately after the verb ; as,
I do not like that woman. Je n^aime pas cette femme,
I have neiver liked her. Je ne Tai jamais aimke,
I will not speak to her any more, Je ne lui parlerai plus.
EXERCISE.
Do not you" know that man ? Have you never seen him before?
- " connaissez ' *homme? Avez *^ ®* vu ■* auparavantl
Were you not in his company yesterday? I know him but Utile.
^tiez *^ ** o ' compagnie f. hiei-^ ? connais ** **
I do not wish to see him any more. I by no means consent (to it.)
- ** souhaite - «* 55 m coruens y**.
CHAP. VIII.
PREPOSITION.
prepositions are words which serve to connect other words together,
in order to form a sentence ; as,
I am going to London with my father.
The words to, with, which connect the substantives, London <t father
to the verb go, are called prepositions.
9Q The prepositions may often be placed in cjiglish either before or
AFTER the substantive which they govern ; as,
WITH whom were you, or whom were you with 9 of what do you
speak, or what do you speak of ? In french the prepositions must
always be placed before the substantive which they govern ; as,
With whom were you ?
or whom were you with ?
To whom did you speak ?
or whom did you speak to ?
Of what are you speakin<>:?
or what are you speakings oj ?
ayec qui etiez-vous ?
►A qui aveZ'Vous parU?
►DE quoi parlez-vous ?
exercise.
What country do you come from? What people did you come
* pays m. - *^ vencz rfc** f ** gens f. ites *^ venti
with? What news do you speak of? Which road shall
avec^ ? ™ nouvelles f, *^ parlez <&*• f ^ chemin m. -
we go by^ ? Which of these houses shall we go to ? What
•* irons par f w i muisons f. - ** irons a^ f ■•
are you laughing at ? It is what you may depend vpon.
" riez d^^f C* est * pouvez compter sur^.
TO FHENCH GRAMMAR.
EXERCISE 071 the FOUR coiyugatioTts ER, IR, OIR, RE ;
And RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE 071 the foregoiug rules*
95
AFFIRMATIVELY.
donnerf •* ^eau.
ihexn. They are looking^ at us.-
(j) regaifisrf - •*.
84
VERBS in er.f
I like** wine. Thou askest** for beer. He
aimerf '^^vin m. demanderf - •6iere f.
gives*' me water. We are looking** for flowers. You go** to see
(r) chercherf - ^fleur, allerf - voir
— I was helping** him, He
(r) aiderf /ui**.
was disturbing me. We were studying out lessons. You were
troubler*» «* (r) ^tudiet^ » Ufon.
singing a song. They were playing in the corner. 1 brought**
chante'^ ^ chanton, f. jouer dans coin. m. apporter t
him** a book. He admired it** much. We invited them to stay.
(f) Uvre, m. admirer *° (h) beaucoup. inviter ** d rester.
You went away too soon. They arrived in time. — I shall dine**
Vout vous m alUr - trop tot arriver a terns. (q) diner
with you. He will send it** me. We will accompany you. You
avec *. (q) envoy er^ *• aceompagner **
will sup with us. They will bnng it** to them. 1 should like**
touper **. apporter - ■*. (q)
aimer
to see it**. He would give it you, if you asked him** for it**.
a voir le, (q) donner «* », si demandiez (f) -^ le.
We should stay with you, if we had time. You would avoid his
Tester
iviter
avians Uems, m.
company, if you knew him. They would pay them, if they had
compagnie, f. contiaissiez **. payer ** , avaient
money. They would lend them** some, if they asked them** for it".
*argent, preter (f) (g) **, demandaient (f ) - le,
INTERROGATIVELY. Do T speak** too fast? Doest thou advise me
(q) ** parler trop vite? (q) ** conseiller **
to do it** ? Does he converse well ? Do we spend (toc^much)
de fiure Uf (q) ** converter bien? *^ dipenser trop
money*? Do you live in town now? Do they call us?
argent^'^ 7 *' demeurer a la ville f. d prhent ? *' appeller ** ?
ff^as I striking too hard ? Was he speaking french ? ^ere we
(r) *' f rapper** trop fort 7 *^ parler franfais7 (r)
>
7
going too far? ^ere you eating fruit? fFere they scolding your
ailer trop l<fin 7 ** manger ^fruit m. 7 *^ grander ** i
Did I hurt** him? Did he shut the door? Did we
(q) " blesser «*? " /erm«r » portef.7 si
* The learner must peruse the verbs before he writes these exercises.
t Make the tame difference in the verbs which are here given, as is marked in italic
diaracters in the verb BLAMer, page 11^, agreeably to tense, number, and person,
t See the irregular verb envoy^t, page 117.
(r) Do not express the auxiliary words be, am, art, is, are, was, wast, were, when they
are followed by the present participle in ing. Consider them only as signs which in-
dicate the tense in which the verb which foUows them must be in french.
96 AN INTRODUCTION
RECAPITULATORY EXERCisB OH the foregoiTig Titles,
VERBS 111 er,
gain any thing? Did you invite them? Did they insult you?
gagner quelqtie chote ? (q) inviter ■* ? inndter •*
Shall I begin« it«* again? ^ill he bring it with him?
(q) ** recmimencer le — ? (q) appoi-ter ** "
Shall we divide it amongst us? Will you think of me? JVill
partager »* entre "/ penser d * ?
they take it«* along with them ? —Should I lend it him* it
emporter le — arcc " ? ((f) «» prater •* (f),
he asked me for it? fFould he stay with us, if we asked him?
demandait «* - »v (q) rester avec *, enpriwns •*
Should we dance, if it was not so late ? Would you shew it** me,
(q) dansery (i) ^tait " si tardl (q) montrer » ,
if I called at (your house) ? Would they change it, if I sent it
passais chez vous 'i (q) changer ■*, si renvoyait
back to them ? Would they forgive me, if I begged their pardon ?
— - •• '/ pardonner •*, demandais leur^ pardon ?
NEGATIVELY. I do Tiot blame you. He does not deny it. We
(q) " bldmer*^ «* (q) w nier »*
do not breakfast so soon. You do not give me moneys enough.
" dejeuner ^ si t6t, ** donner •* argent^^- assez.
They rfo not cost (so much.) 1 was not touching it. He was
** co<i£«r tant, (r) ** toucAer** y**.
not taking it away. We were not disputing. You were not listening
emporter /«** — (r) disputer *». icouter
to me. They tocre not looking at you. 1 did not speak to
- •* regarder - ". (q) ** parler^
her. She cfzci not look at me. We did not shew it to them.
•* regarder — ■* montrer •• ■•
You did not eat any«*. They did not invite us. — I shall not stay**
manger* (g) inviter ■* (<l) ** rc»rer
long. ^ He tDiU not incommode you. We shall not play to-night.
longtems. (q) incommoder *• joii«r cc soir.
You «w7/ not fail to ask for it**. They will not shew it** you.
manquer de demander - le, montrer **
I should not like** to go there. He would not borrow money*, if he
(q) ** aimer H alter y**. (q) emprunter argent^'^-, ^
had any**. We should not d^pise others, if we had no pride*.
avait (g) mepriser les autreSf si n*avions pas orgueiL^^'
You would never pardon him, if you knew what he has done.
** pardonner lui**, saviez ** fait
They would not blame me, if they knew the pains I have taken.
bldmer **, savaient peines (n) prises,
NEGATIVELY and INTERROGATIVELY. Do I not begin** right?
(q) *i *• commencet bienf
Does she not dance well ? Do we not incommode you ? Do you
(q) ** ** dauser bien f ** ** incommoder ** f '*
• See note *, page 110,
TO FRENCH GRAMMAR. 97
RECAPiiULATOBY EXERCISE 071 the foregoing rules.
YEass in er.
not breakfast this morning? Do they not deserve it? — H^as I
» dejeuner * matin m.^ i «i miriter l^'! (r) •*
not relating it right? Was he not shaking the table? Were we not
« raconter •* bien 'i »* rmuer table f. / (r) **
walking too fast? Were you not speaking to me? Were they not
marcher trap vite ? *' parler - ** / *•
asking you for it*? — Did I not shut the door? Did he not ffive
demander ** - /« ? (q) »i m fermer poj'te f. / *^ donner
her*^ some ? Die? we not stay too long ? Did you not encourage
(f) (g)*® / " restw trop long-temt'i . " eneourager
them? JD/c? they not accompany you? — Shall I not bring it** you?
•* y *^ . accompagner ** / (q) *^ ** apporter le * /
^i7^ he not marry her ? S^aZ/ we not sing a song ? Will you not
(q) '^ ipouser •* / *i chanter chanson f. / **
grant him" that favour? ^?7/ they not refuse it«* me? — Would not
accorder (f) i ^dce f. ? rc/u««r U ^ '! (q) »»
that book cost less in London than here ? Would not your father
** couter moim d. Lotidres qu* ici ? (q) ** *■
send him to France, if he was older ? Would he not go himself,
envoy er* « « itait dgi^^ '! (q) «i allerf lui-mime,
if he had time? Would not your sister go with him, if he went?
avait 7temsm.f (q) " allerf » , «' t/ y alUitf
VERBS in ^r. j
REGULAR. I am finishing the work I had begun. He (s building
(r) finir * ouvrage (n) avaU commencS, (r) bdtir
a new** house. We are demolishing ours. You are embellishing ii"
nenve maison, f. (r) dimolir *^ .embellir *»
much. They are filling it** with furniture. — I was reflecting on
beaucoup, remplir ** de meubles. (r) rifiichir d.
what I have to do. He - was languishing in misery. We toere
*^ b. /aire, Umguir dans ^misere. f. (r)
warning them of the danger. You were not applauding what they
avertir ** danger, m. ** appiaudir a *•
have done. Were they not betraying us ? — I punished him severely.
fait. (r) *^ ** trahir ** f punir ** skveretnent.
Did he not accomplish his purpose ? Did we not obey your orders ?
^q^ ai »a accomplir dessein m. ? (q) ** obSir H * arrfr« f
You cZ2(2 not choose a good colour. They matched them as well as
(q) ** choisir bonne couleur.t assortir ** atissibien qu*
they could. — I wiU banish him from my house. That will rejoice
purent. (q) bannvr ** de * ** rijouir
US (very much.) We will bless you (as long) as we live. You
•* beaucoup, b^nir ** tant que viwons.
* See the inegular verb envover, page 117. t See aller, page 116.
X See page 118 the regular verb finir, and make the same difference in these verbs.
u
98 AN INTRODUCTION
RECAPITULATOfeY EXERCISE 071 the fittgoin^ TUlei,^
VERBS in tV.
AEOULAR. toUi fill what you can find. Thut will Hot impoverish
emplir *® pourrex trouvert appauvrir
them much. — t ioould cure him, if I could. You would finish
•* beatieoup, (q) gu£rir ■* , si pouvais, firiir
at once 'our misfortunes. We w<mld abolish it, if we could. You
tmit d*uncoup ' malheur, abolir **, pouvions,
would divert them much. Your brothers would succeed better, if
divertir ** * riussir (b) ,
they were more careful. Will this tree" blossom this year? Did
^ient soigneiLx, (q) * arbre m. fleurir ^ anniefj (q)
it** blossom last" year? Youngs trees seldom''* blossom two years
•* fleurir demiere ' 7 "^Jeunei raremtnt fleurir deux
together. Do the fruits ripen well ? Do they" not often** wither on
(de suite.) (q) **m. mUrtr ? ^ souvent se flitrir d
the tree? Do they" not commonly** (grow rotten) ? (Here are) several
* y (q) * ordinairement pourrir '/ Voici plusieun
sorts of fruit ; choose which you like best* Fillf your basket
sarte f. ^ ; choitirf ^ aimer le mieux, Remplir corbeille f
(with it.) Enjoy it while it mil last. We will supply you
en**. Jouir t «n* pendant que ** durer, foumir •*
with pears and apples^ as fast as they wiU ripen. The children
- ^Ire f. ^omme f., ausd vite qu* ^ murir. enfant m.
will rejoice (very much,) for they are very** fond of fruit,, and it
se rejouir beaucoup, car — beaucoup aimei* - '^fruit, ^
is growing dearer every day. I hope that they wUl obey you, for
- ench^ir - touts les jours. esptirer qu* (fbiir *• , car
children who disobey their parents seldom** succeed.
f *** dimthiir H ^ parent rarement r^ussir.
. I am perusing this book, boes it*> belong to you?
(r) parcourir* * litre, m. (q) ^ appartenir* - ** ?
It belongs to a friend of mine. Runf fast. Why do not you run
** appartenir* *® Courir vite, Pourquoi ** courir
faster? We are running as hard as we can. For whorn are
vite ^®'/ (r) courir ** vite ^ pouvons. Pour *f , (r)
you gathering these flowers ? We are gathering them for your
cueilUr * fleur f cueillir ** pour
mother. I wUl offer them to her, that .she may remember me.
offrir ** - ** » afin qu* se souvenir de *°
Does not your mother hate me? Why should she hate you?
(q) »a hair ^ f ' m hair " f
Because she never comes to see us. He maintains that he has not
Puree que ** venir - t?oir **. souteiiir qu* **
done ic, but I firmly** believe that he lies. fFas your sister asleep,
fait **, fermement crois qu* menhir, (r) *' darmir,
when we set out? They came in as we were going out.
quand partir - f entrer - comme (r) sortir -
* See the table of the in-egnlar verbs in ir, p. 120. t 2d person jjnperative
IRREGULAR
TO FRENCH GRAMMAR. 99
RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE OTl the fottgoing ftdej,
VERBS in «>•
IRREGULAR. They were running to U9» when we discoveted
accourir vers ^, d^couvrir
them. I came yesterday to see you, but you were not in. I went out
early in the morning, and I did not return till late. .1 met
ie bon - - matiiif m. (q) ne* revenir que* tard, rencontrer
your father, and he consented to every thing that I proposed to
coruentir d tout C9 que proposer
him. Did my father offer you any money ? He offered me all
«*. (q) *« offrir " » argent '/ offrir « tout
the money that I should want. We went out (as soon) as the
dont aurais besoin, tortir - aussitot que
dinner was over. You did not set out so soon as you intended.
diner m. fut finii, , partir - ii tot que (aviez desiein.)
They detained us a good while at the inn. At what time toill
retenir ** - Mng terns d * auherge. a ^ heure f. (q)
you set out to-morrow P We shall set out as soon as we are
poilxr - demain f (q) partir - aussitSt que serom
ready. When will you return? We shall not return before the
pret^^, Quand revenir f ** revenir avant
end of next" week. Shall I help you to a glass of wine ?
fin f prochaine '^semaine, f. servir ** - verre m. ' vin f
Help yourself first. I will help myself afler you. I will
Servir t?ou«* le premier. servir nu/'* apres *■
never consent (to it) You grow more ceremonious every day.
^' conseatir y ^. devfnir cirimonieux toutt les jours.
Why do you not come to see us oflener ? Why does not
Pourquoi *' venir - voir ■* souvent^^f
your sister come with you f When will your brother return fVom
*• venir avec ^ f * revenir de
.^is journey? Will he not set out as soon as he hears that
voyage m. f ** partir - aussitdt qvf apprendra que
you are going (to be married ?) fFUl your mothcJr consent to your
oiler vous marier f *■ corisentir
marriage? fFUl she not obtain your father*s consent? Iflw^re
tnariage f ^ obtenir *' consentement m, f itais
in your place, I would not go out so soon. Would my brother
d place, (q) «» smiir - si tk, (q) **
obtain that place, if he asked for it**? Should the children go
obtenir * place, f, demandait - •'(h)f ** sortir
odt, if it was fine weather ? It is too late ; they would not
- , t* il faisait beau terns f (i) trap tard ; **
return in time for supper. They would not remember it**.
revenir it terns pour souper, ** se souvenir erf*.
They would soon" feel the want (of it.)
bient6t sentir besoinm. en**.
' Ne que, without pas, ezpresscB not tUU
II 2
100 AN INTRODUCTION
RECAPITULATORY EXERCISB 071 the forCgoijlg ruUs.
VERBS in oiV.*
Does that man" owe you any thing? He owes me a
(q) * homme devoir •* quelqut chose f devoir •* -
(great deal) of money. (How much) does he owe you? I do not
beaucoup " argent, la, Combien devoir ** f **
know exactly; but I can get nothing from him. You should tell
iavoir au juste ; ne pouvoir tirer neti de * devoir (s) dire
him** that you want it. You should get him arrested. He is
(f) qti£ avez besoin en**. (s) fiiire ■* arrSter, devoir (t)
to pay me part (of it) in a day or two. If you receive it**
- payer ■* unepartie **«i* dans jourm,ou deiix, recevoir ^
to-morrow, will you lend me eighteen or twenty pounds ? I
demairit vouloir priter ^ dix-kuit ou vingt awes sterling f
can not" lend you (so much.) I can lend you** ten or twelve
pouvoir priter •* tant, pouvoir priter vous en** dix douze.
Lend me what you can. Were we not to take a walk this
Priter *• ^ pourrex. Devoir (t) ** - faire wi tour de promenade *
evening ? Yes, we were ; but the master will not let me (go out)
sotrm, f Oui, le devoir (t); vouloir laisser ** sorttr
before I have said my lesson. Can you say it** now ? I do
(avant que) aie dit * /epon. f. Pouvoir dire ** dprisentf
not know whether I can ' say it** or not ; but I knew it**, when
savoir si pouvoir dire ** ou non ; satais **, qvxmd
T came in. You do not know it^ yet. I shall know it** in a little"
SUM entri. savoir *® encore. savoir ** en - peu^-^-
time. I can say it** now. I see your sister who is coming
terns. pouvoir dire ^ iiprisent. voir ** (r) venir
to help us. We do not see her oflen, but we sometimes hear
- cider ** voir ** souvent, quelquefois^ rececoir
(from her.) You shall see her to-morrow, if you will, for I
(de ses nouoeUes.) voir ** demain, vouioir, car
know that she intends to call upon you. If you will believe me,
savoir qu* (a dessein) de passer chez ** vouloir croire ** ,
we will go. I think that it will rain soon. If it rains, do
s*en alter. penser pleuvoir bientot. pleuvoir,
you know what we will do ? We will sit down under that large
savoir *• ferons f s'asseoir sous (p) gros *^
tree, until the rain is over. I can not" stay. I do not
arbre m. Cjusqu' d ce que) pluie f. soit pass^e. pouvoir rester,
know
savoir
now what I must do. It will not rain much. It is only a shower.
voir *® devoir faire. pleuvoir Ce n'est qa* * ond^e. f.
* See the table of verbs in oir, page 134, 135.
(s) Should^ denoting duty^ or the necessity of doing a thing, is expressed by the cou"
ditional of DEVOIR ; as. You should or ought to do it. Vous devriez le faire.
(X) The present tense of the verb BE, am, art^ is, «re, and the imperfect was, were,
followed by the infinitive of a verb, are expressed by the same tenses of devoir ; as,
I am to go there. Je oois y aller. I was to go there. Je devais y ailer*
TO FRENCH GRAMMAIl. 101
hiECAnruLATORY EXERCISE 071 the forcgoing rules,
VERBS in re*
What aje you doing there? I am waiting for my brother
" (t) «i faire let ? (r) attendre
He is learning his lesson in the garden. If you see him,
(r) apprendre ^ lefon f. dans jardin» m, voir •* ,
tell him* that I am waiting for him here. I hear you. Why
dire (0 9*t« attendre ** id, entendre **. Pourqvm
do you interrupt me so often ? Do you pretend to know that better
(q) interrompre ** si souventf pr6tendre - tavoir *' (b)
than I do? I vnll not interrupt you (any more.) These people
91M ** - ? (q) n« interrompre ** plus ** * gens
sell "very bad*^ wine. They sell it"* very dear. I never drink
vendre tres - mauvais vin* m. vendre ^ cher, ^'"^ bdre
mne* , when they** sell it** so dear. Do you hear that man?
vin ^-^f quand N.B. vendre ^ si (q) entendre * f
He is speaking to us. I hear him, but I do not understand what
(r) parler — •*. entendre •* • , comprendre *®
he says. I was answering your letter, when I heard that you were
dire» (r) r&pondre i lettre, qiiand (ai appris) que £tiez
in town. You surprise us quite, for we did not expect you
en ville» surprendre ■* Ctout Afaitf) car (q) attendre **
so soon. I came down as soon as I heard you. If I return
si tot, descendre - aussitot que entendre ^ . rendre
them", their goods, will they return me my money ? They would
(f) marchandise, rendre •* • argent f
not return you one half (of it.) I would lose the whole rather
rsndre ** la moiti6 **«n*. perdre toutm, plutot
than submit to such terms. What are you learning now?
que (de me soumettre) d ^Helles conditions, * (r) apprendre d, present f
I am learning mathematics. Do you understand them well ? I
apprendre "^math^matiques, entendre ** bien f
understand them pretty well. If you take * pains, you will make
entendre ** asses bien, prendre de la peine, faire
great^' progress in a short* time. Does your sister learn ^music
^® progres en - peu nb. ^q) * a« apprendre musique
still*? No; she is learning french* and geography. Do you read
encore f Non ; (r) apprendre frangais m. f geographic, t, (q) lire
french" books now? I am reading Marmontel's tales. I do not
Hivre dprSsentf (r) lire " "^eontes,
.ike tales. I like plays. Do you translate any book? I translate
aimer f "^comedies, traduire quelque f traduire
english'* histories into french. I pity you much. Why do you
anglais ^^ ^histoiref, en fran^i^, plaindre ** fori, Pourquoi
pity me? Because you are losing your time, and you displease all
piaindre ** f Farce que (r) perdre teins, et que d^plaire d tout^'^
your friends. I do not fear them. I (fa not depencjj upon them*
* ami, m. craindre •*. d^pendre\ d' *^.
• See the table of verHip re» p. HO, 147, 146.
103 AN INTRODUCTION
RBCAPITULA.TORY EXBRCISE OTl ike foregQitlg TUks,
VERBS in re.
I wiU do what I think proper. That man is always^ laughing.
faire *' croir^ apropos. * (r) toujours rire.
Do you know what he is laughing at? He does not know h^
savoir *» (r) rire de^l ** savoir le
himself. Let us drink* your friend's health. What shall we drink ?
lui-meme, - - boire a " '^santS.f, '* (q) boiref
Drink a glass of wine. I will drink a glass of beer. I will not
Boiref verrem,^ (q) boire * biire, **
permit you to do that. Promise me not to do it**. Well! £
permettre ■* de faire ** Promettre t ^ dene pas faire le. Eh bien !
promise it to you. You always promise, but you seldom'* keep
promettre ** - ^ , toujours^ promettref mats rarement tenir
your word. 1 do pot believe what he says. Why do not you
parole, ** croire *^ dire Pourquoi ** *^
Delieve him? Do you mean to say that he lies? I do not say
croire ** f *^ vouloir - dire qu>* mentirf ** dire
so ; I only*^ say that people often** promise what they*' do not
cela ; seuUm^t dire que *' ^'^ sowent promettre *° ^*^' **
intend to perform. What are you sewing there ? I am making a
avoir dessein de faire, *• (r) coudre la f (r) faire *
gown for a sister of mine. For which of your sisters are you
roifi f. pour 48 a« i ^j.)
making it** ? For the youngest. You are always** doing and undoing the
faire ^ f jeune *^ . toujours faire d^faire *
same thing over again. Put out one of these candles. Putrt,^ these
m^me chose f. - - Eteindre t une (p) chandelles, f. Rem£ttreXjp)
books into their places again. Why do you not pay attention to
livre d ^ - Pourquoi faire attention.
what I say to you? fVill the master permit us to (go out)
*® dire - ®*f ** permettre ** de 9ortir
to-day? I do not know; ask it*<^ him*^. He will not live long,
aujourd'hui? savoir; demander le(f), vivreC long terns)
if he drinks (so much.) Yet, he appears to enjoy good health.
it boire tant, Cependant, paraitre - iouir d^une bonne taniS. f.
COMPOUND TENSES.
Have you seen my mother? I have seen her, but I have not spoken
voir f voir^ ** , parler
to her. Has your sister done what she had promised me to do?
** ** faire *® avait promettre ** de faire f
Why has she not done it? Has your father forbid her to do
Pourquoi ** faire ^f ' ** d^fendre iui** de fatre
it** ? Has your brother been where I had told him ? Has he
lef ^^ etre oil avais dire lui^^f
received the letter which® my sister has sent him** ? Have you read
recevoir lettret (m) envoycr t (0^ Uret
• Ist person imperatiye. t 2nd person imperative, t This participle must be feminine
TO FRENCH GRAMMAR. 103
RECAPITULATORY EXBRCI8B ofi the foregomg rules,
COMPOUND TENSES.
if^ ? Has your &ther bought the horse which"* I had recommended
^ (li) f 3> acheter (m) avaU recommander
to hixn'^? Has he tried itP Has my mother brought any body
(f) f essay er *^f *' amener qvslqu* un
with her? Are your brothers gone out? Have your sisters
aveo » f «a «artir plur. - f »
finished the work they had begun ? They would not have done
finir ouvrage(n) avaient eommenoert *' faire
it so soon, if they had not been compelled (to it.) I haire met
■* $i tot, avaient ** farcies y **. rencontrer
^ man on (horseback) who has asked me the way to (your house.
d. cheval demander *^ cheminm,diez wus^.
REFLECTIVE VERBS.t
AFFiRMAT. I am getting up. He is washing himself. We
(r) se leoer - (r) u laver *•
are dressing ourselves. You are amusing yourselves. They are
(r) s*habiUer •* s^amuser ••
getting ready to (go out). I was getting up, when you called me.
s*apprSter - d sertir - . (r) se lever - , qmnd appeler **
He was warming himself in the parlour. We were conversing by
se chauffer ■* dans salle f. (r) s*entretenir pris
the fire. You were (making merry). They were laughing at us.
du feu, se diverttr, se moquer de ■.
iNTERRoa. Do I get up too late ? Does that man (run away) ?
(q) ^^ seUver - trap tardf (q) ■ ** t*enfuirf
Does your bird" (grow tame) ? Do we warm ourselves
(q) oiseau m. s*appriveiser t •* se cbauffef **
(loo much) ? How do you do ? How does your sister do ?
tropf Comment *' se porter? ** se porter f
Was I coming too near ? fFds he hiding himself ? Did we
(r) s^approcher pres f se cocker ■* f **
expose ourselves (too much)? fVere you inquiring after them?
s^exposer ■* trap f »' ijiformer d* * ?
NEOATiv. I do not care for him. He does not mistrust them.
(q) ** se souder de * (q) ** se mijier de ^
We do not repent (of it"). You do not rise early enough. They
<e repent ir en^, se lever assn matin.
do not meddle with his affairs. I did not stop. He did not
semeUr de * affaire, (q) s'arriter. **
undress himself. We did not sit down. You did not awake in
se dSshabiller •• . s'asseoi"' - . s'iveiller d
time. I did not expect that they*« would have called me up so soon.
terns. ' sattendre N.k (q) ^eiller » - j» tot.
t See the reflective verb se blamer, p. ll^.
104 AN INTRODUCTION
RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE 071 the foregoitig rules.
REFLECTIVE VERBS.
INTERR. and NEGAT. Am I not mistaken ? Doe» he not apply to
(r) «i 3^ se tromper f (q) »» «* s*appliquer
study'? Do we not walk to-day? Why do not you (make
*6tudef ** sepromenei' aujourd'huif Pourquoi " *' s«
haste)? Why do not you (get ready)? Do you not rejoice (at the)
d&picherf ** s*appriter f *i se r/^jouir de»
good" news we have received? Do you not remember what I
*7 nouvetUi f. (n.) ref ue5 f m touvenir de ^
have told you? No; I do not remember it*». I do not recollect it*.
dk ^ se souvenir en^. te rappeler U**
COMPOUND TENSES.
AFFIR. I have (gone to bed) late. Thou hast soon (fallen asleep).
• te coucher tard, * bientot t*endormir.i
He has awoke early. We have (got up) before you. You have
• g^SveilUr de bon matin, * se lever\ avant *■ •
hurried yourself (too much). They have dressed themselves in haste.
se presser\ trop^, - • s*habiUei'} H la hate,
INTER. Have 1 (gone away) too soon ? Hast thou bathed lately ?
• " s*enaUer\ trcptdt 9 • 5i se baigner depuis peuf
Has he amused himself well? Have we undressed ourselves
• *^ s*amuser bienX f • ^^ se dtshabiUerf
too soon ? Have you been well since I saw you ? Have
tot 9 • ^^ se porter t dtpuu que w'ai vu ** ? •
they stopped too long? Have they (got ready) in time?
** s'arreterf trap long'tems9 • ** s'appreterf d, terns 9
NEGAT. I have not been well to-day. Thou hast not complained (of iO.
* ** se porter t • m se plaindre en *•
He has not perceived it much. We have not walked long.
• ** t^apercevoir en® t • m se promenerf long-terns.
You hav'fe not rested enough. They have not (sat down) a moment.
• " se reposeri assez, t • M s'asseoir t un moment,
i-STER and n::gat. Have I not (made haste) enough? Hast thou
• 51 as gg dipecher t asiez % f • ^*
not (caught cold)? Has she not married too young? Have we
** s'enrhumer 9 • ai as ,g marier t jeune 9 • »i
not mistaken the way ? Have you not inquired after them ?
** sem^prendrei de chemin9 * " ** s'informeri d* " f
Have they not applied to you ? Have they not (been mistaken) ?
• 51 55 g'adresser t " ? ♦ ai as ^g tromper t ?
* In the compound tenses of the verbs that are made reflective, the auxiliary verb
HAVE can never be expressed by the verb avoir ; it most be expressed by the same
terus and person of the auxiliary verb etre to BE. See the compound tenses of tiie
reflective verb blamer, page 115.
t This participle must agree in gender and number with the nominative of the ver^
See Syntax, Rule 158.
) Jhis a4verb must be placed 6e/ore the participle in french. See Syntax, Rule 183.
THE 105
CONJUGATIONS
OR
ACCIDENCE OP VERBS.
A VERB, as has been seen, page 91, is a word which expresses
either being or acting.
As the same action ma> be performed in different manners, at different
timeSy and by different persons, it was found necessary to modify or vary
the same word, so as to denote the manner in which an action is done,
the TIME in which it is done, and the person or persons by whom it is
done, and this is what grammarians call conjugation.
The manners of acting, in grammar called modes or moods, SLvefour;
INFINITIVE, imperative, INDICATIVE, SUBJUNCTIVE, or CONJUNCTIVE.
The TIMES, in grammar called tenses, are properly three only; past,
PRESENT, and future; but, in order to express time with more precision,
these are again divided into other tenses, the use of which will be seen
in the syntax of verbs.
The PERSONS who act in a verb are generally three for each number.
1. The person or persons who ^edk ; as, j blame; we blame.
2. The person or persons spoken to ; as, rhou blamest; you blame.
3. The person, persons, or thmgs spoken of; as, ne, she, my brother^
My sister blames ; rhey. My brothers^ My sisters blame.
The modifications or variations by which these moods, tenses, and
persons are known, differ, according to the different languages.
In english, the difference is shewn by the means of certain si^wi pre-
fixed to the verb ; as, do blame ; did blame ; shaJll or will blame ;
shot(ld or toould blabie ; may blame, might blame.
In french, it is made by changing the last syllable of the word ; as, je
blAm 6, TU blAm es, il blAm e, nous blAm ons, yous blAm ez, ils
blAm ent ; je blAm ais ; je blAm ai ; je blAmer ai ; je rlAmer ais, &c.*
This variation in the tenses and persons, simple as it is, because it is
nearly uniform, is nevertheless found embarrassing by some persons.
The difficulty lies chiefly in the present and perfect tenses of the indi-
cative and subjunctive moods, and in the imperative.
In order to remove it as much as possible, I have placed in one point
of view, the tenses which are either similar or partly similar, or formed
from one another, that, by perceiving at once the similarity or the dif-
ference, the learner's mind may be more easily impressed with it.-
* 1'he signs by which these inflections or yariations are made, not being the same iu
all verbs, the conjugations mast also be various.
The number of them is not exactly fixed, and varies in almost every grammar. Some
fix it at /our, some at six, some at t«n, some at eleven, some at twelve.
It appears tome that their number must either be limited to /our, or extended to twelve.
As amongst such a number of conjugations, out of which there will still be a great
number of irregular verbs, it is very diflficuU for learners to distinguish of what conju-
gation a verb is ; and as the infinitive of all the french verbs ends in one of these termi-
nations ER, IR, oiR, RE, tlie only signs by which each different conjugation may be
discriminated, 1 have thought it more simple to fix their number at four.
All verbs which may be conjugated after the same manner as one of these four, are
called regular.
Those verbs which can not be conjugated like one of these four, are called irregular,
and set in an alphabetical order after the regular, so that the learner can never be mis-
taken as to the manner of conjugatiog any verb which he may have need of, by paying
attention to the termination of the infinitive only.
106
AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR.
INFINITIVE MOOD OR MANNER
To HAVE, AVoiV.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Have.
Aie, SlTlg.
Ayez, plur*
•
Let m have
•
Ayons.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
aUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
y^ I have.
S Thou hast.
J't
ai».{
Quef aie«.
p
Tu
as*.
Qice tu aies.
^
^
1 He has.
II
a.
QuHl ait*.
§
J fFe have.
NOUS^ AV 07M*.
Que nous ayons*.
g You have.
Vous
AV €«*.
Que vous ayez.
* They have.
lis
01) t«.
Qu*ils aient".
g* J had.
•g Thou hadst.
,
r
AV aiV.
•
Tu
AV a««.§
§» He had.
II
AV a/^.
#
I TFe had.
Nou^
AV I07W.
1 You had.
Vous
AV fear.
? TAcy had.
lis
AV aten^.
^ I had.
g^ TAou hadst,
g He had.
J't
eus".
Quef eusse®.
P
Tu
eus.||
Qmc <2< euBses*.
II
eut««.
Qu*il efit*
g- We had.
Nou^
eumes.
Qi^e nof/« eussions.
1-
§ You had.
Vow
eutes'®.
Que vous euBsiez.
* TAeyhad.
lis
eurent".
QuHls eussent^".
>^ I shall or will have.
r
•aurai*.
.
^ Thou shalt, wilt have.
Tu
auras*.
3 1/e shall, will have.
II
aura.
o IVe shall, will have.
5^ You shall, will have.
Noui^
aurons.
Vous
aurez.
? TAey shall, will have.
lis
auront*.
51 /should, wld
. have.
J'
'aurai s«.
J* 7%0M shd. wld. have.
Tu
aurais.§
He shd. wld.
have.
II
aurai t*.
& We shd. wld. have. Nous^^ aurions.
S
YoM shd. wld. have. Vous
auriez.
S- They shd. wld. have. //« auraient^
GERUNDy or present participle.
Having. Ayant.
PARTICIPLE past.
Had.
£U.
Have I?
Hast thou?
Has he ?
Has s^e 9
Has my brother?
Has my sister?
The same verb conjugated Interrogatively.
Ki-je'' ?
AS-<U« ?
A-t-l7« ?
A-t-c/Ze« ?
Monfrhre &'Ul^?
Ma sceur a-t-ci/-e* ?
Avons-no?/^" ?
Avez-uoiw*^ ?
ont-i7««» ?
onUelles'^ ?
Mes fr^res ont-27«" ?
Mes soeurs ont-elles^?
3*
P
«<
person.
* The plural is generally used instead of tibie singular , though speaking to a single ]
t See npte * page S8. i These figures refer to the pronunciation, see page 4.
i See note 6, page 6. j| See, syntax of verbs, the distinction between avais and eut
AUXIUARV VERB AVOIR.
The same verb ayoiji conjugated negatively
INFINITIVE.
NOt to HAVE. NepaS AVOIR.
IMPERATirE,
Have not iv^'aie, or n' ayez \
Let us not have.
107
MNDICATIFE.
had not.
I have 710^.
Thou hast not.
He has not.
We ]
You >have not
They J
I
Thou
He
We
You I
They J
Thou
^ Miad not
You
TheyJ
I
Thou
He
We
You
TheyJ
I
Thou
He
We
You
TheyJ
n* ai*
n as
«* a
shall, will
7iot have.
shld. wld.
not have.
Je
Tu
11
Nous n' avons"
Vous n* avez
lis 71* ont«3
Je n* avais*
Tu n* avals
II 7i* avait*
Nous 71* avions
Vous 71* aviez
Ila 71* avaient"
Je 71* eus*«
Tu 71* eus
II 71* eut**
Nous 71* eAmes
Vous 71* eilles
lis 71* eurent^*
Je 71* aurai'
Tu 71* auras
II 71* aura
Nous n* aurons
Vous 71* aurez
lis 71* auront*
Je 71* aurais*
Tu 71* aurais
II n* aurait
Nous 71* aurions
Vous 71* auriez
lis 71* auraient"
N- ayons j^^*^
SUBJUNCTIVE
Ti'aie*
iww.t
72 aies
Que je
Que tu
Qu'il 7i*ait*»
Que nous Ti'ayons
Que vous Ti'ayez
Qu'ils 72*aient"
rpas.
S
}pat.
^
'pa«.
Que je Tt'eusse ^
Que tu Tt'eusses i
Qu'il Ti'efit*' [ g
Que nous Tt'eussionsf^^* ^
Que vous 7»'eu88iez I ^
Qu'ils «*eusBent^'j rS
^jpa«.
>pas.
PARTICIPLE.
pas eu. Not had.
GERUND.
Not having. jv* ayant pas.
The same verb conjugated negatively and interrogatively.
Have I j iv* ai-je" 1 jv* avons-Tioiwl
Hast thou I JO 2v* as-<u" I « y avez-ro?/« I «
Has he ""'^ Va-t-.7»p"«^ j.' ont-i/,» P?
Has she ] V a-t-cWcJ jv* out-ewes'* j
Has 710^ my brother? Mon frfere 7i'a-t-t7* pas? Mes fr^res 7i* ont-t7« pcwr?
Has noi my sister ? Ma soBur 7i'a-t-e//6" pas? Mes soBurs7i'ont-e//c«|?a«?
f See note * page 28 .
t See the negative adverbs, rule 5ff, page 94.
h2
108
AUXILIARY VERB ETRE.
INFINITIVE MOOD,
To BE. etre»
Be.
Let U8 be.
IMPERATIVE.
sois, 8i?ig. soyez, plur.*
INDICATIVE,
ug -Tarn.
S Thou art.
S Hie is.
^ ff^e are.
g You are.
• They are.
g< I was.
"g TAou wast.
g» He was.
S^ ^c were.
You were.
TAcy were.
^ J was.
2 Thou wast.
§ He was.
r* We were.
Cv
S You were.
* TAey were.
^ J shall or will be.
2^ TAoz£ shalt, will be.
» He shall, will be.
g ^e shall, will be.
i
5' You shall, will be.
? They shall, will be.
t? I should, wld. be.
s* TAoif shd. wld. be.
I He shd. wld. be.
g- ;re shd. wld. be.
I' You shd. wld. be.
*r 7%€y shd. wld. be.
Je* tsuis*.
Tm es«.
II 'est«
iVb{/« sommes.
FoM« 6tes*.
lis sont*.
/' i,T aisP.
Tu iT ais.
II iT ait^.
Noiis ix ion^.
Vou8 ^Tiex,
lis ^T aieni\
Je* ffus*.
Tu fus.t
J/ fut*'.
Nous fllmes.
Vou^ futes*.
Its furent".
J^ serai*.
Tu seras*.
// sera.
Nous serons.
Voy^ serez*.
lis seront*.
J^ serais'.
Tu serais.
II serait**.
Notts serions.
Vous seriez.
Us seraient".
soyons.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
SOIS
S3
Quej^
Que tu sois"^.
QuHi Eoit»».
Que notes soyons*.
Que vous soyez.
Quits Boient^'.
Quej^
Que tu
Qu'il
fuBse*.
fusses*'.
Que nous fussions.
Que vous fussiez.
QuHls fuBsent^^
CO
GERUNDf or
present participle, partici ple
past
Being.
The
iT ant, iTd.
sams verb conjugated Interrogatively.
Been.
Ami?
suis-jf'c^ ? sonimes-«o?/«** ?
p
Art thou ?
ES'tu^^ ? Etes vous^^ ?
S
Is he?
Est-i/M ? sont-i&« ?
$
Is she?
Est-eWcM ? 8ont-eZ/es« ?
•>c
Is my brother ?
Mon fr^re est-tZ" ? Mes freres sont-t&=^
'?
^
Is my sister ?
Ma soeur est-eZ/e* ? Mes soeurs sont- eZ/cs" ?
ft
•
* The plural is generally used instead of the singvlar, though speaking to a single person
t See note 2, pmge 1. | See. syntax of Terbs, the distinction between itaU and fu$
AUXILIARY VERB ETRE.
The same verb £tre conjugated negatively.
INFJNITIFE.
Not to BE. jve jtas etre.
IMPERATIVE,
Be not. Ne sois, or Ne soyez
109
]
Let us 720^ be.
INDICATIVE.
I am 720^.
Je^ 72C suis
Thou art not.
Tu /i* es2«
He is ?iot.
II n* est«
We
Nous 7ie sommes
You >are not.
Vous 71* 6tes
They J
lis 72C sont««
I
Je' 7i' ^tais«
Thou >was not.
Tu n' ^tais*
He J
II n' (5tait«<»
We
Nous n* ^tions
You
►were not.
Vous n* fetiez
They
lis 71* ^taient*
I 1
Je' ne fus
Thou >was 720^.
Tu ne fus*
He j
II ne fut»
We
Nous Tie fumes
You
►were not.
Vous 72C futes
They J
lis TIC furent"
I 1
Je' TIC serai*
Thoii
Tu T2C seras
He
shall, will
II TIC sera
We
'not be.
Nous TIC serons
You
Vous TIC serez
They,
lis TIC seront*
I
Je* T2C serais'
Thou
Tu T2C serais
He
shld. wld.
II T2C serait
We
710^ be.
Nous TIC serious
You
Vous TIC seriez
Thev.
lis T2C seraient'
^pas.
tpas
Ne soyonsi
SUBJUNCTIVE,
Que je* ne sois*"
Que tu ne sois
Qu'il 72C soit*
Que nous 72c soyons
Que vous ne soyez
Qu'ils ne soient^'
}pas, §
c
>^flW.
Que je' ne fusse ")
B
Que tu TIC fusses
^
Qu*il TIC mt"
Que nous tic fussions
rpas.
Si
Que vdUs TIC fussiez
Qu'ils TIC fussent".
^as.
^as.
PARTICIPLE
Not been
GERUND.
Being 720^. N^^iwaipas. pas it^
The same verb conjugated negatively and interrogatively.
Am I ] Ne suis-jc ] Ne sommes-Tiot/^l
Art tlioul .o y eS'tu I « ^ 6tes-t?oiw I «
Is he P^ i^-est-ii p""^ i.esont-t& b'**^
Is she J iv* est- elle] Ne sont-elles j
Is not my brother? Mon frfere n^esi-il pas? ues freres tic sont-f^f pas ?
Is T20^ my sister? Ma soeur Ti*est-c//c pas 9 Mes sceurs tic sont-c//c9 pas?
* See, syntax, role 140, the distiiiction between avaii and eus ; 4tau and fui.
H 3
110
THE FOUR CONJUGATIOI
A TABLE shewing in one point ofvieWf the didference between the foui
ER.** IR.
INFINIT.
blAm er.
INDICAT.
1^ Je blAm
3 Tu
^ 11
GERUND
ant.
PARTIC.
IMPERAT. SUBJUNCT,
g- Nous
I Voiu
■d
^Je blAm
Tu
I 7/
Vous
* -r.
>^ Jie blA&i
^Tu
I J/
J? 2Vbz/*
I Fous
es.
e,
onf
ez.
ent,
ais,
ait.
ions,
iez.
aienu
ai.
as,
a,
dmes,
dtes,
erent.
e,
ons,
ez.
e,
es.
e.
ions,
iez
ent.
asse,
asses,
at,
assions,
assiez,
assent.
^Je blAmkr ai,
* II
2 Nous
5* Vous
? li-
as,
a,
ons,
ez.
ont.
'^Je blAmer OM.t
Tu
n
S- Nons
I Vous
?^Ils
CIS,
ait.
ions,
iez,
aient.
** After the same manner as blamer are
conjugated all the verbs the injBuitive of
which ends in er (about 2700 in number),
except ALLER and envotee. Observe
only that in the verbs in ger, as CHANcer,
MANoer, soNGcr, the e is retained before
Of 0, in order to soften the sound of g ; so
instead of saying cuahgous, KAHGons,
BOWions ; caAXioaia, MAMGai«, soNoais ;
ve say changeoim, HANGeon«, soMcean^;
CHANGeats, MANCreais, ^cX
GERUND
issant,
IMPERAT.
2S,
issojis,
issez.
PART.
«
SUBJUNCT.
isse.
isses.
isse.
iss^lons.
issiez.
issent.
tsse,
tsses.
it.
tssions,
issiez.
issent.
INFINIT.
FIN ir.
INDICAT.
FIN is.
is,
it,
issons,
issez.
issent,
FIN issais.'\
tssais.
issait.
issions.
issiez.
issaient.
FIN is.
is.
it,
imes,
ites.
irent,
FiNiR ai.
as.
a.
ons.
ez.
ont.
FiNiR ais.f
ais.
ait.
ions,
iez.
aient.
After the same manner as fiiSib are con-
jugated about 220 verbs in irt hoih prindtive
and compound.
Compound verbs are those whose signifi-
cation changes by the means of a preposition
prefixed to them ; as, dejleurir, to lose the
blossom ; refleurir, to blossom again ; which
are conjugated like their primitive Jleurir,
to blossom ; 64faire, to undo ; refaire^ to do
again, which are conjugated like their pri-
mitive ^tre, to do.
* These are the only $ign$ by which it can be known to what conjugation a verb bel<min. By paying attention 1
in er after blAm er, those In ir after fin vr^ tliose in oir after dkv otr, and those in re after attxko re ; and with i
himself able to rectify.
X Verbs ending in the infinitive in eety as menaeery j^acery must have a cedilla under the c, before either a or o'
Verbs in er, having an e preceding the last syllable, as in cotaiderery r^glery change the i into before a syllabli
endinc iu fger must oe excepted ; tlius : abrigery j'abrige, nous abre^erons.
Verbs in «r, having an mute before the last syllable in the infinitive, as /0t;0r, menery change the e mute into
Verbs ending in the infinitive in eler or eter (not iter or eter\ as appelevy Jeter, double the consonant / and t be
verlM : ackttery bourreler, deceler, geler, harceter, peler, which are spelt j'ocAete, tu bourrilesy ils deceknty il geUy nei
Verbs ending inyer, w player, payer, a^puyer, change the y into i before mute ; thus : payer, je pnie ; piffyer.
oNs ER, IR, OIR, RE*
UR conj agnations, and how the tenses of a verb proceed ^om one another.
OIK. KE.
Ill
INFINIT. GERUND
DEV oir. ant,
INDICAT. IMPERAT.
Dois.
Dois. Dois.
Doit.
DEV OTIS, ons.
ez. ez.
Doivent.
DEV a%sj\
ais.
ait.
ions,
iez.
aient.
DUS.
DUS.
DUt.
Dumes
PARTIC.
Dd.
Dusse.
Dusses.
Dllt.
Dussions.
Dussiez.
Dussent.
Diltes
Durent.
DEV rai.
ras.
ra.
Tons,
rez,
ront.
DEV rais.'\
rais.
rait,
rions,
riez.
raieni.
After the same manner as devoir are
conjugated BEDEVoir, PSRCEVoir, apebce-
VOlV, S'APEBCEVOtr, CONCEVOlV, RECEYOtV.
N.B. This verh is not regular ; if it is
foond here amongst the regular, it is because
its termination requires a conjugation of its
own. The words which are irregular are
printed wholly in roman characters ; the re-
gular are the italic terminatiotu added to
the capital letters.
INFINIT,
ATTEND re.
8UBJUNCT,
INDICAT.
Doive.
ATTEND
S.
Doives.
S.
Doive.
ATTEND
ions.
ons.
iez.
ez.
Doivent.
ent.
ATTEND
ais.-f
ais,
ait.
i07l8.
iez.
.
aient.
GERUND PARTIC.
ant, U,
IMPERAT. SUBJUNCT.
e.
s. es.
e,
ons, ions,
ez. iez.
ent.
ATTEND U.
is.
it.
tmes,
ites.
ireni.
ATTBNDE oi.
as.
a.
ons,
ez.
ont.
ATTENDR aU.f
ais.
ait.
ions,
iez.
aient.
isse.
isses.
it.
issions,
issiez.
issent.
After the same manner as attendre are
conjugated BATTre, abatttc, combatttc
DEBATTr«, RABATTre, RBBATTTC, FENDr^,
DBFENDr«, DE8CENDr«, CONDESCENDre,
FONDr«, CONFONDre, BEFONDre, HORFONDre,
ROMPre, CORROMPTC, INTERBOMPrC, PONDr«,
R£PONDre, COBBESPONDre, REPANDre, mor-
Hre, Df MORDrC, TE»Dr«,ETENDrc, ENTEMDre,
PRETENDre, RENDre, PENDre, D^PENDW,
VENDre, PEBDre, TORDr«, RETORPr^^ TONQrtf.
lo the termtMit Jra of the tn/Sattiee, and altering the 8»me number of letters as are here marked in italics^ i.e. Uiose ending
ttie aisistance of the tables of the irregular verhg, it is impoasible for any person to commit errors which he is not
f See note 6, page 6.
; thus, t7 niMOfa, now p/a^OM.
f ending in e mute ; thus : amidirer, je eoiuu^re ; r^gler^ il r^ ; repfter, il repetera. But from this rule the verbs
> before a syllable ending in e mute ; thus : /ewr, je live ; semert tu i«iii«s : mener, nous mhtcnrnt.
fore e mute ; thus : avpelery yappellet yappellerai ; jeter, il jette, il jettera. Except from this rule the six following
10 hart^leroiUf rauapehrez.
i 1 p/or> ; oppmyeTf j apputiraif
112
REGULAR VERBS In ER.
INFINITIVE MOOD,
To BLAME. BLaM er
IMPERATIVE.
blAm e, sing.
Blame.
Let 1^ blame.
INDICATIVE.
^ I blame, or am S Je* blAm c^.
3 Thou blamest, artB Tu blAm c«**.
S He blames, or is & Jl blAm e.
OB
9
fFe
You
They
Thou
^fFe
i ^^^
« Thou
fHe
^fVe
g Ybw
blame, ore
blaming.*
teas
I blaming.*
were
blaming.
blamed or
did blame.
?I
o
o
%Thou
He
We
I
Thou
He
^IVe
You
They]
n
o
3
O
B
iVbi/9 blAm o71«.
Vous blAm ez.
I/5«» blAm mP^.
J(? blAm flw*.
Tu blAai ais.
II blAm aiY*.
Nous blAm fon».
Foi« blAm fez.
J/s** blAm a£en<«.
•/^e^ BLAM ai'.
Ttt blAm flw*.
Jl blAm a.
-ZVoM* blAm ame».
Fows blAm a<e«.
i^^** blAm erew/."
•/^e* blAmer fli*.
Tu blAmer <m*
// blAmer a.
Nous blAmer ons,
Vous blAmer ez.
11^ blAmer ont^.
Je=* blAmer aisP,
i ij ?j Tu blAmer ais.
Shovldy would ri i Its
,1 II BLAMER ai/.*'
> blame, or ^r i •
^ ' Nous BLAMER lOJlS,
Vous blAmer iez.
Jl^ blAmer aientm*
blAm ez, plur.
BLAm 07Z«.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Queje^ blAm ^.
5v blAm e^.
fl blAm e.
Nous blAm ioTttf.
Fbi^A blAm iez,
Jfow blAm en<^".
fi:
3
P
3
Queji?
blAm
asst*
Tu
blAm
asses.
II
blAm
dt^.
Nous
blAm
assions.
Vous blAm
assiez.
7/a«
blAm
assent^*.
3
•3«
cr
3
shall, will
blame, or
be blaming.
be blaming.
Blaming.
Interrogatively,
HhXMB'je? ^ Je
blAmes-/uP •-! TU
BLAME-t-iY ?
GERUND,
blAm ant.
Negatively,
Tie blXme
TZeBLAMES
TteBLAME
sr ii
>pas.
PARTICIPLE
blAm e. Blamed.
Interrogativ. and Negativ,
Cli
Ne BhkME'je
a,
o
O
Ne BlAM£S-/7£
HI
A'e blAme-I-i/
>pas?
o
2
Ne BlAm0N8-7?07/»
3
•
A'e blAmez-i;o7/«
3
A'e blAment-zV*
blAmons-7io7/« 3 NOUS ne blAmons
blXmez-vous? "y vous Tie blAmez
BlAmENT-I^Y? o lis 7?eBLAM£NT
N. B. After the same manner as blAmer conjugate all (he verh% the
infinite of which ends in er, except aller and envoyer, p. 116, 117.t
* Never say j> suis blumont, tu es hlAmantt il est hlamant^ f 6tais bldmant, S^c, So«
note (j) p. 95. t See note * page 110.
REGULAR VERBS in ER.
113
Compound tenses of the verb blAmer,
Formed by adding the participle blAm£ to the auxiliary kvoitt.
INFINITIVE COMPOUND,
To have blamed.
INBICATirE.
^ I have I J* ai
s Thou hast >blamed. Tu as
II a
\ He has j
I We ]
I You \have blamed. Vous avez
^ TheyJ
l^oxxsavons
ont
I Thou
9»He
I We
I You
^ TheyJ
a Thou
>had blamed.
He
We
You
TheyJ
!?I
I Thou
He
>had blamed.
lis
J' avals
Tu avals
II avalt
Nous avions
Vous aviez
lis avaient
J' eus
Tu eus
II eut
Nous e^mes
Vous elites
lis eurent
3* aural
Tu auras
II aura
BLlMi.*
Avoir blAm£.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Quef ale
Tu aies
II ait
Nous ayons
Vous oyez
lis aient.
blAm^
cr
p
3
O4
^blAm]^.
Tu
blAm£.
eusse
eusses
II ei2^
Nous emissions
Vous eusslez
lis etM»en^
3
blAm£. g'
3
Oi
Aave blamed. Nous aurons
Yous aurez
lis auront
al ^ 3* aurais
1^ Thou j Tu aurais
r He \Hhouldt wld. II aurait
I We fAat;e blamed. Nous ai^rion;
*! You I Vous aurlez
• TheyJ lis auralent
^BLAMk.
*blAm£.
OERUND.
Having blamed. Ayant blAmi^*
Interrogatively,
W'je
AS'tu
At-i/
Awons^nous
AyeZ'Vous
Ont-i^
7i'ai
7i'as
blAm^?
Negatively.
je
TU
il 7i'a
NOUS 72'avons
vous n'avez
lis 7i*ont
PARTICIPLE
EU blAm^. Had blamed.
Interrogatively and Negatively,
N'a.\-je
N'vLS'tu
I A / N*SL't'il
^as blAms. ,
^ jravons-7io?/«
A'^avez-rot^j
N^oni-ils
pasBhXMi?
* See, syntax of verbs, the rules on tlie past participle'
114
RKOULAR VERBS in ER,
The verb BLAME R made reflective.*
jNFiNiTira.
To BLAME oneself.
IMPERATtFE.
Cimmaitding 96 rule, page 77.
Blame thyself. bl4m e - toi.
yourself, bl&m ez - vous.
Let us blame ourselves, bl&m o7{s*nous.
SE BLJiMer.
Forbidding 9f rule, page 77.
Ne TB blftm e ]
Ke vous blam eg >pas
ire NOUS blftm ons)
I
Thou
He
We
You
They}
I
Thou
He
fFe
You
INDICATIVE*
myself. Je® me bl^m e.
thyself. Tu te ~ bl&ra es,
^himself. U se h\knx e.
I ourselves. Nous nous blam ons.
yourselves. Vous vous bl&m ez.
themselves. lis se bl^m ent
(6
SUBJUNCtlFE.
Queje^ me bl&m e.
Tu TB bl^m es.
II SE bl^m e.
Nous NOUS bl^m torz^.
Vous vous blUm fc«.
//« SE bl^m ent.
§ myself. Je me
8 thyself. Tm te
, S himself II se
> p
bl^m a/s.
blUm ais,
bl^m ai7.
:3
&
5
n
B
en
A.
I ourselves. JVbM« nous bl^m ions.
5* yourselves. Vous vous blim ic«.
'^•^ themselves. J/* se h\km aient
They)
I ^ myself. Je me blam ai
Thou ^ thyself. Tu te blam as.
He I p" himself. II se bl^m «.
We I I ourselves. Nous liovs h\km dmes
You ^ yourselves. Vous vous blllm a/c*.
They] .themselves. //« se h\^m e rent.
I ] §- myself. Je Me bl&mer ai.
Thoul % thyself. Ti* te blamer as.
He I § himself. II s e blimer a.
We I S: ourselves. JVbz^* nous bl&mer ons.
You 5" yourselves. Vous vous blamer cz.
They) 3 themselves. //» se blamer ont.
%* myself. Je me blamer aw^
•^ thyself. Tu te blamer aw.
§ himself. II se bl&mer «i7.
Qneje me bl&m cuse
Tu te bl&moMe*.
71 SE hlkmoU.
Nous NOUS bl^m assionsi ST
Fott« VOUS blS,m assiez. g
//« SB bllUnafse/t^. 3
A.
r
Thou
He
We
You
They)
Interrogatively,
'^ ourselves. Nous nous bl&mer ions,
^ yourselves. Vous vous bl&mer iez.
I themselves. Us se blllmer aient.
Negatively
je ne me bl^me 1
Interrogatively and Negatively,
JVC ME bllme-jie
ME blame-jfe ?
TE blames-<M? rune te blimesVpcw. jvcte lAkmea-tu^pas ?
sE bia,me-t-27 ? il ne se blftme J .ve se blUme-t-i/J
NOUS blamons-no2£« 9 nous neNOUs blftmons/jflw. Ne nous bl&moAs-7iot£«j9a«?
vous blamez-t?0M5 ? rous ne vous blftmez pas. Ne vous bl&mez-vo7/« pas ?
SE bl§lment-zZs ? //« we se blament^a*. a^cse bl&ment-2Y*/>fiw?
* Sometimes it happens that the agent or person who acts is also the object* i. e. acta
upon himself, as when I say ; 1 blame myself; Thou preparest thyself; He distinguishes
himself i We v^ash ourselves ; You dress yourself; They expose themselves Sec by which
REGULAR VERBS in ER*
Ccmpoynd tenses of the reflective verb S£ blAbier,
frrmed by adding the participle blAm^, to the auxiliary verb
INFINITirS COMPOUND.
To have blamed oneself.
115
TRE.
^Ure blAm^.
/
Thou
He
We
You
They]
I
Thou
He
We
Y(m
They]
I
Thou
He
We
You
They]
J
Thou
He
We
You
They]
I
Thou
INDICATIVE.
^ myself. J^
§ thyself. Tu
.^himself. II
ME
blAm^, m.^ 'L
^ myself.
g thyself.
2 himself.
^ ourselves.
suu
T** es
s' est
p* ourselves. Nous nous sommes^ * »
I yourselves. Vousvovsites ^ '
^ themselves. lis se sont
Je M* etais
Tu T* ktais
II : s' etaii
^ Nous nous etions
n yourselves. Vous yovs Stiez
^ themselves. lis s' etaient
jj, myself. Je me fits
1^ thyself. Tu te fiis
Q' himself. // se fid
g" ourselves. Nous yovs fdmes
I youtselves. VousvovsfHtes
^ themselves, lis se furent
S- myself. Je me serai
j^ thyself. Tu te seras
. ^ himself. II se sera
a ourselves. Nous^ov^serons ] ^* '-
^ yourselves. . Vous vous serez \ L I f
•fee, f.
m.
^es, f.
blAm^, m.
h, f.
blAm^s, m.
hes, f.
blAm^, m.^ i^
ee. f. j^
SUBJUNCTIVE,
ME SOis
TB SOis
II SB soit
Nousifovssoyons ^
Vous vous soyez
lis SE soient
ME
TE
SE
fnsse
fytsses
J^t
blAm^«, m.
kes, f.
I blAm^, m.
j ke, f.
Nous ifova/ussions
Vous vous fussiez ^
lis sE fussent(j^
jT themselves. J/«
SE seront ]
2L
§- myself.
^ thyself.
/Te ^ himself. II
ijtr^ >S i„._ -KT
ME
TE
SE
serais
serais
serait
blAmc', m.
ke, f.
We
You
They]
Yourselves. JVbzw nous «mow5 ] a t
S^ yourselves. Vous\ovsseriez > ' * f *
g themselves, /fo se seraient]
Interrogatively,
UESUU'JtX
T^ e«-^2£ >BlAu^P
8* C«^-27 j
je ne me «2^2«
Ttt ne t' es
il ne s' e«<
pas^^LkMef
Interrogatively and Negative. f,
NejAESuiS'jV
>pas BhkiiL ACT* es-tu
Nes* est'il ^
lious sommes-nous\ ^Nousnemov^swnmesp^ 2 Net^ovntommes-novspy ^
vovs ^teS'Voiis > ^ vous 7ievovB§tes pas >^ jve vous ^fe»-»ow* J9a* >^
6£ sont-ils ] ^^ils nesE sont pas j ^^ ivc se sont- ils pas j §•
you see tiiat the person who is the agent, performs the action on himself ^ and conse-
quently is also tlie object. These verbs the French call rifl^ehis, i. e. reflectiye, or
reflected, because the energy of the verb returns to its agent. They differ in nothing
from the other rerbs, but in requiring an objective pronoun of the same number and
person as the agent, or nominative, and in having their compoimd tenses formed with
the aiixiiiarif ETR£, instead of the auxiliary avoir.
N, B, Toese verbs are known in the dictionaries by having S£ before their infinitive.
4> See note * page S8.
f See, syntax of verbs, the roles on the past partietpU^
116
IRREGULAR VERBS in £R.*
INFINlTirE.
To GO. ALLer.
IMPERATIFE.
GO. va, sing. all 62, plur.
Let U8 go, ALL ons.
hj
INDICATIVE,
I'M
J/
g^, or 0771 (Jq
g 2rAoz£ goest, ar^ g
§ He goes, or w ^
r^ 1
'g Znou noa* goin?.
I You Ywere going.
? They]
® 7%0M
g He I went, or
J ^<? I dfd go.
g You\
^ They I
<i^ He UhaU^ will go,
g ff^e I or 6e going.
B\ You
They,
vaisV
vas*.
va.
NouskLL ons.
Vous ALL ez.
Us vont*.
«r ALLazV.
Tu ALL ais.
II ALL ai^
Nous A.LL 10715.
FoM« ALL iez.
Us ALL aieni^.
T ALL af^.t
I'm all a^.
II ALL a.
iVbi/s ALL oLtnes.
Vous ALL ^ie^.
lis ALL erenP\
o
w
should^ wd, go,
or ^e going.
T
Tu
II
Nous
Vous
lis
T
Tu
II
Nous
Vous
lis
rai*
ras*.
ra.
rons.
rez.
ront**.
rais*.
rais.
rait*®.
rions.
riez.
raient®
Going.
GERUND.
ALL ant.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Quef aille.
Tu ailles.
// aille.
iVou«ALL ions.
Vous ALL iez.
lis aillent".
o
Quef ALL asse^. |
Tu ALL (isses. 2^
It ALL a^. 2
iVbu« ALL assions, vq'
FoM« ALL assiez. ««
Zff ALLOASen^. ^
PARTICIPLE.
ALL e. Gone.
2V. B. ALLER, (o GO, requires a place mentioned after it ; as,
Je VAis d la maison, d Za ville, &c. I am going home, to town, &c
If no place is mentioned, we make the verb reflective as follows :
* A verb is called irregular, when aU its tenses and persons cannot be fonned from
the infinitive, by changing only the last syllable, as you see in the verb BLAMER.
In order to render the difference more obvious, the tenses or persons which are formed
regularly from the infinitive, have their terminations printed in italic characters, the
words which are irregular are printed wholly in ronutn.
IRREGULAR VERBS in ER.
117
INFlNlTirE.
To GO away, S'e/i ALL er.
IMPERATirE.
Commanding i-ule 36, p. 77.
GO away^ orl va-T*c/f, sinpf.
be gone, J ALLez-vou8-«/t, pi.
Let i/« go atoa^, ALLon<*NOUs-fn.
ISDICATirE.
T go, or am ©
Thou goest, artn
He goes, or w |
fFe
I go, are
going airay
Forbidding rule iT, pagt 77
Ne T*en Va pas. .
Ne vous en ALLez pas
Ne NOUS en khhona pas
do not go
away.
ett^notgo
M en vais
T*en vas.
Tu
II sen va.
iVb?/«N0Us en allous.
VouB vous e/i ALLe2:.
J Is B*en vont.
SUBJUNCTIVE,
Queje m'c/i aille.-
Tu T'en aillesC
// s'cn aill§/
Je
M en ALLa».
O
iVbu^ NOUS en ALhions.
Vous vous en khiAez. |
//i sVn ail lent. ^
You
They]
I was going away,
I went away,
J shlly will go azra^. Je
I shd, wld ^o away, Je M*en irais«
/ am not going away, Je ne n'en vais pas, &c.
Compoimd teDses^ formed by adding the participle all£ to the auxiliary verb £Ta€«
M'en ALLai, Queje M*en khhcuse.
M en irai.
I have ^
Thou hast
He has
We Aawc
You have
They Aarc^
■§
3
'a
Je M'en suis all^.
Tu T*e7i es alle.
// s'en est alle.
iVbi/f Noug en sommes alles.
Vous vous en 6tes allies.
JLt 8* en sont alli^.s
ENVOYER, To send.
The aole irregularity of this verb is in the future and in the conditional, the other
tenses being formed regularly in the same manner as blamek.
INFINITIVE
To SEND.
ENVOY er.
INDICATIVE,
SUBJUNCTIVE,
Pres.
I send.
J'
RNVOie.
Quef ENVOIS*, 8^c.
Imp.
/ did send.
J'
ENVOYCrW.
Perf.
I sent.
J'
ENVOYflt, SfC.
J\ ENVOYf««e, Si'i
Futu.
J
Thou
Tu
enverrai*.
enverras.
m
shall.
or
II
enverra.
We
will send.
Nous
enyerrons.
You
Vous
enverrez.
They}
lis
enverront*.
Cond.
I ]
Thou
J'
Tu
enverrais*.
enverrais.
He
Md,
or
II
euverrait**.
We
wld send.
Nous
enverrions.
You
Vous
enverriez.
They]
lU
enverraient*.
-
Conjugate in the saine manner, uenvoy er, to Send back, to Disfniss.
118
REGULAR VERBS ill IR.
INFINITIVE,
To FINISH. FIN ir.
IMPERATIVE,
Finish. FIN 2>, sing.
Let us finish.
INDICATIVE,
I finish, or am
^' *" FINW.
3 Thou finishcst, art ^ Tu
I He finishes, or is 5* // fin it^.
^ ^ [finish, or
g You > ij . u'
^ TVi^ J «^« finishing.
.0
•g Thoupva'i finishing.
a fFe ]
I YoM >M?erc finishing,
^ They]
I
2 Thou
^ He
ZlFe
You
They]
CD
3
finished,
did finish.
I Thou
They]
shall, will
finish,
be finishing.
He
^ Thou
o
a
^.FTe
f You
^Theyj
should, would
finish,
he finishing.
^ Nous FIN issofis.
Vous Fitiissez,
lis fin issenl'^,
Je^ FIN issai}fi,
Tu visissais,
II FIN issaii^.
Nous FIN issio}is,
FouSFJNissiez,
lis FIN issaii/itfi
t/c" FIN i^.
Tu FIN is.
II FIN it-'.
Nous Fis Imes,
Vous FIN ties,
lis FIN ireni^K
Jt? FINIR ai\
Tu FINIR as,
II FINIR a.
Nous FINIR OJIS
Vous FINIR CZ,
J's FINIR on^*^.
Je' FINIR a/V.
Tu FINIR aw.
// FINIR aii^.
Nous FINIR ions,
Vous FINIR iez.
lis FINIR aieni^.
FIN M«C2, plur.
FIN issons.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Queje^ *®FiN me*.
T'?^ FIN me«.
II FIN me.
Nous FIN Visions. I
Fbu» FIN m/ez.
G£B17>'D.
Finishing.
Interrogatively.
FINIS -^e ? I o'
FlNI8-tU?
FINIT-f/ ?
FINISSONS-nOW« ?
FINI8SEZ - t'OMJ?
FINISSENT-lZ«?
FIN issant.
Negatively.
Cft*
FIN issejit^^ 2.
35*
Tu
B.
J/
FIN f«fi^.
FIN fsses,
FIN fZ". §
Nous FIN issions. ^
Vous FIN lw2>5f. ^
Us FIN issenV\ a*
s-
je
Tie FINIS
TU
Tie FINIS
il
7ICFINIT
NOUS 7Ze FINISH© NS
VOllSWeFINISSEZ
lis
/ZeFINISSENT
pas.
O
o
35
PARTICIPLE.
FIN 2. Finished.
JnieiTOgatively and Negat.
NB FINi&'je ] ^ ^
Ne FiNis-tu\pas?
Ne FINIT-l7 J
A'e FINISSONS-7IOW5 j9
A^e FINI8SEZ - VOUS J)
Ne FIN issENT'ils pas ^
—
•o
J^fler the same manner as finir, are conjugated the following verh,
•'Ahatardir, to degenerate. Abolir, to abolish. Aboutir, to end.
I'Abetir, to grow stupids Aboiinir, to belter, <'Abrutir« (0 became stupid.
Accomplir
REGULAR VERBS in IR.
119
AcoompUr, to accomplidi,
Accourcir, to shorten.
f'Accroupir, to sit squat,
Adoucir, to soften,
Affadir, to render tas^less,
Affermir, to strengthen.
Affaiblir, to weaken.
Affranchir, to free.
Agir, to act.
Agrandir, to enlarge.
Aguerrir, to inure to uvcr.
Aigrir, to exasperate.
Alentir, to slacken,
Amaigrir, to grow lean.
Ameublir^ to make moveable.
Aflioindrir, to lessen,
Amollir, to soften,
Amortir, to redeem,
An^antir, to annihiUtte,
Anoblir, to ennoble.
Appauvrir, to empoverish.
Appesantir, to make heain/,
Applanir, to level,
Applatir, to flatten,
Applaudir, to applaud,
Approfondir, to fathom,
Asservir, to enslave,
Assortir, to match,
Assoupir, to make drowsy.
Assouplir, to supple,
Assourdir, to deafen,
Assouvir, to glut, to satiate,
Assujettir, to suhdue,
Attendrir, to move to pity.
Atterrir, to approach the land.
Avertir, towaim,-
Avilir, to revile t to debase.
Baimiri to banish,
H^tir, to build,
B^nir, to bless,
Blauchir, to whiten,
Blemir, to grow pale.
Bleuir, to make blue.
Blondir, to grow fair,
te Blottir, to lie squat,
Bondir, to skip,
Brandir, to brandish.
Brouir, to bUut,
Brunir, to burnish.
Candir, to candy.
Cherir, to cherish,
Cboisir, to choose,
Clapir, to squat, to clap*
Compatir, to compassionate.
Convertir, to convert,
Cr6pir, to roughcast,
Croupir, to stagnate,
D^brutir, to take theroughness.
D6finir, to define.
Defleurir, to lose the blossom,
D^gamir, to disgarnish.
D6gourdir, to warm a littie.
Deguerpir, to move off,
D6molir, to demolish,
Dep^rir, to decay.
D^polir, to unpolish.
D^roidir, to take off stiffneu.
D^rougir, to take off redness,
J) €soh%ir, to disobey.
se Dessaisir, to give up.
D^sunir, to disunite.
Dirertir, to divert,
Durcir, to harden,
Eblouir, to dazzle.
Eclaircir, to brighten,
Elargir, to widen.
Erabellir, to embelli^,
Emplir, to fill,
Encherir, to grow dearer.
En durcir, to harden,
Enforcir, to grow strong.
Enfouir, to bury.
Enhardir, to embolden.
Engloutir, to swallow up.
Engourdir, to benumb.
Enlaidir, to p-aw ugly.
i'Enoirgueillir, to grow proud,
Enrichir, to enrich.
Enseyelir, to put in a shroud.
Envahir, to invade.
Epaissir» to thicken.
Epanoair, the bud opening.
Equarrir, to square,
Etablir, to establish,
Etourdir, to stun,
Etrecir, to narrow.
I'Evanouir, to faint,
Farcir, to stuff,
Flechir, to bend, to move,
F16trir, to wither,
Fleurir, to blossom, to flourish.
Fouir, to dig,
Fourbir, to furbish,
Foumir, to supply.
Franchir, to leap over,
Fr6mir, to shudder,
se Froidir, to grow cold,
Garantir, to warrant.
Gamir, to furnish.
G^mir, to groan.
Grandir, to grow tall.
Grossir, to grciv big,
Gu^rir, to cure.
Henoir, to neigh,
Inyestir, to invest.
Jaillir, to spout out,
Jaunir, to grow yellow,
Jouir, to enjoy,
Languir, to languisli,
Meurtzir, to kruiee,
Moisir, to grow mouldy .
Mollir, to grow soft,
Mugir, to Unv,
Munir, to store,
Mfirir, to ripen,
Nantir, to give security,
Noircir, to blacken.
Nourrir, to feed.
Ob6ir, to obey.
Obscurcir, to obscure.
Ourdir, co warpT
PMir, to ^row pale,
Parfoumir, to make up,
PItir, to suffer.
P^rir, to perish,
Pervertir, to pervert,
P6trir, to knead,
Polir, to poiish,
Pourir, to grow rotten.
Premunir, to provide,
Funir, to funUk,
Kaccourcir, to shorten,
Kacomir, to make tough,
Kadoucir, to soften.
Raffermir, to strengthen again,
Kafraichir, to refresh.
Ragrandir to enlarge again,
Raieunir, to grow young again,
R«lentir, to sladcen.
Ramoitir, to moisten,
Ramollir, to soften.
Rancir, to grmo rancid,
Ravilir, to debase,
Rarir, to ravish, to delight,
Rebatir, to build again.
Reblanchir, to wluten again.
Rebondir, to rebound,
R6fl6chir, to reflect,
Refieurir, to blouom again,
Refroidir, to cool,
R6gir, to rule, to govern.
RejaiUJr, to epnrt up,
R^jouir, to rejoice,
Rembrunir, to darken,
Remplir, to fill again,
Rencb^rir, to grow dearer,
Rendurcir, to make harder,
Renhardir, tog^owbold again
R6partir, to distribute equally
Repolir, to polisii again,
R^saisir, to seize again,
Resplendir, to shine,
Ressortir, to resort,
Retentir, to resound,
R6tr6cir, to straiten.
Reverdir, to grow green a ga\n
R6unir, to reunite,
R^ussir, to succeed,
Rotir, to roast.
Rougir, to blush.
Rouir, to steep,
Roussir, to make reddish,
Rugir, to roar.
Saillir, to gush put.
Saisir, to seize,
Salir, to soil,
Sevir, ta exercise seventy,
Subir, to midergo,
Subvertir, to subvert,
S6 Tapir, to squat,
Tarir» to drains
Temir, to tarnish.
Terrir, to land.
Trahir, to betray.
Transir, to chill,
Travestir, to disguise,
Unir, to unite,
Verdir, to grow green,
Vemir, to varnish.
Vieillir, to grow old,
Vomir, to vomit.
I 2
*Uke \EKifi,
120 IRREOULAU VERBS in IR.*
The IRREGULAR verbs belonging to this conjugation are,
a'Abstenir, to abstain Ii1<e vf.nir. Ohteniry to obtain like vemr.
Accourir, to run to Uhe courir. Offrir, to ofter like ouvrir.
Aecueillir, to welcome /t/cccuF.i i.LiR. Ou VRIR, to open page 137.
ApparteniVf to belong like vfnir. Pareourir, to over-run Um courir.
ACQUERIR, to acquire page 121. Partir, to set out ) .., „„-,^, „
BOUILLIK, to boil page in, PrexeHtir.toh&ye a foresight/ ""* S^NTI R.
Concourir, to concur like courir. Parvenir, to attain "
Conqu&rir, to conquer /iA-c acquekir. Prcvenir, to prevent
Consentir, to consent like sentir. Provenir, to proceed
ConteniTf to contain 1 Querir, to fetch4
Contrevenir, to contravene . > like vemr. Recourir, to have recourse to. like courir.
Convenirf to agree J Pecauvrir, to cover again .... like or) v r i ii .
COURIR, to run page 123. Recueillir, to collect /lAecnEiLLiE
Couvrivy to cover like ouvrir. Redevenir, to become again. . . like venir.
CUEILLIR, to gather page 124. se Rendarmir, to sleep agaiu^
V^couvriry to discover like ouvrir. Repartir, to set out again . . > like sentir.
D^mentiVy to give the lie ... 1 se Repentirf to repent J
se V&partir, to give up . . . . > like senti r. Requ6rir, to require like acquerir.
Dtsservir, to take off the i Ressentir, to resent ........ 1 ii.
Daeniry to detain. . [dishes. ) i-k «p^, „ Re&ortir, to go out again .../**** sestir.
Devenirf to become / vn^i «• Ressouvenir, to remember. . . l
se Dtvetiry to undress like revetir. Retenir, to retain. . . ; « I /iA^ vemr.
Ditcimvenir, to disagree ^'/ctf venir. Revenir, to return J
Viscourirj to discourse ....»• like cou R i R. HEVETIR, to invest page 128.
Dormir, to sleep i Secourir^ to succour /tA« courir.
Endnrmir, to lull asleep. . . . > like sentir. SENTIR, to feel, to smell. . . page 129.
B^Eiidormir, to fall asleep. . . J Servir, to serve, to use j ..,
Encourir, to incur like courir. Sortir, to go out J **** sentir.
s'En/uir, to run away like fu i R . Souffrir, to suffer /tfce ouv Ri p
Efitretenivy to keep up like venir. Soutenir, to maintain
Entr' ouvrir t to open a little . . like ouvrir. se Soutenir , to remember
FUIK,toilee,to shun,to avoid. Subvenir, to afford ^ like Vbnip.
Ha'ir, to hate.t page 125. Survenir, to befall
Intervenir, to intervene . • • • \ i -r „ Tenir, to hold
Maintenir, to maintain . . . . | "^ « v e M R . JRESS AILLIR, to start .... page 130,
Mentir, to lie like sentir. VENIR, to come page 131,
MOURIR.to die page 126. Vetir, to clothe like revetir.
* Several of these irregular verbs having a similarity in their conjugation, as, for
example, the verbs in tir, which are all but two (vetir and revitir) conjugated like sen-
tir, the verbs in enir which are conjugated like venir ; I have coniugated only one
verb of each termination, as a model for the others : and all the verbs which may be
conjugated in the same manner as that verb are found under it.
t HAIR is regular only in the fir$tt second, and third persons singular of the pretent
of the indieatioe, and in the second person singular of the imperative, where ai are pro-
nounced in one syllable,
Je hais, I hate. pronounce hcye,
Tu hais. Thou hatest. haye.
II hait. He hates. hay.
in the other tenses and persons at are pronounced in ttoo distinct syllables, and the t it
marked over with two dots,
Noua ha jssons. We hate. pronounce ha-isson.
Vous ha issez. You hate. ha-iisay,
lis ha'issent. They hate. ha-iss.
Je haissais, I did hate. ha-issaye,
Je ha'is, I hated. ha^ee.
Je ha'irai, I shall hate. ha-eeray,
Je ha'irais, I should hate, &c. like FIN I R.
X Used only in the i?t/?nt/ ire after AUer and Envoye**; as,
Alle^ querir, to go and fetch. Envoy er queHr, to send for.
IHREGULAR VERBS ill IR.
121
INFJNITJFE.
To ACQUIRE. ♦ACQUfiRir.
Acquire.
Let V8 acquire.
IMPERATirE.
Acquiers, «2V?^.acqu£r ez, plur.
ACQU^R OTU.
INDICATIVE,
^ 1 acquire, or am g J*
3 Thou acquirest, art^ Tu
g He acquires, or w 5! //
I You \ ^c^"""®*
• Theyr^^ acquiring.
3
»8e
■g Thou >wa8 acquiring.
^He J
You
They]
I
mere acquiring.
? Thou
He
We
Y(yu
They]
g TAot/.
5 He
5^ You
? TAfyJ
^ Thou
I He
^•fTe
I' YOM
^ Theyj
acquired,
did acquire.
shall^ wUl
' acquire,
be acquiring.
should^ would
' acquire,
be acquiring.
'acquiers.
acquiers.
acquiert'
Nous acqu($r ons,
Vous acquer ez,
lis acquiferent*®.
«/' *acquer aw*.
Tu acqut^r ais.
II acqut^r aif*.
Nous acquer ions,
Vous acqut^r iez.
lis acquer aien^,
•/' *acquis.f
7^ acquis.
// acquit**.
Nous acqutmes.
Vous acquttes.
lis acquirent.
«/' *acquer rai*.l
Tu acquer r(u.
II acquer ra.
Nous acquer rons.
Vous acquer rez.
lis acquer ronf^,
J' *acquer rai^ %
Tu acquer rais.
II acquer rat<".
Nous acquer rions,
Vous acquer riez,
lis. acquer raten/*.
I
e
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Quef *acquifcre.
tu acquieres.
il acqui^re.
nous acquer ions,
vous acqut^r iez,
lis acquiercnt".^
c
Quef
tu
*acqui88e*.
acquisses.
o
il acquit'
noiu acquissions. ^^'
Si*
c<«»
VOUS acquissiez.
tV* acquissent". S
PARTICIPLE.
Acquis. Acquired.
OERUND,
Acquiring. ACQuiR ant.
Conjugate in the same manner^
RRQU^RiV, to require^ and coNQuiair, to conquer,
N. B, CONQUER ir is used only in the injinitive, in the gerund con-
QU^Ran^, in the participle C0NQui«, and in the perfect ^
Je conquis. /conquered. Queje conquisse. d^
Tu conquis. Thou conqueredst. Tu conquisses.
// conquit. /reconquered. // conqutt. o
Nous conquimeSy &c. We conquered. Nous conquissions. »p
* See qu, page 13. t See note 4, page 2.
t These two rr must be sounded distinctly ; in order to do it, lay a stress on the first r
122
IRREGULAR VERBS ill IR.
INFINITIVE*
To BOIL. BOUILLiV.
soil.
Let tis boil.
IJiPERATIFE,
Bous, sing. BOUiLL ez plur.
BouiLL ons.
INDICATIVE.
^ I boil, or am g*
3 Thou boilest, art 5:
g He boils, or is
" «re boilinff.
o
5
O
«B
' ]
Thou )was boiling.
He J
We ]
YoM >«ccrc boiling.
They]
boiled,
did boil.
§ TAow
tHe
^fFe
g Yow
" They]
I TAo?^
® ^e [«M, w?ZZ boil,
IWe
&: Yow
? TAcyJ
.'" TAoM
fYou
f-They]
be boiling.
shdj wd boil,
he boiling.
J(^ "bous**.
Tu bous.
II bout««.
NoushoMxW ons,
Vous bouill ez.
lis bouill ent^^.
Je **bouill aisfi.
Tu bouill ais.
II bouill ail^.
iVbw* bouill 10W5.
Vous bouill iez.
lis bouill aieiii^
Je "bouill if^.
Tu bouill is.
II bouilh^s".
Nous bouill imes.
Vous bouillf^e*.
lis bouill irenP^.
Je "bouillir ai^,
Tu bouilIira«.
n bouillira.
iVbz/5bouiHiro«s.
FoM.? bouillirc^.
lis bouiIliro?i^.
Je "bouilliraw.*
Tu bouillir ais.
II bouillir ai<**.
Nous bouillir ions.
Vous bouillir iez.
lis bouillir aient^.
Boiling.
GERUND.
BOUILL ant.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Que je bouill e.
Tu bouill es.
II bouill e,
iVoM* bouill ions.
FoM« bouill iez.
lis bouill e72<".
o
o
Que je bouill mc*.
Tu bouill isses.
II bouill f^«.
?
2VbM« bouill issions. <§]
VoushomWissiez. ^
lis bouillfwcn^. 2.
PARTICIPLE.
BOUILL i. Boiled.
N, B, To boiL, used in an active sense, i. e. followed by an object^ is not expressed
hj houillirt but by faire bouillir ; as,
Je fais bouillir'*
Jtt fais bouillir j
TTL^lboil, or
jj ]am boiling
We
Yon
They
(boil, or a) e 1
boiling. J
Water, meat, &c.
'Ls^Lnst^iiW*'-'^'^^'
Vous faikes bouillir
lis font bouillir
ThQ^*;^^,^}boiled, or been boiling. y^^**^gjfait bouillir, &c.
And so on^ by adding the infinitiye bouillir to the yerh faire. See Faire.
iRREauLAB VEHBS in IR.
123
INFIXITIFE.
To RUN. »*COUR ir.
iMPERATJFE.
Run. COVE. St sing. covr cZyfliir.
Let tu run. cour ons.
INBICATIVE.
\^ I run, or am 2
3 Thou runnest, art S
es
§ He runs, or is
They]
run, or
are running.
« Thou
►1
t&a« running.
^ ^e ]
§ Ybif >trcre naming.
2 Thou
en
O
He
YOM
I Thou
3 He
S You I
ran,
did run.
o
shlly xoll run,
(6e running.
You
They)
O
shd, ltd run
6e running.
Je" "cour a*.
I'm cour s,
II cour <*•.
iVbiis cour ons.
Vous cour e^;.
J/,» cour enV^,
Je "cour ais*.
Til cour fltfa.
// cour ai(^,
NousQOViX ions.
Vou^ cour iez.
lis cour aient^.
Je **cour ws**
Tm cbur tt*.
II cour w^.
iVbz/« cour Hmeft.
Vous cour iJ^^s.
7/ij cour urefU^K
Je "cour rai^*
Tu cour rflw.
J/ cour ra.
Nous cour rons.
Vous cour rez.
Us cour roft^,
Je "cour rais^.*
Tu couT rai».
// cour roi^.
iVoM* cour rions.
Vous cour nez.
r& cour raieni*.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Que js "cour e.
Tu cour e*.
// cour c.
iVbutf cour ions.
Vous cour ie«.
J/« cour €nt}\
s
c
s
Queje '*cour ttwe*.
Tm cour usses.
II cour i2/*.
s
qc'
iVbiw cour ussions. g
FoM* cour ussiez. g
/& cour ussent. s
Running.
PARTICIPLE.
COUR t/. Run.
COUR an^.
-^/<er <Ae same manner as courir^ conjugate
ACCOURIR. to run to. parcourir. to peruse, to overrun.
coNcouRiR. to concur. { to run again, to have
DiscouRiR. to discourse. ' ] recourse to.
ENCouRiR. to incur.
SECOURiR. to succour, to relieve.
N. B. The compound tenses of accourir are formed with either Avoir or Eire; as,
I have run, J* ai accouru, or Je suis accouru.
Thou hast run^ Tu as accouru^ Tu es accouru.
He has run, I^ a accouru, H est accauru.
We Aavtf run, &e« ^oim avons accouru, Hous sommes accourva, S^c.
* These two rr must be sounded distinctly ; in order to do it, lay a stress on the first
1-24
IRREGULAR VERBS ill IR.
INFINITIVE.
To GATHER. CUEILL*I>.
IMPERATIVE.
Gather. cueill e, sing, cueill ez, plur.
Let us gather. cueill om.
INDICATIVE*
H
A
CO
o
p
60
/ gather, or am
Thou gatherest, art ?
He gathers, or m
I gather or
are gathering.
You
They
a
A
A
a
CO
A
A
ft
A
m
A
?
•I
A
•d
o
B.
<
A
Hj
a
a
o
cr.
o
'2(705 gathering.
gathered,
did gather.
Thou
He
fFe ]
You \were gathering.
They]
I ^
Thou
He .
We {
You
They]
Thoul
He [shU, wll gather
JVe i he gathering.
You
They]
Thou
He \shd, wd gather.
IVe
You
They]
he gathering.
GERUND*
Gathering.
Ji? cueill*e.
Tu cueill cs".
II cueill e.
iVb?/a cueill o?w.
Vous cueill ez.
lis cueill ent^^.
Je cueill ai^.
Tu cueill ais.
II cueill aii^,
2Vb?£9 cueill ions,
FoM« cueill iez,
lis cueill aienf,
Je cueill is*.
Tu cueill is.
II cueill i^.
iVbi^ cueill fmes.
Vous cueill f^es.
//* cueill irenV*.
Je cueill eraiK
Tu cueill era*.
// cueill era.
iVbi/s cueill erons.
Vous cueill ercz.
Is cueill eront^.
Je cueill erais*.
Tm cueill erais,
II cueill eraiP^.
iVb2£« cueill erions.
Fbf/s cueill eriez.
lis cueill eraient'.
cueill afiL
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Queje cueill e.
Tu cueill e?.
// cueill e.
2Vb7^« cueill ions.
FotM cueill iez.
lis cueill enO*
cr
rt
n
Quej^ cueill m€*.
Tu cueill isses,
II cueill f^».
JVbf/« cueill issions.
Foi/f cueill issiez.
lis cueill issent.
aq
cr
«^
Oq
-1
PARTICIPLE.
CUEILL i. Gathered
Jfler the same manner as cueillir are conjugated^
ACCUEiLLiR, to welcomc^ and recueillir, to receive^ to collect.
N, B. AccuEiLi.iRis now rather obsolete, instead of it, we use Faire bon accueil ; as,
They welcomed us. i/* nous firent bon accueil.
To BE WELCOME Is, Etre bien venu; as, ,r ^ , •
You are welcome, Vous etet bien renu.
* The nearest idea that I can give with letters, of the sound of CUEILL, is hheughl.
1RRE0ULAU VEUBS HI IR.
125
INFINITIVE.
To shun; To flee.
shun.
Let %Ls shun.
INDICATIVE,
IMPERATIVE.
FU 18, sing.
(A
e
9
/ shun, or am
Thou shunnest, art §
Ht shuns, or is
fTe
You \ ®*^""' ^^
Thev \^^^ shunning.
Jig' Tu 2«*".
Tm fu w.
// fu e^*'.
Nous lu ^07t5.
FoM* fu yez.
lis fu ie/i^".
srf
5
ST
A
B
an
Thou \was shunning.
You \were shunning.
Thnj]
-J
A
9
M
^
o
it
*«1
e
o
o
o
M
He
We
You
Theyl
I
Thou
He
We
You
Th^y]
I
Thou
He
We
You
TAeyJ
shunned,
did shun.
Je *fu
Tu fu
// fu
iVbwtffu
Vous fu
//« fu
Je fu
Tw fu
J/ fu
Nous fu
rbtiA fu
lis fu
yaufi.
yais.
yail?^.
yions.
yiez,
yaient^,
is*,
2.V.
imes,
ties,
irent^K
shcUlt will shuUf
be shunning.
shd, lod shun
he shunning.
Je fuir
Tu fuir
II fuir
2Vbws fuir
Vous fuir
//« fuir
tfe fuir
Tu fuir
// fuir
Nous fuir
Fo?/«fuir
//« fuir
ai*,
a.
ont^,
ais^.
ais.
ai(^.
ions.
iez.
aieni^.
GERUND,
shunning. fly anl^.
After the same manner is conjugated
I run, or am
Thou runnest, art
He runs, or is
We run, are
You run, are
They run, are
N. B. The compound tenses of f 'en fuir are
I have run away.
Thou hast run away,^
He has ranaivay
FU ir.
FUYez, plur.
vvYons.
SUBJUNCTIVE,
Que je fu ie,
Tu fu ies,
11 fu £e.
Nou^ fu yions,
Vous fu yiVz.
J/« fu ie?i/.
I
9
3
a
Queje
Tu
II
fu iwc*.
fu mes.
Nousfu issions
Vousfii issiez.
lis fu issent.
o
s
OS
cr
e
running away.
PARTICIPLE.
TV i. shunned
s'enfuir, to run away; thus,
je m' enfu».
TU t' enfuif.
it s* enfu/^.
jv^oi£« NOUS enfu^on«.
vous vous enfuycz.
lis 8* eiifnienV*,
formed with Eire, not Avoir ; as,
Je ME suis\
Tu T* «» >ENFUI, &C,
i/ S' «< J
126
IRREGULAR VERBS ill IR
INFINITIVE.
To DIE. MOUR iV.
IMPERATIVE*
Die. Meursj sing, mour ez, plur
Let us die.
MOITR 071S,
INDICATIVE,
t^I die, or am ^ Je "meurs*®.
3 Thou diest, art B'
S He dies, or is
die, or
arc dying.
•g Tho7i Vwas dying.
^He J
g You fwere dying.
? They]
2 Thou
^ He
s row
* They}
B Thou
3 He
I /Te
ffi You
? TAeyJ
?^
^ Thou
SHe
§' Yb?/
died,
cf/(i die.
shll, will die,
6e dying.
shd, wd die,
'^c dying.
GERUND.
Tu meurs.
II ineurt*.
Nous mour ons,
Vous mour cz.
J/« meurent".
Jc "mour aiV.
Tm mour fli*.
II mour aiY".
A^oM» mour ions,
Fous mour /e*.
//* mour aient'.
Je "mour us^.
Tu mour us,
II mour M^.
A'b?/* mour ^me?,
Fo/^5 mour iites.
lis mouT urenO^.
Je "mour rai\*
Tu mour ras.
II mour ra.
2VbM« mour rons.
Vous mour rcz.
lis mour ronf^.
Je "mour ravfi,^
Tu mour raj».
// mour raiP^.
Nous mour non«.
Vous mour riez.
J^ mour raient\
MOUR an^.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Que je meure.
Tu meures.
Il meure.
Nous mour ioiis,
Vous mour iez.
lis meurent.
w
S
Queje
Tu
II
mour z^95£*.
mour usses.
mour il/**.
9
iVoM* mour ussions, ^
FoTW mour ussiez. ^
J/9 mour ussent. H'
PARTICIPLE.
Mort". Dead,
dying away.
Dying.
After the same manner as mourir is conjugated se mourir, to be dying ;
Je ME meurs. Jam
Tu TB meurs. Thou art
II SE meurt. He is
Nous NOUS mour ons. We are
FoMs vous mour ez. You are
lU SE meurent. yAcy are J
N. B. The compound teases of MOURIR are formed by adding Afortto the auxiliary
£fre; as. He hoa died. li est matt.
They Aave died. lU sont mortf, ^e. *
• These two rr must be sounded duXxruAly ; in order to do it, lay a itrets on the yirst r
IRREGULAR VERBS ill IR.
127
INFINITIVE.
To OPEN. OUVR *>.
open.
Let us open.
IMPERATIVE,
ouva e, aing.
INDICATIVE.
o
s
>^ J open, or am
3 T^(m openest, art S
I He opens, or is
ZfFe )
open, or
are opening
"g Tkounoas opening.
^He J
^ You \were opening.
They]
2 Thou
WHe
^ ^e
S You
?^
^ Thou
3 ffe
lire
^' You
? TAcyJ
1^ Thou
i He
opened,
did open.
«Aa//, will open,
&e opening.
FOM
shdf wd open,
6e opening.
T "ouvr c.
T// ouvr ea.
II ouvr e.
iVbi/« ouvr ons.
Vous ouvr cz.
lis ouvr en<".
J* "ouvr aiV.
jTm ouvr ai5.
7/ ouvr ai(^.
Nous ouvr 10715,
Vous ouvr fe2.
/& ouvr aieni^.
T "ouvr M*.
Tm ouvr is.
II ouvr i^.
Nous ouvr fmes.
FoM* ouvr ties,
lis ouvr ircn^^*
J* "ouvrir ai\
Tu ouvrir asi
II ouvrir a.
Nous ouvrir ons,
Vous ouvrir ^s.
lis ouvrir on^.
J* "ouvrir ai^.
Til ouvrir ais,
II ouvrir ai^«.
Nous ouvrir ions,
Vous ouvririVz.
lis ouvrir aienl^.
GERUND.
opening. ouvr anP^.
OUVR 62, plur.
OUVR ons.
SUBJUNCTIVE, o
D
Que f "ouvr c. •
Tu ouvr e».
// ouvr c.
iVbw» ouvr tt>n».
Vous ouvr iear.
//» ouvr eni.
o
9
a
Que f "ouvr mc*.
I'm ouvr isses.
II ouvr f^. g
Nous ouvr issions. ^'
Vous ouvr miez. £
i/a ouvr issenU *§
8
ouvert®'. opened*
After the same manner as ouvrir, are conjugated
bntr'ouvrir, to open a little. recouvrir, to cover ogam
couvrir, to cover. opfrir, to offer.
d^couvrir, to discover. souffrir, to sniffer. ,
128
inREGULAR VERBS ill IR.
JXFINJTJrE,
To INVEST with.* REVfiT ir.
IMPERATIVE.
invest. REvix «, sing, rev^t ezy plur.
Let us invest.
revet ons.
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTirE.
a*
M / intest, or cnn B
J^ rev6t »*».
Que je
rev6t e.
<
3 Thou investest, art n
Tu rev6t ».
Tu
revfit es.
Of3
§ He invests, or m s*
// rev6t«.
II
rev6t e.
S
ff^e ^
1 invest.
Nov^ rev^t ons.
Nous revet ions.
1 ^^"
Vous rev6t e;?.
Vous rev^t iez.
5*
• They,
are investing.
Its rev6t cn^*».
lU
rev6t ent.
en
g Thou nDOs investing.
Je rev6t ciV.
I'm rev^t aw.
^He j
// revftt ai(^.
a fTe ]
Nous rev6t fo/w.
1 You \ieere investing.
Vous rev6t iez.
«
P They}
J^ rev^t aienl^*
5
<
^^ 1
Je rev^t is*.
Queje
rev6t isse.
99
8 He (invested.
r?^ rev6t is.
Tu
rev^t isses.
II rev6t iY«.
II
rev6t t£».
ff'^"
r did invest.
,Nous rev6t fme*.
Nom
r rev6t issions.
=§.
i ro«
FoM« rev6t ites.
Vous revfet issiez.
»4
• TAeij]
Its rev^t irent^\
lis
rev6t isseiit.
3
3
^r ]
-
Je rev6tir aiK
CO
r
S Thou
Tu rev^tir as.
•
3 He
shll^ wU invest,
be investing.
II • revetir a.
1 fTe
Nous revetir ons.
&: Tow
Vous revetir ez.
•
? TAcy.
Its revStir on^.
?I 1
Je revetir ais^.
S* TAOM
Tu revetir ais.
i-ffe
shdf wd invest,
II revetir ait.
t'^e
\ You
^They^
he investing.
Nous revetir io?is.
Vous revetir iez.
lis revfetir aien^
•
GERUND.
PARTICIPLE.
11
ivesting. rey^t an^.
rev^i
' u. invested.
^yifcr <Ac «ame manner as revetir, are conjugated
v^TiR, to clothe; and d^v^tir, to undress;
but these two verbs are seldom used, except in the infinitive vixiR, d£-
viTiR, and in the participle vixu, clothed ; instead of the former, we
make use of habiller, to clothe, to dress ; and instead of the latter, we
use DisHABiLLER, to uudress.
* To invent with honours, dignities, ^c. but not to surround.
IRREGULAR VERBS 111 IR.
129
INFINITIVE.
To FESL ; To SMELL.
IMPERATIFE.
Feel. sens, sing.
Let tu feel.
INDICATIVE.
T feel, or dm ? * Je^ "sens*.
n
d
B
ST
n
o
"1
n
m
C
c
<B
T3
O
CO
P.
c
«
O
9
&
r.
S
[arc feeling.
Thou feelest, art g^
He feels, or M crq
You ^ ^^^''
They
Thou hoas feeling.
He J
/Tc ]
You fwere feeling.
T/iey]
I
Thou
He
^Fe
You
They^
I
Thou
He
We
You
They)
I
Thou
He
TFe
You
They]
felt,
did feel.
lis
Je
Tu
shally will feel, II
be feeling.
shdf wd feel,
be feeling.
Tu sens.
II sent*.
Nous sent om.
Vous sent ez.
lis sent enPK
Je sent aiV.
Til sent ais,
II sent ai^.
Nous sent to7i«
Vous sent fe^.
7Z« sent aientK
Je* sent m*.
Tu sent is.
II sent tY*.
Nous sent fme*.
Fbw« sent ites,
sent irenO^*
sentir ai*.
sentir ox.
sentir a.
iVbtM sentir ons.
Vous sentir e«.
lis sentir on^,
Je sentir aif^,
Tu sentir ai9.
/i? sentir ait.
Nous sentir fon«.
Vous sentir iez
//.» sentir aient^.
SENT »>.
SENT C2, plur.
SENT onff.
SUBJUNCTIVE
Que je sent e*.
TV sent es.
II sent e.
A^ous sent ions,
Vous sent i>2.
lis sent e/?<*».
Queje sent mc*. gj
Tw sent isses, ^
II sent it.^ i.
iVbi/j sent issions. ^
Fottf sent imez. ^
lis sent i«se7i^. CL
SENT 2. Felt
GERUND.
Feeling. sent ant^.
After the same manner as sentir are conjugated
consentir, to consent. partir, to set out ; to depart,
d£mentir, to give the lie. prbssentir, to have a foresight,
se d£partir, to give up. repartir, to set out again; to reply
pesseryir, to take off the dishes ; se repentir, to repent.
DORMiR, to sleep. \to do an ill office, ressentir, to resent.
endormir, to lull asleep. hessortir, to go out again.
/endormir, tofttll asleep. servir, to serve; se servir to use.*
KEfiTiR, to lie ; to tell a lie. sortir, to go out.
• Observe tliat the third per$an nngular of tho preswif tense of sfrvir, ia ; ert, not sero
130
IRREGULAR VERBS in JR.
INFINITIVE.
To s"*Rx^rj?=>r.KESSAILL .r de,W. dep««r.«
IMPERATtFE.
start.
Let us start.
INDICATIVE.
TRESS AiLL e^ sing.
TRESSAILL CZ^ plUT,
TRESSAILL OTU.
S
CO
09
B
n
n
OB
»«3
P
O
00
^«
ST.
6
o
p
I.
/ start, or am
Thou startest, art E
He starts, or is g'
TV^gyj^^e starting.
^ ]
Thou >was starting.
You \were starting.
They]
Thou\
He [started,
IVe [ did start.
You
They]
I
Thou
He \shll, toll start,
^e I
You
They]
Thou
He \ shd^ wd start,
ff^e ( be starting.
You
They)
Jc* tressaili c.1
Tu tressaili es,
J I tressaili e.
Nous tressaili ons.
Vous trejssaill ez.
Us tressaili enP*,
Je tressaili aiifi.
Tu tressaili ais,
II tressaili aii^.
Nous tressaili ions,
Vous tressaili icz.
lis tressaili aient^.
Je tressaili ««■•.
Tu tressaili is.
II tressaili /f»'.
No\is tressaili imes,
Vous tressaili ites,
lis tressaili irent^*,
Je tressaili ir ai\
Tu tressaillir as,
II tressaillir a.
Nous tressaillir ons,
Vous tressaillir car.
lis tressaillir on^.
Je tressaillir aisf^,
Tu tressaillir ais.
II tressaillir aii^.
Nous tressaillir ions,
Vous tressaillir iez.
lis tressaillir aieiiP
SVBJVNCTIVE.
Queje tressaili e.
Tu tressaili es. S
II tressaili e. ^
Nou^s tressaili ions, "
Vous tressaili iez.
C9
-1
lis tressaili ent.
Queje
Tu
II
tressaili iss^. 3
*».
tressaili isses, ^
tressaili it. ^
Nous tressaili issions.
Vous tressaili issiez.
lis tressaili issent. ^
"1
PARTICIPLE.
TRESSAILI }. Started
GERUND.
Starting. tressaill ani^.
After the same manner as tressaillir are conjugated
assaillir, to assaulty but it is not used in the Jirst^ second^ and third
persons singular of the present tense, and is seldom used« except in the
infinitive assaillir, and in the participle assailli, assaulted,
saillir, to jet out, used only in the infinitive saillir, in the gerund
baillant, in the participle sailli, and in the third person of each tense
* TRESSAILLIR is Seldom used without the words joi«, joy ; or jMur, fear,
t See II preceded by i, page 11 and 12.
IRREGULAR VERBS in IR.
131
To COME. VEN ir.
IMPERATIVE.
come. viens, sing, ven ez plur.
Let us come.
VEN 071S.
INDICATIVE.
I come, or am §
^ TAoM qomest, art 3.
g //e comes, or is °
3
SB
^e
U5
You r™*' *"^ .
• They) «« coming;.
•g Thou >u)as coming.
^He J
B Yo?z }were cominfr.
^ TAow
We
You
They]
c. You
? They)
came, or
did come.
sfiall, will come,
or 6e coming.
Thou
§ if c
I* YoM
^A(2, wd come,
or 6e coming.
coming.
Je^ viens^.
Tu viens.
II vient*^
A'oM^ven ozw.
Fo7« ven ez.
lis viennenU*.
J^ ven ais^.
Tu ven aw
// ven ai^.
Nous ven ions.
Vous ven zes.
J/» ven aieni^.
Je ^^vins*".
Tu vins.
// vint**.
JVbw^vinmes.
Vous vintes.
lis vinrent'®.
Je* viendrai*
Tu viendras.
II viendra.
iVbt^ viendrons.
Vous viendrez.
lis viendront*.
J(? viendrais.
Tu viendrais.
II viendrait*'.
Nous viendrions.
Vous viendriez.
lis viendraient^
YEN anl?^.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Queje^ vienne*.
Tu viennes.
II vienne.
Nous ven ions,
Vous ven ieg*
lis viennent.
o
3
o
o
g
3
Que j(^ vinsse*.
Tu vinsses.
II Vint*®.
Nous vinssions.
Vous vinssiez.
lis vinssent" |
cr
O
o
VEN U,
come.
After the same manner as venir are conjugated.
OBTENIR, to obtain,
PARVENiR, to attain, to arrive
PKkxiRJiiRi to prevent, to anticipate,
PRovENiR, to proceed,
REVENiR, to come again, to return.
• ABSTENiR, to abstain.
APPARTENiR, to belong.
CON VENIR, to agree, to become.
coNTRE VENIR, to contravcne.
coNTENiR, to contain.
DiscoNVENiR, to disagree^ to disown, uetenir, to retain, to keep.
DETENiR, to detain. sovtenir, to maintain.
to become. se souvenir, <o remember.
to keep vp. SUB VENIR, to afford.
to intervene. subvenir,<o befal, to happen.
to maintain. tenir, to hold.
N. B. The compound tenses of venir, convenir, devenir, disconvenir, parve*
NIR, orovenir, REVENIR, and SORVENIR, are formed with the auxiliary Ktre, noiAcoir
as. I have agreed, Je suis e^venu ; not J'ai convetm,
13
devenir,
entretenir,
intervenir,
MAINTENIR,
132
VERES
A TABLE skewing, in one point of view, how to coT^i
INFIN. GER.
PART.
INFIN.
GER.
PART.
INFIN. GER.
PABT.
FINtr, *Msant,
•
fiOUlLLir,
ant,
•
t.
CUEILL ir, ant.
t.
INDIC. INFER.
SUBJ.
INDIC.
IMP.
SUBJ.
INDIC. IMP.
SUB.
? Je FIN w
isse
bous
e
CUEILL e
e
S Ttt
is is
isstes
bous
bous
es
et e
es
S //
it
use
bout
e
e
e
;: iVoMs
issons issons
issions
BOUILL om
ons
iont
ons ons
ion
g Vous
issez issez
issiez
ez
ez
iez
ez, ez
iez
isient.
issent.
ent
ent.
ent.
em
1 Tu
tssait
ids
ais
iisais
ais
ais
5 i/
issiiit
ait
ait
n*iV(mi
issions
ions
urns
S Fouj
issief
iez
iez
•
issat^nt
, aient
aient.
KJe
is
isse
IS
i^e
m
U
im
is
isses
is
isses
15
is*
fli
it
it
it
it
it
it
Jt iSTous
itnes
issions
imes
issions
imes
iUiW
S Foiu
ites
issiez
ites
tssiez
ites
iaie
% lU
irent.
issent.
irent.
issent.
irent.
ism
M J«FINIR at
BOIIILLIR ai
CUEILL erat
& 2'tt
as
as
eras
^ J/
a
a
era
g IVoiw
ons
ont
eront
C.Voui
ez
ez
eres
2 I/*
ont.
ont.
eront.
•
»sj Je
uis
ais
•
erais
£ 3'u
ait
ais
erais
^ If
\^' mgate
«« in IR,
ait
erait
g iVoti*
p* Vout
FINIR, con-
all the verbs
tfio following
ions
iez
erions
«•»« AeenfH
r I/«
aient, except<
A.
acquis.
aient.
tr.
eraient, Rccneilk.
^ACQUERiV, a«f.
COUR ir, ant.
FU tr, yant.
•
1.
2 J*
acquiers
acquiere
s
e
is
•
p Tu
acquiers acquiers acquieres
s
f
es
u it
ies
acquiert
acquiere
t
e
it
ie
S iVous
ons ons
ions
ons
ons
ions
yont yons
ykm
§ Vota
ez ez
iez
ez
ez
iez
y« yes
tent.
!/«
'lis
acquierent.
acquierent
ent.
ent.
iem.
JERais
ais
yait
a ^
ais
ais
yait
ait
ait
yait
ions
ions
yiont
iez
iez
yiez
^ 7/a
aient.
aient.
yaieni.
acquis
acqidsse
us
usse
•
u
m
isie
acquis
acquisses
us
nsses
15
im
s.//
acquit
acquit
ut
ut
it
it
g" Nous
acquimes
acquissions
umes
usdons
imes
• •
g Fbiw
acquites
acquissiez
utes
ussiez
ites
tiair:
? 7&
acquirent.
acquissent.
urent.
ussent.
irent.
tSIO)!
c J'acqueb rai
COUR rai
FUIR at
r 7\f
ras
ras
as
*g 7/
ra
f
ra
a
2. Nous
rons
il
rons
on%
5* row
rez
t-es
■ ez
• 7/»
root.
ront.
ont.
•
?y'
rats
■•■
rais
aU
r- 7><
rais
rais
ais
8//
rait
1.
rait
ait
g^iVbtt*
rions
rums
wns
^ Vous
nez
riez
iez
' lis
raient
raient
r
aient.
In the flame maoner conjugate: Conquerir, Be-}
Like CouHiR conja^raCe
Aeeourir,
Like FuiR conj agate
.^«l:
ij'U'iir.
Conconrir,DiscoQrir,Encoarir, Par- 1
j_ r» ?_ o i_
to run away.
eourir, Recoarir, Secoarir,
^ in IR.
ugate all the verbs in IR, botk regular and irregular
133
r.
I.
OTIS
ez
INPIN. GER. PART.
MOUR tr, ant, mort.
INDIC. IMP. SUBJ.
xneurs meure
meurs meurs meures
meort meure.
MOOR ons <ms ions
ez ez iez
meurent. menrent*
ais
ais
ait
ions
iez
aient.
us
us
ut
umes
utes
urent,
MOUR rat
ras
ra
rons
rex
ront,
rat's
rais
rait
rums
riex
raient.
usse
usses
ut
ussions
ussiez
ussent.
se Moarir.
OU VR ir, ant, ouvert.
ns
E
r.
ons
ez
nt.
oir,
e
es
e
ons
ez
ent,
ais
ais
ait
ions
iez
aient,
*
u
is
it
imes
ites
irent,
onVRiRot
as
a
on*
ez
ont.
ais
ais
ait
ions
iez
aient.
e
e , es
e
ons ions
ez iet
ent.
tsse
issei
it
issions
issiez
iisent.
INFIN. GER. PART.
REVM^ ir, ant, «.
« INDIC. IMP. SUBJ.
REVET S
S
rerSt
. ons
ez
ent,
REVET ais
ais
ait
ions
iez
aient
is
is
it
imes
ites
irent,
REVETIRai
as
a
Otis
ez
ont,
ais
ais
ait
ons
ez
e
es
e
ions
iez
ent.
INFIN. GER. PART
TRESSAIL ir, ant, %,
xsse
isses
it
issions
issiez
issent.
wns
iez
aient. Ve tir, se DevS tir.
SENT tr, ant, i.
In the Mime manner conjngate
Entr'anvrir. Coavrir. Deeouyrir, Re-
coarrir, Offrir, SouiTrir.
sens
sens sens
sent
SENT ons ons
ez ex
ent,
ais
ais
ait
ions
iez
aient.
is
is
es
e
ions
iez
ent.
isse
isses
it
issiont
issiez
issent.
it
imes
ites
irent,
SliNTIR tti
as
a
ons
ez
ont,
ais
ais
ait
ions
iez
aient,
Consentir, Pressentir, Ressenttr,
Mentir, Di^menUr. Partir, Repartir,
M Departir, Sortir, Reasortir, se
Repentir,St!rvir, De8Kerrir,Doraur
KMormir, s'Endormir.
TRES- IND.
SAILL e
es
e
ons
es
ent,
au
ais
ait
ions
iez
aient,
is
is
it
imes
ites
irent.
IMP.
e
om
ez
SUBJ.
e
es
e
ions
iez
ent.
TRES-
isse
isses
it
issions
issiez
issent
SAILLIR at
as
a
ons
ez
ont.
ats
ais
ait
ions
iez
aient, Assaillir, Saillir.
VEN tr,
viens
viens
vient
VEK ons
ez
ant,
viens
ons
-ez
u,
vienne
viennes
vienne
ions
iez
vienncnt
vinsse
vinsse
vJnt
vinssions
vinssiez
viossent
viennent.
ais
ais
ait
itms
iez
aient.
vins
vins
vint
vinmes
vmtes
vinrent.
viendrai
viendras
viendra
viendrons
viendrez
viendront.
viendrais
viendrais
viendrait
viendnon« contc
viendriez nir. Contreremr
viendraient. Devenir. Discon-
venir, Intervenir, Parvenir, Prevenir,
Provenir, Revenir, se Souyenir, Sub*
venir, Survenir, Tenir, s'Absteoir* Ax*'
partenir, Contenir, Dfttenir, Enfretftoir
Maintenir, Obtenir, Retenir, Suutenir
134
REGULAR VERBS in OIR*
iNFjKirirE.
To OWE. DEV oir
IMPERATIVE*
owe. Dois, dn^. dev ez, plur.
Let us owe. dbv om.
INDICATIVE,
J owe.
Thou owest.
g He owes.
?^« ]
S YoM Vowe.
• They]
■ Thou\
I Y(m
? They]
Thou
i
►1
<5
He
Z We
You
Theyl
a 2%ow
>owe(l.
CO
O
CO
He
^ We
B'. You
? They^
^^ '
r* Thou
i ^«
i'You
f^They]
>shaUy will owe.
>shldt wld owe.
Je •Mois*.
Tu dois.
// doit«.
iVbt/* DEV ons.
Fous DEV ec.
J/* doivent**.
J^ DEV a?y.
T// DEV ait.
II DEV Oi^.
Nou9i>i^\ ions.
Vows DEV fc«.
Tls DEV aie/i^
Jc dus-t
Tu\ dus.
J/ dut«.
iVbi/« dumes.
Vov^ dutes.
lis durent",
Je DEV rai\
Tu DEV rflw.
II DEV ro.
JVoM* DEV tons.
Vous DEV rcz.
/fe DEV roni^.
Je DEV rffu".
Tu DEV raw.
J/ DEV rai^.
Nous DEV n0719.
Fbtta DEV riez.
lis DEV raient^.
GERUND.
owing.
Interrogatively.
Doin-je ? §-
Doh-iu ? H
DoiU7? I
Devons-Tioi^A P «
Devez-t?oM»?
Doivent-f/s?
DEV an<".
Je Tie dois
TU Tie dois
il Ttedoit
NOUS Tie devons K
vous Tie devez I
o
o
o
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Que je doive*. |
Ihi doives. «
II doive. S
Nous DEV 10719. ^
Vous DEV ie2. I
J/« doivent. ft
Que je
Tu
n
dusse*. %
dusses. -
dat» I.
jVbusdussions. ^
Vous dussiez. o
Us dussent.*" %
PARTICIPLE.
dA. owed.
flu
O
Interrogatively and Negativ.
Ne dois-je
JVC dois-^i£
Ne doit-f7
Ne devons-7ioM«
A'e devez-roM«
Ne doivent-f/s
pas ? o
o
•■o
lis Tie doivent J
After the same manner as devoir are conjugated^
APERCEVOiR,) . .^ PERCEvoiR, (a law term) ^0 rccetre.
•' APERCEVoiR,/ ^ * RECEVOiR, to recdve.
coNCE^oiR, to concdvc. redevoir, to owe still.
* See H. ». imder devoir, page lll<
f See note ^, page 1»
IRHEOULAK VERBS in OIR.
135
The IRREGULAR verbs belonging to this conjugation are
■}
ASSEOIR, L^.;, j^^
Choir f to fall . . i
Dechoir, to decay
Echoir^ to expire, to be out
Emouvoir, to stir up.
Entrevoir, to have a glimpse ;
Equivaloir, to be equivalent ;
Fa//otr,inust; lobe necessary
MOUVOIR,tomove;.
PieuvoiTf to rain ^
Pouruoir, to provide : . .
POUVOIR, to be able ;
page 13d
like ASSEOIR.
PREVOIR, to foresee ; . . . page 139.
Prh)uloir, to prevail : • • • . 1 .>,, „ * , «, »
8ePr^twteir,to avail oneself J *** v^^-oiR.
* Revaloir, return like for like ; like VALOIR.
Rasseoirf 1 to sit down )
like Mou VOIR, se Rasseoir, | again ; / * * *
like VOIR,
like VALOIR.
.t
page 137,
eee prevoir.
page 138.
Revoivy to see again ; ....... like voir.
SAVOIR, to know ; page 140.
5&oir, to fit,to suit, to become; t
Surseoirf to supersede; .... see pftEVoiR.
VALOIR, to pe worth ; . . . page 141.
VOIR, to see ; page 142.
VOULOIR, to will, to be wiUmg ,• page 143,
* These three verbs are now hardly ever used, but are found in many ancient writings ^
they are conjugated thus :
INFINITIVE.
CHotr.
DECHotr.
Je
Tu
11
d^chois,
d^chow.
d6chot^
g- Nou$ dichoyons.
I Foftf dechoyet.
? Ili d€choient,
? Je d^chuj.
a> Tu d^chuf.
5 J^ d^chttt.
g- Nousd€chumei,
gVous dechute«.
. lU dkchurent»
^ Je d^cherrai.
6 Tu d^cherras.
rj U d^cherra.
§ iVbuf d^cherrons.
^. Vout d^cherrez.
j J^ d^cherront.
p^ Je d^cherrois.
g. Tu d^cherrois.
o II d^cherroit.
S NoMi d^cherrions.
VoM decherriez.
JU d6cherroient.
re decaying.
decayed,
did decay.
r
To Fall.
To Decay.
INDICATIVE.
I decay, or am g*
Thou decayest, art ^
He decays, or is *t
^Ve ) .
You I -^®^*^y'
Th^ifh'
I
Thou
He
We
You
They
Thoul
He [ shall f will decay.
We I be decaying.
You
They)
I
Thou
He [should, wmtld decay.
We I be decaying.
You
They J
PARTICIPLE.
CHu. fallen. No other tenses.
DECHu. decayed.
80BJUNCTIVB.
Queje d^chot«. I \
Tu dechoi^s. TTioa I
II d6chot«. He I decay.
Nous d€choyions. We ftnay decay.
Voasd^chuyiez, You I
Us dichoient. They J
Queje d^chtKse. I ^
Tu dhchusses. Thou |
II dtchuu He ( decayed,
Nous d^chussions. We ?mht decay.
Vous dichusnes. You I
lis dhchussent. They)
i
INFINITIVE.
ECHOIR. To Expire ; speaking of the end of a term ; as,
The rent is due, the time is expired. La rente est due, le terme est 6cha.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
INDICATIVE.
Pres. II ^choit. It expires.
Perf. II ^chut. It expired.
Fut. II echerra. It will expire.
Con. iZ ^cherroit. It wou/d expire.
Qiiil Scheie. It may expire.
11 6chiit. It might expire.
GERUND.
kch€ ant.
PARTICIPLE.
Expiring.
ECltU.
Expired.
♦ FALLOIR, PLEUVOIR, see the impersonal verbs, page 172, 174.
t SEOIR, To Jit, to suit, to become, has only the third person of each tense in use.
Ilsied. It fits. II seyait. It fitted. II nira. It will fit. llsiSrait, It would fit.
I<f ti^e^.They fit.Iin^i«nt.They fitted. /fa «Vront. They will fit./iiJ«roien*. They wd fit
136
IRREGULAR VERBS in OIR.
INFIXITIFE.
Tq sit doum. S* ASSE oir.
IMPERATIVE.
sit down. Assieds-TOiy sing, ASS£Ye2-vous, pint.
Let U8 sit down. assby 07»-Noua
JNDICATirE.
^ T sit, or am |-
s" TAoM sittest, dr^ &
g i/c' sits, or is
sit, are
M'
<t>
to
CP
o
"^assieds*", Queje
tu
il
Tu t' assieds.
// s' assied"*.
Nous NOUS asse yons.
■^ I sii, are p rr
I 'ti* d w' ^"* vous asse yez.
They J ^* ^^^ ^ "* /fe s' asse ytf»<^'
SUDJUSCTIFE,
M'
asse yc*.
T* asse yej.
s' asse ye.
nous NOUS asFey ioTis.
vous vous assey iez.
ils 8* assey t«i/.
S
^
o
S
I «,, liTflW sitting
^ rr I down.
^ /Te 1
§ You *"7 *^*^'"^
STAeyj ^^^^"•
5 Thou
^ He [sat, rfi4
^ ^e Tsit down.
I You
I Thov\
• //e \shU, wU sit,
t7<? M* asse yais*,
Tu t' asse yais.
II s' asseyai^.
Nous NOUS asse yions*.
Vous vous asse ^tV^r.
7& s' asse yaien^,
Je
M
assis'
o
M
cr. loM
Tm t' assis.
II s* assit**.
Noits NOUS assimes.
Fo}/^ VOLS assttes.
lis s' assirenU*.
•/^ m'
Tu t'
// s*
Que je
Tu
II
t'
8'
assisse'
I 3
assisses. ^
ex*.
**assey^rai*.
asse^^ras.
asseyera.
assit«. 2.
Novs NOUS assissions.
FbfYf vous assissiez.
lis s' assissent.
o
9
^ sitting dn. Nous nous asseyerons.
FoM* vous assey^rcz.
" Jfe
8'
asseycront"'.
asseyfrais'.
assey^rais.
I \ Je
Thou Tu
^ ... .shd, wd sit, // 8' asseyerait'
^ilFe [6e sitting dn. *Vo«« nous asseyerions.
I You
f^They
»S6
Vous vous asseyCTiez.
lis s' asseyeraient*.
OERVSa.
sitting down.
Interrogatively.
m' assieds-je ? g*
assieds-/?^ ? N
09
PARTICIPLE.
Assis. sat down.
Interrogat. and Negat.
Ne m' assieds-je ]
iee t' assieds-^u \pas ?
Ne s' assied-i7 j
s'assk yant^.
Negatively,
je lie m' assieds] ^
T' assieds-m ?"*s tu ne t* assieds >pa«. ^
s' assied-t'/ ? ^' jl ne s' assied j §
COMPOUND TENSF.s/onii«<i by adding assis to the auxiliary etre.
I have j S je mb «i/is | Queje mb sots ]
Thou hastl 2^ tu t' e» [.ecTQ ^''' ^^ *^" I
HeAfl* [| il s' e*/ [^^"^- jl se «oi7 (
yfe have js >'oi/« nous sommesj jv^ot^ nous soyo;t« J r-
J/z the same manner, conjugcUe rasseoir, se rasseoir, to sit down again.
CASSIS.
B
ex
IRREGULAR VERBS in OIR.
137
To BIOVE
Move.
Let us move.
INFINITIVE.
MOUV oir*.
IMPERATIVE*
ME US, sing. MOUV car, jdur.
MOUV ons.
M
•a
■-«
n
CA
o
o
c
s
C
«
s
c.
o
p.
INDICATIVE.
I move, or am 3 Je *«meus''.
7%07^ movest, art <,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
moved,
did move.
He moves or is ^
You \ ™^^^'.
They r^ "^^^»"^-
^ 1
TAoTi >«;flw moving.
//e J
We. \
You \were moving.
They J
I
Thou
He
JFe
You
They]
I
Thou
He
We
You
They]
I
Thou
He
We
You
They]
shll.wll move,
be moving.
shd, vxl move,
bi moving.
Tu meus.
II meut««.
Nou^ mouv ons,
Vous mouv ez,
lis meuvent^^
Je "mouv «M«.
Til mouv ais.
II mouv ail?^.
JVbi« mouv ions.
Vous mouv iez,
lis mouv aientf^.
Je tmus*^.
Tu mus.
II mut*.
Nous mumes.
Vous miltes.
lis murent**.
Je "mouv rai^.
Tu mouv ras^.
II mouv ra.
Nous mouv rons.
Vous mouv rear.
lis mouv roni^,
Je "mouv rais^,
Tu mouv rais.
II mouv rai^.
Nous moiiY rions.
Vous mouv riez,
lis mouv raieni^
Queje
meuve'
c
<
ft
Tu meuves*.
// meuve. ^
JVoMS mouv ions, a
Fb?/5mouv iez. ^
lis meuvent, o
Queje musse*.
Ti£ musses.
3
o
<
II mut»
CO
JVbi/imussions.
s
Fow« mussiez.
lis mussent".
3
o
<
PARTICIPLE.
GERUND.
Moving. MOUV ani^. mu. Moved.
jifter the same manner as mouvotr is conjugated iBMOUvoia, to move,
to stir up, speaking o^ vapours, or the passions; as,
Le sokil ^meut les vapeurs. The sun stirs up the vapours.
Cet homme s'<lmeut de Hen. That man is moved with the least thing
* MODVOi R is a technical term, used only in some general propositions ; as for examole
Every free body moves in a straight line. Tout corps Ubre se meut en ligne drotte.
The general acceptation of move is KEMUER ; as,
Move your arm, your leg, your foot, tlie chair, the dish, the table, &c*
Remuez U bras, tajambCf le picd^ la chaise, le plat, la table^ ^c.
f See note 9 page I.
K
138
IRREGULAR VERBS in OIR.
INFINITIFE,
To be ABLE. POUV otr.
S
en
Cb
I
B
ifl
►T3
g
B
3
o
OS
9
»«1
i
§
INDICATIVE.
I can, or am able.
TAou canst, art able.
£fe can, or is able,
^e ]
You >can, arc able.
I \
Thoufcould, wets able.
He J
/Te ]
Yow >could, were able.
TAcyJ
J ]
Thou y could, was able.
He
We \
You >could, toere able.
They]
I
>shU, toll be able.
Thou
He
IVe
You
They]
I \
Thou
He could.
We (shd, wd be able.
You
^They
Being able.
GERUND.
Je *puis",
Tu ^peux.
II pent.*
Nous pouv ons,
Vous pouv ez.
lis peuvenU*.
Je "pouv ozV.
Tu pouv ais.
II pouv ait^.
Noi/s pouv ions.
Vous pouv iez,
lis pouv aien^.
Je tpus*.
Tu pus.
// put*.
Nous primes.
Vous putes.
lis purent".
Je "pourrai*.
Tu pourras**.
// pourra.
Nous pourrons.
Vous pourrez.
lis pourroiit".
Je "pourrais'.
l\e pourrais.
// pourrait*®.
Nous pourrioDs.
Vous pourriez.
lis pourraient*.
POUV ani^.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Queje puisse*. 3
Tu puisses". ^
II puisse. ^
Nous puissions. ^
Vous puissiez. ^
Ik puissenU*. ^
g;
Queje
Tu
II
pusse*.
pusses.
put«.
Nous pussions.
Vous pussiez.
lis pussent*'.
S
zr
*♦■
•s.
p
PARTICIPLE.
pu. seen able
* MAY, MIGHT have, through the verbs, been considered only as signs of the suhjunc-
tive mood ; but these words are not always signs ; they are sometimes verbs denoting
power.
In order to discriminate whether may, might, are verbSf or only signs, change them
into the tenses of the verb BE, that will make the best sense with the word power or abl^
If MAY, MIGHT, thus changed, answer to the tenses of the indieaiive of the verb B£,
they must be expressed by the same tenses of the verb POOVOIR ; as,
I may see it, if I choose, i. e, it is in my power, or 1 am ahle to see it, if I choose.
Je puis le voir, sije vexix,
I might see it, if I chose, i. e, it would be in my power, or I should b$ able to see it, if ^
chose. Je pourrais le voir, si je voulais.
If MAY, MIGHT, answer to the tenses of the subjunctive of the verb BE, they may be ex
pressed either by the subjunctive of the following verb, or by the sul^unctive of Pou VOIR ; as
Bring it me, tnat I may see it, t. e, that I may be able to see it.
ApporteZ'le-moij afin queje le voie, or afin gueje puisse le voir.
He brought it me, that I might see it, i. e. that / might be able to see it
U me Vapportay afin queje le yisse^ or afin queje pusse le voir,
f See note f , page 1. N. B^ MA\
IRREGULAR VERBS in OIR.
139
JNFJNITJFE.
To FORBSEE. PREV oir.
IMPERATIVE*
Foresee.
PRiv ois, sing.
PR^v oyesj plur.
Let us foresee.
PR]gy oyons.
UfDlCATJVE,
SUBJUNCTIVE
1
I*
^ I foresee.
Je pr^v 0M».
Queje prtSv oi^.
§>
3 Thou foreseest
Tu pr6v ois.
Tu pr«Jv oie^.
(3
§ He foresees.
II priv oit^.
II prt^v oic.
ff^^
Nous priv oyons*.
JVbi/« pr«5v oyions.
S
1 You
foresee.
Vous prdv oyez.
Vous pr«iv oytcz.
^
' They
Us pr^v oienP*,
Jife prtiv oien/.
5»
B
Je pr^v oyaUfi.
^3
CO
1 Thou
Tu pr^v oyais.
m
^ ITe
did foresee.
II pr^v oyaiff'.
Nous pr6v oyions.
g You
Vous pr^v oyiez.
? They^
lis pr6y oyaient^.
5!
^Thou
Je priv £s*»
Queje_ pr^v tMc".
Tu pr^v is.
Tt/ prfev isses.
••
foresaw,
II pr^v ii^.
II prev 1^. .
3
Z }Ve
did foresee.
Nous prt5v imes.
2Vo?/*pr^v issions,^
g You
Vous prev ites.
Vous pr6w issiez.
• They]
Us pr^v irenf*.
lis prdv issenV^
.f
?^ 1
Je pr^voir ai*.
i
1 Thou
Tu pr^voir as*.
.«
S He
shaU, will
II pr^voir a.
S If'e 1 foresee.
Nous pr^voir ons.
f YoM
Vous pr^voir ex.
? They,
lis pr^voir on/".
?^ 1
Je pr^voir aitfi.
s* TAoM
Tu pr^voir ais.
\Ht
shuld, wuld
11 pr^voir oiY*.
^We
foresee.
Nous pr^voir ions.
%You
Vous pr^voir iez.
f-Theyi
lis pr^voir aienifl.
.
Foreseeing.
pr£v oyant^.
PRiv 1/. Foreseen
After the same manner is conjugated surseoir, to supersede, partici
pie
suRsis. pouRVOiR, to provide, except the
perfect tense.
/ 1
Je pourv us.
Queje pourv wssc*.
3
Thou
Tu pourv us.
Tii pourv ii«9e«.
"§.
He
provided,
II pourv ut^.
// pourv dt^.
Si.
"3
We
did provide.
Nous pourv Hmes.
Nous pourv ussions.
3
You
Vous pourv Ctes,
Vous pourv t^«9ie2;.
<_
A
They]
Us pourv urent^\
Ji* pourv ussenO^
A^.B. MAY, expressing a with, is rendered by the pratnt of the subjunctive of POUVOIR ;
as. May you be happy ! Puissiez-vou« Stre heureux !
But observe that, these instances excepted, the subjunctive never begins a sentence ; so
this, May I see it 1 is, Puis-jc U voir ? Not Le voie-j>, or Puiss6-;e /« voir f
k2
140
IRREGULAR VERBS ill OIR.
INFINITIVE.
To KNOW. SAV oir.*
JMPERJTIFE.
Know. sache, sing, sachez, plur.
Let us know. sachons.
INDICATIVE,
SUBJUNCTIVE. ^
^ I know.
3 Thou k no west
Je sais'.
Queje
sache.f g
Tu sais.
Tu
saclies**. ^
g He knows.
7/ sait«.
II
sache. g
J^«
iVb7/.?sav ons
Nam
rsachions. ;§
g You
^know.
Vous sav cz.
Vous sachiez. g*
•" Theyl
J& sav enVK
lis
sachent*®. o
•
1 Thou
Je sav a/s«.
Tu sav au.
did know.
J/ sav ait^^.
Nous sav 107W,
$ You
P They,
>
rbwssav iez.
lis sav aieni\
9r
^^ '
Je sus**.
Queje
susse*. »
susses. "
2 Thou
fHe
T?^ sus.
Tu
knew.
J/ sui*.
II
sAt*. i
^^e
did know.
Nous ^umes.
iVbiz^ suasions. ^
1 You
Vous sutes.
Vom
r sussiez. p
' ^eyl
J/* surenU'.
lis
sussent^*. g
?^ ^
Je 'saurai'.
•
g Thou
Tu sauras=«.
I He
sAfl//, «r///
// saura.
1 fTe
know.
iVbt^saurons.
»i You
Vous saurez.
? They^
lis sauront".
?^ 1
Je •saurais*.
s* Thou
Tu saurais.
g ^e
shouldy
II saurait*
1 You
PThey^
wld know.^
iVb?/* saurions.
Vans sauriez.
lis sauraienf^
OERUND.
PARTICIPLE.
'Knowing.
sachant".
su.
Known.
• Meaning mental knowledge, science^ information ^ as,
I know my lesson, French, English, mathematics.
Je sais ma lecon, U Fran^ais, V Anglais, les mutk^matiquet,
I know your brother will come. Je sais que votre frere viendra.
But To KNOW, meaning to be acquainted with, to know by sight, is not eicpressed by
BAVOiR, it is expressed by CONNAITRE ; as,
1 know your brother, your sister, i.e.l am acquainted with them, I know them bv
sight. Je connais votre fr^e, votre sxur, 6^e, See connaitre.
+ Not that I know, ^c. so often used in answer to a question, is expressed by the pre-
sent of the subjunctive of this verb j thus.
Not that 1 know. Non pas queje sache.
No( that we knou\ Non pas que nous sachions.
inREGULAR VERBS in OIR.
141
INFINITIVE.
To be WORTH. VAL oir.
INDJCATIFE.
auBJUNCTiri
•
y^ I am worth.
Je "vaux**.
Queje
vaille*.*
3
5 T!iou art worth.
Tu vaux.
Tu
vailles*.
(§
^ Heis worth.
II vaut*.
II
vaille.
^f^e ]
Nous yq\ oris.
Nousvq} ions.
^
S You >are worth.
Vous val ez.
Vousy&\ iez.
o
" They\
Ila val enP\
Ila
vaillenU*.
5-
•
r^ ]
Je val aM«.
"S Thouyvxts worth.
Tu val aw.
^He J
// val ait^.
^fTe
Nous val ions.
a You >were worth.
yotis\a\ iez.
8 Theyj
lis val aieni^.
^I ]
Je val iM*.
Queje
val usseP.
3
» Thou )was worth.
Ttt val l^«.
Tu
val usses.
f
^He J
II val ?/^'.
II
val Hlh.
en.
^^e
2Vbu«val itme*.
Nous\a\ ussions.
1 You >«£?crc worth.
Vous val i2^e«.
Vous
val ussiez.
O
• They,
//5 val urenP\
lis
val v^ssenV^
*riT ]
Je ^vaudrai*.
1 Thou
Tu vaudras".
3 He [shall, will
II vaudra.
1 ^^e
be worth.
Nous vaudrons.
E You
Vous vaudrez.
? They^
lis vaudront*.
^^ 1
Je •vaudrais*.
r Thou
Tu vaiidrais.
8 I^e
should, would
11 vaudrail^.
ft/Tc
be worth.
Nous vaudrions.
g' You
Vous vaudriez.
.2- TAcy.
lis vaudraient*
G£AI^^D.
PARTICIPLE.
£
eing worth.
VAL ant^.
VAL U.
Been worth
^fler the same manner as valoir are conjugated
uqviYXLOiK, to be equivalent. vR£YkLoiR, to prevail.
RE VALOIR, to return like for like. se pre valoir, to avail oneself
But observe that pr^valoir and se prevaloir have an imperative.
prevail. prdvaux, sing. pr£val ez. plur.
Let us prevail. preval ons.
And, I may
Thou mayesl
He may
We mMy
You may
They muy
prevail, is
Queje pr6v ale,
Tu prev aies,
11 pr^v ale.
/not ***•
iVbM«prt5v alions,[ gs
Fo?/«pr«5v aliez,
lis pr<lv alent
it
* See II preceded by i, page 11 and 152.
143
IRREGULAR VERBS ill OIR.
INFINITIVE,
To SEE. V oir.
see.
IMPERATIVE.
V ow, sing.
Let us see.
INDICATIVE,
I see.
S Thou seest.
g /le sees.
S Yot/ >see.
ri. ]
I%ow
iYou
? They)
^ Thou
did see.
CD
They^
>saw, c?irf see.
B Thou
^ He
f Yo?/
»«Aflr/', will see.
Tu V ow.
J/ V 02^^
NojtsYoyons*,
Voiis V oyez.
//« Yoient^K
Je V oyaisfi,
Tu V o^az;?.
// V oyai^.
Nous V oyions,
Vous V oyee2.
//* V oyaieni^.
Je V /a-*'*.
T'lM V w,
II V z>.
2Vb7/5 V imes,
Vous V ?^e»,
//« \ireiii^\
Je *verrai*,
Tu verras*',
II verra.
Nousyevvoxis,
Vous verrez.
lis verront*".
r Thou
Je *verrais'.
Tu verrais.
& #r c 2Vot/« verrions.
FoM^verriez.
J& verraient*.
gYou
f'They]
V oyons,
SUBJUNCTIVE,
Queje vofe®.
Tu V ofes*^.
// vo/e. 3
Nous y oyions, «i
VonsYoyiez. %
lis Yoient, ^
Queje V iss^,
Tu V Mse*.
/Z V f <».
JVbiw V issions,
Vous V zme^r.
J/.S V issent^K
in
n
Cfi
pi
'Ji
GERUND, PARTICIPLE,
seeing v oyanl^. v w. seen
^y?er <Ae «ame manner as xom are conjugated
ENTREvoiR, to have a glimpse, 'revoir, to see again.
* Only one r is sounded, the other r serves to make the preceding e long.
IRREGULAR VERBS 111
rjTFINlTirE.
To WILL, To be willing.
INDICATIVE.
I
CO
I
I
►0
I
e
o
CD
9
s
o
g
/ will,* or am S.
Thou wiliest, arl E:
He wills, or i« c^
TA^y r^ willing:.
7%oul ^°"^^»;
u- 1^^ willing.
jA^j«^^« willing,
J
H/?
J^c
You
They)
I
Thou
He
tFe
You
They}
I
Thou
He
We
You
They]
would,
r willed.
will.*
9halU will
be willing.
would,*
yshould^ wld
be willing.
Je "veux*'.
Tu veux.
II veut«.
iVb//irvoul om*
FbM«voul ez.
lis veulenU*.
Je "voul aw*.
Tu voul ais.
II voul ai^".
Nou9 voul iom.
Vou8 voul iez,
lis voul aient^»
Je "voul ii«".
Tt/- voul us.
II voul le^.
iVbuAvoul ^mes.
Vous Toul i2^e«.
Jfe voul urenV*.
Je "voudrai*.
Tu voudras.
II voudra.
Nom voudrons.
Vous voudrez.
lis voudront**.
Je "voudrais*.
Tu voudraiB.
II voudrait*.
Nous voudrions.
Vous voudriez.
lis voudraient*.
GERUND.
Being willing, voul ani^.
OIR. 113
VOUL oir.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Queje veuille*. |
Tu veuilles". ;§
II veuille. S^
Nous voul ions, i,
Vous voul iez. §?
lis veuillent' . CR
Queje voul uss^.
Tu voul usses.
II voul <2<«
iVbu« voul ussions.
Fou« voul y^siez.
lis voul ussenPK
aa
PARTICIPLE
VOUL u. Been willing.
* FVequent mistokct are ooxnmitted in the uae of the word WILL, vhich Mmietimes ia a vkbb im*
laying will, wisk, deure, inclination, nnd sometimes, as has been seen through the corjngations, only
the sio "( of some of the tenses of verbs.
* Though the distinction between will, the verb, and will, the siffit, in some instances be nice, yet
it is necessary it should be made, as it changes the idea.
If WILL, would, can be changed into the words be tmlling, they denote the will, and are ex-
pressed by the tenses of vouloib as above.
If WILL, Would, cannot properly be changed into be unllfng, they are mere sions expressed in
ftench by the Urminatiim of the verb. This sentence, for example,
fVill yon go to the play to-night ? may be translated two ways, thus : —
VouLis-toics alter a la eomidie ee toir t. or, ibkx-vokc d la comidie ce soir f with this difference,
that in the first instance, I inquire whether it is the with, detite, or inclinaXxon of the person I am
addressing, to go to the play, yet he mav noc go for all that ; in the second, I do not consult his
uAfl or iacinatian, tot a person may do a tning against his inclination ; but I ask whether hit going
to the play will actually take place, either because he has retolved to go, or because he b compelled
to go.
t Voidoir has two imperatives ; one (veiut, wnUamt, vtmlez) is very rarefy used, according to the
French Academy ; most other grammarians say it should meter be used, being ridiculous for a person
to command himself, and abaard to command others to do the same. The second impprative id onl y
used in the second person plural (vemillex'), and means have the goodness, the kindnc^si.
&3
144
VEllBS in
INFIN.
DEV oir.
A TAHLE shewing, in one point of view, how to oonjugai
PART.
pu.
GEK.
aut.
PART.
du.
I U
Z Noui
§ Voiu
S Us
m
ffje
I 7a
P KOHS
8 J/
^ Nous
g Fous
P. lous
t Us
" ii
o. Voui
r lU
JNDIC.
dois
dois,
doit
DEV on$
«,
doivent.
ais
ais
ait
ions
iez
a lent,
dus
dus
dut
dumes
dutes
durent
DCV rai
ras
ra
tons
m
rent,
rais
rats
rait
rions
riez
raient.
IMP.
dois,
OflS,
SITBJ.
doivo
doives
doive
ions
iez
doivent.
dasse
dusses
dut
dussions
dussiez
dusseut.
6ER.
ant,
IMP.
Like DivoxR conjugate
Redevoir. Pe^evoir,
Apercevuir, Concevoir,
Recevoir.
ASSE oir.
assieds
assieds
assied
« ^ttS ASSEyCMM,
« Vans yez,
? lis yent.
S Tu
yontt
assieds,
!fonSf
yez.
asria.
Vtf
yen
V«
yiont
yiez
yaU
L Nou9
I Vou$
i
Nous
Vous
g Nous
I: roM»
yats
yais
yait
yhns
yiez
yaient
assis
assis
assit
assimes
asntes
assirent
asseyerai
asseyeras
asseyera
asseyerons
asseyerez
asseyeront.
assisse
assisses
assit
assissioDS
assissiez
assisscnt.
Yt* .7*' asseyerais
g. Ta asseyerais
^ // asseyerai t
asseyerions
asseyeriez
asscycraient.
Like AssEOtR, coi\jngate s'Ajueoir, Ruaseoir, M
Kasseoir.
§ Nous
Pj Vous
INFIN.
POU Voir,
INDIC.
puis
peux
peut
POUV ORS
ez
peuTcnt.
uis
ais
ait
ions
iez
a tent
pus
pus
put
pumes
ptites
pureut.
ponrrai
pourras
pourra
pourrons
pourroz
poiirront
poorrais
pourrais
pcurrait
pourrions
pourriez
pourraient.
SUBJ.
puisie
puisses
puisse
puissions
puissiez
puisscnt.
pusse
pusses
put
pussions
pussiez
pussent.
PliitV oir, oyant, u.
015
ois,
oit
oyons,
ci/ez,
Ol^llt,
oyais
oyait
oyions
oyiez
oyaient,
•
u
is
it
imes
ites
ireut.
Olf,
oyons,
ez,
ate
oies
oie
oyimt
oyiez
oient.
isse
issei
it
issipnt
issiez-
iisent
PREVOlRai
as
a
ons
ez
out.
ais
uis
ait
itms
tez
a tent,
Pourvoir, perfect PourvM, P<mrT«P;
r.ot Ponrv/i, eur&roir, pHrticiple 5«i
OIR.
145
all the verbs in OIR,
bolh regular and irregular.
1NFIN. GER.
PAKT.
INFIN. GER.
FAKT.
SAV wr, sachant,
fill.
Voir, oyant,
u.
INDiC. IMP.
SUBJ.
IN Die. IMP.
sub:.
sais
saclie
Vols
oie
sais, sache»
saches
ois, ois.
oii's
salt
saclie
oit
vie
SAV ons, sachons,
sachions
oyonSf oyons,
oylms
ez, sachez.
Bach iez
oi/ez, oyez,
oyiez
ent.
sacbent.
oient.
oient.
ais
oyais
ais
oyais
ait
oyait
iont
•
oyions
iez
oyiez
aient.
oy aient.
sus
susse
m
\S
tsse
BUS
susses
is
isses
sut
sut
it
it
sumes
sussions
imes
issions
m •
sutes
sussiez
itcs
'ssiez
surent
sussent.
irent.
issent.
saurai
verrai
sauras
yerras
saura
verra
saurons
verrons
saurez
verrez
sauront.
verront.
saurais
veirais
saurais ^
verrais
saurait
verrait
•
sauriona
vernons
•
sauriez
verriez
sauraient.
u.
verraient. Kntrevo\/, Revoir,
VALwr, ant,
VOUL oir, ant.
u.
YHVLX.
vaille
veux
veuille
* ii
vaux
vaut
vailles
vaille
veux
veut
yeuules
veuille
•
VAL ons
ions
vouL (ms
UVIS
ez
ent.
iez
vaillent.
ez
veuleut
*£Z
veuitlent
ais
ais
*
ais
au
ait
ait
•
ions
tons
y
iez
iez
aient.
aient.
vs
usxe
us
Ua%9
vs
usses
vs
USSfS
ttt
ut
ut
nt
•
^mes
Wisufns
umes '
usii(ms
utes
us^iez
iites
usiiez
urent.
ussent.
urent.
n<i€»»?.
vaudrai
voudrai
yaudras
voudms
vaudra
voudra
Taudrons
voudrons
vaudrez
voudrez
vaudront.
Voudrout.
TTUKll'ais
voudra is
vaudrais
voudiais
raudrait
voudrai it
1 •
vaudriona
Youdricua
> •
Taudriez
vouurif^z
vaudraieut.
voudraipnt.
t.
K»niir«loir,R«vn1oir,(Prevalo*ir, se Prf-
1
v!&\\ATtSMbjtmetivet Prcvo/e, not Prevoi7/<. )
1 40
UUGULAU VLRBS ill RE.
ISFISITIFE,
To Whir fir J To ^xpeci*.
IMPERATIFE,
wait. ATTEND *, sing.
Let vs wait.
ATTEND re '.
ATTEND eZy plur.
ATTEND Ons,
» Thou
WHe
INDICATIVE,
^ I wait, or am g J* attend «".
3 Thou waitest, art E Tu attend s.
g He waits, or /« ^ II attend*'.
^ ^c 1 .. ' iVb?/« attend ons,
S yb?« > ' ... Vous attend- ez,
* They J ^* ^"^* J/« attend enPK
g* / ] , J' attend fllV.
*g TAow^t^'o* waiting. Tm attend ais,
^ He ] II attend ai^.
5 ^e 1 JVoM« attend ions,
S yb?^ >ircre waiting. Vous attend iez,
? They ] lis attend aient^.
tT attend is*.
Tu attend is.
II ATTEND 2^.
Nous ATTEND imcS.
Vous ATTEND ftes,
lis ATTEND irenP*.
J* ATTENDR fli*.
Tu ATTENDR OS,
shlltWllWdMj II ATTENDR a.
he waiting. Notts attendr ons,
Vous ATTENDR €Z.
lis ATTENDR Onff^.
T ATTENDR aisP.
Tu ATTENDR ais,
shdt wd wait, II attendr ai(^.
Nous ATTENDR ioilS.
Vous ATTENDR icZ,
lis ATTENDR atent^,
waiting. attend ujiP^.
Quef
Tu
SUBJUNCTiyE,
ATTEND e*.
ATTEND e*."
II ATTEND e.
Nous ATTEND i07lS.
Vous ATTEND /eZ.
lis ArrEND enV^.
CO
We
You
^ They]
? Thou
waited,
did wait.
Quef
Tu
t
p
a
ATTEND me.*
ATTEND isses,
ATTEND ti^, \
Nous ATTEND issions, ^'
Vous ATTEND isStCZ, ^
//
«-♦.
lis ATTEND issenO^. S
He
We
3
o
cr! You
? They]
^ Thou
§ He
B-.We
You
?- They}
o
a
be waiting.
ATTEND W.
waited.
jifier the same mariner as attendre, are conjugated
Battre, <o beat, to fight. Descen(iTe,to gooTcomedtnon. 'RehBttre,tobeatagain,torep€at
Abattre, to putt down, 'Entendre fto hear , understand, Hefondre, to melt again,
Combattre, to fight. Etendre, to stretch, to spread, Kendre, to render, to return.
Condescendre, to condescend. Fendre, to cleavCf to split, se Rendre, to surrender,
Confondre, to confound. ¥ondre, to melt, to cast,
Correspondre, to correspond, Interrompre, to intemipi,
Corrompre, to cotTupt, Mordre, to bite,
JD^battre, to debate. se Morfondre, to grow cold,
se D^battre, to struggle. Pendre, to hang
DHendre, to forbid. Perdre, to lose, to ruin,
se Defeiidre, to defend oneself, Pondre, to lay eggs.
D^mordre, to relax, Pr^tendre, to pretend,
D^pendre, to depend, Rabattre, to abate.
R^pandre, to spill, to shed.
R^pondre, to answer,
Retordre, to twist avew,
Rompre, to break,
Suspendre, to suspena,
Teodre, to tend, to ben^m
Tondre, to shear,
Tordre, to twist, to wring,
A'^endre, to sell.
IRREGULAR VERBS in RE. 147
The IRREGULAR verbs belonging to this conjugation are
Abtoudref to absolve, see resoudbe. Enceindre, to encompass, . . • like peindrb .
Abttraire, to abstract, tee traire. Enclore, to enclose.-f
Accrcitre, to accrue, like coNNAtTRB. ETiduire, to daub, like instruire
Admettre, to admit, like mrttre. Enfreindre, to infringe, .... 1 in^ ffindre
Avparaitre, to appear, like connaItrb. Enioindre, to enjoin, / i-BiwuKii.
APPRENDRE, to learn, . . . page 149. B'Entremettre, intermeddle, . like mettre.
Astreindre, to restrain, \ .., „-,«Tio v Entreprendrey to undertake, . like apprendrb
Atteindre, to reach, to bit,. . j "'^ ^eindrk. Epreindre, to squeeze out, \ ,m ^ „„,««„r
BOIRE, to drink, page 150. lieindre, to extinguish, . . . / "''* ^^^'N^RE-
Brairef to bray.* Exclurey to exclude, *,.,,»., see concLORE.
Ceindref to gird, like FEINDRE. ExtrairCy to extract, like TRAIRE.
Cireoneirey to circumcise,. ,.. see dire. FAIRE, to do, to make,. . . « page IdT.
Circonscriret to circumscribe, . like ecrire. FEINDRE, to feign, page 158.
Clore, to close, to shut.t Frire, to fr^, « see Ri RE.
Commettre, to commit, like mettke. Jnduire, to induce, like instrdihe.
Comparattre, to appear, /i/cecoNNAiTRE. Inscrire, to inscribe, like ECRIRE.
Complaire, to comply with, . . like plaire. INSTRUIRE, to instruct, . page 159.
Comprendre, to understand, . . like apprendre. Jnterdire, to interdict, see DIRE.
Compromettre, compromise, . . like mettbe. Introduire, to introduce,. . . • like instruire.
CONCLURE, to conclude, . . page 151. JoindrBf to join, like feindre.
ConduirSf to conduct, to lead,, like instruire. LIRE, to read, page 160.
C&nfire, to pickle, see dire. Luirey to shine, see instruire.
Conjoindref to join together,. . like feindre. Maudire, to curse, ) _. m» b
CONNAITRE, to know, .... page 152. MMire, to slander, ^ see hike.
Qmstiiiire, to construct, .... like instruire. Miconnaitre, not to know, . . like coNNAiTRE.
Contraindre, to compel, like feindre. se M^rendre, to mistake, . . like apprendre
Contrediref to contradict, ,,.. see dire. METl^RE, to put, page 16i . -
Contrefaire, to counterfeit, . . . like fairk. MOUDRE, to grind, page 162. ^
Convaincret to convince, like vaincre. NaAtrey to come to life, see connaiTRB.
COUDRE, to sew, page 153. Nuiret to harm, to hurt, ..... «e« instruire.
Craindre, to fear like feindre. Oindret to anoint, like feindre.
CROIRE, to believe, page 154. Omettre, to omit, like Mettre.
ChoUre, to grow up, like con naitre. Paitre, to graze, 1 i .. connaitrh
Cuire, to do victuals, to cook, see instruire. Paraitre, to appear, J *
Dicoudre, to unsew, like coudre. Peindrey to paint, like feindre.
D6crire, to describe, like ecrirb. Permettre, to permit, like METTRE.
DiertAtrey to decrease, Hke coNNAtTRE. Plaindre, to pity, 1 j-r^ »£i«uitR
se Didire, to recant, to retract, see dire. se Plaindre, to complain, . . /
D£duirey to deduct, like instruire. PLAIRE, to please, page 163.
Difaire, to imdo, to defeat,. 1 i.. «.,«« se Plaire a, to delight in,. . . like plaire.
Be Difaire, to ^et rid of, ... J faire. Poursuivre, to pursue, iifc« suivre.
D^aindre, to disjoin, 2t^e feindre. Pr^dire, to foretel, see dire.
Demettre, to disjoint, 1 ... Prendre, to take, tt/c* apprendre.
■e Demettre, to abdicate, . . . / mettre. Prescrire, to prescribe, /i/c« ecrire.
Diplaire, to displease, 2i/ce plaire. Produir^, to produce, like instruire.
Disapprendre, to unlearn,. . . . Zi/c6 apprendre. Pramettre, to promise, like mettre.
Vitemdrey to take off the die, like feindre. Proscrire, to prosmbe, Uke I^CRIRE.
Vitrai^e, to destroy, like instruire* Reboire, to drink again, like BoiRE.
DIRE, to say, • page 155. Reconduire, to lead-back, . . . like instruire.
DisparaAtre, to disappear,. . . . like coNNAtTRE. ReconnaUre, to know again,, like connaitre.
Dissoudre, to dissolve, like RitoUDRE. Reeaudre, to sew again, .... like coudre.
Diitraire, disturb attention, . . like trai re. R£crire, to write again, like ecri re.
Eclore, to hatch.-f* Recuire, to do or cook again, see instrui re.
ECRIRE, to write, page 156. Redefaire, to undo again, . . . like fa i r e.
Elire, to elect, like lire. Redirey to say again, like dire.
Emoudre, to whet, to grind, . like moudre. RMuire, to reduce, Uke instruire.
* brairb is used only in the following tenses and persons ;
Present, Future, Oniditional,
11 brait, ff«, it brays. 11 braira. He, it will bray. 11 brairait. /i«, it would brav.
1 4 braient, They, bray. lis brairont, They will bray, lit brairaient. They would bray.
f CLORB, and its compounds bclorb. rnclorr, have only the followinii tenses and
148 IRREGULAR VERBS in RE.
__•
Befaire, to do again, f,,,like faire.
Retire, to read again, ..... like lire.
Reluire, to shine, like instrcire.
Remettre, to put again, . . . like mettre.
Rtmoudre, to grind again,, like moudre. •
Renaitre, to revive, tee connaitre.
Rentrairej to finedraw, . . * like traire.
Repattre, to feed, see connaitre.
Reprendrej to take again,. . like appk enure.
RfiSOUDRE, to resol ve,. paj^e 164.
Restreindre, to restringe^. . like feindre.
Revivre, to live again, .... like viVRC.
RIRE, to laugh, ......... page 165.
Satisfaire, to satisfy, ..... like FAIRE.
S6duire» to seduce, like instruire.
Soumettre, to submit, like METI'RE.
Sourire, to smile, ........... like rire,
Sousci ire, to subscribe, like ecrire.
Soustraire, to subtract, like traike.
SUIVRE, to follow, page 166.
Suffire, to be sufficient, see dire.
Surfuire, to exact, .......... like faire.
Swprendre, to surprise, like apprendiie
Survivre, to outlive, survive, . like vivre.
se Taire, to hold one's tongue, . like pla i r e.
Teindre, to dye, like fei ndre.
Traduire, to translate, like instrCire.
TKAIRE, to milk, page 167.
Transerire, to transcribe, .... tike ecrire.
Transmettre, to transmit, like mettke.
VAINCRE, to vanquish, . . . page 168.
VIVRE, to Uve, page 169.
persons in use :
infinitive.
CLo «*6. To close.
09
p
o
S2.
<
o
O
o
Je clo f .
Tu clo s.
II clo t.
Je clor ai,
Tu clor as»
II clor a.
Nous clor 07W.
Tous clor ez.
lis clor ont.
Je clor ais.
Tu clor ai*.
II clor ait.
A'ous clor ions.
VouL clor wz,
i/s clor aient.
indicative.
1 close, Oram closing.
2'hou closest, art closing.
He closes, is closing.
Tfiou\
We r^^i ^^^ close, or be closing.
'You I
They)
Thoul
Txf \should, v)ould close, oi* be closing.
You
They) .
participle.
CLO s. closed*
subjunctive.
Q^JI^ close.
Tu closes.
11 close.
3
a
o
o
o
compound tenses.
3
I have
Thou fcast
He/ia5
g Youhat'e I
I They have)
J' ai
Tit as
II a
Koits avons i
Voiis avez
Us ont
Qve
»c/05.
aie
ales
ait
k
It
Nous ayons i'
Vflus ayez I
Us aient J
>Wos.
I had closed^ &c. J' avais clos, 6ic,
V-
S
o
CP
Conjugate in tlie same manner, enclore,
To enclose.
Colore has only the following tenses and persons in use .
infinitive.
^CLo re.
To be hatching.
participle.
ECLO£.
hatched.
n ^ciot.
Jls ^closent.
It Sclera.
Us ^cloront.
// ^clorait.
lis ecloraient.
indicative.
It is hatching.
They are hatching.
It will be hatching.
Titey will be hatching.
It would be hatching.
T^. would be hatchingr.
subjunctive.
Qm**/ ^close.
Jls ^closent.
3
tr
o
cr
P
IRREGULAR VERBS in RE,
149
INFINITIVE,
To LEARN.
*APPREND re.
IMPEllATIFE,
Learn. apprend s, sing, Apprenez, plur.
Apprenons.
Let us learn.
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
a
CD
B
•a
t
•I
n
/ learn, or atti
Thou learn est, art
He learns, or is
fFe ) ,
learn,
are learning.
5*
learned,
did learn.
c
•<t)
o
P.
o
^
o
cr.
c
p
Thoufwas learning.
He J
/re ]
You >wcre learning.
They]
T
Thou
He
We
You
They]
I
Thou
He
We
You
They]
I
Thou
He
We
You
They
shlU toll learn,
be learning.
shd^ wcMearn,
he learning.
//
Nous
Voiis
lis
.rt *apprend ^. Qt^f
Tu ^^apprend s. Tu
II apprend*".
Nous apprenons.
Vous apprenez.
lis apprennent'^
J' apprenais".
Tu apprenais.
ll apprenail*''.
Nov^ apprenions.
Vous appreniez.
Its apprenaient*.
J^t appris**.
Tu appris.
II apprii**.
Nous apprimes.
Vous opprites,
lis apprirent^®,
T apprendr at*.
Tu apprendr as^,
11 apprendr a.
Nous apprendr on».
Vous apprendr esr.
lis apprendr ont^,
J* apprendr aisP,
Tu apprendr ais.
II apprendr ai^.
Nous apprendr ions.
Vous apprendr tez.
lis apprendr aienP.
apprenne*.
apprennes**.
apprenne.
apprenions;
appreniez.
apprennent.
Quef
Tu
II
Nous
Vous
lis
apprisse*.
ap])risses.
apprit*®.
apprissions.
apprissiez.
apprisseut^®.
<0
P
•n
9
GERUND.
Learning. Apprenant'^
PARTICIPLE.
Appris*. Learned.
After the same manner as apprendre, are conjugated \mutake,
D^sAPPRENDRE, to unleam, se m£prendre, to commit a
PRENDRE, to take. reprendre I ^^ '^*^ again,
COMPRENDRE, to Comprehend, to understand. * \ to rebuke.
ENTRBPRENDRE, to Undertake. surprendre, to surprise.
* Sound only one p. * see pp. page 13.
t See note * page 28.
150
IRREGULAll VERBS in RE.
INFlKITIVEm
To DRINK.
BOI re.
Drink.
Let us drink,
INDICATIVE.
IMPERATIVE*
BOI Sy dng.
•-1
^ I drink, or am
3 Thou drinkest, art ="
S He drinks, or is .g*
Z We \ '^
S You \ ^""^'
© «,. [are drinking.
They
•g Thou >M7flW drinking.
^He J
I You >t£?crc drinking.
P They]
2 Thou
fHe
S You
I Thou
I Wj
&. You
>
drank,
did drink.
shally will drink,
be drinking.
I He [shd, wd drink,
I* FOM
.^TAcyJ
6e drinking,
Je "boi 5®^,
7^i£ boi s,
II boi <-«.
Nous buYons.
Vou^ buvez. •
lis boi venO^,
Je *buvais'.
Tu buvais.
II buvait*.
Nou^ buvions*
Vous buviez.
lis buvaient*.
Je *bus*.
Tu bus.
It but«
Nous bumes.
Vous bdtes**.
lis burenU®.
Je *^boir ai\
Tu boir a^\
II boir a.
Nous boir ons.
Vous boir ear.
lis boir 071^.
Je "^boir ajV.
Ttf boir ais,
n boir flt7.a»
iVoM* boir ions,
Vom boir /cz.
lis boir aienU^
Buvez, ;3/Mr.
BUYons,
SUBJUNCTIVE,
Que je *3boi vc",
jTm boi t?e«*'.
K boi ve.
Nous buvions.
Vous buviez.
3
Its boi »e/i/>*, 3.
99*
P
n
TT
Queje *busse'.
Tu busses.
// bdt*. 3
Nou^ bussions. ca*
Vous bussiez. S
Us bussent*". 9*
»■••
s
6ERUND.
Drinking.
Buvant**.
PARTICIPLE.
Bu. Drunk.
After the same manner as boire is conjugated
REBOiRB, to drink again ; to drink afresh.
* See note 2- page 1,
IRREOULAU VERBS in RE.
151
INFJNITiyE,
To CONCLUDE. CONCLU re.
IMPERATIVE,
conclude. conclu s, «mg-.
Let tis conclude.
INDICATIFE,
^ I conclude, or am g Je "conclu «*».
S Thou conc\udesty art ^Tu conclu «.
§ He concludes, or h B-Jl conclu <».
Z IVe. 1 1 , ^ Nou% conclu on.?.
i You pnclude,are- ^^w. eonclu ez.
? They) «^«"c^^^»"«- m conclu eni'\
CONCLU ez, |}ZMr.
conclu 0719,
SUBJUNCTtyE.
Que je conclu c*.
Tu conclu <?«*•.
J/ conclu e.
2Vbi/« conclu lOTW.
Vous conclu iez.
Tls conclu enV*,
^ mL u^as conclud-
*o Thou) . „.
%He. J '"8-
a We
- They] '"S-
S, TAow
S'//e
/ie I concluded,
We [did conclude.
You
They)
^ You
Je *^conclu ais^,
Tu conclu ais,
II conclu ai^.
Nous conclu ions.
Vous conclu iez.
lis conclu aieiii^.
Je "conclu «*.
Tu conclu s.
II conclu <«.
Nou^ conclu fnes,
Vous conclu tes,
lis conclu reni^^.
I
^ Thou
»«3
Je "conclur aP.
Tu conclur as*'.
II conclur a.
, ,. Nous conclur ons.
concluding. ^.^^ ^^^^,^^ ^^
lis conclur ont.^*
shall, will
conclude.
?J
Thou
I He
t-We
O
You
They]
should, would
conclude.
o
2-
c
&
c
s
Que je conclu wc".
Tw conclu sses,
II conclu <*>.
Nous conclu ssions.
Vous conclu ssiez.
lis conclu ssenV^.
s
9
c:
ft
a.
n
o
cu
«
Je "conclur ais^,
Tu conclur ais.
II conclur ai(*.
, I J. Noujs conclur ions.
he concluding, j^ou, conclur Uz.
lis conclur aient^*
GERUND. PARTICIPLE.
concluding. conclu ani^. conclu, concluded
After the same manner as conclure, m conjugated
' BXCLURB, to exclude; observe only that the participle of exclure ia
EXCLUs, excluded.
152
IRREGULAR VERBS in RE,
To KNOW.*
INFINITIFE,
tCONNAIT re.
Know.
Let us know.
INDICATJFE.
/know. Je» fconnais*.
I Thou knowest.
a He knows.
S You >knovv.
IMPERJTIFE.
connais, sing, connaissez, plur.
connaissons.
SUBJUNCriVE,
Queje connaisse^
Tu connaisses*".
*-* T
•g Thou
^He
- fTe
8 You
fTheyl
2 Thou
WHe
zm>
5 You
" They}
^^
B Thou
3 He
I ^^
)c?2d know.
^ knew,
did know.
shall, will
know.
Tu connais.
II connatt®*.
Nous connaissons.
Vous connaissez.
lis connaissent'^
Je connaissais*.
Tu connaissais.
// connaissait®®.
Nous connaissions.
roiis connaissiez.
lis connaissaient*.
Je connus*^.
Tu connus.
// connut*®.
A^ous conn limes.
Foits connutes.
lis connurent".
Je connahr ai\
Tu connaJtr as*«.
Jl connattr a.
Nous connaitr ons,
Vous connaitr ez.
lis connaitr on£^.
II connaisse.
Nous connaissions
Vous connaissiez.
lis connaissent".
5C
S
o
O
Queje
Tu
II
connusse*.
connusses.
connut*'.
Nous conmissions. ^^
Vous connussiez. ^
lis connussent'8 §
^ Thou
§ He
^.We
I' You
r- They^
Known.
Je connaitr aUf^,
Tu connaitr ais,
shuld, wuld II connaitr aii^,
know. Nous connaitr ions,
Vous connaitr iez,
lis connaitr aienP
Knowing. connaissant««. . connu.
After the same manner as coNNAixRE, are conjugated
MicoNNAiTRE, not to kuow, PARAf TRE, to ttvpear.
RECONNAiTRE, to know again. APPARAiTRB,<o'e7;;;?ear,speakinff of ghosts.
CROiTREjogrowup^totncrease. coMPARAtTRE, (a law term,) to appear.
AccRoiTRE, to accTue, disparaItre, to disappear.
DfiCROiTRE, to decrease, paitre, to graze.
RECRoiTRE, to grow ugaiji. REPAiTRE, to feed.
RENAlTRE, to TCVive, r r - :,
WAITRE, to come to /l/e, part, ne. lperf.snb.NAQC-i«e,-»,g>,-ft; .^shm, -iisiez, istent.
• IMeaning to know hy sight, or to be acquainted with : as,
J. .Znoit* T?' **"" ^""'^t' ^!** ^°^^®' yo"'^ brother, your sister, ». e, by sight.
Je connais cet homme, ce cheval, cette maison, vctre frere, votre sceur
See SA VOIR, page 140. t Sound only one n, and lay th^ iccent upon o.
IRREGULAR VERBS in RE.
153
INFINITIVE,
To SEW.
COUD re
IMPERATIVE*
sew. coud 8, sing, cousez, plur.
Let us sew.
cousons.
W
o
n
/ sew, or am % Je» "coud «**.
7%07/ sewest, ar^ 3. Tu coud «.
//e sews, or is
fFe 1
s
// coud*®.
Nous cousons.
Vous cousez.*
lis cousent"
SUBJUNCTIVE,
Queje "couse*.
Tu couses*°.
II couse.
^OMScousions.
Vous cousiez.
Us cousent".
d
en
B^ 1
•g Thourwas sewing.
^He J
I You fwere sewing.
? They]
^ TAow.
CD
sewed,
did sew.
We
3 /Te
•CI
o
CO
c. You
? They]
shll, wll sew,
he sewing".
Je "cousais*.
Tu cousais.
II cousait**.
JVb?f«cousions.
Vo^is cousiez.
Its cousalent^
Je "cousis.t
Txv cousis*.
II cousit*'.
Nous cousimes.
Vous cousites.
lis cousfrent".
Je "coudr az*.
Tu coudr/M**.
II coudr a.
Nous coudr ons,
Vous coudr ez,
lis coudr ont^.
Que je "cousisse*.
Tu cousisses.
// cousit*».
Nous cousissions.
Vo7ts cousissiez.
lis cousissent".
en
? Thou
olle
^.IVe
g You
f-Theyj
shd, wd sew,
6c sewing.
Je "coudr cm*.
Tu coudr ais.
II coudr ai^.
Nous coudr io7is,
Vous coudr iez,
lis coudr aient^.
GERUND,
sewing.
cousant'*.
PARTICIPLE.
cousu. sewed,
jifter the same manner as coudre, are conjugated
D^couDRE, to unsew, RECOUDRE, to sew again.
* See 8 between two yowcla page 14.
t See note 4, puife 9»
154
IRREGULAR VERBS in RE,
INFJNITIFE.
To BELIEVE. CROI re.
JMPERATirS*
Believe.
crois, siTig.
croyez,
plur
Let us believe.
croyona
•
INDICATIVE,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
1
^ / believe.
Je* croi s^.
Que je «®croi e.
S*
3 Thou believest.
CD
Tu "croi s.
TV croi cs*«.
%
g He believes.
II croi t^.
// croi e.
3
i ^^ ]
Nous cvoyons.
iVoTw croyions.
^
1 You >believe.
CD wv ■ 1
Fous croyez*.
Fbi« croyiez.
• They]
lis croi ent^*
//» croi cw<^*.
1-4 r ^
Je "croyais*.
•g Thou
Tu croyais.
^He
- ITe
did believe.
II croyait".
No7ts croyions.
y
S You
Vous croyiez.
? r>i6^^
lis croyaient"
2-
'^^ 1
Je crus**.
Que je crusse*.
5*
S TAOM
Tu crus.*
T?^ crusses.
believed.
II crut».
// crut**.
3
jj^c [cZid believe.
iVbw* crumes.
iVoi/^crussions.
i'
Vous crutes.
Fo?/5 crussiez.
cr
• They,
lis crurent".
lis criissent".
^'^ 1
Je »croir ai*.
<
(6i
1 Thou
Tu croir as^.
-
9
II croir a.
g ^e ( believe.
Nous croir ons.
1 You
Vous croir cz.
? They,
lis croir ow^.
?^ 1
<^ i/e UAi/Zc?, wuld
o
E.
believe.
t7e ^^croir ai^,
Tu croir «w.
J/ croir ai^.
Nous croir tow*.
Vous croir «C2.
J& croir aient^.
GERUND.
Believing. croyant**.
PARTICIPLE.
cru. Believed
* See note 2, page 1.
IRREGULAR VERBS in RE.
155
INFINITIVE,
To SAY, To TELL.
lUPERATirS,
say. Di 8f sing.
Let U9 say.
S
INDICATI
I say, or am p
TAou sayest, ar^*g-
He says, or w ^.^
fTe
, say,
are saying
I
n
You
They]
I
i
?
s*
a
»said,<?tc2say.
•■J
P.
r
I
7Aoi/>u7a« saying.
He ]
We ]
You \were saying.
They]
I
Thou
He
We
You
They]
I
Thou
He
We
You
They]
T
Thou
He
We
You
Theyi
shllf toll say,
be saying.
ahd, wd say,
^ he saying.
saying.
VE,
J^ di a«.
Tu di«.
II di <».
NousAi sons.
Vous dites**
Us di senP*,
Je di iaitfi,
Tu di sais.
II di «ai<»*,
A'oi^sdi sions.
Vous di «iez.
J/« di saieni^,
Je di«"
Tu di s,
II di <".
Nous 61 mes,
Vous di <e*.
lis di rcn<".
/e dir aiK
Tu dir ai"*.
// dir a.
N0US6\V OTIS,
Vous dir ez,
lis dir o/i^.
Je dir ou".
Tu dir ais.
II dir a/^.
iVb7/5 dir ions.
Vous dir tez.
Jfo dir aient^.
DI sant^.
Di re.
Dites, p/tff.
DI «on«.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Que je di se*. g
, Tm di«e«*. -ir^
// di se. %
Noujs6l\ sions. ^
Vous di siex. g
Qm« je di S5c«. S
Tu di ««e*. P-
// dl ^. g
iVbiw di ssions. §
Fbtzi di ssiez. 2"
//« di «jen<." 4?
DI<».
said.
^y^er Me same manner as dire, are conjugated
CONTREDIRE^ to controdict. pr^dire, to foretell.
se D]£dire, to retract^ to recant, redire, to say again.
interdire, to interdict. confire, to confecty preserve fruit in sugar.
M audire, to curse. circoncirb, to circumcise, part, circoncis.
m£dire, to dander. suffire, to he sufficient part, suffi.
Observe only, that except redire, the ucond person plural of the preunt of the indi-
cative, and of the imperative of all these verbs ends in $ez, and not in tes ; so, Vout
coNFtses, Voui OONTREDISM ; and that in maudire the s is doubled in the middle of the
word ; lo, Nous havdissohb, Vous MKUDissfLZ ; Jt maudi5SA1S, &c. not Nous maudi*
sons, &c.
156
IRREGULAR VERBS in RE.
INFINITIVE.
To WRITE. fiCRI re.
IMPERATIVE.
write.
iCRI «, Af/I^".
ECRi W2, plur.
Let U8 write.
iCRI t?07W.
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
^ I write, or am ^
r* Un^.
Que J ^cri rc«.
2?
»i4
3 Thou writest, art E
Tu dcri «.t
5'm ^cri pes*
^9
§ He writes, or U aq
II ^cri ^.
II icn ve.
1 ^^« Lr/wHtlno.
Vous 6cn vez.
Nous icr'i vions.
Vous «^cri viez.
• JAwj^'^^^"^'"^*
lis 6cri vent^K
lis dcri vent^^.
a.
ir^ ]
J** fecri vaisP.
•g Thou)wa>s writinff.
Tu ^ri vats.
.
^He J
II €qv\ vaii^.
I We
Nous€qv\ vions.
g YoM >«rere writing.
? They]
Vous 6cn viez.
lis <5cri vaieni^.
^^
^^ ^
J* ^cri vis.-f
Quef €cri rme».
3
^ Thou
Tu 6cri vis.
Tu dcri rwsc*.
??
V
life
1 wrote.
II ^cri vi^.
7/ dcri vtl^.
3
ZWe
'c?zVi^ write.
Nous€cv\ vimes.
No7is icn vissions.
■§;
i You
Vous 6cri vites.
Vous dcri vissiez.
* TAfy,
lis 6cri virenP*.
lis dcri rme'i/^'
HiJ ^
J* ^crir ai\
1 Thou
Tu dcrir as^.
3 J/c
shlU wll write,
II ^crir a.
1 ^e
' ^e writinff.
Nous^onv ons.
Vous eerir ez.
« TAeyJ
lis dcrir oni^.
1
^/ .
«/' ^criraf«.«
.*" 7%0M
Tw ^crir ais.
I He
shdy wd write.
II dcrir ait^.
^.m
6e writing".
Nojis dcrir ions.
§' ybw
Vous ^crir /ez.
•
?- They^
lis 6cnr aient\
•
GERUND.
PARTICIPLE.
writing. ecri ran^^'.
After the same manner as iScrire, are conjugated
circonscrire, to circumscribe, proscrire, to proscribe.
lECKi i^. written.
decrire, to describe.
INSCRIRE, ^0 inscribe,
PRESCRiRE, to prescribe.
R^CRiRE, ^ v}rite again.
souscRiRE, to subscribe.
TRANSCRiRE, to transcribe, to copy.
• See note • page 28.
t See note 4, page 2.
IRREGULAR VERBS lU RE.
157
INFINITIFE.
To DO, TO MAKE.
IMPERATIVE*
DO FAi «, sing.
Let US do.
FAI re.
Faites, jdur,
FAI 9ons,
INDICATiy^E.
?
o
g
CD
e
s
I
•4
a
I
i
I do, or am
Thou doest, «r< 5*
He does, or t» ^
JFe ) ,
do,
are doin^.
>was doin^.
You \were doing.
They]
I
Thou
^^ >did, or made.
You
They
I
Thou
He
We
You
Theyi
I
Thou
He
fTe
You
They}
shU, will do,
be doing.
shd, wld do,
be doing.
Je* fai «•.
Tu fai 8.
II fai ^.
Nova fai sons.
Vous faites.
lU font*
Je fai saUP.
Tu , fai «ais.*
II fai *af^.
iVb?/«fai «ton«.
Vous fai fi'es.
J/ji fai saient^.
Je fis*.
Tm fis.
II fit«.
iVbttS I frnes.
Vous files.
/^* firent*".
Je tferai\
Tu feras'-».
J/ fera.
Nous ferons.
Vous ferez,
Jfe feront".
Je tf<?niis'.
Tw ferais.
II ferait«
iVbii«ferions.
Fbiw feriez.
lis feraient*.
SUBJUNCTIVE
Queje fasse'.J
Tu fasses*",
II fasse.
Nous fassions.
Vous fassiez.
lis fassent**.
c
o
Q.
O
Queje fisse".
Tu fisses.
// fit*.
A^07^s fissions. H|^
Vous fissiez. ^
Us fissen*^" 5"
Doing.
GERUND.
FAI san^.
PARTICIPLE
FAI ^. Done, Made.
Afler the same manner as fair^, are conjugated
CONtrefaire, to counterfeit, refaire, to do again,
DiFAiRE, to undOy to defeat, satisfaire, to satisfy,
se DiFAiRE, to get rid of, surf aire, to exacts to ask too much.
RBDEFAiRE, to uudo again.
* See s between two rowels, page 14. t Pionoiinceyray,^ai0, ^r. t See a, p. 15.
158
IRREGULAR VERBS in RE.
INFINITIVE*
To PRETEND, TO FEIGN. FEIND Tt.
IMPERATIFE,
pretend. Feins, sing.
Let us pretend.
INDICATIVE.
^^ / pretend.
3 Thou pretendest.
en
a He pretends.
ft
3
OB
s
c
c
1
1»
o
You
' They]
3 '
- /Te
They]
I
Thou
He
We
You
They}
I
Thou
He
We
|i You
? They]
J/
^ Thou
I He
BiWe
I* You
pThey]
^pretend.
Jf? feins"»
Til wfeins.
n feint«
iVbti^ feignons.
Vous feignez.
lis feignent".
Je **feignais'.
'Was pretending. Tu feignais.
H feignait*.
2Vbu« feignions.
"Were pretending. Vous feigniez.
lis feignaient*.
pretended,
did pretend.
shall, will
pretend.
should, would
pretend.
pretendins:.
Je "feignis*.
Tu feignis.
II feignit**.
Nous feigntme3.
Vous feignttes.
lis feignirent".
Je ^"feindr ai\
Tu feindras**.
II feindr a.
Nousfemdrons,
Vous feindr €2.,
lis feindr ow(*.
Je ^•feindr aisP.
Tu feindr ais»
II feindr ai^.
2Vbu« feindr ions,
Vous feindr iez.
lis feindr aieni*.
Feijrnant*.
Feignez, plu*
Feig^ons.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Qusje '•feigne«.
Tu feignes»».
// feigne.
2Vbu9 feignions.
Vous feigniez.
lis feignenO®.
n
S
2.-
Queje "feigniflse*. »
Tu feign isses. g^
n feignit«.
Nous feignissions.^2.
Vous feignissiez. g;
Tls feignissent'® "^
a
Feint**, pretended
After the same manner as feindre, are conjugated
ASTREiNDRE, to tie, to bind,
GRAiNDRE, to fear.
ooNTRAiNDRE, to constrain.
to gitd.
to erwompass,
to join,
to unite,
to disjoin,
to enjoin.
ENVREJNDRE, to infringe.
CEINDRE,
ENCEINDRE,
JOINDRE,
CONJOIN DRE,
D^JOiNDRB,
EN JOINDRE,
to anoint.
to die.
to take off the die,
to extinguishf to put out,
to reach.
to paint.
to pity.
to complain.
RESTREiNDRE, to restrain, to limit,
iPRsiNDRB, to squeeze out, to strain.
OINDRE,
TEINDRE,
D^TEINDRE,
^TEINDRE,
ATTEINDRE,
PEINDRE,
PLAINDRE,
Se PLAINDRE,
<.v»«
IRREGULAR VERBS ill RE,
159
INFINITIVE.
To INSTRUCT.
IMPERATIVE,
instruct. iNSTRUi s, sing.
Let us instruct.
INSTRUI re.
INSTRUI sez, plur.
INSTRUI sons.
g He instructs, or is
5 V I instruct, {
g You } ' I r
Th (^''^ii^structiiig.
INDICATIVE,
^ J instruct, or am B'T *•
g" Thou instructest, art ^ Tu
I He instructs, or is § II
5* Nous
^'^ Fous
Us
"g Thou}toas instructing. Tu
^He } II
R IFe ] Nous
p FoM >u?erc instructing Vous
" TA^j //«
J 1 J' »
instructed,
dzV^ instruct.
10
"i Thou
He
S You
I Thou
1 ITe
a Fott
5^ J
§ He
§ You
f^They)
II
Nous
Vous
lis
T »
Tu
II
Nous
Vous
lis
Tu
shdy wd instruct, II
he instructing. Nous
Vous
lis
9A/,U7/ instruct,
be instructing.
nstrui «*.
nstrui s.
nstrui <**.
nstrui sons.
nstrui sez,
nstrui senV*.
nstrui sais^.
nstrui sais.
nstrui saii^.
nstrui sions.
nstrui siez.
nstrui saient^.
nstrui «i«w. Qwej
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Quef »»i nstrui »e«.
Tu iustrui ses^.
II instrui se.
Nous instrui sions.
Vous instrui sies.
lis instrui sent^*.
D
CO
-I
c
o
3
1^
nstrui 4^9.
nstrui siP^.
nstrui «fme».
nstrui sites,
nstrui sirerit*,
nstruir at*,
nstruir as^.
nstruir a.
nstruir otis.
nstruir ez.
nstruir onff'.
nslruir ais,
nstruir ais,
nstruir ail^.
nstruir ions.
nstruir iez.
nstruir aieni^.
^'instrui Hsst^.
Tu instrui sisses. (L
II instrui stt^. g
Nous instrui sission$.(^'
Vous instrui sissiez. ^
Il^i instrui sissent. B'
M
o
r
PARTICIPLE.
INSTRUI t*^. instructed
GERUND,
instructing. instrui sant^.
After the same manner as i^struir£, are conjugated
Conduire, to conduct, introduire, to introduce.
RECONDUiRE. to take Of lead back, luirb. K^ ,^. ^^^^
construire, to construct. reluire,) ' *^
cuiRE, to do victuals, to cook,* nuire, to hurty to injure, part. nui.
RECuiRE, to do or cook over again, produire, to produce.
DEDuiRE, to deduct. r£duire, to reduce, to compel.
d^truirb, to destroy. s£ouire, to seduce.
enduire, to daub. traduire, to translate.
* To COOK, followed by an object, is generally expressed by Faire cuire; as,
I cook, or am cooking meat, fish, &c. J« fais cuire de la viande, du pouscm, S^e.
l2
160
IRREGULAR VERBS in RE
INFlNITirE^
To READ. •LT re.
JMPEBATirE,
Read. LI s, sing. li «ez, plur.
Let lu read. li sons
OB
1:1
s
INDICATIVE.
I read, or am 3
ITAou readest, art cu
He reads, or is ^
•g Tkou)
^He j
was reading.
I You \were reading.
.• They]
J& *lij*.
Tu li s.
II li <«.
iVbii^li «on«.t
FouA li «e;;.
J/« li senV*.
Je *Y\ sais^.
Tu li sais.-f
II li saii^.
Nov^W sions.
Vous li siez.
Us li saient^.
•1
8UBJUNCT1VE.
Queje *\\ «c«.t
Tm li «cs*«.
II li «e. ^
iVbi£« li sions, ^g
Fo2<^ li siez.
lis li «en^*.
read,
5 ^Pc (did read.
Tom
CO
Je lus".
Tt£ :;ius.
IZ lut«
Nousldmes.
Vous lilies.
Jfe lurent'*.
o
CD
Jc •lir ai*.
Tm lir flw®'.
He [shall, will read, J/ lir a.
^ We
&! You
They]
be reading. NousWr ons.
Vous lir ez.
lis lir oni^.
•1
Queje |lusse'.
jTu lusses.
// mt* s
Nous lussions. *|!
Vous lussiez. ^
Us lussent» »
^ Thou
BHe
shld, wld read.
g: /f^e r 6e reading.
Je *lir aisP.
Tu lir ai.9.
II lir oi7««.
iVbiM lir to7t«.
Vous lir fer
J/« lir aieni^.
GERUND.
Reading. li sani^.
PARTICIPLE,
LU. Read
After the same manner as lire, are conjugated
£lire, to elect. relire, to read again.
* See note 4, page 2. f See p. 14, i between two vowels. | See note 2, p. 1
IRREGULAR VERBS in RJ^,
161
INFINITIVE.
To PUT. ♦METT re.
IMPERATIVE.
Put. Mets, sing.
Let U3 put.
INDICATIVE.
^/e»
H0 / put, or am
g Thou put test, art E ^m
I He puts, or M c^ /^
put.
mets*.
mets.
met*'.
5 ff^e 1 _ . ' Nous mett 07i«.
i YoM >^*;^ ' ... FbzM mett C2.
g* J I Je *ii>ett OM«.
TAou>7/709 putting. 2V mett ais.
^ He ) II mett ai(?^.
^ /l^e I iVoM* mett ions.
I YoM }tt?crc putting. Vous mett fcs.
Jfo mett aienl^.
? They]
T
I «^e
I (2z(2 put.
You
They]
X You
9
TAeyJ
J* 2%0M
life
I You
^They)
Je tmis*.
Tu mis.
II mit^.
iVbi^s mtmes.
Vous mttes.
lis mirent".
Je ' *mettr ai\
Tu mettr tu^
shU^ wU put, J/ mettr a.
he putting. Nom mettr ons,
Vous mettr cz.
lis mettr on^.
Jc 'mettr aisfi,
Tu mettr ai>.
«Arf, wd put, // mettr ot^.
be putting Nous mettr zow*.
Vous mettr fez.
//« mettr aient\
»rp.TT C2, ;?/i£r.
METT OJIS.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Que je *mett c". ^
Tu mett C.V*. J*
// mett e. S
iVb?/* mett 20715.^
Vous mett fez. ^g
Jfe mett en<". s*
Queje tmisse^. *g
I'm misses. "^
// IT^tt*. J.
Nous missions. %
Vous missiez. ^o*
lis missent^^ ^
PARTICIPLE.
Mis. put.
OERUND.
putting. METT an^.
After the same manner as mettre, are conjugated
ADMETTRE to admit. omettre, to oniH.
coMMETTRE, to commit. permettre, to permit.
compromettre, to compromise, promettre, to promise.
d^mettre, to put out of joint, remettre, to put again^ to deliver up.
se d^mettre, to abdicate, soumettre, to submit,
i^entremettrb, to intermeddle, transmettre, to transmit.
* Sound only one t.
t See note 4, page %
162
IRREGULAR VERBS ill RE.
INFINITIVE.
To GRIND. MOUD re.
Grind.
Let us grind.
IMPERATIVE.
MOUD 9, nng.
Moulez, plur.
MOUloUS.
INDICATIVE.
^ I grind, or am ^
3 Thou grindesty art |*
§ He grinds^ or is s*
? ^e 1 . , ""
o
Tou
They
\
oq
are grinding.
}
'g Thou \was grinding.
a fTe
CO
TAcyJ
* TAott
fife
'ti^ere grinding.
n»
ground,
(f tVf grind.
Je "moud «*•.
T{i( mond s.
II moud**.
Nous m onions.
Vons moulez.
lis moulent".
Je "moulais*.
Tu moulais.
II moulait*.
Nous moulions.
Fous mouliez.
lU moulaient*.
Je "moulus*
Tu moulus.*
II moulut*.
iVbuAmoul dines.
Vous mouldtes.
lis moulurent^.
Je **moudr ai*.
Tu moudr cu^.
9 Thou\
^ He \^shalU V)ill grind, // moudr a.
§ fFe I be grinding. Nou>s moudr ons.
c. You I Fou^ moudr ex.
? They) lis moudr ord^.
^ Thou
i He
§' You
f-They,
shdt wd grind,
he grinding.
Je ^*moudr aufi.
Tu moudr ais,
II moudr aii?^.
iVbt£« moudr ions,
Vous moudr iez.
lis moudr aienP,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Queje "moule".
Tu moules*".
II moule.
Nous moulions.
Vous mouliez.
lis moule nl'*.
9
a
05
5'
9
a!?
-1
Queje '*moulu8se*. 5
Tu moulusses. S-
II mouldt*'. g
Nova moulussions.c^'
Vous moulussiez. S!
//* raoulussenU®.'3
GERUND.
grinding. Moulant^.
- PARTICIPLE.
Moulu. around<
After the same manner as houdre, are conjugated
iMOUDRE, to grind, to whet. r£moudre, to grind again.
* See note 2, page 1
IRREGULAR VERBS ill RE.
■
INFINJTJrE,
163
To Vh^kSE.
please.
Let us please.
INDICATIVE.
IMPEBJTirE*
PLAi «, sing.
^ 1 please.
n Thou pleasest.
S He pleases.
g You >please.
•'' They] '
A
a
•g Thou
He
IVe
You
They]
'did please.
2 Thou
^He
g You
" They]
s Thou
pleased,
did please.
He
>.
I We
&! You
? They]
r Thou
§ ^«
^.We
shall,
will please.
should,
would please.
Je plai «".
iPw plai s.
II plat <*».
iVoM* plai sons.
Vous plai «C2f.*
lis plai «c7ii**
Jig plai sai^.
Tu plai *aw.*
7/ plai saiP^.
iVbu« plai sions,
Vous plai siez,
lis plai 8aient\
Je tplus**.
Tu plus.
1/ plut«
Nous plumes.
Vous pKites.
lis plurent".
Je plair ai\
Tu plair OJ^.
JZ plair a.
Nous plair 07M.
Fow* plair ez,
lis plair on^.
Je plair «»•*•
Tu plair ais.
II plair a/^"
iVbtM plair ions,
Vous plair «c«.
J/^ plair aient^
PLAI r&
PLAI 8€2, plur.
PLAI «on9.
SUBJUNCTIFE.
bBS
Queje plai «fi".
I'm plai se^
II plai «^«
2Vau« plai sions,
Vous plai «f pz .
Us plai w;?<'®.
rr
R
^
ft
P
Queje tplusse*.
Ttt plusses. g.
II pldt". g
IVoM* pi ussions. ^•
Vou^ plussiez. S!
Us plussent". ^
g
VI
PABTICtPLB'
PLU. pleased
QEBUJiHn
pleasing. pI'A.i sanff^.
After the same manner as plairb, are conjugated
coMPLAiRE, to comply. 96 PLAiRE, to delight in.
OEPLAiRE, to displease. se taire, to hold one's tongue, to be sUent.
• See I betweea t>vo yowels, page 14.
t See note 3, page 1*
164
IRREGULAR VERBS Iti RE
INFINITIVE.
To RBSOLVE, TO DISSOLTE. RfiSOUD r«.
3
s
g
a>
CO
•T3
O
m
(0
o
o
Resolve. R^sous, sing.
Let T^s resolve.
INDICATIVE.
T resolve, or am JS Je "r^sous*.
CO
R^solvez, plur.
R<$soIvons.
Tu rtSsous.
// r^sout**.
Nous resolvons.
Voiis rtJsolvez.
Us re^solvent".
Je r^solvais*.
Tu r^solvais.
II r^solvait.
Nous r^solvions.
Vous r^solviez.
lis r^solvaient".
Je rfesolus**.
Tu r^solus.
II r^solut*.
Nous rdsolllmes.
Vous r^soIi\tes.
lis r^solurent^*.
Je **r^sou(Ir ai*.
Tu rdsoudr a^,
shll, wll resolve, // rdsoudr a.
he resolving. Nous rdsoudr ons,
Vous rdsoudr ez.
lis rdsoudr ont*^.
Je **rdsoudr aiV.
Tu rt^soudr ais.
shd, wld resohe, II idsoudraf^.
he resolving. Nou^ rdsoudr ions.
Vous rdsoudr iez,
lis rdsoudr aient\
Thou resolvest, art o^
He resolves, or is s*
V I resolve,
You > , .
yy^^jfl^c resolving.
T \
Thoxi}was resolving:.
He J ^
PFe \
You >«(?crc resolving.
They]
I
Thou
He
We
You
They}
I
Thou
He
We
You
They]
I
Thou
He
We
You
They)
resolved,
did resolve.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Queje rdsolve*.
Tu rfesolves**.
II rdsolve.
Nous rdsolvions.
Vous rdsolviez.
lis rdsolvent".
CR
o
<
CO
<
tb
Queje r^solusse*.
Tu rdsolusses.
II rdsoiat*
Nous rdsolussions.
Vous rdsolussiez.
lis rdsohissent".
CO
(§•
^ARTICITLE.
Rdsolu. Resolved, determined.
Rdsous, Melted, dissolved.*
GEHUND.
Resolving. K^,„i„„t«,
Dissolving. J
After the same manner as r^soudre, are conjugated
ABSOUDRE, to ahsolve, part, absous, ahsolved ; and dissoudre, to
dissolve, part, dissous, dissolved.
N, B. These two verbs have no perfect tense.
* J^f JjB ioUU a feiK>V9 Is Ir'vuiHard en pluie. The sun has melted the mist into rain.
IRREGULAR VERBS 111 RE.
165
INFINITIVE.
To LXVQW, RI re.
IMPERATIVE*
Laugh. RI 8, sing,
Jiet us laugh.
Ri ez, plvTf
RI 071^
INDICATIVE.
c
>^ I laugh, or am
I Thou laughest, art'^
I He laughs, or is
g
s
tW
0^
"§ TAou \was laughing.
%^He J
3 FoM >ircre laughing.
? TAcyJ
Jfe [ laughed,
? We [did laugh.
They,
1 TAoM
3 He
? They\
shll^ will laugh,
he laughin
g-
I' You
^They
shdt wld laugh,
be laughing.
Jc® *ri «*•,
Tu ri ».
J/ ri <».
iVoM* ri on».
Fbi/« ri ex.
lis ri e7i<»«.
Je *ri aM«,
TVf ri ai^.
II ri «z<».
JVoM^riions*.
Fbiw riiez.
//* ri aienP,
Je *ri «*.
I'm ri *.
II ri <*.
2Vot«rim^».
Fbiw rl ^e*.
lis r\ren^\
Je *rir ai\
Tu rir as»».
// rir a.
Nous rir ons,
Vous rir c^.
J/-J rir oni^,
Je *rir ajV.
Tu lir ai5.
J/ rir aiP^,
NouAuv ions.
Vous rir iez.
lis rir aieni^.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Queje *ri c«.
Tt^ ri es««.
JZ ri c.
JVbtw riions*.
Vous riiez.
IZs ri cn<'*.
03
c
i
Queje
Tu
*ri 5w*.
ri sses.
g
04
11
rti^.
3
Nous
Vous
' ri ssions. c^*
ri Micar. o^
lis
ri ssenP*
•g
PARTICIPLE.
RI. Laughed.
Laughing. ri ani^.
After the same m,anner as rirb, are conjugated
sourire, to smile. frire, to fry, part, frit, fried.
N.B. FRIRE is used only in the 1st, 2d, and 3d person of the present of the indicative,
je/»«, tvi f ri s J i\ frit; in tlie future, ]efrirai,i\ifriras, ^c. and in the conditional, yefrirais,
ta friraiSf 6^c, ; me other tenses are formed with the verb faire, and the infinitive of this
verb ; so. We fry, nous faisons /rirc; you fry, vtms faites /rire ; they fry, ils font frire.
Fry this fish, these eggs, that meat. Faites frire ce poisson, ces csufs, cetle viande.
* See note 4, page it
166
IRREGULAR VERBS in RE.
INFINITIVE.
To FOLLOW. SUIV IT.
IMPERATIVE.
Follow. suis, sing.
Let us follow.
surv C2, jiftir.
SUIV ons.
INDICATIVE.
^ I follow, or am oj Je* suis".
3 2%ott folio west, ario' Tu *^suis.
g He follows, or is |. II suit*.
^ M'c 1 r 11 ^ Nous suiv ons.
SUBJUNCTIVE
Queje suiv ^.
Tu suiv cs*.
n suiv e.
iVout suiv f'OTtS.
Fotw suiv iez.
Us suiv cTi/".
"g 7%ou>ii>as following.
§ You Wre following.
? They]
Je ''suiv aisfi,
Tu suiv ais,
II suiv aiff^.
Nous suiv ions*
Fous suiv iez.
Us suiv aient^.
Tl' 1
5 TAow
S ^e
S Fob
° TAey,
followed,
did follow.
Je *»suiv is*.
Tm suiv is,
II suiv i^.
iVbw* suiv tmes,
Fous suiv f^.
Us suiv irenPK
Queje suiviwA
2*tt suiv i«M«.
II Buiv ft*».
iVbiw suiv issions.
Fous suiv tsstez.
J2s suiv issenV*
^' 1
g Thou
3 He
ft You
? rA«y.
shJIl, wll follow,
he following.
Je •■suivr ai\
Tu suivr flj*.
J/ suivr a.
Nous suivr o;i«.
Fous suivr ez.
Jfe suivr owP^.
■
2"^ 1
.'♦ Thou
froM
e. They,
shd, wd follow,
he following.
Je *^suivr aitfi,
Tu suivr ais,
II suivr ai/*".
Nous suivr foiw.
Fo?£« suivr iez.
Us suivr aienP,
OERVKD.
PARTICIPLE.
Following.
SUIV a«^.
SUIV i. Followe'l
^y?
er the same manner <m suivre, are conjugated
1
/ensuivre, to follow from, i. e. a consequence.
pouRsuivRE, <o pursue.
IRREGUtAR VER3S IQ RE.
167
INFINITirE.
To MILK. TRAI re.
IMPBRATIVE,
Milk. TRAI «, sing.
Let U8 milk.
r
(»
»«1
it
•a
o
(fl
•—•
ff.
«^
A
O
o
a
a.
o
I milkt or am 3
Thou milkest, art ^
He milks, or w jg
IFe 1 •
Ycu [ "'^\,.
r \
ThouftDcu milking.
He J
fTe ]
YoM \werc milking.
They]
I
Thon
He
We
You
Th^.
I
Thou
He
We
You
They]
I
Thou
He
We
You
They]
milked,
did milk.
shall, will milk,
he milking.
shld, wld milk,
be ihilking.
TJVE.
J(? trai «".
Tu trai s.
11 trai 1^.
iVbtwtrayons*.
Vous trayez.
lis trai c/i^».
Je ^trayais*.
Tu trayais.
II trayail**.
Notts trayions.
Vous trayiez*
lis trayaient*.
Je tirai.*
Tu tiras*.
// tira.
2Vbu«tir&mes.
Vous iir&tes.
lis tirferent».
Je trair ai^.
Tu trair a^.
II trair a.
NoVSiVKlT OTIS.
Vous trair ex.
lis trair onl?^.
Je trair aisfi,
Tu trair ais,
II trair aiP^.
Nous trair ions.
Vous trwr iez.
Us trair aient^.
Trayez, plur,
Trayons.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Queje trai c*. 3
Tu trai cs"*.
// trai e.
Nous trayions.
Vous tray iez.
/& trai ent", |i
pr
^
Queje tirasse*. ^
Tu tirasses. £.
J/ tirit" 2
Notts tirassions. c§
Vous tirassiez. ST
lis tirassent^. 5
GERUND. PARTICIPLE.
Milking. Trayant". trai <*. Milked.
After the same manner as traire, are conjugated
ABSTRAiRE, to abstract. rentraire, tojinedraw.
oisTRAiRE, to disturb ones attention, boustraire, to subtract.
extraire, to extract. N. B. These verbs have no perfect tense.
• TRAIRE bavins no perfect tense, we supply its place with the perfect of the verb
Tf Res, which in«y be «8ed in the same sense as trairb ; example,
I milked my cows, my goats, &c. Je tirai mes vache$, mes ehevret, H^e.
168
IRREGULAR VERBS in RE.
INFINITIVE,
To VANQUISH. VAINC re,
IMPERATIFE,
vanquish. vainc «, sijig, vainquez, plur.
Let us vanquish. vainquons.
INDICATIVE,
^ I vanquish, or am
g Thou vanquishest, artS
'4
g
w —
S He vanquishes, or is
«• — I vanquish,
are vanqtiishing.
You
They}
09
5-
crq
•g Thou >was vanquishing^.
a You hvere vanquishing,
" They]
V>
^ Thou
fHe
g Yoii
■They]
SThou
^ He
l^e
£ You
? They,
^Thou
%He
B;.m.
I You
f^They]
vanquished,
did vanquish.
Tu
II
shll, wll vanquish,
he vanquishing.
shd^ wd vanquish,
he vanquishing^.
J(? vainc ^,
Tu *'vainc s,
II vainc *
iVb?«« vainquons.
Fow« vainquez. t
lis vainquent".
Je ^•vainquais'.
Tu vainquais.t
II vainquait**.
Nous vainquions.
Vous vainquiez.
lis vainquaient'.
Je ^•vainquis*'. Queje
Tu vainquis.f
II vainquit*^.
Nous vainqutmes.
Vous vainquJtes.
Its vainquirent*'.
Je •'•vainer ai\
Tu vainer as*®.
II vainer a.
Nous vainer ons,
Vous vainer ez.
Its vainer onff^,
Je "vainer aisfi,
Tu vainer ais.
II vainer ait^,
JVoMs vainer ions.
Vous vainer iez.
Us vainer aieni^.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Que je vainquet
Tu vainques*^
II vainque.
Nous vainquions.
Vous vainquiez.
Us vainquent'".
<
so
a
en
vainquisse*. |
vainquisses. ^
vain quit**. ^
iVbiM vainquissions. g
Vous vainquissiez. ♦§
Tls vainquissenU*. ^
GERUND.
vanquishing. vainquant*.
PARTICIPLE.
vaineu, vanquished.
After the same manner as vaincub, is conjugated
CON VAINC RE, to convince.
* The 1st, 2d, and 3d person singular of the present of the indicative, are not much uped.
f §pe ^fi, psige 13.
170
INFIN.
ATTEND re.
:\
♦ \
c-
^/
vcC
\
I II
'* Nous
9 VoUt
I ^^
1 Ttt
2 2/
§rau«
Hi J»
^ JViims
S I/t
INDIC.
4TTEND «,
attend
OIM,
a,
«nt.
aU
ais
ait
iont
ut
aient,
•
u
is
it
imes
U$s
irent
GER.
antf
IMP.
ons,
PART.
U.
SUBJ.
e
e$
e
tons
iez
ent.
Uie
iaes
it
usions
issiex
is$ent.
J? J* ATTENDR «»
•g U
S. iVbu«
P. Fota
S 2/<
as
a
ons
ex
ont.
Battre, and its compounds;
Fendre, Defendre. Docendre,
Condescendre, Fondre, Con-
fondre, se Moifondra, Rooipre,
Corrompre, Interrompre, Pon-
dns Repondre, Corraspondre,
aient. Repandre, Mordre,Demordre,
Tendre, Ktpndre, Entendre, Pretendre, Rradrp. Pendre,
Dependre, Snspendre, Vendre, Per'dre, Tordre* Tondre.
au
ais
ait
ions
xei
APPREND re, apprenant, appris.
C'
S
i
i
n
o
•
B
%
%
8
i>
o
''J
cr.
1/
Nbus
Fous
1U
r
Tu
Jl
Noui
Vous
lU
r
Tu
11
Nous
Vous
lU
J* APPRENDR
Tu
Jl
Nous
Vous
lU
apprend
apprenons t
apprenez
apprennent.
apprenais
apprenais
apprenait
apprenions
appreniez
apprenaient.
appris
appris
apprit
apprfmes
apprttes
apprirent
ai
as
•
a
ons
ez
ont.
apprenne
apprennes
apprenne
apprenions
appreniez
apprennent.
appnsse
apprisses
apprit
apprissions
apprissiez
apprissent.
c
s
o
o
r ais
Tu aii
n aii
No*u ion*
Vous iez
1 Is aient.Like A pprendie (•^0 tonjugated
Desa|^prendr#, Prendre, Comprendre, Entrcprendre,
»e Meprendre, Reprendre, Snrprendre.
«
Tt^
tmltntm • n/\*t«
VERBS m RE.
A TABLE shewitig^ in one point ofview^ how to conjugate all the verbs in RE,
INFIN. GER. PART.
INriN. OBR.
PART.
INPIN. GER. PART.
£CKIr«, vant, t.
INPIH.
•01 re, buvant, bu.
CROI re, croyant,
era.
FAl re.
[NDIC. IMP. SUB J.
INDIC. IMP.
SUBJ.
^ INDIC. IMP. SUBJ.
INDIC.
\ois ve
CROIf
«
ECRi s ve
PAIS
t i ves
». «,
es
«, f, ves
«,
t ve
t
e
t ve
t
huvona, bxLvons, buvions
croyons, croyons,
croyions
vons, vonSf vions
sons.
buvez, burea, buries
croyez, croyez.
croyiez
vet, vez, viez
faiteii
vent. vent.
ent.
ent.
vent, vent.
font.
buvaiii
croyais
vais
sais
buvais
croyais
vais
sais
buvait
croyait
vait
sait
buvions
croyions
vions
sions
buriez
croyiez
vies
siei
buyaient.
cioyaient.
vaietvt.
saient
bus busse
cms
crasse
vis vtsse
fis
bus busses
cms
crosses
vis visses
fis
but bOt
cmt
crut
vit vit
fit
bQmes bussions
crfimes
erussions
vimes vission$
fimes
bCites bussiez
crdtes
crussiez
vites vissiex
fftes
burent. bussent.
crarent.
erassent.
virent, vissent.
firent
IK ax
CROI Rat
fcCRlR ai
ferai
as
as
as
feras
a
a
a
fera
ons
ens
ons
feronj
es
es
ex
ferez
ont.
ont.
ont
feroni
ais
ais
ais
ferai s
ais
ais
ais
ferais
ak
ait
ait
ferai t
ions
ions
ions •
ferion
tec
ies
iet
feriez
aient.
aient.
aient. Circonacrirp, t)ecrire.
ferai e
njugate in the same namner Reboire.
t.
InMrir«, Prescrire, Proachre^ Recrire,
Sooscrire, TraoKcrire.
Contrefjiire,
faire,Redefa
STNAITre, coxmaissant, connu.
DI re, sunt.
FEIND re, feignant, feint.
INSTRUl
connais connaisse
s
te
feins feigne
s
connais connaisses
*. »,
tes
feins feignes
*»
connatt connaisse
t
se
feint feigne
t
connaissons f connaissions
sons, sons,
sions
feignons t feignions
sons
connaissez connaissiez
dites, dites.
siet
feignez feigniez
sex
connaissent. , connaissent.
sent.
sent.
feignent. feignent.
sent.
connaissais
sais
feignais
sais
connaissais
sais
feignais
sais
sait
feignait
sait
connaissions
sions
feignions
sions
connaissiez
siez
feigniez
sies
connaissaient.
saient.
feignaient.
saient.
connus connusse
s
sse
feiguis fbignisse
sis
connus connusses
s
ases
feignis feignisses
sis
connut connQt
t
t
feignit feigntt
sit
connQmes ' connussions
mes
snms
feignhnes feignissions
sivus'
connQtes connussiez
tes
ssiex
feignites feignissies
sites
connurent. connussent.
rent:
ssent.
feignirent. feignissent.
sirent,
"'as
DlRai
as
FEINDR ai
as
"<■■'
a
a
a
a
ons
ons
ons
ons
ez
es
ez
ex
ont.
ont*
ont.
ont.
ais
ais
ais
ais
ais
ais
aii Astreindi*, Oraindre,
ais
?* Meconnattre, Reconnattre,
ait
m
^j'j Contraindre, Ceindre,
,'^-„, Enceindre, Joindre,
ait 1
ions Parattre, Apparaltre, Com-
tons
•
V^ Conjoindre,D6loiBdre,
'« Knjoindre, Enfreindre,
toiu i
*«f parattre, Dis parattre. Grot'
»« Contredire. Dedire, Infer-
xez )
aier.t tre, Accrottre, Decrottre.
aient. dire, Maudire, Medire, Re-
awnt.Oindre, Teindre, De-
aient
•*- P^ttre,Repatlf,Nattre,Renat-
dire, Predire, Circoncire, ConSre, SaflSre.
teindre, Eteiodre, Atleindre, Peindre,
Recuire» h
"kuadtfrConuattre, p. 152.)
{See remark under Dire, p. 155.)
Plaindre^ Restreindre, Epreinlre.
(See Instn
to grind; r£soudre. toresolve; traire, to milk; vaincre, to vanquish; which are not freauentlvl
171
oih re^lai and irregular.*
OER. PART.
INFIN. GER. PART.
INPIN. GER, PART.
INFIN. OCR. PAST
utntf t.
LI re, santt lu.
PLAIrf, santy plu.
^UlVre, ant, i.
IMP.. SUBJ.
INDIC. IMP. STTBJ.
tNDfC. IMF. SUBJ.
INDIC. IMP. SDBJ.
fasse
his se
PLAI S SIS
suis e
f, fasses
«, », ses
s, s, ses
suis, suis, es
fasse
t se
t se
suit
5nn5, fassions
smis, sons, sions
sons, sotu sions
SUIT ons, ons, ions
faites fassiez
sez, lez, siez
ses, sez siez
ez, ez, iet
fassent
sent, sent.
sent, sent.
ent. ent.
Ml'l
sais
ais
sais
sais
ais
sait
sait
ait
sions
sions
ions
siez
sies
iez
saient.
saient.
aient.
fisse
lus lusse
plus plnsse
is isse
fisses
lus lusses
plus plustet
is isses
fU^
lut lut
plut plot
tl U
fissions
IQmes lussions
plQmes plussions
imes issions
fissiez
Ifites lussiez
pKites plussie*
ite$ issiez
fissent.
lurent. lussent.
plurent* plussent*
irent, issent
LIR (It
PLAIRat
SUIVR ai
as
as
as
a
a
a
,
ons
ons
one
ez
es
n
Oflt,
ont.
ont.
a is
ais
ais
ais
ais
ais
ait
ait
ait
itms
ions
ions
ie%
iex
iez
•
aient.
aient.
aient.
;Sati8faire,Saifaire
LikehmseoiyngateKYxTe^ReWre.
Complaire, Deplair»|Se Platrt,
se Taire.
s'Ensaiyn, Pournlyrt.
•y tant, t.
METI'm, ant, mis.
RI re, ant, ri«
VIV re, ant, v6cu.
se
mets e
s e
yis e
• •
\, set
meta, mets, es
s, s, es
yis, yis, es
se
met e
t 9
yit e
•
wns sions
METT ons, ons, ions
ons, ontt niona
onSf ons, tons
tez nez
et, es, iex
ex, ttj riiez
es, ez iez
sent.
ent, ent. .
ent, ent%
ent ent.
ais
ais
ats
ais
ait
ais
ait
ait
ait
«
ions
riions»
tons
■
iez
riles
tez
aient.
aient.
aient.
sisse
sisses
sit
sissums
siasiex
tissmt.
mis misse
mis misses
mit mtt
mtmes missions
mites " missiez
mirent. missent.
f sse
s sses
t t
mes ssions
tes ssiet
rent, ssent.
y^cus y^cusse
y^cus y^cusses
y^cut y^cflt
y^cQines y^cussiona
y^cfites y^cussiez
y^curent. y^ovssent.
METTRat
RIR si
yiVR ai
as
M
as
a
a
a
ons
ons
ons
ez
et
ez
ont.
9nt,
ont.
ais
ais
ais
•
•dnirp, K^roodnire,
lire, Endnireylntro-
ais
^ Admettre, Cpm-
ais
ait
•
au
tilt
torn
1, Prodaire,Rediiire,
. ' mettre, Comproinet-
tons
•
iet
aient*
Revivre, Sonrivre.
tire, Tradmrp, Con-
^5 tre, Demettre, En-
tes
ire, Detmire.Caire,
at«nt.tremettr<>, Om^ttre,
zient.
Relaire, Nain.
Permettre, Promettre. Remet-
Sourire, Frire,
page 159.)
.tre, Sonmettre, Transmettre.
ISee rmark under Rire.]
iwion Ufi Mtt nf fiiia fttTtia in nrAov tn Mil lor ii mnm conyeolent 1 thcv mftv be seen in tiic^T
172 VERBS CALLED impersonal.
Some verbs which have only the third person singular, and sometimes
the third person plural of their tenses in use, are called impersonal,
though they would perhaps be more properly called monopersonal, i. e.
verbs of one person ; the most frequently used are the following :
INFINITIVE.
TONNcr. :£cLAiAer.
PLEU voir.
QEher.
NEiGer.
GR^Ler.
VENTer.
To •ilinnder. 'J'o Lighten.
To Bain. To f
reeze.
To Snow.
To Hail. To Blow.
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
It thunders.
7/ tonne.
QuHl tonne. S:
If It lightens.
7/ tJclaire.
II (^claire. |
eg It rains.
II pleut.
II pleuvc ^
S It freezes.
7/ g^lc.
II gh\e. f
5 It snows.
7/ neige.
II neige. s
OD It hails.
9
II grele.
7/ grele. «
The wind blows.
7/ ventc.
7/ vente. ^
,^ It did thunder.
II tonnai7.
3 // did lijrhten.
II ec]aira27.
^ It did rain.
II pleuvart.
o It did freeze.
II geiait.
J? It did snow.
II neigeait.
1 It did hail.
II gvfdait.
The wind did blow.
II yeniait.
8;
It thundered.
77 tonna.
92<'«7 tonna^. §
y It lifirhtened.
n (^claira.
II ^claira/.«5;
g» It rained.
n plut.
II pmt s:
^ /^ froze.
II gela.
II gt\at. g"
1 /^ snowed.
» It hailed.
II neigea.
77 neigeo7. g.
II grela.
7/gr6W7. ^J3
The wind blew.
II venta.
77 venta7, ^
It will thunder.
72 tonnera.
J*
? It will lighten.
H ^clairera.
1 It will rain.
II pleuvra.
»o /(^ ^«?^7/ freeze.
II g^Iera.
i. /< «£;i7/ snow.
II neigera.
1 It will hail
II grelera.
• The wind will blow
II veutera.
»*j 7/ would thunder.
II tonnera27.
g 7^ would lighten.
II 6claireraz7.
3 7/ would rain.
II p]euvraz7.
1 7^ would freeze.
II g^Ierai7.
& It would snow.
II neigeraiY.
1' 7^ would hail.
II grele rai7.
r- The wind would blow. 7/ ventera?^.
Inferrogratireiy.
Negatively.
Interrogatively ^ Negatively
Tonne-t-f/?'
o
11 ne tonne
Ne
tonne- t-i7 '
1 S
Eclaire-t-zV?
OB
11 n' eel aire
t
N* dclaire-t-t7
w
Pleut-27?
G^le-t-27?
11 ne pleut
11 ne gele
pas.
n
a.
f
iVepleut-i7
iVegfele-t.i7
1 1
Neige-t-i7?
9
P.
11 ne ucige
Ne
neige-t-t7
Grele-t-i/? .
11 Jie grele J
1*
iVegrele-t-f/
VERBS CALLED impersoTUiL 173
INFIKITIVE.
There be. Y AVOIR.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Affirmatively.
There is,
TAcrcare II y a. , Qu*ilyait. g;
There was, ^
There were II y avait g
There was, *3
TAcre were II y eut. II y eAU o-
TAerc will be .;.... II y aura. •*
TAere would be II y aurait.
There is not, g:
There are not II n'y a pas. II n'y ait; pas. ^
There was not, g
TAere were not .... II n'y avait pas. ^
There was not, b
TAcre were not II n'y eut pas. II n'y edt pas. o
There will not be ... II n'y aura pas. g*
There would not be . II n'y aurait pas.
Interrogatively.
Is therey
Ate there? Ya-t-il?
Was there.
Were there? Y avait-il?
Was there^
Were there? Y eut-il ?
Will there be ? Y aura-t-il ?
Would <Aere be ?. . . . Y aurait-il ?
Is there not.
Are /Aer« not? N'y a-t-il pas ?
Was there not.
Were <A«re not ? . . . . N'y avait-il pas ?
Was <Aerc not.
Were there t)ot ? . . . . N'y eut-il pas ?
Will not </jere be ? . . N'y aura-t-il pas ?
Would not there be?. N'y aurait-il pas ?
COMPOUND TENSES.
Tht^e has been,
TAere have been . . . . II y a eu. II y ait eu.
There had been II y avait eu.
There had been E y eut eu. \\y edt eu.
There will have been. II y aura eu.
There wd have beeu . II y aurait eu.
There has not been.
There have not been . II n'y a pas eu.
Has there been ? Y a-t-il eu ? Has not there been ? N'y a-t-il pas eu?
174
VERBS CALLED impersonal .
MUST. FALLOIR.
The verb must is conjugated through its different persons; but its
representative falloir has only the third person singular of each tense,
with // for nominative ; then the nominative of Muar becomes the nomi-
native of the follewijig verb in french, which verb must be in the present
of the subjunctive after Tl faut, II faiidra ; and in the perfect^ after II
fallaity Ilfallut^ Ilfoudrait, as appears by the following example,
9
I must
Thou must
He must
My brother must
fVe must
You must
They must
^ for me
5 for thee
8 for him
for my brother
for 'tis
^ for you
for them
tH for me
|. for thee
^ for him
p for Twy brother
g tor M«
I for you
-< for them
^ for mc
I for thee
S: for him
I* for my brother
§ for t^5
for yoM
go out.
II faut
to go out, or
that J, <Ao?/.,
hcy 8fc, should
go out.
II fallait
/Z fallut
to go out, or
'that J go out.
II faudra <
to go out, or
hhat J should
go out.
q for them
II faudraii <
que je sorte,
que tu sortes,
qu^ il ;or/e.
^t^e mon frere sorte,
que nous sortions,
que vous sortiei,
qu' ils sortent,
que je sortUse,
que tu sortisses,
qu* il «orZf^.
9^6 mon frere sor/j^.
gue nous sortissioiis.
que T0U8 sortissiex,
qu* ils sortissent
que je 5orfe.
qrwc tu sortes.
qu* il sor^c.
^we mon frere *orZc,
^e nous sortions.
que vous sortiez,
qu* ils sortent.
queje aoriisse,
que tu sorlisses.
qu* il «orZf^
^2/6 mon frere <ortfZ.
92^6 nous sortissions.
que vous soriissiei.
qu* ils sortissent.
I must 7io<
TAot^ must 7zo^ ^go out.
He must no^
iWy brother must 7io<
Must / ]
Must thou Vgo out ?
Must he
Must my brother
Must / 7Z0« 1
Must thou not >go out?
Must he not J
Must ?{o^ my brother
Negatively,
que je sorte.
II ne fvLutpasjque tu sortes,
qii il »or<c.
Interrogatively.
que ihon frfere «or/c.
I^ue je sorte 9
que tu sortes ?
qui! il «or^e P
91M mon tr^re «or/e?
!<pie je «orfe ?
^ue tu sortes ?
qu* il sorte ?
que mon frere sorte?
VERBS CALLED mpersonal. 175
MUST HAVE, meaning To be in need of a thing, is expressed thus :
T must have
Thou must have
lie must have
fFe must have
You must have
T/iey must have
My brother must have
:7 for me
money, books;
or, J, thoUf he, §*c.
want money,
books.
faut de Vargejit, des
livres.
&
tn
3
9
n
Ui
(A
P
for thee
for him
for us
for yoit
for ^Aew
to have money,
^books; or, /wanted
money, books.
^ for me
=: for thee
S* for him
to have money,
'books ; or, / shall
want money, &c.
// NOUS
// V0U8
Tl LEUR
II ME
H TE
to have money, j,
^^books;or,/should j^^^^^
want money, &c. j^^^^^
n LEUR
n ME
II TE
J/lui
J/ NOUS
// vous
// LEUR,
II faut des livres a mon frtjre.
// ME ^
// TE
// LUI
// NOUS
II VOUS
II LEUR,
//me
// TE
// LUI I faudra de Vargent^
" des livres.
fallait, or fallut de
Vargent, des livres.
faudrait de fargcfit,
des livres.
for us
1 for you
5 for thejn
^ for me
A. for thee
2 for him
% for us
i for you
q for <Aewi
The impersonal verb TARDER, To long, is also conjugated in t!)e
Fame manner as the above ;
/long
Thou longest
He longs
fFe long
You long
They long
3/^ brother longs
/ did long
TAo7£ didst long
He did long
^e did long
You did long
They did long
to see her,
to g^ there.
tarde de la voir^ cCy
oiler.
to see her,
to go there.
/7me ^
// TE
// LUI
II NOUS
// VOUS
// LEUR,
// tarde k mon fr^re de la voir,
II me
II TZ
II LUI I tardait de la voir^ iy
Thou
He
I
Thou
He
I
}
}
longed,
did long
will long
\,o see her,
to go there.
Ito
[to
see her»
go there.
should long to see her, &c.
// NOUS
// VOUS
// LEUR
II ME
II TE
//.LUI
// ME
// TE
// LUI
J/me
alter.
tarda de la voir, dij
alter.
}tardera de la voir, d*y
alter,
tarderait de la voir
176
THE NUMBERS,
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIIL
IX.
X.
XI.
XII.
XIII.
XIV.
XV.
XVI.
XVII.
XVIII.
XIX.
XX.
XXI.
XXII.
XXIII.
XXIV.
XXV.
XXVI.
XXVII.
XXVIII.
XXIX.
XXX.
XXXI.
XXXII.
XXXIX.
XL.
XLI.
XLII.
XLIX.
L,.
LI.
LIL
LIX.
LX.
LXI.
LXIX.
LXX.
LXXI.
1, one.
2, two.
3, three.
4, four.
5, five.
6, six.
7, seven.
8, eight.
9, nine.
10, ten.
11, eleven.
12, twelve.
13, thirteen.
14, fourteen.
15, fifteen.
16, sixteen.'
17, seventeen.
18, eighteen.
19, nineteen.
20, twenty.
21, twenty-one.
22, twenty-two.
23, twenty-three.
24, twenty-four.
25, twenty-five,
26, twenty-six.
27, twenty-seven.
28, twenty-eight.
29, twenty-nine.
30, thirty.
31, thirty-one.
32, thirty-two, &c.
89, thirty-nine.
40, forty.
41, forty-one.
42, forty-two, &c.
49, forty-nine.
50, fifty. ,
51, fifty-one.
52, fifty-two, &c.
59, fifty-nine.
60, sixty.
61, sixty-one, &c.
69, sixty-nine.
70, seventy.
71, seventy- one.
*l//i, ra. Uiu f
Deux.
Trois.f
Quat re.
Cinq,
Six,
Sept,
Huit,
Nevf,
Dix,
Onze.
Dome.
Treize,
Quatorze.
Quinze.
Seize,
Dix-sept,
DiX'huiL
Dix-nevf.
Vingt.
Vingl et un,
Vingt'deux,
Vingt-trois.
Vingt-quatre.
Vingt'Cinq*
Vingt'Six,
Vingt'Sept,
Vingt'huit.
Vingt-nevf,
Trentc.
Trente et un.
Trente-deuXy Sfc.
Trente-neuf.
Quarante,
Quarante et un,
Quarante-deux, Sfc*
Quarante^nevf,
Cinquanie,
Cinquante et un,
CinquanU'deux, Sfc.
Cinquante-neiif,
Soixands.
Soixante et un^ Sfc,
Soixante-neuf.
Soixante^ix,
Soixante-onze
* These words are both ArticUi and Suhstantives.
Articles when prefixed to a noon : as, Un homme, Une femme ; Un lirre, Deux livres ;
Trots hommes ; Quatre maisons ; Cinq chevauz ; Dix 6cus, &c.
Substantives when preceded by an article ; as, un Deux ; un Trois : un Quatre *, le Deux
I«Trois, ^Quatre, de Janvier, de fSvrier, de cceur, de pique, &c. des Trois ; cfesQuatro, &c.
f" Tlie chapter on pronunciation contains rules which shew how to pronounce all these
words.
LXXII.
72,
LXXIIL
73,
LXXIV.
74.
LXXV.
75,
LXXVI.
76,
Lxxvir.
77,
LXXVIII.
78,
LXXIX.
79.
LXXX.
80,
Lxxxr.
81,
LXXXII.
82,
LXXXIII.
83,
LXXXIV.
84,
LXXXV.
85,
LXXXVI.
86,
LXXXVII.
87,
LXXXVIII
. 88,
LXXXIX,
89,
XC.
90,
XCI.
9!,
XCII.
92,
XCIII.
93,
XCIV.
94,
xcv.
95,
XCVI.
96,
XCVII.
97,
XCVIII.
98,
XCIX.
99,
c.
100,
CI.
101,
CII.
102,
ex.
110,
cxx.
120,
CC.
2O0,
CCL.
250,
CCC.
300,
CM.
900,
M.
1000,
C.
100,
CC.
200,
M.
1000,
MM.
2000,
THE NUMBERS*
seventy-two.
seventy-three.
seventy-four.
seventy-five.
seventy-six.
seventy-seven.
seventy-eight.
seventy-nine.
eighty.
eighty-one.
eighty-two.
eighty-three.
eighty-four.
eighty-five.
eighty-six.
eighty-seven. ^
eighty-eight.
eighty-nine.
ninety.
ninetv-one.
ninety-two.
ninety-three.
ninety-four.
ninety-five.
ninety-six.
ninety-seven.
ninety-eight.
ninety-nine.
a hundred.
a hundred & one."*
a hundred & two, &c
a hundred & ten.
a hundred & twenty.
two hundred.
two hundred & fifly.
three hundred.
nine hundred.
a thousand.!
one hundrea.
two hundred.
one thousand.
two thousand.
177
Soixante'douze.
Soixante-treize,
Soixante^qtiatorze*
Soixante»q7iinze.
Soixante^seize.
Soixanie-diX'SepL
Soixante-dix-huit
Soixante-diX'neuf
Quatre-vingt,
Quatre-vingt- un.
Quatre-vingt-deux.
Quatre-vingl'trois
Quatre-vingt-quatre.
Quatre-vingUcinq,
Quatre-vingt'Six,
Quatre-vingt-sept
Quatre-vingt-huit,
Quatre-vingt-neuf,
Quatre^vingt'dix.
Quatre^vingt'Onze,
Qualre-vingt'douze.
Qiiatre-vingt-treize,
Quatre-mngt'qucUorze
Quatre-vingt'quinze.
Quatre^vifjgt'Seize,
Quaire-mngi'dixsept
Quatre-mngt' dix-huit.
Quatre-vingt'diX'neuf
Cent
Cent un.
Cent deiix, Sfc*
Cent dix.
Cent vingt.
Deux cents.f
Deux cent cinquante.
Trois cents.
Neuf cents.
MiUe.
Un cent.
Deux cents.
Un mille.X
Deux mille.
* llie article A^ and the conjunction Am!, are omitted with these numbers in french
t Quatre^ingt and Cent, followed by a noun vlural, require s; as, Quatre-vingts ans,
*eighty years ; Deux cents hommes, two hundrea men ; but not when they are followed
by another number ; as Quatrf -vingt-dix ans ; Deux cent cinquante homme$.
t In the date of the year, One is omitted, and Thousand is spelt Mil, not Mtlle ; so we
-vrrite 1819, Mil huit cent dix-neuf, not Un milie huit cent diz-neuf.
M,
178
THE NUMBEUS.
From the foregoing numbers are formed the adjectima of number i
e Premier^ m. la Premiere, f.
e Second, m. la Seconde, f.
1<
2nd,
the first,
the second.
3rd, the third.
Ath, the fourth.
bth, the tifth.
6^^, the sixth.
7th, the seventh.
Sth, the eifrhth.
9^A, the ninth.
10^^, the tenth.
11^^, the eleventh.
IQih, the twelfth.
ISth, the thirteenth.
14th, the fourteenth.
15/^, thefiaeenth.
I6th,. the sixteenth.
17th, the seventeenth,
18ifA, the eighteenth.
I9th, the nineteenth.
20th, the twentieth.
2U^, the twenty-first.
22nd, the twenty-second.
23rc^, the twenty- third.
24th, the twenty-fourth.
,2bt/i, the twenty-fifth.
26^A, the twenty-sixth.
27th, the 4wenty-seventh.
28/A the twenty-eighth.
29th, the twenty-ninth.
SOth, the thirtieth.
31s^, the thirty-first.
S2nd, the thirty-second, &c.
{
e or la Deuxieme) m. and /!*
e Trom^me.
e Qfia^rieme.
e Cin^uieme.
e i^Krieme:
e S^tihme.
e Huitihme>
e 2Vcu»ieme,
e Dixie me.
e Onzi^me, or VOnzihme^
e Z>07/2;ieme.
e Treizihme,
e Quatorzihme*
e Qumzi^me.
e iSeirieme.
e DiX'Septihme.
e DLV'huUihmc.
e Dij7-7t«ui;ieme.
e FtTi^tieme.
e Vingt-et'Unihmem
e Ff7ig'<-(]?euxi^me.
e Vingt'trowhme,
e Fi7fg^*9ua^ri^me.
e rtn^^cingui^me.
e Vingt-sixieme.
e Fi7ig"<-*ep<ieme.
e Vingt-huitihme,
e Ft?i^<-neM»ieme,
e TVt^/i/i^me.
e Trenie eiunltiitie,
e 7Ve;i/e-(/etU7ieme, and so on, by
adding icme, to the substantive numbers, page 176, 177.
Observe only, that in those ending in e, the e is left out ; as, Quatre,
Quatrihme; DouZ'C, Dow«i6me; and in those ending in^ ^Ae^is changed
into V, for softness of sound; as,iVew/,Ncttmeme; Dix-neuf, Dix-neuvihiXiQ,
From the above adjectives are also formed the numeral adverbs;
Istly,
2ndly,
Srdly,
4thly,
bthly,
6thly,
firstly.
secondly.
thirdly,
fourthly,
fifthly,
sixthly.
{
PremieremenU
Secondemeni.
Deuxiemement.
Trotsiem^emenU
fiiuatriemement
CinquiememenU
Sixiememeni,
and so on, by adding m^nt to the above adjectives.
* Second and Deuxieme are used indiscriminately, when they are followed by a noun;
as, Le second, or Le deiixitme jour ; La seeonde, or La deuxieme semaine ; but aftex anothet
number, Deuxieme alone can be used ; so we could not say, Yingt second; Trente Mectind}
we must say, yingi-deuiieme ; Trente-deufieme, 8^c.
( 179 )
THE SYNTAX,
CONTAINING
THE GENERAL PRINCIPLES
OF
THE FRENCH LANGUAGE
WITH
PARTICULAR RULES
AND
EXCEPTIONS,
NOT COMPRISED IN THE INTRODUCTION*
The FRENCH LANGUAGE, like most of the living language|, is composed
of NINE different sorts of words, commonly known by the names of
NOUN, PRONOUN, PREPOSITION.
ARTICLE, VERB, CONJUNCTION,
ADJECTIVE, ADVERB, INTERJECTION.f
* Some of the geaerel rules contained in the introduction are repeated in the syntax,
because they are necessary to connect the different rules together. But each part must
be considered as a distinct work, designed for different persons. The introduction is
intended for children, and for persons who, not being accustomed to the study of lan-
guages, couid not at once comprehend such a multiplicity of rules. The syntax, which
includes all the rules which are necessary to a perfect knowledge of the language, is in*
tended for the same persons, after they are sufficiently grounded in the introductory
rules, and for persons of a comprehensive mind, who have no need of an introduction,
t Ever since the art of speaking has been reduced into ft system, grammarians, and
the philosophers who have written on the subject, have differed upon the parts, or dif«
ferent species of words of which it is composed. Some argue that there are but two,
the NOUN and the verb, and assert that the rest are only corruptions or abbreviations of
these ; others add the article and die conjunction ; others the pronoun, and so on
to the INTERJECTION. It does not belong to a production of this kind to inquire into
these different opinions ; and I have adopted ihe most prevalent, because it has ap-
peared to me, that whether they be words, or only abbreviations of words, there are nine
sorts, which are subject to different rules.
Those who are desirous to see ingenious dissertations on this subject, may read
Harrises Het'mes, and Tooke's Divenions ofPwrUy,
M ?
180
CHAP. I
NOUN.
EVERY WORD is Called a noun which names a mhstance or hein^^ eithei
real, as man, house, tree, 8fc. ; or ideal, as god, heaven, glory, 8^c,
Nouns are distinguished into proper and common.
A noun proper, or proper name, is that which belong:s only to one
being ; as, John, the Thames, London, Paris, England, France, Sfc*
A noun common, or common name, is that which belongs to all beings
of the same kind ; as, man, woman, river, city, country, Sfc,
N» B, In this class are comprised the abstract names of virtue, vice,
pleasure, pain, hve^ desire, fear, hatred, glory, honor, and such like.
Two
* Though proper names should remain invariably the same in all languages, yet the
French have given to the names of countries, and of some capital cities, names or ter-
minations adapted to their own language; so, Asia is called Asie; Africa, Afriqiie;
America, Am^rique ; England, Angleterre ; Scotland, Ecosse ; Loudon, Londres ; Spain,
Espa^ne ; Mexico, Mexique ; Jamaica, Jama'ique ; Italy, Italie ; Tuscany, Toscane ;
Sardinia, Sardaignt ; Sicily, Sicile ; Leghorn, Licoume ; Mantua, Mantoue ; Geneva,
Geiieve ; Genoa^ Genes ; Switzerland, Siiisse ; Germany, Allemagne ; Hungary, Hangrie;
Bohemia, Bohhte; Vienna, Vienne; Poland, Pologne ; Warsaw, Varsovie; Cracow, Cra-
eavie; Russia, Ruuie; Prussia, Pruise; Sweden, Suede, 6^c, for which no rule can be
given ; but as they are single words, and are generally found in the dictionaries, when
they have been seen once or twice, they are easily retained.
The names of persons, derived from the living languages, do not vary ; so, For, Pitt,
White, Brown, are in french. Fox, Pilt, White, Brown, as in english ; but the names of
persons, derived from the greek and latin languages, generally bhuige their termina-
tions, agreeably to the following rules.
Names ending in aZ, ar, or, is, os, on, do not vary ; as, Annibal, Adherbal, Casar,
Hamilcar, Mentor, Nestor, Adonis, Sesostris, Minos, Atropos, Damon, Solon, 6^c, nor the
names of men ending in a, Ba^Numa, Nerva, Sylla, Agrippa, Dolabella ; except Seneca^
which is SMque*
The finals as and es, are changed into e : as, Pythagoras, Pifthagore; Mecenas, M^ce-
ne ; Eneas,. iVi^e; Socrates, Socrate; Demosthenes, Demosthene, ^c. ; extept A^6silas,
Leonidas, PHopidas, Phidias, Pythias, Pausanias, Epaminondas, Eudamidas, Calchas,
Olympias, Cirls, Xerxes, Pericles, and a few others not often met with.
The finals us and ius, are also generaUv changed into e; as, Augustus, Au^uste; Titus
Tite; Tiberius, Tibere; Julius Csesar, «/i//e«C^Mr; Tacitus, Tacite ; Virgihus, Virgile;
Horatius, iforace; Eolus, Eole ; (Edipus, Oedipe; exce^tt Appius, Bacchus, Brutus, Cin-
einnatus, Claudius, Crorsus, Cyrus, Darius, Decius, Dentatus, Gallus, Germanictis, Janus,
Junius, Manliu^, Marius, M^n^nius, M6teUus, Mutius, Papirius, Plaufius, PompHins,
Porus, Pyrrhus, Remus, Romulus, Silvius, Valerius, Venus, Fullus, and a few others not
frequently met with; and Conolanus, Ta^quinius, which lose the finals us, ius^ thus,
Coriolan, Tarquiti,
Nouns in c^t/s, change chus into que; as, Telemaohus, TtUmaque; Lysimachus, Lysi^
maque; Gracchus, Graeme; except Antiochus,
Nouns ending in o take the addition of n ; as, Cato, (^aton ; Cicero, Ciceron ; Scipio,
Scipion , Plato, Platon ; Apollo, Apollon ; Pluto, Pluton ; Juno, Junon ; Dido, Didon
except Calffpso, Clio, Clotho, Sapho, Echo,
The final der is changed into dre ; as, Alexander, Alexandre ; Lysander, Lysandre,
Names of women ending in a, change a into e mute ; as, Julia, Julie ; Amelia, Am6lie;
Agrippina^ Ag^-i^fpine ; Cleopatra, Cltop&ire ; Minerva, Minerve, &c.
Those ending in e, £, retain their termination ; as, Cybele, Melpomene, Circ6, CloS,
Daphni, Hcht, Diishi ; except the following, in vi'iiich the Frenc^do not sound the final
f ; Ariadne, Eurydice. Pin^lope,
NOUN. 181
Two things are to be considered in nouns j the gender and the number.
The gender is the distinction between the sexes.
The french language admits of ttvo genders only, the masculine and
the feminine.
By masculine is meant the male being; hj feminine^ the female.
The names of beings whose sex is unknown, and of those ina?iimate
beings, commonly called things, which are of the neuter gender in english,
are either masculine, or feminine, in french, according to custom,*
. There
The difference of gender is generally known by the terminatUm of the noun.
Nouns of the following Terminatioiu are
MASCULINE.
A. un Opera, an opera ; un Sopha, a sopfui ;
du Quinquina, peruvian bark.
Al sounded A ; as,
un Plat, a dish ; un Combat, a battle.
B. du Plomb, lead; le Hadoub, refitting ;
un Kumb, a point of the compass,
C. le Bee, the beak: du Sue, gravy ,
du Pore, pork ; au Tabac, tobacco.
D. du Lard, bacon; du Fard, paint;
un Regard, a look; le Hasard, chance.
E preceded by any letter but T ;
du B16, corn ; un Pre, a meadow ;
un Cong6, a holiday ; du Caf6, coffee.
Except TAmiti^, friendship ;
la Moitie, the half; la Pitie, pity.
£K sounded E ; as,
un Baiser, a kiss ; le Danger, danger;
un Metier, a trade ; un Panier, a basktt.
AX, sounded E; as,
un Geai, a jay ; un Balai, a broom,
un Essai, an essay; un D^ai, a delay.
AIT, £T sounded E ; as,
un Fait, a fact ; un Portrait, a picture ;
un Sujet, a subject ; un Objet, an object.
F. un Nerf, a sinew ; un (£uf, an egg;
du Boeuf, beef; du Suif, tallow.
Except une Clef, a key ; la Soif, thirst ;
la Nef, the body oj a church,
G. le Rang, rank ; le Sang, the blood ;
un Etang, a pond ; un hareng, a herring,
I. un Etui, a case ; un D^fi, a challenge ;
un Lit, a bed : un Habit, a coat.
Except une Fourmi, an ant ; la Nuit, 7113 /tt.
01. un Envoi, an invoice ; un Cjsnvoi, a convoy ;
un Emploi, an employ ; le I)oigt, the finger.
Eicept la Foi, faith ; la Loi, law,
L. un Mai, an evil ; le Travail, labour ;
un H6tel, a hotel ; le Sommeil, sleep,
M. le Norn, the name ; le Parfum, perfume ;
du I'h^ m, thyme.
Except la Faioi, hunger
Nouns of the following Terminatiotia are
FEMININE.
T£. la Libert^, liberty: la Sante, health ,
la Beaut^, beauty ; la Bont6, goodness ,
la Majeste, majesty ; la Divinity, divi'
nitu.
Except i'Et^, summer: un Comt6,a county ,
le Cot6, tAe side; un p£Ue, a pie; un (jomite,
a committee ; un Traite, a featy, a treatiu ;
da Th6, rome tea.
182
NOUN.
There are two numbers, the singular and the plurals
A noun is singular, when we speak of one being only; as, a book,
un livre; a house, une maison; a tree, un, arhre; a ship, un navire, ^'c,
A noun
T-
MASCULINE Terminations,
if. All the terminations in s which are not ION,
or SON soft, i. e. sounded ZON, viz,
AN. da Bran, bran ; du Safran, saffron,
ANT, ENT soit?iderf an ; as,
un Uiamant,a diamond ; unPr^sent,ap}'eseRt ;
le Vent, the uind. Except une Dent, a tooth.
AIN. dvLp&ijif bread; unBain,a6atA. Exc.laMain,
IN, EIN sounded AiN ; as, C*''^ ^«"^-
du Vin, some wine ; le Matin, morning ;
le Sein, the bosom; le Teint, the complexion.
Except la Fin, the end,
01 N. le Soin, care ; un Coin, a comer,
lEN. un Lien, a tie ; du Bien, wealth.
CON. un Balcon, a balceny ; un Flacon, a decanter,
LON. un Violon, a violin ; un Papillon, a butterfly.
SSON. un Buisson, a bush ; du 'Poisson, fish.
Except Id^MoissoUy the hai^est; la Boisson,
drink ; une Chanson, a song.
CON . un Hame9on,a fish-hook ; un Lima^on.a snail.
• * Except une Le^on, a lesson ; une Hanson,
a ransom ; la Fa9on, the making.
TON. un B&ton, a stick ; un Bouton, a button,
O, un Echo, an echo; un Duo, a duet,
or sounded O ; as,
un Mot, a word ; un Complot, o plot ;
un Pot, a pot ; un Gigot, a leg of mutton.
EAU
sounded O ; as.
FEMININE Terminatiotit.
ION. une Action, an action ; une Caution,
a bail; une Portion, a portion.
Except un Bastion, a bastion ; un Crayon,
a pencil; un Kayon, a ray; un Pion, a
man at drafts; le Talion, retaliation; un
Scorpion, a sc(7rpJonj le Septentrion, the
north ; le Croupion, the rump of fowls ani
birds; un Million, a million.
ZON* ^^® Maison, a house; la liaison,
reason ; la Saison, the season.
Except le ^azon, turf; du Poison, poison;
un Tjson, a firebrand ; un Olson, a gosling
I'Horizon, the horizon ; le Blason, heraldry
un Couteau, a knife ; un Chapeau, a hat.
Except I'Eau, water ; la Peau, the skin,
P, un Cap, a cape ; un Cep, a stock of a vine;
un Champ, afield; le Galop, the gallop.
Q,, un Cinq, a five; un Coq, a cock,
1\, All the terminations in r, which are not eur.
AIR . 1' Air, the air ; un Eclair, a flash of lightning.
Except la Chair, the flesh,
EK.» le Fer, iron ; l*Enfer, hell. Except la Mer,
the sea ; une Cuiller, a spoon,
IK. le D^sir, desire ; le Plaisir, pleasure,
OIK. le SoiT,evening ; unMouchoir,a handkerchief,
OK. I'Or, gold ; un Tr^sor, a treasure,
ORD ORT, sounded or ; as, le Bord, the border;
un Fort, a fort ; le Sort, fate.
Except la Mort, death,
UUil« '® Jour, the day ; un Tour, a trick.
Except la Cour, the court, the yard ; une
Tour, a tower.
EUR. la Peur,/«ir ; la Cbaleur, heat ; une
Fleur, a flower ; la Couleur, colour.
Except le Bonheur, htck, happiness ; le
Malheur, misfortune : THonneur, honour ;
le D^shonncur, disnonour ; le Cccur, the
heart ; I'Equateur, the equator ; I'lnt^rieur,
the interior ; I'Extferieur, tKe exterior.
Except also the nouns in eur, which belong
only to persons ; as, un Auteur, an author ;
un Docteur, a doctor ; Sfc.
See also, page 189, how some nouns femi-
nine are formed from the masculine, in the
same manner as adjectiyes, by ehang'ng the
termination.
NOUN. 183
A noun is plural when we speak of more than one.
N. B. The plural is generally formed in french, as in english, by add-
ng 8 to the singular ; as, des livres, books ; des maUona^ houses, 8^'c,
Nouns
S.
T.
U.
UT
MASCULINE Terminations,
le Bras, the arm \ le Repos, repose ;
du Bois, wood ; le Succ^s, tuccesi ;
Except une Brebis, a sheep; une Souris,
a mouse ; une Vis]^ a screto; Tois, time»
un Plat, a dish ; un Lit, a bed ;
le Vent, the wind ; un Accident, an accident,
Exe. une Part, a iharei une Fordt, a forest ;
la Nuit, night; une Dot, a dowery; une
Dent, a tooth ; la Mort, death,
un Ecu, a crown ; un F^tu, a straw.
Except la Vertu, vii'tue'; une Tribu, a tribe;
de la Glu, bird-lime.
FEMININE 'Vermvmiunis,
sounded c; as,
le But, the aim; le Scorbut, the scurvy.
EU. le yen, fire; un Lieu, a place,
OU. - un Trou, a hole ; un Chou, a cabbage,
X. un Faix, a frurt^en ; le Choiz, choice.
Except la Paix, peace; la Voix, t/te voice ;
une Noix, a nut ; de la Poix, pitch ; une
Croix, ''a erase ; la Toux, cough ; une Per-
driz, a partridge ; une Faux, a scythe.
From the above rules it appears that nouns ending with a consonant^ or any vovoet, but e
mute^ are generally masculine; but there is a great number of nouns ending in e mute, part
of which are masculine^ and part /emmine, which can not be reduced to such certain rules •
GENERAL RULES.
/ AU NAMES of COUNTRIES ending with e mute are feminine ; as,
la Franoe, France ; la Hollande, Holland ; I'Angleterre, England ; la Suisse, Sidtzer'
land, &c. except le Mexique, Mexico, Those ending with any other vowel, as Canada,
Chili, Ptrou, ^c, or with a consonant, as Danemark, Portugal, Japon, 6fc. are masculine. <
Be All COMMON NAMES ending in e mute, preceded by another vowel, are feminine ; as,
le, une Ep^e, a su)ord ; une Arm6e, an army ; une Guin6e, a guinea : la Vie, life ; la Rue,
Ue. the street; la Vue, the sight ; la J oie, joy ; la Joue, the cheek; la Pluie, inin, 6cc,
Except le Foie, the liver ; un Incendie, a conflagration ; le G^nie, genius^ le JVIessie,
t^e messiah; un Parapluie, an umbi-ella; un Troph^e, a trophy'; unPygmee, a pigmy ;
le Caduc^e, caduceu's ; THym^n^e, hymen ; un Mausolle, a mausoleum; and nouns e^uUng >
. in CUE and que, which are subject to a particular rule. See GUE, QIJE.
PARTICULAR RULES.
BE. There are Thirty-four nouns ending in be. Eleven of which
are masculine ; the most commonly used are,
un Adverbe, an adverb ; un Proverbe, a proverb;
un Cube, a cube ; un Tube, a tube ;
un Globe, a globe ; un T^orbe, a theorb ;
un Orbe, an orb ; un Verbe, a verb j
* The discrimination betvoeen the genders of nouns is a difficulty which the learner finds
hard to overcome. In order to attain it, he must cotisider the greatest number of words of each
termination which are either masculine or feminine, as a general rule, and retain as many
words of the exception as he can* Besides this, w?ien he reads a french author, he must pay
particular attention to the article which precedes each noun, and consider it as its necessary
appendage. By these means the difficulty will insensibly lessen, and his mistakes will be bus
few. Not to overload his memory with a multiplicity of words, I hare omitted in the list ^J
nouns given as €uet)t*ons, th(»e which are either obsolete or little used.
. Twenty 'three other nouns end«
ing in be vue feminine.
184 NOUN.
Nouns ending in « or j? in the singular, are the same in the plural; as.
971071 JiU^ my son ; mes fits, my sons ; une hrthU^ a sheep ; des brebis,
sheep ; une voix^ a voice ; des votjp, voices ; une Tioix, a nut ; des noix, nuts.
Nouns
CE
MASCULINE Terminatimu,
There are Three hundred nouns ending in CE, Thirty-four
of which are m€UicuUne ; the most commonly used are,
un Appendice, an appendix ; un Indice, an indication }
un Armistice, an armistice ; le N^goce, traffic ;
FCMININE TerminatUmt,
uu Artifice, an artifice ;
un Auspice, an auspice;
_ un lien^fice* a benefit ;
un Calice, a chalice ;
- le fJaprice, caprice ;
un Cilice, a hair -cloth ;
' le Commerce, commerce ;
le D61ice, delight ;
" un Edifice, an edifice ;
' un Exercice, an exercise ;
un Office, an office ;
un Orifice, an orifice ;
le Pouce, the thumb ;
un Precipice, a precipice ;
le Prejudice, injury ;
un Sacrifice, a sacrifice ;
un Service, a service ;
le Silence, silence ;
\e Solstice, the solstice ;
le Supplice, punishment ,
le Frontispice, /rontispi«c« ; - le Vice, vice.
Two hutidred and sixti^"
six other nouns ending ic
CE are feminine.
DE.
There are Two hundred nouns ending in DE, Twenty-seven
of which are masculine ; the i<iost commonly used are,
. un Camarade, a companion; Ae Monde, the world;
un Code, a cmie; un P6riode,
le Coude, the elbow ; un Remede,
un Fluide, a fluid ; un Sph^roide,
. un Grade, a degree ; im Subside, a subsidy ;
un Guide, a guide ; le Suicide, suicide ;
un Mode, a mode ; le Vide, Vacuum.
, the world; ^
if a period of time ; I
e, a remedy ; I (
ide, a spheroid ; >thr
One hundred and seventy*
ree other nouns ending id
DE are feminine.
FE. There are Twenty nouns ending in fe, PHE, Eight of which
PH£. are masculine; tliey are,
un Golfe, a gulph ; un Parafe, a paraph ; "j
un Greffe, a court register ; un Paragraphe, a paragraph ; \ Tufeloe othernouns ending
un Hieroglyphe, a hieroglyph; un Triomphe, a triumph ; | in FE, PHE, are feminine,
un Logogriphe, a riddle; un T^l^graphe, a telegraph ; J
GE. . There are Eighty nouns ending in ge, Thirty-tm» of which
are masculiv ; uie most commonly used are.
un ange, an fngel ;
Mn archange, an archangel ;
le Change, the 'change ;
un Cierge, a taper ;
un College, a college ;
un Cortege, a retinue ;
le DHuge, the deluge ;
im Echange, an exchahge ;
un Eloge, an encomium ;
du Li^ge, cork ;
du Linge, lin£n ; •
le Manage, riding school ;
un Melange, a mixture;
un Mensonge, a lie ;
un Prestige, a prestige ;
un Privilege, a privilege ;
un Prodige, a prodigy ;
un Rechange, a change ;
un Refuge, a refuse ;
un SacriUge, a sacrilege;
un Si^ge, a seatt a siege ;
un Singe, an ape ;
un Songe, a dream ;
un Subterfuge, a subterfuge ;
un Vertigo, a giddiness ;
un Vestige, a track.
1 Forty'eight other nouns
Wding in OE are feminine.
AGE. AH nouns ending in age are masculine; as,
un Avantage, an advantage ; • le Mariage, marriage ;
UB Badinage, a joke ;
un Bocage, a giove ;
le Courage, courage;
du Fromage, some cheese ;
le Jardinage, gardening ;
On Hermitage, an hermitage ;
le M6nvi%e^ housekeeping ;
un Orage, a storm ;
un Ourrage, a work ;
le Rivage, tlie snore ;
le Veurage, widowhood ;
le Visage, the face, Sfc,
I Except une Caj;e , a cage ;
I une Image, an image; la
^Nage, swimming ; mie Page ,
a page ; la Plage, a poetical
word for sea; la Rage, rage.
NOUN.
185
Nouns ending in u take j: instead of « for the sign of the plural number ;
as, chapeaUy hat ; chapeaux^ hats ; chou, cabbage ; choux, cabbages ; lieu^
place ; lieux, places ; fiu, fire ; feux^ fires ; jeiiy game ; jeux, games, Sfc,
Except
MASCULINE Terminations,
GUE. ITiere are Thirty -five nouns ending in gue, Twelve of
which are masculine ; the most commonly used are,
' un Catalogue, a catalogue ; un Dogue, a buU'dog ;
le Di^calogue, the decalogue ; un Orgue, an organ;
un DAlogue, a dialogue ; . le Prologue, the prologue ;
FEMININE Terminations,
\
Twenty 'three othe.r
J nouns ending in gue are
feminine.
CHE. There are One hundred nouns ending in CHE, Twelve of
which are masculine ; the most commonly used are,
un Acrostiche, an acrostic; un Panac'he, a -plume ;
le Coche, the stage coach; du Ponche, punch;
un Diinancbe, a sunday ; un Pr^che,a dissenting sermon
un fl^tjoistiche, an hemistich ; un Reproche, a reproach;
un Manche, a handle ; un Tournebroche, a jack ; . . . . une MancLe^ a sleeve.
; I nouns end
J feminine.
ightyeight other
(Ting in che are
L£. ITiere are Four hundred nouns
dred of which are masculine ; the
un Aigle, an eagle ; un
un Angle, an angle ; un
un Article, an article; un
un Asile, an asylum; le
un Buffle, a buffalo; un
un Cftble, a cable; un
le Capitole, the capital ; le
le Centuple, the centuple; un
un Cercle, a circle; le
du Cheyre*feuille, wMdbine; un
le Chyle, the chyle; le
le Combte, the top ; un
un Concile, a council; le
le Contrdle, the control ; le
un Couvercle, a lid; un
le Cr^puscule, thetvoilight ; un
un Crible, a sieve ; le
un Crocodile, a crocodile; un
le J^iMe, the devil; le
un Disciple, a disciple ; le
un Domicile, a domicil ; du
le Double, the double ; un
un Drdle, a fellow ; le
1' Evangile, the gospel ; le
un Exemple, an example ; un
du Girofle, clovC'Spice ; le
le H&le, the burning sun ; le
un Intervalle, an interval, un
un Libelle, a libel ; le
un Maroufle, a scoundrel ; le
un Merle, a blackbird ; le
le Meuhle, the furniture ; le
un Mille, a mile ; un
un Miracle, a miracle; un
un Modele, a model ; un
un Monopole, a monopoly , un
un Moule, a mould ; uu
le MuAe, the muzzle f le
un Muscle^ a muscle ;
ending in le, One fcu»-
most commonly used are,
Obstacle, an obstacle;
Ongle, a nail ;
Oracle, aw oracle ;
Parallele, the parallel ;
P^cule, spare money ;
Pendule, a pendulum ; ,,,,
Peuple, the people ;
Poele, a stove ;
PoLe, the pole;
Portefeuille, a portfolio ;
Pr^ambule, the preamble ;
Quadrangle, a quadrangle :
Quadrille, quadril ;
Quadruple, quadruple;
Receptacle, a receptacle ;
Role, a roll, the part of an
Sable, the sand ; factor ;
Saule, a toillow ;
Scandole, scandal;
Scrupule, the scruple ;
Seigle, rye ;
Siecle, an age ;
Symbole, the symbol ;
Souffle, the breath ;
Spectacle, a spectacle ;
Style, the style ;
Tabernacle, the tabernacle ;
Temple, a temple ;
Trefle, trefoil ;
Tremble, the asp tree ;
Triple, the treble ;
Trouble, disturbance ;
Vaudeville, a ballad ;
Vestibule, a Vestibule ;
Vignoble, a vineyard ;
Violoncelle, a violoncello ;
Voile, a veil ;
Zele, ilie zdil.
une Pendule, a cloclc,
une Poele, a fryingpan.
Three hundred other
in LB are
/nouns ending
'feminine.
URO Voile, CI sati.
186
NOUN.
Except clou^ nail ;ecrou, screw; verraUy bolt ; foUy mad ; ^hu, sharj^er ;
trou^ hole ; sou, penny ; matou^ torn cat; and individuj individual ; which
require s for their plural, elouSy naUs; ecrous, screws ;verrouSf bolts;
fotiSf mad people ; JtUms^ Sfc,
Nouns
MASCULINE Temunaiions,
FEMININE Termtnatunu.
M£. 'lliere are One hundred and teveniy-two nouns ending in me, Forty^three of which are
feminine ; the most commonly- nsed are,
NE.
PE.
guE.
0}ie hundred and twen
iy^ttine other nouns end-/
ing in ME are moKulijie,
rV Ame, the soul ;
une Arme, an arm ;
la Brume, the fog ;
la Cime, the top j
la Coutume, the custom ;
la Cr^me, cream ;
la Dime, the tithe ;
r Ecume, tA«/oam;
une Enclume, an anvil ;
une Enigme, an enigma ;
la Gourme, the rtranglet ;
un IdiotismOf (tn idiom,
la Lame, the blade ;
une Larme, a tear ;
la Legitime, a child^s portion ,
une Lime, a file;
une IVIazime, a maxim :
la Paume, the pahn, tennis ;
une Plate-forme, a platform ;
une Plume, a pen ;
une Epigramme, an epigram ; une Pnmme, an apple
r Escrime, fenci'ig ;
r Estime, etteem ;
une Ferme, a farm ;
la FlasDme, the flame ;
la Forme, t/i«/ffrm;
la Gamme, the gamut ;
la Gomme, gum ;
la Prime, the prirrte ;
une Rame, an oar, a ream;
la R^forme, the reform ;
la Rime, the rhyme ;
une Somme, a sum ;
la Trame, the thread ;
une Victime, a victim.
There are Two hutidred and forty -six nouns in ne, 7%tr<y
of which are masculine ; the most commonly used are,
de r Antimoin^, atUimMy ; , le JcQne, fasting ;
un Aune, an elder ; - un Organe, an organ ;
V Automne, autumn ; le Patrimoir.e, patrimony ;
le Capricome, the Capricorn ;,Mn Peigne, a comb ;
un Ceme, a magical ring; le Pene, the boU of a lock ;
\
un Chene, an 02k ;
un Cygne, a swan ,
un Cdne, a cone ;
le Crftne, the scull ;
un D{'cagone, a decagon ;
im Domaine, a domain ;
un Faune, a faun ;
du Filigrane, filigree ;
un Frene, an ash tree ;
un Pentagone, a pentagon ;
un i'h^nomene, a phenomenon ;
un Polygone, a polygon ;
un Prdne, a sermon ;
le Regne, the reign ;
un Renne, a rein deer ;
un Signe, a sisn ;
un Trdne, a throne.
Two hund'^ed and six-
teen other nouns ending
/in KE are /eminiiz«
There are Sixty^eight nouns ending in pe. Twelve of
which are masculine ; the most commonly used are,
un Groupe, a group ; un Participe, a varticiple ;
un Horoscope, a horoscope ; un Polype, a polypus ;
du Jaspe, jasper ; un Principe, a principle ;
un Microscope, a microscope; un Telescope, a telescope.
\
Fifty-six other nouns
ending in few^ feminine.
There are One hundred nouns ending in qde, Tfiirty-four
of which are masculine; the most commonly used are,
un A sterisque, an fluterts/c; lo Fanegyrlquey panegyric;
le Pentateuque, the pentateuch;
un Portique, a portico ;
. lo Risque, the risk ;
un Soliloque, a soliloquy ;
un Specifique, a specific ;
le Tropique, the tropic ;
le Viatique, via/ictmt;
le Zodiaque, the zodiac.
un Cantique, a canticle;
un Casque, a cask;
un Caustique, a caustic;
un Cirque, a circus;
un Disque, a disk;
un Em^tique, an emetic;
un Oh^lisque, an obelisk ;
un Manque, a want ;
un Masque, a mas^
Sixty -six otlier nouns
ending in que are/cmi.
nine.
NOUN.
187
Nouns ending in a/, ail, change I or il into ux for the phii al ; as,
nuU, evil ; maux, evils ; chevcU, horse ; chevaux, horses ; canal, canal ;
canaux, canals ; travail^ labour ; travaux, labours.
Except
MASCULINE Termina^lont*
FEMININE TerminatioM,
R&
* /
There are Six hundred and thirty ^two nouns ending in re, Two
hundred and twenty 'three of which are masculine ; the most com-
monly used are,
un Adultere, an adultery ; le Directoire, the directory ;
r Albitre, alabaster; un Douaire, o dowery ;
V Ambre, amber ; un Empire, an empire ;
unAmphith^&tre,a/iamp/ii(A«itre; un Empl&tre, a -plaster ;
un Anniversaire, an anniversary; V Equilibre, the equilibrium;
an Antre, a den ; un Etre, a being ;
on Arbre, a tree ; un Exemplaire, a copy of a book ;
un Arteve, an artet-y ; un Fiacre, a hackney coach ;
un Astre, a star ; un Fifre, a fife ;
V Atmosphere, the atmosphere; un Formulaire, a formulary,;
un Atre, an hearth ;
un Auditoire, an auditory ;
un Augure, an omen ;
du Babeurre, 6uttermi/fc;
du Beurre, butter ;
un Barometre, u barometer ;
le Bien-6tre, happy state;
un Cadavre, a corpse ;
un Cadre, a frame;
le Calibre, the bore ;
du Camphre, camphire ;
un Cancre, a crab ;
un Cand^labre, a chandelier;
le Caractere, the character ;
un C4dre^ a cedar;
le Centre, t^c c«ntre ;
un Chancre, a shanher;
du Chanvre, hemp ;
an Chapitre, a chapter;
du Genievre, juniper ;
le Genre, t^e ge^uier;
du Gingembre, ginger ;
un Gouffre, a 5^uZ//
un Havre, a harbour ;
V Hemisphere, the hemisphere ;
un H^tre, a beech tree ;
un Inventaire, an inventory ,*
un Interrogatoire, an interrogatory
de ri voire, ivory ;
un Laboratoire, a laboratcry ,
du Lierre, ivy ;
un Lievre, a hare ;
un Livre, a book ;
le Lustre, the lustre ;
un Luniinaire, a luminary ;
le Maigre, the lean ;
du Marble, marble ;
le Mar tyre, martyrdom ;
an Chef-d'otuvre, a masterpiece ; un Massacre, a massacre ;
wun ChiflRre, a figure;
du Cidre, cidUr ;
unCylindre, a cy/mdci*;
un Cimeterre, a cimeter ;
un Cimetiere, a dturch yard;
un Cintre, an arch ;
un Clystere, a glister ;
an Coffre, a chest ;
un Membre, a limb ;
un M6moire, a memoiial ; .
du Mercure, mercury ;
un M6t6ore, a meteor ;
un Meurtre, a murder,
le Ministere, the ministry ;
un Mystere, a mystery ;
un IVIonastere, a monastery ;
one LiTre,a pou}ief.
Four hundred
)and nine othoi
nouns ending in re
are feminine.
laMemoire,mem(r'v
un Commentaire, a commentary ; un Monstre, a monster ;
un Concombre, a cucumber ;
un Congre, a conger;
un CoroUaire, a coroUm-y ;
le Contraire, the contrary ;
un Corsaire, a corsair ;
du Cuivre, copper ;
le D^combre, the rubbish ;
le D^lire, delirium ;
un D6positaire, a depositary ;
le Derriere, the back part ;
un D^sastre, a disaster ;
le D^sordre, the disorder ;
le Diametre, the diameter ;
OB Dictionnaire, a dictionary ;
un Munnure, a murmur;
un Missionnaire, a missionary ;
un Navire, a snip ;
le N6cessairo, the necessaries :
un Negre, a neffro ;
un Nombre, a number :
un Observatoire, an dyserratory ;
un Opprobre, a reproach ;
un Orchestre, an orchestre ;
un Ordinaif e, an ordinary ;
un Ordre, an order ;
le Parterre, the pit of a playhouse
un P&tre, a herdsman ;
un Phare, a lighthouse ; J
du Pboaphore,
188
NOUiV.
Except 6a/, ball; detail^ detail ; epouvantaily bugbear; evejtlail, fan ;
gauvernail, rudder; portail, portal ; serail, seraglio; the plural of which
is formed by adding s to the singular ; bab, balls ; details^ details ;
epouvantails
UASCOLINE Terminations,
FEMININE Terminatixnu,
KE. du Pbosphore, phmphonu ; le
du PlILtre, plaster ; du
^ duPoivre, pepper; ^u
un Fore, a pore ; un
lesPr^liminaires, pre2tintnarte<; un
an Presbytere, a parsonage house; un
un Promontoire, a promontory ; un
un Pupitre, a desk ; «^un
le Purgatoire, purgatory ; un
on Refectoire, an eatingroom , un
un Registre, a register ; le
un Repairs, a den ; un
un Reverbere, a reflector ; le
un Sabre, a sabre ; un
le Sacre, the coronation ; un
du Salpdtre, sa/fpetr«; un
on Sanctuaire, a sanctuary ; du
un Sceptre, a sceptre ; un
un Secretaire, a secretary ; un
un S^minaire, a seminary ; le
un Sepulcre, a sepulchre ; un
un S^questre, a sequestration ;
BE.
TE.
Sommaire, the compendium }
Souffre, In-imstone;
Sucre, sugar ;
Tertre, a hillock ;
Territoire, a territory ;
Theatre, a theatre ;
Thermomdtre, a thermmnet^;
Timbre, a clock bell ; * ' j_'-'
Tire-bourre, screw of a ramrod i
Titre, a title ;
Tonnerre, thunder ;
Ulcere, an ulcer ;
Ventre, the belly ;
Vertebre, a vert^a ;
Verre, a glass ;
V^sicatoire, a bli^er ;
Vinaigre, vinegar ;
Vocabulaire, a vocabulary ;
Vomitoire, a vomit ;
Vulgaire, the vulgar ;
Vulndraire, a vulnerary.
There are Tioo hundred vad fifty nouns ending in SE, Fourteen
of which are masculine ; the most commonly used are,
r Aise, ease; un Narcisse, a narcissus ;
un Carro8se,a coach ; le Parnasse, parnassus ;
un Colosse, a colossus ; un Thyrse, a thyrsis ;
un Diocese, a diocess ; un Trapeze, a trapezium;
le Malaise, ujwisiness; un Vase, a vessel.
There are Three hundred
nine of which are masculine
un Acte, an act ;
un Antidote, an antidote ,
un Arbuste, a shrub ;
un Aromate, an aromatic ;
un Automate, an automaton
un Buste, a bu^t ;
un Cassetete, a puzzlebrain
un Ceste, a cestus ;
un Compte, an account ;
unConte, a tale;
un Contraste, a contrast ;
le Culte, the worship ;
un Decompte, a discount ;
le DCmerite, demerit;
le Doute, tfie doubt ;
le Paste, pomp ;
and seventy -five nouns in TE, Thirty^
; the most commonly used are,
un Geste, a gesture ;
un Gite, the seat of a lutre ;
un Inceste, an incest;
un Insecte, an insect;
; un Labyrinthe, a labpritith;
un Manifeste, a manifesto :
; un M^compte, a misreckoning ;
Id M^rite, merit ;
unMyrte, a myrtle;
V Omoplate, the omoplate ;
un Pacte, a pact ;
un Poste, a station ; ..«••«
un Pr^cepte, a precept ;
un Pr^texte, a pretext;
le Reste, the rest ;
un Squelette, a skeleton;
le Texte, the text;
unTirebotte, a bootjack;
le Tumulte, tumult.
N ^> There are Forty-two nouns ending in VE, Four of which are
masculine,
un Conclave, a conclave; - un Glaive, a sword ;
un Fleuve, a rioer ; un Reve, a dream.
Fotir nundred ana
nine other nouns
pending in re are
feminine.
Two hunared
'and thirty -»x other
nouns ending in SB
are feminine.
Three hundred
and thirty -six other
nouns ending in ti
^vre feminine,
la Poste, post office.
\ Thirty-eight oihot
Vnouns endii'g in v s
J are feminine.
NOUN.
189
epoiivantails, bugbears; eventails, fans; gouvernails, rudders; portails,
portals ; serailf, s^sraglios ; and h&tailj cattle, the plural of which is
b€8tiaux.
MASCULINE TermbiatUmi.
FEMININE Tennxnatwiu,
XE.
There are Ten nouns ending in XE; Five of which
are masculine,
unAxe, an oarts,' un Paradoxe, a paradox;] The other Five nouns ending
r Equiuoxe, the equinox; le Sexe, the sex; Hn XE are feminine.
1b Luxe, luxury ; J
Z£. There are Tiro nouns ending in ze, One of which is
masculine, viz. du Bronze, bronze. One /em. viz. de la Gaze, gauze. »
Some nouns /eminine are formed in the same manner as tlio feminine of adjectives, by
adding e mute to the masculine, or by changing the termination ; these are ;
1st. The nouns denoting ftade, profession, businesSf 6^c, as.
un Acteur,
un Berger,
un Boucher,
un Boulanger,
un Com^tlien,
un Cuisinier,
un Epicier,
un Fermier,
un Marchand,
on Ouvrier, &c.
an ax:tor ,
a shepherd ,
a butcher ;
a baker ;
a player ;
a cook;
a grocer ;
a farmer ;
a dealer;
a luorkman ;
une Actrice, an actress.
une Bergere, a shepherdess.
une Bouchere, a female butcher,
une Boulangere, a female better •
une Comedienne^ a female player,
une Cuisiniere, a female cook.
une Epici^re, a female grocer.
une Fermiere, - a female farmer,
une Marchande, a female deale*".
une Ouvriere, a loorkwoman.
2d. The following, as being the most frequently used ;
un Amant,
un Ami,
un Chat,
un Chien,
un Chanteur,
un Citoyen,
' onCompagnon,
un Cousin,
un Danseur,
un Diable,
un Ecolier,
un Epoux,
un H^ritier,
un H^os,
un Hdte,
. unlvrogne,
, un Juif,
' un Lapin.
un L^vrier,
un Lion,
- unLoup,
le IMaitre,
le Alarie,
un Menteur,
un Orphelin,
un Parent,
on Paysan,
on Prisonnier,
un Sultan,
unTigre,
un Tuteur,
un Veuf,
nn Voisin,
a lover ;
a male friend;
a male cat;
a dog;
a male singer ;
a citizen ;
a male companion ;
a male cousin ;
a male dancer ;
a male devil ;
a male scholar ;
a husband ;
an heir ;
a hero ;
a landlord ;
a drunken man ;
ajew;
a buck rabbit ;
a greyhound ;
a lion
a male wolf;
the master ;
the bridegroom ;
a man who lies ;
a male orphan ;
a male relation ;
a countryman ;
a male prisoner ;
a sultan ;
a tiger;
a male guardian ;
a widower ;
a male neighbour ;
une Amante,
une Amie,
une Chatte,
une Chienne,
une Chanteuse,
une Citoyenne,
une Compagne,
une Cousine,
une Danseuse,
une Diablesse, ,
une Ecolicre,
une Epouse,
une lieritiere,
une ll^rome,
une Ildtesse,
une Ivrognesse,
une Juive,
une Lapine,
une Levrette,
une Lionne,
une Louve>
la Maitresse,
la Marine,
une Menteiise,
une Orpheline,
une Parente,
une Paysanne,
she who loves.
a female friend.
a female cat,
a hitch.
a female singer.
a citizeness.
a female companion
a female cousin.
a female dancer*
a female devil.
a female scholar.
a wife.
an heiress.
a heroine.
a landlady.
a drunken womanm
a Jewess.
a doe rabbit.
a greyhound bitch*
a lioness.
a female wolf,
the mistress,
the bride.
a woman who lies.
a female otphan,
a female relation-.
a country ivoman.
une Prisonniere, a female prisoner,
une Sultane, a sultana.
une Tigresse, a tigress,
une Tutnce, a fenude guardian.
une Veuve, o widow.
une Voisina^ a femttle netg^^httw
190
CHAP ir.
ARTICLE.
An article is a sign prefixed to a noun, to shew the sejise in which
that noun is used.
These signs are various, and generally derive their appellation from the
office which they perform in the sentence. They are called in this treatise
DEFINITE, PARTITIFEt NUMERAL, DEMONSTRATIVE^ P08SESSIFE,*
CHAP. III.
ARTICLE and NOUN
I
3
GENERAL RULES.
The ARTICLE must be of the same gender and number as the noun
which follows it ; this is called agreement of the article with the noun ; ex.
SINGULAR.
Masculine.
The X LE Vin,
ofThe
to The
hi
DU
AU
Some 5 DU
A
This
That ?
UN
CE
Vin.
Vin.
Vin,
Verre,
Verre,
the
Myt ^ MON Vin,
Thy 5 TON Vin,
His ^ SON Vin,
Her SON Vin,
Oiirf ^ NOTRE Vin,
Yowr 5 voTRE Fin.
Their^ LEVR Vin,
Feminine.
S LA Gloire,
of the Jo dehk Gloire,
to the ' a LA Gloire,
g
someifi dehji Gloire,
a
this
UNE Tasse,
that y <='="=raMe.
MA Gloire,
TA Glofre,
SA Gloire,
SA Gloire,
© NOTRE GZotre.
your^ voTRE Gloire,
their T^LEVR Gloire,
my
thy
his
her
our
PLURAL.
Masculine and Feminine.
the •« LEs Plaisirs,
of the ti DES Plaisirs,
to the g Aux Plaisirs.
some^ DES Plaisirs,
these)
those}
CES Plaisirs,
MEs Plaisirs,
TES Plaisirs,
SES Plaisirs.
SEs Plaisirs.
Nos Plaisirs,
your' vos Plaisirs,
their LEVRsPlaisirs
my
thy
his
her
our
»0
If the noun which follows the article is singular, and begins with a
VOWEL or H m?/ie|, whether it is masculine or feminine, melody requires
L
deh*
d l'
GET
aiON
TON
SON
LE,
la;
Co
I DU, rfcLA;
^ AU. d
AU,
ce;
ma;
ta;
sa;
as. The
of The
LA ; to The
This or Thai
My
Thy
His or Her
SB
L' Honneur, m.
§ de L* Honneur,
a h* Honneur.
GET Honneur,
MON Honneur,
TON Honneur,
SON Honneur,
L* Amilie f.
rfc L* Amitie.
a l' Amitie,
CETTE Amitie,
MON Amiiik.
TON Amitie
SON Amitie,
The ARTICLE must be repealed before every noun in french, agreeably
to the gender and number of each noun, though the nouns are in the same
sentence, and though the article is not repeated in english ; as.
The brother, sister and cousins. LEfrere, la sceur et les cousins.
Some wine, glory and pleasures, du vin, de la gloire et des plaisirs,
* See pa^e 61, a table of the words called article. t See note * page 31
i. H mute IS marked through these exercises with an apostrophe, this mark ' before it.
ARTICLE a?ld NOUN. 191
PARTICULAR RULES.
PROPER NAMES.
The NAMES of PERSONS and places^ i. e. of cities, towns, villages, Sfc, 4
are used in French as in english, without any of the signs called article ; as,
I have seen Ceesar, J*ai vu Cesar, (aj
Rome. Rome,
The statue oyCeBsar, La statue de Cesar,
at Rome. A Rome.fbJ
But the NAMES of COUNTRIES and PROVINCES which are used without O
an article in english, require, in french, the definite article le, la, les ;
DU, de la, des; au, d la, aux, the same as common names ; ex.
I have seen France, J*ai vu la France,
Italy. l* Italie.
The beauties of France, Les heautks de la France,
0/ Italy. de l' Italie,
It belong^s to France, &c. Je appartient k la France, 8fc, (c)
Yet the names of countries and phovinces are used without the U
article, when they come after verbs denoting dwelling or movement; such
as, to be in, to live in, to go to, to come from.
In these instances, j^, to, are expressed by en, and from by de; as,
I am going to France, Je vais en France,
to Italy. en Italie,
I have been in France J^ai etk en France,
in Italy. en Italie.
I come from France, Je viens de France,
from Italy. d* Italie (d)
(a) Some names of persons, derived from common names, such as, Le Brun, Lt Blanc,
Le NoiVf La Porte , La Grange, La Fontaine, 6^c. are always preceded by an article, bat
that article is considered as a syllable of the name, and never varies.
{b) Except le Caire, Cairo : le Catelet^ la ChapelU, la Charity, la Fert^, la Fleche, le
Havre, la Havanne, Havannah ; la Have, the Hague ; la Hague, lo Mans, la Mecque,
Mecca ; le Plessis, le Puv,leQue9nq^,la llochelle, which require the definite article, for we
say, Je vient du Havre, 1 come from Havre. Je vais a la Rochelle, I am going to Bochelle.
Co) Some names of countrie$, which take their name from their capital city, such as,
Alger f Algiers ; Avipum, Genes. Genoa ; Geneve, Geneva ; Flo'^ence, Maroc, Morocco ;
Naples, Orange, Tunis, Tripoli, Venise ; or from the name of some person; as, St, Domin"
gue, St. Domingo ; St, Vincent, ^c. do not require the article.
Cd) From this rule must be excepted the countries discovered by the navigators, and
some countries in Asia and Africa, which are never used without the article. The most
essential to be known, on account of their bein^ frequented by the Europeans, are
.' Archipel, Archipelago.la F/oriiftf, Floriaa. le Mississipi, Mississipi.
jesBarbades, Barbadoes. la Grenade, Grenada le Mogol, Mogul Emp.
e Bengal, Bengal. la Gua</e/oupe,Guadaloupe. iesMo/u^ues, Moluccalsles.
a Bermude, Bermuda. laGifyontf^ Guiana. la Nigritie, rterre,Nigritia.
e Brisil, Brasil. 1' Inde, India. la Nouvelle 2n^<e-New£ngland.
a Califomie, California. V Indostan, Indostan. le Paragiuw, Paraguay,
e Canada, Canada. ItiJama'iqye, Jamaica. le P6loponesej Peloponesus.
a Caroline, Carolina. leJapon, Japan. la Pensylvanxe, Pennsylvania,
e Chili, Chili. le T^evant, The Levant, le PSrou, Peru.
a Chine, China. luLouisiane, Louisiana. lesPhilippines, ThePhiLIsles.
a Coc/tincA (n«,Cochinchina.la ]Vfartint9ti«,Martinique. la Sonde, Sunda.
e Congo, Congo. leMexique, Mexico. la Virginte, Virginia.
For we say : J* ai it4 au Canada. I have been /7t Canada. Je vais a la Jama'ique, aa
Mexique, au Pirou, ^c. I am going to Jamaica, to Mexico, to Peru, &c. Je vieus du
laptm, de la Chine, dea Ind^, ^c. 1 come /rom Japan, China, the Indies, &c.
7
8
192 • ARTICLE and noun.
COMMON NAMES.
DEFINITE ARTICLE.
THE, LE, LA, LES ; DU, de LA, DES j AU, a LA, AUX.
Every common name used in a general sense, i. e. implying' thi
whole* of the* substance spoken of, or in a particular sense, i. e. im-
plying some particular sort* of the substance, requires before it one of
the definite signs le, la, les ; d;;, de la, des ; AU, a la, aux, agreeably
to the gender and number of the noun ; ex.
GENERAL scuse, 710 article in english before the noun.
T like wine, tPaime le vin,
glory, LA gloire^
money, l* argent,
pleasures. les plaisirs
The love q/'wine, o/* glory. U amour du t?m, de la gloire, Sfc,
He owes it to wine, to glory. II le doit au vin, h lk gloire, 5rc.
PARTICULAR scuse, in english the before the noun.
This is the wine ] Void le vin,
the s\ovy It im Lk gloire, ,
JL i. >I like. , ^ . )quejaime,
the money j l argent, ( ^ ''
These are the pleasures) les plaisirs]
A glass of the wine I like. Un verre du vin quefaime,
OF expressed by DE ; not by du, de la, des.
In the above examples you see of expressed by du, de la, des, but
observe that this preposition coming aftera noun used in a partitive sense,*
can not be expressed by du, de la, des, which would then particularize* the
substance spoken of, and mean of the; it must be expressed by de only,
without any regard to the gender or number of the noun ; so we say.
We have a pipe q/'wine. Nous avons une pipe de vin,
plenty q/* money, quantite d argent,
a variety q/* pleasures. une variete de plaisirs.
Not, une pipe du vin, quantite de iJargent, Sfc, which would mean a
pipe of the wine, quantity of the money, &c.t
N. B. In this rule must be included the following words which, though
• When you speak of a substance, you either mean it Whole, or in Parts,
If you mean the Whole of the substance of which you are speaking, the noun tliut
names it, is said to be used in a General sense ; as, Wine cheers the heart oftnan, i. e. that
substance in general known by the name of Wine, cheers the heart of man.
If you mean some PaHicttlar sort of tlie substance of which you nve speaking, the
noun is said to be used in a Particular sense ; as, 2^he wine which tre drank was good ; in
speaking thus, I do not mean to say, that all the substance called wine is good, for
there is bad wine, but that particular sort which we drank was good.
If you neither mean the whole, nor any particular sort of the substance spoken of, but
a certain Portioiif or Quantity of it ; as when you say, Give me some wine, A glass of wine;
i. e, a portion of the substance called wine, the noun is said to be used in a Partitive sense,
t It appears from the foregoing examples that, when two nouns come together in
french, they must be connected by some sign, and tliis sign is determined by the sense
in which the nouns ai'e used.
If, as in the first instance (rule 7.), the nouns are used in an unlimited signification,
they must be connected by the sign which denotes that idea, viz. du, de la, des.
But if, OS in the second instance (rule 8), the extent of the secotid noun is deteminsd
f the fit St, then a simple preposition is sufficient to connect them.
ARTICLE a7ld NOUN, 193
they have no si^n after them in english, require in French the connective
particle de to unite them to the noun which follows them;
A6SEZ, enoifgk ; as, Assez DV^vin.
BEAUCOUP, much, many ; (e) neaucovp d' argent
coMBiEN, how mitchf how many ; combien de gloire,
TANT, 80 much, 80 many ; rant de plainrs,
AUTANT, as much, as many ; Autant de vin.
PLUS, more; plus d' argent,
MOiNS, less ; moins de gloire,
TROP, too much, too many ; rrop Dj^plaisirs,
peu, \,'m,j /» peu DKvin.
s HI tile, few ; s > „ #
au£RE,5 ••' ' Guere d argent.
PAS, \ . pas, orl , .
„ yio,7iot: .* > DE gloire.
POINT, ) ' ' point J °
JAMAIS, never; jamais DEplaisirs,
PAnriTlVE ARTICLE,
SOME, ANr; DU, de LA, DES.
Every common name used in a partitive sense* i. e. implying only Jj
9l portion of the substance spoken of, requires one of the partitive signs
DU, de LA, DES, agreeably to the gender and number of the noun ; as,
Wc have some wine. Nous avons du vin,
some glory, de la gloire,
some money, . de l* argent,
some pleasures. des plaisirs.
N, B. The sign some is often understood in english before collective
substantives^ such as, men, bread, meat, money, clothes, wine, fruit,
pleasure, Sfc, but the corresponding sign can not be omitted in french, and
it must be repeated bjefore every noun ; as,
We have wine, glory, money, pleasures; i. e. some wine, some Sfc.
Nous avons du vin, de la gloire, de h*argeht, des plaisirs.
Exception, SOME, ANY expressed by DE ; not by du, de la, des. _ ^
The partitive signs du, de la, des, require the noun immediately after 1 [}
them, therefore, if a noun used in a partitive sense is preceded by an
adjective, use de before that adjective without any regard to gender or
number, instead of du, de la, des before the noun ; as,
We have excellent wine, Nous avons d* excellent vin,
fresh glory, de nouvelle gloire,
very good money, de tres-bon argent,
true pleasures. de vrais plaisirs.
But if, agreeably to the general rule, the adjective comes after the noun^
then the noun resumes its proper sign, viz. du, de la, des ; as.
Nous avons du vin excellent. We have excellent wine,
de LA gloire bien acquise, well acquired glory,
de l' argent comptant, ready money,
DES plaisirs champ^tres. rural pleasut-es.
{e) Much, Many, are expressed by Beaucoup or by Bien, iivith this difference cnly,
that Beaucoup requires de after it, and Bien requires Dl), de LA, des ; so we say,
Beaucoup de vin, de gloire^ d' <iirgent, de plaisirs,
r, Bien du rin, de la gloire, de V argent, des plaisirs.
Or, Bien du vin, de la gloire, de V argent, des plaisirs, • See note • page 192,
12
194 ARTICLE and noon.
NUMERAL AttTICLE,
A, AN; UN, UNE.
1, 1 Ay Air denoting individuality, i. e. one only of the substance spoken
off is expressed in french by the number UN, vne^ and no distinction is
made between a and one ; as,
A or one bottle. une hoiiteille.
A or one pound. une livre.
A or one dozen. une douzaine,
A or one hundred. un cent (f)
But A, AN before the names of Measure, weight, Number and periods
of time, used in a collective sense, i, e, not denoting^ individuality, is not
expressed by un, une, it is expressed by le, la ; as.
Wine sells at six shilling's a bottle ; Le vin se vend six shelingsjA.boU'
i. e. six shilling's per bottle, teille ; not, une bouieille.
Butter twenty pence a pound ; Le beurre vingi sous la livre ;
i. e. per pound, not, une livre.
Eggs a shilling a dozen ; Les ceufs un sheling la douzaine ;
]. e. one shilling per dozen. not, ' une douzaine.
Oranges a guinea a hundred ; Les Oranges une guinhe le cent;
i. e. one guinea per hundred, not, une gninee un ce?it
I go to town once a day ; Je vais a la ville unefois hnjovr,
i. e. each day, or daily. or vkKJour ; not, nn jour.
Three times a week, or weekly. Troisfois la semaine, or par sent.
By these words a bottle, a pound, a dozen, a hundred, I do not mean
thato7ie single or individual bottle, pound, dozen or hundred sells at that
price ; but each bottle, pound, dozen, or hundred ; nor that I go to town
one single day or week ; but each day, each week.
DEMONSTBATJVE ARTICLE.
THIS, THAT, THESE, THOSE; CE, GET, CETTE, CES.
1 o "^he demonstrative words, ce^ get, cette, ces are used in the same
instances as the corresponding signs are in english ; they serve to point
out the objects we name, and follow the same rule as le, la, les ; ex.
I like this or that wine, J'aime ce * vin,
this or that beer, cette biere,
this or that money, get argent,
these or those fruits. ges fruits.
N. B. GE, GET, gette, ces do not express that local distinction which
is implied in the words this, these; that, those; so, if you wish
to make the same distinction in french, you must add to the noun, gi
to denote the nearest object, and la to denote the remotest; as,
I prefer this wine to that, Je prefere gb vin - ci o cdui-hk.
this beer to that.* gette biere-ci a ceUe -lA.
I prefer thai wine to this, Je prefere gb vin - lA d celui -Ci.
that beer to this,* gette biire-'hX a celle - ci.
this money to that, get argeht'Ci a cdni ^lA.
those fruits to these. ges fruits»hk a ceuz - Ci.
(f) Any number prefixed to a noun may be considered as an article, since, like the
article, it serves to determine the acceptation of that nou") ; as. Deux horomes, two men ;
Trots femmes, three women ; Quatre livres, four books ; Six bouteilles, tix bottles, &o
* THIS, THAT, THESEj THOSE are also pronouns ; see note (p) page 89.
15
>coupe LE doigt*
ARTICLE and NOUN. 195
POBSESSiyE ARTICLK,
MY, THY, HIS, HER, ITS, OUR, YOUR, THEJR.
MON, MA, MES; TON, TA, TES ; SON, SA, SES ; NOTRE, &c.
These words follow the same rule as the article le, la, les ; they 1 ^
agree in gender and number with the noun which j^^/o2i?s them; so,
Her father, is, son pere. His or her son, son fils.
His mother, SA mere. His or her daughter, sa JiHe,
The possessive article my, thy^ his, her, ouRt your, their is
expressed by the definite le, la, les, when prefixed to the name of any
pari of the body, after a irerb denoting a natural action of the body ; as,
I open my "j J* ouvre ]
Thou openest thy >mouth. Tu ouvres >Lk bouche;
He opens Aw J II ouvre j not, ma bouche,*
Or when the verb denotes an action done upon the body ; as,
I have cut my ] Je me suis
Thou hast cut thy mnger. Tu t* es
He has cut his j II s' estf
Never say ; J*ai coup4 HON doigt j Tn as coup£ ton doigt ; II a coupi SON doigt, 8^c.
N, B, Observe that in speaking of an action done upon the body, the
person on whom the action is done must be denoted by a personal pro-
noun ; so, if the verb is not reflective, i. e. if the agent does not act upon
itself, as it does above, one of the pronouns me, nous, te, vous, lui,
LEUR, agreeably to number and person, must be added to the verb ; as,
(my ] II u' \
He has cut-| thy >finger. II t' ?a covpd le doigt,
[his or her j H lui J
our 1 II NOUS 1
your >fingers. U vous \a coupe les doigta,
[their j II leur j
Never say ; Ha aoup^ MON doigt ; II a eoup£ ton doigt ; Ha coupS spN doigt, S^c,
If, in instances similar to the above, i, e, before the names of the parts
of the body, the possessive words my, thy, bis, her, our, your,
THEIR come with the verbs, To have a pain. Avoir mal ; To hurt, se
Faire mal; To be cold. Avoir froid; To be warm, Avoir chaud; they
are expressed by au, d la, aux ; as.
He has cut^
16
I have a pain in my 1 T ai \
Thou hast a pain in thymng^x, Tu as \mal au doigt,
He has a pain in his J II a j not, d mon d
MON doigt
»
I have hurt my \ Je me suis
Thou hast hurt thy [hand. Tu t' es \fait mM k la main ;
\
He has hurt his J II s' est\ j not, d ma main.
My feet are ) J* ai
\
Thy feet are Vcold. Tu a^t > froid AVX pieds ;
His or her feet areX j // or elle a J not, d mbs pieds.
* When I say, J'oUvre la bouche, I open the mouth ; the hearer understands that it is
of my own mouth that I am speaking, for if it was the mouth of another being, I &)iould
name that being. Again, Je me auit eoup6 le doigt, corresponds with tlie engUsh, I have
cut myself in the finger ; and Tai mal AU doigt, with, I have a nain in the finger. Here
also the possession being sufiiciently determined by the pronoun ME, or by the verb
J'ai, any oUier possessive expression would be superfluous ; however, these are jdiom»
which practice alone can render familiar. f See 237 rule, t See 239 rule*
n2
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
196 ARTICLE (aid NOUN.
Its and their neuter, are also expressed by le, la, les, and the
pronoun en is added to the verb, when the noun to which they are pre-
fixed is not «roverned by the same verb as the noun to which they refer; as,
Tliat tree is fine, but its fruit is good for nothing-.
Cet arbre est beau^ mats le fruit h'en vaut rien; i. e. the fruit of it.
But they are expressed by son, sa, ses, leur, if the nouns are governed
by the same verb ; as,
I like that tree, its shape and its leaves.
JTaime cet arbre^ sk forme et SEsfeuilles,
The possessive mon, ma, bies must be prefixed to names of kindred and
friendship, when we call or answer any one by those names ; as.
Come here, brother. •- Fenez ici, uosfrere.
I can not, sister. Je ne saurais, ma soeiir.
The article is lefi out in french, when expressed in engh'sh, at the title
page, or before any of the parts of a book ; as,
A french grammar. Grammaire frangaise.
The preface. The first part. Preface, Premiere partie.
The article a, an which comes after wuat^ is omitted in french; as.
What a man ! Quel hommel not qiuI vs hommef
What a woman I Quelle femme ! - Quelle une femmel
The article a, as coming before hundred or thousand, followed
by a noun, or relating to a noun, is not expressed in french, the words
CENT and mille having the property of an article*; as,
I have won a thousand guineas; Tai gagne mille guinees;
Will you have a hundred of them ? En voulez-vous cent? not, un cejii.
No article is used in french, before a noun added to illustrate or
explain another noun ; and the article which is prefixed to such nouns
in eiiglish, must be omitted in french; as,
Zaira a tragedy of Voltaire. Zatre^ tragedie de Voltaire.
Paris the capital of France. Paris^capiicUe de la France,
Never, Zaire une tragedie; nor Paris la capitate S^'c.
But if we left out the first noun, we should say ; J'at vu une tragedie
de Voltaire, J^ai vu la capitate de la France.
The article a, an is also omitted in french after some neuter verbs, sucli
as £tre, to be ; Devenir, to become ; se Faire, to turn ; Passer pour, to
be reckoned, to pass for ; the noun which follows these verbs being con-
sidered as an adjective which serves to illustrate their nominative; as.
Is he a Frenchman ? Est-il Frangais ?
He passes for a German. II passe pour AUemand,
His father is a merchant. Sonpereestnegociant;iioi,xisnegoc,
But the article must be expressed, if the noun is attended by an adjective
or by a relative pronoun, for it then returns into the class of substantives ;
His father is a wealthy merchant. Son pere est UN riche negociant.
No article is used in french before a noun which, being joined to a
verb, forms only one idea with that verb ; as^ Avoir peu'r, to fear, to be
afraid ; Avoir mxd, to ache, to have a pain ; Avoir raison, to be right,
to be in the right, &c. ; these expressions are found in the dictionaries.
• See note (f) page t?4.
ARTICLE and NOUN. 197
Hon to place two nouns together.
Sometimes two nouns come together, having a dependence on each jSiO
other, and forming a kind of complex idea ; as,
JohijUi horse. The princes sword. The lady*8 gown, A silk gown.
The English have ttfo ways of using these nouns ; they say,
1 . The horse of John, The sword of the prince. The gown of the lady. A gown ofsiUL
2. JohTLS horse. The prince's sword. The ladjfs gown. A silk gown.
The French, on the contrary, have only ojvjr of these modes of placing
Tno NOUNS together ; they, as in the \st instance, always pla^e first the
noun which is the subject of discourse, with du, de la, des, de, or X
BEFORE the second noun, agreeably to the sense in which it is used; as,
John*s horse. Le cheval de Jean ; i, e. the horse of John, 4. rv/.
The j3n/zcc'« sword. L'epee du prince; the sword of the prince.*
The Ictdi/s gown. La robe de la dame ; the gown of the lady.^
A silk gown, Une robe de sole; a gown q/'silk. 8 rule.
Sometimes however the order of the nouns could not be changed in the ^O
above manner in english, without changing also the meaning; for ex. these
expressions, a wine glass, a Tea spoon, could not be turned into a gIom of
wine, a spoon of tea; yet the nouns require this order in french : instead
of changing the order of the wordj to alter the idea, as the English do, the
French change the preposition, and instead of de, they use a ; so,
A glasR of wine, is, Un verre de vin ; and
A wine glass, is, Un verre k vin; i. e. a glass used for wine.*
N, B, When the nouns are compounded of the words Fair, foire ;
Market, maroh^, and in speaking of Messes, and the ingredients which they
are made of, the two nouns are connected by au, d la, aux; as.
The hay market. Le marche k\3 foin ; i. e. the market ybr hay.
Some cream tarts* Des tartes a la creme ; tarts made with cream.
Sometimes the name of a country is changed in english into an Jtf
adjective, and pre^xed to the name of its production ; as Spanish wine,
French brandy, English beer, Dutch cheese, &c. ; that adjective must be
expressed by the substantive in french, and placed after the name of
the production, connected by the preposition de ; as,
Spanish wine. Vin D*Espagne; i, e, wine q/* Spain.
Frc7ic^ brandy. Eau-de-vie d^ France ; f. c. brandy o^* France.
Before the name of a country, after a noun denoting dignity or aw- JtO
Ihority, such as emjjeror, king, prince, Sfc, of is expressed by de ; as.
The emperor o/* Russia. Vempereur de Russie,
The parliament oy* England, Leparlemeni D*Ahgleterre,
After any other noun, of is expressed by du, de la, des ; as,
The south o/ France. Le iud de la France,
The north ojf England. . Le nord de h*Angleterre.
* This rule is not without some exceptions, for we say, Un pot de chambre, a chamber
pot ; UnefiUt de chambre, a ciiamber maid ; Un bonnet de nuit, a night cap ; tin mouchoir
de poche, a pocket handkerchief ; Un cheval de carrossey a coach horse ; Un cochon deiait,
a sucking pig, &c. these few exceptions wiJl be learnt by reading, and in conversation.
N, B, Many of these compound names are expressed by a $ingle word in french ; as.
Coachman, Cocher ; Footman^ Laquais ; Countinghouse, Comvtoir ; Coachhouse, Remise,
I'hese expressions are found in the dictionaries, and will be learnt by reading.
29
30
31
196 CHAP. IV.
ADJECTIVE.
An adj£ctive i& a word added to a noun, to denote some quality oi
circumstance belonging to that noun ; as, good wine, jf/i^ flowers.
The ADJECTIVE must be of the same gender and number as the
noun to which it is added; as,
That is a handsome man. Voild un bel homme.
That is a handsome woman. Voild vne bellb femme,CgJ
N, B. \ past participl*iy used to qualify a substantive, follows the
same rules an an adjective; ex.
He is very well made, II est tres-bien fait.
She is very well made, Elle est tres^bien faitc.
When an adjective qualifies severa/ nouns^iz/^u^ar of the same gender,
that adjective mustbeofthe«a77ze gender as those nouns, andp£(/^A^L;as,
My fatherand brother are g^onc out Mon pere et mx>nfrere sont sortie.
My mother and sister are gone out. Ma mere et ma sceur sont soRTie*.
But if the nouns are of different genders, the adjective- must be of
the MASCULINE gender, and in the plural number; as,
My father and mother are gone out. Mon pere et ma mere sont sortis.
He found his son and daughter dead, II irouva sonjils et saJiUe morts. (h)
Cg) The feminine gender of an adjective , or of 2l participle used adjectively, is fonned
by aadins e mute, that is to say, « not accented^ to the masculine ; as,
loved } pretty j lost ; great ; fine ; last ; precise ; little ; learned.
Masc. aim^f joli, perdu, grand, fin, dernier, precis, petit, savant.
Fern. aim(Se, jolie, perdue, grande. fine, derniere, p^tcHB, petite, tavante,
EXCEPTIONS.
£. Adjectives ending in e mute, are the same for both genders ; as, Un honnSte homme ,
an honest man. Une honnice femme ; an honest woman. Vnjeune liomme aimahle ; «u»
amiable young man. IJnejeune femme aimable; an amiable young woman.
I. The feminine of fc^ni, blessed, is b^ite ; tliat oifavori, favourite, ia favorite.
U. The feminine of beau, fine ; nouveau, new ; mou, soft ; fou, mad ; is belle, nouvellei molle^
folle, from bel, nouvel, mol, fol used before a noun masculine beginning with a vowel.
C. The feminine of blar^., white : franc, frank ; sec, dry ; eaduc, decayed ; public, v^ublic ;
grec, greek ; turc, turkish ; is blanche, franche, seche, caduque, publique,grecque, ttirque,
D.The feminine of nud, naked; c)*ud,raw; is nue, crue; and thatof rfrd, green, is verte,
F, Adjectives ending in/, change / into ve for the feminine ; as,
Masc. frrcr/, hrief ; neuf, new ; na'//, candid ; act if, active ; pZainti/*, sorrowful.
Fem. breve, brief; neuve^new ; jia'ive, candid ; active, active ; plaintive, sorrowful.
G. The feminine of long, long, the only adjective ending in g, is longue,
L, N, 1 Adjectives ending in el, eil, ul, un, ien, on, as, ais, es, et, os, ot, double the filial
S, T, J consonant, and take e mute for the feminine gender ; as,
cruel; rosy ; null ; ancient ; good ; big ; fat ; thick ; clean ; foolish.
Masc. cruel, vermeil, nul, ancien, Hon, gros, gras, ^pais, net, sot,
Fem. cruelle, vermeille, nulU, ancienne, bonne, grosse, grasse, ipaisse, nelte, sotte.
Except the adjectives of nations ; as, /ranpai<, french ; ang/ais, english ; &ic.mauvais,
Dad ; niaisj silly ; ras, shorn ; complet, complete ; discret, discreet ; inquiet, uneasy ;
replet, replete ^ secret, secret ; which follow the general rule, fran^aise, an^laise, mau-
vaise ; ^c. frais, fresh ; tiers, third ; which make fraiche, tierce ; and binm, benign ;
maim, mischievous ; which make bihigne, malignc, in tlie feminine.
X. Adjectives ending in x, change x into«e tor the feminine ; as,
Masc. heurevjCf happy ; paresseux, lazy ; jaioux, jealous ; faux, false ;
Fem. heureuse, happy, paressf.use, lazy, jalouse, jealous, fausse, false.
Except doux, sweet, soft ; which makes dancer wad vuvx, old, which makbs vieille.
N, B, The plural of adjectives is fonned like tbf.t of nouns, by adding t to the singular.
^ (h) When the adjective is not separated from fiie nouns by a verb, some authors make
it agree with the last noun , thus, // trouva sonjiher 9a fiUe MORTf ; but they except the
ADJECTIVE. 199
AHjectives in engUsh are generally placed fi£FOJi£ the noun, in French oJi
ibey are generally placed after it; aS,
A black coat. Un habit noir,
A well made man. Un homme bien fait.
'MXi^ french language. La langue francaisis.
Except these adjectives, which are generally placed before the noun ; OfJ
PREMIER, \st; SECOND, 2nd; and other adjectives of 7zt/m&er.
BEAU, BEL, mAjlJie, MECHANT, Wicfccd,
BELLE, yem. jhandsomfi. meilleur, better.
M^ME, same,
moindre, less.
petit, little, smalL
PLUSiEURS, several.
TOUT, all, whole.
viEux, m. viEiLLE, f. old ; a?,
(Test une belle femme.
EUe a un bon mari.
But if any one of the above adjectives comes with another adjective Otc
that can not be placed before the noun, they must both be placed after^
connected by a conjunction; as,
A handsome, amiable woman. Une femme belle et aimable.
A good^ complaisant husband. Un mari bon et complaisant, (i)
adiectives which express union ; as, 11 trouva son fits etsafille re'dnij, R£C0NCILi6s, &c.
These exceptions and exceptions of exceptions are very difficult for learners to retain ;
therefore I would advise them to follow the general rule, which is perfectly agreeable
to the fundamental principles of the french language.
CiJ The rules for tlie placing of adjectiyes are not very strictly adhered to, especially
in poetry. Even in prose many adjectives may be placed either before or after the noun,
according as their position is more agreeable to the ear, of which a learner can be no
judge ; so his surest way is to follow the rules, and to notice in reading, those adjectives
which he finds sometimes before and sometimes after the noun. Yet custom, for want
of other expressions, has fixed a place for some adiectives which must be attended to, as
the placing the adjective befoi-e or after the noun changes the idea ; the most common are,
BON, m. BONNE, f. gOod.
GRAND, great, large.
OROS, m. GROSSE, f. big.
JEUNE, young.
JOLi, pretty.
MAUVAis, bad.
She is a handsome woman.
She has a good husband.
De braves gens.
Des gens braves,
Un bon homme.
Un homme bon.
Un brave homme. A wellbehaved man.
Un homme brave, A courageous man.
Well behaved people.
Courageous people.
A simple mau.
A good natured man.
Un honnUe homme. An honest man.
Un homme honnSte- A civil man.
D' honnetes gens. Honest people.
Des gens honnetes. Civil people.
Un gentil homme. A noble man.
Un homme gentil, A genteel man.
Un galant homme. A liberal man.
Un homme galant. A galant.
Un erand homme. A great man.
Un homme grand. A tall man.
Un vlaisajU homme.An odd sort of a fellow.
Un nomme plaisant.A pleasant man.
Un vilain homme.
Un homme vilain.
Un vauvre homme.
Un nomme pauvre.
Une cruelle femme.
Une femme cruelle.
Une sa^e-femme.
Une femme sage.
Une grosse femme.
Une fenmie grosse,
Un farieux animal.
Un animal furieux.
A disagreeable man.
A nig^rdly fellow.
A man without genius.
A poor man.
An unfeeling woman.
A cruel woman.
A midwife.
A wise woman.
A big, fat woman.
A WDman with child.
A huge creature.
A fierce animal.
Une certaiiie nouvelle.A certain piece of news,
Une nouvelle c«rtain«.True or sure news.
De nouveaa vin.. Fresh wine.
Du vin nouveau. Wine newly made.
La morte-eau, The neap tides.
De I'eau morte. Standing water.
The adjective Cher placed before the noun signifies clear, o^ectionate ; as, Monc/ter pere,
my dear »ther ; placed after it, it signifies ofhighprifie ; as, Un livre cher, a dear book.
"New is both Neuf and Nouvean ; Neuf is said of things newly made ; as, A new coat,
Un habit neiif, i. e. made of new cloth ; un livre neuf, a neto book, i. «. a book that has
not been used, &c. Nouveau is said of tilings newly invented, of new productions ; as,
Un habit nouveau, a coat of a new fashion ; Un nouveau livre. or un livre noiivwu, a neuf
Dook, t. e, a new production. Un nouvel habit meaus a tieti> aress.
35
36
37
200 ADJECTIVE,
The adjectives of number, vremi^vl, ^rst ; second, deuxieme, second ,
TROisiEME, third; quatriemb, ^//r/A j cin<ijjieme, ^flh, Sfc, are placed
in french as in english, before the noun ; as.
The ^rst day. Le premier jour.
The fourth monlh« Le quatrieme mois.
But when the adjectives rhird. Fourth^ Fifth, sixth, Sfc. are used as a
distinction to some personage ; as, George the third, jflenry the eighth ;
or to date the months ; 'asVJuly \Athy November bth; they are changed
into the substantive numbers Deux, rrois, auatre, cinq^ six, Sfc,
If used as a distinction, they are put after the name of the personage, as ;
George the third. George trois, i. e. george three.
Henry the eighth, Henri huit, a. e. henry eight.
If used as a date, they are put before the name of the month, joined to it by
D£ ; as, July lAth. Le quatorze de Juillet,
' November hth. Le cinq de Novembre,(k)
Adjectives of measure and Dimension, such as, nigh, rail, low, neep.
Thick, Big, wide. Broad, Long, shorty Sfc. which are placed after the num-
ber in english, must be placed before it in french, joined to it by de ; as,
A room twelve feet lo?ig, and ten broad.
Une chambre lonoue de douzepieds, et large de dix;
Literal, A room long q/* twelve feet, and broad often,
A wall ten feet high, and two feet thick,
Un miir haut de dix pieds^ et epais de deux;
Literal. A wall high often feet, and thick of two,
N, B. The adjectives of Measure and Dimension are frequently ex-
pressed in french by their substantives f\ then the words remain in the
same order in french as they are in english^ but both the number and
the noun of measure must be preceded by de ; as,
A room twelve feet long, and ten broad.
Une chambre de douzepieds de longueur, et de dix de largeur
Literal, A room o/" twelve feet of length, and often of breadth,
A wall ten feet high, and two feet thick.
Un mur de dixpieds de hauteur, et de de^ix d'ipAissEUR ;
Literal, A wall often feet of height, and o/'two of thickness.
But observe that when the adjective is changed into its substantive, the
verb ^TRE must be changed into avoir, and de is omitted before the
number ; as. Our room w twelve feet long, and ten broad.
Adject, Notre chambre est longue de douzepieds, et large de dix.
Subst, Notre chambre a douze pieds de longueur, et dix de largeur ;
i, e. Our room has twelve feet o/" length, and ten o/* breadth.
Adject, Ce mur est haut de dix pieds, et iPAis de deux,
Subst, Ce mur a dix pieds de hauteur, et deux d*iPAissEUR ;
i, e. This wall has ten feet of height, and two q/* thickness,
(k) Except Premier in dating the days, and when used for a distinction, we do not
say, Georges un, George one ; but George premier, George deux, or second, and then
George trois, George <Aree ; George qucUre, Sfc.
t The substantive may be formed by adding ur to the adjective when it ends ^ith
a vowel ; as, Latrge^ koyeui ; and eur when it ends with a consonant ; as, Haut,
hauteur, ^-c.
ADJECTIVE. 201
RE3IARKS ON THE ADJECTIVES,
The ADJECTIVE can not be separated by an article from the noun which oO
it qualifies, therefore those articles which come between the adjective and
the noun in en^lish, must be placed before them in french; as»
Such a man. un tel homme; not tel un homme.
So great a tbing^. unk si grande chose.
Except TOUT, all, whole^ which requires the article after it; as,
All his time. Tout son terns.
The whole day. Tout le jour,
A whole day. Tout \jn jour,*
Except also, when the adjective is used to distinguish some particular
person from another person of ihe same name ; as,
Peter the cruel. Pierre le cruel,
Cato the elder. Caton L'ancien,
Alexander the great. Alexandre le grand.
By prefixing to an adjective, an article of the same gender and num- OcF
ber as the noun to which it refers, that adjective has often the property
of a SUBSTANTIVE, and the words Man, woman, people which are ex-
pressed in english, may be omitted in french; as.
The wise man is happy. Le sage e,st heureux.
He is a troublesome man, Cest un importun.
She is a little brown woman, Cest une petite brune.
The great; the covetous j96op/&.Les grands; les AVARES.f
As an ARTICLE prefixed to an adjective without a noun, gives to it 4U
the property of a substantive, so when the article is taken from a
noun, that noun assumes the power of an adjective; for example,
I know a poet,
I speak of a philosopher.
Here the viord^poet and philosopher are substantives, because they
name the objects spoken of, consequently they require an article ; so,
Je connais un poete.^
Je parte d'un philosophe. But when I say.
The man I speak of is a poet and a philosopher.
He is a poet, but he is not a philosopher.
The substance I am speaking of is man, the words poet and philoso-
pher are only attributes of that substance, and they no more require an
article than if I said ; the man I speak of is witty, is tbise^ so the French^
Vhomme dont je park est poete et philosophe.
II est POETE, mais il riestpas philosophe.
A philosopher is seldom a poet, but a poet is seldomer a philosopher.
Philosophers the 1st part of the sentence is a sitbstant, in the 2nd anadj,
Poetin the 1 st partof the sentence is an adjective, in the 2nd a substantive;
So the French,
Rarement un philosophe est poete, mais plus rarement un poete
est philosophe. (See the 23rrf rule.)
* And if tAut is governed by a preposition, the preposition must be placed before
TOUT, and the article after ; as,
Of ttie whole regiment. De tout le regiment. To the whole fleet. A toute LA fiotte,
t This rule extends to many adjectiyes, but not to all; they should be taken notiee
of in reading.
41
42
43
44
202 ADJECTIYK.
COMPABISONS
The same words which serve to qualify nouns, serve also, by the means
of certain adverbs prefixed to them, to compare their qualities.
The quality of a substance, when compared with another, is either
SUPERIOR, INFERIOR, or EQUAL to the Other ; this is called com pa rati ve*
Or the quality is raised above, or lotcered below several others, and
this is called superlative,
OF COMPARATIVES.
The comparative of superioritv more before the adjechve, or r or
ER added to it, as more strong^ or stronger, is formed in french bv plus
before the adjective ;* as.
My horse is more strong or stronger than yours.
Mon cheval est plus fort que le voire.
The comparative of inferiority less before the adjective, is formed
in french by moins before the adjective ;t as,
My horse is less strong tha?i yours.
Mon cheval est moins fort que le voire.
The same comparative formed by so before the adjective, and as after
it, is expressed, so before the adjective by si, and as after it by que ; as.
My horse is not so strong as yours.
Mon cheval n*est pas si fori que le vStre.
Tlie comparative of equality as before, and as after the adjective, is
expressed, as before the adjective by aussi, and as after it by que ; as.
My horse is as strong as yours.
Mon cheval est aussi fort que le vStre.
OF superlatives.
The superlative formed by most or least before the adjective, or by
ST or EST added to it; as, most strong or strongcti, is formed in french
by adding le, la, les to the comparative words plus, moins ; as,
Comp. stronger, tlijs fort, m. plvs forte: f.
Sup. strongest, Le Thvsfort La plvs forte, Les Phvs forts, Les Phvs fortes.
Comp. Less strong, moins ^r^ m. MOtss forte, f.
Super. Least strong, Le moins fort. La moins forte, Les moins forOt,
Les M01N8 fortes, agreeably to the gender and number of the noun ; as.
My pony is the strongest of my horses.
Mon bidet est le plus fort de mes chevaux»
My mare is the least strong of the two.
Majument est la moius forte des deux.flj
N. B. The comparison of adverbs is formed like that of adjectives ; as.
Strongly, rortement. More strongly, phvs fortemetil.
Most strongly, le flvs fortement. Less strongly, Moms fortement, Sfc.
■! _ . !■ I - — j-^ — .^ ,
* Except MEILLEUR, better; hire, worse, adjectives, v^j^ comparatives of
MiBOX, better; pis, worse, adverbs, [^"*^" Seinsel?es!
t Except MOINDRE, less, ) w»«*"»o*T«a.
(I) Obsenre what is said, note * page 53, that two of the sijins called article, can
not be prefixed to the same noun ; so,
My strongest horse ; is, Mon plus fort cheval ; Not, Mon le PLUS fort dieval.
Observe also, that if *he adjective is placed first, the article needs not to be repeated
before the noun : but if the noun is first, the article must be repeated before tlie adjec-
tive ; as, It is Uie strongest horse I have seen.
C'est le PLUS /art eheval quefaie vu; or C^est le cheval le PLUS fo^t qu$j*aie vu.
ADJECTIVE. 203
REMARKS on the COMPARATIVE and SUPERLATIVE*
When the comparison runs between two parts of a sentence/ an 4:0
ARTICLE is added to the comparative in english ; as,
The more you study, the more you learn ;
This ARTICLE is omitted in french;
PLUS vous etudieZi plus voua apprenez.
And the adjective or noun which, in these instances, comes before
the verb in english, must be placed after it in french ; as,
The longer the day w, the shorter is the night.
PLUS lejour est long, plus la nuit est courte ;
Literal, More the day is long, more the niglit is short
The inore populous a country w, the richer it M.
PLUS un pays est peupl^, plus il est righe ;
Literal. More a country is populous, more it is rich.
The comparative words plus, moins, si, aussi must be repeated 40
before every adjective, though they are in the same sentence; as.
She is as rich and handsome as her cousin.
Elle est aussi riche et aussi belle que sa cousine.
The comparative words plus, moins, moindre, meilleur, mieux, 4/
PiBE, pis require ne before the verb which follows them ; as,
This is better than I thought.
Ceci est meilleur queje ne pensais. .
However ne is not required if the following verb is in the injinitive,
or if it is preceded by a conjunction ; as.
It is greater to forgive than to revenge.
II est plus grand de pardonner que de* se venger.
1 am better now than when I was in town.
Je me porte mieux a present que quand fktcds a la ville.
The particles ur and than coming after the comparative, or after the 4o
adverbs more, less followed by a word denoting quantity, not quality,
are expressed by D£, not by que or par; as.
It is stronger by much. // est plus fort de beaucoup.
It costs more thaji ten guineas. II codte plus de dix guinees.
The preposition IN9 sSier a. superlative in english, is expressed in french 41/
in the same manner as OFt agreeably to the rules on the article; as^
He is the richest merchant in London.
Cest leplus riche negociant de Londres ; i. e. o/* London.
She is the most virtuous woman in the city.
(Test lafemme la plus vertueuse de la ville; i. e. of the city.
The superlative followed by the relative or definite pronoun, qui, que, o\j
dont requires the following verb in the subjunctive mood; as.
She is the prettiest woman that was at the ball.
C^est la plus jolie fomme qui F{iT au bal.
He is the handsomest man that I have ever seen.
Cest le plus bet homme que /aie jamais vu.
•■—••• I .11. .1. .1 I. ■ I . - . — , — .
. * The tame jtrepoiition which follows the comparative must be repeated after que 3 as.
We are more inclined to revenge, than to forgive.
A^oiM iommet plus portit a nous venger Qu'a fardonner*
204
CHAP. V.
PRONOUN.
A PRONOUN is a word used to represent a noun, as when I say I in-
stead of naming my own name ; ruoUy yov, nst suEf it, they instead
of naming that of another being.
There are various sorts of pronouns, generally known by the names of
PEBSOJfALy RELATIVE, POSSESSIVE, DEMONSTRATIVE, INDEFINITE.
SECT. I.
PERSONAL PRONOUN.
As there are three persons in grammar, so there are three sorts of
words to represent them, but sometimes the same person is represented
by several words, as appears from the following table.
Agents or NOMINATIVES of Verbs.
Istper. i, JE, MOI.
WE; NOUS,
OBJECTS of Verbs, or of Prepositions.*
ME, ME, ~
US; NOUS.
2nd per. THOU, TU, TOI.
YOU; VOUS.
Srdp.m.IlE, IL, LUI.
THEY; ILS. EUX.
Srdp.{. SHE, ELLE,
THEY; ELLES.
3rdp.n. IT, IL, m. ELLE./.
THEY; ILS,m. ELLES./.
epo
MOI.
TOI.
3rd pers. common
THEE, TE,
YOU ; VOUS,
HIM, LE, LUL
THEM; LES, LEUR, EUX-
HER, LA, LUI, ELLF.
THEM; LES, LEUR, ELLES.
IT, LE, m. LA,/. EN, Y.
THEM; LES,m.^-/» EN. Y.
HlMself, \
«y SE. SOI:
THEMselves ; )
And as these words are not used indiscriminately, it is necessary to
attend to the following observations.
• In every action there is wa. Agent, doer, or verformer; as I write, / teach, Thou
teachest. He teaches. The master teaches ; and if the action is of a nature to be commu*
nicated, there is also generally a Patient or receiver ; as, / write a Letter, I teach You, Him,
Her, Them, French, English, 8^c. This Agent or doer, in grammar, is called the nomina-
tive of the verb, and the Patient or receiver^ is called the object ; so, I, Thou, He, The
master are nominatives ; Letter, You, Him, Her, ^c. are objects of theyerb.
Until now I have avoided speaking of Cases, because if a case be what it seems to be, a
modification or variation from tlie original word, it is evident that in french there are no
cases in nouns ; and it is astonishing that grammarians should still persist in giving six cases
to our nouns, as is done in Latin. WheUier a noun be the giver Gt receiver of an action, t. e.
whether it be the nominative or the ohjectoi the verb, it remains invariably the same; for ex.
Mon fr^re aime voire soeur. My brother loves your sister*
Voire sceur aime mon fr^re. Your sister loves my brother.
In the first instance, Frere, brother, is the tu^native of the verb ; in the second, it ii
the fAject. Sotur, sister, in the first instance, is the object of the verb ; in the second,
it is the nominative ; and in boih instances, tlie words are the same.
But it is not so with the Personal, and Belative pronouns. The same substantive, when
the object of the verb, is not always expressed by the same word as when it is the agent
or nominative; so we do not say,
II aime ELLE, ELLE aime IL ; He loves site, she loves he ;
we say, II Vaitne elle h'aime; He loves her, she loves him*
If it be asked why this variation in the pronouns and not in nouns ; it may be answered,
that the pronouns having been invented to prevent the tiresome repetition of the same
noun, if tliere had been only one word to supply its place, the repetition of that wonl
must have been too frequent, and only half the inconvenience would have been removed.
PERSONAL PRONOUN. 205
AgentSy or nominative Pronouns,
I THOU, BE, SHE, IT, WE, YOU, THEY.
Tliese pronouns are sometimes singly the nominative of a verb ; as /
AM, rhou ART, He is; sometimes joinUy with another substantive*; as,
you and i are ; ne and ms brother are; and sometimes they are used
absolutely without a verb; as. Who is there? /.
When J, THOU, he, she, it, we, you^ they are attended by a verb 51
that agrees with them in number and person, they are ;
/, JE. HE, IT, m. IL.
THOU^ TU. THEY, mas. ILS.
WE, NOUS. SHEJT,t ELLE.
lOC;^. VO.US. THEY, fem. ELLES.
These words keep the same place in the sentence in french as in english ;t ex.
/ am, rhou art, He is, she is. Je 9i/2«, tu es, il e«^, elle est.
Am J? Art <Ao7A? is he? is «Ae? Suis-jv:? jbs-tu? Est-iL? Est-ELLE?
If 7, THOU, HEy SHE, WE, YOU, THEY are joined to another substan^ OJd
tive,* for a nominative to the same verb, or if they are used v)Uhout a
verb to affree with them, they are ;
r, MOI. HE, LUI.
THOU, TOI. THEY,mtLS. EUX.
T^E, NOUS 5/ff:, ELLE.
YOU, VOUS. T/fEF, fem. ELLES; ex.
In CONJUNCTION with another substantive:
You and I are ready. vous et moi nous sommes prels.
He and his sister are ready. lui et sa s(eur «o7?< ^r^/».
You and </icy are ready. vous et eux vous^^ iies prSts,
2%€y and their yriew£?5 are here, evx et leurs xuis so7it ici, (m)
WITHOUT a verb to agree with :
Who is ready to go? I, Qui est prSt a partir? moi.
It is J who will go first. C est moi qui irai le premier
It is he who will go first. C est lui gwi ira Ze premier.
It is /Aey who will go first. Ce sont eux qui iront les premiers.
When a personal pronoun is the agent or nominative of several verbs, Qfj
it is generally repeated with each verb ; as,
I say and maintain that, &c. Je dis et je soutiens que, Sfc,
He is poor, and will always be so. Il estpauvre, et il lesera tovjours.\
* Observe that bv substantive I do not mean nouns only, I mean also the personal pro*
nouns ; for the word which represents a substantive, is as much a substantive as the word
wliich names it. t See the verbs, page 106 and following.
(n) The pronouns Moi, Toi, nous, vous are sometimes added to Je, Tu, Nous, Vous,
to point ont more clearly a contradistinction ; as.
You will write and J will read. Vous icrirez, et MOt je lirai,
Vou come from Paris, and wc are going there. Vous venez de Paris, ^t nous nous y atlons^
N, B, The words. My self ^ lliyself, S^o, which are often used by way of emphasis at
the end of a sentence ; as, I will do it myself; are expressed. Myself, M0l-m^m«; Thy-
Belf, TOi-m^«,* Himself, lui -m^me; Herself, ELLG-m^m«; Ourselves, NOUS-memex ,
Yourselves, vous-memes; Themselves, ^\i\-memes, m. ELLES-meme;, f.
X If the verbs are in the same tense, and used in the same sense, as in the example, 7
say and maintain, the pronoun may be omittM before the second verb, Je dis et soutiens;
but if the verbs are in different tenses, as in the other example. He is poor, and will
always be soj or if the verbs are used in different senses, i. e. one affirmatively and tno
other negatively, the pronoun must be repeated.
206
PBRSONAL PRONOUN.
OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS.
AfE, THEE, VS, YOU, HIM, HER, iT, THEM.
Now let us see when me is me or moi ; thee, te or toi ; him, lb
or liUi; HER, LA or lui; them, les, leur, eux, elles.
The OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS are always attended by some verb or
preposition which governs them.
They are placed sometimes before the verb, and sometimes after
it; and it is the place which they keep in the sentence that determines
which word is to be used.
The ORDER which the objective pronouns heep with the verb.
general rule.
t)4: When the objective pronouns me, thee, us, you, him, ^'c, are
governed by a verb, place them immediately before that verb, and express
}by
ME,
to ME;
THEE, \
to THEE; j
US,
to US;
YOU, \
to YOU; f
HIM, IT;
HER, IT;
THEM;
}
ME.
TE.
NOUS.
VOUS.
LE.
LA.
LES.
to HIM,'
to HER;
to THEM;
} h
LUI.
LEUR.
to IT,
to THEM^
.}
neut.
Y.
I
EN.'
SE; thus,
He looks at *
me.
thee^
t/s,
you.
him, or it,
her, or it.
them.
Does he look at me ?
He does not look at me.
Does he not look at me ?
of THEM, ]^^^'
HIM^HERself,
ITself,
THEMselvesi
II ME regarde.
Jl TE regarde.
Jl NOUS regarde.
II \ QMS regarde,
II LB regarde,
II hk regarde.
II LES regarde.
ME regarde-t^il ?*
//we ME regarde pas.
Ne ME regarde-Uil pa%?
00 Observe that if the objective pronouns are governed by a verb
compounded of the auxiliary verbs avoir or £tre, and of a participU
past, th^y must be placed before the auxiliary verb, not between the
auxiliary and the participle ; thus,
to me.
He has spoken
to thee.
to tis,
to you.
to him, to her.
to them,
[of it, of them.
Has he spoken to me?
He has not spoken to me.
Has he not spoken to me?
II m' a parle.
II T't A parle.
II NOUS A parle.
II vous A parle.
II LUI A parle.
II LEUR A parte.
II EN A parle.
m' K'i-il parle ?*
II ve m' a pas parle.
Neu^k'i'il pas parle? S^c.
• This t is added for the sake of melody ; see note * page 92. f Sere note * page 98
PERSONAL PRONOUN. 207
The ORDER which the objective pronouns keep with the verb.
Is6 Exception, When the objective pronouns me^ thee, us, you, 00
iiiM, her, it, them are governed by the imperative of a verb used
in u coMMANDiNO sejise, i, e. without a negation, the pronouns which re-
present them are placed immediately after the verb ; *
In these instances me is expressed by moi, and thee by Toi.
But if the IMPERATIVE is used in a forbidding seme, i. e. if it is at- 0/
tended by a negation, the pronouns must be placed immediately before
the verb, acfreeably to the general rule ;
Then me is expressed by me, and thee by te ; ex.
Imperative cOiMMANDlNO, 56 ride. Imperative FORBIDDING, 57 mle.
me. Regarde-Moi. Ne me \j,^„arde tjos
thyself, TOI. iVc te J '^ ^
Look at me. Regarde^uoi, Ne mk \ j„_ g* |
o j
Look at us, Regardez'vovs, Ne nous) ~
>regardons pas, J
1^ ST yregaraez pas, ©
yourself. vous. Ne vousj ° ^ o
Let us look at him or it, Regardons-L^, 2Vc le '^ ^
her or it la. Ne la
them, I.RS. CjiJ Ne les
2nd Exception, The objective pronouns are not always the object OO
of verbs, they are sometimes governed by a preposition which some
verbs require to unite them to the substantive which follows them ; then
the pronoun being the object of the preposition, not the object of tlie verb,
it is placed after the preposition, and me is expressed by moi ; thee,
by TOI ; HIM, by lui ; her, by elle ; us, by nous ; you, by vous ;
THEM, masc. by eux; them, fern, by elles; ex.
He came to me, II vint & moi.
He complained o/*<Aee. II se plaignit de toi.
He applied to him, to her, to them. Ils'adressa k lui, a elle, h. eux, &c. (o)
(n) With two imperatives goremin;^ the same pionouns, to avoid monotony, we say
Vonne2-LT.-MOl, ou ME LE vendez.. Give it me or sell it me, ^
Voyez^LE., et lb eonsolez. See him, and comfort him.
(o) Some difficulty arises here witli respect to the preposition A, which, like the pro-
position TOi Is generally implied in tlie pronoun ; for we say
//ME donna un livre, He gave me a book ; instead of
II donna un livre a Moi ; He gave a book to me,
Je LUI pretai de V argent, I lent him money ; instead of
Je pritai de V argent a LUI ; I lent money to him.
Bat in some instances this preposition can not be left out; for though we say, He gave
ME a book ; J lent HIM money ; we could not say, lie came ME ; 1 went HIM ; we must
say. He came to me ; 1 went to him.
The verbs which require the proiotition A to unite them to tlie vronoxin, are the follow-
ing : 1st, all the REi%,ECTIV E VERBS, which, as they always nave a pronoun attached
to tjiem for their object, can not govern ano^er substantive, without a preposition ; as^
II a'est adresU a MOi, a TOI, «c. He has applied to me, to thee, h^c,
Ne vousfiez pas a LUI, a ELLE, &c. Do not trust him^ /lei*, &^c.
Sdly, A few NEUTER VERBS which also require a preposition to unite them to the
pronoun which attends thom. The most frequently met with are :
ALLER, to go ; as, N'allez pas a LUI. Do not go to him.
BOIRE, to drink ; Je bois a vous. I drink to you.
COUKIR, ACCOURIR, to run ; 11 accourt a Nous. He is running to us.
DESCENDRE, to go or come down ; Elle descendit a MOI. She came down to me.
ETRE, to be, viz, to belong ; Ceci est a eux. This belongs to them.
MONTER, to go or come up ; Je monterai a elle. I shall go up to her,
PENSER, to think ; Pensez a nous. Think of us.
RECOURIR, to have reoourse ; Becourez a eux. Have recourse to them
VENIR, to come ; lis vinrent a MOI* They came to me.
208
PERSONAL PRONOUN.
The ORDER which several objective pronouns keep togetheil
jy When SEVERAL objective pronouns are governed by the same verb, a
precedency must be given to some of them.
If; agreeably to the general rule, the pronouns are placed BjEFOBEthereri,
ME, -k
NOUS,
TE, \have the precedency over lb, la, les, v, en,
VUUoj I
SE J
LE, I
t'f^ I^"^^ ^^ precedency over lui, leur, y, en.
LEUR j^^^c i^^ precedency over v, en.
Y Aflw ih^ precedency over en ;* as,
Will he give him or it to me, me le
her or it to me, me la
them to me ? me les*
He promised him or it to us^
her or it to us,
them to us.
Will he not lend it to you,
her or it (o yoii^
them to you ?
He will send it to me there,
some to me there, (p)
some to you there.
He will not send it him or her,
any /o him, to her, (p)
them to them.
II nous l'
J/ NOUS l'
II NOUS les
Ne vous le
Ne vous LA
Ne vous LES
II ME l'y
II m'y en
II vous Y en
II ne le lui
// ne lui en
II ne LES leurJ
>donnera't-il ?
138
^a promis,
\pretera't-il pas ?
\enVi
enverra^
1
enverra pas.
UU But if, agreeably to the 56<A rule, the pronouns are placed after tht
verb, in which instances Moi, toi are used instead of me, te, then
LE, \
J ES 'have the precedency over moi, toi ; as,
Y ' j
Send him, or it to me. Envoy ez-hT^-iAoi.
her or it to me. la-moi.
them to me. les-moi.
them to me there. les-y-moi.*
1 Observe also that if me, thee after an imperative, are followed by
SOME, of jTt of THEM, they are not expressed by moi, toi, as above ;
ME some, ME of it, Sfc. are expressed by m'en ; thee some, Sfc. are ex-
pressed by t'en, whether they come before or after the verb ; ex.
He has sent me some, II m*en a envoy e, send me «o7ne. Envoy ez-u^'E.n,
Doest thou remember it ? t'en souviens-tu? Remember iU souviens^T^LN.
• See, page 78, 79, a table which shews how to arrange seivral pronouns together,
(p) SOME, ANY, implying of it, o/them, are rendered by ENr
J>£RSONAL PnONOUN". 209
REMARKS on the PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
As there are only two genders in French, the mcuculine and the femi- q2
nine, the neuter pronouns it, tbey, them must be expressed by il,
ELLE, ILS, ELLE8, LE, LA, LES, the Same aS HE/SHE, THETj HIM, HERf'
THEM, masculine or feminine, agreeably to the gender of the noun which
they represent ; so we say.
Of a man or a coach ;
II vient; je le t?oi». He or /r is coming; I see Him or jt.
Of a vxyman or a watch j (See note h, page 90.)
Elle est belle; regardez^LA. She or 1 7 is fine ; look at Her or jt.
N. B. It is often used in an impersonal sense, f. e. without reference
to any substantive mentioned before ; as,
It is glorious, shameful, necessary, proper, &c.
In these instances. It is always expressed by il, or by cb.
It is expressed by il, if the verb is followed by an adjective; .as«
It is glorious, shameful, necessary^ proper, &c.
Il est glorieiiXy honteuXy nicessaire, a propos, Sfc,
It is expressed by ce, when the verb is followed by a substantive,
either with or without an adjective; as.
Is it you ? It is he. It is his son* It is a shameful thing.
Est-c^ vous? C*est lui. C'est sonjils. C'est tine chose honteuse.
not, Est'iL vousf iLettlui, it est wn)iu, means he is fais son.
Though LUI and leur may be said of beings that have life, such as OeJ
brutes and plants ; as.
That tree is withered, give it some water^
Cet arbre estflktri, donnez-iAJi de Veau;
They can not be said of lifeless beings, commonly called things; (q)
in speaking of things, to it, to tmem must be expressed by Y; as.
She loves reading, she gives all her time to it.
Elle aime la_ Ut^ure, elle y donne tout son terns.
Lui, elle, eux,, elles, after a preposition, are said only of persons ; Qi^
in speaking of 6ru^ or things, \he preposition must be changed into some
adverb which implies the meaning of both the preposition and pronoun; as.
Take this horse, and get upon it.
Prenez ce cheval, et montez dessus, not sur lui. (q)
If an adverb can not be fo.und to supply the place of ihe preposition,* give
another turn to the sentence, by which ihi^ preposition will disappear; as.
He is come with it; II i! a apport^, i. e. he has brought it.
not, II est venu avec lui, which would imply a person, not a thing.
(q) Except those that are generally personified, such as Heaven, Fortune, Providence,
the luements, stvne Virtues and Vices ; as,
Love is the tyrant of reason, yet there are people who sacrifice every thing to it,
L* amour est Utyran de la raisoti, cmendant ilya des gens qui lui sacrifient tout.
Or when in a metaphcorical sense, we attriDute to things, what in a proper sense can only
be attributed to persons ; so, speaking of a Sword, we say ',
Je LUI dots la vie, I owe my life to it.
Of a Book; Ces livres me codtent cher, maisje leur dois mon instruction
These books cost me dear, but I owe my instruction to tnem.
But in speaking of the same things without giving rational attributes to them, we
eould not use lui, leur, we must use Y ; as,
It is an old sword, but I have got a new hilt put to tr.
C*est une vieille 6pie, maisj'Y ai fait mettre une garde neuve,
* Yoa find in the dictiouaries the words which are both p^epoiitiens and adverbs.
65
66
67
68
69
210 PERSONAL PRONOUN.
BEMABKS on the PERSONAL PBOJfOUN3>
He/she, it, they coming with the verb be, followed by a §ub$ian-
tive, are g'enerally expressed by cb ; as.
He is an officer. c' eat un officier»
She is a seamstress. c' est une co%Uuriire
They are merchants. ge sont de» n^ociants.
If the substantive which follows the verb, denotes ron^, states trade, or
professUniy he, ins, they may be expressed by il, bllb, ils, blles,
but the article must be left out; as,
II eat officier. ells eH coiUuriSre. ils wnt negodanta,
not, IL est UN officier, elle est une coutunere, iLstont des negociand. (gee 23 rule.)
He, she, they, him, heb, them are sometimes used without refer-
ence to any noun expressed before them, but imply the words Man,
wmnan, or people understood ; in this sense they are expressed,
he. 1 > SHE, \ I THEY, 1 1
• >by CELUi ; * >by celle : * }by ceux ; as,
HIM,] ^ ' HER,i ^ ' THEM,) ^ '
He who can live dishonored, does not deserve to live, i* e. ^Ae man who
Celui qui peut vivre deshonore ne mirite pas de vivre,
I have met her whom you wished so much to see, i. e. the woman whom
J'ai rencontre celle %i7E vous aovhaitiez aifort devoir,
N. B, The pronouns celui, celle, ceux, and the relative qui, que,
DONT which attends them, must not be separated, as the corresponding
words are sometimes in english ; they must be placed togeiher ;
They are mistaken who think that riches make men happy.
CEUX QUI pensent que lea richesaes rendent lea hommea heureuA'se trompent.
i.e. They who think that riches make men happy are mistaken.*
His, heb, theib are also sometimes used in the same sense as the
above pronouns, i. e. implying the worcl^ Mart, woman, or people under-
stood, and are then expressed,
his, by de celui ; her, by de celle ; their, by de ceux ; as,
We~ always blame ^Aezr conduct who do not succeed.
On^ blame toujours la conduite de ceux qui ne reussissent pas,
1. e. We blame always the conduct ofthosey viz. of the people who do not succeed.
When an objective pronoun is governed hy several verbs, that pronoun
must be repeated with every verb by which it is governed ; as,
She loves and esteems you. Elle vous aime et vous esttme.
Speak or write to her Parlez-LVi ou lui ecrivez.
It sometimes happens that the verb by which the objective pronouns
are governed, is preceded by another verb ; as,
I can not do it ; He will not give it me ; You m^y lend it to him.
In these instance??, it is better to place the pronouns before the last verb
than before the^rs^; so, instead of saying,
Je ne lb puis pa^faire; say, Je ne puis pas lb faire,
II ne ME le veut pas donner; II ne veut pas me lb donner,^
* These sentences may also be expressed without changing the order ofthe words ; thua,
C£tix-la se trompent aui pentent que les richesses r^tident les hommes heureux;
or, C'est se tromper que de penser que Les i^hesses rendent les hommes heureux.
But these expressions are more adapted to poetry and oratory, than to conversation.
t This rule is not strictly adhered to by french writers, eapecially ancient authors ;
however it makes the sentence clearer, and it is the surest for a foreigner, as there are
no exceptions to this nd^ and there are several to the other, which ii« slight be UaUv
to mistalte .
PERSONAL PRONOUN. 211
REMARKS on the PERSON Al PRONOUNS.
Le, la, les, en, y are often used when the corresponding words are / U
not requisite in english ; for example, in answer to these questions ;
Are you Mr. B ? Etes-vous Monsieur B ?
Is that your house ? EaUce la voire maUon?
Are these your gloves ? Sont-ce id vos gants ?
It would not be sufficient in french, as it is in english, to answer With
the auxiliary verb only, and say, Ouiy je suis ; Yes, I am.
Non, ee tCevs pas; no, it is not. Ouiy ce sont; ycs, they are.
We are obliged to add one of the above pronouns^ and say ;
Omi, je LB suii. Non, ce ne h*est pas. Qui, ce les sont. (r)
You have got fine apples. Vomjs avez de belles pommes.
Will you have sojne ? (of them), en voideZ'Voiii quelques-unes ?
Yes, give me a few. i. e. (of them). Qui, donnez m'EN quelques-unes,
N. B. And if the auxiliary verb, with which the question is asked is
attended by another verb^ that verb must also be repeated; as,
Has he done it? Ua-t-il fait? .
No, he has not, i. e. (done it), Non, il ne j/a pas fait.
Do you remember it? Vous en souvenez-vou^?
Yes, I do, i. e, (remember it). Oui^je rrC en souviens.
Are you going to the play ? Allez^vous a la comedie?
No, I am not, i. e, (going there). Non,je n* y vais pas.
If the pronoun is added to represent a noun, it must be one of the words / X
LE, la, les, agreeably to the gender and number of that noun; as.
Are you the son of Mr. A? Etes-vous le fils de Monsieur A ?
Ye6> I am, i. e. (the son). Oui,je le suis.
Are you the daughter of Mrs. B ? Etes-vous la fillis de Madame B?
No, I am not, (the daughter). Non, je ne la suis pas.
Are these your gloves ? SonUce id vos oants ?
Yes, they are, t. e. (my gloves). Qui, ce les sent.
But if the'word'to be represented is an adjective, an adverb, or a whole § J^
sentence, le is used without regard to gender or number ; as,
Are you married, sir? Etes-vous mari^, Monsieur?
Yes, I am, i.e. (married). Oui,je le suis.
Are you married. Madam ? Etes-vous MARi^e, Madame ?
No, I am not, i.e. (I am not so). Non,je ne le suis pas.
Are you contented. Ladies ? Etes-vous gontbntes, Mcsdames ?
Yes, we are, t. e. (we are so). Oui, nous le sommes.
En, y, which are generally applied to things, may, in answer to a ques- / ^
tion or a command, be applied to persons, en instead of de moi, de toi,
dejsovs, de vous, de lui, (Telle, (Teux, (^'elles; y instead of a moi,
d TOI, d NOUS, d vous, d lui, d elle, d eux, d blles ; as.
Remember me. SouveneZ'Vous de moi.
I wiU, i. IB. (remember you) Je m*EK souviendrai.
Have you thought of tw ? Avez-vou^s pense k nous ?
YeSfWehave, i.e. (thought of you) . Oui, nxms y avons pens^.
(t) If the answer is made with the pnHioims H£, SHE, THEY, relating to persons^
LCI, ELLE, EUX, ELLES added to the verb, render the other words unaeceasary ;
la that your brother \ Yea, heia. Is that your sister ? Ho, the is not.
fn-et ia voire fren jf Oia, c'ett LPi. £it-cc id voin ukut t Non, ee n'est pat ellu.
(i2
212
SECT. It.
74
RELATIVE or distinctive PRONOUN
WHO, WHOM, WHOSE, THAT, WHICH, WHA1»
QUI, QUE, DONT, QUOI, QUEL, LEQUEL.
When TTBo, whom, whose, that, which come after one or several
substantives ^hich they particularize, they are expressed.
5! WHO,
3
VQUI;
I
THAT,
WHICH,}
WHOM, j
THAT, >QUE ;
WHICH,]
The man who
The horse that
The chaise which
The man whom
Tlie horse which
The coach that
U homme qui
{comes. Lt choral QUI
ha chaise qui
L* homme que
>lBee,C*) Le cheval que
Le ccarosse que
>vientm
ie WIS*
75
L' homme dont]
*l speak. Le cheval dont
La chaise dont.
2f e jitfrte.
(^Me note in, pa^£ 82.)
WHOSE,\ The man of whom
^ of WHOM, VDONT; The horse of which
*^ of WHICH,] The chaise of which.
Qui, que, dont, whatever be the order of the corresponding words in
english, must be placed immediately after the noun to which they relate ;
Is the gentleman come, who i^^ to dine with us ? •
Le MONSIEUR QU[ doit^dtfier avecnous, est-ilvenu?
i. e. the gentleman who is to dine with us, is he^^ come ?
N. B, DONT, besides being placed immediately after the noun to which
it relates, must be followed by a substantive in the nominative ; as,
He is a man whose probity is known.
Oest un homme dont la prohite est connue, or, dont on conncut la 8fc.
If WHOSE is followed by a noun governed by a preposition, it can 7iot
be expressed by dont, it must be expressed by d?/QUEL, de Zaquelle,
c^esQUELS, ffesQUELLES, agreeably to gender and number; as.
He is a man on whose probity one may rely ; i.e. on the probity of whom
(Test un homme sur la probite duquel on pent compter ;
not, (Test un homme dont sur la probite, nor sur la probite dont. ftj
{s) The distinctive words WHOM, that, which are often left out ; as. The man 1 saw,
for the man whom I saw ; The wine we drank, for the wine which rce drank ; but the corre-
sponding words QUI, QUE, DONT must never be omitted, and if they are the nominative,
or the object of several verbs they must be repeated with each verb ; as.
The man I saw, i. e. wfiom I saw. V homme QVEje vis.
The wine we drank, i, e. which we drank. Le i in que nous hAmes.
The woman I speak of, i. e. of whom 1 speak. La femme DOHTje parU,
(t) When a relative pronoun comes after two nouns, and relates only to one of them,
if the noun to which it relates is not the last in french, who, whom, that, which must
he expressed by /eouEL, (aouELLE, (fSQUELs, (esQUELLES ; of whom, of which, by
dfuQUEL, de ^aQUCLLE, desQivmhs, (iesQUELLES ; to whom, to which, by uuquel,
d taQUELLE, auxQUELS, at/xQUELLES, agreeably to the gender and number of the noun, to
avoid the ambiguity tliat might arise from Qur, que, dont, which are generally under-
stood to relate to the last noun ; as.
This is that young man's sister of whom we were speaking.
Void la soeur de cejeune homme DE Laquelle nov^ partions.
But this being done for the sole purpose of removing the ambiguity which would arise
from QUI, QUE, DONT ; if a relative pronoun, coming after two nouns, was followed by
a verb, or by an adjectiv>e that would sufficiently denote to which jioun it refers, it would
be better to use qui, que, dont, than lequel, laquelle, &c. which are rather formal
expressions ; the following sentence, for example, would not be ambiguous ,
That young man's sister who is so handsome,
Lnsaur de cejeune homme qui est si belle ; qui being determined by belLe^
But, if these words can not be used without obscurity, the principal object of a Ian-
iniftge being to express our thoughts with precision, elegaupe must yield to perspicuity «
RELATIVE PRONOUN. 213 ^
Afler any preposition but of, or a preposition synonymous to it, 4 "
TVhom is expressed by QUI, for both genders and numbers;
Mate, SING. Fern. Masc, PLUR. Fern.
WHICH le QUEL, la QUELLE, Us QUELS, Us QUELLES
From WHICH duQUEL, d« /oQUELLE, a«« QUELS, d« QUELLES
To.at WHICH auQUEL, a /aQUELLE, auxQUELS, auiQUELLES
agreeably to the gender and number of the noun to which it relates ; as,
The man with whom ] Vhomme avec qui ]
The horse on which >he is. Le cheval sur lequel VU est.
The chaise in which J fuj La chaise dans laquelleJ
The man from whom ] , Vhomme de qui T
The horse frcmi which >he comes Le cheval duquel >U vient
The chaise /romM?AicA J fvj La chaise de IjK(IJJELLZ j ,
The man to whom ] Vhomme h, qui \
The horse to which >he goes. Le cheval auquel \il va»
The chaise to which J (xJLa chaise h laquelle j
fViio^ WHOM used absolutely, Le, without reference to a noun mentioned / /
before, imply the word person understood, and are expressed by qui ; as,
Who has done that ?
i. e. what person has done that ? qui a fait cela Y
I know whom you mean ;
i. e. what person you mean. Je sais qui vous voukz dire,
7Q
WnosE used absolutely, implies also the vroxd person understood. / ^
If it can be changed into of whom, it is expressed by de qui; as.
Whose daughter is she ?
i. e. of whom Is she the daughter? De qui est-ellejille?
I know whose relation she is.
i. e. of whom, or of what person, Je sais de qui eHe est parente»
If Whose can be changed into to whom, it is expressed by d qui ; as,
Whose house is that?
i. e. to whom does that house belong? A qui est cette maison?
I do not know whose it is. Je ne'sais p<is ^ qui dh est,
ftt^ After a preposition, which, relating to.tlie word Thine:, is expressed by QUOl; as,
It is a thing of which I did not think. C^est une chose^ QVOlje ne pensais pas,
I see nothing to whichhe can apply. Je ne vois rUn a quoi il puisse s'appliquer,
(v) With a verb denoting dwelling or movement, even in a figurative sense, WHICH,
after a preposition, is generally expressed by od ; as, .
The city in which I live. Lm vilU dans laquelle, or ouje demewre.
The happiness to which I aspire. Le bonheur auquel, or oa j'aspire.
But we could not say, Le bonheur ouje pense^ the happiness on which 1 think 3 because
penser does not denote movement ; we must say, Le bonheur A\}<iVELje pense.
la the same sense,/rom which is expressed by d'ov, and through which, by par ou ; as,
The country from which I come. Le pays duouel, or d'oii je viens.
The town through which 1 have passed.JLa viu« par laquelle, or par ou j*ai passi,
(x) The distinctive word which coming after an Indefinite expression, ot after a Noun
vithont an articU in french, can not* be rendered by any of the relative words which cor-
respond with it in english ; so these sentences,
I have obtained leave, which was the only thing that I asked ; 1 can not be
The earth is ravaged through ambition uhich is the scourge of mankind, j translated,
J*ai obtenu permission qui or LAQDELLE ^tait la seuU ch(ae queje demandais ;
On ravage la terre par ambition qui or laquelle est Ufl4au du genre humain : say,
J'ai o6tenu permission, c'ttait la seule 'chose queje demandais.
Oft ravage la terre par ambition, et Tambition est lefi'eau. du genre himain.
214 RELATIVE PRONOUN,
JVhich ixterrogative.
In an interrogative sentence, wbjch requires three distinctions
/ ff^HiCB interrogative is either joined to the noun like an adjectiife.
i.e. without the help of & preposition; as,
WHICH man? "which carriage? which horses?
•} Or like a substantive, it is joined to it by the preposition op ; as,
WHICH OF the men ? which of the carriages ? which of my horses?
^ Or like a pronoun, it is used absolutely after the noun ; as.
It is one of these men ; which is it?
I came in one of these carriages. Jti which did you com>e?
I / y Which interrogative joined like an adjective, i. e. without a prepo-
sitioji, to the noun to which it relates, is
Masc, SING. Fern, Mate. PLOR. Fern.
WHICH; QUEL, QUELLE, QUELS, QUELLES
Of Jrom WHICH; deQUEL, de QUELLE, d« QUELS, d* QUELLES
To, at WHICH; a QUEL, h QUELLE, h QUELS, h QUELLES
agreeably to the gender and number of the noun ; as,
JVhich man ] quel homme ]
fFhich carriage >do you prefer? quelle voiturefpriferez-vous?
Which horses J quels chevaux J
<) 0\) Which interrogative joined by a preposition to the noun to which il
^^ ^ relates, or coming after it absolutely, i. e. without a noun, is,
Masc. SING. Fern, Mate. FLUR. Fern
WHICH; leQVEL, /a QUELLE, ic* QUELS, i«« QUELLES
Of, fr<m WHICH; duQUEL, d« /a QUELLE, dc» QUELS, d««QUELLES
To, at WHICH; auQUEL, a Za QUELLE, ouiQUELS, auxQUELLES
agreeably to the gender and number of the noun ; as.
Which of these men 1, 'L'Eq,VEL de ces hommes "j //^
Which of the coajchesf J p lacivell'e des voitures ^y^ ^-^^ J^
Which of my horses J ^ lesquels de mes chevaux]
Which is the tallest? lequel est le plus haut?
Which is the finest ? laquelle est la plus belle ?
Which are the best ? lesquels sont les meilleurs ?
QJ Which sometimes implies the demonstrative pronoun that or
THOSE understood ; as.
Which of these horses shall I ride?
You may ride which you will, i. e. that which you will.
This dbmonstrative word can not be omitted in french, and which
as including the two words, is expressed by
CELUI QOE, m 1 „^^ ^^^^ ^?y?J?,°^' '"• , JTHOSE which.
CELLEqoE, /J CELLESque,/J
agreeably to the gender and nufiiber of the noun to which it relates ; as.
Which of these horses shall I ride? Lequel de ces chevaux monterai-je?
Ride which, i. e. thai which you will. Montez celui que vous voudrez.
In which carriage will you go ? Dans quelle voiturevouleM-votisalleri
I will go in which you please. JHrai dans celle Qu't/ vous plaira.
'J
* The pronoun may be either singular or plural, agreeably to the number tbat is meant;
for ex. Which of these horses will you ridel may be translated
LEQUEL or LESQUELS de ces chevaux voulez-vous monter f
LEQUEL meaning one horse; lesquels meaning that the person is tc nde tacre then one.
it
What man
WTiat carriag
What horses
RELATIVE PRONOUN. 215
What requires the same distinctions as which.
What followed by a noun, or relating to a noun mentioned before, is o^
expressed,
Masc. SING. Fern. Masc, plur. Fern,
WHAT; QUEL, QUELLE, QUELS, QUELLES;
OfJr&mWHAT; deQUEL, dc QUELLE, rf<? QUELS, d« QUELLES;
To, at WHAT; h QUEL, a QUELLE, A QUELS, H QUELLES;
agreeably to the gender ^nd. number of the noun; as,
QUEL homme \
^ill you hare? quelle voiture\voule2-vous?
QUELS chevaux]
What are your reasons ? quellbs sont vos raisons ?
What used absolutely, f. c. without reference to a noun mentioned, tjO
implies the word thing understood, and is expressed by que or by Quoi.
What is expressed by que, when it is the object of a verb; as,
What are you doing there? qjJB faites-vous Id ?
I do not know what to say to her. Je Tie sais que lui dire, {y J
What is expressed by quoi, when it is governed by 2k prepositioTi, or
used as an interjection ; ex.
What do you meddle with? De quoi vous m£lez-vous?
What I you have not done yet, quoi! vous 71^ avez pas encore fini.
What sometimes implies the demonstra'hve pronoun that, and the 04
distinctive which ; it is then expressed,
Nom. What, ce qui ; Always do what is right; i. e. that which is right,
Faites tovjours ce qui est juste.
Objec. What, ce que ; What I say is true ; i. e. that which I say is true.
CE que ye dis est vraufzj
But with the prepositions of, to, or any preposition that is synonymous
to them, it is necessary to consider whether the preposition comes before
or after what ; for.
Of WHAT is de ce qui, (I speak of what is true ; i. e. op that which, Sfc.
decE i^vE;\Je parte de ce qui est vrai,
Wha t of is ce dont ; as. What he speaks of Is not true ; i. e. that of which \
CB dont il parte rCest pas vrai.
To what m a ce qui, (Apply to what is useful ; i. e. to ^uU which is, &c.
^GE qvE;\Aj)pliqu€Z''Vous h cb qui est utile.
WHATToiscEkquoi ; 3S,What you apply tois not useful ; i, e.^A^TO which 1
CE k QUOI vous vous appliquez n*est pas utile, IT
(y) WHAT, in. this sense, used interrogatively, is generally expressed in conversa-
tion by qo'est-cb que, an idiomatical expression ; as,
IVhat do you say ? qvu. tUtes-vous, or qu'est-ce que vous dites ?
What are you doing? QVEfaites-voiis, or qo'est-CE que vous faites?
And with the verfe be, it is always expressed by qu'est-ce que ; as.
What is it 1 qu'est-CE que c'estl
What is that to you ? qu'est-ce que cela vous fait ?
(i) Though tlie words ce qui, ce que, being compounded of the pronoun substantive
ce, and of the distinctive qui, que, should have two verbs either to atovern or to be go-
▼eroed ; yet, when these words come before tiie verb etre followed by another verb,
er by a noun in the plural number, another ce must be put before etre ; as.
What vexes me is, that he will not study, ce qvi me f ache, c'estqu'U neveut pas 6tudisr^
What I detest most, are idle people ce avBje tUteste le plus, CB sont Its Mfs.
85
216 SECT. III.
POSSESSIVE PRONOtJN.
Masc» 8lNO« Fern, Mate* f»LUA. Fern,
MINE; feMIEN, k MIENNE, les MIENS, Us MIENNES.
0/, froiit MINE ; daMIEN, de la MIENNE, des MIENS, dtt MIENNES,
Tv, aJt MINE ; au MIEN, d la MIENNE, aux MIENS, aux MIENNES.
THINE; U TIEN, la TIENNE, les TIENS, Us TIENNES.
2eR5;} ^ ^^^^' iaSIENNE, Us SIENS, les SIENNES;
OURS; U NOTRE, Za.NOTKE, Us NOTRES, Us NOTRES.
YOURS; U VOTRE, la VOTRE, Us VOTRES, Us V6TRES.
THEIRS; U LEV^, toLEUR, Us LEURS, les LEURS.
The POSSESSIVE pronouns le mien, le tien, le si en, ifc, must be of
the same gender and number as the noun which they represent ; ex.
Your hat is better than hers, i. e. her hat.
Voire chapeau est meilleur que le si en.
My watch is not so fine as his, i. e*. his watch.
Ma montre n*est pas si belle que la sienne.
oO The POSSESSIVE words m^ne, thine, nis, hers, ours, yours,
THEIRS do 720^ always represent a noun mentioned before them ; they are
often used instead of the personal pronouns me, thee, him, her, us,
YOU, THEM, with the verb be, meaning to belong; as for example.
This book is mine^ t. e. belongs to me ; in this sense mine, thine, his,
HERS, OURS, YOURS, THEIRS are expressed by a moi, k TOi, h Lui,
h ELLE, k NOUS, k vous, k Eux, m. h ELLES,^ ; as.
This book is mine, Ce livri est k moi ; f. c. belong^s to me.
is thine. est k toi ; to thee.
is his. est k lui ; to him.
is hers. est 2i elle ; to her.
is ours. est k nous ; to us.
is yours, estkvovs; to you,
is theirst est k £ux, m. k elles, f, to them, faa)
The possessive pronouns mine, thine, his, hers, ours, yours,
THEIRS, by an idiom peculiar to the english language, are sometimes
joined to the noun to which they relate by the preposition of ; as, a
friend of mine ; a book of yours ; this possessive pronoun can not
be expressed by the possessive pronoun \t\ french ; it must be expressed
by the possessive article mes, tes, ses, nos, vos, leurs placed beforz
the noun, which must always be plural in french ; as,
A friend of mine. un de mes amis ; u e. one of my
of thine. un de tes amis ; one of thy
of his. mi de ses amis ; one of his
of hers. un de ses amis; one of her
of ours. un de NOS amis; oheofour
of yours. un de vos amis ; one ofyow
of theirs. Vn de leurs amis; one of their
Nerer say ; Un ami de MES, nor Un eani des miens ; Un ami de tes ; Un ami de SES, &c.
■ : : : r** — ^r— —
(aa) Yet when a question is asked with est-ce ; as, £ST«ce la voire livref Is that
Jrour book 1 we may answer, Out, c'est le mien, or il est a moi, Yes, it is mine, est-ce
a sa maison f Is that his house 1 No, it is not his, it is his sister's ; Non, ce n'est pas Im
st'EMNE^ e'est CELLE de sa santr, or EUe n'est pas a LUI, elU est a sa MSt4r»
87
2'
? s
cu
01
SECT. IV. 217
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN.
Mate, SING. Fern. Masc» PLUlt. Fern,
THAT'}^^^^^' CELLE. l^fsE-V'^^^' CELLES.
The DEMONSTRATIVE prOllOUllS CELUI, CELLE, CEUX, CELLES muSt be OO
of the same gender and number as the noun which they represent; ex.
Bring my hat and thai of my sister; i. e. the hat of &c.
Apportez mon chapeau et celui de ma sceur.
He has lost his watch and that of his brother ; i. e. the watch of &c.
// a perdu $a montre et celle de sonfrere.
Have you seen these fbbj gloves and those which I had on yesterday?
Avez-vous vu ces gants et ceux que f avals hier?
N.B. The demonstrative words riri5, THESEy tbat, those imply
a local distinction wh(ch celui, celle, ceux, celles do not express;
therefore, when a distinction is to be made between two objects, the
adverbial particle ci, here, to denote the nearest object, and la, there, to
denote the remotest^ must be added to these pronouns ; as.
This hat is better than thai.
Ce chapeaurCi est meiUeut qife celui-lA ; f .e. this hat here — that ihere^
That watch is not so fine as this,
Cette mantre-hk n'est pas si belle que celle-ci; t. c. as this here.
But the particles ci, lA, being added merely to discriminate the objects,
if the demonstrative pronoun is followed by a relative pronoun, or by a
710U71 in the possessive state^ which makes the distinction sufficiently clear^
these particles would be useless^ and they must be left out; as.
This hat is better than thai of your brother.
Ce chapeau-ci est meUleur que celui de voire frerd.
This watch is not so fine as that which you have lost.
Cette montrC'Ci n^est pas si belle que celle que vous avez perdue.
If THIS, THAT are not followed by a noun, nor relate to a noun men- Oy
tioned before, they imply the word thing understood, and are expressed,
THIS, by CECI; THAT, by CELA ; as,
This is good ; i. e. this thing is good. ceci est bon.
That is better ; i. e. that thing is better. cela est meillaur,
(bb ) It is not unnecessary perhaps to recall here to the attention of the learner, that
tlie words this, that, these, those hare already been seen in the chapter of articles,
and he must take care not to confound them.
If THIS, THAT, these, THOSE- are followed by a nourif tliey have the property of a
demonstrative article, and are expressed by ce, cette, ces, as has been seen, rute 1.
Ge vin, CETTE gloire, CES pluisirs. This wine, That glory, T/mim. pleasures.
If THIS. THAT, THESE, THOSE do not point out a noun after them, but represent one
mentioned before, they are pronouns, and are expressed by CELUI, celle, ceux, celles,
agreeably to the gender and number of the noun which they represent ; as,
11 a perdu sa montre et celle de sonfrere. He has lost his watch and thatofhia brother.
If THIS, THAT do not point out a noun after them, nor represent one mentioned before, •
they may be considered as substantives implying the word thing, and are expressed,
THIS, by ceci ; that, by cela ; as,
Ceci eU bon,maiscELA estmeilleur,i,e,This thing is good, but that thing is better.
N. B. THAf, joining two sentences, is a conjunction, and is always expressed by que ; as,
I know that he is come. Je sais Qv'il est vena.
This conjimction is often understood in english, but it must always be expressed in french :
Do you think he is come / Pensez-vous qv'U soU venuf [see conjunctions.]
218 sfiCT. V.
INDEFINITE PRONOUN*
y U One^ we 1 used in an indefinite sense^ t. e. not relating to any
THEY J PEOPLE] particular person, are expressed by ON.
N. B. ON is always the nominative of a verb, and though it represents we, they,
PHOPLE, which are plural, it requires the verb in the 3rd person sing, ; as,
Otie says, I ^^ ^^^ j^ ^ ^^ ,
They say, peo^Zc say. J -^ ^ *' /
yi The following and other like indefinite ejcpressionst are also ex-
pressed in french by ON, with the verb in its active sense; as,
It was said. on dSsait; i. e. oim said.
It has been reported. on a rapporte ; ofie has reported.
y^ The english passive verbs used indefinitely^ require the active signifi-
cation in french, with ON for nominative; but by adding on to the sen-
tence, the nominative of the verb in english, becomes its object in french ;
/have been told that news has been received.! i. e. me has told me that om
ON m*a dit qu'ov a rept des nouvelles ; J ^" receired news,
i/tS ONESELF, 1
Himself used indefiniteh/,>BsTe expressed by Soi; as,
Itself after a preposition j
Every one thinks well of^z7?z«e{/!CAacun a bonne opinion de sot.
Virtue is amiable of itself. La vertu est aimable de soi.
\j^ SoMEt repeated in a sentence of two parts, is in the first part Les uns,
in the second part les autres ; as.
Some laugh, some cry, les uns rient, les autres pleurent,
«/d SoMEBODTt SOME ONE is QuELQu'uN for both genders; as.
Somebody has taken my book, quelqu^un a pris man livre,
yD SoMEf ANY, FEW followcd by a noun or a pronoun in the possessive
slate, are expressed by Quelqu*un, quelques uns, m. quelqu'une,
QUELQUES UNES,^ agreeably to gender and number ; as.
Take some of these oranges. Prenez quelques unes de ces oranges.
Give a,e a feu, of theo,. Donnez^'en ,vew„,.s vnbs.
•^/ JVojBODr, xor ^ivr BOD r, personne; 1_ i r ^u i.
^require A'e before the verb ;
NOBODY WHATEVER, QUI QUE CE SOITj ^ »
Nobody loves that man. personne N^aime cet homme.
He trusts nobody whatever. II ne «e^ d qui que ge soit.
Something is Quelque chose ; as,
H^ gave me something good, J/m6(fonna quelque chose de6on(ce^
yy NoTHiNii^, not any thing, Rien ; 1 require nc before the verb;
NOTHING \lfjfIATErER, QUOI QUE CE BOITj aS,
Nothing\i& more agreeable. rien N'est plus agreahle,
11^2i^\Aie%iow}thing whatever, II nb d applique a Quoi que ce soit.
None, not AN'i'', followed by a substantive in the possessive state, are
expressed by Auc^jn, m, AUCUNE.yi with Ne before the verb ; as.
None of your ^j^ters is come, aucune de vos sceurs n'est venue,
•• ' ' '• - ' ->^. — —
Ccc) QUELQU'UN, PERf.QNNR, QURLQUE CHOSE, RIEN followed by an adjective or a
past participle, reouire DE after ihem ; as Somebody wounded. Quelqu'un de blesti,
SomeUiing good. Queique ckvse DA *Hm, Nobody corned Personne de venu. Nothing
98
100
new. Rien de nouveau.
a:
INDEFINITE PRONOUN. 219
101
NoNEf Nul; lused absolutely^ are synouymoua to personne and
NOT ONE, Pas un j require Ne before the verb ; as,
None are free from faults. nul N*est exempt de dkfauts.
Not one believes it. pas un, or personne Ne le croit(dd)
Each, joined to a noun, is expressed by Chaque for both genders; as, lU^
Each boy had a shilling. chaque garpn eut un sheling.
Each girl earned six pence. CHK^n^JlUe gagna six sous,
Eacb, followed by a noun in the possessive state, or relating to a noun 1 \)o
aUeady mentioned, is Chacun, m. chacune, /. as,
Each of these books has its price, chacun de ces Uvres a son prix*
Put them each in their places. Mettez4es chacun d sa place.
Every, followed by a noun, requires a distinction. 1 (\A
If EFERY denotes individuality, it is expressed by Chaque ; as, 1U4:
Every language has its properties, chaque langue a ses proprietes;
i. e. each language has &c.
If EVERY denotes a totality, it is expressed by Tout, m. toutb,/;
Every man is fallible, i. e. cil men ; tout homms est faiUible.
Every one requires the same distinction as every. lUO
Evert one, implying every one taken indvoidually, is Chacun;
Every one lives after his own way. chacun vit a sa maniire,
i. e. each person lives &c.
Every one, implying every one collectively, is Touts, m. T0UTE8,y:
Every one of them were taken; YTlsfurent touts pris, m.
t. e. they were all taken. jEllesJurent toutes prises^ f.
Every body is Tout le mondb ; as, lUO
Every body speaks ill of her. tout le monde parte m^al d^dle.
She speaks ill of every body, EUe parte mal de tout le mondb.
Every thing is expressed by Tout; as. A"/
Every thing is right. tout est Men,
She complains o^ every thing. EUe se plaint de toutt.
Any BODYf ANY oNEj used in the sense ot some body, some one, are lUO
expressed by Quelqu*un ; as.
Has any body asked for me ? quelqu'un vHa-t-U demande ?
' Any body, any one, used in the sense of every body, are expressed by 101/
, Tout le bionde, or il y y a personne qui Ne; as.
Any body will tell you the same, i. e. every body will &c.
tout le MONDE 'vous dira la m^e chose;
or, IL Vy a PERSONNE QUI Ne vou^ disc la m^me chose.
With a verb denoting admiration or doubt, or after a comparative, any 110
BODY is expressed by Personne, but without Ne, because personne
attended by ive, signifies nobody ; as,
Did ever any body see that! personne a-t-U jamais vu cela !
He will do it better than any body. II lefira nUeux que personne.
(dd) RiBN, AUCUN, PAS UN, PERSONiiE foUowed by QUI, QUE, DONT require the foi-
lowing verb in the subjunctive ; «s,
Have yo« found nothing that suita you 1 N'ovex-tNmi tr&uv^ rien qui vous convienne 1
I do not know any body who can do it. Jt m eonnuit PERftONMB QUI puisse lefaire.
Ill
220 INDEFINITE PRONOUN.
112
115
Any THiNGt in the sense o^ somethings is Quelque chose ; as.
Has any thing happened? Ed-U arrive qufi.que chosb?
Any TBiNG, used in the sense o^ Every things is expressed by tout;
Do any thing you please. Faites tout ce qv!il voiu plaira,
1 1 With a verb denoting admiration or doubt, any thing is expressed by
RiEM, but without Ne ; for nien attended by Ne, expresses nothing ; as.
Is there any thing finer ! Y a-t-il rien de plus beau !
114 IVnOEVETt, wnosoEVER joined to a substantive, or relating to a sub-
stantive before mentioned, is expressed by Quel que, quels que, m.
quelle (^2<^,QUELLE3 ^z^e, f. vi\\h the Verb in the subjunctive; and if
the nominative is a noun, it is placed after the verb ; as,
WJioever that man is, I shall have him punished.
QUEXi QUE soit cet homme,^ le ferai punir,
WnoEVERy WHOSOEVER, wnoMsoEFER, meaning any person soever, is
expressed by Qui que ce soit, with a relative pronoun after il, and the
verb in the subjunctive ,* as,
Whoeverh?i^ done it, he shall repent of it; i.e. whoever tfiat person be;
QUI QUE CE SOIT QUI VoMfait, il s*en repentira.
Whomsoever you meet, do not stop ; i. e. whosoever that person be ;
Qui que CE soit que vous rencontriez, ne vous arretez pas,
1 lu Whoever, whomsoever, meaning Every body, is Touts ceux ;
H e stops whomsoever he meets. // arrete to cts Ce ux qu*il rencontre,
N, B, In proverbial sentences, whoever is Quiconque ; as,
Ulioever is rich is every thing. quiconque est riche est tout.
11^ WhateveRj whatsoever, with a substantive, requires a distinction.
"■• ' If the substantive to which whatever, whatsoever is joined, is
the nominative of a verb, it is /expressed by quel que, quels que, m
QUELLE gt^e,QU£LLES que,f. with the verb in the subjunctive, and if the
nominative is a noun, it is placed afier the verb ; s^.
Whatever his reasons are, they will not be heard.
QUELLES QUE soiejit ses raisons, sites ne seront pas ecoutSes,
If the substantive to which whatever, whatsoever is joined, is the
object of a verb, whatever, whatsoever is expressed by Quelque, sing,
QUELQUEs, plur, foT hoth gcndcrs, with que after the substantive, and
the verb in the subjunctive; as.
Whatever reasons he gives, he will not be excused.
QUELQUES raisons Qu'iZ donne, il ne sera pas excuse*
118 Whatever, whatsoever, implying whatever a thing may be, is ex-
pressed by Quoi QUE CE SOIT, with a relative pronoun afier it, and the
verb in the subjunctive ; as.
Whatever happens let me know it ; i. e. whatever the thing be Sfc,
QUOI QUE CE SOIT QUI arrive, faites^e-moi savoir.
1 ly Whatever, whatsoever, implying -^wy thing, or Every thing, is ex
pressed by Tout ce qui, nomin, tout ce que, object, as.
Whatever is right, is not always approved ; i. e. every thing that &c.
tout ce qui est bien n'est pas tovjours approuve.
Do whatever you will ; i. e. any thing, or every thing you will
Faites tout ce que vous voudrez.
120
122
INDEFINITE PllONOUN. 221
Other is Autre, substantive and adjective, of both genders ; as.
Give me an other pen. Donnez^moi une autre plume.
Others think differently. D'autres jpensent differemment*
Each other^ one another ; 121
masc. SING. fern. masc. PLURAL. fern. ^^^
Vvn y Autre, Vune VAutre^ les Vn* les Avtm, lea unu lea Avtru ;
of, from ONE ANOTHER ;
Vun de V Autre, Vune de YAutr^f les um des Autres, les vnei denAutres;
to, at ONE ANOTHER;
Vun a V Autre, Vune a VAutre^ les rn* aux Autres, les rtiw aux Autre* ;
agreeably to gender and number ; but observe that the preposition which
comes before one another in english, must be placed betiveen the two
words Tun, f autre in french ; as,
They can not live without one another ; t. e. the one without the other.
Us ne sauraient vivre Tun sans Tautre, m. Tune sans Tautre,/!
Both ^ mas. sino. fem. masc. plur. fern.
/'rn et Tiiutre, Vune et V Autre. Touts deux, routes deux; \
of,fivmBOTH: . USSSS
cfe Trn et de V Autre, de Vune et de V Autre, de Touts deux, de routes deux; yiduai ob
to, at BOTH; fij** *^*
d Tern et a V Autre. d /'rn« et d i'iiutrtf, d. Touts deut a routes deux; j
Your sisters are both rights
Fos sceurs ont raison Tune et I'autre, or ont toutes deux raison.
BOTH; les uns et les Autres, les unes et les Autres; \Spcakiiiff ctt greater
of, from BOTH; des Uns et des Autres, des urns et des Autres; \Z^'^'^^iA^^
to, at BOTH; aux uns et aux Autres, aux unes et aux Autres ;] v^xtimi as.
The French and the Dutch are united, let us beat both.
Les Franfais et les Hollandais sont unis, battons les uns et les autres*
Either; m. sino. fem. masc. plural. tem:
Vun ou V Autre, Vune ou V Autre, Us uns ou les Autres, les unes ou les Autrei;
of , from EITHER ;
de Vun ou de V Autre, de Vune ou de V Autre, des uns ou des Autres, des unes ou des Autret;
^ to, at EITHER;
a Vun ou d V Autre, a Vune ou d V Autre, aux uns ou aux Autres, aux Une$ou aux Autres;
Either of them will come.
L'uN ou 1'autre viendra^ m. Tune ou Tautrr viendra, £
You may use either of them.
Vouspouvez vousservir de Tun ou de 1'autre, m. de 1'une ou de I'icUTRE,^
Neither, NOT EITHER ; fem.
masc. SING. fem. masc. plural. Ni les trnn
Ni Vun ni V Autre, nI Vvne ni V Autre ; Ni les uns ni les Autres, [ni Us Autres ,
of, from NEITHER; videsunts
Ni de Vun ni de V Autre, mdeV une ni/2« V Autre ; Ni des Um ni dee AUtres, [ni des Autres ,
to, at NEITHER; viauiunes
Ni a Vun ni d V Autre, Ni d. Vune ni d Tiiutre; Niaux crnsni aux Autres, [pi aux Autres,
These words require Nt before the verb which attends them ; as,
I care for neither of them.
Je NE me soucieni de Tun ni de Tautre, m. ni de Tune 7i£ de Vavtke,/,
N. B. When these words are the nominative of a verb, they are gene-
ral ly placed after the verb, and ils or elles is added to the verb ; as.
Neither of them will come.
Ni Tun ni Tautre ne vieridra ; or ils neviendront ni Tun ni 1'autre, m.
Ni Tune ni YwrnEne viendra; or elles ne viendrontni I'une ni I'autre,/.
123
124
• In proverbial sentences, others after of, to is generally rendered by autrvi ; as,
i)o not do to others what you would not like to be done to.
i\efaitespas a autrui ce gue vous ne voudriez pas qu'on vousftt.
125
127
222 CHAP. VI.
VERB.
jtGRBEMBHT of the VERB VOith its NOMISATJFE.
A VERB expressing either beijig or acting, necessarily implies a iubject
or agent, generally known in grammar by the name of nominatife.
The VERB must be of the mvm number and person as the agent, or
nominative; this is called agreement of the verb with its nominatjf'e; as.
Singular* PluraU
J speak. Je PARLe, Nous JfKRions, <
Thou speakest. Tu vkklcs, Fou9 ^xklcz. »
My brother fMonfrire)^ ^«/'-«'-"UARL«n<. gT
My 8%8ter Ma soeur J Mes scsun J P
l^Q When TWO or more substantives in the singular are the nominatjfm
of the same verb, that verb must be in the plural number; as.
My sister and he speak french. . Ma soeur et lui parlent fran^ais.
If the substantives which are the nominative of the verb, are of jiir-
ferent persons,"^ the verb does not agree with either of them ; we add
NOUS or Fous to the sentence with which we make the verb agree.
We add nous, if there is in the sentence a substantive* of the ^rst
person; as,
He and I speak french. Lui et moi nous jporlons frangais ;
L e. he and I we $peak french. *.
We add fous, if there is in the sentence a substantive* of the second
person, and none of the first ; as,
You and they speak french. Vous et eux fous ^pvLtlez fran^is ;
i. e. you and they you speak french.
1 ^ O If the nominative of the verb is the relative pronoun Qui, the verb must
be of the same number and person as the substantive* to which that
pronoun relates; as.
It is / who speak best. C* est moi qui parle le niieux
It is thou who speakest best. C* est toi qui paries le mieux.
It is he who speaks best. C est lui qui parle le mieux.
It is we who speak best Cf est nous qui parlous le mieux.
It is you who speak best. C est vous qui parlez le mieux
It is they who spexik best. Ce sont eux qui parlent U mieux.
12ft/ If Qui refers to several substantivjes of DfFFERENT persons,* it agrees
with the FIRST person in preference to the second, and with the second
in preference to the third ; as.
It is you and / who speak best. C est vous et Moi qui parlous le mieux.
It is you and he who speak best. C est vous et lui qui parlez le mieux.
Lo\J The collective substantives La plupart, infikit^, noubre, quantiti^,
TROUPE, MULTITUDE followcd by another substantive, require the verb of
the same number as that second substantive ; ex.
Most people are of that opinion.
La plupart du monoe pen;ie ainsi, or La plupart des eENS pensent aitisi.
lOl Le QUART, Le tiers, La moitiib require the verb in the singular; as.
One fourth of my books are lost. Le quart de mes livres est perdu.
See note * page S05
VERB. 223
PLACING of the NOMINATIVE witk the VERB.
Iii a DECLARATIVE sentence, i, e. when a question is not asked, the nomi- 1 oA
NATIVE of the verb is placed in french as in english, before the verb ; ex.
I speak french well. je parle bien Jrangais,
He speaks french well. il parle hienfran^is.
My brother speaks french well. Mon fri&re parle bien frangais.
My sister speaks french well. Ma sgbur parle bien frangais, fee)
But when the sentence is interrogative, it is necessary to consider
whether the nominative of the verb is a noun or a pronoun. ■■ oo
If, when you ask a question, the nominative of the verb is one of LOO
the pronouns je, tu, il, elle, nous, vous, ils, elles, on, or cb, this
pronoun is placed in french, as the corresponding words are in english,
IMMEDIATELY AFTER the VERB ; CX.
Do / speak french well ? Parle-JE Men frangqis ?*
Does he speak french well ? Par/e-t-iL bitnjranqais ?
Does she speak french well? Par/e-t-ELLE bien frangaU ?
Do people speak french well ? ParZe- t-oN bienfrangais?
If, when you ask a question, the nominative of the verb is a noun^ 1o4
that noun is placed before the verb, the same as in declarative sen-
tences ; but to shew that a question is asked, one of the pronouns xl»
elle, ils, elles, agreeably to the gender and number of the noun, must
be placed immediately after the verb ; aS,
Does ray brother speak french well ? Mon frhreparle-t'ih bienfrangais? (ff)
Does my sister speak french well? Ma soeur ^ar/c-t-ELLE bienfrangais^
Do my brothers speak french well ?Mes freres parlent-iLs bienfrangais?
Do my sisters speak french well? Mesh(:^\\mparle7vt-^i.his>sbienfrangais?
r . 11 ■
(w) The nominative is generally 'placed after the verb in ft declarative sentence.
1. When the verb is used as a parenthesis ; ex.
You are wrong, said her mother to her. Vous avez tort, lui dit sa mIre.
2. When the sentence begins with tel, or ainsI ; as.
Such was his advice, TEL Stait son AVIS.
Thus ended the business, AiNSi se termina Taffaire.
3. When the nominative is attended by several words which can not be separated from it,
or can not be placed before the verb, without suspending the sense of the sentence ;
D* un cote on voyalt une nvt^e ou se FORM aient des iles bordiesde tilleuU fieuris.
On one side was seen a river from which sprung islands lined with lime trees in bloom. .
Ld. coui.BNT mille RUlsaEAUX qui distrihu^it partout une eau claire.
There a thousand rivulets run which carry every where a clear water. FeneLon,
These sentences would not be so cleai, if they were expressed thus :
D' un c6t4 on voyait une riviere oil des iles bardies de tiUeule fieuris se FORM AIENT,
la, mille ruisseaux, qui distribuent partout une eau claire COULENT.
4. When the verb is preceded by que, se, or ou ; as.
The money which my father sent me. Uargent QUE ni'envoya mon P^RE.
The field where the battle was fought. Ltf champ ou se donna la bataillb.
5. Je, nous, tu, vous, il, ils, elle, elles, on, ce are generally placed after the
rerby when the sentence begins with one of these words, AiNsi, so, therefore; AU MOlNi,
at least; en vain, in vain; k peine, hardly ; peut-etre, perhaps i as.
You were hardly gone, when she came in. i( peine ^twz-vous wrti qu'elle entra,
• Except the pronoun Je, when the verb to which it is joined ends with several conso-
nants, so instead of saying; covRB-je'/ do J run'/ ments-Jc? do 1 lie'/ DORS-Jef do I
sleep f which are hard to pronounce, we say, est-ce que je cours/ est-ce que je ments f
(ff) When an interrogative sentence begins with que, (what); od, (wh^e); we gene-
rally jUace the notm after the verb, witliout adding a pronoun to it; as,
Ou «ft votre frere? Where is your brother? Ou est votre soeur? TrA«r« is your sister t
Qvzfaitvotre frcre tWhat is your brother doing 1 QUE/ait votre uoBuxtWhat is your &o. 1
224 v£Rfi.
MOODS and TENSES.
INDICATIVE MOOD OV MANNER.
When we declare that a things is, or is noU or that it w, was, will be, or
would be in our power to have it so, this manner of expressing ourselves
is called indicative or declarative.
PRESENT TENSE OT TIME,
J* AI, ' I have, "x ^ . ^. . ^ ., , ^ ^
T- DfTTa T «. l»^» tod.,, thlswcdt, tliliiiiMith, Uuc jwr,
J0 &U15, X am, > thUa«e, In aajr ftriad «f time not entiicly
-^^j^ Je PARLE,* I speak, or am speaking ; J -i-F^t
loO The PRESENT tense in french does not differ from the sani^ tense in
english ; it expresses the being or acting at the time in which we are; as,
I now have, I now am. I now speak, or am speaking.
A present /ai. k prt^sent^e suis, k present jc parle.
PAST TENSES.
COMPOUND of the PRESENT.
J* AI EIT,^ I hady or have had, 1 ^ely, today, this week, &e. in any period ef lime, net
J* AI ETE, I was, have been, J "'^'•'y elapwd,- tM$Uth4 noma tmu to th$ preunt.
J* AI PAH LB, I spoke, did speak, have spoken ;
I OO If we speak of an action recently past, without mentioning the time in
which it parsed, or if we mention a PERionf which is still lasting, such as,
to-DAY, this week, this month, this year, &c. the action being past, and
the period of time mentioned being still present, we make the verb partake
of both the present and past tenses, by adding the past participle to
the present tense of the auxiliary verbs avoir or ^tre; ex.
IfO TIME MENTIONED,
Were you ever at Paris?
turn, Have you ever been at Paris? AwEZ-vous jamuis iTE a Paris ?
No, I never was there ; - J
turn. No, I have never been there. Non,je rCy k\ jamais ^t^.
I had no opportunity to go ;
turn, I have had no opportunity &c. Je rik\ pas eu occasion dy aller,
Did you ever see Buonaparte?
turn, Have you ever seen b.? Avez-vous jamais vu Buonaparte ?
PERIOD MENTIONED, BUT NOT ELAPSED,
I was at your house this morning ;
turn, I have been at your house &c. J*ki iri chez vous ce maiin.
Did you ^nd any body there ? J
turn. Have you found any body &c. Y kvez-vous trouv^ quelqiCun ?
I saw your sister, and spoke to her ;
turn, I have seen your sister, and &c. .Tai vu voire sceur^ etje luiki parl^.
Did you not we my mother ?
turn, Have you not seen &c. ? N^AVEZ-vouspas vu ma mere?
» !■ ■ ■ .III. .1
* In ordet to render the elucidation of this interesting part of the language more ob-
vious, I have laid down the two auxiliary verhs avoir, to Have; and etre, to Be, which
are generally found the most emharrassing, and the familiar verh parler, to Speak, which
^ay serve as a model for all the rest.
t A period of time is a certain qtiantity of time, the duration of which ib fixed and agreed
upon, and which being elapsed, that period ceases ; such as a Day^ a Week, a Fortnight,
a Monlhf a Year, an Age, the four seasons of the year, Spring, Summer, Autumn, Winter;
Air any other portion of time, the beginning and end of which can be ascertained.
t The french generally use the participle e'tb, instead oi the participle ALJ.E, to ex-
press that a person has gone to a place whence he is returned.
VERB. 225
INDICATIVE MOOD.
PERFECT TENSE,
J* £US, I had, lyoi UrJ ay, last wmA, Usl month, iMt jrcar, a fiwtnlfht i|0» m an? period of time
Je FU S I was ) "**^'' P*^' <*m i« <A« remate$t timt/nnn Uu pnttmi,
J«PARLAI, I«pofc«,dj(i8peak;
If we speak of an action past, in a period of time which is also en- lO/
tirely past ; such as Yesterday^ last week, a fortnight ago, last month,
last year, any year previous to that in which we live, then both the time
and action being pa>st or accomplished^ we use the perfect tense of the
verb; viz. eus, fus, parlai; as,
I caUed al your house yesterday. Je passai hier ckez vous.
Did you ^nd any body there ? Y trovyXteb^ous quelqu'un ? •
I saw your sister and spoke to her. Je vis voire sonir etje lui parlaj.
Did you go to the ball with her? AllAtes-woiw au hal avec elle ? *
No. Idirfnot; i.e.g'othere.<'^****''-»> Nonje rCy allai pas. (TORoieNB.)
Did you not speak to my mother? Ne vkRhk^EB-vous pas a ma mere?
Yes,IrffcJ;i.e.«pcaifctoher.<'^^**'«N«> Oui,je lui parlai.<^*^*~^
IMPERFECT TENSE.
r> -Hrr^A-rc-* w ' /Umr, it Uut tiiiM* whtti Uut bappcDsd, fa t timc JMpfr^d Of Uncertain.
J ETAIS, I toas, )
Je PAR LAIS, I spoke, did speak ;
The IMPERFECT is used in three different instances.
\sL When we speak of an action that was passings and consequently loO
imperfect or incomplete at a time we allude to, though at the time in
which we relate it, it is perfect or accomplished, we use the imperfect
tense of the verb: viz. avais, £tais, parlais, &c.
These instances are generally expressed in english by the gerund or
present participle in ing added to was or were; as.
What were you doing there ? Que FAisiEZ-t7oi£« Id
I was writing to a friend. «ricRiVAis d un ami.
I wcu getting ready to go out. Je m'APPRiTAis d sortir,
I was going to call upon you. .Tallais passer chez vous,
I was talking of you just now. Je parlais de vous tout d theure,
I was going out, as you came in. Je sortais, comme vous entriez.
2nd. When we wish to denote that the action of which we speak was lOcI
habitualy or has been reiterated, we must use the imperfect.
In these instances, the english verb may be changed into the infinitive^
with did use, or used, before it; as.
Where did you walk in London .
;7fz. Where did you use to walk &c. Ou vous pROMENiEz-roi/« d Londres?
I generally walked in the park. [/e pare,
or, I used to walk &c. Je me promenais ordinairem^ent dans
I often met frenchmen there.
or^ I used to meet &c. J'y rengontrais souvent desfran^ais.
I always spoke french with them.
or, I used to speak &c. JePARLkistovjoursfran^aisavcceux.
* It is not iiecessary in order to use the past tenses, that evevy verb should be at-
tended by an expression denoting a time past ; it is sufficient that the time be men-
tioned or alluded to at the beginning of the discourse, because the mind naturally goes
back to the period which has either been mentioned or alluded to.
140
226 VERB.
INDIOATIVS MOOD.
IMPMiBFECT TEN8E.
Sfd. Another very extensive use of the jmperfbct is in deicriptions
for whenever, we describe the qualities of persons, or things, the Hate^
pla€i\ situation, order, disposition in which they were in a time past, we
use the imperfect ; as,
Where were you yesterday? Oit iTiKz-vot£# hier?
I was in the country. J'ixAis & la campagne,
I «'flr«"** not well.* Je ne me portais^** pas Men,
I had a bad head-ache. J'avais grand mal a la tHe.*
Was the country pleasant ? La campagne irtkiT-elle agreable ?
Yes ; but it wa^ rather hot. Out; mats il paisait"* un pen chaud.
N B. Observe however, that if the duration of the state, &c. which we
wish to describe was limited to a period of which the etid was known, we
• The gn^atest didioulty attending the past tenses is how to discriminate this last in.
stance of. the imperfect from the j^erfect, i, e. how to distinguish an action from a state of
being, and indeed the distinction is sometimes so nice, that It is not surprising foreigners
should err in the use of them ; for example;
FIRST instance* second instance,
I WAS very wet in going into the country. 1 Vfxsso tfet that 1 could not stay
He WAS kitUd in falling from his horse. He was dead when we found him.
He HAD his leg carried off by a cannon ball. He had also a wound in his breast,
WAS and had in these various instances can not he expressed hy the same tense ir4
french.
When, in the first instance, I say ; I was very wet in going int9 the country; He Was
hilled in falling ; He Hkv his leg carried off ^c, I am relating facts, events which hap -
pened, of the end of which a perfect idea may be formed, ana these must be expresser*
by the perfect.
But when, in the second instance, I say ; J was <o wet that I could nci stay ; He was
dead wheti we found him ; He had aUe a wound in his breast; I no longer express the facts
themselves, of 6em^ wet, of being killed 8^c. but describe a state ofbeing, i. e. I was in a
wet state ,* He was in a dead state ; He was in a wounded state, the duration of which is
not limited to any time, and can not be ascertained, and these are expressed by the im-
perfect; thus,
FIftsT instance.' , second instance.
Je FVS treS'meuillS en allant h la campagne, J* etais si mauilt^ tjueje ne pus pas rester.
II PUT tu^ en tombant de eheoal, II etait minrt quand nous U trouv&mes.
11 EUT lajambe emport^e d*wn coup de canon, II avait ausai une bUssure a la poitrine.
In order to elucidate this still more, and try the rules that have just been laid down,
let us peruse a piece of history where the difference between a narration and a descrip'
tion, A fact and an incident, wiU appear obvious.
Calypso could not console herself for the Calmso ne pouvait*^^ se consoler du de^
departure of IJlysses. In her grief, she eon- part d'u/ysse, Dans sa douUur, elte se trou>
«i<iere<i her immortality as a misfortune. Her vait^^ malheureuse d* itre immortelle. Sa
grotto no longer resounded with the sweet grotte ne resonnait*^® plu^ du doux chant
harmony of her voice. The nymphs who de sa voix, Les nymphes qui la servai-
(Uttfnded her, dared not to speak to her. She ent**® n* osaienT'*^ iui parler. Kile se
often walked alone upon the flowery turf prombnait^'* souvent seute sur les ga-
which an eternal spring diffused round her zons Aeuris dont un printenu itemel dor-
island ; but these charming abodes, far from dait'^ son (le; mais ces beaux lieux, loin
assuaging her grief, served otAy to recall the de mudher sa douleur ne faisaient^^
sad remembrance of Ulysses, whom she Aac{ que lui rappeUr i^ triste souvenir d'Vlysse
somany times seen by her side. Frequently qu* elle y avait*^ vu tant de fens aupres
she stood motionless on the beach of tne sea, a elle, 6auvent e//« demeur A it^*^ immo-
which she watered with her tears, and she bile sur le rivage de la mer qtf* elle arro-
was incessantly turned towards that quarter sait^^ de ses utrmes, et elle etait^^ sans
whore the ship ofUlys8es.plowingthewavest cesse tonm^e vers le c6t4 oil le vaisseau d'
had disappeared from her eyes. All on a Ulysse, fendant les ondes, avait^^ disparu a
sudden, sne perceived pieces of a ship ses yeux. Tout d roup, elle aper^ut*^ le*
which had just been wrecked; then she debris d*un navire gui^ vrnait^^ de faire
DESCRIED two men at a distance, one of naxfrage ; jwii elle dbcouvrit^'^ de lain
VERB. 227
INDICATIVE MOOO.
IMPERFECT TENSE.
should not use the imperfect ; we should use either the compound of the
present or the perfect^ according to the period mentioned, or alluded to ;
for though I should say,
J*^TAis malade ce matin, I was ill this morning.
J'AVAis hier grand mal a la t^te, I had a bad head-ache yesterday
I would not say :
Ttrkis malade^ but/Ai igri malade toute la maiinSe.
•Tayais mal a la tSte, but/EUS mat a la tite toute lajoum&e;
Because the state which I describe is known to fc^ve ended with the
period mentioned, viz. la matinee^ la journee,
whom was seemingly in years; the other, deux liommes dont I* un par AissAir^*^ dg^ ;
though a youth^ resembled Ulysses. He had V autre, quoique jeune, ressemblait^^ a
his sweet and lofty look, with his size and Ufyeae, il avait^^ sa douceur et safierti,
majestic deportment. The goddess onder- avec sa tailU et sa d-marche majestueuse,
STOOD that it toas Telemachus tlie son of La d^esse comprit^^' que c'etau^^ TiU-
that hero, but she could not find out who maque fits deee hires, maiselleneTCT^^d^
that venerable man was by whom Telemachus ceuvrir qui ^tait^^ eet homme vinhxible
UQS accompanied. dant Tim\aque btait^^ aceompagn4.
Now, if we select from the above passage the fttcts tliat constitute the ground of the
n nration, we shall find them to be these :
Calypso, staodiog on her iHland, perceived the wrecli of a bhip; then the descried two men, the one
yoQsg and the other old. She understood the joang one to be Telemachai, bat she could not reoogniM
ike other. And the verbs expressing these facts are in the perfect. The verbs which form only inci-
dentSt such as the description of Calypeo and her island, of Telemachas and his shiuw^reck, and which
might be left oat of the narration, without impairing it, but not without strippmgit ofits beaaties, are in
the imperfect.
Let us examine another piece of the same author, in which there will be more narra'
t*on, and less description, or more facts and fewes incidents,
Telemachus, relating the manner in which he escaped the danger of being taken by
tlie Trojan fleet, says :
The affabiUty end the courage of the sage La douceur et le courage du sage Mentor
Mentor charmed me; but I was still more «»« charmIrent*''. mats je vvs^" eticore
surprised, when I saw with what address he ^f» pl^sfurprU, quandjeyjs'Vavee quelU
J ,. J ^ *v T A* *v odresse tl nous delivha"' des Troy ens.
delivered us from the Trojans. At the j)^^ ^^ ^^^^ ^ i^ ^^^ commenca1t»«
moment when the slues began to clear, and ^a^^claireir et qvelesTroyetu, nousvoyant
the Tn^jans, having a nearer viewof us, would de plus pres, n* auraient pas manqu4 de nous
infallibly have known us; he observed one of reconnoitre; U remarqua^^^ iin de leurs
their ships that was almost similar to ours, vaisseaux qui kr AIT^^ presque semblable au
which tile storm had separated from the rest, ndtre, et que la tempite avait^** icarti. la
Her poop twu-adomed with particularflowers. PP^V^ «» eTAIT^** ecuroniUe de certaines
He haitenod to put upon our poop garlands of fi^^'- ^ ^^ *« hXta"^ de mettresur notre
flowers similar to theirs. He fastened them f'^'P* ^^* couronnes ds fleurs s^lables 11
". ' ^T ci, " TIl j««^»«* w'c"* ^ ATTACH A»»7 lut-mSim avec des bandelettes
himself with fiUetsof the same colour as those ^ ^ ^^ ^ouleur que eelUs des Troyens.
of the Trojans. He or^red all our rowers to // ordonna^^ a touts nos rameurs de se
stoop as much as they could along their baisser le plus qu'iU pourraient ie long de
benches, that they might not be knovm by leurs banes, pour n'Stre point reeonnus des
the enemy. In this manner we passed through ennemis. En cet itat nous passames^'^ au
the middle of their fleet, and wnilst they were milieu de leurflotte, et pendant que Its vents '
driven by the impetuosity of the winds towards Unpitueux Us poussai knt^*' vers I'Afrique,
Africa, we made all our endeavours to reach nousflnts^'^ lesdemiers efforts pour arrivcr
the neighbouring coast of Sicily. There in- tur la cote voisine de Sicile. Njinisy arri-
deed we arrived; but &c. vames^^ en effet ; mais 6ic. Frnelon.
The narrative part of this histoiy is ; the affability &c. of the sage Mentor charmed me, bat I was still
more sniliriMd when I saw with what address he delivered as from the Trojans. He observed one of their
fthips witn ftuwers on her poop. He hastened topnt similar nowers apon onrs. He fattened them himself
with filletM of the same colonr as those of the Trojans. He ordered all onr rowem to stoop along their
benchrs, that we might not be known by the enemy. In this manner we passed throngh tne middle of
their fleet, and made all oar efforts to reaeh the coast of Siciljr, where we arrived ^e. by which yon see
that a// the verbs which are necessary to the from of the narration, beeaase they declstt facts* are in ih
perfect tenu^ those which denote only incidents^ are in the imperfect,
P 2
142
228 VERB,
INDICATIVE MOOD.
FUTURE POSITIVE.
J'AURAl, I j/iflMi iw« have, 1 . .. . .
Je SERAI, I ihall, wW. be, } '^^jJS^^/i^^^ ti' SU**"' "^* '""''*^
Je PARLERAI, I shaU, will speak .]»"»•"' >»
141 The FUTURE tense is used in french as in english, to express nvhat is
to happen in a time to come; as,
1 will caU upon you by and by. Je passerai tantSt chez voiis.
The PRESENT tense is sometimes used in both languages, instead of the
future ; so we say,
Ou ALLEz-voiis ce soir? Where do you go this evening?
for, Ou iVLEZ'Vous ce soir f Where shall you go this evening?
N,B. But if TWO verbs denoting yii^wnYy come in the same sentence,
the second verb can not be put in the present tense in french, as it is
sometimes in euglish, it must be put in the future; as.
Call upon me, when you are ready ; the time for calling and for being
ready, having yet to come, I would not say in french,
PASSEZ chez mot, quand vous ixES prU, which would denote that the
person is ready at the time I am speaking ; I must say,
pAssEz chez moi, quand vous serez pr^t, i. e. when you will be ready.
I wtll call as soon as I have dined.
Je PASSERAI aussitot quefkunki dine; not, amsitSt que fxi dtnS,
which would denote that the person had dined at the time he is speaking.
This generally happens after the words whent at soon asy as long^ as after,
FUTURE CONDITIONAL.
J^'AURAIS, I «fcouW, toouW have, ) „^ ,^ ^^ ,^ ,^^^ _. , .^
Je SERAIS, I should, would be, \ ^'ia^ifuSiSSi.Si"*"* '^' "
Je PARLERAIS, I should, tcouldepesk; 3.
The CONDITIONAL has also the same properties in french as in english ;
it denotes that a thing would be done, if some condition was granted ; as,
I would call there, if I could. Jy passerais, sije pouvais.
Afler the conjunction if, SI; shall, will must not be considered as
signs of the future, nor should, would as signs of the conditional of the
verb which follows them ; will is then the present tense, and would the
imperfect of the verb to WILL, to be vitillino, and they must be ex-
pressed, will by the present, and would by the imperfect of the verb
VoULOIR, with the following verb in the infinitive in french ; as,
I will go with you, if you toill come witli me; i. e. if you are willing to come
J'lR.Ai avec vous, si vous voulez venir avec moi.* [^gy
I would go with you, if you would come with me ; l, e, if you were \mlling
•TiRAis avec vous, si vous vouliez venir avec moi,* [to come.
N, B. If should h the sign that follows if, it must be left out, and
the following verb put in the imperfect ; as,
Ifhe should come, what should I say to him? S*ilyiEV\iT,queluidiraiS'je?
* In these examples. Ton see will ased first as a, sign of the future of the following verb, then as the
present of the verb to wtll ; would first used as a si<fno( the conditional^ th«>n as the imperfect of the verb
to will. If the learner finds himself embarrassed how to distinguish the verb from the sign, let him try
to sabstitate in the place of will, would some verb of the sami* meaning, i. e. denoting will, yiisH, inclina-
tion, desire, sach as please, like, choose, be willing; and he will know bjr the sense it will make, which is
the verb and which is the sign. See also note * page 143.
Cgg) If SI is used for whrther ; SHALL, WILL must be expressed by the future, and
SHOULD, WOULD by the conditional ; as.
Do yvu know whether he icill ccmef Savet-'Vous a* il VIENDRa t
I want to know whHh$r he would come. ^ Je veux tavoir s' il viBNDRAir.
143
144
VERB. 229
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
It has been said, (p. 224 ») that when we declare that a thin^ is 6r ts
not, or that it is in our potoer to have it so, that mode of expression is
called INDICATIVE, or declarative; but if the thing* spoken of is not
asserted to be or not to be ; it' it is mentioned only as a thing which may
or may not be^ and is not to be depended upon, this mode of expression is
called potential^ conjunctive, or subjunctive.* 1 A C^
If we speak of an action the event of which is uncertain, which is 14:«1
generally the case when, in a sentence of tjfo parts connected by the
conjunction que, the Jirst part is either interrooative or negative,
or is attended by some expression denoting doubt; as for ex*, when I say;
Do you think your sister wUl come ?
J do not think she wiU come to-day.
Jf I hear that she comes, I will let you know ;
In which instances it remains uncertain whether the person will come
or not ; this uncertainty is imparted in french, by putting the verb in the .
second part of the sentence in the subjunctive; thus,
FenseZ'Vons que votre sceur viennb ? not, viendra.
Je NE pense pas qtCelle vienne avjourd!kui ; not, viendra.
Si fapprends qtieUe vienne, je vous leferai savoir,
VIENDRA and viENT would assert as a fact, what the first part of the
sentence shews to be doubtful.
N,B. With respect to interrogative sentences, it must be observed,
that it is only when we wish to impart ignorance or doubt of the thing
inquired after, that the subjunctive is required afler them ; for if we knew
that a thing is or wiU 6e, and only enquired whether the person to whom
we speak knows it likewise, we should use the indicative; as.
Do you not believe that Bhewillcome ? Ne croyez-vous pas qxCelle viendra ?
Do notyouknow that she is married? Nesavez-vouspasqu*elle ESTmariie?
which sentences express the same idea as these ;
She will come, do you not believe it ? She is married, do not you know it?
* A few examples will make the difference between the indicative and subjunc-
tive moods more obvious :
They say that peace is made. I believe that peace is made.
Bjp these expressions I declare, in h positive manner, that, in the opinion of some perrao, the thing of
which I am speaking (peace) does or does not exist, and this positive assertion most be made with the
indicative; thus.
On dit que la paix EST faite, Je crois que la paix est faite.
But by thetie isxpresKions :
Do they say that peace is made ? I do not believe that peace is made.
I do not assert that peitce does or does not exists I eirher declare that I am ignorcMt of it, or that I
doubt its enstence; bat a lhin|[ may exist, though I am ignorant of it; it ma^ exuit, Ihoagh I am not con-
vinced of its existence, and this uncertainty, wticther the thing is or \a not, is imparted to the bearer by
means of the subjunctive mood ;
Dit-on que la paix soiT faite? Je ne erois pas que la paix soiT faite.
Again, I know somebody whoioi// tend me money. He promised that he iwmid/eiMf me some
These are positive assertions, and they mnst be made with the itsdicative;
Je eonnais quelqu*un qui me PRATER A de l*argent.
11 a promts qu*tl m*en PR Iter AIT. fiat in these other instances ;
I seek for somebody who will lend me money.
Do you know any body who would lend me money ?
It is not asserted whether the tking I am speaking of, will, or will not he, i. e. whether the money teiii
b0 lent or not; the event remains uncertain, and this uncertainty most be expressed by the suljjmndiiMi
Je cherche queiqu'un qui me pretb, or qui veuille me priter de VargenU
ConnaisseS'-vous quelqWun out voulOt me priter de Cargent t
The indicative mood (says Harris3 which, in all grammars, is the first in order, is also the first, both m
dignity and use ; it is this which pnbliithes oar sublimest perceptions, which exhibits the soul h her
purest energies, superior to the imperfections of desires and wants, whibh includes the wh<de of time and
Its minutest distinctions.
As to the potential (jtubjmnetive') mood« it is only of a subordinate nature, and it implies but a d/tMens
and conieetural asaertioa ; wbereas that of the indieatire is absolsUe, and without reserve, CHebmvs,
page 1^ lft9.)
230
146
VERA.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
147
The SVBJUNCTIVB 9nood is required afler all verba and adjectives, tie'
noting wiU, wish, desire, command, fear, wonder, surprise, astonishment,
joy, gladness, grief, sorrow, in short, after all expressions which denote
any passion or emotion of the mind;*
I will have you do that.
I wish you may succeed,
I desired \ito he got ready.
I am afraid he will spoil it.
I am surprised he is not here.
I am glad you are come.
I am sorry he has not seen it.
as,
Je veux que vous fassiez cela,
Je souhaite que vous riSussissiez
iTaf or(lonn6 gu'oTi le prepare.
Je crains qu'il ne le oAte.
Je suis surpris qu*il ne soit pas id,
Je suis bieu atse que vous soyez venu-
Je suis fSch^ qu'il ne /'ait pas vu.
The SUBJUNCTIVE mood is also required in french after the following
verbs and adjectives, though they neither denote doubt nor passion ;
"quejy aille.
II FAUT 1 . ,
Tf 1 ffjueje le voiE.
II est temsJ^ "^
Cest le SEUL ami quefkiE,
II CONVIENT
Jl IMPURTE,
II VAUT MIEUX
II SUFFIT
II est k PROPOS
// est N^CESSAIRE .
II est indifferent]
II est CRUEL We cela soit.
II est HONTEUX J
II est JUSTE
II est INJU8TE
II est POSSIBLE
It is material
It is better
It is sufficient
>queje lui parle. Itis^^
It is necessary
1 must see him.
It is tiTne that I should see him.
He is the only friend I have.
It is becoming
^that I should go.
>>that I speak to him.
>quil le FASSE.
It is indifferent\
It is cruel . nhat it should be so.
ll\& shameful j
It \sjust
It Z ^6fc ^*"* •>** *"""" ^"^ "•
It is impossible
Jl est IMPOSSIBLE
After an adjective in the superlative degree, (see 50 rule.)
After rien, aucun, pas un, personne, (note dd, p. 219.)
After quelque, qui que ce soit, quoi que ce soit, (114, 115, 117,
118 rules.)
After the conjunctions afinque, quoique, &c. (see 218 rule.)
i ' ■ ■ ■ , I ■ . , J l ■ . , —
* The ingenious Mr. Harris, (Hermes, p. 15, 16.) gives the following definition ot
the powers of the soul, which may throw some light upon this intricate subject.
The powers of the soul mny be included in those of PERCEPTION, and those of volition
By tne powers df perception, I mean the senses and the tntellect. By the powers of
volition/ I mean not only the will, but the several passiotu and appetites ; in short, atl
that moves to action, whether rational or irrational.
If the leading powers of the soul be these two, it is plain that every speech or sen-
tence, as far as it exhibits the soul« must of course respect one or other ot these.
If we assert^ then it is a sentence which respects the powers of perception ; for what,
indeed, is it to assert, but to publish some perception, either of the <«niei,orof the intellect.
If we interrogate f if we command, if we pra^^ if we wish, what do we but publish so
many different volitions 1 for, Who is it tliat qttestions ? He who has a desire to be in-
formed. Who is it thM dananands 'i Ho who has a will, which he tvould have obeyed.
'What ard those beings who either wiak or pray i Those who feel certain loants, either for
themselves* or for oth^B.
If then the souVs leading powers be the two above mentioned, and if it be true that all
speech is a pMieation of these powers, it will follow, that every sentence will be either a
sentence of assertion, or a sentence of volition.
To tliismay be added that sentences of assertion require theiNDiCATl^ E,and 84ntence«
e( volition require the subjunctive mood after them.
YEFtB - 231
fENSES of the SUBJUNCTIVE*
The svaJUSCTirm mood being always subordinate to a verb that/^rc-
cedes it,* its tenses are regulated by ihxs foregoing verb,
PttESEJfT TEIfSE.'
J' AIE, I have, may hare, ] . ^ ^ - ^ , ..,.•_..
J«S01S. I be, ma], he, I t«dj*«rth.pm«rfwdiw»rffai.l«u.
J« P AKLE, I speak, may speak ; J
The PRESENT of the subjunctive is used, when the verb which requires 14:0
the SUBJUNCTIVE after it, is in \ht present ov future of the indicative ; as,
*tirj i\ shall have i\me? ( que f Aifi le terns?
i th'^ u"^ ^ *^^^^ ^^ ready ? pehsez-vousI que je sois pr£< ?
3 tnmK I J ^^^^ ^^^^ ^^ j^gj^p [gweyc lui parlb ?
[ij'we/AiE /e terns;
^ , // ATTENDRA^^Mcye SOIS prSt ;
[till 1 Jij^eoA; to her. [queje lui parle.
PERFECT tense.
J* EUSSE, I had, might have, i ....
J«FUSSE, I were, might he, I iuedrt« flit p»n^rf, imperjtrf, «id iWrfum-i
/ePARLASSE, I spoke, wit^fct speakjj * i Ai\
The PERFECT of the subjunctive is used, when the verb which reauires L'ru
the SUBJUNCTIVE after it, is in the perfect, imperfect, or conditional ; as,
^ |T rtill I had time; f<3f?ie/EUsSE le terns;
^ m iLd\ ^*^^ ^ ^^ ready ; II ATTENDiT-f^Mc^e fusse prU ;
? .. -^till I am ready;
<« I till r 9v%0nh in hoi
3.
till I spoke to her. l^weye hii parlasse.
^rj [till I Aac? time ; (que f^Ms^z le terns ;
S ... < till I should be ready ; f/ attend ait<| queje fusse pr^^ ;
^» ° [till I should speak to her {(qneje lui parlasse.
^W Id {^^^^ ^ ^^^ time? f^jze/EussE Ze ^cww?
^h *ti ^*^^ ^ should be ready ? attendrait i7< queje fusse j^r^/ ?
.^' [till I should speak to her? ^queje lui parlasse ?
N,B. Tl)e PERFECT of the subjunctive is aldo used, though the fore- 1 01/
going verb is in the present of the indicative, if after the subjunctive there
is another verb in the imperfect, or some conditiottal expression ; as.
Do you think I might speak to her, if I went now ?
PenseZ'Vous queje pusse Iniparler, sify allais d prisent?
I do not think 1 should have succeeded tvithout your assistance.
Jene pense pas quefEVssE reussi sans votre secours ; »• •• >*.yo» A'w' »<>«
And also when the action expressed by the verb ia ptist; as, '*^* ™*'*
It is no wonder that he was vvicked.
It ti'est pas. Stonnant quHl Ftr mechant
If, after a verb in the subjunctive, there is another verb, preceded 1 J
by the conjunction que, that verb must also be in the subjunctive ; as.
Do you think she expects that I shall come ?
PenseZ'Vous qiCeUe «attende queje vienne?
■ , . ■ . , ■ I — ■ ■ ■- I .■
* Except in some sentences of wish, where the verb vnsh is understood ; as,
God b$ blessed ! Dieu soiT Mnt /
"May you be happy ! PUissiEZ-vouj Hre heureuxf
Would to God I had never seen him ' plut a dieu queje ne V evssf. jamair vu.
152
153
154
155
156
232 VERB.
GEnuND or present participle.
-AYANT, having,}
PARLAkT, ipuSing;
The OERUND or present participle, joined to a noun, generally de*
notes quality i and, like an adjective, agrees with it in gender and nuirther^
She is a charming woman. Cest unefanme charmant^.
She has engagtng manners. EUe a des manieres ENOAOKANTe^.
But the QERUSD expressing the action^ and not the quality of the sub-
stantive to which it refers, does not require any agreement with it ; as,
I saw her in coming home. Je la vis en venant au logis, (hh)
I found them in walkine here. Je les trouvai en me promenant ici.
N,B, If the substantive to which the gerund refers is the object of
the verb, it is better to express it with the indicative ; thus,
I found her coming here. Je la trouvai qui venait tei.
I saw them walking, Je les vis qui se promenaient.
The english gerund governed by a verb, or the prepositions oFy from,
AT$ FOR, AFTER, WITH, WITHOUT, is expressed by the infinitive in french ;
I see him coming. Je k vois venir or qui vient.
Without bringing his book. Sans ap porter son livre.
I was prevented from, doing it. On rria emp^che de le fatre.
I was tired with waiting. J* eta is las d'ATTENDRE.
jifler having stayed so long. Apres avoir reste si long terns.
I was afraid of being too late. Je craignais d*y ixRE trop tard.
The GERUND, so often used in english with the auxiliary verb be, to
render an action more definite, can not be expressed by the gerund In
french ; the auxiliary verb must be Uft out and the gerund be made into
a rERB, in the same tense and person as the auxiliary verb is ; as,
I am speaking. Je parle ; never, Je suis
Thou art speaking, T%i par les ; Tti es
He is speaking. II parle ; // est
I was speaking* Je parlais ; Tetais
I shall be speaking. Je parlerai ; Je serai.
The GERUND, when used as a substantive in english, i. e. preceded by
an article, can not be expressed by the gerund in french ; it must be ex-
pressed by a NOUN, if a noun synonymous to the verb can be found ; as,
Let us go a walking. Aliens a la promenade.
Her singing was much admired. Son CHk'ST fut fort admire.
He gives all his time to gaming. 11 donne tout son terns au jeu.
That is the cause of A2>6ei72g poor, C*est la la cause de sa pauvret^.
If a NOUN synonymous to the verb can not readily be found, give
another turn to the sentence ; as.
What is the reason of your coming so late?
Quelle est la raison que vous venez si tard ? i. e. that you come Sfc.
The empoverishing of some is the enriching of others.
Ce qui appauvrit les uns enrichit les autres ; i. e. what impoverishes.
(hh) £n is the only preposition which ihe gernnd admits before it in french. therefore
the preposition BY, which is often prefixed to it in english, must be expressed by en ; as,
They saved the city by surrendering. lU $auverent la ville bn se rendant.
You gained his esteem hy forgiving him. Vous avesgagni ton esHme^v lui pardonnant.
PARLANT.
See th« conii
gatioiu, p. Hi.
VEKB. 233
EU,^ had, PAST PARTICIPLE.
£T£^ been, N.B. £T^ never vanes its terminatwa.
PARLI!, spoken; 1 ^M
The past participle joined to a noun^ has the property of an aD' 1 of
JECTIFE9 and agrees in gender and number with that noun ;
A well made man. un komme bien fa.it.
A well made woman. vnefemme bien faitc.
. After the auxiliary verbs avoir and ixRE, a disHncHon must be made. i k o
After iTRE, to BEy the pa>st participle must be of the same gender lOO
and number as the nominative of the verb; ex.
IL est bien fait. ils s'int bien faitx.
ELLE est bien Tkvte, elles sont bien FkiTes, 1 f^ i\
After avoir, to have^ the past participle does not agree with the ID J
NOMINATIVE of the Verb; so we say,
iL a bien fait. ils ont bien fait.
ELLE a bien Fkir, elles ont bien fait.
In these instances ^ou must consider whether the participle has an ob-
ject, and whether this object comes be/ore or q/ter the participle.
If the PARTICIPLE comes before its object, it does Tiot require any
agreement with it ; but if it comes ^f7£A the object, it must agree like
an ADJECTIVE in gender and number with that object ; ex.
PARTICIPLE BEtOJiE ITS OBJECT.
My brother has made a mistake, Monfrere a fait une faute.
My sister has made a mistake. Ma soeur a fait une faute.
My brothers have made a mistake, Mesfreres ont fait une faute.
PARTICIPLE AFTER ITS OBJECT.
Here is the mistake he has made. Void la faute quit a FAiTe.
Here is the mistake she has made. Void la faute qu*elle a faitc.
Herelsihemistakeiheyhayemade.Voici la faute quails ont faitc.
N. B, Observe that the participle agrees only with its direct object (see 163 mle) ; for if the object is
frovemed bjr a prepotition expressed or understood, the participle does not agr«e with that object ; so,
thoogh we say, // nous a vns, he has seen us ; we could not say. // nous a dits des nouvelleSy he has told
ns news ; we must say, il aoosa dit; because nous is here used for h nous, to us. 1 £*f\
Sometimes after the participle preceded by an object, there is a verb 1 OU
in the infinitive, then it is necessary to consider whether the object is
governed by the participle, or by tfte infinitive which follows it.
If the OBJECT is governed by the participle, the participle must be
of the same gender mk- number as that object ; ex.
The letter I have given him to copy. La lettre queje lui ai donned k copter.
If the object is governed by the infinitive which foUows the parti-
ciple, the participle has no agreement with the object ; as.
The letter I have told him to copy. La lettre queje lui ai dit de eopier.*
The participles plu, pleased; Dt, owed, ought; pu, been able; and 10 1
vouLU, been willing; do not agree with the object that precedes them,
because the injinittve of the foregoing verb is understood after them ; ex.
Je lui ai rendu touts Us services quefai pu, lui rendre understood.
I have done him all the services that I have been able, to do understood.
* If yon are uncertain whether the object b governed by the participle^ or by the in/Snitive which
follows I* ' "^ " ^ ^ "' " -" •• ' . .--1--J
If the
copy,
ietteTt and it must agree with it.
If the object comas more properlv after tbe inMnllivet as in the second instance. The letter I have told
him to copy, which nixht betumra, / haoe tola Am to copy the letter, (not, the lettf>r to copy) the object
leUmr it foramed by tiiie infinitive to copy^ and the participle has no agreement with it.
162
163
164
165
166
234 VERB.
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. .
When a verb governs Tfvo substantives (see note • page 205) one
of them is the direct object of the verb) and does not require any prt
position; the other is an indirect object, and requires a preposition,
expressed before a noun, and generally implied in the pronouns'^; as,
I gave her a nosegay, Je lui ai donne un bouquet.
Q. I ^ave tvhat t A. a nosegav. To whom f to hef.
Nfitegay is tho direct object of the verb j to her is th« indirect,
Bo not tell your mother of it, Ne le dites pas a votre m^re*
Do not tell what f do not tell it. To whomf to your mother;
For it is the thing you tell, not the Tperson you tell it to, whicn is the object of the verb.
When a verb governs two objects, the direct object is generally
placed BEFORE the indirect ; as,
I gave your sister a nosegay, Tai donnk un bouquet a votre sceur.
Yet the indirect object must be placed first, if by placing it last, it made,
the meaning equivocal ; for example, we say,
Elle a jete son bouquet dans la rue.
She has thrown her nosegay into the street; but we do not say :
Elle a jete le bouquet que vous lui aviez donnk dans Za rue.
She has thrown the nosegay which you had given her into the street ;
because, dans la rue, after donn^, might be understood that the nosegay was
given in the street, not that it was throum into the street ; we say :
Elle a jete dans la rue, le bouquet que vous lui aviez donnk.
She has thrown into the street, the noseoay which you had given her.t
The same noun may be governed by tjto verbs which are both used
withoUtvLPREPOsiTJONyOrvfhich require both the same preposition; us.
They attacked and took the place. lis attaquj&rent et prirent la place.
But if one of the verbs requires a preposition after it, and the other
docs not, or if the two verbs require different prepositions^ the noun
must be made the object of the first verb, and an objective pronoun must
be added for an object to the second verb ; so we could not say :
lis ATTAQu^RENT et sc REND I RENT matfres de la place.
They attacked and made themselves masters of the place ; because Rendre
maitre requires a preposition after it, and Attaquer does not ; we say t
lis ATTAQUERENT la plaCC, ct ^EN JIENDIRENT mattrCS,
They attacked the place, and made themselves masters of it.
The same verb may likewise govern several parts of a sentence,
provided they are used in the same sense ; as,
I expect much frotn him, but still more from you.
•Patten Ds beaucoup de lui, mais encore plus de vous.
But if one of the parts is affirmative, and the oihtr negative, the verb
must be repeated in the second part ; as,
I expect every thing from you, and nothing from him.
J^ATTENJ>sio\3t de VOUS, et je iC attends rien de lui*
Some verbs govern indifferently the infinitive or the subjunctive mood ;
but if they govern two verbs, they must be both in the same moodi as,
I will prevent him from going ou^, and from doing you any harm.
Je Vemp&cherai de sortir, ei de vous fairs du mal; or
Tempicherai qu'il ne sorte, et qu'il ne vous passe du mal,
* See a tsbto of the proaoims, paga 7^- f '^^ £»gli>A ahoyiU pay particular Atttat(oa to tliis
rule ; tKey are yery apt to act contrary to it, both in speaking aod nrxitinis.
VERB. 235
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS, - ^^
Passive verbs require de or par before the noun which they govern, 10/
They require de, when the verb expresses an action wholly of the mind; as»
Your brother is loved and esteemed by all who know him.
Voire frire est Aiui et E8Tim£ de touts ceux qui le connaissent.
They require par, when the bodily faculties participate in the action; as,
He was beaten by a sail6r> and robbed by a soldier.
II a iri BATTU PAR un matelote et vol^ par un soldat.
But instead of these passive expressions, it is better in french to use
Ihe axitive sense of the verb, and say :
Touts ceux qui connaissent voire frire VkXUiLviT et Z'estiment.
All those who know your brother love and esteem him. (ii)
When TWO verbs come together^ without being joined by a con-
junction^ the latter is governed by the former in the infinitive^
sometimes with^ and sometimes without a preposition.
The preposition to^ the sign of the infinitive mood in english, is ex-
pressed by DE, A, pour, in french, but not indiscriminately, (kk)
(ii) Grammarians distinguish thru sorts of verbs, which they call active, passive,
and NEUT£R.
Active, when the action of the verbpoiMs from the ageni to some chject', as,
1 TEACH your lixUr,
Passive, when the receiver of the action is made the leading pawei' of the verb ; this
is done by adding ^e past participle to the atixiliary verb BE ; as,
Your sister is taught by me.
Neuter, i. e. neither active nor passive, when the whole energy of the verb remains in
the agent, and is not communicated to any object ; as,
J THINK, I WALK, I STAND, J SIT, / SLEEP, ^C. ^
Thette dtjitinctions are common to all languages.
. But the £nglish;have a facility of changing ACTIVE wrhi into NEUTER verht, which
the French have not; for example, when I say;
We MET your broUiers quarrelUng ; we parted them.
Here net and parted are active^ beeaose the enersy of the verb* met^ parted partes from the agent we,
to an objact brothers ; if I take away the object, and say : we tnett we parted; then met and parted are
neuter, becansethe whole energy of the verb remains in the agent toe.
Again ; I opened the door; here opened is active, because it has an object, door.
The door opened ; here opened is neuter, because the action remains in the door itself.
To leave out this object would not render the verb neater in french, it woold only make the sentence
incomplete.
To answer the same end, and give to the verb a neuter signification, the French add
to it an (^ective pronoun of the same person as the a^ent or nominativef bv which means
tlie whole energy of the verb remains in the same being; hence the number ofrefiective
verbs with which the french language abotmds : so in the first instance.
We met your brothers, we parted them; the French Say :
Nous rencontrames vosfreres, nous les separames.
In the second.
We met; imparted. Nousr.o\ia rencontrames; Nous nous SEPARAmes; i,e.
we ourselves met; we ourselves parted.
They STOPPED me; lis m'ARR&n^RENT. ITiey STOPPED; Jit s'ARREti^rent; i.e.
they stopped themselves.
/f« OPENED tAe <2oar; i{ OVVRIT^ porte. ThedooromtED; Laporte S'OCVRIT; i.e.
the door opened itself.
N. B, The Mnius of the french lanenage requires also that some verbs which have a kind of passive
or neutar signification in enpliiih, shomd be made reflective, when we wish to shew that the aetion ex<
pressed bv the verb is not limited to the instance of which we speak, but is applicable to all instances of
the same Kind; for example:
Ce mot n'EST pas bien PLACi£ ; This word is Tiot rightly PLACED ; i. e. in this instance ;
II se PL kCE^ordinairement avant le verbe; It is generally PLACED before the verb ; t. e.
Us usnal place Is before the verb. These Instances may also be expressed by ON ; on le place ordinaire-
ment avant le verbe. See 9S rule.
(kk) When TWO verbe come together, without a conjunction between them, the laitei
is governed by the/ormer in the infinitive, whether the sign to be expressed or not.
236
VERD.
^ GOVERNMENT Of VERES.
1 U O To, before an infinitive, is e&pressed by de, when it can be changed
into OF or from, and the injinitive into the gerund ox present participle ;
N.B. This commonly happens after nouns used in a definite sense ; as,
He has the pleasure of seeing her. II a le plaisir de la voiil
She has the vanity to think so» EUe a la vanite dp. le penser.*
* As this rule does not apply to all instances in whicB to is expressed by de, here is a
list of the verb* and adjectives which require D£ before the infinitive which follows them :
s* Abstenir de.
Accuser de,
Achever de,
Afiecter de,
Afflige de,
Aise de^
Appr^hender de,
B* Attendre de, d, t
Avertir de,
B* Aviser rfe,
Bl^mer de.
Capable de.
Cesser de.
Charger de,
Abstain from.
Accuse of.
Finish to.
Affect to.
Afflicted to.
Glud to.
Fear to.
Expect to.
Warn to.
Bethink to.
Blame to.
Capable of, to.
Cease to.
Charge to.
se Garder <f«,
Gronder de,
se Hater de,
Heureux de,
Impossible de.
Incapable de,
Inspirer de.
Chsimi'dejW^ide, Mighled with.
Commander de, Command to.;
Commencer de, a,t Begin to.
Conjurer de,
Conseiller de.
Consoler de,
Content de,
Continuer de, d,t
Convaincre de,
Convenir de,
Craindre de,
Curieux de,
D^courager de
D^fendre de,
ed DIpScher de,
D^sesp^rer de,
D^sirer de.
Determiner de,
Detoumer de,
Diffirer de.
Dire de,
Discontinuer de,
Disconvenir de.
Dispenser de,
Dissuader de,
Doux de,
Ecrire de,
b' Efforcer de,
Enjoindre de,
Empecher de,
a* Empresser de,
Ennuy6 de,
Enrag^ de,
Entreprendre de,
Essayer de, d,t
Etonn6 de,
Eviter de,
Excuser de,
Exempter de.
Extorter cfe, fl,t
Fach6 ae,
Feindre de,
Finir de,
se Flatter de.
Entreat to.
Adinse to.
Console for.
Coiitent to.
Continue to.
Convince to.
Agree to.
Fear to.
Curious to*
Discourage witli.
Forbid to.
Make haste to.
Despair to.
Wish to.
Determine to.
Divert from.
Defer to, Delay to.
Tell to.
Discontinue to.
Disown to.
Dispense with.
Dissuade from.
Pleasant to.
Write to.
Endeavour to.
Enjoin to.
Prevent to.
Eager to.
Tired of.
Enraged at.
Undertake to.
Try to.
Astoni^ied at.
ilvotd to.
Excuse to.
Exempt from.
Ex/iort to.
&>rn/ to.
Feign to.
Finish to.
Flatter to.
Tafce care to.
iSco/d for.
if(ute to.
Happy to.
Impossible to.
Incapable of.
Inspire to.
Juger a proposde, TOn/c proper to.
Jurer de, Swear to.
Juste de,
Lasse de,
Libre de,
Mander de,
Manquer de,
Menacer de,
M^riter de,
N^cessaire de,
N^gliger de,
OflFrir de,
Omettre de,
Ordonner de,
Oublier de,
Pardonner de,
Permettre de.
Persuader de,
se Piquer de,
Plaindre de,
Possible de,
Prescrire de,
Presser de,
Prier de,
Promettre de.
Proposer de.
Just to.
Tired of, with.
At liberty to.
Send word to.
ftfi/ to.
Threaten to.
Deserve to.
Necessary to.
Neglect to.
Oferto.
(m«t to.
Order to.
Forget to.
Forgive for.
Permit to.
Persuade to.
Pretend to.
Pity to, for.
Possible to.
Prescribe to.
Pre« to.
Bequest to.
Promise to.
Propose to.
Recommanderde, Pecommend to
Refuser de, Refuse to.
se
Regretter de,
Rejouir de,
Remercier de,
se Rcpentir de,
Reprocher de,
R6soudre de,
Risquer de,
Rougir de,
Satisfait de,
SoUiciter de,
Sommer de,
se Soucier de,
Souhaiter de,
Soup9onner de,
se Souvenir de,
Suffire de,
Suggerer de,
Supplier de,
SQr de,
Surpria de,
T&cher de,
Tarder de,
se Vanter de.
Regret to.
Rejoice to.
Thank for.
Bepent of, to.
J?q>roacfe for.
Resolve to.
jRtife to.
B/us/i to.
Satisfied to, with.
Solicit to.
Summon to.
Care to.
W^is/i to.
Suspect to.
Remember to
Sufficient to.
Suggest to.
Entreat to.
Sure to.
Surprised to.
EndeaiMmr to.
Long to.
Boast o£
t As it souods best, i. e. de to avoid the sound of sereral a, and a to arotd tbe sound of sevinti as
VERB.
237
GOVERSMENT OF FEABS. T r»/\
TOf before an iNFiNirirs, is expressed by A, when it can be cban^ed 1 \)\f
into Jift and the english infinitive into the gerund or present participle ;
N.B. This is generally the case afler nouns used in s. partitive sense ; as.
He has pleasure in seeing her. II a du plaisir k la voir.
Is there vanity to think so ? Y a-t-il de la vanite A le PENSERpf
t As this rale is not applicable to all instances m which to is expressed by A, here is
a list of the verbs ietnd adjectives which require A before the infinitive which follows them :
'_» 4v--- A c* — A^ -V A Exercise to.
a* Abaisser d,
Accoutumer ci,
Admettre d,
Admirable h,de,*
Aftreux d, de*
Agr^able ii,de,*
Aider d,
Aimer d,
Ais6 a,
Amaser d,
Animer H,
b' Appliquer d,
Apprendre a,
•' Appreter a,
Aspirer a,
Assidu a,
■' Attacher a,
Autoriser it,
Ayoir H,
Beau d, d«,*
Bon tt, de,*
Cbarmant d,
Chercher a,
Condamneri),
Condescendre h,
Stoop to.
u4ccustam to.
Admit to.
Wonderful to.
Dreadful to.^
Agreeable to.
i/e/p to*
Li/c0 to.
£a«j^ to.
ilmuse to, with.
i4ntmat6 to.
ilpp/y to.
Learn to.
Get reacfy to.
Aspire to.
Assiduous to.
6'tic/e to.
i4M(AortM to.
iilaM to.
Fiju to.
Godd to.
C/mrmin^ to.
Seek to.
Condemn to.
Com/«scen(i to.
Coiuijt to, in.
Consistera, ^
Contraindro a, <Ze,t Compel to
Contribuer <^, Cmitrtbute to.
Demander d, i4«fc to.
D6penser d, Speud to, in.
Dernier d, I^<( to.
D^sagr^able a, de* Disagreeable to
Destiner d.
Determiner d.
Difficile a, de*
Diligent a.
Disposer d,
Donner h,
8* Echauffer a,
s' Eftbrcer d,
Destine to.
JRefo/ve upon.
Dt^cu/t to.
Diligent to.
Dispose to.
Gi»« to.
ifcat to.
iSpe/id oneself to, in.
Exercer d.
Exciter d.
Exposer a,
Facile d, de,*
se Fatiguer d.
Forcer d, ae,t
Gagner d,
Habile d,
Habituer d,
H6siterd,
Horrible d, de,*
Inciter d,
Jng^nieux d,
Inviter d, '
Laidd,
Lent d,
Manquer d,
86 Mettre d,
Alontrer d,
Obliger d, de,t
8* Obstinerd,
Occupy d,
«* Opiniatrerd,
Parvenir d.
Passer d,
Penser d,
Perdre d,
Persister d,
se Plaiie d.
Porter d,
Premier d.
Preparer d,
Pret d.
Prompt d,
Propre d,
Excite to.
Expose to.
Eau]^ to.
Get tired with.
Force to.
Gatu to.
Clever to.
Acctiftom to.
HeUtate to.
Horrid to.
incite to*
Ingenious to.
Invite to*
Ugly to.
67ai& to.
O/nit to.
iSet a6o{tt to.
6'/ieto to.
Oblige to.
Of^inate to.
Biu2( to.
06sti7iate to.
Arrive to.
5pe;id in.
'At/ii^ of.
Lose in.
Persist in.
Delight in.
Induce to.
Firrt to.
Prepare to.
Ready to.
Quick to.
Fit to.
Kecommencer d. Begin again to.
Renoncer d, Benounce to.
Effroyable d, de,* Frightful to.
Employer d, Empby to, (/se to.
Encourager d,
Enclind,
Engager d,
Enhardir d,
Enseigner d,
8* Etudier d,
Etred,
Exact dy
Encourage to.
Inclined to.
Induce to.
Embolden to*
7>ae/i to.
Sftu/y to.
Be to.
Exact to.
ll6soudre d,
Rester d,
R^ussir d,
Servir d, "
Soigneux d,
Songer d,
Sujet d,
Tiicher d,
Tarder d,
Tendre d,
Terrible d, de,*
Travailler d,
Venir d.
Resolve to.
Stay to.
Succeed to, in.
Aerye to.
Careful to.
jf'/iin/c of.
Snitject to, apt to
ilim at.
De/ay to.
7e;m to.
TetTible tO. .
W^wfcto.
Come to.
X De or d, as it sounds best in the active sense ; always de in the passive^ as,
On m*a obligi de or a Ze /aire; They have obliged ~ " " '
7* at iti obligi de U fatrs ;
. - „_ me to do it*
I have been obliged to do it.
238
VERB.
170
171
172
OOySRIfMENT OF FEMB^
To, before an xjfriNiTirEt is expressed by pour, when the words ii^
order, or with an inientiony may be prefixed to it; as,
I did it to fin order to) oblige you. Jet ai fait roua t;ov« oblioer.
We went there to see you. Nova y aU&mes pour vous voir.
N, B, The english gerund preceded by the preposition for, explaining
why a thing is done, is also expressed by the infinitive with pour;
He was hanged for having robbed. // a He pendu pour kyoir vole.
He was flogged /or telling lies. II a etefbuette pour avoir menii.
ITie INFINITIVE is used without a preposition infrench, when it is
the nominative of another verb ; as,
To he rich is nothing ; i;TRE riche tC est rien ;
To be happy is every thing. Le tout est d'etre heureux.
The INFINITIVE is also used without a preposition in french^ aflpr
the following verbs : viz.
aimer mieux ; J'aime mieux le faire. (U) I would rather do it.
ALLER ;
APERCEVOIE ;
ASSURER ;
CROIRE ;
^ compter;
DAI6NER ;
DECLARER ;
DEVOIR ;
entendre ;
knvoyer;
^ esperer ;
FALLOIR ;
s' imaginer ;
laisser;
OSER ;
PARAtTRB ;
^ penser;
prstendre ;
pouvoir ;
reconnaItre
reoarder;
retourner ;
savoir ;
sembler ;
souhaiter ;
soutenir ;
VALoiR mieux ;
VENIR ;
VOIR ;
VOULOIR ;
Allans nous promener.
Je Vaper^ois wouvoir.
// assure I' AYom fait,
II croit me tromper.
II compie partir sous peu,
Daignez me dire quand.
II declare le savoir.
II doit me Tenvoyer.
Je I'eniends parler.
Envoyez le ciifjicher.
Jesptre le rencontrer.
Ilfaut lui AIDER.
Je mHmagine y ktre.
Laissez-le dire et faire.
// n'ose /avouer.
IlparaU ^entendre.
// a pensS tomber.
PrStend il le faire ?
// na pas pu me le dire
; Je reconnais Tayoir dit.
Je vous regarde faire.
Elle retouma la voir.
iZ saii ou la trouver.
Mile semble avoir peur.
Je souhaite la voir.*
H soutieni i' a voir vu.
Let us go to take a walk.
1 perceive it move.
He asserts to have done it.
He thinks to deceive me.
He purposes to go soon.
Deign to tell me when.
He declares to know it.
He is to send it me.
I hear him speak.
Send /or it, or to fetch it.
I expect to meet htm.
It is necessary to help him.
I fancy myself to be there.
Let him say and do.
He dares not confess it.
He seems to understand it.
He had like to have fallen.
Does he pretend to do it?
He could not tell it me.
I acknowledge to have said it
I am looking at you doing it.
She returned to see him.
He knows where to find her.
She seems to be airaid.
I wish to see her.
He maintains to have seen it.
// vaut mieux lui icRiKE.{ll) It is better to write to her.
Viendrez'vousme voir? (mw) Will you come to see me}
Je vois VENIR voire soeur, I see j^our sister coming,
Elle ne veut pas rester. She will not stay.
(II) Aimer mieux, vaioir mieox, followed by another verb in the infinitive, re-
quire DE before tlie ucond infinitive; as, , n
I would rather stay than go : ' J aimerait mieux rester que D y aller.
It is better to go tnan stay alone ; // vaut mieux y alter que DE reMer Kit/.
• S<xthaiter may also b« used with de ; as, Jtf souhaite le yoir, or de le voir; I wish to see him.
(mm) Venir used for to be just, to have just, requires DE before the following infitii-
tire ; and in the sense of to liappeuy it requires A ; as,
1 have just seen her; Je vietu DE /a voir*
if she should happen to know it ; Si elle venaii A U savoir.
VEHB. 339
REM4JtK$ Qlf TBE mRBB.
With, WOULD. ^f^O
If, by WILL, WOULD, yoti wish to denote wiU, wish, derire, you mu8t 1/3
express them by the corresponding; tenses of the verb vouloir, with the
following verb in the infinilm; if you wish to express a determination, to
make a positive assertion, will must be considered as the sign of the^t*-
/wre, and would as the sign of the conditional of the following verb 5 ex.
My brother will not stay ; 1 ,, - *
viz. Is not mUing to stay. J^on frire ne vbut pas rester.
He positively will not stay. MonfrSre ne restera pas, ^'^^J,
My brother would not stay; 1 .^ /. %
vij. Had no desire to stay. /^^^ f''^''^ '^^ vovlkit pa^ rester.
fFould he not stay, if I asked him ? Ne RESTBRAiT-t7p<a», sije Venpriais?
WILL HAVE, WOULD HAVE. | ma
If WILL HAVE, WOULD HAVE are used to denote the wish, the desire jL § ^
to possess an object, they are expressed by the corresponding tenses of
vouLOiR as above, and have is left out; if they are used to denote not
the wish to possess, but an axsurance of the possession itself, they are express*
ed by the future or by the conditional of avoir ; ex.
» My brother will have this book ; 1 ,-. ^ s ,.
viz. My brother wishes to have &d. ]Monfrere veut ce livre.
He will have it, if he behaves well. II Taura, s*il se comporte hien.
My brother would have this book ; 1 ,^ /. % i- _
viz. My brother wished to have &c. ]Monfrere voulait ce livre.
He wouldhave'iU if he behaved well. II f aurait, «'«7 «c comportait hien,
N, B, If WILL have, would have, in the sense of wish, choose, are
followed by another verb, the object of have becomes the nominative
of the fbllounng verb, which must be in the subjunctive in french ; as,
He toUi have hissister go with him; 1 „ «^ ,«.•,♦ « ^« ^ i„v
i.e.He u^M.* that his siste? should go. 1^ ^^"^ ^"' '^ ^®"' ^'''''^ '^'''^ ^"'•
He «i7»7Z not have her «/ay alone. J/ ne veut jpow ^u' elle reste seule,* -^ p^m
WOULD HAVE in the sense of chosen, wished, been willing^ followed by 1 /
^paat PARTICIPLE, is expressed by the imperfect or by the conditional of
AVOIR with the participle voulu, and the english participle is expressed
by tlie infinitive in french ; as.
If you would have told him of it. Si vous aviez voulu le lui dire.
He would not have believed me. II ti'aurait pas voulu me croire.
SHOULD. , ^^
MHOULD, which is generally a sign of the conditional tense, is some- 1 / U
times used in the sense of ought, i. e. denoting duty or necessity, and is
then expressed by the conditional tense of the verb devoir; as,
Yoxxshould go and see him (ought) .Vous devriez alter le voir.
He should let me know it. II oevrait m^ lefaire savoir.
SHOULD HAVE, OUGHT TO HAVE.
SHOULD HAVE, and OUGHT to HAVE, followed by a past participle, 1 / /
are expressed by the conditional of avoir, with the participle Dt, and
the english participle is expressed by the infinitive in french ; as,
You ought to have seen him. Vo%is auriez Dt le voir.
He should havt let me know of it. II aukait D(i mele faire savoir.
• When you sAf 2 will have lyom or / would have you do such a thing^ it is not the perton that yoa
wish to hare, bat yoa wish that the person would do the thing you mention ; so we conld not say, je
vons vtwe, norJ« v«u» roae avoir, nor J4 row aarai\ which would mean that yoa want the perton^ not
that you want the thu^f to be done : we mtbt say, j« Teox que toos fassiei telle chote
178
179
180
181
182
240 VERB.
REMARKS ON THE VERBS,
MAY, MIGHT.
If MJY, MIGHT are used to denote power, may is expressed by the
present of the verb pouvoir, viz. puis; and might by the conditional
pourrmSyWiih the following verb in the infisitife; as,
^ Imay or can see it. if I choose; |j-, p„„ ;, ^^. ,. -^ ^^^
^ e. It IS in my power to see it, if &c. J ' •^ [Seenote pa«c lagj
I mzV/i< or com/c? see it, if I chose :1 r . , . ..
i. e. It would be mmy power io &c. P^ourrais ferozr, 52 ^e voulais.
If Jif^r, might denote a mere possibility , they may be expressed by the
subjunctive of pouvoir, or the subjunctive of the following verb ; as,
firing it, that I may see it; ^AjyporteZ'le, afin quejc le voie ;
i; e. That it may be in my power to see / or, qfln queje puisse le voir.
He brought it, that I might see it ; 1 // tapporta, afin. queje /e visse ;
i.e. That it might be in my power ^c, ) ' or, afin queje pusss le voir.
COULD HAV^, MIGHT HAVE.
COULD hafe, might HAVE followcd by a pa>st participle are ex-
pressed by the imperfect or the conditional of avoir, with the paniciph
pu, and the english participle is made by the infinitive in french ; as.
If he could have come sooner. ^il avait pu venir plus tot.
He might have seen it too. II aurait pu le voir aussi.
WISH.
The present tense of the verb wish, followed by another verb in th-
imperfect, or in the conditional, is expressed by the conditional of sou-
haiter, and the verb which is in the imperfect, or in the conditional in
english, must be in the perfect of the subjunctive in french; as,
I wish she had seen it. Je souhaiterais qu^elle feut vu.
I wish he would come* Je souhaiterais quHl voulut venir
I wish I had done it. Je souhaiterais ^a voir y^i^. (nn't
MUST, NECESSARY.
MUST is conjugated through its di/J^erent persons, hat its representative
FALLOiR has only the third person singular of each tense, with il for
nominative; then ihenominativeo^ must becomes the nomfna^irc of the
following VERB, which must be in the subjunctive in french; as,
I must do it. II FAUT queje le fasse.
You must do it. II faut que vous le fassiez.
My brother must do it. 11 faut que monfrere le fasse.
It was necessary for me to do it. II fallait queje le fisse, &c.*
N. B. When the nominative of must is indefinite, the French Icare'it
out, and put the following verb in the infinitive; as.
One must be mad to think so. II faut ^tre fou pour le penser..
MUST HAVE.
MUST HAVE, meaning need to havt, is also expressed by palloir, and
the nominative of must have is made the object of falloir; as,
I mitst have money. II me faut de VargenL
He must have books. II lui faut des livres.
My brother must have a horse. II faut itn cheval a mon FRERE.f
(nn) When two VERBS in the same sentence have the same person for their Nomtr.a-
tive, the French generally put tiie tecand verb in the infinitive ; as,
1 am afraid 1 shall spoil it ; Je crains de le gater.
I wish I could do it'; Je souhaiterais I'ouvom lefaire.
• See tlie different modifications of palloiBi p. 17^4. t See FAILOIR, p. 1T5
183
CHAP. VII. 241
ADXERB.
An ADVERB is to a verb what an adjective is to a noun ; it is a word
added to the verb^ to denote some circumstance belonging to it^ or the
manner in which an action is done ; as,
/ walk FAST. You walk slowlv. He often reads. She seldom writes.
There are adverbs of time^ of place, of order, of quality, affirmative,
and negative, but their properties being the same in both languages, it
IS needless to enumerate them here.'*
Adverbs in general keep the same place with the verb in french as in
english ; they are placed after the verb, when the tense is simple, and
BETWEEN iheauxiliary^iiA th^partidpleythen the tense {^compound; as,
I always esteem him much* Je testime toujours fort.
I have always esteemed him much, Je Vdi toujoitrs fort estim^.f
N, B, The ADVERB expressing some circumstance of the verb, must
be placed as near to the verb which it modifies, as can be done without
infringing upon other rules ; ex.
I saw your sister yesterday. Je vis hier voire sceur.
She speaks french very well. EUe parte TRi^S'iiiES frangais.
She likes reading very much. Elle aime fort la lebture.X
Some ADVERBS maybe placed in english, either before or after the verb I ©4
which they modify ; as, / often see him, or I see him often ; but the
corresponding adverbs must always be placed ^Fr£R the verb in french ; as»
I often walk alone. Je me promene souvent saiL
I seldom go to town. Je vais rarement d Za ville. <
I always go into the country. Je vais toujours d la campagne,
* Most of the ADVERBS are fonned from the adjectives ; in english by adding ly;
in french by adding mbnt; as,
ADJECTIVE, ADVERB.
Wbe, Sage. ^ Wisely t Shgemetii.
Afsured, Assure. Assured/y Assuremmf.
Polite^ Poll. Polite/y, Voliment.
Ansidaous, Assidtt. Assidaous/y, Assid&»«ll^
But observe that ment requires a vowel before it ; so that, if the adjective ends with a
consonant in the masculine, the adverb must be formed by adding ment to the feminine ;
as, " Masc. Fern.
Frank, Franc^ Fraache. Vnnkly, Franehement,
Public, Public, Publiqae. Public/j^, Fabliquemtfnt.
Real, Reel, Reelle. Real/y, Reellemtfa^
Good, BoHf Bonne. Good/y, Bonaem«aC.
Soft, Doiuf, Douce. SofUy, Donoement.
Generous, Oenereux^ Genereose. Generous/y, Gen«reuseta«nl^
ExcGentil, Pretty ^ which makes Gentimtfat, Pretti/y.
Except also the adjectives ending in nt, which require nt to be changed into mment, as,
CoDstant, Constant. Constant/y, Constannnea^
Dpcent, J)heent. Decent/y, DecemmenC.
Diligent, Diligen^ Diligent/y, DiligeniJTura^
EzcPresentOJ»0a^ Present/y ; Lentemeaf, Slow/y, which follow the general ftile.
I Observe only that the adverbs com pounded of teveral words generally come after the participle, no
we say, Je Fai vu tres-souvent. Je lui ai parle depnis peu. Vous etes yenu L propos. Not, Je rat tres-
Konvent vu. Je lui ai depnis peu parte. Vout etes k propos venu. Yet, in some instances, the ear alone
is consulted; for we 9Aj,je Pavms tout k fait oublie; I had quite forgotten it. Je ue the ««(< jamais si
bien diverti ; I never diverted myself <o teell. These variations must be noticed in reading.
X The perspicuity of a sentence depends often upon the right placing of the adverbs ;
for example, J*aime beadcoup d marcher, Taime k marcher bf.aucoup.
These two sentences, though they are fonned with the same words, by changioff the place of the adverb
heaueoup, express two different ideas. J'atmeJbeaucoupa marcAor, means, I am /oado/ walking; J'cuim
d marcher beanconp, means, I like to walk a great deal.
Again ; J« ne Vai pas fait pour vous divlaire ; and, Je Vai fait pour N E pas voiu deptatre
express also different iaeas j the first implies rw design ; the second implies onCf that of iwi .
dtapUasing. The English, in general, do not pay sufficient attention to the placing of the
odofrbi.
242
ADVERB.
REMARKS ON TBE ADFERBS.
HOW; QUE, COMBIEN. COMMENT.
1 o5 Hoir, denoting admiration^ is expressed by que, and the adjective or
adverb which follows HOfr, must be placed after the. verb in french ; as,
How pretty this is ! Quie ceci est joli !
How well it is done! QU*i7 est BiEsfaitI
In asking a question how is expressed by comment, to denote the
manner, and by combien, to denote number or quantity; as,
How will you do that? comment yer<?2-roii« ces^a^
Hbtt) often have you done it? combien defois Vavez-vous fait?
HOW LONG,
COMBIEN, COMBIEN DE TEMS, JUSQU'l QUAND.
XoU Hoir LONG, referring to the beginning of time, is expressed by com-
bien; referring to the duration, it is expressed by combien de tems;
and referring to the end. It is expressed by jusqu'a quand ; as.
How long have you been in France ? combien y a-t' il que vom ixBS enFrance f
or combien de tems AVEZ-roM» i^ti^ en France?
N. B. Few learners make a distinction between these two ways of expression ; yet tbe ideas which
they express are qaite different. By the first, vous Stes en Fretnce^ it is understood that the person is in
France still; by tne second, vous aves ete en France, it is understood that the person is no longer there.
How long wiin COMBIEN de tems resterez-voua? i, e. what length of time ?
)ou stay? J JUSQU* A quand resterez-vou^? i, e. until what time ?
* A list of adverbial expressions, wLich can not be expressed literally, as learners
are apt to do, some of which are not to be found in the dictionaries ;
ABOUT,
There abouts.
Here abouts,
Bound ABOUT,
ALOUD,
AMICABLY,
ASIDE,
On an average,
BACKWARDS,
BACKWARDS,
Into the BARGAIN,
BETIMES,
BETTER and better, ^
So much the BETTER, Tant mUux,
ABREAST, De front,
BY and BY, Tantpt,
By CHANCE,
CHEAP,
Most COMMONLY,
In DAY time.
In open day,
Every day,
From Day to DAY,
Every other DAY,
This DAY w«ek,
Environ,
A pen pres,
Ici antour,
A Ventour,
A haute voix,
A Vamiable,
A c6t6f d. part,
L*un dans I' autre.
En arriere, f foiling)
A reculons, (walking)
Par-dessiu le marchi*
De bonne heure,
De mteux en mievx.
That EXCEPTED,
FAIRLY,
How FAR,
As FAR as here,
As FAR as there,
AFAR off,
A ceUi pres,
De bonne foi,
Jusqu* oil,
Jusqu^iei,
Jusque Id,
De loin,
A la mode,
A la francaise.
After the fashion.
After the FRENCH, ^ .
The ENGLISH fashion, A VAnglaite,
At FIRST, D'abord.
On the same floor, De plein pied.
Within a fortnight, Dans quinze jours.
Par casfortuit,
A bon march^,
Presque toujowrt.
Dejour.
En plein jour,
Ttmts les jours.
Dejour en jour,
De deux jours Vun,
' Ilvaaujour d'hui Q jours, hour I
D aujour d'hui en liuit. Every
For FUN,
For the future,
GROPING,
On the GROUND,
HAND over HEAD,
HARD by,
HARDLY ever,
In HASTE,
HEAETILY,
tiERE and THERE,
HELTER skelter,
HITHERTO,
HOURLY,
HOUR,
This DAY month,
DESERVEDLY,
DIRECTLY,
In DISORDER,
By DROPS,
EARLY,
In good EARNEST,
EMPTY,
In EMULATION,
En badinant,
A Vavenir
A tdton^.
Par terre,
A corps perdu
Jci pres.
Presque jamaii,
A la hdte, ^
De bon caur,
Pav'ei par4ii,
P^le-m^,
Jusqu*ici,
D'heure en -fteu't,
A toute hetire.
Par mi garde,
_ . , Sans y f aire atten
f Ilvaaujour d'huiunmois,TO aU intents and Ition.
D aujour d'hui en un mois, [purposes, De fond en comble,
A bon droit* LARGELY, A pleines mains.
Tout d. I' heure, lately, Depuis peu,
A Vabandan, At last, Enfin,
Goutted goutte. At least, Au moins,
De bon matin. For less, A moins.
Tout de bon. So much the less, D'autant mains.
A vide. By little and littlf, Peu a peu,
A I'envi* Ever so little, Tant soit peu*
This DAY se 'night, _ ^ -„_„. ^ ,
tk;- r..v ^»^n;»k4 J J/yoawjourd'/iMil5?*our«. inadvertently,
This DAY fortnight, | j^i^aujoir d'hui en qiunze, INCONSIDERATELY,
aU INTENTS and
ADVERB'.
243
REMARKS ON THE ADVERBS,
HOW FAR} COMBIEN, JUSQU'Oir.
How FAR, meaning what distance^ is expressed by combibn; and
when used for to what distance^ it is expressed by JUSQu'o{y ; as,
How far is it from here? combien y a-t-il did?
How far shall we go? jusqu'ou irona-noua?
HOWEVER, HOWSOEVER, LET; QUELQUE.
HowEVERt HOWSOEVER, before an adjective; a participle, or an
adverb, is expressed by quelque with que, after the adjective, pdrticiple
or adverb, and the following verb in the subjunctive;
However rich she is ; } • r > ?# -^
or Let her be ever so rich. \ «"«"»"« ^iche <ju eUe »ott.
2V. B. If the nominative is a noun, it is generally placed after the verb ; as,
However rich her sister is; \ . . .- «_..«
^„ r . 1 • * i> • u f QUELQUE nche QUE soit sa scBur.
or Let her sister be ever so rich. f "* ^ ^
QUITE, ENTIRELY; TOUT.
Quite, entirely, before an adjective, or a participle, are generally
expressed by tout; as.
Those men are quite astonished. Ces hommes 9ont tout Stonnes.
Those, women are quite astonished. Cesfemmes sont tout Stonnkes,*
187
188
189
How long ? Juiqu' A quandf step by STEP,
As LONG as, Tantque. straight on.
In the same manneb, De meme, thoroughly,
Through MISTAKE, Parm6gard$, This long TIME,
MORE than is necessaryi Plm qxCil n*enfaut. For a long time,
M either more nor less, A^* plus ni moins, Trom time to time.
MORE and MORE,
Much MORE so.
So much the more,
At MOST,
How MUCH 1
As MUCH,
So MUCH,
Through ill NATURE,
Nothing NEAR,
Just NOW,
NOW and then,
All at ONCE,
OPPOSITE,
PURPOSELY,
On PURPOSE,
To what PURPOSE?
At RANDOM,
In every RESPECT,
SEASONABLY,
On both SIDES,
The wrong side out,
The wrong side up,
SOONER or later,
SOUNDLY,
With all 8PE£D»
At fuU SPEED,
On a SUDDEN,
De vius en pUu. . One time or other.
A mut forte raiion, TO and fro,
D^antant plus. From TOP to
Pat it pas.
Tout droit.
A fond.
r De long t&nt.
\ Depuis long'tenn,
De tetnt en tenu.
Tot ou tard.
0a et /a.
{
Tout au pltts,
Combien f
Autant, ^
Tant,
Par malice*
A beaueoup pres.
Tout de tuite.
De terns en terns*
7'out d'nn coup*
Vis'd'vis.
A dessein, Expres.
De propos dilUtir^,
A quoi bonf
A tort et a travers,
A touts igards*
A propos.
to BOTTOM, Defend en comble.
topsy tubvy.
In a TRICE,
By TURNS,
At every turn.
In the TWINKLING
of
Sens dessui dessous.
En moins de rien.
Tour a tour.
A tout bout de champ.
[an eye. En un din d*<kil.
San^ y penser,
De cote et d^autre.
En kaut.
A centre ferns,
A vue d'xil.
Tout bas,
A eontre sens*
{
unawares,
UP and DOWN,
upwards,
unseasonably,
VISIBLY,
With alow VOICE,
The wrong way,
In a WEEK, [day, Dans huit jours.
It was a WEEK yester- // y eut hier S jours.
It will be a week to- II y aura demain 8
De part et d* autre, wherever [morrow, Partoirf ou. [jours,
A Venvers. In no wise, En nulle manieie.
WORSE and worse, De pis en pis.
So much the worse, Tant pis,
A year hence, Jlya un an* [an.
This day 12 months, Jlyaaujourd^hutun
Against one's will, A centre cceur.
Whether one will or Bon grd mal gr£.
YONDER, [not. La bos*
A rebours.
Tot ou tard,
Comme il fuut,
Au pins vtte,
A bride abattue*
Ventre a terre.
Tout a coup.
• When the adjective which follows tout is feminine, and begins with a consonant, wo
make it agree in gender and number with the noun ; as,
Hiis house is quite new, Cette maison est toute neuve.
These women are quite ugly. Ces femmes sont toutes laides.
Bat, as this is done solely for the sake of melody, it would be better, especially when the noan is
\ Inrai, to mak* ase of TotA hfait, since the hearer is sometimea at a loss, whether TOUT£S means
l«'7tf or ail.
OS
244 ADVERB.
NEGATIVE ADVERBS
NO, not; NB — PAS, NE — FOUNT*
NE PLUS.
NO MORE,
NOT ANY more;
NEVER ; NE ^JAMAIS.
}
}
NE — 6 UK RE.
190
191
192
BUT LITTLEx
VERY little;
BY NO MEANS ; NE — NULliEMENT.t
The NEGATIVE expressions ne — pas, ne — point, &c. form only one
negation) ne is alw^ays placed before the verb, and pas, point, 2fi:c.'like
the other adverbs, are placed after the verb, when the tense is simple
and BETWEEN the auxiliary and the participle, when it is compound; as,
I do not like her. Je ne Caime pas, or point.
I will not see her any more. Je ne venx plus la voir.
T will never speak to her again. Je ne lui reparlerai jamais.
You have thought of it hut little. Votts N*y avez gu^re pense.
N. B. If the verb which follows not is in the infinitive, the (wo ne-
gative words ne — PAS, cr point, ne — plus, ne — jamais, may be, and
are generally placed together before the verb; as,
I am determined not to see her. J*ai resolu de ne pas la voir.
Not to speak to her any more. De ne plus lui parler.
Never to write to her again. De ne jamais lui recrire.
Without a verb, no is expressed by non, and not by non pas ; as,
Will you go to town to-morrow? Irez^vous demain a la ville?
No; I will go, but not to-morrow, non ; fy irai, mals non pas demain.
remarks on the neqatiye adverbs.
With the verb can, rendered by the conditional tense of savoir, in-
stead of the present of pouvoir, and with fvHY, rendered by que, instead
of pour quoi, not is expressed by ne only before the verb ; as,
I can not do it. /eNEjpi/f«PAS,orjeNEsaurais/e^fre.
fFhy does he 7iot do it himself? Que n^ le fait-il lui-mime?
N. B. We also generally suppress pas, point, with the verbs oser, to
Dare; cesser, to cease; and with SAVOIR, to Know; when it is fol-
lowed by si, Od, QUE, QUAND, QUEL, COMBIEN, COMMENT; aS,
I dare not do it. Je n'ose lefaire.
I do not know what to say to her. Je ne sais que lui dire.
She is incessantly plaguing me. Elle ne cesse de me tourmenter.
* Fas, point, are used indiscriminately, except in sentences of interrogation, when,
Acco«^ng to the frencli academy, poiNTintimatesactou^f, and pas a kind of a^mnation; so,
^*aveZ'Voti$ point prismou livref means, Have not you taken my booK?
and N'avez iwus pas pn's mon livre 9 means, You have taken my book, have not you?
Perhaps it would be better to give another turn to the sentence than to give these different properties
to two monosyllables which may be so easily mistaken one for the other.
Some grammarians, and even the french academy, make several other distinctions be-
tween p A3,P0i NT ; viz.that poi NTmeans notataU,never, and denies more strongly than pas ;
that PAS is said of something momentary, and point of things tliat are permanent ; so //
NE lit PAS, means. He does not read now; and U ne lit point, means. He never reads :
these distinctii>ns seem to me merely ideal ; I have endeavoured to ascertain them, and I
have not founa any author who has observed them ; the ear alone is consulted. There
are in our language, as well as in our manners, trifles which reason does not scruple lo
overlook.
t Mot andoouTTBare tXso negative expressions, but used only with the verbs tiiRP.
and voir; as,
II ne dit MOT ) He did not say a word. 11 ns voit gouttu; He does nol see at all.
ADVERB. 245
BEMARKS OS THE NEGATIVE ADVERBS,
2Vbr, after the verb rake carCy prendre garde, is not expressed in lifo
Trench, when the verb which follows it is in the infinitive^ and it is
expressed by ne^ if the following verb is in any other mood ; as.
Take care of falling, or not to fall. Prenez garde de tomber.
Take care that he does not fall. Prenez garde qu^U ne tombe.
The verb ebip^cher, to ninder, prevent. Keep from, requires a'js be- 1 y4
fore the following verb, if that verb is jiot in the infinitive; so we say;
Je tempecherai dejouer; \ , miu'j u« r i •
r» >> n I -I • t I Will hinder him from playinff.
ovaempecherai quu^Ejoue* J i j &
The verbs craindre, avoir peur, appr^hender; to re^xTy to be 11/0
Afraid; the conjunctions de peur que, de crainte que. Lest, for rear
that, require a'is" before the following verb, if we fear that the action
will happen ; then the verb has no negation in english ; as,
I am afraid that he will come. Je crains qu'il nb vienne.
Come in, lest he should see you. Entrez, de peur qu'il ne vous voie.
But NE is left out, if the following verb is in the infinitive; as,
I am afraid of spoiling it. Je crains, or fai peur de le gater.
If we fear that the action wiU not happen, there is a negation in english,
and it must be expressed by the corresponding negation in french ; as,
I fear he will come no more, Je crains qu*il ne vienne plus,
I am afraid he has not seen me. J*ai peur quit ne m*ait pas vu,
N.B, The verbs nier, to deny, and douter, to doubt, used negatively, the
conjunction A moins que, unless, and SI in the sense of h moins que, require
also ne before the following verb ; as.
He does not deny having seen her. // ne nie pas qu'tl ne tail vue.
I do not doubt but she will come. Je ne doute^pa; qu*elle nk vienne, •» rkr*
II y a — que. It is — since; de puis que, since, require jv£bef()re the 1 I/O
verb which follows them, when we wish to denote that no action has taken place
since the period we mentioTi ; then the verb may also have a negation in english;
It is long since I have seen him ; I r, ^ _ ,^„^ ._^ _,.. • ^^ r^; „„
or I have not seen him this long while, r^ ^ ^ ''^^^ ^^^ ^"^-^^ ^^ * ^* ^"•
But jv£ is not required, if there has been an action, and ?io negation
could be used in english ; as.
It is not long since I have seen him ;\r, , t . ^ . « .
or I have seen him not long since. K^ nyapas long terns que.je tax vu.
The negative particle a'js is required before the verb which follows 11//
autre, o^A^r; AVTRE^ENTy otherwise ; as,
He is quite another than I thought. II est tout autre queje ne pensais.
He speakso/Aer2i;^6 than he thinks. /i{j7ar/e autrement quHl ne pense.
After the comparative words plus, mieux, meilleur, moins, see 47 rule;
as also with personnE; qui que ce soit, see 97 rule ; rien, quoi que ck
soiT, 99; AucuN, 100; nul, pas un, 101 ; m l'un ni l' autre, 124.
But, used in the sense of the adverb only, is expressed by ne before 1 I/O
the verb, and que af^er it ; as»
She is but fifteen (i. e. only 15). EUe v*a que quinze ans,
I have seen her but once. Je ne fai vue qv^une fbis.
But is sometimes used in the sense of a relative pronoun, and is then 1 ^/l/
expressed by qui ne, with the following verb in the subjunctive; as.
There are few people but can do it, i. e. who can not do it.
Ily a peu de gem qui ne puisseni lefaire*
246
CHAP. VUI.
PREPOSITION.
Prepositions are certain monosyllables added to a'om/i^, rerbitj and
Adjectives in order to extend their meaning^ to tlie word which follows
them; as,
I came from Paris^ through Canierburyy to London.
The words from, through, to, which express a relation between the
verb came and the substantives which follow it, are called prepositions.
The FREPObiTiONs are infrench;
A
APRfis,
AVEC,
AVANT,
CHEZ,
CONTRE,
DANS,
DE,
DEPUIS,
DEVANT,
DERKlfiRE,
DURANT,
EN,
ENTRE,
EN VERS.
ENVIRON,
Atf To,
Aflir,
With,
Befivrt.
At th$ House of.
Against,
In, Into.
Of, From, By,
From,
Since, From^ For,
Before,
Behind,
During, For,
In, Into,
Between, Betwixt,
To, Towards,
About,
EXCEPTE,
HORMIS,
AlOYENNANT,
MA LORE,
NONOBSTANT,
OUTRE,
PAR,
PAIIMI,
PENDANT,
POUR,
SANS,
8ELON,
BUIVANT,
SOUS,
SUR,
TOUCHANT,
VERS,
\Save, But, Except,
For, Hy the Cleans of.
Against, In Spite of.
Notwithstanding,
Besides,
By, Through,
Among, Amongst,
During, For.
For^ In Order to.
Without. ^
f According to.
Under, Beneath,
On, Upon, Oeer,
Concerning, Affout,
Towards, Alnrnt,
* The following expressions are found in several french grammars, and even in the
dictionary of the Trench academy, in the class of prepositions :
AUPRES de,
AliTOiiR de,
a CAOSE de,
a cOte de,
en DE^A de,
au delK de,
iau* DESsoim de,
par-DESsoiis,
au - D ESS us de,
.par-DESsifs,
au DEVANT de,
par DEVANT,
au DERRii^RE de,
a
Near, By, Close to.
Hound.
On account of.
By, By the side of.
On this side of.
On that side of.
Under, Below.
• Above, Over, Upon,
a
au
le
tt
au
FOKCE de,
jusqu'a',
HORS de,
LIEU de,
LOIN de,
LONG de,
MOINS de,
MOV EN de,
I'Rb's de,
pRociiE de,
By dint of.
To, Till, Until,
Out of.
Instead of, in the place of.
Far from.
Along,
Under, For less.
By the means of,
\Near to, Nigh, By.
Behind, In the back of.
au
With respect to,
TRAVERS de, }^"^' '^""*^*' .
vis-a-vis de. Over against, Facing.
.f , ( '( » If ■
I'egard de. As to. With respect to.
And a few others which 1 have not thought proper to notice, hecause they certainly
do not belong to this class. But these words are so far from being prepositions, that it
is only by the means of the preposition de or A, that they can be connected with the
word which follows them. It is evident that they are Nouns, preceded and followed as
you see, by an Article, or by a Preposition, and coming under the rules that have been
given on nouns. According to the french academy, some of these words are both Pre-
positions and Advei'bs, They are Prepositions when Uiey govern a substantive after tliem,
and they, are Adverbs when they are used absolutely without a substantive. This distinc-
tion is right, but its application is not always so ; for example, J*itais a cbXk de ia^ wrte,
I was by the side of the door ; here a cot^ is a preposition. II iiait snr la porte, etjetais &
c6t6 ; He was on the door, and 1 was by the side of it ; here i) coti^ is an adverb. Wit!)
due respect to the french academy, 1 must say that a cbli, in these instances, seems to
me of the same nature as the substantive siV/e, which represents it in english. Certain
it is, that these words called vrepositions are all derived from nouns or verbs. If then our
. poverty of expression obltgea us to have recourse to this benevolent fkmily, I think theix
generosity should not be abused, and their nature changed Without a necessity which, in
these instances, does not seem to exist.
PREPOSITION. 247
DiFFEBEifCE between the french and English pnEPostrioNS.
Having^ found it impossible to make rules sufficiently explicit for the i20u
use of the prepositions, I have subjoined a list of all the ferbs and ad-
ject if es which require a preposition different from the preposition which
generally corresponds with it in english, l)y means of which the learner may
always remove any doubt he may have respecting the prepositions.*
I
9
Agree about,
Carry about,
Concerned about,
Uneasy about.
Discourse about,
Easy about,
Inquire about,
Talk about.
Greedy after.
Inquire after,
Thirst AFTER,
Angry at
Offended at
Vexed at
Angry at
Offended at
Vexed at
Astonished at.
Blush AT,
Exasperated AT,
Grieve at.
Laugh AT»
Laugh AT,
Rejoice AT«
Scandalised at.
Smile AT,
Surprised at.
Wonder at,
Followed BY,
Gain by
Get BY^
IVeceded by,
Profit BY,
Answer for.
Blame for,
Bless FOR,
Care for.
Chastise for,
Console for.
Design «ur,
9
Convenir
Porter
}
}
*
:}
DE ; as Nous sommes con\>enus de ceci.
sur ; Je nej9or^epas d'argent suamoi.
de 3 Je suis inquiet de sa santJ.
DE ; Nous discourons de nos affaires.
TranquiUe sur ; Jc suis tranquille sua cela.
8* Informer de ; I?iformez 'wons de son retour.
Parlons n'autres choses.
11 est trop avide de richesses.
II H*in forme sou vent de yous.
II est altM DE sang.
Inquiet
Discovrir
Parler
Avide
8* Informer
Alterb
de;
DE;
de;
de :
Fache contre ; Etre fdkche contre quelqu*un
Fachh de; Etre/dcAe de quelque chose.
EtonnS de ;
Rougir DE ;
Outre DE ;
s' Affliger de ;
Rire de ;
se Moqutr de ;
se Rejouir de ;
ScandaliterDK ;
Sourire
Surpris
Etonnk
Suivi
Gagnet
Precede
Prqfiter
Repondre
Blamer
BSnir
se Soucier
ChOtier
Consoler
Destiner
de;
de;
DE ;
db;
A;
de;
de;
de;
db;
de;
de;
de;
de;
A;
Je ne suis pas btonne db cela.
Elle rougit de sa folic.
II fut outre DE ce discours.
II sqfflige DE sa perte.
II rit or se moque de tout.
II se moque de tout le monde.
Je me rejouis db votre succ^s.
Je fus acandalisb de son action.
Elle sourit de ma confusion.
Je ne suis pas surpris db cela.
Je n' EN suis pas Stonni.
II ^(ait suivi de ses gens*
II n' a rieu gagne X cela.
Le souper fat precede D*un bal.
II n'a pas promts de yos lemons.
R^ndez'WOixs de lui? de cela?
Je le bldm£ de ses d^fauts.
Benissons'le de sa bont^.
Je ne me sottcie pas de lui.
II sera chdtiS de sa malice.
ConsolezAe de sa perte.
X quoi le destinei-yous ^
* Some grammarians liare endearoared to analyze the different relations which the prepositions hart
with the words which thef connect; so, according to them, all verbs and adjectitres expressing desire,
knowledge, rememhraneet igitoraneetfifrgetfMlnesit eare,fear^ guilty innocenceyfulneei^ emptiness^ plenty t
thejr leave so great a chasm in the field of prepositions, that I have not met with any person who has de-
rived the least advantage from them.
248
PREPOSITION.
DIFFERENCE bdwuen the French and enolish prepositioxs.
Fit
Good
Grieve
Obliged
Pity
Praise
Provide
Punish
Sorry
Sufficient
Thank
Borrow
Conceal
Escape
Escape
Hear
Take
Take
Acquiesce
Interested
Delight
Dexterous
Glory
Pride
Ask
Sensible
Think
Think
Think
Have pity
Play
Triumph
Pretend
Agre^
Call
FOR,
FOR,
FOR,
FOR,
FOR,
FOR,
FOR,
FOR,
FOR,
FOR,
FOR,
FROM,
FROM»
FROM,
FROM,
FROM,
FROM,
FROM,
IN,
IN,
IN,
IN,
IN,
IN,
OF,
OF,
OF,t
OF,
ON,
ON,
ON,
OVER,
TO,
UPON,
UPON,
Propre
Bon
s' Affliger
Oblige
Pldindre
Louer
Pourvoir
Pitnir
Fdche
Sujfflre
Remercier
Emprunter
Cacher
Echapper
Echapper
Outr dire
our
Prendre
Acquiescer
8* Inikresser
se Plaire
Adroit
se Glorifier
H EnorgueiUir de ;
• / .
UPON,
Congratulate upon.
Depend
Feed
Impose
Live
Prevail
Seize
Smile
Take
Abound
Dem-ander
Sensible
Penfer
Songer
Penser
Avoir piiie
Jouer
Triompher
se Piquer
Convenir
Passer
Feliciter
Dependre
UPON, seNourrir
UPON, en Imposer
UPON, Fivre
UPON, Persuader
UPON, se Saisir
UPON, Sourire
UPON, se Charger
A ; as_ A quoi cela est-il propre ?
Cela n*est bon A rien.
II est qfflige de ses fautes.
Je lui suis oblige de sa lettre.
Je le plains de sa faiblesse.
On le loua de sa candeur.
Qui pourvoit A ses besoins?
II sera puni de sa t^m^rit^.
Je suis fache de son malheur
Cela ne lui* siifflt pas.
RemerciezAe de ses bont^s.
II Ta emprujvth A votre pere.
Ne le cachez pas A votre ami.
Echapper d'uu endroit.
Echapper A une personne.
Je Tai out dire A mon pere.
Ne YStez pas A cet enfant.
II le LUI* a pris or 6te,
J^acquiesce A votre demande.
Je m'intSresse A sou bien-^tre.
II se plait AU jardinage.
II est adroit aux exercices.
11 se glorijie de ses richesses.
11 s'enorgueillit de sa naissance«
DemandeZ'le A cet homme.
II est irhs-sensible au froid.
Avez-vous pensS A moi ?
Vous ne songez A rien.
AveZ'Yous pens^ A mon affaire?
Vous n'avez pitik de personne.
Joue-i-W DE quelqu'instrument?
II a triomphk de ses«enuemis.
Il se pique de g^ndrosit^.
Convenons de quelque chose.
CHEZ ; Quandpo^^eres- vous CHEZ moi?
1;
de;
DE ;
DE,
de;
A;
DE ;
DE ;
A;
DE ;
A;
A;
de;
A;
A;
a;
A;
a;
A;
A;
a;
de:
A
A
A
A
A
de
DE
de
DE
DE
DE ; Je \ou6 felicOe de votre retour.
DE ; Vous ne dkpendez pas de lui.
de ; II se nourrit de pain et de lait
A ; II en impose aux gens.
DE ; II vit DE fruit et de l^g^mes.
A ; Je LUI* persiLadai de s'en aller.
DE ; On se saisit aussit^t de lui.
A ; II souriait A ses amis.
DE ; II s'est chargk de cette afikire.
en ; La France abonde en fmit.
DE ; Je ne suis pas connu de lui.
DE ; Une chambre ornke de tableaux
WITH, Fache contre ; II est ixhs^fdchk gontre vous.
WITH, Abonder
Acquainted with, Connu
Adorn with, Orner
Angry
* Observe that the preporition h is implied in LUi, which means to him. ^ table of the pronouns, p. 7^
f When think is osed in the sense of to have an opiniont of it expressed by 4€t not by k ; as.
What do yott think of that ? Qlw pentex-vout de cela t not, a cela t
PREPOSITION.
249
DIFFERENCE between the French and English prepositions*
Amuse with
Animated with
Armed with
Bathe with
Charge with
Charmed with
Compare with
Comply WITH
Contented with
Cover WITH
Deh'ghted with
Die with
Disgusted with
Dispense with
Displeased with
Do with
Embellish with
Endue with
Enflame with
Feed with
Fill WITH
Glut WITH
In love WITH
Load WITH
Meddle with
Moved WITH
Overjoyed with
Overwhelm with
Part WITH
Perish with
Pleased with
Prevail with
Provide with
Provided with
Puffed up WITH
Refresh with
Satiated with
Satisfied with
Set with
Sport WITH
Store WITH
Struck WITH
Surrounded with
Swarm with
Taken up with
Tax with
Threaten with
Tire with
Tormented with
Transported with
Do without
Amuser d?
Anime de
Arme de
Baigner oe
Accuser de
Charme de
Comparer A ";
CondescendreX ;
Content de
Couvrir de
Charmk de
Mourir de
DSgodte de
Dispenser de
Mecontent de
Faire de
Embellir de
Doner de
Enflammer de
Nourrir de
Emplir de
Assouvir de
Amoureux de
Charger de
se Meier de
TouchS DE
Ravi DK
Accabler de
seDe faire de
Perir de
Content de
Persuader A ;
Foumir de
Pourvu de
Ejifie DE
seRafraichir de
RassasiS de
Satisfait de
Gamir de
BeJouer de
Munir de
Frappe de
EntonrS de
Fourmiller de
Occupy DE
Tcwer DE
Menacer de
Ennuyer de
Tourmen^e de
Transports d«
seP/M^er de
II Pamx^^ai^ de proraesses.
II est anime de z6ie.
II ^tait arm^ d'uh pistolet.
Elle le baigna de ses larmes.
On Vaccuse de trahison.
II est charmk de ses manieres*
Ccmparez-yous ceci A cela ?
II condescend A ses caprices.
Je ne suis pas content de cela.
II est convert de poussi^re.
II fut charme de son esprit.
Je meur« DE faim, de soif.
Je suis degoUte du monde.
Dispensez-moi de cela.
Je suis mecontent de lui.
Que^ro-t-on de cet homme?
Un jardin entbeUi de fleurs.
II n'est douk n'aucun esprit.
II ^tait enfiamme de colore.
On le 7ioz/rrtfDE pain et D'eau.
Emplissez votre verre de vin.
II est oAsonvi de carnage.
II est amjoureux de cette fille.
II est chargk de butin.
Af^fcz-vous de vos affaires.
II fut touchS DE compassion.
II fut ravi de cette nouvelle.
II est accable de chagrin.
II s'est dkfait de son cheval.
II pkrit DE faim et de misere.
Elle n'est pas contente de lui.
PersjiadeZ'Lvi de le faire.
I\s Jburnissent Tarm^e de bl^.
II est bien pourvu n'habits.
II est tout en/le n'orgueil.
Se rafratchir d'uu verre de vin.
II est rassasie de plaisirs.
II n' est pas satisfait de cela.
Une botte garnie de diamants.
Elle Bejone de sa cr^dulit6.
La place est munie de provisions
11 fut frappe D'^tonnement.
II ^tait entourk de flatteurs.
Le iptiys fonrmiile de voleurs.
II est trop occupe de lui-m^me.
On le taxe de sedition.
On le menaga de la mort.
II est ennvye de ces choses.
II est tourmentk de remords.
Elle est transportee de joie.
II ne peut pas se passer D'elle«
201
250 PRE POSITION.
' DIFFERENCE between the French and English prepositions.
Sometimes tLYerh requires a preposition after it in englvth^ and wil!
not admit of it in french ; such are,
Look
Ask
Buy
Go
Look
SeU
Stay
Wait
Wish
Accept
Admit
Approve
Beg
Ignorant
at;
for;
for;
for;
for;
for;
for;
for;
for;
of;
of;
of;
of;
of;
Look at that man ;
He asks for you ;
I bought this /or a penny;
Go /or your book;
Look for it ;
Kegardez cet homme,
II vouS demande.
Xai achete ceci un sou,
AUez chercher voire livre.
Cherchez-Ze, not, pour lui
I have sold it for two pdnce; Je Pat vendu deux sous.
Stay for me ;
Do not wait for me ;
I wish for your company;
Please to accept o/'this ;
He will not admit ofihdX ;
Do you approve q/*it?
I beg of you to see her ;
Atten^ez-mot ,not,pour moL.
Ne w'attendez pas.
Je souhaite voire compas. nie.
Daignez accepter ceci^
11 w'adraettra pa>s cela,
L*approuve2-t;oM5 f
Je vous prie de la voir.
She was quite ignorant ofW \ Elle /'ignorait tout hfait.
Tyrannise over; She tyrannises over me;
202
TO,
UPON
UPON
WITH
UPON
WITH
WITH
WITH
Listen to me ;
Look upon me as a friend ;
Prevail upon her to stay ; *
Prevail with him to come ;
Elle me tyrannise.
Ecoutez- mot, not h moi*
Regardez-mo2 comme ami,
Engagez-/a h r ester,
Engagez-Za a venir.
Has lie resolved upon any thing ? A-i- il resolu quelque cfiose 9
1 bear with his importunities; /'endure ses imporiuniiis,
I met with a robber ; Je rencontrai un voleur,
I put up with his impertincfnce ;/(9souffris*on impertinence.
In other instances it is the reverse, and tKe verb which has no prepo-
sition in englishy must have a preposition after it in french; such are.
Listen
Look
Prevail
Prevail
Resolve
Bear
Meet
Put up
Abuser de
s'Apercevoir de
Avoir besom de
Avoir piti^ db
Changer db
se Defier db
se D^mettre de
Disconvenir de
Douter de
s' Embarrasser de
Gemir db
Heriter de
Jouir DE
Manquer db
M4dire db
se Metier db
se Meprendre db
se Moquer de
se Passer db
se Servir de
se Souvenir db
User DB
se Venger db
Attenter X ;
Commander X;
Compatir X ;
Convenir X ;
Seoir X ;
II abuse de ma patience ;
Je Tw'aper^ois de cela ;
JJai besoin til'aigeni ;
II n\ pas pitie db moi;
n a change de dessein ;
Vous defiez-roM« db lui f
II s'esi demis de sa place ;
Il n'EN'*' disconvient pas i
II doute DE tout;
II ne * embarrasse de rien ;
// gemit DE ses f antes ;
II a herit6 d'ww gros Men ;
Il Jouit ly^une bonne santi;
II ne manque de rien ;
II medit des gens ;
II se mefie de ses amis ;
He abuses my patience.
I perceive that.
I want money.
He does not pity me.
He has changed his design.
Do you mistrust him ?
He has given up his place.
He does not. disotvn it.
He doubts every thing.
He minds nothmg.
He laments his errors.
He inherited a large estate.
He enjoys good health.
He wants nothing.
He slanders people.
He mistrusts his friends.
He has mistaken his way.
He mocks wise people.
// s'est mepris de chemin ;
II se moque des sages ;
II ne pent pas *'en* passer ; He can not spare it,
II se sert db mon nom ; He uses my name.
Je me souviens de cela; I remember that.
II a us^ db violence; He has used violence.
Je m'HN* vengerai ; I will revenge it,
II a attente X ma vie ; He has attempted my life.
Commandez- Luri' rf'y a//fir; ^trf ^*wi to go there.
Je compatis X sa peine ; I compassionate his pain.
Cela LUit convient, or 1 That suits or becomes him
Cela Luif sied h merveille ;! wonderfully.
< * The prepo^ltfon de is Implied in the pronoan EN, whirh meaas of it; see a table of thn p^3ao^:ns
page7'^< t See note • page 251.
PREPOSITION. .251
DIFFERENCE ^between the frhnch and snglish PUEPoaiTioys.
D6fendre
X
Deplaire
X
Desob^ir
X
seFier
X
Manquer
X
Importer
X
Nuire i
X
Obdir
X
Obvier
X
s' Opposer
X
Ordonner
A
Pardonner
X
Permettre
A
Persuader
X
Plaire
X
Prend regard
eX
Promettre
X
Renoncer
X
R^pondre
X
Resister
X
Ressembler
X
Subvenir
X
Succ^der
X
Survivre
X
Toucher
X
Defendez-LUi* de le dire;
II d^plait X son pere ;
H desob^it X aa mere ;
Unese^eX personne ;
R manque X ia parole;
II LUi* importe de le voir ;
Ne nuisez X personne ;
Ob^issez X vo9 parents ;
B n*a pu obvier X cela ;
Opposez-rcm^X t injustice;
Ordonnez-Lui* de lefaire;
Pardonnez X vos ennemis ;
Fbrbidhim to tell it
He displeases his father.
He disobeys his mother.
He trusts nobody.
He breaks his word.
It concerns her to see it.
Do not ir^ure any body.
Obey your parents.
He could not prevent that.
Oppose injustice.
Order him to do it.
Forgive your enemies.
Permettez-Lui* de s'en alter; Permit her to go.
Persuadez-Lui* de la voir ;
Elle plait X tout le monde ;
II prend garde X tout ;
B LUI* a promis de venir ;
II a renonc6 Axjjeu ;
R^pondez X ma question ;
R^sistez X la tentation ;
Elle ressemble X sa m^re;
B subvient X ses besoins ;
II succ^dera X son oncle;
Persuade him to see her.
She pleases every body.
He minds every thing.
He promised her to come.
He has given up seaming.
Ansioer my question.
Resist temptation.
She resembles her mother.
He supplies her want^.
He will succeed his uncle.
She will not outlive him.
Do not touch that book.
Elle ne Lxri* survivra pas ;
Ne touchez pas X ce livre ;
In some instances the preposition may be placed In english, either ^{jfj
before or after the substantive which it governs ; but in french, the pre-
position must always be placed immediately before its object; as,
mth whom were you? ) . ^^,.„.„cw?
or frhom were you with r J ^
To loliom shall I give this ? K ^. ^^....^^v .• ™,. p
or fFhom sliall I give this to ? ^ ^ <*'^^^^^^<^^'J^ cec« r
The prepositions must be repeated in french before every tcord 204
which they govern, though these words are in the same sentence, and the
preposition is not repeated in english; as,
1 come yrom France and Italy; Je viens de France tt 6'Ttalie^
I have been to Paris and Rome ; Tai hti k Paris et k Rome,'\
REMARKS ON THE PREPOSITIONS,
FOR; DEPUIS, PENDANT, DURANT, POUR. OAJ^
FoA, before a period of time, is expressed by depuis, to denote the Ji\)o
two extremes of the period; by pendant, or durant, to. denote its dura-
tion ; and by pour, to denote the end ; as,
I have not seen him ybr a month ;
i. e. a month since, Je ne tat pas vu depuis un mois.
They fought /or two days ;
i. c. during two days. Ilssebattirent pendant deuxjoi{rs.
They have provisions/or a year ;
i. e. to last a year. lis ont des provinons pour un an,
* The vreposition X is implied in the pronoun LDI, which expresses to ^tm, to her, Se4
ft table or the pronouns, p. 74.
f This i«petitl»B ifl n«t mXtny ttecMnrjr, b«t the ttirest way for a fonipier U to make it a general
nOot until m has laamed by raadinf when the preposition may be left oot.
206
207
208
209
210
252 PREPOSITION.
BEMARKS ON THE PREPOSITIONS*
BEFORE; AVANT, DEVANT.
Speaking of time^ or order^ before is expressed by avant, the oppo*
site of which is apres, after; speaking of place or in presence, it is ex-
pressed by DEVANT, the opposite of which is DERRiiRE, behind ; as.
Do not walk before me. Ne marchez pas devant mot,
I want to arrive before you. Je veux arriver avant vons,
N. B. Without an object after it, before is auparavant ; as,
1 had seen it before, Je Vavais vu auparavant.
BY; VKi& DE, X c6Tfe DE.
J3r, used in the sense of NEARy is fres de, or k c6te de ; as.
He was sitting by or near me. II etait assis k c6Ti de moi.
He passed by or near us. Ilpassa pr^s de nouf, h cdri de notis
N. B. With the words myself, thyself, himself, 8fc., by is often
used in the sense of alone, and is expressed by the adjective seul ; as,
I like to be by myself, i. e. alone. TaimeditresEVh ; 7io<,PARmoi-m6me.
She was by, herself bW the day. Elie a ete seule toutelajoumee.
AT, TO; CHEZ.
At^ to, denoting being at j or going to a person's house, are expressed
by CHEZ, and the word house is left out in french ; as,
JioXZ:^sZ£^''' } n/aut <r,.fame c..^ ma s^ur.
She is ^r your mothei's, EUe est chez voire m&re.
N. B. If the word house, instead of being preceded by a noun, is pre-
ceded by one of the possessive pronominal articles my^ thy, his, her,
OVR. YOUR, THEIR, the word house is also omitted, and the possessive
ARTICLE is changed into a personal pronoun, thus ;
At ntj^ house ; Chez moi. At our house; Chez ftovs.
At thy house ; Chez toi. At your house ; Chez vous.
At his house ; Chez lui. At their house ; Chez eux. m.
At her house ; Chez elle. At their house ; Chez elles. f
FROM ; De CHEZ.
From, with verbs denoting coming or going from a person's house, is
expressed by de chez, and the word house is left out ; as,
I come from my sistei^s ; \ r : jt
r, "^ • A f i > Je viens de chez ma soeur.
or from my sister * house. J
Isshereturnedyrommy7no<Aer^s?E»^e^fe revenue de chez ma m^re?
N.B. If the word Aoiwc is preceded by the possessive pronominal article
my, THY, HIS, HER, OUR, YOUR, THEIR, that article is changed into a
personal pronoun, as follows ;
From my house ; De chez moi. From our house ; De chez nous.
From thy house ; De chez toi. From yofir house ; De chez vous.
From his house ; De chez lui. From their house ; De chez eux. m.
From her house ; De chez elle. From <Aefr house ; De chez elles. f
FROM; D$ la PART.
From, with the verbs to go, to come, not from the house of a person,
hut from the person himself, is expressed by oe la part ; as.
Go from me to my daughtei^s. Jllez de ma part chez majille.
Whom do you come /rom? De la part de qui venez-vous f
PREPOSITION. 253
REMARKS ON THE PREPOSITIONS.
IN, INTO J DANS» EN.
Before the names of persons and places^ in^ into are expressed by ^1 I
DANS ; as,
I have read tliat in Voltaire. J*ai lu cda dans Voltaire,
Are there fine streets in Paris? Y a-t-il de belles rues dans Paris9
N. B. Observe only with respect to places, that after verbs denoting
residence, in is expressed by A ; as,
My brother lives in Paris. Man fr ere demeure A Paris,
Before the names of countries^ with verbs denoting going or residing, mL^
iNf INTO are expressed by en ; as,
My brother lives in France. Man frire demeure en France,
Has he ever been into Italy? A -i-il jamais eie en Italic?
N. B. In other instances, in^ into before the names of countries, may
be expressed by en or by dans ; observing only that after dans, the noun
must have an article, and after en, it must be without; as.
There is some in France. II y en a en France, dans la France,
Is there any in Italy ? Yen a-i-il en Italic, or dans rji^a/£e?
Before common names used in a limited sense, i.e. preceded by any of the ^ A eJ
signs which have been called article, in, into are expressed by dans ;
In the last peace. dans la derniere paix.
In this unfortunate war. dans cette guerre malheureuse.
There are charms in society. II y a des ckarmes dans la societe.
But when the same common names are used in an unlimited sense, in ^1^
which sense they generally have no article, in, into are expressed by en ;
I like to live in peace. J*aime a vivre en paix,*
We are always in broils. Nous sommes tovjours en querelle,
' It is better to live in society. II vaut mieux vivre en societe. f
Speaking of time^ in is expressed by dans, to denote the time after jLLO
which an action will be performed^ and by en, to denote the time th.at
will be employed in performing it ; as,
I shall go to Paris in three days.
Tirai a Paris dans trois jours; viz. after three days.
JHrai d, Paris en trois jours ; i. e. I shall be three days in going.
Before nouns denoting any part of the day, inxs not expressed in french ; ^ i O
In the morning — In the evening. Le matin — Le soir.
In the afternoon. Apres-midi, or Apres-dtne,
N. B. Observe the same rule with on, before the days of the week ; as.
On Sunday — On Monday. Dimanche — Lundi ; not, sur Lundi.
On the day he came. Lejour qu*il est venu,
• Jf in some instances IN, INTO are eicpressed by EN, without an article in french,
before nouns which in english have the article A, AN ; as,
1 came in a coach ; Je vhu £N carrosse. She fell into a passion ; Elle se mit EN colere ;
It is because in these instances the noun serves less to namt^ the thin^ itself, than the manner of bein;
or acting of the arent of the verb, and these words En carrone» En colere^ may be considered as adver-
bial er.|irf-ssions ; but if we add to the same nouns some word which will render their meaning detinitSi
IN INTO must be expressed by DANS ; as,
I came in a line coach ; Je vim i>ans tin beau carrosse,
She fell into a g^eat passion ; EiU se mit dans uiie granae colere,
t Sori^U, in these two instances, is used in c different sense ; in the first instance, it
meaus that particiilar state of being caUed society ; in the secocid, it is rather an adver-
bial espression, and means sociably.
254
CHAP. IX.
CONJUNCTION.
Conjunctions are certain words, and sometimes short phrases that
serve to express the relation which several sentences have tog^ether ; as,
fVill you come, iv I go? I will not go^ unless you come.
The words if, unless, which denote a relation between the verbs come
and GOf are called conjunctions.
The conjunctions are in Jrenchf
tTfiatf To the end that, lyrAIS
UnUtt, NI,
Before, OU,
AFIN QUE,
POUR QOE,
A MOINS OCR,
AVANT QUE,
AUSSI,
BIENque,
QUOlQUB,
CAR,
enCAS que,
CEPENDANT,
COMME,
deCRAINTE que,
So, Therefore,
\ Though, Altfiough,
For, Because,
If, In cote that.
Yet, However,
As, Sinee*
\Lest, For fear that.
PePEURque,
JUSQU'a ce QUE, TUl, Until.
NfiANMOlNS, Nevertheless,
PARCE que,
POURTANT.
POURVU QUE,
PUISque,
QUE,
QUAND,
LORSqce,
QUAND,
SANS QUE,
SI,
SOIT QUE,
}
And, Both,
But,
Neither, Ner,
Either, Or.
Beeauie,
Yet, Htnoever
Provided,
Since,
That,
When,
Though, If even*
Without,
If, Whether.
Whether,*
Several grammarians reckon above one hundred conjunctions, which they call
DSCLARATirS, VIZ. SUSPENSIVS, VIZ,
SAVOIR. St.
COM MR. SAVOIR si.
C'est-a-DiRE. C'est h savoir si.
Par EXEMPLE. Qiioi qu'il ensoiT.
AUGMENTATirB,riz, DIMINUTIVE, viz.
d'ailleurs.
OUTRE.
DE PLUS.
Au SURPLUS.
RESTRICTIVE, VIZ.
SINON.
SI ce n'est QUE.
QUOique.
POUR, inz, QUOique.
ENCORE que. •
A MOIMS que.
CAUSATIVE, viz.
CAR.
COMME.
PARCE que.
A CAUSE que.
VU que.
ATTENDU que,
PUisque.
POURquoi*
AFIN que.
I>e PEUR que.
De CRAINTE que»
encore.
Au MOINS
Du MOINS.
Pour le MOINS.
ADVERSATIVE, vlz.
MAIS.
CEPENDANT.
NB'AN MOINS.
POURTANT.
TOUTEFOIS.
BIEN que.
COMPARATIVE, viz.
OOMME.
AINSI.
De MEME.
AINSI que.
AUSSI BIEN que.
AUSSI PEU que.
AUTANT que.
NON PLUS que
COPULATIVE^ YIZ.
ET.
AUSSI.
NI.
nov plus.
coNCBsaiVE, rit,
QUoi que.
A la v^ritb'.
QUAND, QUAND m^me.
NQNque, NON PAS que.
DISJUNCTIVE, V13.
OU.
OU bien,
SOIT.
BoiT que.
TRANSITIVE, viz.
En EFFET.
Au RESTE.
A PROPOS.
apre's tout.
CONCLUSIVE, viz.
OR, DONO.
AINSI.
Par CONSEQUENT.
Ceetpourquoi.
TELLEMENT que.
De SORTS que. De manii^rb que.
CONDITIONAL, VIZ. TIME and ORDER, vi&
SI. QUAND, LORSque.
SINON, PENDANT quO.
QUAND, QUAND mSme.TANDis que.
QUAND bien meme.
i MOINS que.
POURVU que.
suppose' que.
Au CAS que.
NI PLUS NI MOINS que.En cas que.
SI que. k CONDITION que.
EN, viz, COMME. Bien entendu que.
Which,except those mentioned in the table above, are either nouns or adverbs, withpnz ■
zling and useless denominationB, since their properties are the same in both languages.
Some grammarians add to these afin de ; A Mo^NS QUE de ; avaNT de ; avant que
de; AU LIEU de ; de crainte de; de peur de; faute de ; LOIN de; PLUTot qvE.de;
JusQu' d ; but the only connective part of these words being de, or A, which aie prepo*
Htumt^ they can hardly be said to belong to the conjunctions.
tant que.
avant que. .
DEPUIS que.
Dks que.
AUBSixdr que.
APRES que.
CEPENDANT.
a PEINE, ENFIN.
CONJUNCTION. 255
The CONJUNCTIONS in French affect the verbs which follow them, so as
to require some particular mood» O 1 ^
The following CONJUNCTIONS require the liVDic^rirjBWoorfaflcr them; ml §
Aussi, *o, Therefore.
CA.a, For^ Became,
CEPENDANT,
}
ou,
Either^ or.
PARCB QUE,
Because. ^
P.UI8QUE,
since.
QUAND,
[when.
LOESQUE,
QUAND,
Tho\ J f even.
QUE,
That
SI,
jfy whether.
\ii\\Q SUBJUIfCTiri
; mood af\er then
DECRAINTE QUE,*
testy For
fear that.
DEPEUR QUE,*
jusQu'a ce que.
Tilt until.
POURVU QUE,
provided.
^ QUE,t
That,
' SANS QUE,
without.
SOIT QUE,
whether.
. -. . ^^^7 However,
POURTANT, • '
COM ME, AS, Since.
MAIS, But.
N^ANMoiNS, Nevertheless,
Ni, Neither, Nor,
The following conjunctions requi
AFiN QUE, ^rhat,
POUR QUE, fro the end that.
A MoiNs QUE,* unless,
AVANT QUE, Bcfore.
RNCAs QUE, if in case that ^ — , n i rv
When a conjunction governs several verbs, it is expressed before Z 1 tf
the first verb only, and que is added to the other verbs, with the sahe
MOOD after it, as if the conjunction itself was repeated ; ex.
As he is diligent, and takes pains.
coMME it EST diligent, et qi^il prend de la peine.
He learns well, because he is diligent, and takes pains.
• Tl apprend bien, parce qvHl est diHgent, et QU*il prbnd de la peine, ^
Unless he is diligent, and takes pains.
A MOINS QU*f7 ne soit diligent, et qv'il ne prenne de la peine.
When SI, if, governs two verbs, instead of repeating si before the Z2i\)
second verb, we use que; and the verb which follows this que, must be in
the SUBJUNCTIVE, though the verb which follows si is in the indicative;
You will learn, if you are diligent, and take pains.
Vous apprendrez, si votes Ates diligent, et que vous prenIez de lapeine,
7/* you come, and 1 am not at home, you will wait for me.
SI vous VBNEZ, et QUE je ne sois pas au logis, vous nCatiendrez, (oo)
The idiom of the english language often admits an ellipsis, i. e. an omis- JdJiL
sion of the conjunction tbat ; as,
I think my sister will come ; for, I think that my sister will come.
But the corresponding conjunction must always be expressed in french ; as,
I think my sister will come. Je pense que ma sceur viendra,
I know she intends to come. Je sais qifelle a dessein de venir.
I hope she will soon be here. Tespere qv'elle sera bientSt id.
* The conjunctions A moins que, De crainte qtie, De pkur que irequire NG before
the verb which follows them ; see 195 rule.
t Lreamers are often mistaken, by considering QUE as requiring always the suljunC''
tive mood after it ; but que does not gorem any particular mood ; its power depends on
the verb or conjunction that pi'eeedet it.
(oo ) The conj unction! F is often iuppretsed fVad the nominative transpoted after the verb ; as,
Xf you thouid come, or tfiould you eome, or were you to eome^ ana I was not at home, you
will wait for me, which turn of expression must be rendered in french by SI before tho
▼erbi thus, SI vous veniez, et QUEje nefmse pa$ au logii, vous m*attendr$z.
222
223
224
225
226
256 CONJUNCTION.
REMARKS ON THE CONJUNCTIONS.
BOTH; ET, TANT.
BoTHj a conjunction of emphasis, is expressed by et before an adjec^
tivCj by ET or tant before a substantive ; but observe, that when we use
TANT before \he first substantive, we put que instead of bt before the second;
She is both rich and handsome. EUe est et riche et beUe
Both summer and winter. tant en ete QuVn hiver.
N. B. This Conjunction in familiar writing and in conversation is
generally left out in french; thus,
EUe est riche et belle. En kte et en hiver.
EITHER, OR ; OU, SOIT.
Either, or, are generally expressed by ou ; as.
That is either good or bad. Cela est ou bon ou mauvais.
Either he is rich, or he is poor, ou il est riche, ou it est pauvre,
N. B, EITHER, OR,- followed by a NOun, may be expressed by soit; as,
Eit/ier through love or caprice, she has married him. ' •
SOIT par amour ou par caprice, or soit par caprice, die Va epousi.
NEITHER, NOR ; NE NI, NI NE.
Neither, nor, followed by a verb in the indicative or subjunctive
mood, are expressed, neither by ne, and nor by ni ne; as,
I neither love nar hate her. Je ne Vaime ni ne la hais,
I neither see her nor speak to her. Je j^e la vois ni ne lui parle.
If, after neither, nor, there is a verb in the infinitive, an Adjective^
a Noun, or a pronoun, neither is expressed by ne before the verb, and
MI after it, and nor is expressed by ni; as,
I care neither for him nor for her. Je ne me soucie ni de lui ni d^elle.
She is neither rich nor handsome. EUe vilest ni riche ni bdle.
She has neither beauty nor riches. EUe N*a ni beaute ni richesses.
I can neither see her, nor speak to herJe ne puis ni la voir, ni luiparler.
WHETHER; SI, QUE, SOIT QUE.
Whether, used in the sense of if, is expressed by SI, with the fol-
lowing verb in the indicative ; as,
Do you know whether she will come ? Havez-vous si elle viendra ?
I want to know whether she will come. Tai envie de savoir si elle viendra.
Whether, used in the sense of let, is expressed by que, or soit que,
with the following verb in the subjunctive; as.
Come yourself,i£7Ae/A€r she comes 1 Venez vous-m^e,q\j*eUevienneounon ;
or not ; or let her come or not. /or Qu'eUevienneou qu'eUeneviennepas.
Whether she comes or not ; or i soix (\vCeUevienne ou non ; or Qv'ellevienne
let her come or not, we will go. / ou Qvelle ne viennepas, nous y irons,
THOUGH, ALTHOUGH, IF EVEN; QUAND.
Though, although, if even, followed by a conditional tense, are
generally expressed by quand ; as.
Though she should come.
or Even f^she should come.
She would not go with us.
QUA NO die viendrait, elle 7iHrait pas
avec nous, (pp)
(pp) These conjunctions are often left out in english, and the nominative is put after the verb, vrbiob
moae oF expression is also rendered in french by QUaND ; as,
Were the to come, or, should she come now, she would not go with as ;
Quand elle viendrait d presenttetle n* wait pas avec nous
CONJUNCTION. 257
REMARKS O.V THE CONJUNCTIONS.
BUT FOR, IF IT WERE NOT FOR, &ie. SANS.'
But for, if it were not for, if it had not been for^ had JLIiJ
IT NOT been for, are generally expressed by sans ; as.
But for you, I should have starved, sans vous,je serais mart defaim* .
But for his friends,
If it were, not for Yi\9 II \^ii\x9^ i„. ,^ .• -i -t »t» ^
ir J i t 1. x* v.- c ' \i >SANS scs amis, il auratt ete punt.
Had it not been for his friends, ( ' ^
or naa u not been jor nis menas, i
he would have been punished. J
CHAP. X.
INTERJECTION.
Interjections are natural sounds caused by some sudden emotion of
j.jy, grief, pain, aversion, disgust, fright, surprise, astonishment, Sfc,
The sounds most commonly used in french as interjections ure ;*
FOR joy;
Ct ! si je pouvais U voir,
AH ! qtieje terais aise !
Sounds caused by bursts of laughter.
0!
0/
AH!
Ahl
HA HA !
■
HI HI !
Sounds
HO HO !
*
FOR PAIN AND grief;
0!
Oi
AH!
Ah!
HE!
Ho!
AIE!
Ay I
OUF!
Oh!
HELAS!
Alas !
MON DIEU !
Odtar!
6 I qtieje stiis a plaindre !
AH ! queje stds malheureux!
HE ! vous mefaites mal,
AIE ! vous me blessez. .
OOF ! queje souffre !
HELAS ! j*ai tout perdu.
MON DIEU ! que ferai'jef
FORArERSIONf DISGUST;
f IE ! Fie upon ! FI ! n* avez'vous pas de hontff
FOR FRIGHT, SURPRISE, ASTONISHMENT ;
HA!
Ay!
HA ! vous voila.
EH!
Hah!
EH ! que vousites alerte !
OH OH !
Oh!
OH OH ! je vous y preuds.
CIEL !
Heavem!
CIEL ! qu*allonS'nnus devemr f
BON DIEU !
Mercy on us !
BON DIEU ! que VOUS ftes impatient i
FOR CALLING ;
HO! 1
HOLA ! VSounds used when we call out to people.
HEM ! J
FOR SILENCE ,*
ST! y
C'HUT ! VSounds used when we eail for a sudden silence,
PAIX ! j
* The number of interjections cannot be ascertained, because any sound which expres-
ses a sudden emotion of the soul may be called an interjection. Some of these sounds call*
ed intenections express even different sensations, according to the inflexion which the
voice takes, either of joy or grief, of pleasure or pain. The soul is then the only syntax
fox interjections, and they can never embarrass the learner, since they do not require any
rules.
/
229
258 CHAP. XI.
IDIOMS.
Remarks on some idiomatical expressions, and words having dif-
ferent meanings, in which leaniers are apt to be mistaken.
PEOPLE; PEUrLE, GENS, PERSONNES, MONDE.
JiJi^ People, meaning that aggregate body of human beings that compose
a Nation, a Government, is expressed by peuple ; as,
The French people, Le pevple franqais.
The will of the people. La volonti du peuple.
N. B. Peuple is also said of that number of persons without dignify,
who compose the Multitude ; as,
An insurrection of the people, Un soulevement du peuple.
People, used to denote a certain number of individuals, is expressed
by GENS, PERSONNE, MONDE ; aS,
Were there many people, i. e. persons, at the play ?
Y avaitil beaucoiip de gens, beaucoup de bionoe a la comidie ?
There is a great number of people in the street.
Ily aun grand nombre de monde, de gens, de personnes dans la rue..
But observe that gens is not used after a definite number ; so we do not say.
Deux ou trots gens ; two or three people; we say, Deux ou trots personnes.
Except when gens is attended by an adjective; as
Deux ou trois honn^tes gens. Two or three honest people.
Cinq ou six jeunes gens. Five or six young people.
Observe also that when gens is attended by an adjective, this adjective
must be feminine if it comes before gens, and it must be masculine if
it comes after ; as.
Good people, civU people. De bonnes gens^ des gens civils.
Old people are suspicious. Les vieilles gens sont soup^onneux.
COUNTRY; PAYS, CAMPAGNE.
Pays is said of a large extent of country, such as the Dominions of a
government, a county ^ a province; caimpaqne is said of a certain extent
of Fields, and is the opposite of ville, TOwn; as,
France is a fine country. La France est un beau pays.
I prefer the country to the town. Jeprefere la campagne d la ville,
MOUTH; BOUCHE, GUEULE.
Speaking of men. Horses, mules, ASses, we express mouth by bouche ;
The mouth of a horse, of an ass. La douche ^un cheval, d^un dne.
Speaking of other Auimuls, we express mouth by gueule ;
The mouth of an ox, of a dog, &c. La gueule ctun boeuf, (tun chien.
The mouth of a pike, of a trout. La gue ule d^un brocket, d^une fruite.
TIME ; TEMS; FOIS.
The word time, denoting any period, or space, is expressed by tems ;
It is time to set out. II est tems de partir.
We shall not be there in time. Nous ny serous pas k tems.
But the word time is sometimes used to limit the action of the verb,
or to denote a repetition of the action; as, the ^rst time; this time; an-
'other time; several times, and is then expressed by fois ; as.
Pardon me for this time. Pardonnez-moi pour cette fois.
I will do it better next time. Je leferai mieux la prochaine fois.
How many times hav^ you done it? Combicn de rois tavez-vous fait ?
230
231
232
IDIOMS. 2t59
YEAR; AN, ANN£E.
DAY; JOUR, JOURNEE. OQO
An and jour are indefinite expressions which serve more to denote the JtOO
periods of time than its duration ; they are chiefly used after the cardinal
or primitive numbers i;n, Dciix^ rrois, auatrey 8^'c. ; as,
tin AN, deiLX ANs, trois ans,- &c. A year, two years^ three years, Sfc.
Un JOUR, deujp jours^ irois jours. One day, two days, three days^ Sfc
Anni^e, on the contrary, implies duration, and will admit of different
modifications ; so when year is attended by an article, or by an adjec-
tive, or by another noun, you must express it by ann^e ; as,
This year, last year. Cette annee, Tannek demiere.
A good, a happy year, line bonne, une h^ureuse annee.
A great number of years, Un grand nomhre d* annees.
Journ^e is generally understood of the time which people employ in
their occupations from their rising to their going to bed ; as,
I spent the day very well. J'ai bien employe la journi^e.
I have studied the whole day, J^ai eiudie toute la journ^e.
MORMNG; MATIN, MATINEE.
EVENING; SOIR, SOIREE. OQ/I
It is the same with matin, matinee ; soir, soiree, as it is with jour, ^o4
JOURNEE. Matin is said of the Jirst, and soir of the last part of the day,
but they do not imply any idea of duration. Matinee, on the contrary,
implies the whole time from day light till noon; but is generally under-
stood to be from the time that people get up till twelve o* clock at noon ;
and SOIREE implies the whole time of darkness till twelve dclock at night,
or WW people retire ; as.
It was fine this morning, Ilfaisait beau ce matin.
I have studied all the morning, J*ai etudie toute la matinee.
Shall we see you this evening V Vous verrons-nous ce soir ?
I shall spend the evening with you. Je passer ai la soiree avec vous,
N. B. Saluting people, for good morning, we say son jour, not
Bon mxitin; and for good nigiit^ we say bon soir, in the early part
of the night, and bonne nuit, when the night is^r advanced.
NIGHT; NUIT, SOIR.
If, by night, you mean the whole time of darkness on that part of the JtOO
earth which we inhabit, you express it in frcnch by nuit ; as,
Where did he sleep last night? Oh coucha-i-il la nuit demiere?
Hespeutthewhole72ig'/£<attheba11.J/pa.95a toute la nuit au bal.
If, by NIGHT, you mean only the^rs^ part of darkness which is other-
wise called evenings you express it by soir; as.
Will you go to the play to-night ? Irez^vous a la comedie ce soir
Were you at the ball last night ? Etiez-vous au bal hier au soir
TWELVE O'CLOCK; MIDI, MINUIT, no/*
It is twelve o'clock. U est midi fin the day, J II est minuit (at night.) 2tO\)
It is a quarter past 12. // est midi et un quart. li est minuit etwn quart.
It is AaZ/*past twelve, II est midi et demi. II est minuit et demi.
It is three quarters past twelve. 1 n j i
T* «««♦« ««•.«•/-« L ««« (^ ^^ ^^*^ heure moms un Quart.
it wants a quarter to one. j
It is one o'clock. // est une heure.
It is a quarter past one. II est une heure et un quart, &c.
r2
237
238
239
260 IDIOMS
To HAVK, expressed by fcTRE.
The auxiliary verb have is expressed by the same tense and person of
the auxiliary ^tre, to form the compound tenses of reflective veubs; as,
I have hurt myself. Je me suis blesse.
He has gone away. II s'en est alU.
We have sat down. Nous nous sommes assis.
You have walked. Vous vous fexES promen^s.
They have diverted themselves. J/«se so^t divertis, [seepage 115.]
The auxiliary have is also expressed by the same tense and person of
£tre, when it comes before any of the following participles ;
Agreed,
Arrived y
Become^
CONVKNU.
come.
VENU.
Fallen,
tomb£.
ARRIVE.
come in^
ENTR^.
Gone,
ALL]g.
DEVENU.
Dead,
MORT.
neturned.
REVENU.
SURVENU.
Deceased,
dec£de.
set out.
PARTI.
Nl^.
Disagreed,
DISCONVENU.
succeeded.
PARVENU.
Born,
I have set out early. Je suis parti de bonne heure.
He has agreed to do it. II est convenu de kfaire.*
We have arrived in time. Nous somaies arrives a terns.
You have returned too soon. Vous ^tes revenus trop tot.
They have gone too far. lis sont alles trop loin.
To BE, expressed \yy AVOIR.
The auxiliary verb be is expressed by the same tense and person of the
auxiliary avoir, when it is followed by the adjectives nungry. Thirsty,
cold, warm, not denoting the natural feelings; Right, wrong. Ashamed;
because these adjectives are expressed by a substantive in french ; as,
I a7n hungry. J\ifaim,
He is thirsty. II a soif.
His feet are cold. // kfroid aux pieds.
She is warm or hot. Elle a chaud; not, eUc est chaude.
Her hands are warm. Elle a chaud aux mains.
We aie right. No7is avons raison.
They are wrong, ashamed. lis ont tort ; its unt honte,
N. B. The verb be is also expressed by avoir, in speaking of the Age
of beings, because iu these instances, as in the above, the French use a
substantive instead of an adjective; as, [^have you?
How old are you ? Quel age axez-vous? i. e. What age
I am sixteen. J'ai seize ans; not, Je suis seize.
How old is your horse? Quel age a votre cheval?
* When the participle convenu means suited, it requires avoir ; as,
Ceta m* AV RAIT fort hien convenu ; That loould have suited me very well.
]V. B, The participles soRTi, gone out, been out; VASsi, gone by ; MOfiTK, gone up, <i5-
eended ; drscendu, come down, require avoir or ktre, agreeably to thjp sense in which
they are used ; but tlie same distinction, I think, is observed in english ;
Mon pere A sorii; My father has been out. 11 etait sorti; He vms gone out.
Jl A pass^ pres d'ici ; He has passed just by. J I EST passt ; He is gone by.
J I A nionte Id eoiline/ He has ascended the hill. 11 EST monti ; He is gone up.
11 A descendu Vescalier; He Aas come down the stairs. 11 est descendu ; He is come down.
Dlmeur^, used for lived, dwelt, requires avoir ; and for remained, staid, it requires
ETRR ; as,
II A demeiiri a Paris; He has lived in Paris. IL EST demeuri d. P. ; He has staid in P.
AccoURU, run fo,* Vi(Rl, perished; apparI}^,comvaru, appeared; DISVARV, disappear-
ed ; CRv, grown; D^CRU, g*-own less; RECRU, grown again, take indifferently avoir or
ETRE.
IDIOMS. 261
I'o BE, expressed by FAIRG. c\ A /\
The verb be, attended by an adjective or a substantive denotins: the iS4U
state of the weather, or of the jtmosphere, is expressed in french by the
same tense of the verb faire, with IL for its nominaiive; as,
• How is the weather? Quel terns Ykxa-il?
Is the weather fine? pait-i7 beau tents?
Yes, the weather is very fine. Out, it fait irds-beau terns.
It is rather wann. II fait un pext chaud.
It is very cold. II fait tres^froid, or grand froid.
The weather has been bad lately. II a fait mauvais tejns depuis petu
To BE, To DO, expressed by Se PORTER. O >! 1
The verbs be and do, used to denote the state of the Body, are express- ^4 i
cd by the same tense and person of the reflective verb Se porter; as,
How are you? how do you do ? Comment vous PORTEz-ro?/«?
I am pretty well, I .thank you. Je me porte assez bien, dien niercL*
I have not been well. Je ne me suis pas bien PORT^.p % , a
How is your mother ? \r'> » j j. 'j
H, ^ .1 J o >^ommcnt se porte madame;\ votre
ow does your mother do? ) '
To BE, expressed by DEVOIR . O /I O
The present tense of the verb iijs, am, art, w, are, and the imperfect ^'Xiw
was, were, followed by another verb in the iNFiNiriFE, are expressed
by the same tense and person of the verb devoir ; as,
I am to go there to-night. Je dois y alter ce soir.
He w to come to-morrow, II doit venirdemain; not, il est &c.
He was to bring it to-day. // devait Capporter avjourdhui.
To BE, not expressed in french. r% j o
The iiifinitive word ro be, followed by a past participle, is not ex* ^4e5
pressed, but the english participle takes the place of the i/tfinitive be,
and is expressed by the infinitive in french; as.
There is nothing to be seen. II n^y a rien h voir.
He caused his head to be cut off. II Ixiijit couper la tete.
This house is to be let, to be sold. Cette maison est a louer, ^ vend re.
To BE Just, To HAVE Just; VENIR DE, Ke FAIRE Que DE. ^ . -
The verbs have and be followed by the adverb Just, to deiwte an ac- ii'x'i
tion past at the moment we are speaking, are expressed by venir de, or
Ne faire Que de, in the same tense and pers(m as have or be are, and
the english participle is expressed by the uifinitive in french; thus,
T y.«, i^Moi or.«™^ j*^^ viENS d^arriver; or,
1 am just come. < r i» •
•' ( Jfi ne pais que d ar river.
nT 1 *u L J ' J i \Monfrere WENKiT de finir ; or.
My brother had just done. S tlt v ^ "^ i j: - *
^ •^ [Monfrere ne faisait que de^n/r.J
* The French do not, as the English do, thank thos« who inquire after their health. Intitead of Je
Tou» remercie; thejr say, J)ieu merci; A voire service; Vous etet bien bon^ or bien civii; Vous avez bien
de la bonte,OT they retarn the coniplinfient after the answer by saying, Et vousf and^ov /
t It is customary with the French, in mentioning the relations of the people to whom
they are speaking, to add the words Monsieur, Madame, Mademoiselle ; as,
Comment se porte monsieur voire pere, monsieur votrefrire?
J'ai rencontri MADAME cotre mere, mademoiselle voire sxur'y these words can not
be expressed in english.
X Do not confound tie fairE Q.ue DE, To be just. To have just, with Ne FAIRE Que, #
which expresses another idea, vix. To do nothing but; DK added to the first makes the
difit- rence between these two expressions.
245
262 IDIOMS.
WAS NEAR, WERE NEAR, HAD LIKE ; PENSEK.
IFjs NEAR, WERE NEAR followcd by a prcsent participle, and had
LIKE followed by an infinitive, denote an action which was on the point
of being effected, and are expressed by the perfect tense, or the present
compound* of the verb penser ; as,
I was near dyins: ; 1 t> • ,£ • * •
T J. ^ 7f * u J- J f*'^^ PBNSE, orje PENSAi* viounr.
or I had like to have died. •^
You were near falling ;
or You had like to have fallen.
246
247
'Fous avez PENsi tomber.
e ^ we r mg , i j^ ^ pENsi, or il pensa* ^tre tue.
or He had like to have been killed. J
THERE IS, THERE ARE, IT IS FAR, IT IS LONG, AGO,
IT IS SINCE, THIS, THESE; IL Y A ; IL Y AVAIT, &c.
There is, there are, it is far, it is long, it is since, ago,
and the demonstrative words this, these, pointing out a period of time,
are expressed by the impersonal verb il y a ; il y avait, &c. ;t as.
Is there any news to-day ? y a-^-il des nouvelles aujourd!hui ?
Are there flowers in his garden ? y A-^f/ desjleurs dans sonjardin ?
How ferwrt from Calais to farisPl ^^^ ^ ^^^^^ ^^ ^^^ ^ ^^^p
or How ^r is Calais from pans? J
It is a hundred and fifty miles. il Y A cent dnquante milles.
Calais is 150 miles from Paris. il y a cefit dnquante miUes de c, a p.
How long has he lived here^ Comhien y a-/-il qvHil demeure id?
He has been here these six months, il y a six mois quHl est id.
Ji^wlOyearsw/icehewasinFranceliL Y a dix ans quHl etait en prance;
or He was in France ten years «g-o. for, II etait en prance il Y a dix ans.
It is lonff since I have seen him. ) , ^ .^ . + » •
Tu °. u- ^f 1 u-1 hi^YxloTig'tenisquejeNEiraivu.
or I have not seen him <m* long while) ^ ^i ^ t
It was 12 months sijice I saw him 1 . „ .
TU J * u- jt in xu }ihY awkiTunanquejeNEtavaisvu.
or I had not seen him ^^ese 12 months. J 5^ •'
HERE IS, HERE ARE ; THIS IS, THESE ARE ; VOICI.
THERE IS, THERE ARE; THAT IS, THOSE ARE; VOILA.
Here is, here are, this is, these are, pointing out any object,
are expressed by voici; there is, there are, that is, those are,
also pointing out an object, are expressed by voilA ; as.
Here is, or this is your horse. voici voire cheval.
Here are, or these are your boots, voici vos bdttes.
There is, that is a man who says. voilA un homme qui dit.
N. B. It is to be observed that, when the nominative of the verb which
attends here, there, in the above sense, i. e, pointing out an object, is a
personal pronoun, this nominative pronoun is changed into an objective
pronoun in freneh, and placed bepore voici, voilA ; thus.
Here I am. me void. Here we are. nous void.
Here he is* le , void. There she is. la ' voila.
Here they are. les void. There they are. les voild.
• Agreeably to 136, 137 rules.
i See the conjugation of the impersonal verb Y AVOIR, page 173. t ^^ the 196 rule
§ The French do not give fo the different periods of tiine names which correspond with the English.
For a week, they say« huit jours; for two w8ek«,or a fortnight, they say, quxnae jours; three weeks, troit
sevuiines ; four weeks, un ntoU ; for a quarter of a year, they say, trots mots; half a year, six mois ; thrve
4(iarter8 of a year, ne^fm^^u ; twelve months, unan.
IDIOMS.
263
LET; QUE, LAISSEZ. • QAik
Let, implying command or permission to a third person, is expressed I24o
by QUE, and the object of let is made the Nominative of the following
verb, which must be in the subjunctive in french ; as.
Let him do it himself. Qu'i7 le fosse lui-rnhne.
Lei her go, if she likes. Qu'c//e y aille, si elle veut.
Let them go too. Qu'f^, or qv^elles y aiUent aussL
Let my brother go alone. que monfrire y aille seuL
Let, commanding or entreating a second person, is expressed by the
second person of the imperative of the verb laisser, with the follow-
ing verb in the infinitive ; as,
Let him go ; permit him to go. latssez-^c alter.
Let her go ; permit her to go, LAissEz-/tf aMcr.
Let them go; permit them to go. hkissEz-les alter.
Lc/ my brother go; sujffer himio go. ItAIssez oiler monfrdre.
N. B. Let know, meaning to inform^ is expressed by faire savoir,
ttgreeably to tense and person ; as,
Let him know that I will come. faites lui savoir queje viendrai,
. I will let him know it to-night. Je le lui ferai savoir ce soir.
To MAKE ; FAIRE, RENDRE. ^ . ^
To make, meaning to perform some work, or some action, is expressed ^4t7
by faire ; as.
To make a book ; to make a noise, faire un livre ; faire du bruit.
To make great progress. faire de grands progrcs.
But to make, expressing not the performance of an action, but the moral
or natural effects of one being on another, is expressed by rendre ; as,
Exercise makes the body healthy. Vesercice rend le corps sain.
Vice makes men unhappy. Le vice rend len hommes molkeureux.
Misfortune has made n\m wise. Le mcUheur to rendu sage.
To CAUStl, To HAVE, To GET; FAIRE. •
The verbs cause, and have; and get, in the sense of cat/«e, meaning ^^(J
to order, or procure a thing to be done, are expressed by the same tense
and person of the verb faire ; and the english participle which follows
HAVE, or GET, is exprcsscd by the infinitive in french 5 as,
I had him arrested ; 1 r r ^1
1 . J u* / u A J W^ * -^i PA IT arreter.
or i have caused him to be arrested. J
I shall have him punished ; \j h v 'n
or I shall cause him to be punished.} • ^^^ ^*
Get your watcli mended. faites raccommoder voire montre.
To CAUSE To BE DOiVE or MADE, To HAVE or Uatbtp vATur'
GET DONE or MADE, To ORDER, To BESPEAK ;P^^'^^ FAIRE.
To cause to be done or made. To have or get done or made, 25 J
To ORDER, To BESPEAK, are expressed by the verb faire repeated ; i.e.
the ^rst verb in the same tense and person as cause, have, get, order, or
bes])eak is, and the second verb in the infinitive; as,
I am going to get a watch made. Je vais fairs fairs une montre*
Where will you have it made? l^s 1^ «
«-WK :ii - J •* J o fOu la FEREZ-VOUS FAIRE?
or Where will you get it doner J
I shall have it made in Paris ; 1 r 1 y. n •
or I shall get it d<me in PHri,. K" '« "''*' "-^""^ * ^«"*-
253
254
264 IDIOMS.
^^^ To ASK, To DESIRE; DIRE, PIUER, CHARGER.
JdOJj We say in French as in english, demander une chose, to ask for a thing ;
DiSsiaEa une chose, to wish for a thing ; but we do not say ; demander
de faire une chose, to ask to do a thing ; nor d£sirer vne personne de
faire une chose, to desire a person to do a thing ; therefore, when ask
or DESIRE are followed by another verb in the infinitive, ask must be
expressed by dire or prier; and desire by prier or charger; as,
He asked me to do it. II me dit, or il me pria de le faire.
He desired me to tell you so. I/m'apRi£, or charge c?e»;o?/s /erf/re.
To LOOK; REGARDER, PARAITRE. AVOIR LA MINE.
Tq look, meaning to view, to consider, is expressed by regarder ;
Look at this man, at that horse, regardez cd homme, ce cheval.
To LOOK, meaning to seem, to Appear, is PARAixRE, avoir i/air, avoir
LA MINE, AVOIR APPARENCE ; RS,
That man looks very proud. Cet homme a /'air bienfier.
You look very well to-day. Voiis avez bonne mine aujourd^hui.
This bread looks well. Ce pain varkit ban, or k bo nneidiNv^*
How does the country look? Quelle apparence a la campagne?
To SUPPOSE ; SUPPOSER, PENSER, S'IMAGINER.
The French say as well as the English, supposer une chose, to sup^
pose a things \. e^to take it as granted for the sake of argument; as.
You suppose (i. e. you take for granted) a thing which is not probable.
Vous SUPPOSEZ une chose qui n^est pas probable.
But the verb suppose, so often used in english in the sense of to rhink,
to Fancy, to imagine, can not be expressed by the verb supposer in
french ; it must be expressed by penser or s'imaginer; as,
J suppose you know the news, i. e. I think, I imagine, 4*c.
Je m'iMAGiNE que vous savez ks nouvelles ; not, Je suppose, Sfc.
It is supposed that there lias been a battle ; i. c. it is thought, 8;c,
On pense, on ^'imagine qu*il y a eu bataille; never, On suppose.
To HOPE ; ESPERER.
To HOPE; Se FLAITER, AIMER a CROJ.RE, Se PLAIRE a CROIRE.
The verb hope followed by a Future tense, is expressed by ksperer ;
I hope you will be well by and by, to-morrow, &c.
,r espere que voits vous portercz bien tantot, demain, Sfc,
N.B. HOPE, being the expectation of something to com«,can never be said in
french of what is past or present; so when the verb HOPE is followed by the/we-
S(mt or peifect tense of another verb, it can not be expressed by Esperer ; it roust
be expressed by Se Flatter, Aimer h croirr, Se Plaire a croirb ; as,
I hope you are well. Je me flattk, or J'aime d croire, or
Je me plais d croire que vous vous portez bien ; never, /espere.
I hope that I have not kept you waiting.
Je me FLAXTEt que jene vous at pas fait atlendre; never, j'espere.
Yet, in these instances, we may also use the verb esperer, if we trans-
pose it in parenthesis at the end of the sentence ; thus,
Vous vous portez bien, /espere. You are well, I hope,
Je ne vous ai pas fait attendre,fESvicRE. I have not kept you, I hope.
* MINE is said of the luok of persons^ and o( things that are eatable, such as bread, meat, f nut, Sfc
bat it cannot be eaid of other things.
t Je me flattl, in this sense, does not mean I flatter myself; it means, I like to IhinV
to fersuade myself.
255
IDIOMS. 265
To TAKE; MENKR. PORTER.
I'jBRiiVG; AMENER, APPORTER. OK '^
Mener, to TAKE^ is said of beings thai have the salural faculty o^ juO(]
n diking; porter is said of the same beings when they have losl^ or are
not able to use that facuhy ; and of Things ; as,
Take my horse to the stable. menez mon cheval a teatrie.
Take the saddle to the saddler. portez la selle an seUier. ,
Amener and apporter are used in the same sense as stcner and
porter^ but they imply a relation to i\\^ place in which we are; as.
Bring me my hor^e. AMENEZ-mof mon cheval.
Bring me my whip. ' APPORTEZ-moi monfouet,
Tn USF ' /^« SERVIR de, USER de, En USER,
' ITRAITER, AGIR, AVOIR COUTUME. O^ ^
To USE, meaning to make use of Things, is expressed by the reflective ^t) /
verb se servir de; as, /
I am vsi?ig my knife, my pen, my book, my horse, &c. . *
Je me sers de mon conleaie, de ma plume, de mon livre, de mon cheval;
not J'r sE mon eouteau^ ma plume, <^. l)ecause user une chose, means, to wear
out a thing, not to make use of a thing.
Yet speaking of moral or intellectual objects, we express use by user de;
To use patience, violence, reprisals, precaution.
user de patience, de violence, de represailles, de precaution.
To use, speaking of the Manner of Acting towards persons, is expressed
by TRAiTER, £71 USER avcc, AGIR avcc ; as,
lie uses me well.
// 7ne TRAiTE blen; II en use bien avec moi; II agit bien avec moi.
He has not used me well. II ne rtCa pas bien trait^.
To USE, meaning to be Accustomed to, is expressed by avoir coutumb,
or £:tr£ AccouTUMi; as,
You are used to it. Vom y 6tes accoutum^.
He was not tised to do so. // 7^*avdit pas coutume dagir ainsi.
To HELP ; AIDER, SER VIR. ^ r
To HELP, viz. to Assist a person to do a thing, is expressed by aider; Jiti ^
Shall I help you to do it? Vous AiD^RAi-jie d lefaire?
My brother will not help me. Monfrere ne vcut pas wi*aider.
Bnt to HELP is often used in the sense of to rake, to Ojffer, to present
a thing to a person; help is then expressed by servir, not the person
to the thing, but the thing to the person ; as.
Shall I help yow to a glass of wine? Fous s^RviRM-je un verrc de vin?
i. e. shall I help a glass of wine to you ?
Help that gentleman to a glass; servez vn verre A ce tnonsienr;
not, SERYBZ ce' monsieur A un verre ; for it is the glass that you help or pre^
sent to the gentleman, not the gentleman to the glass.
To ATTEND, explained in the following examples ; O ^* *
To attend a meeting. aller or assister d une assembltm, ^^
To attend to one's duty. fairs or rrmplir son devoir, 1
To attend to what is said. faire attention d ce qtCon dit.
To attend to business. s*appliquer aux affaires.
To attend a sick
266 IDIOMS.
To attend a sick person. oardeb or soigner un malade.
To attend a patient, viz. to visit, voir or visiter un malade.
To attend a master, to wait upon, servir un mattre.
To attend a maater, to be taught prendre legon dun maitre.
To attend a pupil, to give Icsaona. donner lefon a un ecolier,
T WANT J AVOIR BESOIN, AVOIR £N\aE, DfiSIRER,
' ISOUHAITER, VOULOIR, DEMANl^ER.
^OU ^0 WANTt meaning to be in Need of a thing, or under the Necessity of
doing a thing, is expressed by avoir bbsoin ; as,
I want money, clothes; am in need. Tai besoin dargent^ d*habits,
1 do not want him ; have no need. Je 7i*ai pas besoin de luu
I want to go to town ; f. e. must go. Toi besoin daller a la ville.
But WANT is often used to denote merely wish or Desire; it is then
expressed by avoir envib, d]£sirer, souhaiter, vouloir ; as,
I want to see him; i. e. I wish, Je desire or souhaite de le voir,
I wa?it to speak to him; (wish) J'ai en vie de lui parler,
I want him to learn french. Je veux quHl apprenne lefrangais.
To WANT a person or a Things in the sense of wishy is demander ;
Whom or what do you want? Qui or que demandez-vou^?
You are wanted; He wants you. O/i vori5 oemanoe ; i?voti«oEJifANDE.
To MARRY; MARIER, Se MARIER, fiPOUSER.
^Ol If. by MARRYy you mean to Give a person tn Marriage, or to perform
what is called the ceremony , you must make use of the verb marier. If,
by MARRY, you mean to take a person t;i Marriage, you use ^pouser;
My father has married his niece.
Mon pere a hari^ sa niece ; i. e. has given her in marriage,
Mon pere a ^pousi sa niece; i. e. has taken her for his wife.
That parson has married my sister.
Ce prUre a mari^ ma soeur; i. e. has performed the ceremony.
Ce pretre a ipous^ ma sceur; i. e. has taken her for his wife.
N. B. MARRIED, in the sense of raking a wife, is expressed by ipousi
after the auxiliary have, and by mari£ after the auxiliary be; as,
I have married his sister. J'ai ^pous£ sa sceur; not mari£.
I am married to his sister. Je suis hari£ a «a «a?ur ; not Spouse.
To MARRY, m a Neuter sense, i. e. without an o6;ec/ added to it, is ex-
pressed' by the reflective verb ae marier ; as,
When do you marry Y Quand vous m ARiEZ-rotw ?
I will never be married, Je ne me kariekki jamais.
To RIDE, ejplained in the following examples ;
262 To ride well. se tenir bien a cheval.
To ride in a coach', on horseback, aller encarrossCi kller a cheval.
FAIRE un TOUR CJl co^pTOSse ;ov.
To take a ride in a coach.
To take a ride on horseback.
se PROMENER cn carrosse.
FAIRE un TOUR d chevol; or
se PROMENER d chcval.
N. B. To RjDEf attended by any particular object, i. e*. an object deter*
mined by any of the signs called Article, is expressed by alleh; as,
I will ride your horse, and you will ride in my coach.
J'iRAi sur voire cheval, et vous ibez dans mon carrosse.
IDIOMS. 267
Ti WALK; MARCHER. Se PROMENER. O^Q
If, by IFJLK^ you mean th« action of ^oin^ from place to place, either ^\)ij
for Business or Exercise^ you must use marcher; as,
fFalk a little faster. marchez un peu plus vile,
I can not walk any more. ^ Je ne puis plus marcher.
i have walked too much to-day. J^ai trop marche aujourcthui.
If, by WALK, you mean that exercise which is taken for Diversion, you
must use the reflective verb se promener ; as,
Let us walk a little, PROM£NON8*no2^ un peu* [ctkui.
I have not walked to-day. Je Tie me suis pas promen^ aujour-
N. B. To TAKE A WALK is expressed by faire un tour, or by faire
Une PROMENADE, FAIRE UU TOUR de PROMENADE ; RS,*
Let us go and take a walk, ^^on« faire un tour (^promenade.
Go and iaJce a walk in the garden. AUez faire un tour dans le jar din,*
To COME; ALLER. VENlR. OfiA
The English oflen use the verb come, with reference to the person to ^U4r
whom they speak; so speaking to a person in the street, they will say:
I will.coME and see you to-morrow, meaning, at the person^s house;
The French, on the contrary, speak with reference to the place^ and
not to the person ; so this sentence :
I will COME and see you to-morrow, may be expressed two ways;
Je viendrai voim voir danaiiu being then at the place in which you
are to come to see the person.
J'iRAi vous voir demai?i, meaning the place where you are to go to see
the person ; for, yenir means to move from a place in which we are not
at the lime we are speaking, to a pUice in which we are; aller means to
move from a place in which we are, to a place in which we are not.
In asking a question, come is expressed by venir; but in the answer,
the verb must be determined by the place, not by the person you are to go to.
Ta RETURN ; RETOU RN ER, RE VENIR. O ^ C
The English use the verb return both for to oo hack, and to come JlXio
hack; but in french you must make a distinction.
If, by return, you mean to go back^ you must use retourner ; as,
I come from Paris, and I will return to-morrow; t. e. will ao hack.
Je viens de Paris, etfy retournerai dtmmn.
If, by RETURN, you mean to come bade, you must use revenir; as,
I am going to Paris, and I will return next week; i. e. will come hack.
Je vais a Paris, etje reitiendrai la seniaine prochaine,
N. B. To RETURN, meaning to Give hack, to Restore, to Repay, is ex-
pressed by rendre ; 'as.
Return me my money. RENDEz-mot mx)n argent.
Have I not returned it to you? Ne vous tai-jepas rendu?
To CALL ; T ASSER CHEZ. OflP
To CALL a person, is appeler auelqu'un; but to call at sl person's, ZuO
or UPON a person is passer chez uuelqu*un ; as, ^
When will you call upon me? Quand pa.ssekez-vous chez moi?
I will call upon you to-morrow. Je passerai demain chez vous.
Never say, appelbz sue moi, call upon me ; ;* appsu.brai sur vous, ^.
* Faire urn tour is generally aaderstood of a thort toalk; and Fair$ une promenadey Faire un tour de
promenade means to take a walk, without any limitation at to time, hatrather long than thort.
267
268
269
270
2G8 IDIOMS.
To BREAK; ROMPRE. CASSER.
RoMPit)2 IS said of things which require some effort to break them, such
an wood and metals ; as.
You have broken my stick. Vous avez rompu mon baton.
Casser is said of things that are frail, such as gIoss and Earthenware,
He has broken the plates. II a CASsi les assiettes.
The glass and bottle are broken, Le verre et la bouteille sont cassis.
N. B. In speaking of Bones, we use indifferently rompre or casser ;
He has broken his leg. II s^cat cass£ or rompu lajambc.
Without specifying any particular object, we use casser; as.
They break every thing in this house. On casse tout dans cette maison.
And for break to pieces^ we say briser; as,
The ship was broken to pieces. Le navirefut tout brise.
To LIKE; AIMER, TROUVER.
To LIKE, meaning to be Fond of, to have a Liking for a person oi a
thing, is expressed by aimer; as,
I like wine, money, pleasure, France, the country, &c.
Jaime le vin, t argent, le plamr, la France^la campagne, 8fc.
But LIKE is often used, especially in asking questions, for to rhiuk, to
iiave an opinion, and is then expressed by penser or trouver ;
,T 1 II Ai • ^ n / i-e. What think you, what is your
How do you like this country ? io;7t/iio» of this country ?
Que PENSEz-roiw de cepays? or comment trouvbz-i?ou« ce pays?
Yet in the answer we use aimer ; as,
Je Taime beaucovp, Je Taime assez bien. Je ne Taime pas du tout
I like it much. I like it well enough. I do not like it at all.
To KEEP; CARDER, TENIR, AVOIR.
To KEEP, meaning to preserve, to watch, to Guard, to Look after, is
expressed by garder; as.
Keep it for my sake; i e. preserve. okRDZZ-le pour V amour de moi.
This dog keeps the house ; watches. Ce chien garde la maison.'
This boy keeps \\\q flocks; looks after. Ce garcon oahdb les troupeaur.
These instances excepted, tn keep is generally expressed by tenir
She keeps a house, a school. Elle tient maison, ecole.
He keeps an inn, boarders. // tient auberge, des pensionnaircs.
To keep in prison, in the house. tenir en prison, dans la maison.
To keep clean, to keep ready. tenir proprc, tenir pret.
To keep cows, horses, a coach, avoir des vaches, des chevaux, un
carrosse. Familiarly we say; rouler carrosse ; to keep a coach.
To GET; GAGNER ; GOT not expressed infrench.
The verb get, meaning to Gain, to win, to Earn, to Acquire, is ex-
pressed by GAGNER ; as.
He gets or earns five shillings a day. II gagne cinq shdings par jour.
He has 5*0/ ori^OTi adealof money. // a gagn£ beaucoup d! argent.
But the participle got, so often added to the verb have, to denote pos^
session, is 7iot expressed in french, and is perhfips useless in engHsh ; as,
He has got a deal of money. II a beaucoup d^argent.
Have you gfo< any money about you? AVEZ-ww/* de Vargent sur vous?
You have got a new hat. Vous avez 7//* chapeau neuf; not,
vom avez gagn£, which means, you have won, gained, earned^ ^c.
IDIOMS. 269
ToSPLND; DEPENSER, PASSER. ^^1
Speaking of Money, property, to spend is expressed by d^penser; jL§ L
speakini^ of rime, spend is expressed by passer; as.
He spends a\\ his money in gaming. II defense tout son argent djouer.
He spends all his time in hunting. // passe tout son terns d la chasse.
To CHARGE; PRENDRE, FAIRE PAYER, PRIX. c\^c%
Tlie verb charge, so often used in speaking of the price of things, 2ii m
can not be expres^d in french by charger, which means to load, or to
GIVE IN charge; it must be expressed by prendre, faire payer, or
by PRIX, with some other verb ; as,
How much do you charge a day for a horse? L e. do you require?
Combien vre^ez-vous par jour port r un cheval?
How much do you charge for a saddle? what is i\\Q price of a saddle?
. Combien p rev e7.-vous pour une selle? or auelest le prix d'uneselle?
You charge too much ; i. e, the price is too high.
C*est TRop, c^est trop cher, vous prenez trop, vous faites payer irop;
never, vous chargez trop; vous avez charge trop,
T r/i *« nrrrT. f ALLER au-DEVANT de,
10 UU to ML1.1 , IaLLER a la RENCONTRE de; ex.
Let us go and meet your sister. allons aw-DEVANT.de votre sceur, lit O
„r • J ^ \Nous AiiLioNs a \>otre rencontre ;
We were ?o.;,gr to wierf you. |^^„, ^^^^^^^ axi-T^^SK^t de vom.
274.
275
"^ ^^^^ailF'^^'^^..^ ^rr. .n UpPROCHER, S'aPPROCIIER de.
. To GO NEAR, To COME NEAR; )
Approcher means to bring an object near, and .s'approcher de
means to go, or come near an object; for ex. I shall say:
APPROCHEZ la table. Bring the table near.
But if I said to a person come near or go near the table ; I should not say,
APPROCHEZ la table; I must say, APPROCHEZ-ro?/« de la table; for it is the
verson who is to approach the table, not the table to approach the person.
I brought my sister near me. J'approchai ma sceur de moi,
I went near my sister. Je ji'approchai de 7na sceur.
To HEAR ; ENTENDRE, ENTENDRE des NOUVELLES, &c.
To HEAR a person is entendre QUelqulun; as,
I hear your sister coming. J'entends venir votre sceur.
But TO HEAR FROM a pcrson, is not entendre de Quelqu*un; hear
is then expressed by entendre des nouvelles, apprendre des nou-
VELLES, RECEVOIR deS NOUVELLES ; as.
Do you hear from, your sister often?
ENTENDEZ-VOl/A, or APPRENEZ-V02/S, Or RECEVEZ-tJOW* SOUVCtlt dcS NOU-
VELLES de votre sceur? not, entendez-to?/* souvent de votre sceur?
I hear from her almost every day.
J'entends, or j'apprends, or je re^ois presque touts les jours de ses
NOUVELLES, OX des NOUVELLES d^cllc; not, j'entends D'elleSfc,
IT IS WITH; IL EN EST DE. 97 ^
It is with, denoting a similarity between two objects, is expressed ^4 \J
by IL EN ebt de; as.
It is with you as with me. I\EiizsTdevouscomm^demoi.[mille,
It is with a state as with a family. II en est d*un etat comme d^unefa-
277
270 IDIOMS.
WHATEVER, IN VAIN, TO NO PURPOSE; AVOIR BEAU.
Avoir beau is an expression very prevalent in conversation, instead of
EN VAIN, iNUTiLEMEiirT; SO, instead of saying;
C^est en vain queje lui dis (Vhtudier^U n'enfaitrien;
It is in vain that I tell him to study, be does not do it ; we say;
J\i BEAU lui dire d^etudier, U n* en fait rien. ,
To FIND FAULT WITH; TROUVER d REDIRE d; ex.
He Jinda fault with every thing. II trouve d redire d, tout.
Whdii fault can he found with it? Que peut-on y trouvbr d redire?
To TAKE IT KINDLY; SAVOIR BON GRE.
To TAKE IT UNKINDLY; SAVOIR MAUVAIS GRE ; ex.
If he comes,'I will take it kindly, SHI vient,je lui en saurai bon gre.
He would take it unkindly of me. II m^en saurait mauvais ore.
T'ake it kindly or unkindly » SACHEz-m en bonaaicm mauvais gr^.
To DO WITHOUT, To BE EASY WITHOUT; Se PASSER de; ex.
Can you do without a horse? Pouvez-vous vous passer de cheval?
I can not do without one. \r • f
T * . -..,Mi.^. 4 :* 1*'^ ne puis pas m en passer.
I am not easy without it. ) ^ *
281 WHAT IS THE ^UTTER, \ QU'VA-T-IL, QU'EST-CE QUIL Y A,
278
279
280
WHAT IS IT ABOUT, >QU'EST-CE QUE,
WHAT IS ITf JqU'EST-CE QUE C'EST? ex.
ffhai is the matter there? qu'v A-t-il Id ; qu'est-cc qu'il yhld?
What is the matter with you? qu'est-ce que vous avez ?
What is the ma^^er with your hand? qu'est-ce que vous avez d la main?
N. B. Qu'est-cb que is very prevalent in conversation, instead of
QUE ; so instead of saying :
que dites'vous ? What do you say ?
qjj^ faiie»-vcms? fTAo/ are you doing? we say:
qu'est-cb que vous dites ? qu*est-ce que vousfaites ?
282 IS IT, IS IT NOT, )EST-CEQUE,
DOES IT, DOES IT NOT, VN'EST-CE PAS QUE,
HAVE I, HAVE I NOT? Jn'EST.CE PAS?
These expressions are often used to ask questions ; but they serve less
to require information, than to shew a kind of pear or surprise, that the
thing about which we inquire should be different from what we thought
or wished it to be ; the difference will be made obvious in the following
examples ;
Vous en allez-vous ? Are you going ?
EST-CE que vous VOUS en allez ? You are not ^oing, are you ?
Ne sortirons-nous pas ? Shall we not go out ?
N'est-ce pas QUE nous soriirons, | ^^ ^^^,j ^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^ ^^^ p
or Nous sortirons, n est-ce pas f }
It seems to me, however it may seem to other people, that these two
ways of asking a question, imply different ideas.*
♦ These are the words which, I have remarked, generally embarrass the learner ; but
he will hnd in the course of his studies, several other idiomatical expressions of less
importance and too numerous to be explained in a grammar ; they are found in the dic-
tionaries, and will be learned by taking notice of them in reading.
271
EXERCISES
ON THE
RULES CONTAINED IN THE SYNTAX.
ARTICLE and NOUN.
1 The article must be of the same gender and of the same number
article doit itre mime genre m. et nombre m.
88 the noun ; The horse, the cow, the sheep. The bread, the meat, the
que nom ; m* cheval, vache, b^ebit.i Tpain, m. viande^ f.
clothes. My garden, his house, his trees. Her finger, her ring, her
^abit.\ jardifif m. maisotif f« arbi-e. doigt^ m. hague, f.
gloves, A dish, a plate. Some butter, some sauce, some pepper,
gant, plat, m. assiette, f. beurref m. tauce, f. paivre, m
some mustard, some capers. This wine, that beer, those glasses.
moutarde, f. eSpre, vin, m. biere, f. verre,
2. The article must be pronounced easily with the noun ; Do you""
doit te prononcer aisiment avee — t ||
go*** to the assembly to-night ? I will go*** to the opera. Shall you go"* to
aUer§ auembUe ee soirf — allerf^ op^a. — *■■ aller
school this summer? I shall go*** towards the beginning of autumn.
feeole it£ m. f -^ aller vers commencement m. ^automne.
(Let us go) (as far as) that tree near the church. Do you hear***
*• - alloM jusqu*ii arbre m. pi'h de ^glise. — *** entendre§
that bird? Have*** you heard the history of that man? He has***
oiseau f m. Avoir entendu *histoire 'homme f avoir
sacrificed his honour to the interest of the state. My ingenuity and
9aerifi6 'honneur intuit 4tat» ing^nuiti et
my exactness have*** (at last) won her affection and her esteem.
exactitude avoir enfin gagni affection estime.
* Theie exercises betu(r intended for persons who have written the introductory exercises, and for
persons of a riper understaDding who are able to comprehend many rules at once, snch rules only will be
pointed oat in each exercise, as the learner is supposed not toJiave seen, when he writes that exercise,
that he may hare an opportunity to exercise his recollection.
t See rales for the formation of the plural namber of nouns, p. 183 and following.
t A dash under a word shews that the word is not expressed in french.
jj The figures at the top of the words indicate the paragraph where the rule which
that word requires is to be found.
§ The Infinitive only of the yerb is given here ; the learner must himself find the right
tense and person, agreeably to the conjugation to which the verb belongs ; therefore it
IB necessaiy that he should peruse the conjugations, before he writes these exercises
272 EXERCISE.
ARTICLE and NOUN.
3. The article must (be repeated) before every noun ; Briniif me
article doit ae rip^ter avant chaqxie nom ; Appoitez *•
some pens, •ink, and 'paper. I have a letter to write to my uncle
• plume, *encre et papier, m. lettre t a icrire onvle
and **aunt. This paper and ink are"* not g^ood. Lend me your wax
tante, » etre *•* ban »» Fretex *• cire m
and seal. My father and mother have*** invited your brother and sister
cachet, m, et avoir invito
to dine with us. After dinner we shall walk*^ into the p^rk and
d diner avec ^ Aprh dhU nous nous promener dans pare m
■•*g:ardens. We shall drink^** some tea or •coffee before we go.®*
jardin. — prendre • ih4 m. ou cafi m. avant que y allions,
4. The names of persons, *<"townsand *®*places do not take'** any*» article ;
nojn personne, ville et lieux - *•* prendre •"•^»
Moliere and Racine are*** the two best** french^ dramatic^ authors.
et etre deux meilleur fran^ais dramatiqne^ auteur.
Buonaparte and Blucher decided the fate of Paris in the plain of Waterloo.
dhider^^ du sort de dans plaine f.
Is Paris'" as large as London ? The city of London is'** much larger**
Paris est'il ** grand ** Londres f vilie f. Stre beaucoup grand^
than that of Paris. Have'** you never been at Paris? No; I have been
que celle , Avoir »3» >» 6t6 a f Non; '«*
at Nantes, *wBordeaux, and "^Marseilles, but I have not been at Paris.
a mais '** '•»
Next* summer I will go'** to Paris, *"*Geneva, •^Florence and *»*Rome.
Prochain "f^tt aller d, Gentvej
5.The names of countries require*** the definite article, le, la, les; France
nom pays demander * difini^^ i\
is*** the most pleasant ^country in*' Europe, It®* is as fertile as Italy, and
itre plus agriahl^^ pays m. de I' « Elle '** *» ^ Htalie
the air of France is more healthful than that of Italy. France is rich
• '** ** sain que eelui * '"" riche
and very powerful. She has conquered Holland, Switzerland, Italy,
irts - puissant.'^ Elle '** conquis HoUande f. Suisse, f. *
Spain, Portugal, Saxony, Bavaria, Prussia, Austria, part of Poland,
*Espagne, m. Saxef. Baviere f, Prusse {, Kiutriche, unepartie Pologne f.
and **^Russia, and compelled her enemies to make peace with her.
* Bussief f. forc4 * ennemi ii faire "^paix avec elle,
6. After verbs expressing dwelling, ooing, coming, instead of
Apres Herhe qui expriment demeurer, aller, VENlR,f au lieu de
the article before the names of countries, we** use'** the prepositions
• avant pays on ^'•2* employer prtpositions
Ell and De; Have*** you ever been to France ? I have lived in France
et Avoi^ jamais iit / demcur^
♦The preposition 0/must be expressed in French, together with the article, viz. of the,
f Thesd verbs being used here as substantives, must be in tlie infinitive in French.
EXEUCISE. 273
ARTICLE and NOUK.
several years. I went*^ to France as soon as the war was over.
plusieurs annie, aller^^ auititbt que guerre £,fut finie,
I went^ afterwards to Germany and *>*Italy* I have lived near
aller^^ ensuite AUemagne et Italie, J* ai demeur^ prhs (P
(twelve months) in Italy. Were you ever in Switzerland? No; I
unan* f jamais Suisse f *" ,
never was.'' From France I went**' to Holland and "^Sweden. I am
^^ y ai ^U.SJU alUr Hollande Suede,
goin^^ to Spain and '••Portugal ; from thence I will go"* to Greece,
o//«-»« ; de Id aUer Greee,
•^Egypt, *<>*Beugal, *>*China, and "^Japan. I have a brother in Ja-
^gyP*^9 (^) m. (d) Chine, f, (d) Japan, m. a(d)Ja'
maica, and another in Martinique. He is going to Mexico, and 'Peru.
ma'iqueyf. un autre d (d) f, -va"* (d) Mexique, m, (dJPirou.m^
*
7. Common** names' used* in a general or in a particular® senile
commun ** rwm m. employ 4 dans sens general particulier sens m.
require^ the article re, i«, lbs; Man* is born for society, but love
demander ^ article 'Homme ni' pour sociit^, f. mais humour
and ambition oflen^** disturb the happiness of the social® state. Men
Ambition souvent trotibler^** bonheur m. social Hiat,
thirst^ after honours and riches ; yet honours and riches seldom^^
soupirer apres honneur riehesse; eependant ravement
make^*» men happy. True happiness consists^* in virtue ; for what are
rendre heureux, Vrai t consister dans vertu f. ; car qtie
birth, honours, beauty and riches without Nirtue? Virtue (of wliich)
naissancSff, beauty t, ? dout
men speak^ (so much) is (nothing but) a sincere desire of doing good,
varler tant h'est qu* •• dhirm., faire^^ bien,m.
and of shunning evil. My sister is learning"* French and Italian
Sviter^^ mal,m, *'* apprendre Frangaism, *ItuLien;
and I am going toi^* learn English, geography and mathematicks.
-1*4 aller^^ - Anglais, giographie f. math^matique,
8. When the preposition of comes before a noun used in a general
Quand proposition f, OF venir^*^ avant employS **
sense, but (of which) the quantity is*« limited by another noun, this
sens, m. mais dont quantity f. itre limiti^ par un autre , ^
preposition can*** not (be expressed) by c?w, de la, deSy which iirould
f, pouvoir *•• (kkjs'exprimer par qui
render the expression particular, and meano^rfff; it must (be expressed)
rendre^^ ■ particulier^, siffnifierait o£ THE, , il faut (kk)Vexprimer
by DC only, without any regard to the gender or "number of the
seulement, sans avoir 6gard genre m. ou nombre m.
* Twelve months, used to denote the period of a year, is never expressed by douse
mois in french ; it is expressed by un an. See note § page 262,
t Were being used here to express'&n action, must be expressed in the sanie manner
as have been, thus, have you ever been, rule 136. t Put this adjective before the noun
8
S7i ISXERCISE.
ARTICLE and NOUN.
noun ; Have you got any money about you? I have not above" thiee
or four shillings. I want to buy a basket of fruit. Have you much
mi qtuxtrg ihelkiff. veus -^'^acheier panterm. fruit. (t)
fruit in your garden this year ? (There is) a great" quantity of pears
dan$ jardm anni$ f. f Jly a^^ grand *• quantity f. poire
and "^apples, but (there is) no* stone^ fruit. Buy me a bottle of ink,
pommeg H n*y a pas^*^ fruit a noyau, Achetez *• bouteille f. encre,
a quire of paper» and a dozen of pens. (Were there) many people
cahieria, papier, dousainef, plume. Y aoait-'il (e) mondem*
at the play last night ? (There were) a great number of gentlemen,
t com^dief.hier ausoirf llyavait grand nomhrem, messieurs,
but there were very few" ladies. My brother has a pretty" collection
il y avait tres - peu ^'^» dame. ^ joli *• f.
of shells, *>*plants, ^birds, and "^other curious" things. He has got
coquille, plante, oiseaUf autres cui-ieuse^ ch^m. *'*
a parcel of letters for you. He has had a (great deal) of trouble.
paquet m. lettre pour eu - beaucoup (e) peine, f.
9. Common" names used* in a partitive sense require*** the article
*' fnam m. employ 6 partitif^ sens m. demander
j)U, de La, DCS ; I should like*^ to have some fruit. (Is there) any
— aimer d avoir fruit, m. Y a-t-ii***
ripe fruit in the garden ? Yes ; (there are) strawberries, gooseberries,
7mu-^ dans jardinm,? Out; ilya**^ f raise, groseille,
cherries and apples. We will eaU** some strawberries and cherries.
cerise pomme. — manger
Have"* you got any (pine apples) in your houses ? No ; but we have
Avoir ^^ *'® ananat serref* ^•^ ; mais
grapes, figs, and melons in abundance. What shall we drink"*?
raisin, figue, melon en abondance. Que « — . iss loifg ?
Will"* you have beer or wine? We shall drink wine, if you have
Vouloir *" - *'* biere f. ou vin ? m. — *** , si
any,** and if you have no" wine, we will drink cider or water.
«w» Cp) n*avez pas N^ , — *» eidre, m. ou hau.
10. A noun used in a partitive sense, preceded by an adjective,
employ^ dans partitif^ , , pr6c6d6 d* adjectif^m..
requires ne before the adjective, instead of du^ de la^ des^ before the
ttemander^*^ avant * , au lieu de
4ioun ; (Were there) any pretty" women at the ball ? (There were)
; Y avaitil •*• joli " femme t bairn. 9 II n'y avait
few but old" women. (There are) fine" country** houses in England.
guere que vieille •• II y a**^ beiy* de eampagne muison f. en
Some have large" parks and beautiful" gardens. (Are there) any
Quelquttrunee ^^ grand^ pare trifbettux jardin, Ya-tU ^^
* Serve is the name the French have for all glazed places, where plants are either
preseryed or forced. t At is expressed by the same preposition as to.
EXBRcrsE. 275
ARTICLE and NOVM.
large*® trees in your garden? No; (They are) only Mnall*" trees.
grand* arbrem, dans jar din f "' ; Ilnya*^ que petit ^
Some of the trees have fine"® fruit on this year. Have you got
Quelqu»4mt orbrBs *** beau fruit m. - * ann^e. f. *** vo
any nice^ flowers? Yes; we have some beautiful*® pinks.
10 beUe» fleurf Oui ; i» tres-beaux aillet,
11. The numeral article a, an/ (is expressed) by un, une, the same
nuTMral^ J, AN, $*exprime par de meme
as the number one ; A glass, a bottle, a pound, a day, a year.
que nombre m. one ; verre, m. bouteilUj f. livre, f. jour, m. an. m.
12. Before names of measure, **weight and ••^number used in a
Avant ^nom • mesure, poids nombre pris
collective sense, a, an, (arc expressed) by £«, za; I must'" buy
collectif^ A, AN, s'expriment par ; 11 faut que f etcMte
a pound of plums. (How much) do they sell them a pound ? They**'
" 8 prune, Combien - on** ^vend let** f On ^.B
sell^ them two pence a do2en. Beer^ sells*^ at four pence a pint,
vendre les^ deux sou ^douzainej* Biire (, sevendre ^ quatretau pinte,{,
wine^ five shillings a bottle, brandy six pence a glass, and ^ram
vin m. cinq sheling , hau-de^vie , rum m.
five shillings a quart. I go'*' to ^school once a day. I take*** lessons
litre m, aller ^cole unefois prendre le^on
three times a week. We have (holydays) only once a year.
fois semaine. f. n'avons vacances qu'* unefois *annie»
13. The demonstrative article this, that, thesb, those, has
dimmstratif^ CE, CETj CETTE, CES,
the same properties in french as in english ; iV^ serves to (point out)
mimes propri6t4 en fran^ais qu* anglais; il sei-vir^^ a designer
the objects ; This man, this woman» these children. That horse, that
ob^et ; Viomme, femme, enfant, cheval,
house, those trees This field, that grass, these people, those flocks.
maison, f. arbre. champ, m. herbe, f. gens, troupeau
N.B. . If you wish**' to shew a distinction between two objects,
Si vculoir '7* marquer distinction £, entre deux objet,
(you must) add ci afler the noun to denote the nearer** objet, and xd
il faut (hk) ajouter apres *^ designer pluspres "^objet^ia,
to denote the remoter; This man is taller than that. ** That woman
*^ plus Eloigns J grand*^ celui-la,^'^'
is handsomer than this.** These children play better than those.**
belU^^ N.B. jouer^ f N".
Those trees are larger than these.** This field is better than that.**
it5 gros^^ ^'^ t ^'^
- - ■ — ^ — ^- ■ ■ — '
* The adyerb Only may be expressed two ways, either by SeuUment after the verb,
or by Ne before the verb, and by Que after it ; so, Nous avons vacances seulement uns
fois, or Nous }i*avon$ vacances wj'unefois ^c. t See note (b) page 72
S2
276 EXERCISE.
ARTICLE afld NOUN. •
14. The possess! ve"* si^s Mon, ma, jues; son 9 sa, ses^ 8fc. follow
possessif^ tignem. j suivre^^
the same rule as the definite article lc, ta, lbs; they agree^ in gender
mime regie f. qtie difini ^ ; Us I'accorder en genre
and "^number with the noun which follows*** them ; My book, my
nombre avec '^* suivre les^; livrCt to.,
pen, my papers. His coach, his chaise, his horses ; Her coach,
plum£y f. papier, carrasse, m. chaise, f. chevaux ;
her chaise, her horses. Our. friends, your children, their relations.
ami, enfantf parent. .
15. The possessive* signs my, thy, his, heb, our, your, their,
possessif^ MY, THY, HISf HER^ OUR, YOUR, THEIR,
(are expressed) by the definite article xe. La, lbs, before the name of the
s*expriment d6fini ^ avant nom, m.
parts of the body, when we^ speak of a natural action of the body ;
partie corps, m, quand on^^'^' parler^^ naturell^ f. ;
Raise your arm. Move your leg. Advance your foot. She shuts***
Lever* bras, m. Remuer* jambe, f. Avancer* pied. m. fermer
her eyes, and opens her mouth ; or when we^ speak of an action done
yeux, ouvrir^^ bouche ; f. an ^'^' **' qui se fait
upon the body ; but, in these instances, vfe^ add*** to the verb one
sur ; mais, dans * cas, ^•^' ajouter vei'bem,
of the pronouns Me, nous, tc, vous, sc, Lui, zeur, (agreeably to) num-
pronom m. suivant - "^nom-
ber and person ; J have*^ hurt my arm. You have*®' cut your hand.
bre m. ^personne ; f . f blssst t coup^ main, f.
He has**' broken his leg. She has**' put her foot (out of joint.)
f rompti. t *— d^mis
You have hurt my arm. He has cut my hand. You have put her foot
t bless^ t coup^ t —
(out of joint.) The carriage ran*** over his body, and broke-** his leg.
demis voiture f. a passt par-dessus f a rompu t
16. After the words to have a pain, to hurt, to be cold, to be
mot - avoir - mal, - se faire mal, - avoir froid, - avoir
warm, the possessive** signs my, thy, his, her, &c. (are expressed)
chaud, posseesif^ MY, thy, HIS, HER, ^c. s'expriment
by AU, a La, aux ; I have a pain in my head. My mother has a pain
** mal • tite.i, ** mal
* Second person of the imperative,
t These sentences must be expressed as if the words were construed m this manner
1 to myself have**^ hurt the arm. You to yourself havft**^ cut the hand. He to himself
- me suis blesse — vous etes coup6 - s'
has**7 broken the leg. She to herself has**^ disjointed the foot. You to me have hurt
est rompu — s* est dimis - m* avez bLess6
the arm. He to me has cut the hand. You to her have disjointed the foot. The
-^ m* a coupd - lui avez demis
carriage to him has run*** over the body, and to him has broken**f the leg.
voiture f. ■" lui a passi par-dessus ^ lui a rompu
EXERCISE. 277
ARTICLE and NOUN
in her side. My father has jrot the ^out in his feet. Have®' you
edU, m. *^ goutte f. * ^e wiw Uei - voviM
not hurt your leg? No; but I have*^ hurt my knee. In the
•pas fait mal • jambe f, f ^»i ; me suis fait mal • genou. m. Dans
last** battle, my brother was wounded in his arm, and I was wounded
dernier bataille, f. fut hless6 * , fu$ hlesU
in the shoulder. My hands are®" warm, but my feet are** very cold.
* fyaule, avoir chaud ff avoir grand froid,
17. The possessive" si^ns its and their (are also*®* expressed) by
possesHf^ signem. its their - aussi 8*expriment
LCf La, Les, and the pronoun jsn (is added) to the verb, when the noun
pronom m. 9*ajoute verbe, m. quand nomm.
before which*" they come'** is not in the same part of the sentence as
avant lequel iU^* setrouver- '•° meine partiei. phrase f, que
the noun to which they refer ;"* That water is prood," I know^** its
auqueP^ •* se rapporter ; eau f. . bon, (g) conmdtre
qualities (turn, the qualities of it,) and I have experienced its effects, (/. e,
qualitSs, en,** j" ai Sprouvi effet,
the effects of itJ) ToW paint the human heart (it is necessary) to
en** . Pour peindre humain^ cxurm, ilfaut *^ -
know all its springs, (t. c. the springs of it) London* astonishes
connattre touts ressort, en.** Londres itonner^^^
strangers ; They admire its extent, and its riches, i, e, (of it.)
Stranger; admirer^^ Htemlue, rwhesse^f, en.**.
18. The possessive" signs iron, m^, mcs, (are added) to names of
possessif^ s'ajoutent "^nom •
kindred and "•♦friendship, when we*^ call*** any b:>dy by those names;
^rentk amiti^, quand on N-B. appeler ** de * ;
Mother, you are" wanted. I am coming, child. Daughter, are you
, on vous demande, J' -^y u«W|*** ^enfant, fille,
ready? Yes, father. Come, friends, (let us be) merry.
pret^f Om», Allons, ami, - - soyons ^a»."
19. Do not put any" article in french before nouns used as
— *** mettret ^•^' aoant ^nom employes en forme
a title ; A treatise upon the immortality of the souU An introduction
de titre; traits sur Hmmortatit6 *dme, introduction
to the french" language. The preface. The first" part. The end.
francais** langue.f. preface, premier partie. f. fin,
20. Do not^ express the article a, an, which comes afler the word
— exprimert A, an, '* venir^^ apres matm,
what; What" a pretty dog! What a funny head he has! What
what; Quel joli^ chien! •" droU de tetef, I "
■ ■"*■
* Say ; At tke head ; at the side ; at the feet ; at the leg ; at the knee : at the ana ; ai
the shoulder. ' N.B. at the is expressed in the same manner as to the.
t Turn, I have warmth at the hands, but I hav^ ^eat Qold a^ {he feet, ( 2nd pers. imp.
278 EXERCISE.
ARTICLE and NOUN«
a large^ house ! What a cold* day ! What a beautiful woman .
grand?''^ maison I f. ^* froid jcur ! m. ■* belle ** femme !
21. Do not express Uie article a, an, before the numbers hundred
— **o exprimer* A, an, avant nombre hundred
and thousand, because the numbers have the property of articles;
et THOUSAND, parce que ^** propriiUi, ^ .
Can"* you lend me a thousand pounds ? I can*** lend you** a
PoHVoir (kk)priter ^ mille livres sterling f pouvoir priter vous en^^
hundred, but I can not**^ lend you** a thousand. We have an army
cent, poMwir*** votis en^^ mille, »» arm^e f
of a hundred thousand men. They have a hundred field** pieces.
homme, *** pUces de campagne.
22. Do not put any* article in ftench before a noun which serves
*** mettre • '^•^» en nomm. ^*t servir^^
to qualify or ***distinguish another noun; Neptune the jg^od of the
d. qttalifier ou d distinguer un autit ; dieu
sea. Telemachus an epic poem. Madrid the capital** city of Spain.
mer, Tilhnaque epique^^ pdeme, capitale ville ^Espagne.
My brother is a citizen of Geneva, a small republic between France
citoyen Genioe, rSpublique entre * f.
and Switzerland. He is a counsel and & member of the great council.
^Suisse, f. avocat membre grand' conseiL m.
23. Do not put any* article before the noun which follows itre,
— *** mettre • ^-^ nom m. 7* f suivre ***
Devemr^ ae waire, passer pour, when such noun serves only
quand ce servir^^ seuLement
to qualify the nominative of these verbs; Are you a Frenchman?
d qualifier nominatifm, * verbe; ^^ Fran^aisf
No ; I am a Spaniard. He passes*** for a Portuguese. His father was
i»i • 1** Espagnol, passer pour Portugcus, 6tait
a physician. He was a jew, and he is turned a christian.
m^decin. juifj s'est fait chrStien,
24. Do not put any* article before the noun which follows the
— mettre* n.b. nomm. ^*t «a'vre***
verbs AVoir and Faire, when this noun forms*** only one idea with
verbe m. * ne former qu' idSe f.
those verbs ; I am*** in the right. She is®* in the wrong. I have a pain
* % } avoir - rotawi. avoir - tort, avoir mat
in my head. He made*** me a sign. He has done me an injury.
*• faire ** signe, faire ^ tort,
•
* Second person of the imperatiye. f See note (m) page 8S.
X In these instances, the noun may genemly be changed into a verb ; as, Avoir mal^
to have a pain, or to ache ; Faire offre^ to make an offer, or to offer ; Faire tort, to do av
injury, or to injure ; Faire sipie, to make a sign, or to beckon, &c.
EXERCISE. 279
ARTICI.E and motn,
25. When two nouns cotnei'" togfether to express one idea,
Quand deux nom aenir • ent$nUfi0 ^^^ exprimer id6e^ t
place first the noun which is the sufajeot dt diaooune, with oc,
placer * le premier -7* t tuj€t ^ditcours, m*
DU, de ixty DeSj before the second nonn, a^eeably to tjie rules on
avant second^ tomfo nnjim m t r^giM •«?
the article ; Which^ do you admire^ most, Cato's* penevtrance, or
; LaquelU - ^^ admirer hpltis, CtUtm 7ptnhitmnce, f.
CsBsar^s^ intrepidity?? Will you have any Londoi^ florter? No;
Cesar *mtr^piditif - *?* » Lmdrtt pmier? m. »" >
I will drink a glass of Lisbon wine. I have lost my gold watch.
boire^** verram, UsbouM riw, - ptrdtt 4W numtre.f,
I had it^ at the park gate. I am afraid'^' I have left it"
avals /' pare m. p0rle, f. — craiudrt (nn) de /** mtvir lais»Se
(in the) (cofiee room*) Put this gentleman's horse inlo my brother's
an cqf(^. m. Metlre * monsieur ciievai dan$
stable. Have yon seen my mothers silk gown, and my sisters newt
icarie, vu snie robe^ f. %iouveau
bonnet ? It^ ig a present from the brother of her children's guardian.
m. f C pris^it m. de tut$ur m»
After her husband's death, all his father's friends forsook''^ her*
tnari mort, f. tgu/t ^ami abandonmr^^ T**
26. If one of the two nouns denotes'** the use of the other,
Si nam »• designer > Htage *atUre,
instead of changing the order df the words, aa the English do,
uu lieu ' changer ^^ ordre mot , comme Anglais font,
the French change the preposition, and instead of de, du, de la^ des,
Fraufois ^^ pr^pmtion, f.
before the second noun, they use'** 2; Bring me a wine glass,
avant second^ , employer ; Apporttr* moi^ vin J verre, in.
and a tea spoon. Take the cofiee cups into the dining room. He
th£ cuiller, f, Pnrter* cafK tasse dans diner ehambre, f.
has broken the water pot. Where is my sistei's work bag? It" is
eassS eau pot, in. Oil ouvrage sac t m. II
in my mother^s bed room. Have you ever seen a steam mill ?
dans caitcher chand»re.f, jamMSvu vapeur matilinmj
No ; but I have seen several water mills and many" wind mills.
^'^ ; mais plusieurs eau moulin ^-S. t;etit fnou/in.
N. B. After the words Foire, Marohe, we^ use^»' au* d xa, aux,
mot on ^•■' employer
before the second noun ; WilP*^ you come to the horse fair ? I want
avaitt ^ nom ; Vouloit vftiir ohevaux foire f. f J'ai hesoin
to go to the poultry market. Let us go through the hay market
d* oiler volaille f. marchi. m. •- - aller $ par ' foin
.»»»™«™«^i.«.—i ^^^^^™«-««^^"— ^^ii^ii^^»«^i^P— ^i«»"'^— ^■^-"^"^^-"^"■^~~~"^^"""~— W^^^-"" ■ " I" "'■' ii-«™^^i ai I II ■
* Second person iraperatire. i See note (m) page 8S. t Pat tbis adjectire before the noiw.
g When I say to a person, bring me a vine glass, it is evident thatit ia the glassl want, not the wiae ■
fo I ought to meotion the^/a«< finU ( KiMt person imperative.
280 EXERCISE.
ARTICLE and NOUN.
27. In speaking of the produce of a country, the English denote^
En parlant produit m. V^yh ^» Anguits disigtur
the name of the country by an adjective ; the French denote it by a
nom m. par adjectif; m. Fran^ais ^" /e**
substantive, and place*'^ it after the name of the produce ; Have you
substantif, m. placer le^* ; *"*
Cfot any french brandy? No; but I have good Spanish wine. Do you
ijo » France eau-de-vie f **^ ; ^^ bon Espagne vin, m, - *"
like^* english beer^ ? No ; I do^.e. ^lot ; I prefer^*' dutch beer or
aimer Angleterre biere f. ? **^ ; Je ne Vaime pas ; J*aimer mieui HoUande ^
french cider.' Will^ you have english *cheese, or swiss cheese ?
France cidre. m. Vouloir - ^''* Angleterre fromage, m. Suisse * f
28. Before the names of countries, of (is expressed) by oe, after
Avant nomm, pays , OP s'exprime par ,
nouns denoting dignity or authority; by x)«, de LUy nes, after
7 qui designent dignity f. autorit^ ,
other nouns ; The king of Congo. The queen of Angola. The stadtholder
les antra ; roi reine stathoude*
of Holland. The cortes of Spain. The petty states of Italy. The
HolUtnde, Cortes plur. Espagne, petits ctat Italic,
air of France is more healthful than that** of Italy. The soil of
air m. f. plus salubre eelui sol m.
Spain and Portugal would be"* very fertile, if it was well cultivated.
m. - itre tres • fertile, s'il ^tait bien cultiv^.
The south of England is warmer than the north of France.
Slid m. chaud *^ nord m.
* The gender of nouns will no longer be marked in tliese exercises with the initial
letters m. /. ; the learner must now find out the gender by the rules given page 181 and
following, according to the termination of the noun. But observe that it is by tlie sound
of the last syllable of the word, not by the spelling that we know the gender of the noun.
Now suppose you want to find out the gender of these twelve nouns, France^ Pays, Na-
cioUf BesoiUf AtpriTnent, dHice, Vie,SecourSt Peche, Abricot, Fruit, G^ibier, which you will
find in ^e beginning of the following exercise. 1st. France ; tliis noun ends in e mute ;
see page 183 a general rule for the mute termination., and you will find it to he fern. Pays ;
see either the termination i page 181, or s page 183, and you will find that these termi-
nations are both masc. Nation ; look for ion, page 182 ; you will find tliat nouns of this
termination, a few excepted, are all /em. Besoin ; look for the termination oin, page 182,
and you will find it to be masc. Agr4ment ; look for ent, page 182, you will find that
nouns of tliis termination are aU, but one, masc, DHice ; look for the termination CE,
page 184 ; you will find dilice, masc,^ being an exception to the general rule, which is
Jm. Vie ; see page 183, the general rule for common names ending in e mute, and you
will find it to he fern, Secours ; look for our, page 182, and you will find it to be a muse,
termination, PSche ; look for cue, page 185 ; you will not find that word iiTthe excep-
tions, which are masc, then you conclude that it is included in the general rule, which is of
the contrary gender. Abi'icot; look for o or OT, page 182; you will find that nouns of that
termination are all masc. Fruit ; look for I, page 181, a masculine termination. Gtbier ,
look for ER, page 182 : you will find it to be a nusc. termination ; and so on for any otlier
noun tlie gender of wJiich you want to know. But impress your mind with the general
rule, and read often the exception, that by such frequent readings you may retain the
most useful words contqu^ed in it ; for you must not expect to retain them all at once.
The advantage of these niles must appear obvious. By marking the gender at tlie end
of tlie noun, or by referring to the dictionary for it, you learn only the gender of one
u'ord, whilst by referring to these rules, you learn the gender of a whole set of words.
£XERCISE. 281
ARTICLE and NOUN.
RECAPITULATORY exercUe on the foregoing tulesJ*
I come from France and Italy. I have been at Paris, Bordeaux,
witir^" Italie. a »*
Lyons, Geneva, Florence, Leghorn, Naples and Rome. How do you
Lydn, Geneve, Lioourne, Comment -♦^^
like*''* France and Italy ? I like"* them both*** (very much*"), but
trouver ? aimer /««** Vune et Vauh'e beaucoup n.b.^
I would^ rather live in France than in Italy. France is certainly a
aimer mieux(kk)vivre qu* certuinement
most beautiful country. It<" has within itself every thing that can^
tres . beau *^ EUe en elU-mime tout ce qui poui^ir
minister to the wants, comforts and delights of life. France produces***,
servir (kkj besoin, agrim£nt ^ diUce vie, produire
almost without the assistance of. art, all** sorts of delicious fruit ;
presque sans secours art, tout sorte d^licieux^^ f^^^t;
pears, apples, grapes, peaches, apricots, plums, cherries, figs, olives,
poirCf pomme, rainn, peche, abricot, prune, cerise, fis'^^f »
a (g^eat deal) more corn, wine and oil than the inhabitants can**»
beaueoup plus bU, vin *huile que habitant *'' pouvoir
consume; and the country abounds*** with game, •••poultry, and "*cattle.
consomm^r ; pays abonder en ^gibier, volaille, b^tail.
The population of France, (considering '^its extent) is immense. Thev'o
si on en conud^e Vdtendue On "'^
reckon in France twenty-five millions of souls. France is undoubtedly
compter^** vingt « cinq dme, *^ sans contredit
the most powerful nation in^ Europe. It^ alone has withstood the
plus puissant^ de I* EUe seule rhisU ^^ aux
efforts of Russia, Prussia^ Germany, England, Holland, Spain,
Russie, Prusse, Allemagne, Angleterre, Hollande, Eipagne,
and Sardinia, that wanted to*?* subdue it; but after twenty years of
Sardaigne, ^^ voulaient - su^juguer la^ ; vingt an
uninterrupted** victories, that brave and warlike** nation was (at last)
canttnue** victoire, *' •* guerrier^ fut enfin
overcome by all** those powers combined,** and compelled to submit
aeeabli^^ par tout puissance combing, N*^* forcS^ de se soumettre
to the greatest** humiliation to which men can** be condemned, that**
plus grand 7« puissent itre condamne^^^, celU
of obeying*** beings whom they despise***. Now that I have a little*
^** obiir d itre '* mipriser, 2prisentque unpeu^-^
time to myself, I am going to*^ travel. I (am fond) of*** travelling.
terns d mot, *** ailer^*^ - voyager, aimer^** a voyager^^
* The recapitulatory exercise at the end of each part of speech, is intended to try how far the learner
nnderstands tue rules on Avhich he has been practising on that part of speech. An infallible way to ascer*
tain it, is to induce hiiu to mark under every word on that part of speech the rule by which he makes nsa
of such word ; for instance, in the above exercise on the article and the noun^ to make him mark under
' every noun, the role by which, or at least to make him give a reason why he uses sach and such an arti-
cle, und so on with the other parts of speech ; for unless he can do this, it is evident that he does not un-
derstand that part of speech, that be has no foundation to build upon, and he must read th« rules pT«f
af ain, till he is able to do it. f Do not pat any article after en^
282 EXERCISE.
ARTICLE and NOUN.
RECAPITULATORY cxerme on the foregoing rules*
In travelling one sees (so many) new* things, and every new*
En voyageant on^ voir^^ tant notttv22«* chose, ehaque iiouvel
object furniahe& some new idea to the mind. In a few* days I will
of^et foiimir^^ f nouvelle id6e esprit. Dans- peu^-^-jctur '-
go to France, and afler spending some time with my friends at Paris,
(i-ler , apret avoir passT t avec ami a
I will go to Switzerland, Italy, and Spain, where I will embark^' for
- *** Suisse, *** » ** , ow - m*embarquer pour
America. I long to see that country of liberty and independence,
Amerique, Jlmetarde de voir ^' *^ liberti ind^pendan^e,
where rational" beings may^ communicate their ideas to their ^fellow
ou rai»nnable''^ etre7 pouvoir communiq**er ^ idie
beings) without fearing^ the holy^ political" or religious inquisition.
sembhable sans craindre saint* politique ou religieuse^
After having^ visited the principal^ cities of the wise republic of the
avoir vitit4 * ville sage * ripuhliqvs
immortal Washington, I will go to Mexico, Chili, and Peru. I want
immortel* , - alhr^^ Mexiquif , PSrou, ai envie
to see if the tree of liberty, lately*** planted in the new world,
de voir si arbre , dcpuispeu pUmti *'^ nouveau monde,
is'* thriving better than it" has done in the old, and if it is
- riussir^*^ mieux qu' il n*7 a faire *^^ ancieuj ^ "*
spreading its enlivening" branches oyer the fertile" plains of that
iteudre^*^ ses vivifiant^ sur *• plaine **
immense and rich" continent.. What a pleasure to see millions of
^* riche Qiiel plaisir *•? voir •
intelligent" beings uniting all their energies* to*'* break the chains of
* Stre unir^** " pour rompre chaine
superstition and despotism, those two satanic" enemies of reason, that
despotisme, deux satanique^ enhemi raison, . *^
divine spark of the supreme wisdom I If the father of light deigns'^*
" itincelle ®* sagesse ! lumiere daigner
to cast a look on the actions of men, it is surely in such a work
*7* Jeter regard sur , c' surement **' tel " ouvrage
that he must delight to see his image employed. What is the reason
qu* doit se compldire d voir occupi. Quelle
that trade is so languishing, and that money is so scarce now ?
que commerce ^^ si Umguissant, argent rare a present f
(People in trade) think^^' that it is the war. Oh ! war is a dreadful
Coinmer^ants penser que •* guerre. Ok! ^^a affreuse^
thing. War is the scourge of mankind. How preferable" are
chose. . fl^au genre humain. Combien pr4JirahU^^ ^"^
peace and harmony amongst all men ! If men were reasonable,
paix 'harmonic parmi touts i Si itaient raisonnabUf''^
•w— »^MP»^— — ■■ ^^MT— I ■ ■ I ■ ^ai !■ ■■■«■ ■■ I ■ ^ i^^*.i^— II I II 1 ^» ■ i.^M I ■■ — II ■»■■■■»■■■■■ ■ ■ I ■ ^■ ■■
* Put this word in Oie ting, ia ft-eneli. f When the suhgtance is restrained to a little^ afew^ SOMK
b expressed by quelque^ quelquest not by du, de la, des, which imply an unlimited number or quantity.
EXERCISE. 283
ABTICLE and NOUN.
RECAPITULATORY exerciie on Uie foregoing rulea,
they (would never go to) war. War begets»«» taxes, taxes beget
ne se feraient JamaU engendrer taxe.
lis
poverty, and plunge** peopie into mlseryi Thus whole" nations are
pauvretiy pUmger penple «i» misen, Ainn entier^
made** miserable** to gratify Uie ambition of a few vain"^ beings
rendrt W satisfaire petit nombre vain^ etre
whom often chance alone raises to the supreme rank; and who have
'* 9ouvent hazard seul ^Uver^^ " rfing, 7* ***
the art of inciting men to slaughter men, by calling tbem<^ heroes,'
* exciter ^^ a igorger en appelant eeux * hdros,
who^ ^ are merely the base executioners of their inhuman* orders.
''•^ ne sent que vil*^ eaicuteur inhurfuiin^ ordre.
Will you come and take a walk along the river side before dinner ?
VouUfir *■* venir (nn) /aire tour tur riviire bord ** ^^fi^ f
The sight of the water is pleasant at this time of the year, (Is there)
vue eau agriahle terns annSe. Y a^t-ii^^
any fish in this river ? Not much ; (there are) eels and carps, and
poisson ? Ptiw ; Ily a*^ anguille carpe,
some trouts : But we are not far from the sea, and our fish-market
t truite: *•• loin de tner, poissonnerie
is well supplied with sea "^fish. We have salmon, turbot, soles,
bien pourvu^^ de denier poisson, «au«Ro/i, eole,
mackerel, codfish, excellent'^ oysters, crabs, and lobsters. Let us go and
maquereau, morue, t '^ hwtre, crabe lumtard, - - Alter (nnj
see your market. What an abundance of (every thing) (there is in it!)
voir marchi. Quelle* abondance ^^ t/ y a **• - /
What a deal of hares, rabbits and partridges ! I see people yonder**®
" quantity' lievre, lapin perdrix! voir gens^ la-ba$ n.b.
who are selling"* woodcocks, snipes and (wild pigeons.) (Here are)
75 isa vendre b^casse, b^cassine ramier, ®*7
also pheasants and quails. Do you like quails? Yes; (very much.) We
aussi faisan caille. - *" aimer f ; beaucoup. 11
must*'* walk towards home. It** is dinner time.' Let us walk
faut que noui allions vers la maison, C ^.B. diner keure^ - - Entrer
into tke dining room. The dinner is on the table. What have we
•*» diner talle, sur Qit' ^ **» ^^
for dinner? A round of beef with cabbage and carrots, and a loin
pour f rouelle bceuf avec choux || carotte, longe
of veal with peas and spinage. Bring me some mustard, salt, pepper,
veoUf pois ^pinards.^ Apporter ^ moutardej set, poicre,
a coffee cup, and a table spoon. (How much) do they®® sell*** meat
cafd tasse, soupe euiller, Combien - is* n.b. vendre oiande
a pound in this town? Beef and mutton sell*** eight pence a pound,
iivre <i* ville f motUon se vendre huit sou ■
» I ■! I I « I ^ »^i— .^-.^— .^.i^— il. I«^l . . I • • • , 1 III III!..
* Torn hj calling heroes them trAo, ^rc f Sep note f p. 282.
X Vxki this acyeetive after all these nouns. | This wdrd is plaral in freich.
\
284 EXERCISE.
ARTICLE and NOUN.
RECAPITULATORY exercise on the foregoing rules.
and veal seven pence. That is very dear. Yet we often buy**-
veau sept C* tres - cher» Cependant ^" en 7® acheier
a hundred pounds weight at a time. Cofn sells"* twelve shillings a
cent livre — d, ^^ fois, BU se vendre douze sheling
bushel, and bread three pence a pound; but good** workmen get"*
hoisseau, pain trots livre; bon^ ouvrier gagner
four shillings a day. Bring a bottle of wine, and some wine glasses.
quatre jour, Apporter* bouteille vin, verre.
Will you have french wine or Spanish wine? I will drink a glass
Vouloir - ^7* France Espagne f - boire
of Port wine, if you have any.** (There is) no wine in the bottle.
Oporio , ,j en.(p) Iln'ya^ pas «i»
Is there no wine in the wine cellar? Go to the wine merchant,
N*y a-t-il pas cave f Aller* chex de vin marchandf
and tell him to send me** a dozen bo.ttles of Port wine at sixty
dire* ltd de envoyer m* dousaine de a soixante
shillings a dozen. This wine costs me five shillings a bottle. You
sheling couter ** cinq
have a fine gold watch. It^ has cost a hundred guineas. It« is a
belle or montre. Elle eout^ guinie. C
present from my cousin's guardian. Have you seen my brother's
present cousin tuteur, vu
powder bag? It" is in my father^s bed room. Let us walk up to
voudre sacf II *** coucher chambre» - - Allei* -
that hill. What«» a fine prospect we have from here! What a deal
colline. Quelle belle perspective d* ici! ®* quantity
of fine® flowers (there is) here ! Let us gather some»» to»7«
belle^ fleur ily a * ici! - - Cu^illir* erp^ quelqnes-unes pour
make nosegays for your sister's children who (are so fond of) flowers.
faire bouquet pour '^* aiment taut -
(Elere are) some violets. What a pretty rose bud ! I see^** yonder
Void **7 violetteJ ®* joli^ rose bouton I voir Id-bas
some hawthorns, (honey suckles) and sweet" briers. (That is) my sister's
aubSpine, t ckivre-feuillef odorant ^glantier. Voild.'^7
husband's country house. Your father's house is finer*i than that. 8"
nmri de campagne maison* belle ^•^•
(There are) people who are looking"* at the flower pots which are at
Voild.**7 gens^^ "s regarder «>i Jleur potl 7* a
your mother's window. My brother's coachman felP^ from his horse
fenetre* cocker tomber de - cheval
yesterday^<» ; He broke^' his leg, and put^'' his arm out of joint.
hier ; N.B. ^g casser jambe, se dimettre bras - - — 1|
• Imperative. ' f Use the singular in french.
X If you mean pots with flowers in, you must say, pots de^fleurs ; if you mean pots to
put flowers in, ymi must say, pots a fleurs, || Out of joint i^expressedin the verb demettre.
EXERCISE. 285
adjectivf
29. The ADJECTIVE must be of the same gender, and of the same
*adjectif doit etre mime genre ,
number as the noun which it^ qualifies ; That young man is (in love.)
noinhre que nam 7* il qualifier; (bb) jeume homme amour eux
That young woman is (in love.) He is very young.. She is very
'^bb) femme • triS" jeune,
young. He is married. She is married.*^ He is capricious. She is
• marii* ** • N.B, capricieux,
capricious. All*" men are capricious. All** women are capricious.
• Tout 7 7 •
30. When an adjective qualifies several nouns of the same gender,
Quand plusieurs genre,
the adjective must be of the same gender as those^ nouns and plural ;
doit que (bb) plurier ;
Miss A. and Miss B. are (in love.) They are very happy. They
Mademoiselle amoureux,* Elles tree • heureux,*
will soon^B^ be married. That*^ makes the mother and daughter very
- bientot Stre • (bbj rendre « trei"
proud.* They are both"* very capricious ; but they arc civil and
orgueilleux. Ellet toutes deux * ; civil *
obliging. That" lady has a gown and a petticoat very well matched.'
iHUgeafit.* (bb) dame robe jupe tres~ bien atsorti,*
The tea and the sugar are good, but the cream and the water are bad.
thd Sucre bon^ creme eau mauvais,
31. If an adjective qualifies several nouns of different" genders, the
Si qualifier diffirent^
adjective mast be of the masculine «gender and (in the) plural number;
dote €tre masculin^ atu plurier — ;
Mr. A. and Miss B. are (in love.) They are very happy. Are
Motmeur amoureux, lis
§
they not married yet>"? They are both*** very capricious; but they
*•* marU^^ encore f touts deux ;
are civil and obliging. He makes"' his son and daughter unhappy.
citil oblrgeant, rendre ^ mulheureux.(h)
You have a coat and a waistcoat very well matched. The tea and
habit veste tr^s^bien assorti. thi
the water are good, but the cream and the sugar are very bad.
tau bon^ creme sucre mauvais.
32. Adjectives are generally*** placed in french afler the noun;
^Adjectif - ordinairement se placent en apris ;
■
All** the polite people in** Europe speak the french** language.
lout poli** gens m. de I* purler franfais langue,
(I am told) that it is a very difficult language. Eatf a piece of new
on m*a dit** que c* difficile Manger -morceau * frais
i_ . -__—_____—
• See note (g) p. 198, tiow the feminine gender of adjectives is formed, f Imperative.
286 EXERCISE.
AOJSCTIVS.
bread, and drink a gflass of white wine. England is a delightful
pain, boire* i^rre • btanc vin, AngUterre dSticieux
country; but (there is) always a cold and damp air. (There are)
w>; ilya*** froid humide "«
charming* women^ opulent ^cities, froitfti] %nd8| and pleasant
chai-manti • , apultnt^ vilU, fertile^ terre, agr6able^
country '"liouses. t like^ their simple* and cordial* manners.
de campagn* ^maison, aimer ^* tlm'ple cardial \ manih'e,
33. The. adjectives Beau^ Bel, Bdlc, Bon^ cfrand, aros, jeune, joliy
adjectif
Hauvaiiy MnlleWf jufdndre^ petite rout^ rmut^ p'ieille, and Uie
adjectives of number premier, second, Sfc. are generally*** placed
-< ordinairement se placent
before*'^ the noun ; (That is) a large house* It<* is in a fine situation.
avant ; Voild**^ grand^ EUe «»8 belle situatunu
It belongs to a young man. He has lately married an old woman.
*^ appartenir jeune i deptiit peu ipouii vieilU
He^ is a big man. She is a little woman. They have two pretty children.
C gros " petit^ deuxjoli^
34. If two adjectives requiring diflferent* places qualify the satne
Si deux (qui demandent) diffifent^ • qualifier meme
noun, they** (are placed) both"* after the noun, joined together by
, ih se placent touts deux , joint"* ensemble par
a conjunction ; (that Is) a large convenient house. It* is in a fine
cimjonction; ^^ grand^ commode, EUe **• belle
healthy situation. It belongs to a profligate yonnff man. He has
saine •* appartenir dSbavM *» *
lately married an old rich woman. He^ is a great man. He is a tall
depuis peu Spousi riche C (ij •* (i)
man.' They are **very honest* people. They are very civil* people.
•* sont tres honnite(i) gens. •* honnSte(iJ •
35. The adjectives of number (are placed) in french as in english,
mymbre se placent en comme anglais^
before the noun ; The first day of the week. The third month of the
*®^ t jour semaine. mois
year. The fourth year of the reign of the fifth monarchy
annSe. rdgne monarque,
36. To distinguish some personage firom other persons of the same
^'^^ distinguer || personnage ,d' autres personne meme
name, the English use*** the adjectives of number ; the French use
no/w, Anglais employer • ; Franfais *'*
* ImperatiTe. f See note (g) page 198, bow the feminine gender of ad;ectiTe8 is formed.
t See the adjectiyes of number, p. i78» || See Bote i page S8:^.
/
EXERCISE. 287
ADJECTIVE.
the substaQtivetl, and leave oat the article f Henry the fourth was a grea<
substantif, omettre^^" Henri • g*and
maa and a good king; he succeeded Henry the third brother to Charles
rot; suceSder d ^ de
the ninth, the greatest villain that'^ ever • i^igned>^ over a civilized
• ** Kilirat gitit ait^ jamais rign6 mr cimUs4^*
people. Henry the eighth, after having^'* been tbe friend of Pope
•*® Henri • apris awir 4ti <mi '^Fape
Clement the seventh, became the greatest eitemy of the papaP" autho-
• devenir ** ennemi , papal^ (Mto-
rity, and delivered England (from the) shaoieful yoke of an Italian priest*
rite, diUwer , *' du . honteiafi* j<nig Italien^ prStre.
37. The adjectives tff measure and ■•Hlifflension which (are placed)
• mesure dimension ^*i seplacent
after the number in english, (are placed) before the number in french,
nomhrt en se placent *" ,
and are always followed by the preposition De ; Our garden is two
toujoufs ^uivis de jardin
hundred paces long, and a hundred and fifty broad. It^ is surrounded
• pas long, *'* t large, 11 entourS
by a wall twelve feet high, two feet thick, and a hundred yards long.
d mur *" pieJs haut, ipais, ** verge
N. B. These sentences are more commonly^** expressed in french
(bb) phrase - plus cammuniment s'expriment en <
by the substantive of dioiension .in thid ni^iiner ; Our garden has two
par eubstantif ^ de (bb)mani^eg
hundred paces of length, and a hundred and fifty, of breadth. It^ is
pas longueur, ** t . largeur, II
surrounded by a wall of twelve feet of height, and of two of thickness.
eniouri d pieds hauteur, ipaisseur.
But observe that with the adjective (you"^ must) use the verb Mre^
observez qu' avec il ^-^'faut employer verbe ,
and with the substantive the verb Avoir ; thus. Our garden is long of
; ainsi, long
two hundred paces, and broad of a hundred and fifty ; or, our garden
pas , large « . t i ^>
has two hundred paces of length, and a hundred and fifty of breadth.
pas longueur, largeur,
38. The adjective is*^ not to be separated (from the) noun by vn,
doit *»» - itre sipari da par
unCf as it*" is sometimes by a, an, in english ; this article must be
comme ilP^est quelquefois 4, AN, en ;' • doit se
placed in french before these words ; Did»« you ever see such a man?
placer fran^ais (bb^ ihot; Avez jammstm tel f
• See numberg, page 176. t See note (m) page K. t See note • page 177.
\
288 EXERCISE
ADJECTIVE.
I never saw"* so tall** a woman. It is not so great a things.
*■• at vtt St grand Ce ** 51 graruP* chose,
39* Many' adjectives have the property of substantives in frencli, ^
JBeoucoupNA propriiti ' en ,
and render^ useless the words man, woman, people, which the
rendre inutiles fnot man, woman, people. 7^*
(corresponding") adjectives require in english ; An En^lisli man.
qui le$ reprisentent demander Anglais
A French woman. He is a drunken man ; a covetous man. She is
FrangaisB • •* ivrogne ; avare, •*
an idle woman. They are ungrateful people. Learned men
paresseux(g) • •* sont ingrat • , Savant^
are esteemed." Ignorant people are despised." Take notice of
estim^. N.B. Ignorant 7 nUprisi. ".b. Taiiet attention d
these words in reading authors, and in the dictionaries.
(hh) en lisant ^auteur, . '^" dictionnaire,
40. By leaving out the article before*" the names of distinction and
En omettant - avant nom * distinction
• . «
of profession which follow the verbs itre^ DeveniVf ne raire^ passer
profession • tuivre verbe
pour, these nouns have the property of adjectives ; My brother is ^
, {bbj nom propriSt4 ^
colonel, and my father is a general. He is the commander ij^hief.
colonel, g4niral, II commandant ^0B^«/.
That man was a tailor. He lately^** turned a school "master. He
* '^ tailleur* depuispeu s*estfait 6cole maitre,
passes for a doctor. His son was a bookseller; now he is a surgeon.
passer pour midecin. *" libraire ; chirurgien.
The same words which serve to qualify nouns, serve also (by the)
mimes 74» servir d qualifier nom^ , servir ausd au
means of certain particles to compare their qualities.
moyen • certaines (%) particuU d, en comparer les *' qualiti.
41. The comparative of superiority which (is formed) in english by
comparatif • supiriorit6 • se forme f en . en
adding er to the adjective, (is formed) in french by plus before the
ujoutant ER * . M forme en , par "•
adjective ; Spain' is larger than France ; but France is richer and
; ^Espagne grand^ que • ; riche
more powerful than Spain. This" field is better than that," because
puissant^ • ^'^ champ % ^'^*, pa^ce qu*
it" is better cultivated. Your watch is finer than mine, because it" is
il I cultiv4. montre belle " elle
newer and dearer; but mine is better, and will last longer than yours.
neuve, cher^ ; " t "" durer long-tems • ®*.
• See note (m) p. 88. t See N. B. under note (ii) p. 235. t See note (b> p. 72*
EXERCISE. 289
ADJECTIVE.
42. The comparative of inferiority, formed in english by less, or
comparatif • infirumti, fcrmS eti par LESS, ou
NOT so before the adjective, (is formed) in french by Moim or pas si
NOT 90 ^ ^ , -^ te forme* par ou
before the adjective; Spain* is not so rich, nor so powerful as France.
« adjec^f; Espagne »»» », ni » d
That** field is less fruitful than this.®* Your sister is not so handsome,
*•■• champ fertile »•■• belle,
nor so rich as your cousin, but she is not less amiable.
cousine, aimable^
43. The comparative of equality, formed in english by as before
igaliti, en par AS
vhe adjective and as after it«*, (is formed) in french by aussi before the
* • AS - , ''seformer^^ par ■
adjective, and ane after; Spain is not by much as populous as France.
> ; • ^^ de beaucoup peupU^ *
That" field is as fruitful as this.^ Your sister is as amiable as your
*•■• champ fvrtiU *•■• aimable
cousin. My watch is as good* as yours, but it is not so fine.
>eatutn«. montre bon(g) •*, «« belle*
' 44. The superlative, formed in english by adding most or st to
^_ niperUuif, formi en ajautant MOST ou ST
the^lpctive (is formed) in french by adding the article ze, ra, tesy du,
■ seformer^^* en(hh)
DC lay DCSy Sfc. to the comparative^ particles plus, Moina; France is
comparative'*^ partieule ; *
the most populous country in Europe. China is the largest empire
peupU^' ^ 4» 5 t ^Chine grand
in the world. (This is) my finest book. If it<* is not the finest, it
*» monde. «*7 CU ^eau S* il , "
is the best. It is the dearest book that I have ever bought.
meiUeur, •* cher'* ** ^ jamais achet^,
45. Do not express the article, and place the adjective or noun
- *** exprimerX , placer
after the verb, in the following" comparative" sentences and others
• verbey euivant''^ • " phrase antres
like ; The more you study^, the more you learn. The more I see
semblables; Studier, apprendre. voir
her, the less I like her. The more I know men, the less I esteem
*♦ , aimer ** connaitre 7, estimer
them. The more difficult a thing is, the more honourable it is.
^ difficile chou , honorable **
1 think that the more* pains I take,^ the less' progress I make.
penter (bb)'-^ plus "•■• peine prendre, moins'-^ progris fairOm
* See If. B. (ii) page 235. t <^® i^te t p. 6j^. t Second pers. plur. iinperBtiye«
T
290 EXERCISE.
ADJECTIVE.
46. The comparativcj" panicles pIum^ Moinst sU Aum^ inu9t»
eamparaiivi?* particuU $ devoir
(be tepeated) befbre etery>** adjective ; She is more studious and
(hk) 96 ripder *^ chaque ; Uudieux(g)
dutiful than her sister. She is already as wise and clever as her
ffb^uiant* dtfit »age habile
mother ; but she is so proud and affected thiit nobody Hkes^* her.
• fief^ ajgrectS^ •y aimer **
47. Que aftfer thfe comparative* words plus, Moina, Moindre, jieil-
comparatif^ mots
lev ft MieucPi pmj pire, requires Ne before the verb which follows it**;
, demander *• 7* suivre le ;
He has lost more than he has gained. He is richer than he was. He lives
yerdre gagner, riche "® . vivre
better than he did^ before. He is less happy than people imagine.
(b) p. 79 faire *^ *•■• heureux ** *•■• $*imaginer,
N. B. Ne (is left out) if the verb which follows Que is in the infi-
i*$m£t(ii) *•■• 7* suivrB d ■ infi-
nitiye, or if it is preceded by a conjunction ; it is better to read than
nitif, ou •* pricidd d' conjonction ; il vaut mieux *7a Ure
be idle. He is more studious now than when he was at school.
Cn)oisif, itudkux dpriseni ^« d ^icole,
48. Than, by, after more, less, used**' to denote a quantity,
THAN, BY, aprh MORE, LESS, employes *•• designer . quantity,
not a quality, (are expressed) by dc, not by que or par $ This does
ncn qualiU, - s*exprimer^*^ , non ou . w „
not cost less than ftfly guineas. It is too dear by half. I would not
^•® coiiter guinie, C trap moitie,
sell it** for less than sixty. I have not had it^ more than a year.
vendre U d eu I* an,
49. Ik, after a superlative (is expressed) in the same manner as
IN, mperlatif -s'exprimer^*^ de mima maniere que
OF, agreeably to the rules on the article ; (That is) the cleverest boy
DP, conformhnent rigle tur ' ; '*' habile garden
in the school. His father is the most learned man in the kingdom.
HcoU, savant rbt/durAe.
His mother is the most sensible* woman in the whole town.
qtirituel * ■•
50; An adjective (in the) superlative^ followed by one of the relative*
adjectif au , suiin de relatif^
words aui, OMf?, dotU, Requires the following verb (in the) subjunctive;
mot , demander suivant^^ au stitjonctif;
Mr. A. is the best friend I have. He is the most honest man I
Moni, tneilleur (s) "* hcnnite (s)
know. His sister is the handsomest woman I have ever seen.
cotinaitre, belle (s) jamais vue
EXERCISE. 291
ADJECTIVE*
RECAPITULATORY exerdst on the foregoing rules*
What^* charming weather! how*** beautiful the country"^ looks!
Quel charmant terns ! Que belle ^^ campagne itre! ***
How attractire nature is, when it is arrayied in its vet-dint charms!
»•* attrayant 7 ^ quand •* ami de ses Joerdoyant eharme!
How sweet solitude is to ihhocent minds! Let lis go and take
** douxCg) 7c(sur! - - aUn- (nn) faire
a (short walk) in the neighbouring fields, (whilst we wait) till your
fow «•»•■• a»8 voidn ehcanp, en attendant qus
sister is»« ready. How«» is"* your aunt? She is still very ill.
8oU prit. Comment 86 porter taiitef ejuon malade,
I am sorry (for it.) She is a virtuous, prudent and generous wo-
fdchi en^ «* vertueitx,(g) ginireux(g)
man. Her daughter is very handsome, but she is too proud; She
fil^ belle ^ •! trop orgueilleux(g)
is as haughty as if she wfere the finest wbthan in England ; yet
fier "0 ; dependant
as she is richer and handsomer thai\ her cousin, she will **sooner get
comme belle, cousine, f. - tot^^ trouver
a husband; but virtue is more precious than richies. (Something
mart; '^vertu pricieux(g) ^richetse, (llfaut
must be allowed) for her age ; she is so young. She is older than I^
pa$ser quelque chose) d, ' dge ; jeune. Agi moi
am. She is as old as my sister who is married. She is*^ not less
t dgi 71 marU, a***
than twenty. I do not think that she is"* more thdh eighteen. Shie
vingt ans» - penser en ^ ait ***
is taller by two inches^ but she is not so handsome by tnuch. She has
grand pouce, belle
been spoiled in her infancy. Your sister is the most lovely girl I
gdti ■ enfance, ahnable (s)
know. She is so diligent and"^ attentive. YoU do hot learn so well
conncAtre. attentif,(g) - apprendre
as she does, because you are not so studious. My sister learns better
t , pareeque studietix.( g) (b) p.7^.
than I do, because she has a better memory than I have, but I take
*• t , m&moire •• t ,
more pains' than she does. I found** my exercise easier than I thought.
peine* ■• faire.i at trouvi theme aisi penser.^**
It is beti^r than I expected. It is ^ess difficult than you imagined.
attendre.'^*^ «* moins difficile s*imaginer.^*^
My son has made greater progress than I expected. (There are)
10 41 progrei *7etp4rais^*o ms
authors who write better than they speak ; there are others who speak
•auteur »« t **» "'
• See note • p. 281. f Tliis auxiliary verb is generally left out in frencb ; if you ex-
press it, you must follow rule 47. t ^ee note (b) page 72,
t2
292 EXERCISE.
ADJECTIVE.
RECAPITULATORY cxercise on the foregoing rules.
better than they write. The more I examine this afiair, the more
puzzling** I find it«. Give that" to your eldest" sister and this"
mHbarra$8ant . «* (hb) aini^^ (hb)
to your younpfer brother. Your writing is bad, but this"' is worse,
jeuw^* icniurei. (hh) pirct
and that" is the worst of all. This ditch is nine feet deep, and
(hb) t tout", (bh) fmA X P^^d profondf
six feet broad. That tree is a hundred yards high, and ten feet
t 'jM-ge, {hb) *arbre *^ verge haut,
thick. London^ bridge, now the finest bridge in England, is seven
^pais, fpont, ilprisent beau t
hundred and sixty-six feet long, and fifly-six feet broad; the center
§ pieds , large du milieti
■*arch is one hundred and fifty feet broad, and thirty- two feet high.
arche f. ^^ ^ , haut.
Napoleon the first succeeded"* Louis the 16th ; Louis the 18th succeeded
a *" succidi a ; >" a
Napoleon the 2nd, king of Rome, and second emperor of the French. I
, roi , " empereur
want a watch ; but I should not like to give more than ten guineas (for it.)
en
"® montre ; - aimer d donner guinSe
You can not get a good one for less than twenty. I will not give more
(hk) avoir «n** d tnoins - en^^
than twelve. The best quality a man can'" have, is to be civil and
qiutlitS(8j ^ pouvoir(kkX de civil
obliging to the most uncivil and disobliging peopled The more difficult
cbligeant incivil dischligeant gens^^ difficile
a thing is, the more merit (there is) in doing*" it**. The more we
choie , m^rite **• d faire "
contemplate the beauties of nature, the less reason we have to (be
eantempler beautS ^ y mom* vijet de noui
proud.) The richer and the more elevated in diguity we are, the
erunrgueUlir, riche ilevS en digniU ,
less* pride we ought to have, and the more we are obliged to be
motm*'*' orgueil devoir *'■ avoir, obligi, d*
just and reasonable; but most men (of these days) remember
juste raisonnable ; la plupart det d*aujourd'hui ne te souvenir ^"
that they are rich and powerful, only to'^' oppress the poor and
C&6^*«»* puissant, que pour opprvmer pauvre
the weak, and to be more unjust and unreasonable.
faibU, *^ itre tnjuste diraisonnable,
X See the numbers page 176. * Eldest and younger cannot be expressed by the
comparatioe nor superlative in french,they must be expressed by the positive, for, as there
is only one eldest and one younger there can be no comparison, t See note * page 20S.
§ See note • page 177,
EXERCISE. 293
PERSONAL PRONOUN.
51. When I, thou, he, she, it, we, you, they, are the nominative
Quand i, THOU, HE, she, it, we, you, they, nominatif
of a verb, they (are expressed) I by jc, thou by rw, he, it, m. by it
verbe, ils s'expriment • / par , THOU , HE, IT, m.
SHE, IT, / by eUc; wb by nou», you by rotis, they by /&, masc' •
SHE, IT, f. ; WE , YOU , THEY , nuUC,
by Elles, fem. ; as, I learn»« 'french. Doest thou speak it»* well ?
, fem, ; comme, apprendre franfais, m. - *■• parler •■ bimi 1
He has not learned long. It* is not difficult. She is too idle.
'** long'Ums, difficile. tropparetseux,(g)
We have not time. You will never learn. They are too fond of play,
7temt. i» »» - iw aimer d joaer.
52. I (is expressed) by moU thou by Toi, hb by luU they by
/ -^B^exprimer^*^ par , thou , he , they
EttXt m. by eUbs, f. if two of these pronouns are the nominative of
, deux
the same verb ; as, You and I will learn ^french. He and I will
verbe; , i«7 « apprendre -
learn together. You and they have learned before : Or, wh^n they
^*^ ensembUm ^^ auparavant : Ou, ils
are joined to another substantive ; as. My brother and I have begun
joindre substantif; , ^^ commencer
to learn it^. He and his sister learn very well. They and their
i U »» tree
master always speak french together : Or, when there is no' verb in
the sentence to agree with thes« pronouns ; as. Who learns best ?
pkraee pour t*accorder (bb) ; , ^ mieux ?
He or I ? It* is I who learn best. It* is he who learns best.
J K.B. IM K.a. IH
53. When a personal* pronoun is the nominative of several verbs
personnel pronom plusieurs
it is generally** repeated with each verb; I believe and will always
•^ - ordinaitement se r^p^t«r*** • ehaque ; croire - *®*
believe that it is so. He always promises, but does not keep his
que cela ainsi, *•* promettre, - ** tenir
word. We have seen it*, and will see*** it again.
parole. vu. le , revoir •* t
54. When the pronouns he, thee, us, you, him, her, it, them,
ME, THEE, US, YOU, HIM, HER, IT, THE if,
are governed by a verb, the pronouns jce, re, nous, rous, se, lc. La,
rigir *** verbe,
Lcs, Lui, Leur, r, eti, which represent th^m, (are placed) in french
7* reprSsenter ** , - se placer^*^ * en
■ ■ ' »^ ' " I ■ '
• See N.B. under note (ii), page 235. ♦ 4ir«i« V* expressed by re before voir.
294 EXERCISE.
PERSONAL PRONOUN.
imnoediately before that verb; Your brother does not love me. He
imniddiatement **• (^J verbe ; - aimar***
never comes to see us. Does he not speak to you, when he meets
iw venir ^^ wir, - ** parler (o) , rencontrer
you? My mother will not allow me to speak to him. I will write
? vouloir (kkjpermettre de (o) - 4cr%r»
to her. I will scold her for using you so. Do not say (any thing
(o) - grander de traiter ainti. - dM^ ••
to her (about it.) She would use me worse (lor it.) She would beat
(oj en - traiter plusmal en* - battn
me. . If I knew it, I would not suffer it. I must^^ recondle their .
Si savaU le, - souffrir II fatit queje r4concilie
I will invite them to come to see me. I will speak to them to-day.
- inviter d venir *7« -voir - (o) aujourd'hui,
55. If the pronouns jve, re, ifousy vous^ se, xe, xa, xes, luU Leur, i
proTiom
Ell are governed by a tense compounded of the auxiliary verbs avoir
rSgir^'^ par terns composS availiainfi*
or irRE, and of a past"" participle, they must (be placed) before
ou , passi participe, •* devoir {kkj se pifieer **•
the auxiliai7 verb, not between the auxiliary and the participle ; Have
" , non entre ;
you seen my brother? I have seen him, but I have not spoken
voir 7 , *** parler
to. him. My mother has forbidden me to speak to him. Has he
(o) difendre de (o)
returned you the book which you had lent him? No, he has not
rendre lime 5"* aviez preter * ? ^'^ ^^
returned it* yet**. Has he read it^? I do not think"* he has
rendre le eneore» lire + ? - penser ^"
opened it«. I am afraid®* he "^has lost it*. He has told me that
ouvrir t - craindre ^*^ perdre t dire que
you haye given it him. I have not given it him. It* is not mine.
donner <« • «« • 1/ «»
I hav€ borrowed it* from a friend. H§ has asked me fpr*®* it again.
^mprunter t d, redemander - i i
If the pronouns me, thee, us, you, him, hsr, it, them are
ME, THEE, UJS, YOU, HIM, UJ8R, IT, THEM
governed by the. imperative of a verb, consider whether the sentence
r^gir ** par innpSroMf , contidirer «i phrate
commands, or whether it* forbids. |j
commander, ou si t dSfendre,
^ Soe note (f) p. 79. t See note (h) p. 80. X -Again is expressed by re before demander
I] The verb commands wben the action spoken of is to be done ; tbe verb forbids when
the action spoken, of is not to be done ; so, Wait, is a command ; Do not wait, is a for-
biddancfi or proliil-ition.
EXERCISE. 395
PEBSOHAL PRONOUN.
50. If you command, pl^ee the pronouns after the verb, and express
, placer^ apices verbg, exprimer'
Me by Mois THSE and thyself by roi ; Wait fof me. Get thyself ready.
, THEE THYSELF i Attendre^^ ApprSter -
57. If you forbid, place the pronouns before the verb, agreeably to
d^fendre, • • avant , suivant -
the general^ rule, and express me by jue ; thee and thyself by re ;
gMral^ rigtb, ME ; thee thyself j
Help"" me. Do not help me. Help^ yourself; help him; help her;
Aider* - *®o Servir^ t ; servir ; ;
help them. Dp not help him; do not help her; do not help them.
$ervir - servir ; -» ; -
Wait for me. Do not wait for me. Bring me a clean" plate.
AttejulM* *** - **^ Apporter* blanche assiette.
Do not give me such a dirty plate. Bring it^ here. Do not bring
gi ^ 8al^ * la id. -
it here* Shew it him. Do not shew it him. Take it. Dq not
•« Jlf(mfrer»«« lui4 «« "« Prendre «*
take it. Hear me. Hear him. Do not hear him. Stop her. Do
•■ Ecouter* - Arreter -
not stop her. Let*** her go. Do not let her go. Let them alone.
Laisser aller, - **® ti'anquilles.
58. If the verb which governs the personal pronouns Is followed by
rigir personnel^ suivi d'
a preposition expressed in french, the pronouns (are placed) after the
eiprim4^^ en , - se placer^^
preposition, and me (is expressed) by Moi; thee by roi; him by lui;
, ME "S^exprimer^^ par ; thee ; him
HER by Elle; them by eux, masc, by ^lleSy fern.; Come near me.
HER ; THEM , , ' , ; s'opprocher \ de
Have you thought of^ me ? I always think of you. I was coming
pemer d ? ^®* penser4 - t>enir"*
to you, when they obliged me to gQ to h^r. You are laughing'"
a , obliger d* alUr ^ -^moqueri
at*^ me. Do you know what she says of him P He does not care
d$ - javoir*** ** dire de ' ? - w saucie*
foi**^ her nor for what she says of him. They have enquired
d* ni de ^ ••'t sHnformer
afler you. Have you applied to ^ them? I will not trust*^ them.
d^ ^^\ t'adresser d f vouldr mefierd
What reason have you to mistrust^ them 9 I do not speak of them.
■* reason de vous mijier d* I *
* The gecoad person singular <^ the imperative is seldom used in french, except through
familiarity or contempt ; the second person plural is used, though speaking to a single
person; so instead of saying Place, we say Placezj instead of Attends, yve say Aitendes,
f See reflective Terbs, pages 114, 115. t See note (f ) page 79.
296 EXERCISE,
PERSONAL PRONOUN.
59. If several pronouns are governed by the same verb, they must
plusieurs rSgir^^ par , •* devoir
(be placed) together in the following order; The pronouns of the
(kkj se placer eruembU s^* qui suit ■■ ordre ;
first" person jtfc, nous; those of the second tc, rous, and that of the
» personne ; * tecond^ , *
third ae, (are placed"*) before any of the other pronouns ; Jtc, La, lcs,
- se placer* ** touts - autres ;
(are placed) before Lui, Lcur, r. En; luU Leur before r, eu; and r
"Se placer ^^* ; "^ ;
before sn ; I have something to tell you. What® is it ? I can riot tell
t ; * i dire (y) 7 pouwir C^Ay
it you now. I will tell it you (by and by.) Why wilP^ not you
le aprisent, - tantot, Pourquoi vouloir
tell it me now ? I have a letter for you. Your brother has sent \V*
f lettre pour envoyie %
me to bring it you. Where is it ? Give it me. Why will*^ not
w »7o apporter t OH «f Donner^* ^ voubir^^
you give it me ? If you do not give it me immediately, I will*?' not ask
«* f - •* aussitot, - ne
you foy*®* it again, and I will tell him** of it. Here it is**^. Shew
- II plus,^^ - lui \\ le La void "•■• Montrer
it^ me. I will return it to yoa presently. I have brought you some
«o - rendre •* - tout d Cheure. apporter ** •
fruit too. Give us some. What® ! you had promised it to us, and
ausst, (p) Quoi ! aviez promettre '^ - ,
you give it to them. I offered^ it to you first and you would not
•• - ai offert •• - ** premierement avex ***
have it. I will send you some to-morrow. Do not forget to send
voulu *• - envoyer (p) demain, - oMier de
me some, for it is long*" since I *" have eat any. I wilU'* not,
(p) , car ily a long'tems que mangS (p) »•■•
60. When a verb in the imperative governs several pronouns, if
Quand d imp^ratif r^gir plusieurs ,
jfoi, 7oi are (in the) number, these two pronouns (are placed) for
du g *8 " se placer^^ • pour
the sake of melody afler the other pronouns ; Give it me. Bring
- - m^lodie autres ; Donner^^ Amener
her to me. Send them to me there. Send some to me there.
— Envoyer - y. (e) p. 74. -
* S^ M. B. under note (ii) p. 235* t See note * p. 78. t See note (h) p. 80.
H We do not say in irench, Demander quelqu'un pour une chose, to ask somebody for a
thing ; the thing is always the object of the verb, and the person the object of a prepon^
tion ; we say, Demander une chose a quelqu*un, to ask a thing to somebody, the same as
we say, Donrur une chose a queUiu*un, to give a thing, to somebody. Nor do we say.
Dire une personne d'une ch)sef to tell a person o/a thing, we say, Dire une chose a une pc*^
wnnCf tp te\l ]» thing to a person.
EXERCISE. 297
PEaSONAL PRONOUN,
61. Except when either"" of these pronouns meets the pronoun
ExeepU Vun im Vautre rencontrer
En J for, ME SOME, ME of IT, of THEM (are expressed) by jt'en;
i car, MB SOME, MB of IT, of THEM - «'cxpnm«r i«* ]par ,
THEE SOME, THEE of IT, of THEM are expressed^ by i^en,
THEE SOME, THEE of IT, of THEM - CmJ N.B. ^
whether they come before or afler the verb; He ^ave me some.
soit qu^ venir **• - ; aonner (p)
Give me some. He put^ me (in mind) (of it.) Put me (in mind)
(p) faire souvenir en Faites souvenir
of it. He brought thee some. Recall to thyself the difficulties of it.
*• apporter (p) Rappeler - difficult^ *•
62. As there are only two genders in french, the masculine aud
Comme il n*y a que genre en , tnasculin
the feminine, the neuter" pronouns it, they, them (are expressed) ^
feminin, neutre^ IT, theT, them - (HJNB. lu t<(
by il, Elle, lis, Elles, re, la, les, agreeably to the gender and*. % ^/
number of the noun to which they refer"*, the same as when (speak-
• 7« te rapporter, de mime que on parte
ing) of ^persons; Look at that tree; it is well blossomed, yet
personne; ^egarder ^^ * arbre; fieuri, cependcmt
it produces no fruit.^ I will cut it down, if it does not bear
produire i«> N.B. abattre, (h) p. 80. • , - porter
fruit* this year. (These are) "very fine trees, but they are too
N.B. annee. "'' tree »■ , trap
young to bear fruit yet*". They do not bear fruit*, when they are
)eune» pour » d^jd.^-^- - ^•^•,
so young. (That is) a fine flower. -It is a rose. Will you have»7*
Si
M
«7 fleur. «* Vouloir
it? How sweet it smells! I will take it to my mother.
(h)p.80. »" fcont sentir! »78 «a« (h) p. 80.
She is so*" fond of roses. Take some of these cherries ; they are
- tant aimer - ^ Prendre " (bb) cerise;
very good. They are not quite ripe" yet*". They will be better
tres " tout d fait miir encore,^-^ (b) p. 72.
in another week. It" is very pleasant to have a garden. near one's
•*' une semaine, **••• agriable d* jardin presdesa
house. It" is the greatest" pleasure I have. Was it" you who
N.B. 44 plaUir(iJ ~ Etait ^.B.
sent'" us some fruit the other day? No, it" was my brother. I
envoyer^ autre jourf Non, n.b. i40
thought"* it" was you. Did you like**' it**? Yes, it was very nice.
p«n*er*" W** - trouver bon ? , **• bon.
* To CUT is Couper ; To CUT DOWN is Abattre, not Couper en bas,
t Sweet is here used adyerbially, so is Bon, and it does not require any agreement.
398 EXERCISE.
PBRSONAL PBONOUN.
63. Though Luif zeur^ (are used) for all*^ beings i\\b.\?i hi^ve life
QumquB , , - ^employer^^ p<mr Utr$ (m) p. Q3, ^vie
such as brutes and plants; as likewise for ideal** substaacea in whieh
tels que brute f ^jlantef et auisi idial^ ^ daju 7*
we suppose an active principle, such as ^heaven, providenee, fortjine,
supposer actif^ prineipe, telles que del, ^ § ^ »
some virtues and viees ; as. Take the horses into the stable, and bring
• vertu * , ,• comme, **• ■" Seurie, •*•
them" some iiay. This tree is dying*", give*" it a little' water.
(f) p. ^. • fom, * arbre - se mouriry donner *• peu ^-^ eau.
Most men worship ^ove ; they sacrifice every thing to it ; They
Laplupartdes adorer^^ amour; sacrifier *®7 My j/j
can not be used for Ijfel^ss^ beings which are" commonly*" called
- {hkj s'employer san$ vie ' que tn ordinairement appeler
things ; in speaking of things, to it, to them ar^ expressed ])y Y ;
chose ; en parlant 7 , to iTy to them - 8*exprimer *** ;
Geography is a pleasant study $ you should give some time to it. You
Giographie "^ agrMU^ 4tude; *''• * terns **
do not pay sufficient attention to it. I want tp learn mathematics ; but
faire assez ^ N.B. »* seo ^math^matique ;
I can not apply to them. I have not time to stick to them.
(hkjm'appliqtier *• "^ de nCattacher *•
64. Lniiy Elle^ eux, Elles^ afler a preposition^ (are said) only of
priposition ne se disent que
persons and beings that are" generally*" personified ; such as heaven,
7personne ^ que on ginSralement personnifier^^ ; tels que ^ ,
providence, virtue, love, &c. ; as. If mep knew*" virtue, they would
^ , '^vertUf "f amour, 8^c. ; comme, '' connattre ' ,
burn with love for it, and t own that (there is) no' real happiness
hruUr d' pour , avouer que **• N-^- vraiX honheur
without it. In speaking of brutes or things, the preposition is gene-
sans En parlant " 7 brutes ou ^ , .. iw
rally changed into an adverb, and the pronoun (is left out); as,
se changer^*^ en - adverbe, - s'omettre^^ ; comme.
That chair is broken, (Jo not sit*' upon it. The rails are
(lih) chaise rompu^^, - s*asseoir || " dessus barreau
newly paintied, do not leaner against them. Stand" (by the side)
fraxchement peint * , - s*appuyer\\ contre Se tenir || d c6ti
of them. I have made a terrace in my garden, a grotto under it, and
terrasie ■^" , grotte dessous,
planted trees all round it. I am going to make a water spout (in the)
plants *arbre autour ^^^ ^Ts d'eau ^jet au
middle of it, and a canal through it. Have you ever been in it ?
milieu , d travers, jamais dedans ?
• See note j page 882. f JVould is hers imderstood ia eoglbh.
J Put this adjectire beCara the noon. || See the imperative 'fa rcflectiye rerb, p. 114.
EXERC!SE. 299
PERSONAL FBONOUN.
65. When he, she, it, they are the nominative of the verb be,
HE, SHE, IT, THEY, BE,
followed bv a substantive, they^ are generally expressed by Ce;
Do you know that gentleman who is coming (this way ?) He is a
philosopher. He is a very learned man That is his wife who is with ]
philoaophe, tris - savant C est la femne
himt She is q very haughty" wom^n. Is that thpir house ? Yes, ^ '
* hautain *• femme. Est-ce la ? Out, !
it is. It is a very gopd* ho^se. They are very respectable people*. i
66. He, she, thev, urn, her, them are sometimes psed'^ ]
BE, SHE, THEY, HIM, HER, THEM - qi^elquefoh ^^ s'emfihyer
without reference to a noun expressed in the discourse, but with
rapport exprim^ *^ discours, avec
reference to the words man, woman or people understood ; then they
mot MAN, WOMAN ou PEOPLE Kus-eiitendus ; alors *
(are expressed) he, him by cdui ; she, her by celle; they, them
- i'exprimer^^ hs, him par ; SHE, her ; they, them
by ceux; Happy he who lives, i. e. the Tnan who lives contented with
; Heureiix vivre content ***
his lot. Providence never abandons him who does not abandon himself.
8ort, ^ *•• abandonner - s*abandonner lui'tneme.
She who refuses a husband, is not alwavs sure to ^* find another.
refuser mari, sAr • «n s* trouvei' un autre,
N. B. The English, in this kind of sentences, often place"* the
Anglais, •*' (^^J *ort« • phrase, '^ placer
words HE, she, &c. and the relative who, whom, whichw follows
he, she, S^e. relatif who, whom, (m) p. ai. «utwf
them, in different" »parts of the sentence; the French (on the)
** , "• different^ partie ; «m
contrary, generally place Qui, QUe, Dont immediately after cdui,
eontraire, ^^ ^*^ imniidiatement
celle, ceux; He is a flatterer who praises men for virtues which'* they
• ; flattetir louer ^ des (m) p. 88.
have not. He can not be happy whose happiness depends upon
saurait *•* ^* bonheur'^ dSpendre des
other people. They are not always happy who seem to be so»*.t
autres. -•» paraitre - - te
67. His, HBR, THEIR usid in the same sense as the above" pro
HIS, HER, THEIR employes sens que ci'dessus
nouns, i e. witliout refereiice to a noun mentioned, are expressed,
rapport ( dont ilsoit fait mention), - s^ejprimer^^,
• See * D. 210. + Turn thi» sentence in f rench ; They who seem happy, are not always so.
300 EXERCISE.
PERSONAL PRONOUN.
HIS by de celui; her by de ceUe; their by de ceux; Every body
HIS ; HER ' ; THBIR IW
blames his manners, i. e. the manners of him, who acts without modesty.
blamer maniere , agir modestie*
I would not trust her virtue, who does not care«» for her reputation.
voubir me fier d, vertu - se souciei' de *
Tlieir labours do not always succeed, who take their measures best.*
travail - *** rSuasir prendre mesure le mieux.
68. When a personal* pronoun is the object of several verbs, it must
personnel otjet plusieurs , <' doit
be repeated with each verb ; He saw and heard me. He loves and
16 ripiter ^®* ; voir entendre ** atm«r
esteems you. I hate and despise him. I entreat and conjure you.
estimer ** ha'ir m^priser ** prier conjurer **
69. When several verbs come together, the pronouns should (be
ensemble, devraient (»e
placed) immediately before the verb which '* governs them ; Will
placer) (m)p. 82. r4gir ** ; »7»
you help me to do it? Can not you do it yourself? He wishes to
aider ^^^ faire^f »" (m) n.b. « souhaiter >7«
marry her. She will not speak to him. She can not bear him.
ipouser ** vouloir (kk) (o) ** !•* souffrir **.
70. When, in a sentence of several parts, the subject mentioned
Quand^ '^^ phrase plusieurs partie, sujet dont il est fait mention
in the first** part is continued, the french add*'^ to the following* parts
premier continuer, frangais ajouter suivant**
of the sentence one of the pronouns Le, La, tes, eu, y, agreeably to trie
suivant —
idea which^* they wish to express ; Is this the master of the house ?
idde (m) p. 8S. vouloir *'• » Est-ce ici maitre f
Yes, he is ; i. e. tht master. He is rich and I am not ; i. e. rich. He
,Cr) , ' riche (m) . t
has friends and I have not ; i. e. any friends. Are these the books
^ami (m) . (p) t Sont-ce ici
of which you were speaking ? Yes, they are ; i. e. the boohs. Is
74 155 f '^ , t
your brother at home ? No, he is not ; i. e. there. And if the
»8* au logUf »" , 1". (e)p. 74.
auxiliary verb with which we®® ask the question, is attended by ano-
auxiliairi^ 7« N.B. faire , accompagni d*
ther verb, that verb must also be repeated; Have you seen your
, (hh) doit aus»\ - se ripiter ; (ii) ''•■• vu
* Tnrn ; The laboarg of those who take best their measiffes, do not always succeed.
t You do not repeat the noun or adjecthn; which is understood in engUsh, but yon mast add one of
tae above pronouns to the verh^ as long as the saiM subject is continued.
EXERCISE. 301
PERSONAL PRONOUN.
brother lately? No, I have not, i.e. seen him. When you see-^
ileimis peu f »» , • . verrez
him, tell him that I want to speak to him. I will ; i. e. tell it him. I
, dWe /kiW (hb) *w '7« (o) ♦ .
do not know what he wants ; do you? i. e. know it? No, I do not ; i. e.
aavoir ®* vouU>ir\ • ^ 70N.B. /•
>
k)ww it; if I did'*^ ; i. e. know it, I would not have asked you about it.
70 N.B. ; • . 70 N.B. ^ detnunder - f *•
71. If the pronoun, which** in these instances (is added) to the sen-
,(m)p.82. (bb) cos ' iajouler^^
tence, represents a noun, it must be one of the words ze, la, les^
, reprisenter , doit mot
agreeably to the gender and number of that noun ; Are you the
mtvant - ■ (bb) ;
brother of that lady? Yes, I am. Are you the sister of that
^bb) 9 , (bb)
gentleman ? No, I am. not. Are these your horses ? Yes, they are.
motuieur t Sont-ce ici cheml t » **
72. If you have to represent, in the second part of the sentence,
d reprisetUer *•
an adjective, an adverb, or a member of a sentence, you^'^ must add
, , ou un memhre - , il ".B. fa^if ajouter
ic without regard to gender or number ; Sir, are you ready? Yes, I
satis avoir igard ' oit, 7 . ^ pritf ,
am; i. e. ready. Are you ready. Madam? No, Sir, I am not; i. e. ready.
9» 9
Are your brothers returned*" ? No, they are not ; i, e. returned.
184 989 f ,
73. En, r, which^* are generally said** of things only, may, in v,/
(m) p. 82, - *"* se dire ^ , peuvent, en ^ "^
answer to these questions, (be used) for persons ; sn, instead of
rfyome (bb) , (kk) s* employer povr 7 • , au lieu de
de jtfoi, de roi, de juousy de voxiSy de l?«*, ^EUe, d'jBiu?, dtElles; v,
instead of k Moi, k Toif k Nonsy a voits, k Lui, a jsZ/e, k mix^ k slles ;
Were you speaking of me ? * Yes, I was ; i. e. apeakcng of you. Do
_ 183 199 58 ^ m , -
you care for her ? No, I do not ; i. e. care for her. Will you not
te smicUr de » f »" , • • va
trusts him? No, indeed, I will not; i. e. trust him. Have*^ you
voiis fier a * f *•* , en v£rit4, • , X
not applied to them? Yes, we have'''; i.e. have applied to them.
i\tdre$ter * ? , • •
* These signs, or aaxilitry Terbs which represent the pnncipnl verb in-english, have no meaninK in
french, yoa mast reptat the nerb itself.
f Soe note | p. 896. X See compound tenses of a /eAcetire verb used interrogatively, pag« 11£.
/
302 TiKERCISE.
PERSONAL PRONOUN.
RECAPITULATORY exercise on the foregoifig rules*
Your sister has not used**' me well. What has she dbnfe to you ?
H*»ta pas ti^avee iwn.b. t« fai^g ^^y f
We were at the ball last night; I asked^ her to dance with kne;
"• bal «» . piri^i9r »« rfanier ;
she refused me, and after she had refused me, she danced with
itf/Twjr'^ , oprd^qne tut ttfnsi , ••'
another. She mehtioned it to me this morning. She is very sorry
(for it.) She desired me to tell ybii so. She did"' not intend to offend
en a ** prii ** dire le ** atotr destein '** ojfenser
you. She had promised to dance with him before you had*" asked
avait pramellre ^^ avant qiie eustiez deniander
her. She ought''' then to have told me so. She forgot*^ it. She did not
Ini aurait done - du dire /«** onblier -
think (of it.) I beg you will forgive*" her. You had promised me
penser^"^ y prier f deparaonuer Ini av»«
that, when you should come to see tne, you would bring me your
que, quand venir ^T* voir , - ***
children. Why did** you not bring them with you ? I could not
FinirqiUH avet anienis ? ai ^^ pu
bring them to-day. I wilP" bring them the next time I come'**.
""^ aujonrd'hui. - **« prcchaine fois **^ vietidrai.
Bring them to me as soon as you can"*. ^ I will'®. They have desired
■*• (o) aussitM qne poavoir,^ '*•'*• ***
me to buy'® them fruit, and to send it to them, but I will take it to
^^acheler({)p.?9. », ^^ etivoyef (o) , ^ ^(o)
them myself. I long to see them. It is so long**« sincfe I have seen
(m) N.B. J rfe voir U ya si long~iem que ['»« vws'*"
them. They will be very glad* to see you. They are very fond ot
bien aise ** - fort *** aimer -
you. They are always talking'" oif you. You are so good || to them.
155 183 parlei' auez tant de ItonU pour
They like you better than their lincle. lie is incessantly t^azing'"
aimer (b) p. 72. oncle, - sans cesse »"* tonrmenter
them. They will"* not stay with him. They would rather come to
vmiloir rester aiment mietix (o)
me or go to you. They are very amiable^ children. I often think
(o) w uimabl^ » '" penser
of them. I am mueh obliged to you. You have got a nlcfe stick.
*» bien obUg4 . (o) ^^ M f'^^on.
Let*« me look at it. Will you have it ? I make you a present (of it.)
Laisser voir - Vouloir '74 f faire *^ *"
• See note * p. 281. f Turn in french, / beg you to forgive her. X See lONC, p. 175.
11 To BE so GOOD. TO BE SO KIND, are expressed by Aooir taut de bonU * BB so GOOD,
BE SO KIND, in the imperativej Ayez la bonte ; not Soyez a bm*
EXERCISE. 803
PERSONAL PRONOUN.
RECAPITULATORY exercue on the foregoing ruUi.
I thank you. I wilP?^ not deprive jou of it. I do not care (for it.)
remercier vouloir (kk)jymyer - i$umcier en
I have boug^ht it with the int(intion of giving^ it away. Have yon
acheter dans dessein donner^ - EnJ^
ffot another? Yes, I have^^ Is this your new"* wateh ? Yes, it is. It
^ un autre f , N.B. Est-ce ici neuve montre f , ce ^o o»
is silver; I thoug^hf* it was gold. My uncle has promised me a gold
d*argehi ; pensau^*° •* "' d'or, oncle d'or
one, if I get a prize this year. I wish"^ you may^®.'^*** Ah !
en '", remporter prix (hb) **® souhaiter en remportieg tin. Ah !
h it<* yoii? How glad I am to see you! If you had not called upon
"•*• f ^^ aise ^^ voir ! aviez *•
me now, I would have called upon you this aflernoon. I wanted**^
a pr^iertt, «• . (bb) *aprhmidu >*«
to see you. We go to the play to-niffht; will you come with us?
alter eoml^die* m » f venir f
Will your cousin*** be there? I think«» she wilK^i I will go; for I long
- t coutine f. (e^ p. 74. penser N JJ. f ; car t
(very much) to see her. She is a most amiable*" young lady. You
fort ** voir •* des pltu aimables jeune demoiselle.§
do not know (how much) I love and esteem her. I always think
- tavoit combien aimer estimer *^ penser
of her, but I (am afraid)"" she never thinks of me« What reason
■*• , craindre '*• aoo w raison
have you to think so? Because, when I meet her, she does not
>« le^f Parce que, rencontrer, - ||
take any notice of roes. You should^* speak to her. You should
faire aueune attention d devoir (o) ^7'
call upon her. I (am afraid) of offendingj^ her. I know"* she has
(idi) "• eraindri diplaire *** lui savoir
a ffreat regard for you, but I can not say that she loves you.
- oeaueoup de respect pour , (kk) diri (bh)^^'
Yet, I recollect that one day, as I was speaking of you to her,
Cepmdant, sirappeUr un jour, comm$ "* (oj ,
she asked me if I knew*** you well. I told her that I did^*,
dtmander eonnattre bien din (f) p. 79. (bb)^-^- ,' If'**-
• Comedie in french, does not meso Comedy oiiIy,bnt is said of any kind of plays acted npon a staifft, '
and also of the house itself where such plays are acted ; you mav also express the word Play by Specta- '
cle. Theatre in frtneb is generally understood of that part of the house called the stage ; yet it is said I
also of the Aoiue itself.
t See note • p. 143. X See the impersonal verb long, p. 175.
$ Detnoiselle is said of all ladies who hare never been married, whatever their age may
be ; Dame is said of all ladies who are or have been married.
I Express Not by ne only, before the verb, as aucune which follows it, supplies the
pUfce of pas or point,
% Ton may express 1 did by Oui only, ot yov insy repeat ih6 rtth Connaitre, and
say, I did know you*
304 EXERCISE,
PERSONAL PRONOUN.
RECAPITULATORY excrcise on the Jbregoing rules.
and she seemed'"' pleased (at it.) If she is at the theatre to ni^ht,
paraitre bien aise en d eomddie * ^
I will tell her what you haYe told me. I shall be much obliged
•* ^ bien obUgl
to you, if you do. I see a gentleman in that box yonder wha
(o) f t monsieur (^) ^g^ ut-bas ''J
owes me (a great deal) of money, but I dare not ask him for it, for
devoir - beaucoup argent, oser § , de
fear of giving him "pain ; yet I am in great want (of it ;) and
peur faire ^^ '"* peine ; cependant, avoir grand besoin en ;
as (you are acquainted with him^) I will be obliged to you, if you
comme vous vous connaissez || , Co) ,
will tell him so, the first time you have an opportunity to
»«* dire (£)p.79. W^. /wfO- "* ** occasion »"
mention it to him. Who, Mr. A ? I know him very well. He is
parler en (o) Qut^ Mons. A ? conwAtre tres . bien,
a Yery honest man; he will pay you, you may be sure of it. I
honnite(i) j payer , pouvoir sHr
answer for him as for myself. I suppose"^ he has forgotten it.
repondre ^^ comme ** mm-mime, s^imaginer oubaer
My sisters were talking this morning of going'^ to drink tea^ at
15S parler (bbj matin alter '^a prendre thS
your "^^house this aflemopn. Shall you be there? Certainly, I shall7<>.
N.B. 8 aprh-midi, (e) p. 74. Certainement, N.B.
I should not like to lose that opportunity of seeing them. I want
aimer "• (^b) occasion *** **
to return** them the book which'* they have lent me, and to thank
N.B. (f)p.79. (m)p.82. prSter , remercier
them (for it.) I have been told that one of them is going to be
en " un« f - "» »7«
married*®*. Is it true ? They®^ talk of it, but I do not know whether
se marier, vrai 'i n.b. parler , n
it is true or not. Ask *®her. I dare not ask her such a thing ;
ou Hon, Demander k (f) p. 79. oser (f) p. 79. •* chose ;
she would be angry with me. I met*^ them walking together
f&^i *• ^'^ rencontrer d la promenade ensemble
the other day, and I related'*' to them what had*"" happened to us,
autre , raconter (o) ®* itait arriver (o) ,
after we had left'* them ; they laughed (at it) (very much.) They
apres que ^^ quitties ; % rire '^ en beav^coup, ^
* See note • p. 303. t Here you may express Do by the verb Faire, or you
may repeat the verb and the pronouns, if you tell it her, ^
t Turn ; I see in that box yonder a gentleman who S^c, § See note H p. !296«
II Leave out with him ; as Vous vous connmssez means, you are acquairUed witn joch oihc^,
% Mind the gender of the noun which this pronoun represents.
EXERCISE. 305
PERSONAL PRONOUN.
RECAPITULATORY exercise on the foregoing rules,
told"' me they wished*** that they had been with us. I also'** shewed*"'
dire^^ • totihaiter (nn) autsi montrer
them the letter which you have written to me, desiring me not**^' to
(f)p.79. (m)p. 82. ^mt«"» (o) ,pourprier hb.»«
mention it to them, for fear*** your father (should come) to know of
parler en (o) , de peur que *•* vint a tatoir -
it; but I requested them not*** to mention it to him. Have they
le ; prier **7 h.b. d« parler en (o) •
mentioned it to you? No, they have nof*. They only*** told*** me
en(o) *•*, • *•'•** • ieulement ontdit
that they had met you, and that you had**' walked (a little way)
(bbJv.B. • avaient , 6tiez tepromener . unpeu
with them. They were (very well) pleased** with you. I was not
• • tres - content v.o, «»
less so** with them. They have invited me to come and spend an
moins le d' • • inviter *** venir (nn) *'* •
evening with them. I intend**' to pay them*** a visit soon ***.
*■* evec • avoir dessein *** rendre (f) p. 79. bientot. ^•^*
Pray give my love to them, and tell them*** so. I will'*. Is not
faire amitUs (o) t , (0 P« '^^' ^ *•"•
your country **house finished yet***? No, it is not, and I do not
de campagne *** finir **• "'B* wi , • 70 ^ «
know when it will be. My father does not like it ' now. He says
sacoir quand • 70 . atm^*(h) p.80.
that it is too near the road. He wants*** to sell it, and ***
(bb) w.B. • trap pret de route* avoir envie *** * (h) p. 80. d*«n7*
build another a little further in the country. I wonder he does
bdtir *** unpeu loin*^ *** *** t*£tonner «*»
not like it; it seems*** a' good house, and it is in a pleasant
• ; • avoir apparence - i , « ai3 agriable '*
situation. He is going*** to add a terrace to it, and make a moat
- aller *7* ajonter tetrasse , fossi
round it. Have you been in the park? They** are making a p%nd
jutour •* pare ? m.b. - faire ^^ itang
in the middle of it. (Here is) some fruit. Will you have*'* any?
mUwu 64 »«7 » ' (V)
1 shall be obliged to you, if you will give me some. Take some.
obligi (o) , »** (p) Prendre (p)
Take some more. (There*** is) plenty in the garden. We have
(p) davantage, en^ abondance •*• jardin, en'^
(so much) that we* do not*** know what to do (with it.) Have you
tant (bb) »•».. - »-b. que ^^ faire ■** || en.
• Mind the gender of the iioim which this prooonn represents,
t Express this sentence thus: / pray you to give my low to them^ and to tell them tfO,
I Tom this sentence thus : It hai a good appearance. Q IVith is implied in the prononn en,
306 EXERCISE,
PERSONAL PRONOUN.
RECAPITULATORY escrcise on the foregoing rules.
been where 1 told** you? No, I have not*®. Why do not you go?
itre pa ai dtt »»^ N Ji. PowrqutA -yT^ i"
Are you not ready yet**? Yes, I am. Is your sister ready? I
*» jtret encore^ 9. ,7® m «•
(am afraid) she is not. Go and tell her** to (get ready) as fast as
eraindre « »*• 7° AUer-Cnn) dire (f) p, 79. ^'^ s*appr£Ur « vito *«
she can'*. Is this the book of which you were speaking to me?
pourra. Est-eeici ^* "* (o)
Yes, it is. Have you read it? Yes, I have'^^. Is it entertaining? Yes,
»• lire N.B. amusantf
very. Read it. You know Mr. B.; do you no t«*? Yes, I do.^®
exir^mtmmit* cofmaitre Monsieur ; tCest^ce pas f Oui, ^-B*
He is a very clever young man, but I (am afraid*"*) he is a little itoo
•* tres - habile^ jeune , eraindre *** ^^ unpen
much) addicted to gaming. Has he ever asked you for money? Yes,
trop adenn£ yen. jamais * ^argent? ,
he haaf®. Did** you lend him** any ? Yes, I **'didy^ 1 am very sorry
».B. Avez priU (f) p. 79. (p) , ai n.». fdche
(for** it,) for I do not think that he will ever return it to you. Do
$n , car - (bbj ^-o* rendre *^* C^) -
you think he will'* ? Yes, I do**. He is a very worthy* youug
ft3i M^N.B. , jr.B. •* de heaucoup de miriie
nian. I wish** you would recommend him to some of your friends
*■* vauhir recommander ••
who could serve him* I will'*. I esteem him (very much) myself,
p<lt tervir »•»• estimer fort Cm)v.B.
and I beg you by all that is dear to you, not** to mention to him
supplier par tout ce qui cher Co) , n.b. d« parler de (o)
what** I have said to you, for I would never pardon you for it. I
(m) p. 82. C^) » ^^ **^ pardmner •
will'* not. Only*** tell him**, when you see** him, that I shall be
NA SeulePieni (f) p. 79. voir , (bh) nb.
much obliged to him, if he will do me the favour that he has pro-
Hen ohligi (o) , "* faire grdce '* pro-
mised me. I will tell him'* so^. I like them who shew themselves
iB«ttre*** (Op* 7^9. le aimer «* tnontrer . se
such as they axe. (So do I.) Tell him** to call upon me as soon as
$eU que Etmoiaussi. (f)p.79.** ■* ^ iSt *»
he can**. I will'*. Now, I must wish you good morning. Come
pouvoir, »•»• 2 present, ^** souha^te^ ' ■*♦ n.b. Veni-^
and see us again soon. You may'7* be sure that I wiU^^ I will
'" Cnn) revoir f bientdt. pouvoir sAr (bbJv.B. v.b.
eome as oden as I can, whilst I am so near you. I hope you will'*.
** ** ** , pendant que *♦* pris d§ «*i n.b
* "" ' M l I I I , ■ ■ . . I . , ■■■. ., ■ ._
* See note | page 996. f Re prefixed to a verb, esprestei the roitf Offom.
EXERCISE, 307
74. When who, that, which are the nomin^tiyp of a vefb, they
WHO, THAT, WHICH nominotiff , i7*
(are expressed) by qui; I see a gentleman yonder who 19 w^itingf
s^eiprimer (ii) K.p. par ; voir trumsieur t Id^bas 7* *** attendre
for me. It" is frpm him T have bought that hp^se ifhich is lame.
He has another whii^h suits i]rie, I have on^ whichf I think, will die.
en7^ un autr^ convenir tw^ un , cypire, mo^r%r»
When WHOM, that, which are the object of ^ verb, they are
WHOM, THAT, WHICH objef ,
expressed by Que ^ You know the gentleman we have ju$t^ met
s*exj)rimer ; J t (s) venons de rencontrer.
It" is from him I have bought the horse that you have seen. He has
WB. Ml voir, 67*70
another which I want to buy, to replace th^t whicli I have lost.
120 260 acheter, *7o remplacer " perdre.
Who6)B, 0/ whom, 0/ lyHiCH, ,are expressed by f)ont; He is the
Whose, of whom, of which - iexprimer ; ••■*
gentleman whose horse has v^on the race. lie is not the person ,
t gagni ie prix de la course. •* personne f.
of whom you complain. No, he is^o pot. Jle is a j^m of i^hom I have
seplaindreg , ** (r) •*
a good opinion. The hors^ of which I was speaking to you is sold.
« «» - parler ^** (0) vendre,
75. Qui, »ue, Doni, whatever be ihfi or4er of the WQVis which
, , , quelque **' soit
correspond to them in english, must be placed immediately ^fle^ the
cerrespondre ^ en , deooir -^se placer imm^diatement
noun to which they relate ; A gentleman has been here who
7* " M rapporter (ii) ; + i7 est venu ici |
wanted^^ to speak to you. Is the man (come back) whpn^ I had
vouloir^*'^ ^^ (0) ^** revenir avals
sent (for him) ? Yes, he is^^ Is th^ money to ba had (turn, can
envoyer le querir 9 , "•■• Peut-fn •* avoir
on^ have the wimey) whic2» we are in need of? No, it is i)ot.««
(^k) av<m^ besoin «<» »»i , «•»
N. B. DofU, (besides its heij^g placed) immediately after the noun
, outre qu'il doit se placer
to which it rdates, must also be followed immediately (by the) nomi-
7* il , doit atissi etre suivi du
native of the verb whicM* follows it ; as, (That is) the gentleman
(m)p.8f. suivre **; , ^' f
* See note *, p. S04, Uie distincUon between the nomiruUive and the object of a verb,
t Monsieur^ not GeiUilhomme, which !n the french langaaee means Nobleman.
X See paffe 140, and 168, the difference between Savoir ana Con»aitre.
I Tarn ^is sentwca thus ; There has been here a gentleman who wanted &c.
u2
308 EXERCISE.
ftGLATIVE PRONOUN
whose horse I wanted*^* to buy. He is a man whose probity I know,
vouloir^^ ^^* acheter, •* prohiti • ,
a man whose talents I admire, and whose friendship I value much.
, amitiS priser fort.
If the sentence can not be turned in this manner, whose must
phra$e pouv(nr{kk)''setourner de (bb) maniere, whose doit(kk^
be expressed by duQud^ de laQuelle, desauels, desauelleSt agreeably to
— s*exprimer par , , , , suivant -
the gender and number of the noun to which the pronoun relates*** ;
genre humJbre '« serapporter;
He is a man to whose family I owe every thing, and in whose hands
^ famille devoir ^^^ , main
all my property is. They are people upon whose word one may depend.
bien •' ^gens^^ sur parole on peut compter*
76, Afler a preposition whom is expressed by qui for .both genders
WHOM " s'exprimer le$ deux
and numbers; which by leauely laauelle^ lesauels, lesaueUes ;
let deux ; which , » » i
from WHICH by duaud, de laQuelhy desauelst desQudles; to^ at which
from WHICH , , , ; to, at WHICH
by auQuely a laaudlcy auxQuds, auxoudles, agreeably to the gender
, , , , suivant -
and number of the noun to which it relates ; You know the gentle-
• ilse rapporter ; •
man to whom I have spoken. It® is he who has brought the parcel
parler, n.b. ** apporter paquet
in which your letter was. (This is) the carriage in which he came"^.
^** *^ voiture est venu.
Are these the horses to which he is so much attached ? They are not
Sont-ce ici n fort attaM f
fit* for the use which they are intended for*". Let us walk along
propre *^ tusage let •* destine. d. Se promener f le long de
the road in which we walked*^ yesterday. What is the name of
route (o) se promener i hier, •■
the place in which we are? I like to know the name of the places
• endroit Co) aifMt *•• •
through which I go. Have*^ you inquired for the town from which
C v) passer, Vous ites-vous inform^ de (v)
he comes? I could not hear any thing on which I can rely.
venir f ai **• pu •• apprendre •• ("uj *** compter*
77. WHO, WHOM used absolutely, i. e. without reference to a noun
Who, whom employ^ absolument, c'est-^'dire rapport
mentioned in the sentence, implies the word person understood,
( dont il soil fait mention J phrase , renfermer person sous-entendu.
A .
• See p. 140, and ld2. the distinction between Savoir and Connaitre, f See Se BLAMER, p. 114.
KXERCISE. 309
RELATIVE PRONOUN.
and is expressed by Qui; Whom did** you meet? Whom were
- 8*exprimer* ; ave% trouv^t ***
YOU with ? Whom did** you . give it** to ? I do not know whom
>8» «08 fly^j doHnS ■** — savoir
you mean*". I do not know whom you are speaking of.
vouloif dire, - « 135 aw
78. Whose used in the same sense, i. e. without reference to a
Whose employ^ mime stm, c^est'O^ire rapport
noun expressed, implies also the word person understood, and ia
exprim^f renfermer aussi person -
expressed by de qui, when it is used for of whom ; and by d Qui,
s^eiprimer* , ^s*employer* of whom; ,
when it is used for to whom; Whose son are you? Whose daughter
- • to whom; *••
IS she? Whose relations are they? Whose house is that, or whom
parent cette, t
does that house belong to ? Whose property is it, or whom does it
- (bb) est ^ . — 6«^ t -
belong to? Whose children are these, or whom do these children
ut «» ces, t (bb)
belong to ? Do you not know whose they are ? They are my sister^s.
•• 18B +
Which used to ask a question, is sometimes*^ joined like an
Which *•• faire , - quelqtufois. 8ejohidre^,comme
adjective to the noun which follows it; as, which man? Some-
adjectif suture *^ ; comme^ which MANf
times it is joined to it like a substantive by the preposition of ; as,
il - sejoindre* . ** substantif - par of;
X^HiCH of THESE MEN ? aiid sometimcs it is used without (a noun
WHICH of THESE MEN? -^ s*employer* Stresuivi
after it,) but with reference to a noun expressed in the former^ part
d\in nam, avee rapport exprim4 premier partie
Qf the sentence; as, It^ is one of these men; which is it?
phrase; , n.b. (bb) ; WHICH 18 iTf
79. When which interrogative is joined like an adjective to- the
WHICH interrogatif - sejoindre * comme
noun which follows it**, it is expressed by Qud^ aueUe, auelst Quelles,
stiivre le , il - s*exprimer • » > » >
agreeably to the gender and number of the noun ; Which horse will
iuioant - genre ^nombre j *7' ||
you ride? Which road shall we go by"*? Which inn shall we
*" mojite^ f route ^^ atler par auberge ***
(put up) 'at? Which is the best inn in this town? W^hich room
descendre *^ * meiUewr i^^) ville'i chambre
* See N.B. under note 0*0 P<^K« 3^*
i These two modes of expression are generally rendered in the same manner in freoch.
X See note (o) p. 88. | See note * p. 143.
810 EXERCISK
KBLAtlVE PRONCJUlf.
will you sit in? Which papet would you like to reftd?
*" retter *■ papia- *"• iite?
80. When which interrogative is joined like a substantive by the
WHICH - sejoindre • cmnme
pr^osition of, to the noun which follows it, or when it relates to a
OF, mivre **, il te rapporter
noun mentioned in the foregoing^ part of the sentence, it Is expressed
(dont il est fait tnentionj premier^ partie phraSe, •* - 4'eipnm«r •
by leouel, laaudley lesoUets, lesQudles, dutiUel, de laHuelU, des Sft.
v»r , , , , , ,
i. e. the ilrticle It, la, les; du, de la, de^; au, d Id, atut, agreeably to
ce9t d dire ; ; suivant >
Fender aud hnthber, is added to the words ^Uel, Quelle, audst anelles ;
' , - s'ajouter* ;
Which of these horses will you ride? Which is the easiest?
t »7» monterf ais^l**
Which of these two roads shilll Ivd go by«" ? Which is the shortest«« ?
** par court ^f
Which of these rooms will you sit in ? Which has the finest view ?
178 rettir «» belle « vue f
81. Sometimes which implies the pronoun that or those utider-
WHICH renfermer that ou those sous-
stood ; Then it is e&pressed by cdui 4nie, celie Que, cenx Que,
entendu; Alcrs il -* t'evirimer* ^ ,
cdlea Que, agreeiibly to the gender and number of the hdun to which
it relates ; Which horse shall I ride ? You may ride which (i. e.
* se rapporter ; *** tnonter pouvex
that which) you please^^. Which of these roads shall we go by ?
i7 vou$ pUtira. **• allv ••^
Go by Which you like**«. In which room shall I ])Ut ydur luggage ?
vouloir, '•• mettte hagagef
Put it« in that which I told»" yoli. Put it in Vrhich you will>«.
Mettre*^ * aidit ** ^ wuloin
82. What joined to a lidtlU, or relating to a noun mentioned
What joint , ayant rapport (dotit il est fait mention J
m the sentence, is expressed by ouel, Qudle, Quels, QueUea^ agreeably
phrase, - s'exprimer* ♦ » > > suivant
to gender and number, in the same manner as which; What place
- 7 . ' de matii^e que WHICH; endroit
do you come from? What road did^* you come by? What inn
i» iwttr *** ites^^ venu "*
will you go to**? Have you heard the report? No, what is it?
aller entendu bruit qui court f , •*
* See N. B. vnder note (tt^ page 236. f See note * page 314.
EXERCISE. 311
RELATIVE PRONOUN.
83. What used absolutely, i. e. without reference to a noun
What employ 6 , c*at'd^dire rapport
expressed in the discourse, implies the word thing understood, and
eiprimi ^'^ discours, renfermer THING •
is expressed by Que or by Quoi. What is expressed by ciu«» when it"*
•'S*exprimer ou What " i'exprimer , ii
is the object of a verb ; What do you think of this country ? What
do you intend*' to (do with yourself) ? What do you mean"* ?
- ^^ avoir dessein do deoenir ^ - im vouloir din f
What do you want«<» to do with that? What is that to you?
183 ^ouUnr »^ faire »« » (y) fait » (o) "
What (is expressed) by auoi, when it is used as an interjection, or
What , il - $* employer - , on
when it is governed by a preposition; What! he is not come yet^.
•* r6gir par ; / venu eticorev.B.
What ! you do not answer me. J^isten to me. Well ! what ?
- repondre ** icouter (o) *• JS& bt$n !
Wliat.are these people talking about? What do you meddle Mith?
- (bb) gem^^ purler ^^ de«» - KmiUr d««»
84. What is often used in the sense of that which: in these
What - i** s* employ er*^^ tens that which: (bb)
instances, what is expressed by ce ouu when it is the nominative
ca5, WHAT " s'exprimer (m) p. 82. il nominatif
of a verb, and by ce oue, when it is the object ; Do you know what
, (m)p.ft?. objet; - ^^
(that which) makes her angry ? Do you hear what she says ? I know
fdcher - - entendre
what she wants'<'^ But when what in the sense of that which is
vouloir, WHAT THAT WHICH
governed by a preposition, (it is necessary) to consider whether the
r^gir ilfaut *'* contid^rer »
preposition comes before or after what ; for of what is de ce Qui,
venir what; car of WHAT
de ce oue, i. e. of that which ; what of is ce Dont, i. e. that
, e*ett"^ire, of THAT WHICH ; WHAT of , that
q/^ which; to what is a ce qui, a ce Que, i.e. to that which ;
o/ which; to WHAT (m)p. 8@. , to that which;
what to is ce a QUoi, i. e. that to which ; as, You speak of what
WHAT to , that to WHICH ; comme, parUr
will never happen. What you are speaking of will never happen. Are
»•• mriver, "* "■
you sure of what you say ? It is what you may^^" be sure of. Will
sur (m) p. 82. dire f «* pouvez «»
you trust to what he proposes ? What you trust to is very uncertain.
feJUr proposer f •* trh ^ ineertain.
312 EXERCISE.
RELATIVE PRONOUN.
RECAPITULATORY cxercise on the foregoing rules,»
What ! is it* you ? Where have you been since"* I saw** you ?
/ N.B. Oil depuis que ai vu f *■
What country do you come from? What ship did^» you come
pays^^ - ^* venir *^ navire etes
venu
in ? What news do you bring ? What do they*® say in town ?
**■ nouvelUt - *^ apporter - *** h.b. ^ 7«i//e?.
Read the papers, and you will see. Which paper must I read?
Lire papier, voir, 1*1 iw
Which of these papers do you advise me to read ? Which has the
- 183 ctmseiller ** »«
latest^ news? (There is) very little" difference; read which you
frdiche^ *" tret- peuir.B. ;
can'** get. Now, what do you think of the news? I do not
pourrez trouver. Maintenant^ - ^^ penser -
believe a word of what that paper says. (There is) not a word of
croire mot C^^) **'
truth in what I have read. What shall we do now? Let us go
vrai f 138 _ ^ ^iig^
to the place in which we are to meet your cousin. What have yoii
endroit (0) •*• *7' rencontrer i»»
done with your stick? I do not know what I have done (with it). 1
faire *^ baton f - tavmr en ■"
(am afraid) I have left it at the inn at which we have*^ stopped
craindre (nn ) laisser ** d auberge (v) nous nous sommes arreth
to dinner. If your father asks you what you have done (with it),
dtner, , ** en" ,
what will you answer^ him? Indeed, I shall noU** know what to
*"• repondre lui^ Mafoi, n.b. 17a
say. What would you advise me to say ? I will tell you sincerely
dire, ** conseiUer ^ **• t dire ** sincirement
what I would say. Well! what? What would you say? I would
Eh bien : i3»
tell him*** ♦he truth. It* is what I was thinking of. What is your
ff)p.79. virit^, K.B. iw a«».
reason for leaving this country ? Because I see nothing here to which
raison de quitter (bb) **> J Farce que •• id (u)
I can*** apply* I want tQ go abroad. What country would you
puisse s'appiiquer, **•* dans les pays itrangers, "®
like to go to? To France or Italy? Which country would you
aimer *» »• s malief «<> iss
advise me»* to go to? Which of those countries is the most pleasant?
conseiUer "® **• plus agr^able f
• See note* p. 281.
t When the French speak of an action which they are on the point of doing:, thejr do not use the future
as the English do; they express Shall^ Will by the present tense of the verb AUer^ to to; je vais, tu va»,
il t>a, Donti allons^ ^c. with th e folio win k verb m the injinitive; so turn this sentence thus, What are we
gotng^'^i Iq ^q ^q^ f ^ Turn ; What reason have yov to leave this country f
EXERCISE. 313
RELATIVE PRONOUN.
RECAPITULATORY cxercise on ike foregoing rules.
You have seen them both ; which do you like best ? If you will
voir *** > - *w aimer U mieux f **»
come with me, I will go to which you like"". I will consider (of it.)
*• , voutoir, penser y**
(That is) the gentleman whose^* house we have just*** passed by*".
**7 monsieur m.b. venont de passer pres de
It is the house in which we lived"* formerly. Is it«* the house which
•* (v) demeurer autrefois. ^^
your lather wanted*" to buy, and for which he offered^ (so much*)
vouloir **• ^'^ aeheter, a offert tant v.b,
money ? Yes, it is. Do you know that young lady ? Yes, I do.'^*
argent? Qui, '» « iss • (^b^ ^ ^.b.
Who is she? Whose daughter is she? She is married**. Whose
rnari^, n-b.
wife is she ? Whom is she married to ? She is the wife of that
femme lae we cs ^^j
gentleman whom we were speaking of. I know whose daughter she
is. I know whose relations they are. Whose handkerchief is this
* parent mouchoir
which I have found on the staircase? I do not know whose it is.
ti-ouver sur esealierf - • •*
I do not know whom it belongs to. What shall I do (with it) ?
- • appartenir ■•• faire en**
Take it* back to the place in which you found*** it. Which door
Renuttre •* - endroit (v) avez trouv^ ** porte
must I go through ? Which of these doors must I go through ?
181 188 passer par ■» »" »*■ *®*
Go through which you like'**. Have you heard what I said*** to
Passer wudres, entendre ai dit (o)
you? No, what is it? The man you trust to deceives you. The
** >w , (^y) sefieri ^ tromper »*
company he keeps, is not honest. You do not know all the harm
compagnie frequenter, honnite, - • mal
does you. I do not *•■ know what to do. I wish*** vou would tell
faire »* - h.b. • m faire. ^** ' vouloir
me what I must do. You do not know what a disagreeable situation
»* »*» - • ' «* disagr^abU
I am in. What must I do ? Do what I told you. I do not see what
— 181 188 Faire ia« aa .
you can do better. If you had believed me, what you complain of
(hk) de mieux. aviez ** , se plaindre t *®*
would not have happened. I am sorry for what has happened to you.
itre^ arriver. fdeh^ «» *» ^^j
* See paf^e 140, 152, the difference between Savoir and Connattre, f See r^ctive verbs, p. 114.
314
EXERCISE.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUN*
85. The possessive" pronouns le mien, la tiienne, les Miens^ lea
possessif^ pronom
Miennes, mine ; le rierif la rienne, Sfc. thine ; le sien, la aienne, SfC.
mine; ^c, thins; Sfe,
HIS, HERS must be of thd same gender and number as the noun to
HIS, BERS devoir etre genre * nombre que
which they relate; Ate our horses ready? Yours and mine are^.
7«
se rapporter ;
134
prit
89 7
71.
but hers is^® not. Get hers ready as soon as you can***. Have they**
7« Appriter t *^ tot *^ poarret, w w.b.
cleaned our boots? Yours are cleaned**, but his and mine are^* not.
dicrotti * hottef d£erotte,v,B, 7«
He does not want*^^ his now. Clean mine. I want mine directly.
•- avoir besoin de tout d Pheure.
86. Afler the verb be used in the sense of the verb belong, the
Aprit verbe be employS*^ sens BELONG,
possessive words mine, thine, his, &c. are expressed by the same pro-
■• •■ fnot MINE, THINE, HIS, 6^6. - s'exprimer par mimes
nouns as would be used ** with the verb belong ; thus> mine, d not
que - on emploigraU belong; aina, mine,
thine, d rot; his, h Lui; hers, d Elk; ours, d nous; yours, a rous
thine, i HiBy ; Hers, j ovrs, ; rouns^
theirs, d £7tr, masc. d Ellea, fern. ; Is not this fan^^ yours ? No, Sir
THEiRSf , , ; a eventail *" ,
it is not mine. I think*° it is my sister's. Yes, it is hers. Are these
ei
peneit
St
X
ei
IS
horses yours or his? They are not ours; They are my cousin's.
*■* oti •« ; «3 cotwm.t
87. The possessive pronouns mine, thine, his, hers, &c. joined** by
*• •* MINE, THINE, HIS, HERS, ^C. joint K.B.
the preposition of to the noun to which they relate in this kind
OP 5"* •* se rapporter, *^* * sorte
of idioms, a friend of mine, a book o/* yours, and such like, are
* idiolisme, A FRIEND of mine, a book of yovrs^ autres semblables, -
expressed "in french by the possessive article ; thus, of mine, de ues ;
■exprimer en par ■* ; ainsi, of mine, ;
of thine, de Tcs ; of his, of hers, de ses ; of ours, de nos; of
of TRINE, ; of HIS, of HERS, ; of OURS, ; of
YOURS, de ros; of theirs, de Leurs, which, agreeably io the rules
YOURS, ; of THEIRS, , ^* , suivant - r^gle
on the article, are placed before the noun, which must always be
sur , - se placer *°^ , 7* devoir itre
plural in french ; as, I (have just*^) met an acquaintance of mine
: . venir de reneontrer connaisstmce
* Repeat of the same. t Beady \% expressed in the word Appriter, X ^^ Bot« (o) p. SS.
LXERCISE. 316
POSSfiSSIlTE ^ftd!?ou^.
who told» me thdt ^ friend of dUi^ is dedd. Is not Mrs A
adit w (bbJV'B fhoutir. Madams ^^
a relation of yours ? A son of herS is dead. A cousin of mine has
parente
married*^ a daughter of hers, but iShe is no ' relation of mine. They
are neighbours of ours. I am going to dine with an aunt of theirs.
voistn *** ailer *7« tante
RECAPITULATORY cxercise on the foregoing rules*
Your mother and mine are gone^ to (take^ a walk) in our fields;
aller 17" n.b. sis champ;
Let us go and (take a*^ walk) in yours« Is not that house yours?
- - (tin) K.B.' (bb) 18*
No, it is not ourfl; it is my uncle's. I should have taken it" for
*'i , •• ; •* oncU* t pi*i«« •* pour
yours* Our6 is not so 6ne as his, and his is better situated than
ours. Let us go (this Way) ; I want to call at a friend's of mine.
- - parici; ••* ««6 soe uneamie
I think she is a friend of yours too. Who? Mrs. A. She is an
"* •* auuu Madame •*
old acquaintance of ours, but she is no friend of mine. I do not
ancientiB X connaistance ■ » ^^ -
like her. She is incessantly^** talking of herself,' or of some relation
timer ** - sans eeese *** elle-memef ^ parent
of hers. Let tis walk into this room. What a pretty work** bag
- — Entrer *i" (bb) *■ ** jolt ouvrage sac^
you have got there. Is it yours ? No, it is not mine ; it is my
sister's, 'this'® is mine. Hers is (very much) like** yours. Hers
t K.B. ~. fart *•* resseinbter au
is not so pretty as mine. How lon^^" have you had youts?
^ ^ Combien y a-Uil que votu avex ||
I got^ mine about the same time that my sister got hers. Yours
at eu vers temt ^^
lookflF" better than hers. Ves, because I take more care^ of my
avoir apparence •• que , prendre soin n.b.
clothes than she does of hers. (What is the matter with) your
habit ^ fitire Qi** c«-c« qu' a »i
neighbour? A sistef 6f his is dead. She went^^ (a few days ago) to
voisin? mol^.** aller ily a quelquesjoun 'Tt
see a child of hers who is at a relation of ours in the countrv*
•OB tab '
and she died^ there. You hAve got a handkerchief of mine. A
est mort ** y '* ^* ttiouchoir
m ■ ■ p ■ ■ ■ . Il l • I ^ - I II ■ -
F See note * p. Si\ t See note (o) p. S8. X Pn^ this adjective before the nottH. | See § p. 353
316 EXERCISE.
POSSBSSIVE PRONOUN.
RECAPITULATORY cxerctse on the foregoing rules,
handkerchief of yours ! I have no handkerchief of yours. I have
none but what are*** mine. What ! is this*»* yours ? Yes, it is mine.
pas *'* toient •* / ■" k.b. , •>
You are greatly mistaken : It is not yours ; it is my mother's.
- fort ^•* te tromper ; ** •* •
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN.
88. The demonstrative^ pronouns celui, cdle^ this, that ; ceux,
dSmonstratif*^ THIS, THAT;
celles, THESE, THOSE nmst be of the same gender and number as the
, T/IE8E, THOSE devoir itre genre fnonU)re que
noun to which they relate ; This steeple is not so high as that of St.
7« «i ti rapporter ; (bb) docker ** haut *■
Paul. This church is larger than that which we have just*** passed
{bbj 4glise grande*^ '^^ venons de passer
by*'®. These trees are finer** than those which are in your park.
pres de (bb) arbre beau 7* pare.
N. B. Observe that celui, celle, ceux^ cellea do not express that
Observer ('bb)v.B. exprimer la
local" distinction which is implied in the words this, these ; that^
de lieu 7* renfermi *" THiSf these ; tha t
THOSE ; therefore, if you wish to make that distinction in french,
those ; c*est pourquoif vculoir ^f* faire (bbj en ,
(you musU^*) add to these words, ci to denote the nearest** object, and
ilfaut K.B. ajouter (bb) '" , »70 designer pres^ 7 ^
Lit to denote the remotest; This'" steeple is not so high as that. That*'
170 ^loigni^ J K'B. *■ H.B.
church is much larger than this. Tliese*' trees are finer than those.
beaucoup ** v.a» **
But cU L^i arc not requisite, when the demonstrative pronoun is fol-
n^cessaire, •*
lowed by a noun or by a relative pronoun ; as. This gown is prettier**
tuivre «* «o5 at . ^ ^b^J robe joli^
than that of your sister. This is not so fine as that which I shewed you.
** belle *■ ai montrie,^
89. Sometimes this, that are used without reference to a noun
•THIS, THAT - s* employer rapport
expressed, but imply the word thing understood ; then they (are
exprimd, renfermer THING sous-entendu ; alors •■
expressed), this by ceci ; that by celai Give me this. What will
sevprimer, THIS ; THAT ; *^
you do with that ? Take this. Let that alone. I will take this
faire de Prendre Laisser - f
* See note (o) page 88. t Repeat of the same* t See note t page 313.
EXERCISE. 317
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN.
RECAPiTCLATORY excrcise on the foregoing rules*
Do you hear that man? He is scolding*" that woman who has
*" entendre t - grander
been beating those children. Look at that house. Is not that a
>** baHu Regarder ^^ ITest-ce pas Idl
good house? Yes^ it is a good ho^se, but this is a better^ one.
» • •* , (b)p.72. t
Nfay! I think that is better. Those rooms seem to me to be
Ohnon! penser^*^ (b) p. 72. parattre (o) »* - -
larger^* than these; besides, that is much better situated than this.
grand * ; outre cela, (b j p. 72. situi **
I do i\pt see that. I tUink this is as pleasantly situated as that. Do
voir »*i ** agr^abUment lae 48
you admire those flowers ? What flowers ? Those that^* we see in thai
188 admirer fleurl « (m)p.82.
garden before that house. How do you call this ? This is a poppy,
devant Comment - *■* appeUr pavot,
tnd that is a marigold. I do not like that kind of flowers ; I like
souci, — aimer sorte ^ ;
those that^^ have a pleasant smell. What do you think of these ? Oh,
(m)p. 82. agriaJble^ odeur, ■• •- penser Oh,
I like these better than those. These smell sweet. The action of
(b) p. 72, ont une douce odeur, action
Virginius sacrificing his daughter, is as strong and more pure than
Virginiut taerifier , ** fort * pur *•
that of Brutus condemning his son ; nevertheless this is glorious^
Brutut condamner ; n^anmoins glorieux(g)
and that is not. Virginius secured only the honour of his family ;
7^ muvait teulement 'honneur famiUe;
Brutus saved that of the laws and of the country. (There was) much*
Mauvait loi patrie, 11 y avait »•>•
pride in the action of Brutus, perhaps there was nothing but pride;
orgwil , peut4tre n'y**« avait-it - que " ;
there was in that of Virginius only honesty and courage ; but this did^
^*honnetet6 » ; faire
(every thing) for his family, that did**' every thing, or seemed*'' to
^^ pour , faire W , ou sembler *7«
do every thing for Rome, and Rome, which considered*"* the action of
^aire , a consid£ri
Virginius as that of an honest man and of a good father, consecrated
eomme honnete , a^^ comacri
the action of Brutus as that of a hero ; is not that just ?
eomme hires; *** juste?
* See note * page S81. f Read note (&&), p. 817i before yon write this exercise,
t If jon eTpma This by the pronoun, yoa must leave oat a and one ; but you may express This is by
Voicit rule 847; tli^n you express a by «««, and one by en, before Void ; thus, En voici une ^c.
3 IS BXPiic^fii;.
90. When the wordf oite, w9, thi^y, ^^ppiiS, ere used indefi-
Quand OffF^ WE, THl^Y, people, $*einployer (dans
nitely, i. e. without reference to any partici^l^r^ person, they
un ten* ind^fini,^ rapport quelque en particulier persanne,
are expressed hy on; but thoggh Qif represents we, thev, peop]le,
s'exprimer(ii)v.B. quoique reprdsenter we, they, people,
which ^re plural, it always requires the verb in the third person
plurier, il ^•* demander d troisiems
sin^lar ; . People are spreading*" strange** reports. They say that
au singtUier ; « faire^^ courir Strange bruit . dire ('W^n.b.
we have been beaten. Who says soP They say so. People s^y so.
iieus 6attre»«. le^ »♦
(You"* must not) believe every thing that people say.
II M.B. nefautpas croire tout ce que
'91. AU^ indeilnite" expressions like these^, it is thought^
Tout indtfini'^ f semblablgt i w-b., it is THOUGffT,
IT IS SAID, &c. are also expressed by Qjf, by changing tlie verb (from
IT 18 SAID, 8^c, - *" i'exprimer par , (hh) ehangeant
its) passive sense into the active ; It is thought that (there will be)
du passif - «n - actif; f penser (^^) *•■• »' y Qura
u peace. It is said that the preliminaiiffs are signed. li will soon*^
*• paix, (bb) K.B. pr^limin^ire tignpr *^, bientot
be known if it be true. It was asserted yesterday opi the exchange.
* n cela ?^7 vrai. f assurait hier d bourse,
92. English" passive verbs used indefinitely are generally*^ changed
Anglaif «» »« 7 ^mployis t 0r4i'f^kffnent se changer
into their active signification in french, and take ojv for nominative ;
dan$ ^ en , prendre ;
but by changing thus the sense of the verb, the noun or pronoun
(hhj ainsi , *
which is the nominative of the verb in english, becomes its^^ object in
7* en , devenir en** en
french ; How can that b^ believed, when such great preparations for
; pouvoir ^ t croire, *°«i •* pr^paratif
war (are going on) ? I was told yesterday that it has been resolved
7guerre "* /aire - f "7 (bb)v,ii, f resolu
to (carry on) the war. Do you i^now if the letters have been received
1* continuer t fef«*
which (were expected) by the last** mail? They have not been received
''* attendait^*^ dernier poete? t regv4S^^
* Though in point of order, this is the proper place for these prononns, yet as they are easy, and of
less consequence than the other exercises which follow them; not to breaH the chain of the most nseful
nileii,! would advise the learner, after harvingread the mles on the indefinite pronouns ^ page 818, and
following, and written mles 90, 91 and 99, to pass over the rest of the mles and go to the exercise on the
verbSt the knowledge of which is necessary to have a complete idea of the language. The m»t of this
exercise may he written after ^1 the othyer exercbes.
k A Passive verb is made Active^ by leaving out the verb 6«, and making the past {Ntftioiple into a
verb of the same tense and person as the anxiiiary rerb ia; as It is thought ; tarn, (Me thinks. It has
been said; turn. One has said ,
EXERCISE. 319
INDEFINITE PEONOUX*
yet***. They are expected to-day. Somebody has been sewt to know
w.B. • attendre (nijourd'hui, •* ♦ envoy £ pour
why they have not been brought sooner. We have been much deceived.
jtottrqtun • appor^09 tdt.*^ * fort tromph,
98. Onbsblp, himselp used uidefinitely, and itself after a pre-
ONESELF, HiMtUlV datis till sens ind^fini, fTffELF
position are expressed by Sot; Let*** every one think of himself.
- s*&Lprinuri pw ; Que *•* penser **>
Every one for himselfi and god for all. That is harmless in itself.
f touti ** innocent de
Vice is odious of itself. The earth contains all seeds ^ in itself.
J • odieux teire contenir *• semence en
94. Some repeated in a sentence of two parts, is, in the first part
Some rfy^ti phrase partie, , ^
les vns, in the second part; les Autres; Some like one thing, some
, ** > 9 aimer ,
like^ another. Some will have it one way, some will have it another.
en aimer *'"* ** d*une manieref *74 « d'line autre,
95. Somebody is Quelqiiun ; Somebody has told me so^. I heard'^ it
Somebody ; dit It entendre **
from somebody. I expect somebody. Somebody will call upon me soon'*'.
attendre ««« bient6t,v.B.
96. Some, any, few used to denote a small quantity, or a small
Some, any, few employes "• disigner petit^ quantity,
number of the substance (spoken of,) are expressed by nuelqu'un,
•lombre (dont on parle,) - s*exprimer f ,
QuelqtCune, auelques^uns, euelque9'Urfes, agreeably to the gender and
, , , suivant -
number of the noun to which they relate ; Have you seen any of my
• 78 serapporter; vu
flowers? Will you have some (of them) ? I will take a few (of them),
fieur? >74 c/jW I prendre
97. Nobody, not any body, is expressed by personne ; nobody
NOBODY f NOT ANY BODY - 5*CJpWm«r t NOBODY
WHATEVER by ftui quc ce salt; these two words require Ne before
WHATETER ; (bb) mot demander aiant
the verb which attends them ; Nobody likes that woman. That
accompagner ** ,* aimer (hb) (^^^0
woman likes nobody. Do not tell it to any body. Have you met
dire ^
nobody ? Has nobody met you ? I have not met any body whatever.
1** rencontr^
• Sm ^ p. 318. t Set N. D. noder AOte 0*0 p. i^- « Set note f p. 313.
320 EXERCISE.
INDEFINITE PRONOUN.
98. Something is expressed by Quelque chose; I feel something
SOMETHING - s'exprimev* par ;
that hurts me. I have something curious to tell you. Is not that
7* blesser ** (cc) curieux d ** N^est-cepas Id
something wonderful? Why do you not apply to something?
(cc) 4tonnantf - *** s'appliquerCU'^f
99. Nothing, not any thing is expressed by Rien; nothing
NOTHING, NOT ANY THING - s'exprtmer* ; NOTHING
whatever by Quoique ce soit ; these words require xe before the verb
WHATEVER ', dematider
which attends them ; I will give you nothing. You have not done
7"* acconipagner ** ; donner ** ^ fait
any thing to-day. He applies to nothing whatever. He does not
aujourd^hxii, s'appliquer t
mind any thing whatever. I would not part (with it) for any thing.
fuire attention d se dSfaire t en *•
N. B. Quelqu'un, amlque chose, personne, Rien followed by an adjective
y , , suivis «>^ adjectif
or by a past^ participle, require ne before that" adjective or participle ;
^'^ passi participe, demander «>• (bbj *
Somebody come. Something lost. Nobody hurt. Nothing done.
vemi. perdu. blessS. fait.
100. None, not any followed by a noun or a pronoun is expressed
I^'ONB, NOT ANY suivi ^'^ «" -s'eiprimer*
by AUCHHy inasc. ; Aiicune, fern, and requires Ne before the verb ; None
par , ; , demander **• ;
of the ladies whom we expected will come. We shall not see any
t ^* attendions *^ venir voir
(of them) to-day. Do you know any of them ? No, I do'® not.
en** aujourd*hui. - ^ *•*, n.b.
101. None used absolutely, i. e. without reference to a noun, is
None employ^ , rapport , -
expressed by jvt//, and not one by pas un, masc. pas une, fem. ;
i^exprimer* par , NOT ONE , , ;
these words are synonymous to personne, and require Ne before the
tynonymea de , demander
verb; None is sheltered from censure. None can boast (of it.)
; d Vabri ' pouvoir u vanter en •*
Many' people called themselves his friends, not one assisted him.
N.B. «» disaient «e** , aider ^^ lui^
102. Each is sometimes'" joined to a noun in the same manner
Each - qnelquefois tejoindre* de
• See N. B. under note (it) pRge 23S. -f See reflective verbs, pag^ 114.
% Speaking of young tadte$, we should tay demoiselles i speaking of married^ or grown up ladies^ we
should say dames.
EXERCISE. 321
INDEFINITE PRONOUN.
as an adjective, and is expressed by cfutque for both genders ; Each
qiie , - $*exprimer • par Us deux ;
horse carried two men. Each woman had a bundle in each hand.
porter ^** jtaquet dans main.
103. Each is sometimes joined to a noun by the preposition of,
Each - sejoindre* 0F9
or refers to a noun which has been mentioned before**'; then it
se ra-p-porter dont •■ fait mention dijdi ; »•«• alon ii
is expressed by chacim, masc. chacune^ fem ; each of tiiese men has a
- i'txprrmer • , , ,5 (bh)
shilling a day ; or these men have each a shilling a day. Each of these
iheling par jour ; C^)
women carried two bundles ; or these women carried two bundles each.
porter ' ;
104. Every followed by a noun requires a distinction. If every is
Every mivi d* demander every -
used'*^ to denote individuality, it is expressed by ckaque; Every
iemploifer* *•• dhigntr des iiidividutf il - s'eipiimer* ,•
science (L e, each science) has its principles. Every season has its
xs principe, EvERY saison
' attractions. Every plant has its properties. If every is used to denote
charme, plante pYoprUti, "®
a totality. It is expressed by routy masc. route, fem ; Every man lies,
KM toiU, - B'erprimer* » > » >' >
(i. e. cUl men lie) but every man is not a liar. Every woman is frail, but
- menteur, fragile,
every woman does not yield. I am found at every hour of the day.
, - succomber, »* d *«* .
105. Every one requires the same distinction as every. If, by
Every one demander que every,
every one, you mean*** every one taken individually, it is expressed
EVERY oys, vouloir dire EVERY ONE pris indioiduellcment, ~ s'expi'imer*
by chacun ; Every one has a good opinion of himself, (i. e. each
person,) Every one thinks himself to be** in the right
penser -t - avoir - ** ration.
If, by every one, you mean*** every one taken collectively, il
EVERY ONE vou loir dire EVERY oijfE pris collectivement,
is expressed by tous^ masc. by routes, fem ; I have lost every one
'" s^exprimer * , , , ; perdre
of my books, (i. e. ail my books,) 1 had won twenty guineas, and
, aiaa gagner ,
I lost every one of them. Every one of the robbers were taken.
- ** - voleur ^^ prendre
♦ Sec N. B. note (ii) page 235. ♦ This sentence can not be expressed liierallj,
X
32*2 EXERCISE.
INDEFINITE PRONOUN.
106. Every body is rout U Monde; Every body sayf; so. Sh«
Every body ; dire U^*
speaks ill of every body. If is impossible to please every body.
dire dumal v.*. »« plaire*^
107. Every thino is rout^ Every thin^ is for the best. You
Every thjng ; mieux,
complain of every thing. I am prepared against every thing.
se pluindre * pr(t d
108. Anv body, any one is sometimes used in the sense of
Any body, any one - ^^ s'employeri
SOME BODY, SOME ONE, and IS expressed by Quelqu^nn; Is any body
8CME body, some ONE, - sViprimer t ; ***
come ? Have 3fou met any body ? Can any body do what I do ?
v^.nut Pouvoir ^** faire •*
109. Any body, any one is sometimes used in the sense of
Any body, any one - **• s'empUnjerf
EVERY BODY, and is expressed by rout le Monde, or // rHy a personne
EVERY body, -s*exprimeri ,
qui 7iet with this difference only, that rout le Monde requires the
, (bb) , (bbJif'B. detnander
following verb in the indicative, and mI n!y a personne qui ne requires
qui suit ** d. indicatif,
it (in the) subjunctive; Any body (or every body) may*'^® do that.
** au subjonctif; ponvoir faire ••
Any body will (or there is nobody but will) shew you the way.
montrer chemin,
110. With a verb denoting admiration or doubt, or after a compara-
qui dSsigne ' ^doute^ compara-
tlve, ANY BODY Is cxpressed by personne, but without se, because
tif, ANY BODY - iexprimer , ,
personne attended by Ne, means no body; Did ever any body do
aecompagnS de , $ignifier no BODY '"* jamais ^^
such a thing! Yes; and you can do it as well as any body.
111. Any THING is sometimes used in the sense of something.
Any thing - *" s' employer \ sometbinq,
and is expressed by auelque chose; (Is there) any thing in the bottle?
~ s'exprimer i ; ■*• bouteillef
Have you heard any thing? (Is there) any thing new to-day?
ttpprendre *** (cc) nouveau
112. Sometimes any thing is used in the sense of every thing,
ANY THING -^ s' employ er i EVERY THINQj
and is expressed by rout ; He is fit for any thing (or every thing,)
- s*esprimer t ; prapre •••
♦ See a reflective verb, page 114. f See N. B. note (ii) page 235.
EXERCISE. 323
INDEFINITE PRONOUN.
1 will do any things to serve hiiQ. I prefer this to any thing.
fair$ ^^^, servir pr^ferer ■•
113. With a verb denoting admiration or doubt* Any thing is
qmd^signe ' ^doute, Any thing -
generally expressed by Rien ; (is there) any thing finer*» than civility !
^■^ s'eiprimer* ; **• (ccj beau ^dviliti !
I doubt that you will make*« any thing ffood (of it.)
douter qM faire (cc)b(m en**.
114. Whoever, whosoever is sometimes joined to a substantive.
Whoever, whosoever joint tuhstantif,
or relates to a substantive previously mentioned, and is expressed
Merapporter dont on a dijd fait mentiony - 8*exprimer •
by Quel que. Quels que, masc ; Quelle qtee, Quelles que, fern ; these words
require the verb (in the) subjunctive, and if the/nominative of the
demandar au tubjonctiff nominatif
verb is a noun, it must be placed after the verb ; Whoever that'
, •* devoir (hk) -• te placer* ; (^bj
man be, he is acting wrong; or that man is acting wrong, whoever
, agir^^ mal ; ^** ,
he be. Whoever those children be, they are ill*" behaved.
(bbj , - mal $e comporter ^^'^
115. Sometimes whoever, whosoever, whomsoever implies the
• WHOEVER^ WHOSOEVER, WHOMSOEVER renfermer
word person understood, and is expressed by qui que ce soil, followed
PERSON , - s^erprimer* , suiii
by QUI, CMC, or Dontf which requires the followmg verb (in the) sub«
*** , ^ , '* deniander qui suit ** au
jnnctive; Whoever speaks to you, you ought to answer civilly.
; (o) **, devoir ^J"* rfyondre civil^ment.
Whomsoever you apply to, thcy^ will tell you the same thing.
iadreuer **■, n.d. dire mime chose,'
116. Sometimes whoever, whomsoever is used in the sense of
WHOEVER, WHOMSOEVER - s'empUnfev
every body, then it is expressed by Touts ceux, followed by qui* or
EVERY BODY, alors " s^exprimer* , suivi '®®
Que; Whoever (or every body who) is found out at ni^ht is stopped.
; •* trouoer dehors la nuit •* arreter t
Bring with you whomsoever (or every person) you meet***.
Amener rencontrerez,
117. Whatever, whatsoever joined to a substantive requires a
Whatever, whatsoever joint . substantif demander
distinction. If the substantive to which whatever, whatsoever
7* WHATEVER,' WHATSOEVER
* See N. B. note (ft) page 235. f Tarn t one stope whomsoever one fiids oat at night.
x2
324 , EXERCISE.
INDEFINITE PRONOUN.
is joined, is the nominative of a verb, it is expressed by ouel quc^
, nominatif , -. I'eiprimer * par
Quels qtiCymasc. Qudleque^Quelles ^^f.; which requires the verb (in the)
» J , ; demander au
subjunctive ; and if the nominative is a noun, it is placed after the verb ;
suhjonctif; , •* -iep/ac«r* ;
Whatever this* work be, it is too dear. Whatever his terms be. I shall
(bb) mivntge , •« trop conditions ,
agree to them. Do not trust to their promises, whatever they be.
accepter - «♦ - te fierf d promesse, - «*
If the substantive to which whatever, whatsoever is joined, is
7» WHATEVER, WHATSOEVER ,
the object of a verb, it is expressed by Quelque^ sing. Quelques^ plur;
objet , •« - I'&Tprimcr • , ; , ;
these words require true after the substantive, and the verb (in the)
(bb) demander , au
subjunctive ; Whatever business you have, you should not neglect your
; affaire , »7« rUgliger
friends. Whatever terms they propose, I shall agree to them.
conditiont praposery accepter - **
118. Sometimes whatever, whatsoever implies the word thing
WHATEVER, WHATSOEVER renfermer THING
understood ; then it is expressed by Quoique ce soiU fcllowed by quU
; alors - t*exprimer* , suivi *^ ,
Que or Dont, which requires the verb (in the) subjunctive ; Whatever I
, 7* demander verbe au ;
do, I am always scolded. Whatever he undertakes, he never succeeds.
faire, grander, sntreprendre, *** rSussir, ■
119. Whatever, whatsoever is sometimes used in the sense of
Whatever, whatsoever - s* employer^ ^
ANY THING, or EVERY THING, then it IS expressed by rout ce qitU
AfiY THING y ou EVERY THING, alors - s* exprtmer *
nom ; rout ce que, obj ; Take whatever you think^^' proper. He grants
; , ; Prendre eroirez . a prapos, accorder
her^^ whatever she desires. He approves of whatever she does.
(f) p. 79. disirer* approiiver *°* faire,
120. Other is AUtre; I see another man coming'^. I have found
Other ; voir qtiivient.v-S' trovter
another flower. (Here is*^) another. (There are) a great many others.
fleur» En 7© void En ''^ **' - beaucovp d*
121. Each other, one another is expressed by tuji t Autre,
"Each other, one another - s^exprimer*
Vune t Autre ; les uns les Autres, lea unes les Autres, agreeably to the
; , , suivant -
* See N. B. note (tt) page 233. f See imperative of a reflectire rerb, page lU.
EXERCISE. 325
INDEFINITE PRONOUN.
gender and number of the noun to which it relates ; Fire and water
* ^' se rapporter ; Feu^ can*
destroy each other. These women hate one another. Observe
ge dStruire (hh) se hair Observer
that the preposition which comes before each other, one another,
(bbJv.B, venir EACH other, one another,
must be placed between the two words Vun fAutre^ tune l^Autre^ 8fc.
devoir -"sepUtcer entre , ,
See those two women ; they are jealous of each other ; yet they can not
; jaloux^d) ;
(]o»* without one another. These people have fallen upon one another.
se passer de (bb) gens *** tombS^^
122. Both, speaking of two individual* objects, is expressed by
Both, parler individuel^ , - s*exprimer
run et r Autre, or routs ueux, masc; by Vune.Qi VAUtre, or routes Deux^
, ou , ; ' , ou ,
fem ; Your brothers are**^ both very well. I saw them both last night.
; se porter voir ***
You know my. sisters; they will both be here to-night. In speaking
; etre *** En parler
of a greater number of individuals, but considered as two parties,
*^ individu, conndirSs comme ,
BOTH is expressed by les uns et les Autres^ masc ; les unes et les Auires^ f ;
both -s'exprimer , : , ;
The Russians and the Prussians have declared war against us; but
liusse Prussien declarer ''guerre - ** ;
we will beat both. Both will have reason to repent (of it.)
battre lieu de se repent ir en '^K
123. Either is tun ou VAutre^ Tune ou V Autre ; les uns ou les Autres,
Either , ; #
les unes ou les Autres, agreeably to the gender and number of the noun ;
, SHivant ^ * *
Either of these men will do it. You may'^' speak to either. Take
(^b) faire ** pouvoir parler Prendre
either of these flowers. You may^^® have either of them.
* (bbj flew, pouvoir (kk) *. -
124. Neither, not either, i. e. either with a negation, is express-
N EITHER, NOT EITHER, EITHER ^ s'expritner
ed by Ni I'un ni VAutre^ nI tune ni t Autre; m les uns ni les
(il) K.B. , .
Autres, Ni les unes ni les Autres, a^eeably to gender and number;
• , suivant - ^ ^ ' »
these words require Ne before the verb ; Neither of them will study.
(bbj demander Ne ; - - 178 iiudier.
Neither of these men can do it. I will not trust"* either of them
(bb) faire " *7» se fier d
326 EXERCISE.
INDEFINITE PRONOUN.
RECAPITULATORY cxtrcUe OTi the foregotng rules,*
Do you know any of the ladies we have*" just passed ? No ; 1
- connattre t (»J venlr de paster f ;
know none (of them.) I have not seen any (of them) before.
I should like to ^et aco.uainted with some of them. I know the two
w> falre eonnaissance *^
last*. Which of the two is the handsomest? They are both very
dernier, ^t belle ** 7 f tree
handsome, and they have each a handsome fortune. You may*'*
*• , t ^'«" bien* pouvoir
get acquainted with either of them, or with both, if you like. They
(kk) • "■ » • » votiloir, |
come here every summer. Every body is fond of them. Every one
iei StS, - aimer || *♦
who knows them is fond of the'r company They are very fond of
•* - II - compagnie. X *- fort i*aimer -
each other. They are always with one another. Are they married ?
t X marier ^* ?
No, neither of them is married, but I think they are both promised.
»«, I - - i» , Ml J promettre,^^
I would give any thing I possess to be acquainted with them. You
($J poetider *7® cohhu «* "t
may speak to either of them. Bring here every one of your books.
^7»(kk) I - - Apparter ici
Let«4« every one of you shew me his exercise. Every one of you
Que montrer ** theme, - -
will be punished. Can I do any thing for you ? Yes, you can.
punir, Fouvoir faire pour * , '•
You can help me as well as any body. Nobody is more capable
(kkjaidei' ^ *» ^^
than you. I should like to buy something, but every thing i-s so
*•• acheter , <i
dear now, that one can not get any thing. I should like to
a prdsentt (bb) m.b, te procurer I's
have some of 4hese flowers. Which do you think are the finest"?
(bb) ■•* - **» belle ^f
Some say that these are the flnest**; some give the preference to
('bb)v-B. »N.B. ** J pr^firence
those. These men relate both the same story, but neither of them
•« K.B. (bb) rapporter mhne histoire, - -
believes that it<* is true. I do not believe either of them. They are
Croire (bb)V'»' "* vrai*^, - - - «»
both wrong, whoever they be. Whosoever asks for me, tell him"*
tort, »i »4^ Its
* Sea * p. 281. i Se« t P* <^0. I Mind the gender of the noun which thli pionoan represcr.U-
I We hare no other word to express the words be fond of^ in french, bnt the verb A'.mer. to like.
EXERCISE, 327
INDEFINITE PRONOUN.
RECA-PiTUiiAToRY cxevcise on the foregoing rules,
that I am not at home. Whatever he writes, let **' me know it.
fbbJv-B. au logii. , faire^-^' ** saeoir *
Whatever is right, is not always approved. Whatever good is said of
bien, approuver, hien
US, we are not told any thin^ new. Whatever your rank and riches
« di>0 (cc) itouveau, rang riehesses
may be, or whatever rank and riches you have, do not be proud, if
, , - orgueilleux,
you will not (be disliked) by every body. No one ought to be a judge
i«* ddplaire i devoir *7« w j^g^
in his own cause. People often flatter themsdves more than they should.
«i» propre »»» flatter se^ *7 i7«
Every one complains of his memory, but no one complains of his
ie plaindre i
understanding. There would not be (so muoh^) disorder seen in the
esprit, tant w.b. desordre •
world, if yontM had a good impression given it' at first, and if care
monde, jetmetse • d* abord,
was taken to form the mind of children as It pught to be. I have
soin • *" farmer esprit "^ cotnnU devrait - -
just been told that Mr. A. is dead. Indeed? Yea, they say so,
•" - dire Enviritil , /«»*
He was invited to supper yesterday at Mrs. B.'s. They waited***
"* inviter *•• souper hier ** MadatM attendre
for him a long time, but seeing that he did not come, somebody was
»i 54 « terns, voir - ^^9 -
sent**' to look for him ; he could**'' not be found any where ; they
enwyer *" chercher *®' ** ; pouvair t - trouver nnlle part;
have been seeking*" for him all night, and this morning he was
chercher «»* " hiuit, (bb) »*
found drowned in a pond, not far from Mrs. B/s house. Every body
**• noyer •*' ^tangy non loin de **
is sorrv (for it). Is it known how thif^i accident happened**"? No,
fdche en ** - savoir comment (bb.) arriver *" ? *•* ,
nobody knows. It is supposed that he (lost his way) in the dark. He
'• -s'imaginer 8*Sgarer^^ •** obscuritS.
is to be buried to-morrow. You will be ex])ected at his funeral.
■*■ enterrer^demain. - attendre funSrailtes, (p\,)
You will go; will you not? I will not go, unless*** I am invited
70 . m 70 , dmotVwgu^w* - invitir
(to it.) You may be sure that they will invite you.
es ^i*(kk) siir (bb)if.B: ft*
— .■■..■. . ^ ... I —
« Tnro this lentenee th«8 : One would not sr« so much disorder in the world, if one gave at first •
good impreMsion to youth, and if one took care to form the mind of children as one should.
t Express Not by Ne only, before th« ▼erb, as Nulle which comes after, Isupplies the place of P«i or
Foint.
328 EXERCISE.
VEao.
AoREE&iENT of the vcrb with its nominative.
Accord '• verbe son nominatif.
You see in the conjugations that the termination of a verb differs
voir conjugdisons (bb)V'Ji. termhtauon diff^rtr
according to the noun or pronoun which is its'^ agent or nominative.
luivant - .wow ^ronom en nominatif,
125. The verb must be of the same number and person as this'
devoir itre mime nombre *personne qxte (bh)
agent or nominative ; I study ; Thou studiest ; He studies ; My brother
; itud'ur; ; ;
Studies ; We study; You study; They study; My brothers study.
; ;
126. When several substantives are the nominative of the same verb,
phuieurs substantifi . ,
the verb must be (in the) phiral number ; My brother and sister study.
devoir itre au plurier - ; "
127. If several substantives of different" persons are the nominative
t diffirent^ pertonne
of the same verb ; as the verb can not agree with two different
; comme t^accorder *» •«
persons at the same time ; we** add to the sentence sous or rous with
it la - fois; v.b. djouter phrase
wln'ch we*' (make the verb agree.) We*® add jfous, if there is in the
7« M.B fait accorder le verbe» »•»• , ily a
sentence a substantive of the first"^ person ; as. You and I agree.
f . premier** ; , »• itre d*accord.
My sister and I are fond of study. She and I will learn together,
** - aimer J itude. '* ensemble.
We*® add ^om«, if there is in the sentence a substantive of the second
».B. , t » 83
person, and«* there is none of the first ; You and your brother do not
, '** a n*y en ait pas . ® ; -
agree. You and he are continually^*® quarrelling. You and your
s'aceorder, *' - cmitintiellement se quereller ***
sister will learn together. You and they are of the same opinion.
128. If the nominative of the verb is the relative pronoun Qui, the
relatif^
verb must be of the same number and person as the substantive to
devoir • que
which that pronoun relates ; It^ is I who will say my lesson first.
^ (bb) serapporter; »•»• ** dire le^on le premier,
It<* is we who will say our lessons first. It«* is you who will
J».B. les premiers k-b.
* Repeat of the same before pferson. | See note * page S03. % See note page 3S6r
EXERCISE. 329
VERB,
say your lesson first. It^ is they who will say their lessons first..
129. If QUI relates to several substantives of difierent persons, the
serapporter plusieiirg subslantif* * ,
verb agrees with the first** person in preference to the second, and
s'accorder ^ par prSf^rence *• ,
with the second in preference to the third; It^ is you and I who will
sa par *• ; n.b. «*
begin. If* is you and your brother who will (go out) first.
Cifmmencer. h«b. sortir Us premiei's,
130. When the collective" substantives la plupart, infinite ^ Nomhrey
Quand collectif^ , , ,
Quantity, rrmtpe. Multitude, are followed by another substantive, the verb
, , f suivis *^ ,
agrees with this last substantive ; A great number of men perished.
s'accorder dernier ; ' ® ptrir^^
Most of the cavalry deserted. A crowd of people"* came to see them.
Laplupart cavaleri^ d^serter^^, foule * gens venir ^^a
131. The collective substantives le uuart, le Tiers, la moitie require
J , demajider
the verb in the third person singular ; One fourth of the ships were
a ausingulier; Le qtiart nacire ^^
taken or destroyed. One third of the crews deserted. One half of
prendre detruire. Le tiers Equipage W X^ moiti^
men do not think, and the other half know not** what to think.
7 penser, ne savoir n.b. w Vt
Placing of the nominative with the verb.
Place *• nominatif verbe,
132. When the sentence is expositive, i. e. when a question is not
phrase expositive, **
asked, the nominative is placed before the verb; I study well. He
/aire, •'Se placer ; itudier
studies well. This boy studies well. You study "well. They study well.
garden t
But when the sentence is interrogative, (it is necessary) to consider
, ilfaut ^'^ considher
whether the nominative of the verb is a noun or a pronoun,
ft
133. If, when a question is asked, the nominative of the verb is one
, •* fairCf
of the personal^ pronouns je, n/, il, Elle, nous, vous, ils, eUcs, on,
personnel *•
or ce, these words are placed in french, as the corresponding*' words
, mot - se placer t ^n , comme qui y correspondent A
• See note * page SOS. t See note («e) page Si3. % See N. B. note C^) page 233.
330 EXERCISE*
VERB.
are in english, immediately after the verb; Do I study well? Does
»e placer , • ; itudier
he study well ? Do we study well ? Do you study well ? Do they study?
134. If» when the sentence is interrogative, the nominative of the
, quand phras$ ,
verb is a noun, this noun is placed before the verb, the same as
, (bbj "Se placer f , de mime que
in expositive sentences ; but (in order to) dhew that a question
«» » M 7 ; 170 fairewir (bbjn.t.
is asked, we"* put after the verb one of the pronouns //, slle^ ils,
•« faire, n.«. mettre
sUes, agreeably to the gender and number of the noun which is the
, tuiuant - *
nominative of the verb ; Does this boy study well ? Does this girl
; (bb) gargon , Jlll$
study well ? Do these boys study well ? Do these girls study well ?
Do any of them learn french ? Is not the french language very
difficult ? Are your masters pleased* with you ? Does your father
dijfficiU f content h.». «»
often come to see you? Has your mother been here lately?
1** ^'^ ici depuispeu?
INDICATIVE MOOD. Use** of the tenses of the indicative.
Em,ploi temt ' indicatif,
135. The present tense of the indicative is generally used in the
prhent '- - iw a*employeri
same instances in french as in english ; I like study. Study is the
coi en qu$ ; Utude ' *
food of the mind. But the past"* tenses require several distinctions
aliment * esprit, pasU ^ demander plugieurs
in french, which the corresponding* tenses do not require in english ;
y qui y correspondent ;
therefore pay particular" attention to the following" rules.
ainsi faire une particulier ^ saivant*^
136. If we"^ speak of an action past** without mention ing*^ the time
w-B. jKiM^ V.B. fairs mention du terns
in which it ^^ passed, or if we«« mention a period, and"" that
7« M t'est passes, v b. faire mentbn d'ltn p^riode^X «* *** (bb)
period IS not yet entirely elapsed, such as to-day, this morning,
soit encore icoulij tel que aujourd'huif matin^
this week, this month, this year, &c. the action being past, and the
/66J , mois, **» , ^c. ^tant »» ,
«*«a^>M^MM»^k«
• See note * pa(ce 933. i See N. B. note (it J page 936. t S«e noto f page 824.
EXERCISE. 331
VBRB. INPICATIVE MOOD.
period being still present, we"* make (the verb partake) both of the
encurt , w.b. fairs participer le verbs et ***
present and past time, by adding the past^ participle of the verb
^M^ - , (hhj ajouter •• k.b. partieipe
expressing the action, to the present of the auxiliary^ verbs Avoir,
quiexprime , auxiliaire^
TO HAVE, or Eire, to be ; as. When did you see Mr. A, ? I saw him
, oa , ; , Quand * t
this morning. I met him as he was coming to town. He told me he
»* t comms »» »w 7 dire I «*»'
was going to*** your house. Did you not see him ? No, I did?® not. He was
138 IM !,.». I , K.B. II
at"®* our house, but I was not in. He only*** found my sister there,
K.B. ^ 140 y M J J y 35^
and he would not stop. Did you hear that he was going to be mar-
voubir K renter, X "* *''* - se ma-
ried ? No, I did not ; (i. e. hear^ it) Who told you so ? His cousin
rierf , t > *'•■• t ** '«*• " cousins t
told me so. 1 heard that he was going abroad. I shall
^ 55 igbi I « las dans Us pays itrangers.
spon'*^ know if it be true ; for, when he called this morning, he
hientot *' ; car, passer ,
promised my sister that he would call again (as he g;oes back.)
X ** C66^K.B. repasser - en 8*en retournant,
137. If we^ speak of an action past*^ in a period of time which is
K.B. passi ■
also entirely elapsed, such as yesterday, lasl^ week, last month, last
^eculS, hUr, > dernier » i^ ^ 1 , »•
year^, &c. then both the time and the action being pasl**, we®* use the
**• , ^c. alors et passi , k.b.
perfect tense of the verb ; Where did you dine yesterday ? I dined at
parfait ; Oil diner t **•
my mothei's, and supped at my sister^s. Did you not go to the play ?
, souper *®? X comidief
Yes, I did?*. What play did they** act ? They**ticted a new comedy.
, K.B. w pi^ce t K.B. jongr k.b. j mmvetle camidie.
How were you entertained? I did not pay much* attention to the
*** X * amiiser *" ? X faire k.b.
play. I conversed all the while with a gentleman wl»o sat"* by me.
pUcs, parler X terns monsieur Stre pres de ^
Did you not see me? No; I did?* not. Where were you? I was
X »" ; ♦ K.B. Oil »** "0
(in the) pit. I did not stop long. I went home, where I read the play.
au parterre, X restsr ' X an logis, X piece,
• Turn ; when hav$ yon teen f$e. ^ Turn ; I have seen him. 1 See note • page fifiS.
I Tarn \ he hat ftfirti ^r. | See note • page STTft. \ Torn ; he Ma not Uen wilting.
333 EXERCISE.
VERB. INDICATIVE MOOD
138. Sometimes we*> speak of an action that was passing, and which
QueLquefois w.b- parler ^* - se passer *^,
conseqiienCIy was incomplete at a period which vre^ mention**;
par cotueqiient **• imparfait *• dont h«b. faire mention ;
then the period bein^ past, and the action being* at that time incom*
abrs f (bb)
plete, we** use the imperfect tense of the verb ; What were you
N.R. employer imparfait — i ^
m
doing when I came in ? I was preparing myself to study a music
15* suit^^ entr^l "* me^ "• musique
lesson. I was going to play a tune. I was trying to tune my instru-
t* 153 17a air, *** etsayer ** aecorder
ment. Stop. You were doing it (the wrong way). You were spoiling^
Arreter, "* ** it rebours, gdter '**
it. They"* were making (a great deal) of noise at*** your house last
•• >'.B. "* oeaucouj) bruit »•■•
)eaucoup
mpany.
compagnie, *** rijuair twiu**
night. Yes, we had some company. We were enjoying ourselves.
139. We** also*" make use of the imperfect to denote that the
H.B. faire usage *''* disigtier que
action (of which) we^ are speaking has been habitual''^ or that it lias
^ 74 ' N.B. - iM habitueifCgJ «
been reiterated ; How did you spend your time, when you were in the
riitiri^^ ; *" "^^ le lems, »*• d
country ? As soon as we were up, we walked in the garden till
*** Aussitot que **® leo^s, sepromener jusqu* au
breakfast time; after breakfast we (sat at our work) till Ttwelve
dejeuji^ ** ; travailler jusqur A
o'clock), and then we studied till dinner time. How did you spend
«3« , abrs -dlu^ «* »»' «7i
your evenings ? You had neither plays nor concerts to go to. Some
tes «3* «** • com^die • - ou alter i
ladies and gentlemen in our neighbourhood often called upon us, or
imcssieurs voisinage ^®* **• ,
we called upon them, and we sometimes made a little concert, or we
«« M , »* faire petit
played at different games, but we generally*" spent the evening^ in
jouer ^ *• ^ ^etUf ordinairement ■'** *"* ^®'
reading or in conversing. We spent our time very agreeably.}
lire *•• converser, "^^ le agr^ablement;
* Do not pat any article before the noon which follows NT. i See note t page 283.
t By using the 'Perfect instead of the Imperfect in rhese instances, the sentence woald be equally
grammatical, but the idea would be very dlffeieut. This difference will appear obvious in the fuUowiag
examples composed of the same words ;
Quand j^ETAlS a LondrM, fALfjAlS d la comedie ;
Quandje FUS d Londres.fALLAt a la comedie.
By the first of these expressions, people will understand that when I teas in London, I used to go to
the play ; by the second they wiU understand that when I arrived at London, at a certain period eithet
Bamed or alluded to, I went to the play. Learners are very apt to confound these two tenst>s.
EXERCISE. 833
VBRB — INDICATIVE MOOD.
140. Another very extensive use of the imperfect is in descriptions;
**• ^tendu^ usuge imparjait «i« ^ ;
for; whenever we'^* describe the state, place, situation, order or dis-
ear, toute* lei fois que n.b. (Ucrire * itat, ■/j>i^ ® ^ordre, ®
position in which the beings (of which) we*** speak were^ in a time
y* €tre 74 N.B. 140 ^ fgjn^
past, we^ make use of the imperfect ; Where were you yesterday ? I
, N.B. • • Ou, hiert
called*'^ at**" your house, but you were not in. I was not well. I had
a head-ache ; and as I could not study, I wenU^ to walk in the
»* mal a la tSte ; comme , aller ^7« ^ «*»
fields. There had been a little" rain. The plants were so fresh, the
IL **® unpen w.b. pluie, si fratche^,
trees were so green, and formed such an agreeable shade, and the flowers
rert**, farmer si t •* ombrage,
spread so sweet® a smell, that I could not be tired with admiring
epandre douce * odeur, - se lasser *** admirer ^**
the beautiful landscape which surrounded me. I wished to stay
heau^ paysage entourer ^'* restef
longer" ; but it was late, I was tired, and I had a long way to go.
long'tems; tard, las, chemina faire,
141. The future is generally used in the same instances in french
futur t *" *^" cas en
as in english; When will you call upon me? I will call to-night.
que ; Quand *»« » "»
I shall not be in. I shall be in the country. I will (set out) afler dinner.
y ** *«> parttr dhiS.
142. The present tense is sometimes used in french as in english
— t en . comme
to express an action that is*^ to pass in a time (not far) remote
*^® exprimer ^* ^"^^ se passer pen Hoign4
from the time (in which) we are ; as, Where do you dine to-day ?
ou (v) y comme. Oil diner
Do you go to the play to-night? No, we go to a ball. But if a
comidie «" "S bal,
verb (in the) present tense, denoting a future action, is preceded of
ait - , dhignant '* , pricM
followed by another verb (in the) future, that present tense must
suivi *^ au futur, (bb) - devoir
be expressed by the future in french ; Call upon me as soon as you
- s exprimer I en ; «« ^ tot «
can. We shall begin as*' soon as you are come. When you are
pouvoir, commencer ** a^ivi,
* See note * page 2S6. f Turn ; a shade so agreeable, ^ See N. B. note (tf) page 23o.
834 EXERCISE.
VERB— "-INOICATIYB MOOD.
ready, we will go and take a walk"^. Hon shall not (go out) till
prit, - (nnj n.b. ne sortir qu$
afler we have done. We will go as soon as you will. I hope we
aprit que finir. partir ** i6t *• ***
shall see you oftener^, when we are in the country. Come as oflen
souvenU d *~ *^
as you can. I will call upon you every Uime that I go (that way).
« «» »« fois 7* parUt. .
143. The conditional tense has also the same properties in french
conditifmnel — atijsi prapriitis en
as in english ; I should like much to go to France. What would you
que ; fart "» • «
do, if you were there ? You would not have any^ pleasure. You
faire, y ** n.b, plaisir,
could not understand the language. I think I should soon^^^ learn it.
entendre langne* **^ bientot
14i. After the conjunction if, Si, shall, will can not be expressed
conjonction l?^ , SHALL, WILL - t'exprimar
by the future in french, nor should, would by the conditional ;
par futur en , m should, would
(will must be expressed) by the present, and would by the imperfect
ilfaut exprimer WILL , would imparfait
of the verb rotdoiry which then*** governs the following verb in the
, 5^* alors rigir qui suit ■* a
infinitive ; as, I will go with von, if you will come with me. I would
infinilif; , • » , as •
go with you, if you would come with me. I will teach you french*
, • • enseigner "^fran^ais,
if you will learn it. I would teach you french, if you would learn
• apprendre, . • 7 ^ •
it. How long do you think that I should be in learning it, if I should
*•• penser a apprendre , t
begin now? You may learn it in six months, if you will take
emnmencer *^ *** , * prendre
pams. You might learn it in six months, if you would take pains.
de la peine, *'* ■*• •
I will be obliged to you, if you will call upon me to-morrow***. I
oblig^ (o) ** , •166 demain, wb.
would be (very much) obliged to you, if you would call upon me.
irei - (o) , •866
• Observe, that in the sentences where IF occars, there are generally two JVilU or two Would ; that
fFill which follows If is the present, and Would is the imperfect of the verb to WILL, to BE WILI^
ING, (see page 143.; and they mast be expressed by the corresponding tenses of the verb FOULOIR,
which then governs the following verb in the infinitive; the other Wilt is the sign of the fnture, and tha
other Would is the sign of tLe conditional of the following verb, which must also be expressed by the
corresponding tenses, t. e. the Future or the Conditional of that verb in french. See also note * page
328.
j When Shoidd is the sign which follows //*, this sign mtist be left out, and the foUowinjif verb must be
pnt in the Imperfect of the indicative.
EXBUCI8E. 335
VSRB — 8UBJUN0T1VS: MOOD.
UsB** of the subjunctive.
Usage snhjonctif,
145 When wc*^ speak of an action, the event (of which) is iin«
certain, which is generally the case when, in a sentence of two parts
tmriain, cequi eat , '^' phrase partia
connected by the conjunction ocr£, the first verb is either interrogative
joint ^^ par eoiyonetion , ou interrogalif
or negative, or preceded by si, this uncertainty is imparted to the
nigatif, *• , {N)) incertitude - se communiquer
the second verb (in the) subjunctive ; I think it will
hearer, by putting
au • ; *"
rain soon. Do not you think it wilU^? It will perhaps rain a little,
pleuvoir bient6t, *^ n.b. iw tin peu,
but I do not think that it will rain much. If I thought that it
(bb) K.B. "0
would not rain, I would stop, but there is no " appearance that it will
- »<• , rester, •*« imk.b.
be fine to-day. I will (come a^ain), if I find that it does not rain.
•*• revenir, trouver
But observe with respect to interrogative sentences, that it is only
it Vtgard dee "* , ce
when we*^ wish to express our ignorance of the thing (enquired atler)
N.i. wmloir *7« t6moigner son t dont on sHnforme
that we** use the subjunctive ; for, if the person who asks the question
que v.n. employer ; ear, - celui fatre
Knew that a thing is, and only enquired^ whether the person whom
**• , *•* sHnformer si '•
he is speaking to knows it likewise, he would use the indicative ; Dc
>» «» aussi, ' ;
you not think that I did well to go before the rain came? Do
(bb)9.B. *•« des* en alter ■*• pluie venirt
not you think that I should have been wet, if I had stayed longer ?
C66;k.b. mouilU, "® rester *»
146. All verbs and adjectives denoting will, wish, oeaire, com-
' 7 qui dSsignent volenti, souhait, disir, com-
mandt rear, wonder^ surprise^ Aitonishmeni, joy, aladness, Gtief^
mandement, crainte, admirationy surprite, itonnement, joie, aise, peine,
sorrow^ in short all expressions which denote any passion or emotion
chagrin, en unnu>t ** 7 quelque ou
of the soul, followed by the conjunction Que, require the following verb
■ dme,i iuivi^ «* , demander
(in the) subjunctive ; I am glad"> you are here. I wish*" my brother
att ; bimaise ici, '"^
* Sm note * pag« SS9. i We eoold not lay notre after on, which is singnlar. | See note • page 230.
336 EXERCISE.
VERB. EfUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
would come. I wonder that he is not yet arrived. I am afraid**'
s'^tonner (bb)v.ii» encore - eraindre
some misfortune has^*« befallen him. It"* is a pity that somebody
qneUjiie ** arrivS - lui ** v.n. •* dommage (bh) nb. •*
did*^ not go with him. I am surprised that he has not written to
•3* alii * sur^it * (o)
me. I am sorry that he went"* there without my knowing it. I would
have taken care that he should be treated as he deserves*
soin — •* trailer ^^^ crnnme m^riter,
147. The following** impersonal" verbs and adjectives, il Faut, il est
tuivant ^ * impersonnel *' , ,
remSy il convienU il imporle, il rant mieux, il svffit^ seal, a propos,
y f > t » > »
Necessaire, indifferent , cruel, nonteux, juste, tn juste, possible, im-
possible, followed by the conjunction que, require also the following
^ 137 soo . ^ demander qui suit ®* .
verb (in the) subjunctive ; It is time that we should go^*". I must be
au ; s'en alter, ^ ^'^
ready to-night. I must (set out) to-morrow. It^ is fit that I should
prit *** partir k.b. Apropos
see in what state my aflairs are. It** is impossible that they should
.4B 82 ^^at affaires k.b. ««
be so bad as I am told. It^ is shameful that my partner does not
*** mal que ^ dire, n.b. honteux assocU
write to me. Is it®* necessary that you should go yourself? Is it** not
(o) K.B. "« (m) K.B. - K.B.
enough that you write to him? I think it would be better that you
suffire ' (o) *** valoir mieux
should send*** somebody. I do not know any body whom I can send.
y 7° envoyer •* ^ i*3 y 70
I must either go myself, or I must send my brother. He is the only
»8i 01* y7« (m) N.B., 2,70 e5 gg^i
man whom I can trust*?. It® is indifferent whether I go or not.
me fier a^ k.b. que y^o ^j„j,
N.B. The subjunctive mood is also used after an Adjective (in the)
subjonctif — «. 183 s* employer au
superlative degree, see the 50th rule ; After jRien, Aucun, pas un, per*
super lut if, - , voir regie; , , ,
Sonne, see (ddj p. 219 ; After Quelque, Qui que ce soity Quoique ce soit.
see 114lh, 115th, 117th, 118th rules; After the conjunctions ^n que
A moins que, Avant que, Quoi que, and a few others, see 218th rule.
• Put suivant siiier adjectifs, f See the reflective rerb a'en Allcr, ptge 117.
EXERCISE. 337
VERB- — SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
UsB^' of the tenses of the subjunctive. The tenses of the subjunc-
Kmploi terns subjonctif,
tive depend (on** the) tenses of the verb which governs it.
dipendre des rdgir *-
148. The present of the subjunctive is used when the verb which
- i'employer
governs it, is (in the) present or in the future of the indicative ; Da you
fltt futur ;
think your sister will come? I (am afraid) she will not be here to-day.
2" , "» craindre "^ »« ici
Somebody must go and fetch her. He will be back before we begin
•* "* fw'*^ chercher . de retour *^*
It^ is fit that somebody should go for her before it is too late.
149. The perfect of the subjunctive is used when the verb which
parfait - i'employer
governs it, is (in the) perfect, in the imperfect, or (in the) conditional;
au ' imparfaitf au oonditionnel ;
I did not think*" my sister would have'** come. I (was afraid) she would
140 238 128 craindre «i
not be here in time. It"* was that which made me wish (hat somebody
"• d terns. nb. "« » 7* faisaU (bb)V'B. »
would go for her. He miglit have returned before the play began.
^*« • ** »?» «« «w piece commencer.
It® would be a pity"* she should not see if* after waiting'** so long.
^•"' - dommage **• avoir attendu
150. N. B. The perfect of the subjunctive is also used, though the
parfait ®* '®* emploie, **•
foregoing* verb is (in the) present, if, after the subjunctive, there is
qui precede *'* au , , » **"
another verb in the imperfect, some conditional expression, or if the
H • , quelqne canditionnelle ^* ,
action spoken of is past ; Do you think your sister would come, if
dont on parU paise ^*' ; *** *** ,
I went for her now ? It''* is not probable that she would have'** gone
alter i • ** n.b. «« im
there, if she had not been invited'^, I do not think we should have
y**, t M inviter. *» '**
seen her, if it had not been for you. I do not think we should.
*** **, ce t a cause de ^ t
151. If after a verb (in the) subjunctive (here is another verb express-
au **•
* Oo for U expressed by Alfer diereher^ not Alter pour.
t /^(U, ffere, Had, mdy or mny other past tenye that comes after IP, &', miut be in the Imperfi-:'*
X Inst«a«l of rcpeauny the verb, the froach woald nay ; Je ne le pentepas non plus.
If
V
388 EXERCISE*
PRESENT PARTICIPLE.
ing doubt, preceded by the conjunction oue, that Terb must also be
, Tpricidi ^^ , devoir
(in the) subjunctive ; Do you think she expects*^' that I shall see her
au , •■* s^attendre r»voir
again? I wonder she could^?' have thought that I was capable (of It.)
• s*4tonner^^ ait^^ pu p«nwi* en**
152. When the gerund or present participle is used to qualify a
g^rondif ^ participe - s^employer ** quaUfier
noun, it agrees like an adjective in gender and number with that
, s*accorder comme en genre **non»6r« C^^>)
noun ; A charming girl, with a moving voice, singing her growing
; ckarmant^ , de touchant^ , *** naissant^
\owe, in seeking^ her wandering sheep, heard some threatening
amours, f. en chercher errant '• brebis, entendre • menofant ■•
words followed by piercing cries. I heard her trembling steps.
^role suivi^^ ■** per^ant^ en. tremblaiit^* pas,
153. But, when the gerund expresses the action, and not the quality
, ' exprimer , non qualite
of a substantive, it does' not agree with that substantive ; A woman
tuhstantiff •* s'accorder^ ;
wandering through the country^, (lost her way.) Some men piercing
errant a trovers campagne, s^igarer, * perpont
through the crowd and threatening to kill her, she fled trembling.
- foiUe mena^ant ^* ttier , s*enfuir en
N, B. If the substantive to which the gerund refers is the object
79 fg rapporter
of a verb, it is generally expressed by the indicative in french ; We
, — ^^^ s*exprimer par en ;
met a woman wandering through the country. We heard a man
errer d travers ■ *•*•
threatening to kill her. We saw some huntsmen seeking for a hare.
menacer i«8 ■ o cliasseur chercher — lievre,
154. The english gerund being governed by a verb, or by the pre-
** r^gi par VERBS,
positions op, prom, at, for, after, with, without, is expressed by
OF, FROM, AT, FOR, AFTER, WITH, WITHOUT, - S*exprimer
the infinitive of the verb in french ; I saw you doing it, without
infinitif en . ise ^
taking any pains. I was afraid of spoiling it. I blame him for
de la peine, ci'aindre ^^ g&ter *"o
going away, after having promised to wait for me. Be contented
f>n iire all6, . les soi 54 . ^ contenter ,
with telling him'" so. There is no occasion for (using him ill. )
•» (f)p.79.te» «« 190 Uen de naltraiter « -
• Again it expressed by re before voir f See the Jmperattve of a r^ective verb, pajfe 114.
EXERCISE. 83d
PRESENT PARTICIPLE. *
155. The english gerund which is so often used with the auxiliary
^^ gerondif - ^^ s'employer* auxiliaire^
verb BE, to define an action mure particularly, can not be expressed
BE, *7® cUJinir particuliirementy - iexprimer*
by the gerund in French; (the auxiliary verb must be lefl out,) and
; il faut omettre U verbe auxUiaire ,
(the gerund must be made into a verb) (in the) same tense and person
faire du gSrondif un verbe au •
as the auxiliary verb is; What are you doing there? I am reading
• que >* , _ : 83 i^p
a novel. You are losing (a deal) of time. What have you been doing,
roman, perdre beaucoup - ;
whilst I was dressing myself? I was waiting for my sister. I am
pendant que habiller me ^ **'
going to dress mysel^ctoo. I (am afraid)*** they will be going**® before
*'• *** (itMW. craindre^^'^ - partir ■**
I am ready. Make haste, for they are going to (set off) just now.
prit, se d^pecher^i car alter *7* partir tout d. I'heure.
156. The gerund which is sometimes used as a substantive in
- **• i* employer* - en
english, i. e, preceded by an article, can not be expressed by the gerund
, pricide *® , - s^xprimer* par
in french ; (it must be expressed) by a noun, if a noun synonymous to
; il faut Vexpnmer , synonyme
the verb can be found ; as, the reading of good books forms the mind.
•■ I , lecture 7 »3 former esprit.
His having been instructed (turn ; his instruction) was of great ser*
; *^ d'un grand
vice to him. If a noun synonymous to the verb does not readily*^
Co^ ** ais^ment
occur to the mind, you'** must give another turn to the sentence ; as,
te presenter , il h.b. faut tour phrase; ,
I should have caught that bird, if it had not been for your making
attraper ' oiseau^
a noise; (turn ; if you had not made Sfc.) You are the cause of his
du bruit ; ; fait Sy.
having been punished ; (turn ; thiat he has been punished,) What is the
82
9
reason for your being so angry with him? turn ; that you are so angry.
reason fAchi **<*?;
157. The past" participle joined to a noun has the property of an
pasU joint propri£t4
adjective, and agrees in gender and number with that noun; A
, s'accorder en genre ^'^nombre ;
- - - -
* 8e« N. B. note (it) page 935. f See the Imperative of a rejiectite verb, page 114
y2
340. EXERCISE.
• PAST PARTICIPLE.
married" man. A married woman. Well brought up children. W«U
marier w-B. 2* bieti iUver*^ - •
written letters. New builf^ houses. Roasted potatoes •.
icrire •* • noiivellement butir • rotir ** pommes de terre.
When a past participle comes after the auxiliary^ verbs have or
** participe auxiliaire^ HAVE
BE, you*** must make a particular^ distinction between these two verbs.
BK, il N-B. faitt particulier^ entre (bb)
158. After the auxiliary verb EtrCy to be, the past pjirticiple ag-rees
®* verbe , to BE, '* s*accorder
like an adjective, in gender and number with the nominative of that
comme adjectif, ^^* tiominatif (bb)
verb ; as, that man is married. That woman is married. Those
; , marier, (^^bj
children are well brought up. These letters aic well written. The
Clever -
potatoes are not done enough. Those houses are very well built.
cuire *•■* ti'is bdtir,
159. After the auxiliary verb AVoir, to have, the past participle
** , to HAVE, ^*
never agrees with the nominative of the verb ; so, in these examples ;
^^ s'accorder ; ainsi, (bb) eiempU ;
My mother has invited your sisters. Your sisters have invited my
inviti
mother, the participle invite must not change its masculine termination ;
, devoir changer sa ** tenninaison ;
except when the past participle comes after the participle £te^ been,
except^ ** , BEEN,
serving with Avoir ^ to form a compound tense; for then it agrees
servant , *•• former compost ^* terns; car alors s'accorder
with the nominative of Avoir; as, My sister has been invited. My
; , ^tc inviti,
brothers have been invited. My sisters have been invited.
In all other instances (in which) the past participle comes after
«" 7 cas , oil s«
HAVE, it (is necessary) to consider whether the participle has an object,
HAYEy il - faut *'* cotisidirer si objet,
and whether. this' object comes before or after the participle.
If the participle comes before its object, it does not vary, i. e. it is
son , changer,
Always masculine and singular 5 but if it comes after its object, it
masculin singuLier ; ,
agrees like an adjective in gender and number with that object; 1
t'accorder en *** * •
EXERCISE 341
PAST PARTICIPLE.
bave lost my watch. I have not found it. I have found a watch*
perdre niantre, irouv^r **
It is not that which I have lost. 1 have sent you a letter. I hav6
63 88 envoyer *^ lettre,
not received it. Have you not received the letter which I have sent
recevoir **
you ? We have sold our house, but we have bought another. (That is)
*w vetidre maison, c/i^o acheter um autre, •*-''
the house which we have sold, and (this is) the other which we have
a»7
»
bought. We have gained a complete^ victory. Have you heard
remporter complet ** victoire, entendu parler
of the victory winch we have gained? We have destroyed or taken
d6truire prendre
ail the enemy's **ships. (Here are) the frigates which we have taken.
ennemi vaisseau **7 frigate
N. B. Observe that the participle agrees only with its direct object ;
Observer (66^x8. son "* ;
for, when the object is governed by a preposition expressed or under-
car, r^gir exprimer ^^"^ sous-
stood, the participle does not agree with that object ; (Here is) the
entendre ^^7^ (hb) ; «*?
person to whom I have written the letter of which I have spoken to
perionne "^^ ^* (o)
you. It mentions a victory to which we have not contributed a little.
• 35 81 faire mention d* ^* contribiier - pen *"•
Over** (how many)^ powerful* enemies have we not triumphed !
De combien »•»• puissant^ triompher!
160. Sometimes afler a participle preceded bv an object, there is a
verb in the infinitive, then (it is necessary) to consider whether the
d infinitif, alars ilfaut *7' si
object is governed by the participle, or by the infinitive which follows
. rigir par , tuivre
ft. If the participle governs the object, it agrees in gender and num-
■* , •• s^accorder
ber with that object ; but if the object is governed by the verb which
follows the participle, the participle does not require any" agreement
, ne demander pas k.b. accord
with it ;• Have you finished the letter which I had given you to write?
rol}jet; "» " "«
Have you finished the letter which you had begun to write ? Have
140 ^ 168
■ ■ . - < I I ■■ I II ■ 1 ,1
* Here the noun mast he repeated in the place of the pronoun, because the personal prononns after a
prrposition, ean not be used to represent thir.g^. See G4 rule. j See note * page 333.
34*2 EXERCISE .
PAST PARTICIPLR.
you read the books which I had lent you to read ? Have you read
the books which I had advised you to read ? Is that the actress
eonseilLer* ** "• Est-ee la aetrice
whom we heard"* singf ? Sing the song which we heard her" sing
entendre • chantei' f chanson *^ * lui
(These are) the figures which I have lately learned to draw. I
^7 dernierement • ^^ dessiner.
still*** see the same faults whic{i you had resolved to avoid.
encore faute *** rSsoudre* i* ^viter,
161. The participles plu, oil, pu, roulu do not agree with the object
, , , . i^accordw
that precedes them, because the infinitive of the verb which comes be-
7^ , Tparce que
fore these words, is understood after them ; You have not written this
, ioui^entenda -®* ;
letter so well as you ought. You have had all the time and all the
assistance that you wished**. I have taken all the pains that I could"*.
tecourt ''* vouloit, • yeine 7* T^ivoir*
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS.
(A word is"* said) to govern another, when the word governing
On dU qu^un mot en rigit un autre, qui r6g%t
obliges the governed ioi^ conform to certain rules.
thiiger mot qui eit r6gi se conformer certaine (i) rigU,
162. When a verb governs two substantives, either nouns or pro-
r^gir , toit ou f
nouns, one of them requires a preposition, expressed before a noun, and
^ demander , exprimer **' ** ,
generally implied in the pronouns ; Has your sister given my brother
renfermer ^"^ ; *■*
any money ? (turn ; gitjen money to my brother,) Yes, she has lent
» ; , priter
him» some; (i. e. some to him,) Did he ask her for it? (turn ; did he
{f)p.79.CpJ; (o) «« 55 J 5.
ccsk it to her?) No, it<" was she who offered it" him ; (i. e. it to him.)
(o) t "*, K.B. 1*0 offnr^'^ (f}p.79. ; (o)
They have requested me to buy them books, fto buy books to them,)
prier -« (f)p.79. *• , (a)
and to send them to them ; but I will not send them any ; C^ny to
'* (o) ; Wv-rg.Cp);
them,) Have they returned your sister (to your sister) those which
«* K.B. (bh)
she had lent them**? No, they have»» not ; i. e. returned them to her,
* See note * page 333. t See note * puge 206. f See note || page S96.
EXERCISE. 343
aOVSRNMENT OF VERBS.
163. When a verb governs two objects, the shorter, i. e. the ob<»
r^gir objet, court **,
ject which is compounded of the fewer^^ number of words, is generally
compose plus petit ® mot, - *®
placed first ; I have brought your brother a very entertaining book.
se placer le premier ; i** amtuant **
He must dedicate all the time that he can spare to study. How can he
*'* donner '* pouvoir - '^itude ***
expect to learn unless'^ he pays all the attention he can to his books?
s'attendre^^ »• k.b. faire » (s)
If the objects are nearly of an equal lengthi h e. compounded of nearly
dpeuprit igale ,
the same number of words, the direct^ object must be placed before
® , direct devoir - se placer *^
the indirect ; Have you lent my sister any money ? She intends to
Vobjet ; ^?* • avoir^^^ dessein de
present your brother with a book. He gives his friends (a great deal)
faire present "* de • "* ^ beaucoup
of trouble. Tell her^^ that I will send her children some fruit.
peine. (f)p.79.(bb)V'B, »««
Yet the indirect object must be placed first, though it were
Cependant ^ devoir , quand meme it serait
the longer^S if by placing it last, it^ caused an amphibology with
long, r^^O ^ de^fiier, faisait amphibologie
other words ; as, Take the parcel which I have brought into the
d'autres I - ) *^ paquet
parlour. Have you sent the letter which I gave you to the (post ofRce?)
salon i** •* poste
164. The same noun may be governed by two verbs which have
mhne ^"^ r6gi par
both the same government, i. e. which are both used without a pre-
*" regime , « i«a| s* employer -
position, or which require both the same preposition ; as, I hate and
, demander ^** ; , ha'ir
despise that young man. He is always talking and boasting*" of what
mipriser (bbj ^•*t parler^^ sevanter **
he does. He is always opposing and (finding fault) with what other
faire, *•* J s*opposer "* trouver "^ a redire a les autres
people do ; but we^ could not say, I hate and mistrust that young
-"• faire; w-b. , nmSfierde
man. He is always- talking about, and finding fault with what other
*•* parler de, trouver d redire d •*
people do ; because se mifier requires a preposition before the noun
• fa*re;
• See note | ^agt 996. f Pat thif pronoan after the verb. i Put this adverb o/Zc the second rerb.
344 EXERCISE.
GOVBRNMENT OF VEKBS.
which follows^ it, and hatr does not require any : and because parler
and trouver a redire require different prepositions ; we'"' must say ; I
hate that young* man^ and I mistrust him. He is always talking about
(bb) , se m^fier de » i»* »*» *^
what other people do, and finding* fault (with it.)
Ui antres - "* , ^** d redtre y **
165. The same verb may govern two parts of a sentence, provided
*7? r4gir partie phrase, *^®
they are both affirmative or both negative ; as our reputation depends
^ ^** affirmative ou *" negative ; dtpendre
much (upon"® the) caprice of men, but still more upon our actions ;
du ' , encore de
but if one part of the sentence is affirmative and the other is negative
et «^» autre *«>
(the verb must be repeated ;) so, instead of saying: Our reputation
il faut rep^ter le verbe } ainsi, aulien ^^*
does not depend (upon** the) caprice of men, but upon our good or
du ^ aoo 8»
'^our bad actions ; repeat the verb, and say ; but it depends upon our
de » ; rdpiter , ; «« «<»
good or our bad actions. All men are equal; it^ is not birth^, but
V ' dgaux; N.B. naisaaiice,
virtue alone (say, it^ is virtue alone) which makes the difference.
^vertu teule n.b. 7*
166. Some verbs govern the verbs which follow them, indifferently
• rigir suiore , indi^iremment
in the infinitive or (in the) subjunctive; but when any one of these
au : •**
verbs governs two verbs, they must be both (in the) same mood ; so,
, devoir n* au mode; ainsi,
(it would not be proper to say;) I am glad to see you, and that I
on ne dirait pas bien ; bien aise de , que
have an opportunity to tell you so ; you^" must say, and to have uu
•* occasion *« *» te**; n.b. , de «*
opportunity to tell you so. Instead of saying : I have ordered the
»•» «9 le^ Aulieu de »*♦ ; ardonni
coach to (be got ready), and that they** bring*** it here ; say, I have
d' appriter^i , que K'B. amener ** ici ; dire,
ordered the coach to be got ready, and to be brought here ; or, 1 have
»» - appriteryi »« - «• ,• ,
ordered that the coach be got ready, and that they"® bring it here.
»« . N.B. M8 a*
• See note f page 282. f Turn ; to^/el reorfy.ihe coach, and to bring ^c.
EXERCISE. 346
GOVERNMENT OF V£KBS«
167. Passive verbs require De or par before the noun which they
fiovern. They require or, when the verb expresses an action wholly of
n^gir, exprimer entieretnent
the mind ; as. He is blamed by all his friends, and despised by all his
esprit; « , miprUer
neighbours. She is commended and esteemed by every body. They
require par, when the bodily^ faculties participate in the action ; The
, du corps avoir *** part a ;
town was besieged by the Austrians, and afterwards taken^^ by the
^ • assicger ** AutrichienSf ensuite prendre
French. The houses were plundered by the mob. This news was
^'^ • pilUr ** populace, nouvelle ■■•
sent*" to us by my correspondent. The letter is written by a man
snvoyer (o) correspondant, "*
who was upon the spot. But instead of these passive expressions,
»« place. aulieu (hh) »«
which are foreign to the genius of the french language, (it is better),
itranger^ gtnie » «i ^ il vant mietix,
by changing the order of the words, to give to the verb its active sig-
(hh) changer ordre » *^* *a ** ^
r.ification ; thus, All his friends blame him, and all his neighbours
; aintif ,
despise nim. Every body commends and esteems her. The Austrians &c.
in^priser ** louer *
When two verbs occur in**' the same part of a sentence the
se rencontrer partie
latter is governed by the former in the infinitive mood, sometimes
dernier rigxr par premier a infinitif - , '
(by the) means of a preposition, and sometimes without it.f
au moyen , pripotitUm,
The preposition to, the sign of the infinitive mood in english, ia
TO, ** signe - eii , —
expressed by oe, J, or pour, but not indiscriminately.
tUsprirmrX i » . *•* indiffiremment,
168. To, before an infinitive is expressed by oe, when it can
To, ^'^ .' - »*aiprimer X ti pouvolf
be changed into of or from, and"* the infinitive can be turned into
• u changer t en op from, et quo - m toumer par
the gerund or present participle ; this generally occurs when the infi-
girondif *" participt', * *»» arr'wer
nitive comes af\er a noun used in a definite sense ; as. You shall have
employ^ dtfini^* sens; ,
• See note * p. ^86. f Sm oote • page 341. X See N. B. note (ii) p. ^35.
346 EXERCISE
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS.
the trouble to do it, or (of doing it) over a^n. Will you have
peine refair^ , •
the goodness to help, or (of helping) roe ? If you have any desire
honti aider, « envxe
to serve mei you have now a fine opportunity to do it. Have the
servir , aprisent occasion
complaisance to wait for me. I have not time to stay. It is time to
*** '' rester, 11
go, I do not hinder you from going. See, rule 168, a list of the verbs
partir. empScher wus en aller. , rigle , liste
and adjectives which require oe before the infinitive that follows them.
• demanded ** infinitif 7*
169. To, before an infinitive is expressed by J, when it can be
To, - s*exprimer* A, il -
changed into in, and*^' the infinitive can be turned into the gerund,
$e changei' en I ft, et qtie - $e totimer . par g^rondif,
or present participle ; this generally occurs after nouns used**' in a
■• ^. » 184 arriver ' employer
partitive sense ; He will have some trouble to do it for in doing it)
partitif^ ; • peine refaire
over again. He perhaps*** will have somebody to help him. Is there
t peutetre »» aider lui^ «*«
no*' risk to go (this way ?) A virtuous man takes pleasure to do good.
N.B. risque par id ? vertueux V>ien,
Amuse yourself with reading some instructive book, instead of spend-
Amuser vous^ *** quelque instructif^ , au lieu ^^
ing'** your time in playing. S^e, rule 169, a list of the verbs and
jouer, , , liste
adjectives which require 2 before the infinitive that follows them.
170. To, before an infinitive is expressed by pour, when it can be
To, - s*eipi'imer • , il ^
turned into in order to ; as, I was going to write to you to beg,
setoumerpar IN order to; , *" aller *'''' (o) demander
or (in order to beg) a favour of you. You are too civil to refuse me.
grdce - ** trop refuser
(I will do any thing) to oblige you. I want money to buy a horse.
J I n'est Hen queje ne fosse ••® acheter
1 have not money" enough to buy one. It is not enough to have money
w.B. assez en 7® un, - suffire ** •
to get a horse, one must*" have money to keep it. He wants
se procurer , *•■• — maintenir ***
to have a horse, in order to make (people believe) that he is rich.
, croire aux gens
* See N. B. note (n) page S35. t Over c^ain is expressed by re before faire.
EXERCISE. 347
OOVERNMBNT OF VERBS.
N. B. The english gerund preceded by the preposition for, explain-
■* i^ondif *" FOR, servant
ing the motive of an action, is also expressed by the infinitive
3 expliquer motif > - *"* s*exprimer par infinitif
with pour; He has been taken up for having fought a duel. Is
j arreter - $^Stre^ battre en duel, -
that"* sufficient for arresting a man ? He was not arrested for fighting,
£9 tuffire »*» ^"^ i'etrebattu,
but for robbing and ill using the man whom he had®' fought with.
avoir voU maltra%i6 '• i'^tait «03
171, The infinitive is used without a preposition in french, when
- 8*employer - en ,
it is the nominative of a verb ; as, To love and to be loved are the
; , aimer
greatest pleasures in life'. To love without measure is a folly, not^^
** *• vie, mesure folie, n.b.
to love at all, is insensibility. To do to others as we would wish
du tout J insensibility, d autrui ce que vouhir
(to be'* done to), is to follow the law of reason,
qu*on nous fit, c*est - loi h'aison,
172. The infinitive is also used without a preposition after the verbs
- s*employei' -
Aimer mieux^ raloir mieuxy Alter, venir. Assurer^ croire, compter,
9 r 7 » f r
Duigner, oMarer, Devoir, Entendre, Envoyer, ssperer, valloir, inna*
giner, Laisser, osen paraitre, penser, pretendre, pouvoir. Reconnoitre,
negarder, netourner savoir, sembler, aouhaiter, soutenir, vouloir,
» » 9 t 9 » 9
voir, ^percevoir; as, I am going to embark for America. When do
, ; , m^embarquer '^AnUrique,
you intend to go ? I want*® to (set out) as soon as I can. I hope you
compter partirf sauhaiter partir "■ ***
will come to see us before you go. I do not think I shall (be able)
■*• partir *** pouvoir ^*^
to call**' before I go; but I expect to see you often when I have"*
passer •*• partir; esp6rer **
returned. You seem to have a great desire to^ go. No; I would
*•* enviB y70 aller. ; aimef
rather stay than go; but I do not*" know what to do here. It is
mieux rester (U) y aller ; k.b. savoir * J I vaut
better to gain a little than to gain nothing. I would rather gain
mieux gagner - pet* (U) •• aimer mieux
nothing than to toil myself for so little. See the 1 72nd rule.
(It) tourmenter me^ si peu de cAeie. rigkm
343 EXERCISE.
REMARKS ON THE VERBS.
173. Will, would. If by the words will, would* you wisli to
WjLLy WOULD, , fav WILL, WOULD f- VOubir »71
denote will, wish desire, inclination^ you'** must express them by
designer volonti, souhait, lUtir, , ii k.b. faut exprimer
the verb rouloir, and put the following verb in the infinitive; if you
, mettre a ;
wish to denote a determination, (will, would must be considered)
*'■ , il fant emuidtrer WILL, would
only as the signs of the future, or of the conditional of the verb which
comme futur, eonditionjiel
follows them ; as. Will you do me the favour to call** upon me ? I
; , • faire grace ^^ **
\.ill call, if I can. Would you do me the favour to call upon me?
, jxmooir, • *••
I would call, if I could. Will you bring your sister with you? I will
pouvoir, * ameiier avec
bring her, if she will come. W^ould you bring your sister with you ?
144 • 8a« "^
I would bring her, if she would come. My sister will not come ; sLe
amener , *** •
will stay at home. My sister would not come; she would stay at home.
, r ester au logis. {
174. Will have, would have. When will have, would have
Will have, would hafs, will have, wouid have
are used to denote the wish to possess, will, would are expressed
- i employer "• diugner desir ^^ poss4der, WILL, WOULD - i' exprimer
by the verb rouloir, and have is left out ; if will have, would
, HAVE •'S^omettre; will have, would
HAVE are used to denote not the wish, but the certainty to possess,
HAVE •* s^employer "• non , certitude *** ,
they are expressed by the future, or by the conditional of Avoir; as,
- s*eiprimer futur, conditionnel ; ,
My brother will have a horse. He will have one (cost what it will.)
f en "^^ * un. coute qui caute.
My brother would have a horse. H^ would have one (at any rate.)
• • • d quelque prix qtte ce fut.
He will have a watch too. He would have a watch too. He will
• montre austi. • en^^
have one, if he learns well. He would have one, if he learned well.
, apprendre en^^ ,
He will have none, if he wilLjiot have this"'. He would have none,
if he would not have this. He will have one like yours.
"* «»'»• une •*
..III I ■ ■ I ,, ^
* These sentences may be expressed t\ra ways, bnt each way denotes a different idea, and this ide«
ran lie determined onlv by the speaker or writer. See the examples under ra!es 173, 17^. See abo tbs
different notes on IFifl, frould» page 143, 2S8, and 33^.
EXERCISE. 349
n£M4.RKS ON THE VERBST.
N. B' If WILL HAVE, vrouLD HAVE, ill the sense of wish, are fol-
f»'/LL BAFEf WOULD HAVE, WtSH, ««»-
lowed by another verb, the object of have becomes the nominative of
>,w suo ohifiA HAVE tUvenir nominatif
VIS
objet HAVE devenir nominatif
the following verb which must be (in the) subjunctive in french;
suivant ^ devoir au tn ;
What will you have me do ? What will you have my brother do ?
" • fairef • fairef
I will have you learn Italian', and I will have him learn French''.
+ Italien, t Fran^ais.
Would you have us do"». nothing but study?. Must we never play?
t ' faire ^ qiC ^tudierl ' «i va im jQ^er
Yes, I would have you learn your lessons first, and I would
, *** Ucon premierement,
have you play afterwards. I will not have any of you be idle. I
»« ensuiie. ^^ oisif.
m
will have every one of you do his duty before he does any thing else.
'>w devair *^' *" autre chose,
175. Would have in the sense of chosen, been willing, followed
Would have chosen, been willing, suicre^^^
by a past participle is expressed by the imperfect or by the condi-
"^ " - s^exprimer jwr imparfait ' condi"
lional of Avoirt with the participle roulu, viz. Avais roulii^ Aiiraia
tionnel , , c*estmd'^ire
rouble and the english participle is expressed by the infinitive in french ;
, '* - i'exprimer en ;
If you would have let me go, I should have been back long since.
laisser , de retour il y a long-terns*
This would have been done in time, if he would have helped me.
■• ^ finir a tenu, aider
I asked*^ him to help me, and he would not. I would not have
pricr ** , ^^
helped you for ever so much. Why did you not tell me so before
rien aa monde. ^^ ** cela *'*
I began ? If I had told you so, you would not have come. If any
t ** ie*», ^ tout
body but you had told me so, I certainly would not have believed him.
autre qiu X a» /^55^ im
176. Should; When should, which is generally a sign of the con-
Shovld. should, ngriB
ditional tense, is used in the sense of otwwiT, it is expressed by the
- , - s' employer ought ^ - **exprimer
• Tuni. What will vou that I do? What will votx that my brother do f for it is not the petion whom
yoa w'xiK bat yoa voUh that the penon ihoiild perfurm some actioa.
t Turn, I will that you learm Itilian, and I will that he learn frcnah. IViufd yoa that trtf shonld do
w>thin/( bat atody-? and ■. on with other sent^nceti of thia kind. ♦ S^e note t pai^ 337.
350 EXERCISE.
REMilRKS ON THE VERBS.
conditional of the verb Devoir, viz. Dtvrais; as, ycu shobtd take
more
N
e' pains than you do. Children should learn, every day, something
.S' peine ^ faire, ' , touts les jours, *
by heart They should (get up) (sooner in the morning) than they do.
jutr cceur, se lever pltu <- matin ^
177. Should have, ouoht to have, followed by a past participle,
SHGULJt HAVE, OUGHT tO HAVE, *» •*
are expressed by the conditional of AVoir, with the participle d4, viz.
• par , iMi,
Aurais dH, and the en^ish participle is expressed by the infinitive
in french ; Tou should have gone (viz. ought to have gone) with your
en ; aller
brothers. You should not have let them go alone. They ought not
laisser seul *•.
to have gone without leave. They should not have stayed so long.
yJ" permission. rester si long-tems.
You ought to have told them** so. You have not acted as you should.
dire (f) p. 79. le *» agir
178* May, might. If may, might are used to denote the power
May, might, may, might - • iw designer pouvoii^
of doing a thing, may is expressed by the present of the verb pou"
»»* , may - •
voir, viz, puis, Sfc, and might by the conditional pourrats, which
, , , ^C. MIGHT ,
govern the following verb in the infinitive ; If may, might denote the
rigir a * ; MAY, MIGHT
mere possibility of doing a thing, they may be expressed by the sub-
simple possibilitS *** , t — *
junctive of pouvoir, or by the subjunctive of the following verb ; Any
, qui suit ^* ;
body may do that ; (i. e. can or is able) to do that. Yoi| may do it,
io» t (bb) ; »^ faire , '
(i. e. You can or are able) to do it, if you like. I will shew you
, vouloir, ^ montrer
how it may be done ; (i. e. how one catit or is able to do it.) Leave
M ; , Laisser
it her«, that I matf try ; (i. e. that it may he possible for me to
«« , afinque essay er ; ^7«
try.) I will lend it** you, that you may learn ; (i. e. that it may
prfier *• , afin que ;
be possible for yoa' to learn.) Any body might do that ; (i. e.
IM
• SpeN.B.note'iOpa^SSS. f Sm Bote • page 138, N B. p. 139L } Se«Mtaf p.31«.
EXERCISE. 351
REMARKS ON THE VERBS.
would be able) to do that. You might do it, (i. e. you could or
faire , •
would be able) to do it, if you had"* a mind. I will shew you how
it might be done ; (i. e. how one could do it.) I left^^ it here that
•* ; • laisser ** q/in qia
you might try ; (i. e. that it might be possible for you to try.)
179. Could have, might have. When could have, might have
Could have, might have, could have, might have
are followed by a past participle, Ihey are expressed by the imperfect
i!» ^ sa , -. J imparfait
or by the conditional of Avoir, with the participle pu, viz. Avais pUy
conditionnel , , ,
durais pu, agreeably to the tense, and the en^lish participle is ex-
, suivunt "" » *-
pressed by the infinitive in french ; If I could have done it, (i. e. ii
t en ; * faire ,
I had (been able) to do it,) I wuuld not have asked*" you to help
iw pu ^72 ^ prier *®® aider
nie. You might have done it (i. e. you would have been able to do
it) as well as I". I could not have done it so soon ; (i. e. I should
43 48 •
not have been able to do it so soon.) You perhaps*** could not, (or
St tot, peut'itre . ,
would not have been able to do it) but you might have tried ; (i. e.
essay ei' ;
you would have been able to try.) I might have tried, (i. e. I should
have been able to try) as you say ; but I am sure that I could not
comme ; sur
have succeeded ; (i. e. that I should not have been able to succeed.)
riussir ; •
180. JViSH. The present tense of the verb wish, followed by another
Wish, - wish, «»
verb in the imperfect or (in the) conditional is expressed by the con^
it au ^ X
ditional of aouhaiter^ viz. souhaiterais, and the verb which is in the
, c'est^-dire, , d
imperfect or (in the) conditional in english, must be (in the) perfect
au en , devoir (hk) au par fait
of the subjunctive in french ; as, T wish that was done. I wish
subjonctif ; , «» ' (bb) «»
•^' • • ' III. ._ — - — _ — >— ' « »
* S«e the different nae of Couldt page 13B. f See note t p. 313. X See K. B. note (tt) p. 235.
352 EXERCISE.
REMARKS ON THE VERBS.
your sistei would come. I wish somebody would help me. I wish
«i w aider
I had never attempted it I am glad that I have done (with it.)
'Cnn) entreprendre ** ** - -(nn)et*'e d4harrauk <«**
181. Must. The verb mcst is conjugated with the three different
Must, mvsi - seconjuguer* *• *■
persons^ viz. I must, thou must, he must, &c. but the verb which
, I MUST, THOU MUST, HE MUSTy 6^C.
represents it, has only the third person singular of each tense, with
, au singulier *** ,
// for nominative, viz. il fuuU il Fallait, 8^'c. (see page 174.) then
the nominative of must becomes the nominative of the following verb
MUST devenir
which is always (in the) subjunctive in french ; as, I must see (turn ;
au en i , ;
it must that I see) that man. Thou must not go alone. He must
• t «««/.
come himself. Your brother must go with you. You must not stay
(m) N.B. « t
long. Must we not speak to him ? Must not his friends know it ?
long-tems. f (o) ** t savoir f
N. B. When the nominative of must is indefinite, i. e, when it does
MUST ind^fini,
not relate to any particular" person, it is generally left out in french,
se rapporier en partkulier , - *■* i'omettre • ,
and the following verb is put in the infinitive; How many® times
-. ♦ ^ J N.B. «8«
must one tell you the same thing? We must employ our time
dire ' le
usefully. People must never be idle. They must help one another,
utilejnent. oiaif, Braider ^*^
182. Must have meaning to be in need, is expressed by il pattt.
Must have dtsigner to be in need, - •• ,
but HAVE is left out, and (the nominative of must is made) the object
HAVE ^ * , on fait diinominatif de MUST *
of Faiit; thus, I must have, il me faut; thou must have, il te
; ainsi, 1 MUST HAVE, J 7^017 MUST HAVE,
faut; he must have, il lui fauf, Sfc, (see page 175.) I must have a
; HE MUST HAVE, , &iC, J
horse. He must have a saddle. My brother must have a wife. My
t selte. J femme,
sister must have a husband. These children must have clothes.
mart, habit,
. _ ^
• See N. B. note (it) page 235. f Sm MUST used nefftUively, p. 174. t See MUST HAVE, p. 175.
EXERCISE. 353
VERB.
RECAPITULATORY cxevcise 071 the foregoing rules*
I have done. Have you done? Has your brotner done? Haj3
finir.
your sister done? My brother has sun^ a song. My sister has sung
chanter chanson,
a song. My brothers have sung a song. My sisters have sung a
song. Have you heard the song which my brother has sung ? Have
entendre 7*
you heard the song which my sister has sung ? Have you heard the
song which my brothers have sung ? Have you heard the song which
my sisters have sung? They are gone. Are they gone? Are your
pariir,
brothers gone ? Are your sisters gone ? How do they do"^ ? How
/ iM iM seportei'f ^^
does your mother do ? Is all your family well ? Is your sister
«^i «" » famille i« '
returned from Bath? Have the baths been of service to her? I
** Bath? bain faire du bien (o)
think they have. She looks*" much better than she did before
•** t avoir mine % ^""^ avoir *^^
she went. I am glad ^ you are come ; I wanted to see you. If
y alter, bien aise ; ■••
you had not come, I would have called upon you. I have some
MS
news to tell you. Do you know that Mrs. B. is here? No,
nouvelles plur. savoir ici f ^*^
1 did not know it. When did^ she come ? She came this morning.
Quand ** matin,
1 have just received this note from her. I am glad she is come
■** recevoir billet ^
(at last), for I longed^^^^ much to see her. I will wait upon her
enfin, car see p. 175. fort passer chez ^
to-morrow morning. Will you come with me? I do not think I
demain matin, *® ***
shall (be able) to go, I (am -afraid) my mother will not be able to
pouvoir y^^ craindre ^^
spare*^ me. Since she has been ill, she wishes me to be always
se paster de ^ Depuis que § malade, voutoir ||
• See note * p. 881, and add to it that the whole of this exercise on the verbs most be well understood
before the exercise is left olf.
t Yoa may express, I ihmk thejr have^ hvje pense qrC out ; or if yoa express haffe, you most add the
rest of the i(ent«>Dce and say ; je pease qu' its lui en ontfait,
\ Turn this sentence. She has vutch better look than she had ^e.
f Has been ill. The English often Uite this past tense to express an action or a state of beingf which
354 EXERCISE
VERB.
aECAPiTULATORY exercise on the foregoing rules,
with her. She will not let me (go out) for fear^ I should slay too
* (kk)lais$er sortir de peiir que resttr
long^. Do you wish me to go ? Yes, I do'^ Well ; I will call,
hng^tenu, * y''^ i , »•»• Eh bien ; paster,
if I can. You may call, if jou will ; it is not so far. I do not think
pouvoir , ; •*• loin, ***
your mother will refuse you to (go out) for such a short^ time. I will
tortir si - peu h-b.
ask her. Do?®; i. e. ask her, I wish you would lend me the book which
Ul (Op. 7^9. H.B. Ml (kkjpreter
you promised me the last time I was at*^ your house. I promised
(t) H.B.
to send it to my cousin a^er I have read it. She has nothing to
f. aprhque •• ••
do now, and it is better she. should do that than do nothing.
d pritent, vahir mieux*^ • (U)
I will lend it you now. I wish you (very much) to read it. I did
§ •• " , li ^rt
not lend it you then, for fear®* you would not return** it to me in
09 M alorSf depeurque - w.b. A
time. I (was afraid) that you would keep it too long. I have long
terns, craindre^^ -^'^ garder •• long-terns,
wished to read it. I could not lend it you, before you asked me for
it. Here*'? it is. I wish*^ it may amuse you (as much) as it has
•■ w.B. •« amuter autant que ••
amused me. Do you think vour cousin would come, if I sent for
M tzf cousine , envoyer ehercher
her? I do not think she can. She told me that she expects a friend
"^ ?*^ attendre
who promised to call upon her this aflernoon. Did she tell you that
•'• apris'4nidi,
I drank 'tea with her yesterday*" ? Yes, she did.?* I wish™ you had
prendre ihi hier hb. h.b. iw
been there. I wish I had. She is coming to spend the evening with
yW(e)p.74. •• «7i »* °
me (to-morrow,'**) will you come with* her? I wish I could; but I
demain, v.b, (kkj iw (nn)^^ ;
can not. I am engaged at Mrs. A's. We will meet some other day.
?* *•' serencontrerquelque >**
^ -------- — — ■ -u, -, n _r-ij i_r_
• Turn ; do you wish Uiat I got see * p. 839, which is also applicable to wish,
f The verb Alter, to go. reqnires a place mentioned after it ; if the place has been mtntioncd b*ford
re always add to Jiler the adverbial pronoon F, there ; see note (e) p. 74.
X Add here, in french, the pronoun Le^ it. f See note f page 312.
^ Turn ; I with much that you read it ; see note * p. S89, whieh is also applicable to wiih*
if Turn ; it ii long iince I wish fjfc. see note ) page 353.
** Instead of repeating this verb in french we should wy.Je le souhnite aussi.
EXERCISE. 355
VERB.
RECAPITULATORY exercUe on the foregoing ruleif.
I have just heard that Miss B. is very ill. Who told you bo ?
venir de •** apprendre malade, dire ' ** U **
Miss C. told me so. How"^ long has she been ill ? She was taken
le ^ CombUn y a't^il qu§ * iombsr
ill this morning. They^ say she is very ill. I must send to inquire
malade m k.b. mi tnHnfarmtr
how she is now. I think it is better that I go myself. It (is
•*^ •* vahir mitux (m) n.b.
necessary) that I should see her. It (is becoming) that I pay her a visit.
falloir ^*' convtnir *•* rendre *•' •* visite.
Did you hear that Mrs. C. is dead ? Indeed ! When did she die ?
entendre (bb^v-^' mourirl ! **
I was with her last night. She seemed (well enough) when I left
^^ paraitre en aitet bonne mnti quitter
her. She was taken ill suddenly in the night, and she died this
11 hd prit dm mal tuhitement , *^
morning. I am very sorry she is dead. She was the most estimable
fdchS Ml M w
woman that I knew^. I had invited her daughter to come and spend
eonnaitre. (nn) *^^
(a few) days with me, but I do not think she will come now that
quelquet *, •■'
her mother is dead. Were you at the play lately? Yes, my siste^
comedie depuispeuf ,
and I went there (the night before last), to see a new actress. We
»«7 y»4 avant'hierautoir, nonvelle actrice.
had expected some amusement, but we were greatly disappointed. The
attendre , bien tromper,
players were very bad. I never saw a worse^ set, Was it a good
com^diens mauvais, mauvais troupe, Y avait-il beaucoup
house ? Yes, the house was pretty full*. The lower" boxes
de mondet t , salle passablement plein» premier lege
were not full, but the upper boxes and the pit were very full,
' • , i parterre •*
Was my cousin there ? I do not know. I did not see her. I met
f. y»*
her yesterday, as I was going to take'^ a walk, and I went to drink
hier, ir.B. ^ ^
tea with her. Afler we had drunk tea, we went into the fields, and
at J «. ^
we picked several curious" flowers which I intend to draw, and
cueiUir eUrieut (g) avoir dentin dessiner,
* See note f p. 368. t This sentence van not be expressed in frenoh aeoording to its literal
senM: it mitst be expressed as if the wordx were, fFere there many people f
X The different sets of boxes arc distinfuished In frtnch by the names of fremieref. $eeondety ¥ro\nhnei^
4«. loget.
i Speaking of drinking tea, coffee, &e. as a meal, we nse Prendre instead of Botre,
z2
356 EXERCISE
VERH.
RECAPITULATORY txercisB Oil ike foregoing rules.
send to you. I must make you some little present that*** you may
Co J quelque afin que
remember me. Do you think I need any thing to make me
ie souvenir*^ *' •* awirbesoinde *" ^^o
remember you? I will not forgfet you (as long) as I live. I was
** *• oublier tant que
in«" London since I saw you. Did you see the curiosities? I saw
N.B. Londres dspuis que ^®' curiosiUf
the Tower, St. Paul's, and the Museum, but I did not find (so many®)
TouTf , Museum, tant w-b.
curiosities as I had expected. Did you ever see the Museum ? Yes ;
que ^^ s*y attendre, ;
I have seen it several times. Did you hear that my brother is gone
** *• entendre
to France? No, I did not7«. When did he go? He (set out) this
e loi ^ jj.B «3e partir f *» partir
morning. Were you ever in France? No, I never was there. I
»»• y "(e) p. 74.
never had an opportunity to go. I should like to see that country of
■* occasion y70 • ^jjj sso
which I have heard (so much). I will go the first opportunity
7* entendre parler tant ** t/ ^*' * d (sj
I can find. And you, were you ever there? I lived in France
, y ** demeurer
several years. I have been nearly all over the country. Was
plusieurs f pretque f m tao Y avait-il
any body with you? Yes, Mr. B. was with me. How did you travel ?
**• , ** ^®* voyager?
We travelled sometimes in a coach, sometimes in a gig, and some-
qtielquefoU en - carroseet ■* cabrioletf
times on (horseback), as it suited us. When did you return ?. I
d chevaly comme cela convenir ** aae «65
returned about three weeks or a month ago. Which way did you
«w ily a **^ environ **«- Par^^ route
(come back) ? I came through Havre de Grace and Southampton.
revenir t par (b)
Did you speak french when you went to France ? I spoke it a little.
X fran^ait m. « % ^ un peu,
I spoke it enough to make myself understood. But I knew grammar
t •■ assez ^70 entendre, savoir "^grammaire
♦ See note t p. 354. + Express been over by the v?rb parcourir,
X Did speak and spoJte require here an exD.anation. For instance, if I were to say, I met a gentle-
man in the street yesterday and I tpoJie french to him ; I should say, I'tf rencontrai hierun monsieur dans
la rue, et je lui PARhA.1 frangais, becanMe I then wish to express what I did, viz. that I spoke fr*nch.
But in the example here (riven, I do not want to know whether ihe person upoke french or not, but whether
he knew the language, which bein^ mere knewledgeor a description of the njJnd, must, agreeably to 140th
rule, be expressed by the iraperfest parlaisy^c.
EXERCISE. 357
VERB.
RECAPITULATORY cxercise on the foregoing rules,
pretty welP", and I soon learned to speak it well. I now speak it
asses bien n.b., i*» / •* *•*
as fluently as my native" lan^age. Did you never meet with
*■ coiiiamment *■ maternel^ langue *•• rencentrer ■•*
people who spoke endish? Yes, sometimes, but not so often as I
wished. Were you in France when the revolution began? No, I
commencer ? ,
was in Holland. Were the Dutch fflad* (of it) ? Some were glad
HoUande» HoUandais - bien aise en ** •* "•
(of it), and some ^'were not. Some (were of opinion) that it would do
a (great deal) of good, others thought that it would do a great deal of
- beaucoup bien, ^* penser •■ -
harm. I did not stay long in Holland; I went to Germany and Italy.
mat. Tester • ; • AUetnagne ***
1 have been to Ireland too, since**® I saw yon. Well ; how do you like
• Irlande aussi^ depuis que Eh bien ; *"
that country? I like it (very much) ; it is a very fine country ; but I
no t88 «s beaucoup ; •* ;
will not (go again,) unless, as the Irishman in London says, I can* ^
y retounier, ^ •*■ , camme Irlandais d. Londres • n. '
go by land. I was*^ very sick. I never was so sick in my life
(kk)y'f^ par terre, w.d. tnalade. '^« de vie
Indeed, every body on board was sick. It* is true that it blew
2 la viviU, !•• d bord w.b. vrai faire
a tempest. One of our masts fell over board, and we lost almost
tempete, mdt tomber par-dessus ^ f perdre
all our sails. We expected every moment that we should go and
voile, attendre Hi tout - (nn)
sup with the god of the waves. However afler a deal of toil
souper dieu flat, Cependant - beaucoup peine
and fatigue, we arrived at Cork '"^harbour. We landed as soon as
*°* , ^ Havre, dibarquer *• *•
we could, and we were very well received by our friends who were
pouvoir, recevoir
waiting for us. We soon forgot the perils of the sea, and we be^an
«» »« oublier
to divert ourselves (in the best manner) we could. (Next day) I went
divertir du mieux que ^Lendenuxin.
to my friend Mr. D.'s (country seat.) The weather was*** bad i^r
*^chdteau, ^^ k.b.
some days, but one morning it grew fine. I (got up) early, and
, »» n deveinr se lever de bonne heure,
* In A parentlinns, the French generally put the nominative after the verb; so, turn this sentence thus,
as sat/s the Irishman ta Jjondom,
358 EXERCISE.
VERB.
RECAPITULATORY exeTcUe on the foregoing rules.
1 went by myself to take*^' a walk in the fields, while the family
W N.B. N.B. J pendant qM
(were asleep.) I never saw nature more sublime than it"* was at that
dofwtir.»«» le^o dans
moment. The sun had just risen, and the dew which was on the grass
*** se Uoer, rosSe herbe
appeared like pearls. I advanced a little into the country, but the
reutmbler d ^perle, s'avancer un pen *"* , **
more I advanced, the more I felt inclined to advance. 1 saw on all
, ** »e tentir p&rti de
sides trees loaded with friiit which was beginniilg to ripen; an in-
eotS • *** commence!' murir , in-
finite number of birds singing*** and warbling on the branches ; cattle
Hni ®* • oiseau n.b. gatouiUer ^* ; ^b^tail
grazing^, or wandering through the meadows; hills and dales covered
paitre, v.s. errer d. travers prairie ; ^coUine ^vallee
With com which began to (turn yellow) 3 in short every thing indicated
*<w bU jaunir ; en un mot '^ annoncer
abundance and prosperity. I was*'^* so delighted with my walk, that I
^abondance ^ 4 6. n.b. eharme ^'^ ,
(went again) every morning that the weather was fine. I stayed there
y ^ retoumer touts tes matins **• rester y **
six weeks, and I do not think it* is possible to spend six weeks
, 8*1 MB. VI
more agreeably than I did. Did you see Mr. A. lately ? I saw hini
*7 le "^^ fuire, depuis pen f
this morning. I met him as I was going along the street Ho
renconirer comme passer le long de
told me that he had called upon you, but that you were not in. He
desired me to tell you that he wanted to see you. If you see him
AM a«o reooir
aorain, tell him that I will call upon him as soon as I have dined«
^ W 268 as 48 48
I will.'* Did you not go a shooting together yesterday? Yes, w«
W'B. it la chasse au fusil ensemble ^** w.b. ,
did.** Was your excursion successful"? Not very. The ground
K.B. chasse heureux(g)f Passablement, terre
was wet, and the game was very wild. We killed only six brace of
humide, gibier sa-uvage, titer couple
partridges, two hares and four woodcocks. Were there no» pheasants?
perdrix, lieure bhasse, **• *••■• faisan f
There were plenty ; but they were in some gentlemen's plantations,
■*• aboftdance; *** t messieurs ^ ^
Family being sbtgtdar, the verb can not be plnral in freneh. i See Bote f p. 888.
EXERCISE. 359
VERB.
RECAPITULATORY txercise on the foregoing rules.
and we dared not touch them. Did you walk or ride? We
OKT (hk) toucher y ** alter it pied ou d cheoal f
rode as far as R. where we left our horses at a smalL inn there,
atler a cheoal jusqu'd, otl laisaer a auberge qui y e$tt
and afler we had refreshed ourselves a little, we began our excursion.
aprh qu£ ^afraichir » ' tin pen, chasse.
We (went over) I do not know*^ (how many) heaths, fields and coppices.
parcourir n.b. combien^Jf-^* bruyere, *** taillis,
I dare say we walked 20 miles* When we arrived at the inn, we were
pouvolr •" *•* mille, ,
80 tired that we could not return home that night. We slept there,
fatiguer (hk) ** au logis " soir-lH, coucher y •♦
and we (came home) this morning. We intend to try again to-morrow.
revenir essayer encore demain.
Will you come with us, if we go ? I will go, if you will promise
me to return in time for dinner. If we find that it is too late, we
*** it terns dine^. trap ,
may dine in the country. 1 can not stay. We shall have company
pouvoir t ''^® (^^) Tester. •
to dinner, and I must be there. Then I think it is better for
, y ** Doiic *®* *^ il vaxit mietix qtie
us to go aflLer dinner. We may set out as soon, as the dinner is
t y7®» . pottvoiri *» «
over* We generally*** dine late ; I am afraid it" will be too late to
fini. ardinairement tard; «i w*b. iw »7d
go then. I think the best thing we can do, is to (put it^ ofi)
y 7« alors. ^^ (s) *© , ' c'est d4 remettre
till afler to-morrow. We may then take our own time. We shall
jusqu*iiaprh t alors -
(set out) as early as you please. I wish your cousin would come
partir d^aussi bonne heure qu* il pluire §, '^^
with us. I wish you would send somebody to let**' him know. I do
"* »* M.B. II
not know a man whose company is more pleasant. Bring him with
''* ' agriable, "e ««
you, if he will come. I see him coming, I will ask him»*. Your
IT II , '
cousin and I go a shooting the day afler to*morrow, will you be one
M J«r a la chasse au fusil - - , f^^) "■
of the party ? I should be very happy to accompany you, but T do
partief hien aise accompagner ,
• See note t p. 854. + The french would here use tlffkivre. ^
t Turn ; It it better that we go.
I ¥fi'? ^^^ \^^ Please impereonal, and expn-ss Ton please, as if the enulish was, it will tleaite wm.
1 Add here the pronoun Le, and say Le lui. 70 rule. ^ See note t p. SIS
360 EXERCISE.
VERB.
SEGAPiTULATORY excrcise on the foregoing rules.
not think that I can. We shall not go further than you like. You
may come, if you will. You might come, if you would. I will
pouvoir , pouvoir ^
consider (of it). I should like to go (very much)***. I will let**' you
penser y ** • , fort n.b. f »•»•
know to-night, if I can go. Why did you not call yesterday ? I could
not. I went a hunting. Who was with you ? (Was there) any body
d la chaste. ^ »«»
(that I know?) Yes, (there were) several of our friends. What time
de ma connaistajice ? , *^ plusieurs A ^* heart
did you go? We (set out) at six o'clock. Did you catch any thing?
partirt partir d prendre **^
We caught a fox. Had you a (great deal) of sport ? Yes, we had'*.
renard, - beaiicoup plaisir 1 , v.s. j
I wish I had been with you. If I had known it, I would have gone.
(im) § tavoir , *« •?»
Why did you not let*^ me know ? I did not know that you could go.
K.B. le^^ ' pouvoir •'7^
I was^ at home the whole day, and I had nothing to do. The next
v.B. au logis ^ » 140 M prochaine
time you ^o^ do not fail to let»*» me know. I will not ; i. e. fait^.
»«C»J( • , manquer m.d. icf® y'^® • , »•»•
I have got a new horse. When did you buy it ? I bought it (his
*7® nouveau || acheter
morning. (How much) did you give (for it) ? I gave a hundred
contbien en ** en 7® **
guineas. It" is a (great deal) of money. How old is«» it ? It is*"
guinie, »•"• - beaucoup k.b. k.b.
four years old. Will you come to look at it? Now; what do yon
voir ** > "* «
think (of it) ? Do you not think that I got it ch*eap ? I do not
en^* avoir dbonmarchif
think it is dear. It is a very good horse. I wish it may answer**"
*" '* ««^ rSpondrea
your expectation, I will buy one too, : as soon as I have a little
^ attetite, en ^^ un aussi, ** tot ** tt»i pen
more* money. Do you think I can get a good one for My guineas?
I think you may. When I have one, I will lend it you when you
«^ 7* en 70 „„ / preter ** *•
• Seer note t p. 354. t See note % P- 241. % Add, a good deal of it.
\ See note f p. 337* | Pat thu> adjective before the noun.
EXERCISE. 361
VERB
RECAPITULATORY exevcist Oil the foregoing rules.
want *• it. Will you take *<» a walk when your letter is finished ?
avoir besoin en ** n.b.
I can not ; I must take it to the (post office) as fast as I can. It
must go to-ni^ht. I am afraid it will be too late when I am
partir »* « »» tard
there. I will go with you, if you will wait for me. I can not wait ;
y»* alter , «« (hk) ;
I must ^o directly. Will you call upon me when you (come back) ?
y 7- tout d Vheure, *•• revenir f
I do not think I can. My sisters go to the play ; they will have^'^ me
«*» T? comedie; w.b.
go with them, and I must go. Will you call when you come back
* , 7* passer
from the play ? I will see. I will call, if it is not too late when the
de
play is over. Why did you not call in (coming back) from hunting?
finie, • ■•• en revenir de Uhasse^
I could not. It^ was late, the weather was bad, and I was tired.
7« H.B. tard, tern wo ^ las i
I am tired of those violent^ exercises. I must get a wife. Marry ,*«*
ennuy6 1 ^ exerdce, prendre se marier, X
says a proverb, you will do well ; do not marry, you will do better
proverbe^ ; % , (b)p.7l?,
I do not care for your proverbs. I must have a wife. I will have
se soticier *• *■* ||
one who is tolerably handsome, who has some common sense and a
passablement , ' commun^ un
little' fortune. Do you think you can find a woman who is so
pen ^••B. bien, ■** trouver
accomplished ? If I thought that I could not find one, I would never
accomplirf % pouvoir en^® ^ne,
be married. I like your sister. Do you think she will go to the
- se marier •^^ **^
assembly to-night ? If I hear that she goes, I will send you word.
assembUe ■** cpprendre ••jo^ lefaire ** savoir,
I do not think she wilU®. She has not been well for some time,
M» •• K.B. »7 «i depuis quelque
* Did refers hen to the period of hanting:, which was yesterday.
t Tiredf— La5, Ennuye' Lea is said of the body ; Ennuyi ia said of the ntiuf.
t See the tmperattTe ol a r^/lecttve verb, p. 114.
H fFill have may here be expressed two ways, aipreeably to the idea which ]f-0Q wish to express.
If yoa wibh to denote that yoa know the person yoa describe, and are certain to have her, you express
fKitl have one by J*en aarai une ifC. with the following^ verbs in the UtUcative.
If yon want to denote that you wi^h to find sach a person as yoa describe, yon mast express ffiU have
one liy J'en veux «««, with the following^ verbs in the tubjunetive. See 174 rule.
^ See note f p. 337. •• See note f p. 354.
862 EXERCISE*
VERB.
RECAPITULATORY exerciae on the foregoing rules.
and she (is afraid) of f^oing out), for fear of (catching cold). I am
craindre sortir, d$ peur de s*enrhumer.
sorry*** she does not come, for I intended to dance with her. She is
^dchi , avoir dessein * •*
the most agreeable woman that I ever '^knew. When did you see her?
44 ta Jamais **
I saw her this morning. She called at*^ our house, but she did not
stop. Did she give you the book which I sent you ? Yes, she did'^ ;
ruter» '* , h.b.
1. e. give it nufl^» Did you read it ? Yes; I read a good part (of it).
ir.B. , partie «i**
How do you like it? Did it entertain you ? I like it very well ;
IBS 988 0S amuser •■ ;
it entertained me (very much). I never read a book which entertained
me more. Do you think the foreign*" mail will arrive to-day ? It
iw »i Stranger ^ malle ' aujourd'huif «•
is arrived. It arrived early this morning. I wonder that (there is)
•* ** rfe boniu hdure *** s^dtonner ■*•
210* letter for me« I am afraid my friends have forgotten me. I wsote
K.B. » »» »w oubSer "
to them (long ago). It is time that I should hear from them. I
(o) (il y a Umg'temsJ. II terns V* t
wish they would write to me. I will not write to them again,
281
(oj ricrire (o)
»
until *>* I have heard from them. I think they do not wish me to
iusqa' iLce qus aja . t *** %
know what is passing at home. I am afraid they will think that I
tavoir •* - ic "passer au logis, ■■* *••
stay here too long. I suppose they wish me to come*** home, but
rester id long-terns. *** ■*' || i^en retoumer,^^
J do not intend to go back yet. I will stay here as long as I can.
avoir dessein s*en tetourner encore,* *• <■
We are going to drink tea, will you take a cup with us ? I do not
prendre Hh6, ^o jj„j j, i^ ^^^^^^
care. I was going to Mrs. D.'s, but I (may as well) stay here. I
bien,\ •* » (ferai aum bien) de
can not be in better company. What were you looking for when
(hk) «••»**»
I met you ? I was looking for my little boy who has been wander-
■•* garfon errer
• See note * p. 825. f Expr^s /rom tKem hy de lews uomeeUes^ or bj des uouveUes Seu»
t Tarn ; they do not wi'M that I know tfC. | See note • page 839, wUcH is also appHcabie to visk
Y We ooald not say in this sense, j« ne m'en soueiepas^ for I do not care.
EXERCISE. 368
VERd.
AECAPiTULATORV exercUe on the foregoing rules.
ing about all the aflernoon. I saw. him playing with the other
fa e*. Id apriS'Tnidi. i>>
children, as I was passing by your house. Your l;^ouse is well built,
, nomme ^ " bdtir,
but it is not well situated. It is (too much) exposed to the wind.
•* situer. '^ trap exposer vent.
We had planted a great number of trees round, it, but the drought
planter autour •*, Uchereae
has nearly killed them all. Is it** the house which your father
presque faire mourir ** k.b. 7*
got built? No, it« is not; he has sold it", and has bought this»».
faire bdtir f , k.b. 70 . vendre **, acheter n.b
Have you seen (the one) wliich he has begun to build ? No, I have
celle* 7* commencer ,
not**. You have a nice* library; may I look at it**? Surely,
"•B. joli^ biblioth^qiie ; pouvoir voir - •* Assurimentj
you may. These books are well bound, but they are very badly
^* relier, mal
printed. I have lately read some very entertaining ones. I will
tmprimer* - depuis peu f ■ ^^ . amusant en ** ^
shew you the books which I have read. I have also bought several
'^* pLusieun
curious* things. See the fine things which I have bought. I want
eurieui^Cg) belle ««<>
to shew them to your sister. How long is it since you saw her?
**» que IM
I saw her as she was coming to town. I am glad^^ you are cume,
eomme ' bien ai$e
and that your sister is coming too. I am surprised she has written
austi, ^^
to you, and has not mentioned it. Have you sent the books which
(o) , Ml purler en** 7*
you were speaking of into the country**? No, I have not sent them
i03 813 1S8
yet'*. I will send them this evening. Did you lend your cousin
encore. ** *** •
those which he asked you for? Yes, I did; i.e. lerid them to himJ^
W 801 ^ , K.B.
Did you hear that my uncle B. has given my brother a horse? He
• oncU »* **
has lent him money to buy one, and I am sure ho never will ask
»«« en 7® «n, *i ** redemande^
him for it again. He has abo made my eldest* sister a present of a
»« y *• t ain^^ !•« •* i«»
* We eoald net say Pmne for the one. i S«e note f pag^e 241. t See note t page 3L9.
I See note i| page ^96. % Again i» expressed by re prefixed (o 4emaneUfr.
364 EXERCISE.
VERS
RECAPITULATORY exercise on the foregoing rules,
watch. Did he ever give your other sister any"i thing? No, he
montre. "o "* "^ ,
never did'^. He often promised her something, but he never gave hei
KB. »W lea 96 ^ ° 161
any thing. She should try to please him. She should pay more
•*• essayer ** faire
attention than she does to what"^ she is told. She says she liays all
47 faire ^^ •« ai •' »
the attention she can to every thing^<i^ she does. Sometimes, not
(s) tout ce que , pas
always. Take the books which I gave you into the (school room)
with you. Now, I must go. Will you come with me ? I can not.
, s'enaller. m 70
You might come, if you would. I might go (to be sure) ; but then
, . 3/ '• ti est vrai ; aUns
I must neglect business which ought not to be neglected. Come,
n^gliger ^affaires ,
that we may divert ourselves a little. You must have a little^ diver*
afin que dioertir unpeu» v.n. amtue-
sion« You must not alwa3'S be (shut up) in the house* Scud me my
ment, renfermer
servant, that*» I may tell him to get our horses ready. If you
dome8tiqv£, afin que appriter - •
would have (set out) a little sooner, we might have diverted ourselves
partir tot*^ , nou$^
(very much). If I could have got my horse when I ordered it, I
heaucoup, avoir demander ,
mi(?ht have been ready as soon as you. I should have had it sooner,
pret « 49 . 41 ,
if my brother could have spared it. I wish my father had bought
se passer en '• ***
(the one) which you recommended to him. I wish you would sell
celui^ (o) «2i
him yours. I would have sold mine (long*^ ago), if I could have found
i«2 85 ^ Uy a long-temSf
any body who would have bought it. I will have one like yours.
108 semblahle au •*
If I had known that you wished to sell yours, I might have found
f voubir ,
somebody who would have bought it. You should have told me* so
95 ^54
then ; I might have bought it myself. I may perhaps find somebody
ahrs (fn) ».b. peut-etre ( kk) •»
* Ready is expressed in the word Jppreter. f We could not say Pun for the one,
t See p. UO and 132, the differeace between Savoxr and Conncutre, '"■
EXERCISE. 365
VERB.
RECAPITULATORY. ej?erc/«e on the foregoing rules
yet ^^. I wish you could. I could have sold it myself X'^ng ago.
encore, V'^' mi 70 ^ (m) if '9. Uy a long -terns,
if I could have done without it then. Can you do without it now?
■■* en alors, *** en
I think I can. My sisters wish you to come and spend an evening
with us. When will you come ? I can not tell. I will come as soon
as I can. You must bring your sister with you. Oh ! we can not
come both at the (same time). Somebody must stay at home. The
^^ A la foit* •* tester au logis.
house can not be left (to itselO* Come; you are rather too hard
*' *' laiaer ieule. Allans; unpeu sioere
upon her. She must have a little' amusement too. You should have
euvers *• un pen n.b. aussi,
brought her with you to-day. Why did you not bring her? I did
not know that you wanted*'* so much to see her, or else I would
avoir si grande envie , atttrement ,
have brought her. I will bring her the next time I come. Do.
* ^ y.B.
1 will^®. Did my sister tell you that I have been in the country ?
No, she did not?*. When did you go ? I think I saw you (at the)
K.B. y 7« Ml afS
beginning •of the week. You could^^ not see me this week, for
eoinmencement semaine, pouvoir , car
I went last" week. When did j^ou return? I returned this
70 7 838 S«A
afleruoon. Did you call upon our friends? I just*^ saw them,
••• seulement ,
as I was passing by the house. How were they ? They seemed
8of 134 841 paraiire
very well. Did you come (that way) (on purpose) ? Yes, I
en tres-bonne sant^, *^ par Id expres f ,
did?^ I wonder at your going there again so soon. Will you
V B. i*£tonner f retouimer y **. - si
never cease doing what you are desiced not^ to do? I should not
cesser •* •« dire*^ k.b-
find fault with your calling sometimes, when you happen to be
trouver mauvais % passer il vous arrive de —
* I'nrn; with thAtuouenme tfc. see note * p. S39. whicn is also applicable to wish,
■i Tnrn ; that you nave *^ gone there again so ioon. see 1G5 rale.
t Taro ; that yoa rhould call ^^ sometimes ^c. see 156 rule.
366 EXERCISE.
VBRB.
RECAPITULATORY excTcUe ou the foregoing nUes,
goings (that way), but I wonder at your goings there purpose! y, after
par Id, s*4tonner * y •* exprit
having promised me that you would not go again without asking me
'^ ne pint
leave. You are too*" fond of rambling; are you*" not? How
permiuion, - trop aimer d rader; n* ett-ce pas9 ^^
could I help it^? I was accused of neglecting 'people who have
i^empichtr en** •• nigSiger ■■•
been kind to me ; can I be blamed for endeavouring to justify
eu desbontis pour *• ; •* de chercher »
myself? I do not blame you for justifying yourself; I only wish you
we** da wnw**; !•* f
not to do things which may be disagreeable to your friends. Come,
• d£$agriahle ■• Ailons,
ladies, amuse yourselves with reading this pretty tale, instead of losing
mesdemoiselUSf *• ^" conte, au lieu
your time in playing. You should abstain from looking about you,
i^ahstenir autour de ^
whilst you are learning your lessons. That is not the way to
pendant que Ce n^est pas Ih moyen •
improve yourselves. You are very'" fond of scolding. What plea-
j>ei'fectionner wus •* - heaueoup aimer a grander.
sure can you have in vexing people so*"? You are always
chagriner "• ainsi k.b. f - iw
finding fault with every thing one does. I am quite tired with
trouver a redire d, tout ee (t) " *" ennuyi **
always hearing the same thing. ' If you paid attention to what you
*"* chose, faWe •*
are told, there would not be occasion for repeating it so oflea You
" , il hesmn de
never do things (at a proper time). How can I help it? I never
iw d propose Que faireX y**
know the (time of the day). You should have a watch. Yes; I
^heure qu*%l est. thontre. ;
ought to have a watch. I want*» a watch (very much). When
avoir besoin grand. ||
shall I have one? You shall have one as soon as you behave well.
en '• ^ te comporter
Will you have mine ? No, I do not like yours. It is an old one.
w , «• « vieilU -
I will have a new one, or I will have none. Then*<^ you must
en^ uneneuve, - en^* ^ Done
• Tarn ; that y<m have *" gone there purposely tfc. see 156 nde.
\ Tarn ; / onty wish that you do not things ifc. see note • p. 239.
i Help., in the sense of to aootd, is expressed hy Faire^ Eviter^ SmpScher^ never by Aider.
.JI^Tam ; / have great need of a watch, If Express iVane by Piuy with JVe before the verb- .
EXERCISE. 367
VERB.
REGAPXTUiiATORY exercUc on the foregobig rtUe»
wait ti!l"» you can buy one yourself. What will you have us do
tttendrtque en^^ (mj w.b. «» fair4
now? I would have you go and take a walk*" till dinner "time;
(nn) H'B. juiqu'au ' ;
and when you have (eaten your dinner), I would have you go to your
dine, prendrt -»
books. What ! so soon. Must we have no play ? No, you shall
« / ii tot. • jouerf
not play before*^" you have said your lessons. May we play then?
avant qu4 alors 9
Yes, you may play^ if you say them well. You should (g^t up)
, , M Itver
sooner ; then you would have plenty of time to play. If you would
*^ ; alort . tout U terns
have got up when I called you, you might have played as long as
te lever appeler , . ** bng-tems *"
you would. I wonder that the people %hom we expected are not come
*7» ^itonner «® attendre
yet'**. Is it^ not astonishing that they should keep us waiting so
en&re, v.s. 6tonnant faire nttendre si
long? They should not have promised, if they found that they
long-terns 7 promettre^ prevoir f
could not come. I might have asked somebody else. We might
pritr quelqu* autre personne,
have taken*" a walk before we sat at table. For the future I wilM^<
if-B. avant de nous mettre i avenir v.n.
have my orders punctually attended" to. You should not have relied
t exactement qu^on suive - compter
upon people you did not know. If you would have followed my advice,
•• (s) suivre avis,
this would not have happened. You see; we can not console our-
80 t88 arriver, ; nous^
selves for being deceived by our enemies^ and betrayed by our friends ;
de tromper par ennemis, trahir ;
and we are often satisfied with being so by ourselves. I have received
satisfaire '^ i«** (mj »•■• recevoir
the letters which you have written to me respecting the affair which
(o) *• au sujet de
I had proposed to you, and afler having read them attentively, I have
proposer (o) ** , ** avec attention,
found that, if I had undertaken it, I should have met with
reconnoitre , t entreprendre •*, trouver *®^
obstacles which I had not foreseen. I am very glad you have not'*.
privoir, bien % •" »•■•
* Express this leotence as if it were. Must we not ploff? f Sec note f p. 337 | See • p. 239.
368 EXERCISE
ADVERB.
183. Adverbs, in french as in english, are generally placed after
Adverbe^f^ en eomme - se placer
the verb, when the tense is simple, and between the auxiliary verb and
verbe, , entre auiiliiure^*
the participle, when it is compounded; I understand firench pretty
participe, •■ compo§6 ; entendre ^ as»ez
welP^, but I have not yet learned it long enough to speak it fluently.
Uien, WB. encore long'tems assei * ^'^^ ®* coulamment,
N. B. The adverb expressing some circumstance of the verb, must
quelque , deooir
be placed immediately afler the verb which it modifies ; so, instead
Me placer immidiatement ^' modifier ; t ainsi, au licit,
of saying ; You pronounce french very well. I wish to learn it (very
'** ; prononcer 7 tres
much.) You must take more' pains in future than you do. I will
fort, *^^ N.B. peine a Vavenir *^
do every thing that you have recommended to me carefully. Do you
tout ce que rwcommand^ (o) ^ soigneutement,
not go into the country to-morrow ? say ; You pronounce very well
d demain? dites;
french. I wish (very much) to learn it. You must take in future
7 fort *®' d ravenir
more pains than you do. I will do carefully every thing that you
have recommended to me. Do you not go to-morrow into the country?
(o) w d
184. Some adverbs may be placed in english either before or after
Quelques — se placer ou
the verb which they modify, but the french" adverbs which represent
, fran^is repi-^senter ^
them must always be placed, (agreeably to) the general® rule, after the
devoir $e placer, suivant — gin&raU regie,
verb, or between the auxiliary and the participle ; as, What is the
ou auxiliaire ^
reason that you so seldom come to see me ? (say, that you come so
raison $i rarement
seldom Sfc.) I sometimes think that you never will come again. You
quelquefoU *•• reoenir —
certainly have no reason to think so. I very seldom (go out,) and
eertainement sujet le ** rarement Mrtir,
when I go. my sisters generally come witn me, and I never can
sortir, erdinairement *® , ***
bring them so far as your*®' house ; but I very often think of you.
amener jusquechez »•»• ; «oo *•
* The adverb Astez^ like the other adrerbs, is always placed before the adjectire or adTerb which It
modifies : so say, enough long, f See note ^ p.Sil.
EXERCISE. 369
REMARKS ON THE ADVERBS.
185. How. How used to denote admiration is expressed by Que^
How, How employ^ designer - «*exprimer j^ar ^
and the adjective or adverb which follows how, must be placed afler
adjectif ^adverbe BOW, devoir - ie placer
the verb in flrench ; as, How long you have been ! How late you
en ; , long'tems tard
come ! How glad I am to see you ! How heartily I thank you !
aise de bon caur
How sweet these flowers smell ! How beautiful those roses are !
bon (bb) sentir ! (hb) !
In asking a question, how is expressed by comment to denote the
£n faire HOW - (ii) n:b. par ^7° dhigner
manner, and by combien to denote a quantity ; How shall we go ?
manieref quantiU;
How shall we carry our luggage? How shall we know where you are?
porter bagagef savoir oil
How many* people shall we be ? How much^ money have you got ?
N.B. 829 N.B. argent *'®
186. How LONa. When how long refers to the beginning of
How LONG. HOW LONG serapporter commencement '
time, it is expressed by combien, when it refers to the duration, it
7 , - C'U ^'^' >* dnrie,
is expressed by combien de terns ; and when it refers to the end, it
; fin,
is expressed by jusqiCa quand; as, How long have you been learn-
f 9
inff french ? or, how long is it"« since you learn french ?. How long
*** y a-t-il que •
do you intend to learn? How long will you abuse*** my patience ?
avoir ^^ dessein abuser de
187. How FAR. When how far is the nominative of a verb, it
How PAR. HOW PAR nominatif ,
is expressed by combien; and when it is its object, it is expressed
(\i)V.B. ; 17 ohjet,
by jusqu^ou ; as. How far is your house from here ? or how far is*« it
; , t y O't'tl
from here to your house? How far is Windsor from London? How
ici t «^« Londres?
far do you intend to go? How far shall we go to meet*^ you?
avoir dessein au-devant de
• These two ways of expression are rendered by the latter way in french. By this expression Have
been learning^ is meant that the person continues to learn ; so to express the same idea in french, you
must use the present of the verb, and sa^ ; Vous apprenez, not Vous avez appris, which would mean
that the person has ceased to learn. A(;:ain, How long have you been in Enjlandf may be expressed by
Combien de teats avex-vous ete en AngleterreT or by Combien y a-t-il que vous etes en Angleterre f The
former of these expressions meaning that the penson has left ]i!ng;land: the latter meaning th^t the per
fon is still in England. Learners are very apt lo confoond those two id(*a<« See note § p. 353.
\ These two ways of expresbion most be rendered by the latter way in French.
2 A
370 liXERClSE.
REMARKS ON THE ADVERBS.
188. However, mov^soever, before an adjective, a participle, or an
However, howsoever, *°* adjectif, participt
adverb, is expressed by ouelque, which requires Qfie after the adjec-
(idverbe, - t*esprimer* , demander
live, participle or adverb, and the following verb (in the) Subjunctive •
, qui suit ^ au suhjonctif;
However learned you are. However diligent she is.
savant
N. B. If the nominative ot the verb is a noun, it is generally
placed after the verb ; However learned your master is, &c. These
te placer* ; savant maitre ,
words follow the same rule as whatever, whatsoever, rule 117.
mot regie que whatever, whatsoever,
189. Quite, entirely, before an adjective or a participle, are
Quite, entirely, ^^ on , -
generally expressed by rout; as. My shoes are quite (worn out.) My
• ; , Soulier us4 ***.
boots are quite worn out. My mother is quite astonished (at it.)
botte honn^}^ cw".
N, B. When rout, in this sense, is followed by an adjective femi-
, sens, suivre *^
nine beginning with a consonant, melody requires that it should
qui commence par consonne, ^ demander
be"* of the same gender and number as the adjective ; My boots are
148 8 ^„g .
quite new. My sisters are quite tired*". They are quite ill.
f neuve» fatigui. mnlade,
NEGATIVE ADVERBS.
190. The negative expressions nb pas, jrc point, no, not ; Ne plus,
negative'* , 9 ffO, ffOT;
NO MORE, NOT ANY MORE ; Nc jamais, never ; ^e Guere, but little,
NO more, not any more; , never; , but little,
very little ; Ne NuUement, by no means, form only one negation ;
VERY little; , by no means, nefaire que ;
Ne is always placed before the verb, and pas, point, plus, jamais,
se placer • »• , , . . »
Guere, Nullement, like the other adverbs, are placed either after the
, , comme , - se placer* ou
verb, or between the auxiliary and the participle ; as, I do not like
, auxiliaire participe ; , aimer
• that man. I never found so much* deceit. He never keeps his word.
• ■ ^^ tant N.B. tromperie, tenir parole,
I know him but little. I will not deal any more with him.
fuire d'affaires **
^- ^ .1.1 ■ ■ -... . . ■ ■ , .
* See N. B, note (tt) page S33. f Note • page 24a
EXERCISE. 371
NEGATIVE ADYEABS.
N* B. If the verb which follows these negative expressions is In the
sutvre ** A
infinitive, the two negative words ^e pas, jye point, ye jamais, ae plus,
, n^gatif^ mot , , , ,
are generally placed together before the verb ; as, I would advise you
^'® se placer ensemble ** ; , conseiller
not to deal with that man. He is accused of never keeping
faire d*affaires * •* aectuer tenir
his word. I think you will do well not to trust*" him any more.
**^ faire vou$ fier d *'
191. Without a verb, no is expressed by Non, and not by iron pas ;
, NO - (ii) K.B. par , not ;
Do you not believe what he says ? No, I do not^® ; not that the thing
crolre '* , »•»• ; chose
\s^ impossible, but because it is not likely. Will you not speak to
soit , •• vraisemblable. (o)
him any more? No; not before T know whether that is true or not.
•* ; '^^ savoiT *** ■• vrai *
192. With the verb can expressed by saurais instead of puis, and
CAN eiprtW an lieu de t >
with WHY expressed by Que instead of pourquoi, not is expressed by
fVHY t , NOT - cii^w.B.
JVC only before the verb ; Why does he not do like other people f
seulement ; Que faire lesantres - ■•
Why does he not pay what he owes when he has money? He
Que payer ®* devoir •
spends his.money, and then he says that he can not pay other people
Vi ^ pills saurait ** - •»
I can not pay other people, if other people do not pay me.
N. B. We*** also^« generally suppress pas, point with the verbs
?».B. aussi ^•* supprimer ,
oser, to DAHE ; cesser, to cease, and with savoir, to know, when it
, to dare; , to CEASE, , to KNOW,
is followed by si, ou, Que, auand. Quel, combien, comment; I dare
suivi •"',,, , , , ; oser
not speak to her. She does not cease scolding*^ me. I dare not
(oj ** grander
(go out) for fear of displeasing her**. I do not know what to do.
sortir lui^ * faire,
(There are) I do not know how many* people at the door.
•*• combien n-b. «» ^
* At the end of a sentence, NOT xnnst be expressed by Non^ without Pas.
t The present tense of the verb CAN used negatively ^ may be expressed two ways :^
I can nut Je ne puis pas, more freqnently, Je ne sauraxs.
He can nof, // ne peut pas, // ne saurait^ fye.
WHY may also be expressed by Que or Povrquoi, In the following way :
Que ne venex-vous a terns t
or Poarqu(rf ne venex-vous pas a terns f Why do not yon come in time *
2 A 2
372 EXERCISE.
HEMARKS ON THE NEGATIVE ADVERBS.
193. Not afler the verb take care, prendre garde, is not expressed
Kor TAKE CARE, , - s'fiprimcr
in French, if we*** put the following verb in the infinitive, and it is
, K.B. »« a ^ ea ,
expressed by ive, if we*® put the following verb (in the) subjunctive ;
(ii) K.B. , K.B. M all ;
Take care not to spoil it. Take care that he does not spoil it. I
Prenez garde de • gdter
will take care not to let him (go out). I will take care that he does
• laiaser sortir.
not go out. Take care not to let yourself (be cheated) by those
• laitser vous^* tromper (bb)
people. Take care that those people do not cheat you.
194. The verb which, follows E7npecher, to hinder, to prevent,
suivre , to binder, to prevent,
may be expressed two ways ; either by the subjunctive preceded by
^7* - Cii) V.9. de deux tnanieres ; mi par j)ric6dS ■*
Nt, or by the infinitive without this particle ; I will hinder him from
, par (^) particule;
(going out). That will not prevent me from seeing him. I can hin-
sartir^^. (bb) »*
der you both^ from going out, and from seeing each other, if I choose.
v-B. ^ fxms voir **^ . , vouloir,
195. The verbs craindre, Avoir peur, jpprikender, to fear, to be
, to pear, to be
afraid ; the conjunctions de peur que, de craiide que, lest, for fear
afraid; , , LEST, FOR PEAR
that, require Ne before the verb which follows them, if we*® fear
that, demander , k»b. craindre
that the action expressed by that verb will happen"^; then the verb
expnmer ^*7 arriver ; f clnrs
has no" negation in english ; I (am afraid) sfjmebody has seen us".
K.B. en ; craindre ^^ •* "• vu **•
Let us not stay here for fear some misfortune should happen to us.
- - Tester *^' quelque **■ **
Go with that lady lest**" she should (lose her way). She is afraid
Aller de peur que s'Sgarer ""
■
that her mother should find her here. But observe that Ne is lefl out, if
**« "• observer — s'ometire,
• Prendre garde^ in this sense, meaning to Gttard from or against, if the negative NOT were ex-
pressed in french, it would be the same as if you said in english ; Guard from not spoiling it. As fur the
JVe which is used after Prendre garde^ Empecher^ Craindre, Avoir peur, fyc. when we put the following
verb in the snbjunctive, it seems to be the Ne or Quin which the Latins used in similar instances, and
which, without any apparent reason for it, has been introduced into the french laneaage.
t We fear that an action will happen, when we do not wish for that action ; and yrefear that it will
not happen, when we wish for it; so when I say ;
I am afraid it will rain, I mean that I do not wish for rain.
/ am afraid it will not rain, I mean that I wish that there should be rain
EXERCISE. 373
I
REMARKS ON THE NEGATIVE ADVERBS.
the \erb which follows craindre. Avoir peyr, Sfc. is in the infinitive;
, , &:c, a * ;
as, I was afraid of hurting^** you. I did not do it, for fear of dis •
, iw blesser "* faire , de peur de di-
pleasing^** youi mother. We were afraid of doing wrong,
Tplain ^^ mai.
If we*^ fear that the action expressed by the verb will not happen"®,
N.B. exprimer "7 see note t p. oT2,
the engiish verb is attended by a negation which must be expressed
anglais ^^ accompagn^ de il faiit — eiprimer
by the corresponding®* negation in french ; I am afraid nobody will
quiy correspond en ; *^^^ •'^
come. I am afraid they have not seen us. Let us not go further*^
14« 221 146 55 - - loin,
for fear we should not have time to (come back) for dinner.
818 » 148 7 revenir,
N. B. The verbs mer, to deny, and nouier, to doubt, attended
, to DENY, , to DOVBT,
by *a negation, the conjunction d Moins que, unless ; and si in the
de , , unless;
sense of d moins que, require also Ne before the verb which follows
, demander *°* siiivre
them ; I do not deny that I have been there sometimes. He does not
; ^^* y ** quclquefvis.
deny that he has asked your cousin. He does not doubt but he will
*■** cousine, que
obtain her. I have no" doubt but they will be married*** soon. I will
olttenir^*^ v»b, doute que "* n.d. is*
not (go out) unless**® 7t be fine. I will not go, unless you come with me.
sortir d, moins que **® ^® , *'" ^
196. It y a que, it is since; nepuis que, since, require jv^e before
, IT IS SINCE; , SINCE, «>«
the verb which follows them, when we*® wish to denote that there
, N.B. vouloir ^'^ designer
has not been any* action since the period (which we mention) ; It is
eu K«B. depuis piriode dont on fait metition ; *
long since I have met you. It is more than three months since I
t rencontrer ** plus *® mois t
saw you. How have you been*** since I had the pleasure to see you ?
iw a* . 185 837 se poster **« plaisir
But we^ should not use Ne, if we^ wished to denote that there has
K.B.- employer , »». vouloi'>* ***
* The reason of this difference is that the Eng^lish speak with reference to the Icut action that passed ,
the French, on the contrary, speak with reference to the time in which there hac not beenjony acfton, and
the idea is the same as the English would express by these words ; / have not met you fur this long time.
I have not seen you for more than three m'jnths.
t Observe thatSiiicff after II y a, is expressed by Q«eonly, not by Depuis que.
374 EXERCISE.
REMAEKS ON THE NEGATIVE ADVERBS
been an action ; as. It is a month since he is ^one. Have you seen
tu • J > • ^* '"^w t partir,
him since he is returned? He has been at home this fortnight.^
*•* au logis *^ quin&ejourt,
197. We®' also use the negative participle nc before the verb wiiich
k.'b. employer " particule
follows ^i^^re, OTHER ; Auirementf otherwise; These things are quite
, other; , OTHERWISE; " *®*
different from what you say. Do you never speak otherwise than
autres - que
you think? I know people who often act otherwise than they say.
N. B. NC is also used after the comparative adjective Meilleur, and
- s^employer comparatif^*
the adverbs plus, jnoinSf Mteux, see rule 47 ; and with several other
, , , regie ; plusieurs
words mentioned under their respective heads, viz. personne,
dont il est fait mention respectifs ^ chapitre, d savoir « ,
Qui que ce soit, rule 97 ; Rien, Quoi que ce soit, rule 99 ; Aucun,
, regie ; , ; •
rule 100 ; ivwZ, pas un, rule 101 ; si tun ni Vautre, rule 124.
198. But used in the sense of the adverb only, is expressed by
Bur employi tens only, - iexprimer par
Ne before the verb, and by Que after it ; We were but six people,
S06 ' 1. 64 . 140
or only six people^ at table. We drank but four bottles, or only
personnes
four bottles of wine. We were but a few miles, or only a few miles
bouteitle ' i40 , d qtielques milles
from (the place). We met nobody but a woman^ or only a woman
la rencontrer ,
199. But is sometimes used in the senise of a relative pronoun.
Bur - s^ employer relatif^ ,
and is then expressed by qui ne, which require the following verb
- alors il s'exprime ,
(in the) subjunctive ; as, (There is) no body but derives, or who does
au f , *** ^ retirer^
not derive some advantage from study. I have not found a man
quelqiie avantage ^^tude. ' trouver
but thinks so, or who does not think so. There is no man but
, dememe, **« personne
regrets the loss of time, or who does not regret the loss of time.
' , regretter perte tenu,
* See compound tensra of // y a, page 173. t See note f, page 373.
t Tarn; It is a fortnight since he is at home ; sec note * page 369.
exercisie:. 375
ADVERB.
RECiLPiTULATORY txercise on the foregoing rules,*
Now, I am ready. Let us (set out) immediately. Let us walk
A prisent, prt't, - - partir tout a Vhewn, •••
g^ently. (What is the use) of walking*** so fast? I came*" here to
doucement. Poiirqiioi t - marcher vite f ** *'•
enjoy a pleasant walk, not to tire myself. I have no more* desire
j'ouir •*■ agriabU ^ , *•* fatiguer me ** J h.b. envw
to tire myself than you have; only I (am afraid) that we shall
JIM** *' > craindre (bb^ k.b.
be^ there too late. We are never there in time. We generally come
arrioer trap y** d terns, arriver
either too soon or too late. It«* is very unpleasant to keep people
- tot ou N.B. d^sagrSable de fairs ■*
waiting § (in that way.) Do they live still in that house where
attendre aitui^^v.B. demeurer encore *^^
we saw them last? No, they have removed to another house
la demiere foii ? , *^ aller demeurer
a little further in the country. How far shall we go? How far
un p€u plus loin ^^
is it from our house*^? How long shall we stay? How you like to
K.B. rester
ask useless" questions ! Do you not know it as well as I do ? Tarke
faire inuiile • savoir *^ 43 ai _
care not to fall into this ditch. Take care lest this post falls upon
tomber foss4» que poteau
you. Do not go (so near) lest*** somebody should see yoo.
approcher tant de peur que ^ ^^
I only (am afraid) that something** bad should happen to you. Wifr
craindre (ec)mal **• arriver ^^ **
your cousin be there? I do not think he wilP**. He dares not
1" y»* "1 y'J^soit. oser
come near the house. He fears that tliey" would turn him out.
(approcher de) **• »•"• mettre dlaporte.
It is near two years since they" have (heard*?* from him.) la he not
••• pris de "® que n.b. repu de ses nouvelles.
returned yet from his journey? No, he is uot?^. It i« feared that
"* encore voyage f , '^
some misfortune bas^ happened to him. I (am afraid) he will never
quelque *" arriver ** craindre •**
return"*. I fear the report of hia death will (prove true.) Never
**• "1 bruit se verifier **•
• See note *, p. S8l. t Turn; fyhy to walk so fast f
X No more, meaning iVb longer^ is expressed by Ne before the yeib, and by Plus after ; bat wher
More is used as an adverb of quantity, meaning Ureater^ the negative Pas most be added to the sen-
tence, and we say Pas plus.
$ Tarn; To keep wuling iu that way people^ because Keep and Waiting expressing together onlY
mte idoh tiiey can not be separated
376 EXERCISE
ADVERB.
RECAPITULATORY cxcrcise oji the fovegoing rules,
believe such reports. I (dare say)*^ he is^*^ well enough, I do not
sroire de tels bruit je ne doute pas *** •
doubt but he will be here (very soon.) If you will come with me,
douter qu' »« bieiitSt, **♦ ,
we shall go and meet him. Go that way, and I will go this,
(nn) *^ par W, parici,
for fear*^' we dfhould miss*** him on the road. I long to see him.
de peur que perdre en - chemm» see p. 175.
It is long since I have seen him. I told you right. There be is^.
**• que ^^ bien. v.b.
So*** you are returned (at last). How happy I am to see you again
Vonc *®* etifiiu ravi revcir -
How have you been since I saw you? We (were afraid) you
a»7 ' «*x depuUque "• craindre *2i
were lost. I began to fear that we should never see"** you as:ain.
»*« perdre. »» u»
Why did you not write to us ? Why did you not let us know**® where
"« 18« N.B. oil
you were, and how you were ? I (was afraid***) you would be offended
at me. What! offended at you? How could you think so? How
«w •* / pouvoir le^
often have I told you how glad we were to see you, or to hear*^*
fJe fois t «* ' , entendre
from you? We were every day talking of you. We never met
tie vos nouvelles ? - touts les jours **' ** . *^'
with a traveller, without enquiring*** after you. You certainly have
'^^ voyageur, s'informer *^
always been (very kind) to me, and I sincerely thank you (for it.)
eu bien des bonth pour * , en **
How long is it since you lefl this country? How long have you
S4e f 13« S30
been absent ? How far have you been ? How long do you intend
absent f avoir dessein
to stop ? I have only been absent about two years, and I have not
resterf environ ,
been so far as you imagine. How fast the time goes ! Methinks^
• loin ** sHmaginer, vite passer II me semble
it is only the other day that we were at R. together. Are you goin£
ce **o
to leave us already ? Can not you stay a little longer ? It is so
qiiitter d^jd r ester plus long-temsf **•
long since we have had the pleasure of your company. I should like
que
* See note * page 368. f Tarn ; How many times fjfs. t See note f page 3G9.
EXERCISE. ;377
ADVERB.
RECAPITULATORY excrcise on the foregoing rules.
to stay (very much), but I am afraid my horse will not stand still.
beaucoupf 2*^ ^** rester tranquiUe.
(Take hold of) the bridle, Iest«« it should go^**. Take care no*
Tenir - bride, de psur que s*en alLer,* garde
to go (too near.) Take care that it does not kick you. Do not
en approcher trap, f fcijN.B. f rapper »
go (so near,) lest it should bite you. Would it not be .better
approcher tant, *^® mordre vaioir mieux
to put it into the stable ? It is not worth while. I can not stop.
■^^ icurie f Cela - en vabir la peine, rester.
Our fi lends want to go to the play to-night, and they will not go,
^^ comtdief «* , t,
unless I go with them. You perhaps can come with us. I would
*»« » peiiUitre «
go, if I was not afraid that it will be too late, when the play is over.
X, »*« , i« finie.
You need not stay till the end of the play. You may go as
avoir besoin de rester jusqu* a fin ^"^^ s^enaller* *^
soon as you like*^. Come ; (make up your mind) ; for, unless we
*■ vouloir. Allans ; ae di terminer ; imp. car, *^"
go immediately, I am almost sure we shall be too late to see the
partir tout d Vheure, presque •■* arriver ^'o
beginning of the play. Go ; I will follow you. Take care not to
commencement ; {| suivre
stop. Take care that he does not stop. We are just in time. Now,
iarriter. d, ,
what do you think of the players ? They are better than I thought.
eomidien f (1>) P* 72.
They have acted better than I expected. I hope you will come
jouer (b) p. 72. ""^ y revenir
again soon. I do not think I shall?^. I have but a short time to stay,
bieniot, "* KB. - peu de ^«® rester,
and have a (great many*) things to do. How impatient you seem
^ - beaucoupv-B. "»
to go ! Can not you stay (a few days lon<]:er ?) No, I can not. Now,
s^enaller* encore quelqui* jours f , 70 ^
I want to find my sister, and I do not know where to look for her.
I am afraid she is gone'". I am afraid she has not seen me. If you
Ml 146 pai-tir. «*A us 55
go (that way,) I do not doubt but you will find her. There are few •
par lUf que *** peu »•■
people here but know her. I think I see her. Yes ; here*^ she is.
» J» Ml ; H.B.
• See M. B. p. US. f See note • p. 303. t See note f p. 331. U See note ^ p. 813.
378 EXERCISE,
PREPOSITION.
200. The grreatest difficulty attending the prepositions, is, that
** qui accompagne , c*est,
they are not always expressed by the words which correspond to each
®^ - s*exprimer par • se cwrrespondre
other in**^ both languages; i.e» ' of, from, the corresponding
^^^ les deiix ; c^est'^'dire, op, prom, correspondant ^
preposition of which is dc, are sometimes expressed by 2 ; at, to,
*'^* , - ^** s'exprimer ; at, to,
the corresponding preposition of which is J, are sometimes expressed
'^'^ , - (iiju.n.
by Bt ; BY, FOR, sometimes expressed by i>e, and sometimes by i, &c.
; BY J FOR, ^^ exprimis . , , ^c,
which no rule can sufficiently explain ; therefore, see a list of these
ceque aucune\ ; ainsi, liste
words with the examples (annexed to them,) p. 247 and following.
exemples qui y sont joints, suivante,
^ 201. (There are) some verbs in english which require a preposition,
*** quelquest en dtmander ,
though the verbs which represent them in french do not admit"^ of
*^® r^prttauter «n admettre
any ; such are, look at, negarder ; ask for, oemander ; admit of.
en**; teU ^ look at, j ask for, ; aumit of,
Admetire, &c. see a list of these verbs and the examples^ pag^e 250.
202. In other instances, it«* is the reverse, and (some french verbs)
d^autres tas, n.b. contrair», U y a dei verbes frangais qui
will have^^* a preposition, though the english verbs will not admit
vouloir - , ^^^ "'
of any ; such are. Abuser de, to abuse ; s *Aper€evoir de^ to perceive ;
*°^ (p); , , to abuse; , to perceive;
Attenter d, to attempt^ &c. see the. examples, p. 250, and following.
, to attempt, 6^0, , , mivante.
203. In some instances, the preposition may (be placed) in english,
X , ^^ (se placer) ,
either^ before or afler the substantive which it governs ; but in french
016
206
substantif » •* rigir ;
the preposition must always (be placed) before its object ; Whom does
devoir son objet ; 77
this house belong to? What house are you speaking of? That house
^^ appartenir '* - '**
which we just*** passed by. It belongs to that gentleman's father
7« venir de passer •"' "* monsieur ■*
whom we are going to dine with. X know whom it belongs to.
7« . iM iy« diner, ?« ««
* Turn ; Of which the corresponding preposition is, &c.
I Afxun requires ne hefon the following verb. | S«e n^te f page S82.
EXERCISE. 379
PREPOSITION.
204. The prepositions must be repeated before every word which
devoir - 8erfy4ter(ii)n,n, iw
they govern ; Mr. A. has invited me to take a walk and dine with him.
•• r^gir ; inviter ** *«8n.b. «•
We shall walk into his park and gardens. We are going to France
818 a 155 8
and Germany. Do not go without calling'^ on me, or writing to me.
AUemagne, partir *•• , (o)
REMARKS ON THE PREPOSITIONS.
205. For. Before a period of time, for is expressed by oepuis^
For, p&riode • , for - s^exprimer (ii) w.b. ,
when we** wish to denote the beginning of the period, by pendant
N.B. vouloir *'*. disigner ,
or Durant, when we** wish to denote the duration, and by pour, when
, K.B. durSe, ,
we*® wish to denote the end; What dreadful"* weather it has been***
N.B. • ; w affreux temt il fait
for some time past. We have not had a (Bne day) for these
quelque temt - (jour de beau terns J -
three weeks. It has rained for two whole® days. If this weather
semaine. plu entier^
lasts, we*® shall not (be able) to get provisions for the winter.
durer, k.b. pouvoir ^"^ te procurer • > 'hiver,
206. Before. If before is used to denote time or order?,
BEFORE JtEFORE - t^employev (ii) n.b. i9» 7 ordre,
it is expressed by AvanU which is the opposite of Apres, after ;
" s^exprimer (iiJV'B. , opposi , after ;
I
If BEFORE is used to denote place, or in presence, it (is expressed) by
before ^Ueu, en , (ii) n.b.
oevant^ the opposite (of which?*) is Derriire, behind ; as. You shall
, opposi rfontK.B. f , behind; ,
not (go out) before dinner, because you have spoken before your turn.
tortir , tour
Do not walk*^ before me, stay behind. I want to arrive before you.
marcher , re&ter ***
(Walk in) or (go away), and do not stay so before the door.
Entrer s*en alUr, * ainsi
207. By. By used in the sense of near, is expressed by pres de
By, By employ^ near, - (ii) k b.
or d cSti de ; as. Come and sit by me. I would rather stand
; , (nn)voii8 asseoir *° aimer inieux me tenir
by the door. How can you sit by the iire (in such weather as this ?)
rester feu du terns qu*il fait f
* Obserre that wban FOR comes between two sentences, it cannot be expressed by any of the above
words, as it is not a preposition ; it is then a eonjunctum, and isexpressed by Car; as, I can not go with
yoo. for I am rery bosy ; Je ne ptU* pat oiler avec ootct, car t> tuis tret-^aire . See ^17 rale.
t Tarn; Of which the opposite u, ^p.
380 EXERCISE.
REMARKS ON THE PREPOSITIONS.
N. B. B^ is often followed (by the) words myself, thyself, him-
Br des mrsELPf thyself, hiM'
SELF, HERSELF, &c. to denote ALONE ; these words aie then*^ ex-
SELF, HERSELF, ^C. ^^O ALONE; - alOTS «'«r-
pressed in French by the adjective Seul ; as, I was by myself all the
•primer ( a )v.B. jpar > > ***
morning. Are you fond of being by yourself? What a pleasure
88* - aimer d "* aa 20 piaUir
(it is) to be by oneself. My sister can not*" be a moment by herself.
ily a a ^ saurait
SJOS. At, to. With verbs denoting being at or going to a
At, to, 1 quidhignent "* • d • 1** a
person's** house, at, to, are expressed by chez, and the word house,
de quelqu*un ^ , at, to^ - (ii)v.3, , house,
if expressed in english, is (left out) in french ; Will you come with me
il est exprimS , - s'omettre, (ii) n.b. • f *
to my mother's ? She is not at home ; She is at your sister's house.
elU}
(Then I must) go to my sistei^s, for I must see her. Perhaps
11 faut done que "^ , J ^^ Peut-etreque
she is not there now, for she had to call at a friend's house.
y" aprisent, t d *•«
N. B. If the word house, instead of being attended by a noun,
house, au lieu *" accompagn6 de ,
is attended by one of the possessive pronominal** articles my, thy,
de possessifs^ pronominaux MY, thy,
His, HER, OUR, YOUR, THEIR, the word HOUSE is also'*° (left out,)
his, her, our, your, their, house - aus$i (ii) n.b.
and the pronominal'® article is changed into a personal* pronoun,
pronominal - se changer en - personnel ,
viz. into Moi, toi, soi, Lui, eUb, nous, fous, eux, eUcs; Come to
c^esUdrdire en » ^ > » » > » > > Venir
my house. I will not go to your house. I will go to his. Let us go
to her house. She is not at home. She is at our house or at theirs.
elle
209. Of, FROM. With verbs denoting geing or coming from a
Of, from, ^ qui dhignent ^** "* de
person's" house, of, from, are expressed by de chez, and the word
qiielqu'un 7 oF, FROM, - (ii) n.b. par ,
HOUSE is (left out) in french ; I come from my sister's. You did
house - s'omettre (ii)v.B. ; ***
not find your mother there, for I saw her (going*** out) of your
trouver y**, J ^^ ** sortir
* Fat this verb in the injinitive, \ See cote * page 143. t See note * page 379.
EXERCISE. 381
REMARKS ON THE PREPOSITIONS.
brother^s house. I met'*' her comings from my grandmolher's.
rencontrer ^^ n.b. grand' mere,
N. B. If the word house, instead of being attended by a noun, is
HOUSE, au lieu ^** accompagne de ,
attended by the possessive pronominal article my, thy, his, her, &c.
possmif proTuminal Mr, THY, His, her, ^c.
The word house is also omitted, and the article is changed into a
HOUSE - ^^ i'omettre, -se changer en
personal pronoun, as above ; What do you want here ? (Cret out)
personnel , comme c»-4etsu$; . chercher Sortir
of my house. You come from our house, and I come from yours.
I met your father (coming*" out) of his house, and going'* to ours.
iM sortir v,B. , n.b.
210. From, with the verbs to go, to come, not from the house of
From, to co, to come, non maison
a person, but from the person himself, is expressed by de la part;
personne, meme - s^exprimer, par ,
Whom do you come from ? I come from your mother. Go from me
''7 venir
to my sister .i, and tell her that I will come and drink tea at her house
(Op.7'9. «•* (nn) • the'T
211. In, into. Before the proper names of persons and places.
In, into, propre 7iom personne ***/i>u,
IN, INTO, are expressed by Dans; There are great beauties in Thorn*
IN, INTO, - fti^N.B. ; «4« ^^oeaUtS
son. Are there (as many") inhabitants in Paris as in London?
*^ autant v.b. 'habitants que Jjondresl
N. B. In, before the proper name of a place, after a verb denoting resi-
In, , quid4signe '^de-
dence is expressed by J ; My brother is in Paris, and my sister in London,
meare -^ s*expr inter * ; ,
212. Before the proper names of countries after verbs which denote
propre pays ^
going or residing, in, into, are expressed by En; My father is in
aller^ demeurer,i IN, ^ into, - (HJv.b. ;
Russia, my brother in Switzerland, and my sister in France.
Ruuie, Suisse,
N. B. In other instances, in, into, before these names raay>^' be
Us autres cas, in, into, pouvoir -
expressed by Dans, with the article, or by sn, without an article ;
s'ejL primer par , , , " - ;
Are there as many* people"* in France as in Germany?
**• autant n.b. monJe que Allemagnel
* Se« note § page 356. f This verb must be in the iitfinitive in frencb.
382 EXERCISE.
REMARKS ON THE ^REPOSITIONS.
213. Before common names used^^ in a limited sense, i. e. which
eommun 7 employ^ limits sens,
require any of the signs called article, in» into are expressed by Dam;
•• signes , in, into - s^exprimer ;
Put this wine in a bottle. If you will be diligent, we will take
Mettre bouteille, *** , prendre
you in our partnership. Put these papers into that parcel. Put them
80ci4ti» papier C^^J paquet,
in the same order in which you found them. T never saw my papers
meme ordre ''• . *w i3«
jn such a confusion before. Let every thing be in the state it ought
telU » .848 107 ^tat (s) devoir
to be. (There must be) some order and economy in a house.
*7* Ilfaut Hconomie
214. But before the same common names used in a vague sense,
meme vague ,
in which sense they generally'"* do not require any* article, in, into,
ce ordinairement n.b. _ iff, tnro,
are expressed by eti; I must put this wine into bottles ; (i. e. bottle it)
(ii) K«B. ,• iM mettre ;
I am going to enter into partnership with my uncle. I will put these
15S 179 entrer sociiti oncle.
papers in parcels. Every thing here is in confusion. I will put
paquet. »<V i»*
every thing in order, if you will not put yourself in a passion.
107 ^ !*♦ vous ** - colere, ■
215. Speaking of time, in is expressed by Dans^ to denote the
Enparlant ^ , IN " s^exprimer , *?• designer
time afler which an action will be performed, and by £7i, to denote
7« - se faire, , 'T®
the time that will be employed in performing it; as. Do you think
** employer d faire •^
that I can leam french in six months ? You may'?* learn it in
*** 7fran^ait moisf pouvoir
less * time. I intend to begin in a month. I shall be with
moins n.b. avoir dessein ^*
you in an hour. I can walk there in less than half an hour
heure, aller y ** ** demi ^
216. Before nouns denoting any part of the day, in is not ex*
7 qui d^signent qttelque partie jour, is -
pressed in french, (nor is) on, before the days of the week ; I will
, non plus que on, iemaine ;
come and see you on sunday or monday. Will you come in the morn
Cnn) dimanche lundi maiii
ing or in the afternoon ? I will come on monday in the afternoon
apret-midi t
liXERCISK. 383
PREPOSITION.
RECAPITULATORY excrcise on the foregoing rules,*
I am very uneasy about this business Have you enquired about
inquiet ^^ affaire, ^^ ^s^inforiner
what people"® say (of it) ? Your friends are very angry at you. They
8* N.B. «!** fdch^ 58
laujrhed^88 ^^ what you desired** me to tell them. I do not wonder
temoqufir^ »* «« (Qp.79. sVtonn«r
AT that. They laugh at every thing. They blame you for your
{f>b) se moquer ^^ bldmer
rashness. They will not believe that you are sorry for what you
have done. They will get nothing by that. I neither care
gagner ^ (bb) **♦ se soucicr
FOR them, nor for what they say. I will punish them for their
* , a* punir
ingratitude. I will take my property (from them). I do not depend
oter bien t leur^ d^pendrt
UPON them. I need*" nothing. I am abundantly provided with
* avoir besoin "* abondamment pottrvu
every thing. I conjrratulate you upon your (good fortune.) I
^^ fHiciter bonheur,
think you have reason to be contented with your lot. Look** at
•*^ lieu content * sort, Hegarder
that woman. See how she laughs at us, She is waiting"* for us.
CbbJ comme serire *• - attendre ^^
Do not look at her, ' I am angry with her. I do not approve
*°^ fdchi - approuver
OF her behaviour. She imposes upon her friends, and she slanders
conduite, en tmposer , midire*^*
every body she knows. She has met with several misfortunes,
fouts ceux que 6prouver plusieurs disgrdce,
but she has not profited (by them.) I think she delights in mischief.
profiter t en '* ^^ se plaire faire le mal.
She tyrannizes over all her house, and does not mind*®* what the
tyranniser , 8*embarrasser
world says. She is very much like*®* her mother ; a haughty* im-
- ressembler ; hautain, im-
perious woman whom nobody could please. I wonder how you
pMeux(g) 7« «7 pouvoir p/aiVc*®*. s*^tonner que
trust*** her brother. He is not fit for (any thing). He has inherit-
sefier propre ** h^riter
ed a large estate, but that will not (be sufficient) for his expences.
*®* gro$ bien, suffire depense.
Do you remember what I told you one day? No, what is it?
se souvenir*^ , (y)
* See ftote * page 281. f The preposition b implied in this pronoiUi.
384 * . EXERCISE.
PREPOSITION.
RECAPITULATORY exercMc 071 the foregoing nttes.
That he would abuse*®* his fortune, and perish some day with misery
Cbb)v.B, abuser , ptrir qttelque tnisere,
unless*" somebody would provide*** for his wants. He will never
«i8 N.B. w pourvoir ' besoin,
give up«» gaming and drinking. He is .surrounded with flatterers
renancer jeu^ boisson^, entourS , fiafteur
who do nothing but sport with his credulity. He had promised
faire • sejouer crMuliU, **• promettre^*
his father that he would (give up) the company which displeases him,
but there is no trusting his promises. He never keeps them. He
$e fieri *"* tenir
knows he is despised by every body, but he does not care for
•** m^priser *®7 *** , se soucier
that. He does not care for any body. Tell him*^ that if he does
(bb) ^ (f) p. 79.
not alter**'* his conduct soon ***, he will be punished for his obstinacy.
changer - conduite bientotv.it.^ opinidtrSt^,
What a difference between him and your brother. This®* is a young
*® entre ** n.b.
man who pleases every body. Every body wishes him** well, and
*o* *P« . ({)ip.79.dubien,
rejoices AT his prosperity. All who know him, wish for his com-
se rejouir Touts ceux ,
pany. I met with him the other day at a friend's of mine, and I was
delighted with his conversation. I was struck with astonishment at
charmer frapper
seeing so young a man enjoying*** his reputation with (so much*)
*** w jouir^ tant n.b.
modesty ; sensible of praises, without seeming*** to wish for them,
; louangef paraitre *^ dhirer ,
and satisfied with the pleasure of having done his duty. His
satisfaire , *** devoir.
/fiends were transported with joy at seeing him covered with glory,
transports ^^ *** couvrir ' ,
and animated with the desire of pleasing*** them. He is a young
aniTMr *"* ieur.t •*
man for whom I feel a particular esteem. (Young as) he is, I would
particuXver^'^ Tout jeune que ,
trust*" him sooner than any body that I know. I would answer for
tefier (o) tout autre repondre
him as for myself.. I am much obliged to you for the good opinion
comme (^m)v.B. bien (o) (tj
• Express Nothing but by Ne before the verb, and Qw! after.
t The preposition is implied in this pronoan, X Tarn, One can not trtM^ ^d
5:xERCisE. 385
PREPOSITION.
RECAPiTULiiTORY cxercise on the foregoing rules.
you have of him, and I thank you (for it.) Look at those flowers.
, rermrcier ***«» flewr.
How beautiful they are! Do not touch** them^. They are not
iM beUB •« toucher y* •«
mine. If you wish for one, ask that gentleman for it No, indeed ;
•• , momieur t , vraiment ;
I will not ask him for any. I would rather look for one myself.
(f) p,79. ("p) aimer mieux en^ chercher (m)v.h»
I do not like to ask for flowers from a stranger. If he offered you
"» » a Stranger, t
one, would you not accept of it? Perhaps I might^^ I do not care
en 7' , N.B. te toucier
FOR flowers. I do not know what I was thinking of, when I men-
83 155 ^ parle*' dt
tioned flowers. I beg of you. Madam, that you will accept of this"*
'"• prier , , § n.b.
Sir, you are very kind. I am much oblifi:ed to you (for it.) Thi^
, avoir bien de la bonti, bien "® (o) • "e«.
gentleman has asked your sister a question, and she has not answered
II faire *•* ^^ , repondre*'^
him. Sister, why do not you answer that gentlenlan ? I beg the
lui,* « , «« II deinander
gentleman's pardon. I did not know that you were talking about
«5 ^ 155
me. I was thinking of something that (just occurred to my mind.)
*** •■ vient de me venir a - I* esprit.
What does he want of me? I do not know; ask him. He seems
" vouloir - " ; ••(f)p, 79.
(very much) taken up with you. I think he is (in love) with
trh occupy - «i amoureux
you. What ! in love with me ? You surely»«* do not mind what
certamement penser a ^
you say. I only said so in joke. He wants to know if you can
iM iM cela pour rire, *•*
spare** the book which you have promised him»« I can not spare it
se passer (Q p. 79.
208
now. I am using*" it myself. When I have done (with it,) (he shall
seservir^^ en^*(m^v.B. i« • 55 g„ ^
be very welcome to it.) What does he want to do with that
Vaura, s*i/ le veut.it ^ mo
The prepotttwt U implted in this pronoun. * See note | page 296.
I N ote t pare 337. § That you will accept, turn ; to accept. i| Note f page 807.
il iv" • •? pardoM to mon»ieur. •• Add here the prononn Le in french.
if >v« My in freofh Eire bun venu, to bo welcome, i. e. well receivrii, b-i re do vt say, Etre l*cn
venu 4 une chose, to be welcome to a thing.
2b
386 EXERCISE.
PaBPOSITION.
RECAPITULATORY exerche on the foregoing rules.
book ? It is not good for any thing. It is not fit 90r the use to
®* •• propre usage
which it is intended. I did not think of that, (or else) I would not
7« M destiner, , autrement
have asked you for it. Since you have (such a desire) (for it,) you
Puisque si grande eiwie • ** en,
may hare it, if you will accept of it. No, I thank you. I do not
178 144 ^
I >
warit*<> it now. It* was not for me; it" was for my sister who
avoir besoin en** n.i. wo . k.b.
wanted**^ to see it, and I (was afraid) of displeasing her, if I did not
avoir envie ^*® , craindre i** *" lui* f
ask you for it. I was afraid she would think^^ that I had not thought
«1 146 140
OF her, or that I was angry with her. I do not think she cares
1*0 fdcM «i sesouder
much (for it.) When do you (set out) upon your journey? I do not
• en partir pour wyag9 f
know yet. I intend to set out in about a month or six weeks.
encore. avoir dessein environ moii semaine.
What country do you go to ? I (am ignorant) of it yet. They** want
** ■** ignorer v.b. «»
to persuade my father to send me to Russia, but I will not go, if
permader^^ envoy er • Rtigsie, ,
V can help it. I would rather remain here, than live in a country,
iviter aimer mietix rester , (II) demexcrer *^ ,
and amongst a people whose manners do not suit**" mine. I should
parmi ■* maniire eonvenir **
like to go first to France, to see my brother who is in Paris;
^®* p)'emicrement • , *'* ;
then to go to Switzerland, from Switzerland to Italy and Greece, from
put& Suisse, Itatie Grhx,
Greec€ . to pass into Spain and Portugal, and then to return to
pdsser F^pagne , alors ■•* ,
£ngland. You could not do that in less tiian two years. I think
pouwir C^b) rnoins ** ■*'
I could do it in (twelve months.) I do not think you could>^. Do
unan. J mi jo lao
not you think that I oan^** go to Paris in four days ? I think you
V.B. Kl U 7«
may^*. I shall be there before you, for I shall set out either on M on-
poutoir. y** , J - Lun-
day or Tuesday. Will you set out in the morning or in the evejiing.
di Mardi. ■**
* The proposition Is impliei in this pronoun, f Note j p. 33?. t ^ote § p. S62. |i Note * p. 379
EXERCISE. 387
PREPOSITION.
BECAPiTULATORY exercise on the foregoing rules.
I intend to (set out) about twelve o'clock. I wish I could gw
avoir desisin ** partir vers *** *•* C^n.)
with you. I wish you?* could. I shall driuk t6a at your sisters
921 14S •
this afternoon. Shall you be there ? No, I am engaged at Mrs. B.'s.
apriirmidi, y ** ,
(There is) a ball at your aunt*s on Friday *". Will not you go ? I do
«« tante Fendredt. n.b. f 7®
not think"* I shall?* ; I have been ill for several days. I did not
"* N.B. • maUide ^^
rest for three days and three nights. Come and sit by the fire
reposer (nn)vous asseoir feu
Do not stand by the door. As it is cold, and you are not well, you
would be in danger of (catching cold.) I called at your house on
voiu enrhumer, **•
•Wednesday in the morning, but (there was) nobody in. I was not
Mercredi , «« »7 - i40
(far off.) I was at my uncle's. I had been by myself all the morn-
loin. oncle. *« «"
ing. I went into the fields to take a walk'<^ before dinner, and in
*7« v.B. dM, en
coming home, I called at my uncle's. He had some company at
''evenir au logis, *••
dinner, and he prevailed upon me to stay with him. . After dinner
, engager - rester
we played different games. Some played at cards, some at chess,
jouer d X jenx, •* % carie, ichea,
some at draughts, and some at (backgammon.) After tea we made
•* dames, trictrac, th6 '
a little concert. I played on the flutd, my (brother-in-law) played on
petit jou0r deX , beau-frere
the violin, my sister played on the harpsicord, and my cousin on the
vioUm, clavecin, cousine
harp ; and some ladies and gentlemen entertained us with several good
harpe; || rigaler de
songs. We parted at (twelve o'clock,) (very well) pleased with the
chanson, sesiparer *** , tres content
manner (in which) we had spent the evening. We shall meet
maniere dont i40 «7i »* s*auembler
again on Saturday evening""*, at our house, and have another concert*
encore Samedi au toir , » ^
• Sm note ( p. 355. f Se« note t p. 341.
t The verb P/oy, speaking of games, reqains d before the noon which foUows it ; speaking of {Mem-
wttnte, it reqairss 4§. il See note f page 282.
2 b2
^ •
388 EXERCISE.
coNJUNcnoirs.
The CoNJUBTCTiONS modify the verbs which follow ihein.
eaiKfonction modifier suicre
217. The following* conjanctions require the Terb which fbltowa
MMante ^^ demander
them in the indicative; Austi^ so, therefore; car, for. because;
d * indicatif; , so, therefore; , for^ because;
cepaidant, pourtanU yet, however; comme^ as, since; jraif, but;
, y r£r, HOWEVER; y AS, SINCE; , BUT;
Neanmoins, nevertheless; nU neither, nor; 011, either, or,
y nevertheless; , neither, nor; , either, or;
parce que, because ; puisque, sixce ; ouand, Lonque, when ; Quand,
, because; , since; , , when; ,
THOUGH, IF even; Qiie, that; si, if, whether.
though, if even; • , that; , if, whether.
21s. The followiup: conjnnctioDS require the verb which follows them
tuivant "*
(in the) subjunctive ; jfin que, pour que, that, to the end that ;
au Suhjonctif; , , THAT, TO THE END THAT-
d MOtJiM que, unless; Avant que, before; Bien que,. auoique, though,
, unless; , before ; , , though,
although ; en cos que, if, in case that ; de crainte que, de peur que,
although; , IP, IN CASE that; , ,
lest, foe fear that ; jtisqi^et ce que, till, until ; pourvu que,
LEST, for fear that; , TILL, UNTIL; ,
PROVIDED ; Que, that ; sans que, without ; soil que, whether.
provided; • , THAT ;^ , WITHOUT; , WHETHER.
219. When a conjunction gfoverns several verbs, it is expressed
regir plusieurs > ** - s^exprimer (ii) k.b,
before the first verb only, and aue is added to the other verbs, (with
ieulement, - x'ajouter (ii) k.b. ,
the same mood after it) as if the conjunction itself was repeated ;
iuivi du mime mode que elle-meme ^*^ r&piU ^^ ;
Since you are busy, and you can not come with me, I will ^o*
Puisque oeeupi, , vais\ m' en oiler. X
I will never forgave you, unless**' you come back (this way) and dine
pardonner j».b. revenir ^jxn* wi
with me. Bring my horse, that I may go now, and be back
•^ , afin que *^ partir , de retour
in time*'*. Let us go now, for fear it should raia*^', and we should
4 terns, - - partir , *** pleuvoir,
be wet"«. Though it is hot, and the sky is cloudy, I do not think it
mouilU, . ■*** chaud, del nuageux, *•'
will rain. Unless**' we go now, and (make haste,) we shall be wet
•*** w.B. partir , «e d^pecher,
• S«e note t page 8a5. t See note f pag« 313. I See.N. B. page 115.
EXERCISE. 389
CONJUNCTION.
220. When si, if, governs two verbs, instead of repeating si before
, IF, rfgir , ***
the second verb, we"® use 4iue (with the subjunctive after it,) though
, N.B. employer suivi du subjonctif ,
the verb which follows si is in the indicative ; If you walk so fast,
*^' <i ; marcher vite,
and will not wait for us, we will go back. If you go back, and
find nobody at home what will you do ? If the doors are locked,'^
^ au logis, fermd d clef,
and I can not (get in), I will go to the play. You might follow us, if
entrer , *^ »
you would walk a little faster, and you did not look so often behind you.
*** peu , derriere
221. The conjunction that is often omitted in english; as, I think
THAT ; , I ttink
/tc toill come ; for, J thirik that he will come ; but the correspouding»»
he will come; , I think that he will come; qui y correspond
conjunction must always be expressed in french ; Do you think wq
devoir - s^exprimer (iiJ^f^B, ;
shall arrive in time to-day ? I (am afraid) it will be rather late.
*** d aujourd'hui f eraindre "• "* un peu tard,
REMARKS ON THE CONJUNCTIONS.
222. Both, a conjunction of emphasis, is expressed by £^ when it
Both, •■ emphase, - (Hjv.jt. par ,
is followed by an adjective, and by Et or Tant, when it is followed by a
iuivi **• , par , **
substantive ; Our general is both prudent and courageous. Both in the
; couragettx,
cabinet and in the field. We shall beat our enemies both by sea and land.
armie, battre ennemi par *"
This conjunction is generally'^ omitted in french> in th^ familiar style.
— crdinairement s*omettre (ii) w.b« , familiei^ style,
223. Either, or, are generally expressed by ou ; Either that is
Either, or, - *** (ii) k.b. • «»
true or it is not. I will see you either in going or in (coming back.)
'* en revenir,
N. B. Either, followed by a noun, may also be expressed by
Either, •* 17a « (iijv.n.
soil; as. Either through fear or respect, he remained silent.
; , par *** garder '^silence*
224. Neither, nor, followed by a verb in the indicative or (in the)
Neither, nor, - too ^ an
subjunctive, are expressed neither by xvc, and nor by nI ne; I neithef
, - s'eiprincrX'ii )v.H» , ,\or ,
890 EXERCISE.
REMARKS ON THE CONJUNCTIONS.
know that man, nor want*<><* to^^° know him. I neither iove nor esteem
f avoir envie
him. I neither care for him» nor for all that he can say or do.
tf afler neither, nor, there is a verb in the infinitive, an adjective,
NEITHER, NOR, d , ,
a noun or a pronoun, neither is expressed by Ne before the verb, and
, NEITHER ''S*$iprimer(iiJv.B.par ,
by jrt after, and nor by Ni; as, He can neither read nor write. He
, NOR ; ,
is neither rich nor poor. He is useful neither to himself nor to others.
utile ' (m) K.B. aux autru.
225. Whether used in the sense of if, is expressed by sz, with
Whether employi if, (ii) n.b. ,
the following verb in the indicative ; Do you know whether we shall
qui suit "' h ;
have peace or war ? I want to know whether that news is true or
f ^ ••• fumvelU vrai
not. I must go and inquire whether there has been any news to-day.
non. *** (nn)s^ informer ■** eu •
Whether used in the sense of let, is expressed by que^ or soit qiu.
Whether let, - (ii) h-b. , ,
with the following verb (in the) subjunctive ; Whether, or, let that news
8S
au
be true or hot, I do not care. Whether we have peace or war, I will
non, s*en80ucier, ' ^ ,
go to France. I will go, whether you come with me or not.
• non,
226. Though, although, if even, followed by a conditional tense
, Thovgh, although, if efen, suivis »^ *•
are expressed by Quand; Though that news were true, I would go.
- (ii) N.B. • sei'ait , ?'
We would go, though we were sure that we should never^*® return. If
70 ^ serions * (nn) n.b. ««a
even I had said so, you ought not to have (taken advantage of it.)
auraii dit cela, ^^ vous en pr^valoir.
227 But for, if it were not for, if it had not been for,
But for, if it were not for, if it had not been for,
had it not been for, are generally expressed by sans ; But for your
HAD IT not been FORj - ^^ (H) »•». ;
father, or if it had not been for your father, I should have lost my
, , perdre
(law suit.) Had it not been for him, I should have been ruined. If
proces, , miner,
it- had not been for this gentleman, we should have been all losU^*,
momieurf perdre.
EXKRCISE. 391
CONJUNCTIONS.
RECAPITULATORY exevcm on the foregoing rules,*
As it is late, and you are not ready, I will go. Since they are
tard, pret, vais t m'«n alUr, Puisque
all gone, and you will not stop any longer, I will go too. Stay
partir^^, rester plus lontf'temSf + aussi, Attendre
till"® I am ready, that we may go together. You know we have a long
qiie , aftnqus *^ * ensemble.
way to go before we can stop. I do not think I can go with you
ekemin d faire, nous arriter, ***
now ; it is too late. I shall not go, unless^^^ you come with me. I have
; tard, t> *•*•
neither horse nor money to go. I can not go before my father has
170 i. 888
returned. If you have a mind to go, and you want*^®^ a horse, I
*•• •* envi£ ** X » avoir besoin de ,
will lend you mine. If you want money, and your father is not at
800
home, I will let you have whatever money (sj you want. You will
, donner - tout I* dant- **<>
be too late, unless**" you go immediately, and make all the hMe (sj
arriver , »•■• partir tout d Ckeure, diligence
you can. If your cou^n is there, and you h^tve an opportunity to
'*' cowme y **, ** occasion
speak to her, remember me to her. Is she not very handsome? Yes;
(0) , rappeler ^ A son souvenir, belief ;
she IS both rich and handsome; but I neither value beauty nor riches; I
; estimer ' ^ i
only value the qualities of the heart. Though she is amiable, and has a
!■* aimable.
* »
handsome fortune, I do not hear that any body proposes to marry
bean bien, apprendre personne se proposer ^^
her. There is no® time lost yet. ^^ Shall you (come back) this way, it'
■*• N.B. encore. v<B* revenir par ici,
it is fine, and it is not too late? I will call, if nothing detains
»*» beau terns, *«« , •• retenir
me, and you will promise to come and sup with me. But if it was
, - souper
too late, and I could*^® not come, what must I do? Will you go,
, pouvoir ^ 88 181 ^ ^
whether I call or not ? J do not know yet. Either you intend ^^Hq
passer encore, avoir dessein-
go, or you do not If you will (walk in) till the rain is over, and
$ , y *** entrer pluie pass^e^
the weather is clear, I will tell you whether I can go or not.
tmns ieiairci, % non.
• 8m aoto • page S81. f Note t page 313. X Note f paire 354.
\ T\an I BtMer you have intention to go Witre^ or you J^ve not it.
392 EXERCISE.
CONJUNCTION.
RECAPITULATORY cxerci'se on the foregoing rules,
1 will wait as long^ as you please'**, provided you come and bring
^ hngmtems vouloiVf pourvu que **•
your sister with you. If you go now, and ride gently, I think we
partir , alter doucementy
shall (be able) to overtake you. Do not set out before I call, or you
pouvoir atteindre partir *^ ,
hear*^* from me, for I shall not go unless'®* the weather is fine, and
apprendrede mesnouvelles,'* t n.b. **** >
my cousin conies with us. Do not you know whether he intends ^'^to
avoir dessein
go or not? No, I doT<> not, but I will send to inquire. If it had not
t , K'B* , t rnen informer,
been for him, we should have been back before now. What is it to
, de retour ce (sms, (y)
US whether he comes or not? Though he should not come with us, that
«« , (bb)
would not prevent us going'**. But if he should'** call, and you were
empecher t n.b. «•« ^
not at home, what must I say to him? Tell him that if he does not
aulogis, «* "I ^oj (f)p.79.
keep his word .better'*", and he disappoints people so, '** nobody
tcnir parole v.b.^ tromper **• ainsi, w »• ®^
will trust*" him. Do you know whether Mr. A, will be at*®* your'
sefier n.b.
house? I dare say he wilK^ He is a strange man. Whether he
II '«** y sera, n.b «3 drvle de
wins or loses, he is always the same. I wanted to speak to him the
gagner perdrCj ^^ (o)
other night, but he (went away) without my seeing'** him. If it
**** , i'en aller sans que **• • •
had not been for him, I should have won the game. Speak low for
, gagner par tie, has
fear somebody should hear'*' us, and they might report it to him.
*** 0/1 entendre , •^ - iw rapporter (o)
Unless'®* you are very attentive, and take your measures well'*, you will
N.B attentif, *^ mesure k^b.,
never succeed. You should watch both*** your cards and ""those of
r^ussir ^'* veiller sur n.b. carte sur (bb) det
other people. Neither grandeur nor riches can make men happy.
autres - «*• ' "^rioliesses **• ' heureux,
I would not have that place, though it were offered to me.
• Note ^ page 379. t Note t page 354. % Note f i^age 312.
I Dare say. Dure in this »ense cannot be rendered by Oser^ which expresses boldness, aydacity; 1
dare sat/ mnst be expressv'd by Je pense, Je m* Imagine, Je puis dire. Sans doutc,je ne doute pas or i»ome
similar expression. ' *^ 'ivirn, fFithout that I sftoiJd see him.
EXERCISE. 393
IDIOMS.
Pramucuous exercise on the idioms.
Good morning"*, sir. This is**® a fine morning. How do you do this
morning? I hope you are very well. Very well, §ir, I thank you. How
9ft5 Ml f
does all your family do ? How are your wife and children ? They are
841 Ul ' 8 S41
better, I thank you. And you ; how do you do ? Tolerably well for
(b) p. 72. , t ; «*^ PohsabUment
an fold man). Do not talk of being old yet >«■ ; it will be time enough
vieillard, parler vieux d^ji n.b. ; ^
twenty years hence. How old do you think I am*«^? I should
dans d'ici. «*i n-b.
take you to be"" between thirty and forty. I am"* near fifty. You
pour H'B. entre ai{«.| enP v.b, pres de
do not look so old. You look very well for your age. I am very glad you
think so. You have been in the country, (I understand.) Yes, I have^*,
***/«** d ** » dcequefentends. , »•».,
(i.e. been there), I am just returned thence. How do you like it ? I like
»** «»» (e)p.74. »» «» «
rt (very mucli). It is a beautiful country ; and the people are uncom-
beaucoup, •* ** » *^ «t-
monly civil and obliging. I am fond of industrious people. I like
tremement Migeant, IT **
those good country people* They look so cheerful and happy. I
« SjZ gal 40
am going there to-night; will you come with me? How lons^ do
»»4 »3 . 188
9 t
you intend '••to stop ? I will sleep there, and return in the morn-
avoirdessein resterf •• i/**(e)p.74, •" •*• **
in^. But you have no occasion to return so soon. You may*^'
besom *** ••* pouvoir
stay there all the morning. You may stay till twelve o'clock.
Tester «** i7» jusqu*a «•
Nay***, you may spend the whole day there, if you like. Our
me me, "^^ ''^ J/ *S vouloir*
people will be glad of your company. We will endeavour to ntake
■*• bien'aise tdcher **'
■
you as happy as we can. What time do you (go to bed)? We
*■ *• 14S ^ •■ heure se couche*'
^^•^ »>^h.*..«
* Tttrn; It is fine this momitg, t See note * paf^e S61.
) As we ba^e sereral words in freneo foi this«zpTes3ion, we rary them as often as we can ; see not*
*. page aSl. { Tnrn; JSnovgh Hme; see note * page 368.
I We always add A* to the namber in frenefa. ^ See note I page 896.
** The Terb SLEEP, so often nsed in engrlinh in the sense of LIE, is not expressed in freacb by Dormir
bat bjr Concher; bccanse a person may LIB abed, and not SLEEP.
894 EXERCISE,
IDIOMS,
Promiscuoits exercise on the idioms.
generally go about twelve o'clock. . If you do not like (o
ordtnair$ment te eoucher vers ^^
stop, you mayiT* return at night. It will be moon''* light, and the
rfster, pouvoir se5 ^ «m faire lune clair,
roads are very good. The weather is so fine, that it^ is a pity
chemin >" , k.b. - domturage
to remain (shut np) in a town. How does the country look? It
^^ tester renfemU *^ •*
looks'* very well, indeed. I never saw it look** better. Are the
• 188 J. ^
cro
ps°* promising^*? Very. If this weather lasts, there will be
ite promettre Beaucoup. durevj ■*•
abundance of (every thing). I should like to go (very well)*"*, but
i«7 X /or*, J K.B,
It is rather too far for a walk. Ton have no occasion to walk ; you
**• unpen pour || besoin || ;
may**" ride, if you will. You will ride"" my horse, I will ride that
pouwir II , w.B. , ■»
of my servant and he virill walk. If you would rather ride*" in the
domemquef || aimer mieux n.b.
carriage, it will be here (by and by) ; you may rid^ in it".
voiture, •* tantdt ; *^ v*^' dedans -
No, I would rather ride on horseback. Come ; the country air
, aimer mieux *•* • %5
will do you good. I hope it will'* ; for I am not well. What
•fcien. "^ (i e. dome some ;) •**
is the matter with you ? You look very well. I do not know
S81 ,853
i
how I look, but I am not well I am always cold. My feet are
quelle mine fai, "^ **• froid. **
always cold. The weather is so bad that I (am afraid) of going
**• craindre ***
out for fear of (catching cold). The weather has been very bad
de peur de m*enrhumer. •*•
lately. « Is*^ the weather always so bad in this country ? Is it
depuis quelque terns, ■** **•
always so damp and so cold ? It is never very warm. However,
humide ^^ chaud, Cependutit,
(it is to be expected) that it will be finer in a short time. The
il faut *7« egpirer *** - peu de
weather ought to be fine at this season ; it is near midsummer.
devoir ^^ ; K Iprts de la Saint'Jean*
* Turn ; It hcu a very fine appearance, f Turn ; / have never seen itjiner,
X See note t_paee SM. { S«e note tpage ^1.
I When WALETis tuedby opposition to RIDE, it is expressed by Aller 4 pied, and RIDE bjr Attmr^
tketat. T Turn ; fFe are near fc.
EXERCISE. 39S
IDIOMS,
PromiiCitous exercise on the idioms^
Our spring generally^"* comes late. We never have it here so eariy
printems ordinairemetit tard. *** de $i (bonne
as you "have it in your own country, (How many*) years have
heure) que - "* Combien n,b. «8»
you been in this country? I have been about two years, I did
♦ t environ
not think it was^^ so long^. li>o you like it? I like the people well
"• «« UmgUem. «» » asaez
enoug^h***, but I do not like the climate. It does not ag^ree with me ;
bieuy X N«B., climat, convenir - ** ;
the weather is so cold and so changeable. If I can not accustom myself
variabte. accoutumer me ^*
to it this year, I will not stay another year. You should walk out
•» «» , rester tss i7« asa a l*air
oftener than you do. I can not walk. I have hurt my foot. I amr
*7 faire, »' teblmer " pied.
afraid I have put my*^ ancle out of joint. Come; do not afBict
(nn) ^ M d^mettre cheville, - - § Allans ;
yourself; I dare say**' you will be well in (a few) days. Here is Mr. B.
*' ,* See Dp. 392. **» quelque$ ^
How long have you been in town ? I am just cpme. I have just
*•• H en ■** arriver, ***
alighted from my horse. Are you come to stop any time? No,
descendre - venir *''® rester quelque ,
I shall (go back) to-night (How many') times a week do you
s*en retoumer *^* h.b. »b la
come to town? Sometimes twice, sometimes three times. You
'' deuxfoitf ***
should come oflener. You should come every day. You should
>7« y 70 41 y 70 touts les jours,
bring your wife with you. I wish I could bring her; but we
•^ (nn) ;
can not well leave the house both (at the) same time. Sir, you are
quitter ^^ en , •*
wanted^. Who wants'^ me? A gentleman is in the street who
'k.b. k.b. Seet, p. 307. f
wants to speak to you. Tell him to (walk in). He says he can
•w (o) ** (f}p.79. entrer. ^^
not stop. Tell him that I will go and speak to him. Will you
iarriter. • •• - (o) ^
* Tarn, How nuuty years is it since*** you are tfc see note * page 969*
t Tarn, It t«s«o ahwt two years ; see note • page 369. % See note • page 368.
f The words (M of joints an all ezprassed hj the verb Dimettte,
I Tnm, How long is it since you are ^c. see note * page 369.
^ T-im. There is*** in the street a gentleman whoT^ 4fc •• Sec note f page 312,
396 EXERCISE.
IDIOMS.
Promiscuous exercise on the idioms.
excuse me whilst I go and see what that gentleman wants ? I am
pendant que C^nJ •* •«►
going to leave you. No ; Sit down ; Do not go yet ; do not go
"* quitter ; s*a$seoir; • encore; t*en alter*
before I return. I hope^^ you do not intend to leave us so soon.
«" t *^* "* avoir desaein »«• t6t.
Yes^ I must go ; but I will (call again) before I leave town. Take
, ^'^ s*en alle*'*; repaster avantdeCnn^ **•
this letter to my sister. Take the children .with you. If you can
not bring my sister, bring me the book which she has promised me.
Why did you not bring my sister? Why did you not bring me the
book which I desired^ you to bring ? I could not bring it ; she is
SM lac
using** it herself. My sister used*** to be very fond of reading. She
did not use to be so long in reading a book. I think she does not
857 long'temi »«» »** "»
use me well. I do not like to be used so. I suppose she has not
267 M ainsi, «** «i
had time. I want to see my father. Where is he? I want money.
7 860 ''
I want a wife. I want to be married. You want (so many») things
**** tant v.H.
at once, that 1 (am afraid)^** you will not geV*^ one half (of them.)
d la foiSf craindre '^^ auoir la mJUit en **
You arc yet too young to marry. You should get a little* money
encore *'® **^ *'• *?• un/jeu n.b.
first. >" You do not know what it costs to keep a house.
premiirement,vB. «» ilencouterd *^* -
I suppose*** you would like to keep a horse too. I dare say yon
*** **• aussi.
(would have no objection) to have a ride now and then I do noi
ne teriez patfdchi || de ^^^ de terns en term,
* See N. B. under Aller, page 116. f Turn ; Before I have^^ returned.
t See note | pag^ 326. f See note G pa^392.
I The W6rd Ohjecthnit m> frequently used in eng^Ush to denote thf t s perK>n does or does not assent to
what another person proposes, cannot be expressed in french hy Object on which means a 4ifficuUu
which we oppose to an argumemt or ^proposition in order to refute it. Yon ina«t use some other eqniv.i^
lent expression, agreeably to the idea which you wish to denote; such as, Votdoir, Aimer^ Eire fdehi
ie Sovcier, Avoir a redire^ Trouver a redire^ or such like ; as, "^ *
Have you hny objection to take a walk? VouleS'VOus faire, or Aimeriex-vous k faire, or fertezvout
. T 1 r- T [W« aw de faire unepronienHde?
No; I have ao o6;ec(toa to it; oni; Je Uvetut bten^etJt m m'« to^eie pas, or Comme voms vou-
What objection have yoa to that? Qu* avfx-vont a redire, or Que trowez-vout d redire a celc /
I hare no objection to it.* Je n*ai rien a y redire, or Je u'y troune rien J re.iirc.
EXERCISE. 397
IDIOMS
Promiscuous exercise on the idioms.
mind riding*^. I would sooner walk than ride. I can easily walk
le soueier •** aimer mieux **^ ***
twenty miles a>day, without being tired. Since you are such a
** , ^** Satiguer, Puisque si*
great walker, I wonder^ you do not come to see us oflener than
marcheur, s^itonner *7t 4i
you do. Every morning when the weather is fine, you should walk
♦7 Touts Ut que «*o , »7« ««»
(as far as) our*^' house ; we will give you some breakfast, and after
jusque w.B. ; d , apresque
you have"* rested yourself, you may either walk back or ride in our
«37 N.B. repoter vous **, i« .- f -
carriage, as (you like best). I intend to come and see you soon.*<"
voiture, comme Uvousplaira. •** T^'O bientot.XV'Ti'
Does your brother return to the university this year? I suppose^' he
265 833 SjM
will7<> ; but I do not think he will go?® for some time, for he is just
§N.B.; 2" "» de quelque , II «"
returned thence. Has he returned"* you the money which you had
"* en«*(e)p.74. n.b.
lent him'«? Yes, he has^o. I am glad (of it) ; for I
(0 p. 79. , v.B. i. e. returned it me. Men aise en^ ; H
(was afraid)*" he would never return** it you. He is so forgetful.
craimlre ^** n-b* sujet a ouhlier,
I heard that your sister was to^?* be married. She is married'*^. She
was married last week. She has married^ Mr. Goodhusband. They
137 158 SOI
were married at our church. It^ was my brother who married them.
»37 a 6glise. N.B.
How old is*» she? She is*" two and twenty. How old is** Mr. G. ?
W.B. W.B. ^ • • N.B.
He \'&^ about thirty. They are a young couple. I hope*" they are
N.B. envinm • • •* «t "*
happy. I hope they will be so long. She desired^* me to give her
■*^ le^ long*tems^ *** faire ses
iove to you. Please to"' let her know*** that I will call and
amities (o) ** Avoir la honti lui n.b. X* iC^^)
pay my respects to her at the first opportunity. How far is their*^' _
pour reiidre (o) ** d occMion, **• n.b.
* Pat Si after the article d, becan»e $i being here an adverb, can not be separated from the adtectire
irhich it modities.
** In Bnpakingof age, we always add An to the nninber in frencn.
S98 SXERCISB.
IDIOMS.
PromitCHous exercise on the idioms.
•lOUse from here ? About seven or eight miles. If is a (long way).
• Environ v » \ loin.
Yes, it* is rather far. I suppose"" they keep a coach. No, they hav€
, H.B.f unpeu bin, *** ■•» "»,
no* coach. They keep liorses. (How* many) servants do they keep ?
K.B. «•» K.B. domatiques *••
Let me see. There is the butler, a footman, a groom, a gardener,
Attendetqueje voie, *^ nuntrt tiThSul, iaquaisy paUfrenier, ,
a cook, and a chambei*" maid. These are many servants for such a
cuisiniere, chainbre i fille, Ce (e) n^
small family. They hope that in time it* will encrease. Was not
avec le terns augm§nt9r, **®
your country" house advertised to be sold? No; my father had
some thought of selling it, but he has altered his mind. He is going
quelque envie *** •*, changer - d* idie, ^**
to let his town** house, and live in the country (altogether^**.)
louer iilavUte , demeurerh entierement, h.b.
Trade? is so bad now, that he says he spends more than he gets.
Commerce mauvais , *^* *^^ *7 ^
How do, you spend your time in the country ? We generally*** spend
*** "^i J i ordinairement *^^
the mornings in^* walking*** and ***practisinfl^** music, and we spend the
M* «» itudier , «7i
evenings in reading and in amusing ourselves. (That is the way)
*•* "• *** amuur nous •* C est ainsi que
we generally spend ours. Does Mr. A. oflen call upon you ? Some-
184 . «7l M 184 184 IM
times, not often. Here**? he is. How do you do ? J hope you are
^ pas V.B, «4l »d^ ' Ml
(very well). Very well, I thank you. What is the matter with your
' bien. Tres , f «' d la
hand ? It is all bloody**. I was**> near breaking my neck in coming
*■ sanglant, ■** secasser ** cou en
here. How so ? My horse stumbled**^, and had like to have fallen
*** cela f faire un faux pas, *** - tomber
into a pit. I see it has **'hurt its" mouth. I hope*** you have not*
fosse, *** se faire mat *** *** «*'' k.b.
been hurt. Not much ; I was*** more* frightened than hurt. I
se faire mat. Pas beaucoup; *** M.B.peur demal**
hope*** you will do us the favour to dine with us. At what time do
grace ** •■ heure
* Tarn ; How fear it it from here to their house t f Yon miiy ezprem I( i«, by e*Mf, oriiga,
i See Note • page 197. { See note • pajfe 35F7.
I Use Le here instead of voire because vous sufficiently denotes whose time it it.
\ See note * page S61. ** Turn; / have had more fright than hurt.
EXERCISB 399
IDIOMS.
Promiscuous exercise on the idioms.
you dine ? We generally dine about four o'clock, I will avail myself of
*®* vers heures, proftter -
your invitation to enjoy the pleasure of your company a little lonffeE.
^70 jouir «» p*i* *?
Have you any objection to takd*" a short walk before dinner? No,
• H.». «>« Oui,t
none at all. Let us walk along this lane. Let us rather^^ go into
je le ifeux hitn,\ --*••/« long de ruelle, - - plutdt
that path. The late*^ rains we have had have made the fields very
sentier, dernier (s) **• ***
pleasant. Yes» the country looks quite beautiful now. I do not
agriahie. , "^ tout a fait belle
recollect having ever seen it finer. We must not go much further.
ie rappeler *** ^"^ lain **.
It is near our dinner time. We must walk towards home. Let us
jtr^ de I' . ** heure. ^'* ••• vers la maison,
make haste. Our people do not like to be (kept^** waiting). I see somebody
se dipicher, •*• •* faire attendre,
coming** to meet us. Sir, the cloth is laid. The dinner is (on the table.
».B. *78 ^ convert mis* servi,
Cotne, ladies and gentlemen, (walk in.) Sit down at table. Now, my
Allons, mesdames , entrer, se mettre d A prisent,
pretty neighbour, what do you choose to^i' eat? Shall I help you
ioLie voisine, souhaiter **®
to a little soup? It Jooks very good. I will thank you for two or three
un peu de soupe ? *• «m j
(spoonfuls) of it. And you, madam, what will you eat ? A bit of
cuiUerie en^ , , morceau
that fowl. What part do you like best ? A little of the breast. Shall
(bbj voUiille, partie le mieux f estomac,
I add some sauce (to** it ?) A little, if you please, and a little of the
ajouter y ^* , § ,
cauliflower You, sir, what shall I help you to ? A bit of the sirloin.
ckou-fleur , , mb aloyau.
With some gravy to it ? Yes, a little, and a potato. Will you have
jus ? - - , , pomme de terre,
the ^odness to pass the mustard (this way ?) (Give me" leave) to
bonti passer mouiarde par ici ? Permettre
heip you to a bit of this loin of veal. A very small bit. Do yoa like
*^ longe veau, petif
faf or lean ? A little of both. I will trouble you for a wing of that
ffras 7fnaigre? ** peine || aile (bb)
* See note | pa^^e 396.
I Th« word objection beinc; changed in the qvestioo, you maot also change th« >^ord8 of the answer^
il will thank yoa for, &c. tnrn ; / beg you to ^ive me two or three^ ^c.
Tarn ; If it pleases you^ because Plaire in this sense is alirays impersonal in'fraacli.
I wttl troible you for, fto. torn ; fFxll you take the trouble to give »#, ^c.
400 EXERCISE.
IDIOMS.
Promiscuous exercise o?i the idioms.
chicken. Shall I send you a little ham (ivith it?) No^ no ^ham; I will
voulet, envoyer jambon aiissi^f , pasv.n, ; •
eat a little" salad. It looks so nice. Pass the salad to that srentleman.
p«u*f.B. «« «33 ton» (bb)
to"
(Here is) an excellent hare; I would advise you to taste it. I thank you ;
**7 lUvre; conseiller gouter ;
I will eat no* hare. I will eat one half of this partridge. And I will eat
K.B. • la moiti£ Cm) •
a bit of the pheasant. Let me** send you a little of this pie. No, no
faisan. Permettre (kk) put^, , pas
more ; I ctfn not eat (any more). (Take away), and bring the dessert.
davantage^ ; t Desservivy "« dessert.
Now, what say you to a glass of wine ? I will take a glass with you.
, ^ de • ^Oprendre
Will you have 'red or white? White, if you please. And T will
^7* du rouge du blanc f , I (m) •
drink a glass of red. Ladies and gentlemen, your good health. We
, d, - sanii,
thank you; sir. Come, gentlemen, help the ladies ; help yourselves
, AllonSf% ^258 , j^^j^j vous-menes
and pass the bottle. How do you like this wine ? It is very good indeed.
Since , you like it, I hope you will make free (with it). It^'* is what
Puisqne , *** boire librement en ** nb. «*
vo hitend "®to do. (Here is) very fine fruit too. Have these fruits
i*i'oir dessein **' *® aussi, *^ ^®*
grown in your garden ? In the garden and in the houses. These
venir ^^ serre,
apricots are beautiful. What think you of the peaches and "nectarines
abricot tres'beau, "* britgnonf
They are tlie finest I have*** seen this year. Taste the pears and
Ce (s) »» "« Gouter
apples; they look very nice. These grapes are delicious. (Here is
; « »» 6on» dilicieus, «^7
a (pine apple) which is excellent. Permit me to help you to a slice
ananas -** tranche
'of it). I will thank you (for it), for I am very fond of pine apples.
'«»**. StreoUig^ «* «»", || %
Bring the sugar and some spoons. Come, gentlemen, (fill up) your
« § , » remplrr
glasses ; I will give you a toast. Let us drink the health of all good
; • un toste, - - boire d saiU6
• S«e note + page 312.
f More^ Any moret at the end of a sentence, are expressed by Davantage, % See | p. 399.
I When Come is used as it is here, to encourage, it is a kind of interjectton and is then expreiti^ed b}
Altons.
I See note ^ page 37?. ? See note S VH^ 3SG
EXERCISE 401
IDIOMS.
Promiscuous exercise on the idioms.
people of whatever country, colour, or religion they are. With all my heart.
8» 117 sao couUur, De, cxur.
An everlasting peace between all men. What a pity - that all men do not
^teimelU** paix entre '* ^ dommage
think SO. They would spare themselves many afflictions. We will drink
aitisi, ^pargner se ** {e) chagrin, see f p. 312,
this toast, to shew you that we join with you in your wishes,
totiCf m. '7® faire voir joindre * souhait,
but I hope you will excuse us from drinking any more. Since you will
■*' excuser *** t Fuisqu^
not drink^ would you like to take an excursion on the watef? We have
, faire tour
a fine river (close by)*", with good boats and good boatmen. I should
riviere toitt pret h.b., lo bateau " batelier,
like it (very much). And I too. Well, since: you all like it, we will
beaucoup, ^* atusi. Eh bien, ^ ,
go. Which do you like best sailing'** or rowing? I th1nk«
^^ ^ le mieux alter d la voile, aller d la rume f
sailing is the most pleasant. They make such a noise with their oars.
*** agrSable, tant de bruit rame.
Boatman, what do you ask an" hour for your boat? We generally
Batelier, combien par heure ' ^^
charge three shillings an hour. That is (too much.) I will sWe you
«^ ^ i« ce trap. - ^ ^ ^
half a crown. That is too little. I will not give you more. Well,
un petit ^ icu, Ce peu, f Kh bien,
come, I will not cheapen with you. Where shall we go ? I do not
see § p. 400. marchander Oil
mind ; (please yourself) (It is all the same to us.) Are you fond
sVn tmicier; otl vous voudres, § Cela nous est igal, || f
of ' bathinff*** ? Yes, very. The sea is not far off here. (It is) not
a se baignerf , beaucoup, mer loin d'ict. **•
above a mile and a half^ If you wish to bathe^ we will go?^ C^n you
pita de - demi, se baigner, • •
swim ? I can swim a little, but I do not like to (go out of my depth.)
nager 7 , perdre fond.
As for you, I know you can swim like a fish. Not quite ; but
Quant a , ^^ convne poisaon. Pas tout d fait ;
I can swim pretty well. It begins to be late. I (am afraid) the
assex se fai'^e tard, craindre ^^
ladies will (catch cold**^). We will igo back,) if you please. Yes,
*•* s*enrhumer, s*en fetoumer, vouloir, ,
W0 •
* fFejoin with you inyowr withes^ txim ; fFejoin our wishes to yours. t See note f page 400.
X Pat this adjective afier the verb in french. fi Nor, Plaiiez-vous, which would express q^iit
different idea. U Not, // est le mime a nous^ which ii not m french expression,
^ Se« note 1 page 3S&. ** See note f page 354.
402 £X£RCIS£.
IDIOMS.
PTOniiacuow exbrcisb 07i the idioms.
X think it is time. We had a very agreeable sail, had we
^^ilen^^est ^^ «« promenade en bateau, *■»
not? Very agreeable indeed. I will procure you that diversion as oflen
procurer amiLsement **
as you will favour me with your company. We are (very much)
^ accorder le plaisir de bien -
obliged to you, sir; and we wish you a good night***. Good night,
ladies; I wish you a pleasant walk. Mr. M. you used to be very
18 ; agr^ble »7 fort
fond of music ; do you ever (make use) of your violin now ? I use
• musique; jamais sesermr viobn "^
it sometimes ; very seldom. Since you do not use it, I will be obliged
; ' rarement, Puisque **' >
to you, if you will let me have it, till*^® I have got one made. I
Co) , prSte^ - , jtisqu* d ce que ^^
do not think you will (be able"*) to use it ; the strings are all broken.
•** potivoir **' «»"; corde *•'
T will get them mended. I will get new ones put (to it.)' Who
*** raccommoder, *^ de neuves en *• , mettre y **
made it you? A (man of the name) of Fiddle. When you see^*^ him, I
186 65 59 Un nommi - ' k.b. ,
beg you will desire him to make me"* one (like it.) (How much) did
t *** m*en'f^un semblable, Combien *••
he charge you (for it?) He charged"* me twenty guineas. He charged
87* gn «7» «7«
you (too much.) He did not use me well. If I were in your place, I
trop. - IM 257 ^ a ,
would get one made in Paris. You would get it' better and cheaper.
^^ d avoir (b)p.72. it meiUeur marcM*
I suppose*" you do not intend to^®* return home to night. Yes, I
■*♦ avoir destein *** chez vous "^ ,
do*^. You will drink a cup of tea before you go. I
K.B. t. e, intend to return, § \\ e'en allerm
can not stay. Our people will be waiting for me. They will be anxious
reste"* **• *** *** ** inquiBt
,0 hear from me. I long to see how they are. I have not heard from
«7» see LONG p. 175. **^ ^^
them for these three days. The tea will be ready, just pow. Get the
^ tout de mite, Appriter
tea ready as fast as you can'**. Come near the table. Shall I bring the
• •48 48 K.B V* «74
yerb Appriter
EXERCISE. 403
Promiacuotts exercise on the idioms^
table nearer to you? It will do very well where it is. Bring the
tea, and take«w these children out of the room. Is there no coffee ?
L '846
, emmener nor$
Yes ; there is both«» tea and coffee. Which will you have ? I will
; «*« K.B. » » Duquel ^7* - *
drink a cup of coffee. Eat a little" bread and butter. Is your coffee
I K.B. ^'*
sweet enough ? Yes, it is very pleasant. You will drink another cup ;
titcri see ♦ p. 368. , «* dgr^able. t »*
will you not? No, no more, I thank you. Now I must go.
*M , p« davawtage, 2 present '"^ seeN.B.p.iw,
ff you will come with me, I will take it kindly of you. Yes, I will'®;
Bring me my horse. Bring me my whip and "spurs. (There is) your
«M «• fouet ^perons. ^
whip, and (here are) your spurs. They are not right. What is the
«*7 bien.
matter with them ? You find fault with (every thing.) Can not you
SH 178 107
do without spurs ? No, I can not. I want to return as fast as I can^^,
7* 880 MS 48 43 k.B.
to go and meet a friend of mine who is coming to spend (a few) days
.70 ^„„J 878 87 V5i 178 871 quelqUM
at*^' our house. It will be too late ; will it not ? I am afraid it will?^
K.B. » "* 1 "•*•
I never can (get ready) in time. In vain I tell these people to keep
s*appriter d ^ dire H «» tenir
always ready the things which I want, they will not do it. Whatever
prit^ dont «»® , vouloir ^
1 may say or do, they v/\W* have every thing their (own way.) They
, vmiloir faire ^^ d leur tfte,
make me very unhappy. If I were*** you, I would tarn them
•*• IT quedevoiu, mettre
away. What will you have*?* one do? One can not do without
iL la parte. k.b. w faireJ ^ ^
somebody, and it is very unpleasant to be alwavs changing^^ people.
•* , ditagriahU - changer de ***
True ; but I would not keep people who would not attend to my
Cela est vral ; garder » 84»
orders. Come; do not mind them. They are all alike.
AlUms; f aire attention i ^ - *'^ seressembUr
Happy they who can do without them.
Heureux •• ** en.
* See note f page 313. f See note { page 355. t See note * page 334.
{ Instead of repeating the verb here, yoa might say, ouiyje le veu» bien.
i Instead of repeating / am afraid it will be too late ; vou may say: je le crains^ orje crains qu'oal
i[ See note f page 337. ** Pat this adjective after the rerb in french.
2c2
404 EXERCISE.
Promiscuous exercise on all the rules.
It having been represented to the author that the utility of this work might be
increased by lengthening the exercise, hCy in consequence, has added the following
amusing little novel, which is full of the most essential ruleSf especially on the
vovuSf PRONOUNS, and verbs.
BATHMENDI, an Eastern TaU.
Under the reign of a king of Persia whose^B name I have forgotten,
• Pene ».«. ,
a merchant of Balsora was ruined by bad speculations. He collected
'■^ *• entreprise, [reeueillit
the wreck of his fortune, and retired to the (remotest part) of the
debris plur. , te retirer fond
province of Kousistan. There he bought a small country house and
a field which he cultivated very badly, because he was always think
' labourer mal, ***
ing of the time. when he had something more pleasant to (attend to.)
■* que **• * (ee) agr^able^ et Voccuper^
Grief shortened the days of this merchant : feeling himself near his
dbriger : ** pris de
end, he called to i him four sons that he had, aud addressed them
^ aupresde *• *** , ^parler leur
(in these words) ; My dear children, I have no other property to leave
aimi ; , f bien *••
you but this house, and the knowledge of a secret which I was*"
** emjiaistancs « *■• di
not to reveal to you till now. In the time of my opulence, I had
t ^^ (o) que "• opulence^ ^^
for a friend the genie Alzim. He promised me to take care of you
- avoir
when I should be no more, and to divide a treasure amongst you.
i»o J ^ partager § •*
This genie lives a few miles hence, in the great forest of Kom. Go
d quelques d*ici,
to. him, ask him for that treasure, but (take care) not to believe . . .
I ** , f te garder ^*
Death did not allow him to finish. The four sons of the merchant
permettre lui'^ achever,
after having bewailed and buried their father, went to the forest of Kom.
>** pleurer enterrer ,
They inquired for the residence of the genie Alzim. They had no trouble
i*informer ds demeure peine
* See note f page 981. f Express No, Not, by Ne onlf, beeaa«e Q*e which eomee alter the
T«rb tinpplies the place of Pas, X fVhen I thould be no more, majr b« expressed hf apres moi,
{ Leave oat thU preposition in french. | Express to bjr the verb trower* ^ See note 9 page 39G
EXERCISE. 405
Promiscilous exercise 07i all the rules.
to find it. Alzim was known to the whole country : he received*"
i6» «8 140 ' ^88 tout «» ; acctieiUir
kindly all those who came to see him, he listened to their complaints,
avec bonti *7i ^ ^couter - plainte,
consoled them, lent them money, when they (were in want) (of it) ; but
**• , "* 5 avoir besoin en**;
these favours were on a condition; (they were) to follow blindly the advice
bienfait d ; iifallait *^ cotueil
which he gave them ; this was his whim ; No one was admitted into
- ; ce manie ; Nul *'^ receooir
his palace till he had taken an oath (of it). This oath did not
'avantde(nn) avoir fait le serment en**.
alarm the three eldest sons of the merchant ; the fourth, whose (name
effrayer aini m ' • , qui te nom"
was) Tai, found this ceremony ridiculous. However he wished to
tner , Cependant vouUrir
(go in) and receive the treasure : he then^^ swore like his brothers ; but
entrer : done eomme ;
reflecting (on the) dangerous consequences of this indiscreet oath, (calling
aux * • , urap-
to niind) that his father, who was in the habit of visiting this palace.
peler avoir *• — coutume - *** ,
had passed his life in committing blunders, he wished without being
iw faire de$ sottises^ »»*
a perjurer, to secure himself from all danger ; and whilst they^ were
, mettre d Vabri ** de ; h.b.
conducting them to the genie, he stopped his ears with scented
conduire^^ vers , toucher odorifh'anU^
wax. (Having taken) this precaution^ he prostrated himself before the
• Jduni de , prostemer ** **
throne of Alzim. Alzim bid the four sons of his ancient friend to
faire f ancien • -
rise, embraced them, and ordered a large chest filled with daricks to
^-eleverf, , faire X grand coffre de darique§ -
(be brought). Here, said he, is the treasure which I have designed for
apporterX **' > » **' destiner -
you. I am going to divide it amongst you, and then I will tell each
** partager — ** , ensuiu dire^ *^
of you the road he must follow to be perfectly happy. Tai did not
(sj devoir prendre ""^
hear what the genie said, but he observed him attentively, and saw
* Pat this adjective before the nonn. See note fi) page 199.
f The two rerbe/a/re and retever most come together, because /atVtf here means to cause; he did not
caase the foar sons, bnt he eauted to rise,
t Faire and apporter mast come together ; see not« ^ above. { Small pieces of gold.
I Th< action not being momentary, bat having been continued, this verb should De in the imperfect.
J
406 EXERCISE.
Promiscuous exercise on all the rules.
in his eyes, and on his countenance an air of cunning and of mangw
, visage- finesse
nity ^ich gave him much uneasiness. However he received with
inquUtvde,
gratitude his share of the treasure. Alzim, after having thus enriched
part , ^** ainsi
them, assumed an affectionate tone, and said to them; my dear children,
*' , prendre affectueux " Co J ** ; ,
your good or bad destiny depends upon your meeting'" sooner or later
• tenir d ce que vous rencontriez *^
with a certain being called Bathmendi, of whom every body speaks,
»» etre n<mm4 , ^^ ,
but whom very few" people know. The wretched mortals seek him
N.B. <* malheuretut* hutnains
all (in the dark). "*** I, who love you, will whisper to each of you
d tdtons, (m) , t dire d, Voreille de ^^
where he will (be able) to find him. At these words, Alzim took aside
pouvoir ^y* , en particulier
Bekir the eldest of the four brothers. My son, said he to him, you are
bom with courage, and have (a great deal) of ability for war; the king of
• , ^ beaucoup talents ^ ;
Persia has just sent an army against the Turks; join that army;
Terse *** Turc ; ;
it is in the camp of the Persians that you will find Bathmendi.
ce Terse
Bekir thanked the genie^ and (was quite impatient) to (set out.)
g , - dijH 185 hriiler }| de parHr,
Alzim beckoned to the second son to (come near) ; it was Mesrou.
faire signe "® approcher ; ee
Tou have sense', said he to him, some address and great aptness for>7o
$ esprit N.B., , ^^ dispositions n.b
lying ; take the road to Ispahan ; it is at court that you must look
; chemin de ; ce ^ ' devoir
for Bathmendi. He then called the third brother who (was named) Sad-
*"! 184 q^i s'appeler
der: You, said he to him, were gifted with a lively and fertile
§ , (^)t ^^ doner de vive"" ficonde
imagination; You see objects not as they are, but as you wish
; ^ , voiiloir
them'^* to be ; You have often genius, and not always common sense ;
N.B. • ; • , . W 7
* — ■ — .^ I I III ■ I . ■
• Put^this adjective before the noun. ^ f See note f page 318.
t Vaxne not le plus aine, b^canse nine means eldest.
§ In familiar tales and in familiar conversation^ the French gpenerally use the seconi person singuhr
instead of the second person plural'
I Pnt this veii) in X^i^ present tense. The French often use the present instead of the perfisei m Bar.
rations, to show the suddenness of the action, or to call the attention of the hearer or reader more parti*
CTilarljr to it.
EXERCISE. 407
PromiBcuoiu exercise on all the rulf.s%
You will be a poet. Take the way to Agra ; it is amongst the wits
^ ehemin de ; ee beaux etpriu
and the fine ladies of that city, that you will find BathmendL Tal
(bbj
advanced in his turn ; and thanks to the wax"^ balls, he did not hear
s'avancer d ; grdce boule,
a word of what Alzim said to him. It has been known since that
Co) *^ iavoir
he had advised him to turn dervis. The four brothers, afler having
lui^* sefaire derviche, , ***
thanked the beneficent genie, returned to their home. The three eldest
bienfaisant demeure,
thought of nothing but Bathmendi. Tai unstopped his ears, heard them
river d ** ^* dSboucher
arran^ng their departure, and proposing to sell their small house to the
first (person that should offer), (in order to) divide the amount (of it.)
offrant , ^''^ partager prix en**
Tai' asked to be the purchaser. He got»<> the house and field valued,
acquireur. faire t estimer t
paid with his gold the share that came to each of his brothers, wished
de part 7* revenir ^®' ,
them every prosperity, embraced them tenderly, and remained alone
toutessortes de , , rester tout seul
in the paternal house. It was then that he (set about) executing a project
» w Ce ^^ alors s'occuper de ***
which had for a long while been the object of his thoughts. He was
auqv^l ilpemaitdepuis " terns t
(in love) with the young Amine, the daughter of a neighbouring farmer.
amoureux de , ^ son vtnsin ^ laboureur.
Amine was handsome and prudent She had the management of her
sage, soin
father^s house, and asked of God only two things ; the first was that her
■* mhiage, d ; -
father should^^ live long ; the second that she might become the wife of
^*° Umg»tems; - - - de J femme
Tai. Her wishes «vere granted. Tal asked for her and obtained her hand.
^^ exaucer. ^^
The father of Amine came to live with his (son in law), and taught
demeurer che% gevdre , apprendre
him the art of making the earth yield all that it can give to those
*•• faire ^ «L la rendre || ee que •*
* Expreu Nothing by Ne onl^, because que which comes after, expresses nothing but,
f The ti70 verbs /atVtf and estimer mnst come together.
i Mad been the object of hit thoughts is all expressed by the verb penser,
. { Pat this Terb in the infinltire. | Faire and rendre must come togeUier before d In terre; iot
he did not wuihe the earth% but he made or caused to yield
408 EXERCISE.
Promiscuous exercise on all the rules.
who cultivate it. The field doubled in value ; and as he was laborious,
^ de valeur; comme ,
and his wife economical, each jear encreased their revenue. Amine
4conome, *®* augmenter
had many* children. Children who ruin the rich idle people of towns,
W» K.B. 7 oisif 8» 7 ^
enrich the (husbandman). At the end of twelve years, TaT, the
laboureur, bout , ^
father of ten pretty children, the husband of a good and virtuous
wife, master of several slaves, and possessor of two flocks, was the
, plutieurs , ,
happiest farmer in Kousistan. Meanwhile his three brothers were
^ m. Cependant
running after Bathroendi. Bekir had^^* arrived at the camp of the
155 t88
Persians. He presented himself to the grand vizier, and asked to
Perse, ** visir,
serve in the corps that was the most exposed. His appearance, his
•• figure,
willingness pleased the vizier who admitted him into a troop of horse.
bonne volont^ **■ cavalerie.
A few" days afler, a bloody battle (was fought.) Bekir performed
H'B. sanglant se dontier, faire
wonders, saved the life of hfs general, and took with his own hand
prodige, it , d« —
the general of the enemy. The praises of Bekir resounded every where,
celuii retentir % ,
and the vizier (out of gratitude) raised his deliverer to the rank of a
reconnaissanty Clever lib^teur grade —
general officer. Alzim was right, said Bekir to himself; it is here
that fortune awaited me ; every thing shews that I am going to meet
7 attendre^^ ; ^^ annoticer
with Bathmendi. The glory of Bekir, and especially his preferment,
*•* , surtout ilhatum,
excited the envy and the murmurs of all the satraps. Bekir unhappy
i
by his very success, lived alone, always on his guard, and exposed
mhM II , , I ,
every moment to receive an affront. He regretted the time when he
<2 tout outrage* ou
was only a common soldier, and was waiting with impatience for the
T - simple , *'
* See note * page 826. t Insteftd of repeating the nonn, the French would here nse a prontmiu
i Les louanges de Bekir retentirent partout would be french ; bat, TovA retentit des lottanges de
Bekir would be better.
I Perbian nobleman. 1 Make this word plurai in french. *{[ See note * pag« 375.
EXERCISE. 409
Promiscuous exercise on all the rules.
end of the war,' when the Turks reinforced by fresh" troops and led**'
/ quand *'7 nouvelle* guider
by a new general, came and attacked the division which Bekir
nouveau* ^ (nnj (^)
commanded. Tliis was an opportunity which the satraps of the army
Ce occasion ^
(had long been waiting'*" for.) They used a hundred times more'
- attendaient ^^ depuis hng-4ems, employer ^ v.a.
skill to get their commander beaten, than they had showed in all their
««>t ch^ battref en7f>
lives to (avoid being) beaten themselves. The brave Bekir forsaken,
X pour n*itrepas ^* eux-mimes, abandonner,
covered with wounds, oyerpowejred by numbers, was taken by the
** , accabler sous le nombre, ^^
janissaries, and sent to Constantinople, where he was thrown into a
janissaire, , jeter
dungeon. Alas ! exclaimed he, in his prison ; I begin to think that
cachot. Hilas! s'ierier *•* , ;
Alzim has deceived me, for I can not expect to meet with Dathmendi
, espirer *®^
here.*** The war lasted fifteen years, and the satraps always prevented
i».». , *■* empicher
the exchange of Bekir. His prison was not opened (till peace was made).
i qu* d la paix.
He ran immediately to Ispahan to seek the vizier his protector, whose
ausntot ehtrchtr , d qui
life he had saved. (Three weeks elapsed) before he could speak to
H 11 fut trots semaines sans * * - pouvoir (o)
him. (At the) end of that time, he obtained an audience. Fifteen years
** Au bout , »»
imprisonment alter a little the figure of a handsome young man. Bekir
de prison changer
(could hardly be said to be the same) ; so the vizier did not know
itait d. peitie reconnaissable ; aussi reconnaitrt
him again. However, by dint of (calling to mind) the different epochs of
- , a force se rappeler *** •
his glorious life, he recollected that Bekir had formerly done him a little
* , se souvenir rendre *••
service. Yes, yes, my friend, said he to him, I remember you; you
, , , (oj ^ , remettre ;
are a brave man ; but the state is much encumbered; a long war and
• ; bien ebiri ; •
* Pat this adJMstive before the noim. t Faire and hattre mast eome together hefore ehef.
% This word most be smpdar in freneh, because it implies the life of each person individually, not of
them coIleetiTcly.
I Express Not by Ne onljTi as Qm which comes after supplies the place of Pas.
I Tarn ; to vhom be had saved the life. ** This preposition governs the infinitive in french.
410 EXERCISE.
Promiscuous exercisb on all the rules.
great festivals have exhausted our finances ; however come to me again
fSte ipuiser ; r$venirvoir *
I will try, I will see. . • • Ah ! my lord, I have no • bread, and for
tdcher. Eh! , w.b. , depuu
this fortnight that I have been waiting for an opportunity to speak to
- qtie — — t ■•' fo moment **
your lordship, I should have perished with misery, but for a soldier of
grandeur, •* . mourir de 7 ^"^
the guard, my ancient companion, who has shared his pay with me.
, vieux eamarade.
That is very well of that soldier, replied the vizier ; it is truly noble
Ce d, , ripondre ; cela vraiment
and afiecting j I will mention it to the king. Call upon me again ;
touchant ; jtarler «n** Revenir voir »i • .
you know I (have a regard for) you .... In saying these words, he
Ml aimer ** ,
turned his back (upon him). Bekir called ag^in the (next day), but he
^* iiti** revenir • lendemxiin^
(was denied admittance). Overwhelmed with despair, he left the palace
trouva la porte ferm^e, Aceabler •*'* , sortir du
and the city, resolved never to enter it again. He threw himself at
dela , /~ "irentrery^ • ' jetet* •♦
the foot of a tree on the bank of the river Zenderou. There he
bord fieuve Ld,
reflected on the ingratitude of viziers, on all the misfortunes which he
had experienced, on those which still-"* threatened him, and (unable
140 SprouveTf *^* d (bbj - encore , pouoant
any '^longer) to support these melancholy ideas, he rose to throw
ne plus ^"^ soutenir triste , te lever ^"^^ pr^cipiter
himself into the river ; • . . . but he felt himself embraced by a beggar
** , ** II menaiant
who bathed his face with tears, and exclaimed sobbing; it*'' is my
^^ visage *** > ** e» tanglotant ; k.b.
brother, it" is my brother Bekir! Bekir looks, and recognises Mes-
; W.3. , reconnaUre
rou. Every man feels pleasure no doubt in meeting again with a
104 avoir • sans doute *•• retrouver • "^
brother he has not seen for a long time; but an unfortunate man
CO depuis - ; *•
without resource, without a friend, who is going to (put an end to)
* The adverb again li expressed by the preposition re prefixed to the rerb.
t He hsvingf been waiting till the moment he was speaking, the French would put the rerb teaU in
the present, and leave ont have and been. I Pat thie verb in the infinitive,
X After the preposition Sans, t^e noun is generally osed withoat an article, because the preposition
and the noun are considered either a« an adjeetiv9 or as an adverbial expres^n*
SX£RCIS£. 411
Promiscuous ex.ercise on « all the rules.
his existence in despair, thinks he sees an angel from heaven, in
jour$ de , croire (nn) ' ,• «n
Rnding again a brother whom he loves. Such was the sentiment
retrouver - Ce ^^
which Bekir and Mesrou felt at the same time. They mutually
pressed (each other) in their arms, they mingled their tears, and afler
the first moments given to tenderness, they looked at (each other) with
13r • SOI j^M
eyes full of surprise and affliction. Art thou then also unfortunate?
t *- mrpris affligi, Tu es done
exclaimed Bekir. This, answered Mesrou, is the first moment of
happiness which I have enjoyed since we "•parted"'^. At these words,
dont se quitter, ,
the two unfortunate men embraced (each other) again ; they leaned
■• • 56** encore; s'appuyer*
on each other ; and Mesrou seated near to Bekir, thus ^^ began his
contre **^ ; assis pres de , ainsi
history. You remember the fatal day when we went to Alzim*s.
wi w ^^ soe
That perfidious genie told me I might find at court that Bathmendi
perfide j mi 7
whom we wished (so much) to meet. I followed his pernicious advice,
**• tant funeste^ conseil,
and soon arrived at Ispalian. I became acquainted with a young female
^** ** a faire eonnaisiance une -*•
slave who belonged to the mistress of the first secretary of the g^and
vizier. This slave conceived an affection for me, and introduced me to
del' M,
her mistress, who made me pass for her youngest brother. Soon the
» petit
youngest brother was presented to the vizier, and a few days afler, he
^^ , - quelques ,
obtained an employment ia the palace. The Sultana distinguished me,
emploi SuUane ,
and took me into an intimate friendship. From that moment, honours and
riches began to shower upon me. The monarch himself shewed some
$ pUuvoir *• timoigner
regard for me. He liked to converse with me, because I flattered him
affection - ** i*> causer *■•
* To «how the qwekwBt in which the action WM done, the freneh would pat thb rerb in the praenl
tense. i L«ave out Ihii adjectire, and make tnrpriie and mfiiction into adjectiveg,
t Pat this adjectire be/ore the noan. { Make this wurd plural in freneh.
412 EXERCISE.
Promiscuous exercise on all tlie rules.
with address, and always advised him to do what be had a mind to do.
This was the way to make him soon do what I should wish.
C« **• moyen ^* • lui ** faire • votUoir,
That failed not to happen. (At the) end of three years, I saw myself
(bb) manquer '* Au bout , **
at once prime minister^ favourite of the king, (having in my power)
a la fois » • ■ maitre
to appoint and to remove the viziers, deciding every thing by my
de rummer dtplacer , »®7
influence, and receiving every morning the great men of the empire,
credit, touu Us matins < ** ,
who came to wait (till I awoke) to obtain from me a smile of protection.
iw . monr^veil ^70 de ^
(In the) midst of my glory and of my fortune, I (was astonished) that
Au s*etonner^*^ -
I did not^*^ meet with that Bathmendi I was seeking. (I feel no
C«n; »•»• **** (sj itienneme
want of any kind), said I to myself; why (do I still want Bathmendi)?
manque ' » *** - m« ** ; Bathmendi me manque'tM ?
This idea and the constraint -(in which) I spent my life, poisoned all
my pleasures. The passion of the king for a young Mingrelienne
amour
came to (fill up) my misfortune. The whole court cast their eyes to
combler ■ infortune. " toumer i«^* de
that side, in hope that the mistress would (turn out) the minister. 1
, ^espoir chasser
parried the blow by connecting myself with the Mingrelienne, and
parer (Wf^ Her me** ,
flattening the passion of the king : but that passion became so violent,
104
9
that the monarch, determined to marry his mistress, asked me for*^^
., decider d «i , t
-my advice. I wavered for some days. The Sultan's mother, who
avis, tergiverser - Sultane mere, ||
was afraid of losing her influence if her son should'^ marry, came
credit »•». se marier,
to declare to me that, if I did not break off that match, she would
iri (o) , rompre - ^mariage,
have me assassinated on the very" day of the ceremony. An hour after,
s«w . meme
the Mingrelienne came and assured me that, if I did not iret her
(nnj »* , $ «o
* Make do, Faire fairet most come tc^ether in french. f See note J page 996.
I Mere being liere considered as an odjeetivet most come after Suiteme. ( See note f page 387.
EXERCISE. 413
Promiscuovs exercise on all the rules.
married to the king (the very next day), I should be strangled the day
«6i pa^ ^ i^ lendemain,
afler. My situation was embarrassing; I had to choose (between the)
d*apris» position t*i fallait ^^ du *
dagger, ** the rope or ^ flight. I chose** the last. I disguised myself
, du cordon dela prendre dernier parti, iw M7 »♦
as you see, and have escaped from the palace with some diamonds
, 187 s*ichapper " t
in my pockets, which will support me with you in some corner of
, faire vivre quelque
Indoustan, far from the Sultanas, the Mingreliennes and the court.
• , loin , *•* S04 .
After this recital, Bekir related his adventures to Mesrou. They both
ricit, ^ »«* t
agreed that they .would have done just as well not>*^ to have (rambled
eonvenir tout aiosi vb. - courir
about) the world, as they had done, and that the wisest thing they
, comme *** , meilleur ,(0
could do, was to return into Kousistan, to their brother Tai, where
^^ , ^*^ de » , aupresde
the diamonds of Mesrou would enable them to lead a sweet and easy^
mettre en ^tat *•• mener "* aisi
life. Afler this resolution, they (set out on their journey), and travelled
y te mettre en route marcher
for several days without meeting with any adventure* As they were
•04 _ _ « 154
crossing the province of Farsistan, they arrived towards dusk at a
traverser , vers le soir
small village where they intended to spend the night. It was a holy
'compter ^'^ *** Jete
day. On entering the village, they saw several peasants' children
** En entrer dans || » **
returning'^ from walking, attended by a kind of (school-master) badly
*•• II.B. ^promenade, conduit **' esp^ce magister mal
clad, walking with his head down, and having the appearance of (being
vttUf marcher - la^* basse, atr
absorbed in) (melancholy thoughts). The two brothers approached (his
rever \ tristement. •'*••
school-master, looked at him attentively. . .What was their surprise ! it" was
Sadder, it" was their brother Sadder whom they embraced. What" ! my
, H.B. •• •• Ehquoi!
* The preposition between is here expressed like of. f See note f page 283.
t Pat tnis prononn ifter the verb. $ All these words may be left out in freach.
B The FfCBch do not say entrer un endroit, to enter a place ; they say entrer dansttn endroit^ to entet
into a place. ^ Express the words being <ibsorbed in by the verb river.
•* To express the suddenness of the action, the French would here use the present tense.
414 EXERCISE.
Promiscuous exercise on all the rules.
friend, said Bekir to him, is this (the way) in which genius is rewarded ?
, {oj , ce ainti - que ' •■
You see, replied Sadder, that it is treated much (in the same way as)
, , •* d pen prh eomme
valour is ; but philosophy finds (in it) abundant food for reflection
y - ; y •* un grand mjet de
and that (is no small consolation). In saying these words, he bid *"*
(bb^ console beaucoup. En , ordonner a
all the children go (to their homes), took Bekir and Mesrou to his
'•* *** » condtiire
little cottage, dressed himself a little* rice for their supper, and afler
cabane, appritw (m) n.b. jt.b. ^
havingiM (asked them for) their histories, he told them his own in these
t'itre^ faitraconter , dire i«* ^ - en
words: The genie Alzim, whom I suspect much of delighting in
mot : , aimei' ^** —
(other people's) afflictions, advised me to seek that (not to be founcF'
autrut ** mal • , introuvable
Bathmendi in the great city of Agra, amongst the wits and the
, beaux esprits
fine ladies of that city. I arrived at Agra ; and before I mixed
J avant de (nn) me r^anJre
with the world, I wished^^J to (make myself known) by some
dans , voulov m^annoncer quelque
striking work. (At the) end of a month, my work appeared :
dVc^t*". Au bout
it was a complete course of all human sciences, in a small volume
•* ^ cours * ** 7 ^ en
divided into chapters. Each chapter was a tale, and each tale taught
par iM 140
a science thoroughly'". My book and I soon'^ became fashionable
parfaitement k.b. 187 bientdt d, la mode.
I was invited to all the societies that pretended to have any sense ;
•* 74 gg piquer "® un peu d'eirprit ;
(there was no talk) but of me, and the favourite Sultana wrote to
On ne parlait que de *® , •* ^qJ
me with her own hand a note (badly spelled), to ask me to come
de - billet sajis orthographe, ^'o ^fier
to court. Well ! I said to myself, Alzim has not deceived me :
7 Courage! (ee) "» - mc** ,
my glory is (at its) .height; I will sustain it by surer*' means
au . comole; soutenir •* ag »
than those of intrigue ; I will please, and I shall find Bathmendi.
* Put tliis word in the tingular in french.
EXERCISE. 415
Promiscuoua exeroise on all the auLB6 *
I was (most agreeably) received in the palace of the grand Mogul : The
^^ parfaitement accueillir
favourite Sultana declared herself openly my protectress, presented me
*• ** h&utement ,
to the emperor, bespoke verses from me, gave me pensions, admit-
, commander • - ** » * >
ted me to her private suppers, and swore to me, a hundred times a
pitit , (o) " "
day, a friendship (that would stand any test). I thought^^^* I was
, d toute fyreuve, croire C^nJ toucher
(on the) point of meeting with Bathmendi, when my protectress
au fwment *^ »
quarrelled with the vizier about the government of a province which
*e brouiller vizir pour un —
•he latter refused to the son of the confectioner of the favourite. The
celui'Ci conjiseur
Sultana exasperated at this audacity, asked the emperor to dismiss the
outr4^^ de , chasstr
insolent minister ; but the emperor liked his vizier, and refused the
140
> »
favourite. Then it (became necessary) to (set on foot) a regular" intrigue
Alort it fallut ^^ 4tablir en rigle
to ruin the patronized vizier. I entered (into the) plot, and (was^''
^70 perdre toutenu^ itre^*^ du compbty ** recevoir
desired) to compose against the minister a cutting"" satire, and to spread
ordre *• sanglant , rtpandre
It amongst the public. The vizier soon discovered that I was the author
*' dans bientdt
(of it) . He went to the favourite, brought her the commission which he
en^ alle^ trouver , ^^ brevet
had refused (at first), an order for a hundred thousand daricks on the
*** d*abord, ordonnance de **
royal treasury, and only asked her*" (in return) to permit him** to
* , • itti pour recompense de lui
throw me into a dungeon. That is a trifle, answered the favourite, and
cachoU Ce misire, ,
I am very fortunate in (having it in my power) to do something that
heureux (g) de pouvoir ^^ ''*
may be acceptable to you. I wiL send immediately for that wretch
agriable (o ) f enwyer tout ^ Vheure chercker t miserable
who has dared to insult you (in spite of) my express orders, and
*" malgri ■• difense,
»
deliver him into your hands. Luckily for me a slave of the favourite
"emettre entre Heureusement
* See note • page S7S. f See note t page 313.
The preposition For after t&e verbs Qo and Send, is not ejqpressed by Pour, bat by the yeib Chercker
416 EXERCISE.
Promiscuous exercise on all the rules.
who was present, came to relate their conversation to me ; I had only
, racaater (o) ** 5 *v •*
time to escape. Since that time, I have (wandered all over) Indoustan,
S0 iauver, DepuU ijpoque^ parcourir tout ^ ,
Viardlyi^ gaining my livelihood by writing novels, and making verses.
it peine vie <t *** romanSf ao* 154 »
(As long as) I had money, my works had been master-pieces ; as soon as
Tant que avcds eu ' , ^eheft^ceuvre ; sitdt que
I was in misery, (all that I wrote was nonsense). (At last) disgusted
^'^ ^ , je ne fit plus que des sottises, Enfin
with instructing the world, I have preferred to*^ teach peasants to
*®^ . *** univen, mieux aimS apprendred. • t
read, and have*^ turned school-master in this little village where I live
** tefaire oil
upon brown bread, and where I do not expect ever to see Bathmendi.
«<» tM«« , esp^rer »•*
(You may leave it if you like), said Mesrou to him, and (go back)
Jl ne tient qu' X d vous de U quitter, (0) ** , *** retourner
with us into Kousistan, where some diamonds which I take with me,
I empTTter - - ,
assure us a sweet and easy" > life. He had not much difficulty to deter-
■* tranquille ^^ peine d
mine Sadder. (The very next day) the three brothers (set out) from the
Dis le lendemain soi'tir
village before (daybreak), and took the road to ^Kousistan. They^* were
lejour, du • en **•
on their last (day's journey), and (at no great) distance from the
joum^e, pres de arriver a
small house of Tai. This idea consoled them ; but their hope was
"» ; • espoir »«
mingled with fear. Shall we find our brother? they said: we left him
meter de (ee) : i»«
very poor; he will not have met with Bathmendi, since he has not
201
(been* able) to (go in search of) him. My dear friends, said Sadder to
pu ^^* chercher ** , CoJ
them, I have meditated a (ffood deal) on this Bathmendi of whom Alzim
, r4fi6chir - beaucoup *^ d ^*
has spaken to us. To (tell you the truth), I believe that the genie
(0) ^ parler franchement,
has (made game) of us. Bathmendi does not exist, and has never
*^ se moquer ,
existed ; for since my brother Bekir did not meet him, when he
$ aijr i8« ^
* See note * pa^e 275. | Turn ; to teach td read to peasants.
I II ne tient que is a very common expression, but it can not be expressed literally in engltsb.
j See note f puge 28S. ( See note * page 379.
EXERCISE. 417
Pfomiscuous exergise on all the rulegt.
commanded half of the persian" army ; since Mesrou did not
la inoitU persane ; *^^ ^^
(hear his name mentioned), when he was the favourite of the great
en " entendre parter , lorsque
king; since I myself could not even guess what it was at a time
; ^"* meme ®* ce dans le
when I was loaded (with the) favours of glory and fortune; it^ is
que combUr des 7 to* 7 ; n.b.
clear that Bathmendi is an imaginary heing, an illusion, a chimera after
" etre, ,
which all men run, because they like chimeras, and (rambling about)
7^ 7 , d courir,
«
He was going to prove that Bathmendi did not exist in this world, when
1" habiter , *'7
a band of robbers rushed from behind the rocks which lined^*® the road,
troupe tortir* border ,
surrounded the three travellers, and ordered them*"" to strip. Bekir
entourer^ , • leur se d^ouiUer,
wished^ to resist, but he was soon disarmed. Afler this ceremony which
vouloit , *^
was the business of a moment, the captain of the robbers wished them
instant, chef ^"*
a good journey, and left them quite naked (in the) midst of the high-
voyage, ^®* ^ au grand
way. This comes in support of my proposition, said Sadder, looking
chemin, H l*appui , , en
at his brothers. Ah ! the cowards ! exclaimed Bekir in a rage ; they
«»^ Ah! tdche ' »» en-fureur;
have taken my sword from me I Oh ! my diamonds ! my poor dia-
arracher - " Eh!
monds! replied Mesrou weeping. It was dark; The three unfortu-
ripondre enpleurant, faire nuit;
nate men (made haste) to reach the house of their brother TaY. They
■• ie hdter gagner
(at len^h) reached it, and the sight of that house caused their tears
en/In "* arriver y »* , vue faire t
to flow. They stopped at the door ; they dared not knock ; all their
- eouler.f ; ;
fears, all their doubts (were renewed). Whilst they were wavering
, ineertiiude recommeneer, balancer
thus, Bekir rolled a large stone, got upon it, and finding a cleft in the
, • gro$^ , numter* **, fenie
window shutter, he looked and perceived in a neat, plainly furnished
•* eontreiJent^ • • ^ , simplement meuble'*
* To show the quickness of the action, the Kiench would here use the present tense; bat the perfect
amy alko be used. t Tarn ; caused tojlsw their tears ; the two verbs fatte and c««/er mna\
come together in french, for it did not cause their tears, but it caused tojlow tears.
2 D
418 BXERCISE.
Promiscuoua Bxfiticiss on all the rules.
room, his brother Tai at table, (in the) midst df ten children who were
• d , au
eating, laughing and chattering all (at once). Tat had on his right his
^ , »» babUUr aUfois. »*• a
wife Amine who was feeding her youngest child, and on his lefl was
*** faire manger dernier , d •
a little (old man) with a sweet* and cheerful countenance, who was
vietllard de ■* gai^ physunumie,
(pouring out) drink for Tat. At this sight Bekir rushed into the arms
vener . dboire d se pr^cipiter *
of his brothers, and knocked at the door with all his might* A servant
, frapper • de forces. valet
came to open it, and screamed with fright, at seeing three men completely
• *^ , Jeter • des oris de ft-ayeur, en tout
naked. Tai ran to the door. The strangers fall (on his") neck, they**
*• • - On i lui saute au v.a. cou, x-b.
call him brother ; they^ bathe him with tears. He was confused (at iirst),
w ; N.B. •800 • troubler d'abord,
but he soon recollects Bekir, Mesrou, Sadder. He presses them in his
^®* reconnaitre , , serrer
arms, he can not embrace them sufficiently. All the children ran
, sitffire d lews embrassements. accourir
to see what it was. Amine also came, but she (drew back) with her
'^* ®* ily aocdt, *** , se retirer
daughters at the sight of the three naked brothers. (The little old man
aspect * 111' y evt que
ivas the only one) who did nofrquit the table. Ta! gave clothes to his
ie petit vieillard '
brothers, presented them to his wife, and made them kiss his chil-
dren. Alas ! said Bekir affected at this sight ; thy happy lot consoles
H^las! attendri spectacle; sort
us for all that we have suffered. Since the moment (we parted,)
*^ ce que Vepuis instant de noire siparaivni^
our life has been, only a series of misfortunes, and we have not
enchaxnement infartune ;
even (had a glimpse) of that Bathmendi after which we have all
seulemetit entretru - 7«
been running. I readily believe it, said the little (old man) then^''^ who
Hi lign iw 54^ vieillard alors n.b. 7*
remained (all this time) at table; f have not stirred hence. How!
**• toujows ; hovger Comment t
exclaimed Mesrou, you are. • .1 am Bathmendi, replied the (old man;)
t'ecrier , , repftndre
* To sheMr the quickness of the action, the French would here nse the wesenf tense« bnt the perfect
11? be ttKed too. f This noon would be expressed better in drench by Uie iitd^mte pronoun On,
««?
EXBRCISE. 419
Promiscuous exercise on all the kules.
it is quite natural that you should not know me, since you have never
i» simple* t , "'
seen me; but ask of Tai, ask of the good Aitiitie, and of all these little
SOO 200 SM
children, there is not one (of them) but knows my name. The three
brothers who could not (keep their eyes off) this little (old man), wished
^^ se kusir de contidirer , vouloir
to embrace him. Gently, said he to them ; I do not like these great
^7« Doticement, (o) ;
raptures. (People"* should) be friends before they (make so free). It
mouvementu 11 k-b. faut itre avanJt de (nn) se caretsa^,
you wish that we should tiver become so, be not (too much) (taken up)
148 /«**,*- trap s*occuper
with me. In saying these words, he (got up)^ kissed every one of the
^ , se lever, i<»
children, made a gentle bow to the three brothers, gave a smile to
, petit Mlut , -
Amine and to Tat, and went to wait for them in their bed^ chamber.
, ■** eoucher ■*
Tax (sat again) at table with his brothers, and ordered beds to be got
te remettre , faire % - - appvi'
ready for them. Next day he showed them his fields, his flocks, and
terx - leur^ Le lendemain '•• g >
gave them a detail of all the pleasures fsj he enjoyed. Bekir would'^
faire "• dont *^ wulair
(work in the fields) (that very day) ; so he was the first that became
labourer lejour mime ; • aussi ^^ ''^
the friend of Bathmendi. Mesrou who had been prime minister, was
140 ^ 187
head shepherd of the farm, and the poet (took upon himself) to go and
premier , §e charger *•* -
sell in town, the corn, the wool, and the milk which was sent to market;
a / , , , 9i i» r ;
his eloquence brought customers, and he was as useful as the others
aitirer chabtndf »*» <• *«
(At the) end of six months, Bathmendi (was pleased) with them, and
Au bout , seplaire^^ ^ , \
their numerous" and quiet days (glided on) gently (in the) bosom
nombreus ^ couler ^"^ doueement au
of happiness. It" is perhaps unnecessary to say that BATHMENDI
9 K.B. inutile de
(in the Persian language) means HAPPINESS.
en Pertan dgnifier '
* Thit adjective reqnires the following verb in tho subjunciite.
t See note * page 140, the difference betwera Savoit and ConruAtte.
X Turn * ordered to get ready beds, &c. for he did not order the beds bat he ordercd-«to get ready*
2 o2
420
A
COMPENDIUM
Of
THE PRINCIPAL RULES.
CONTAINED IN THIS TRBATISE.*'
What are the words commonly called^^ the parts of speech, of which
* appeUr partie ^ discours,
the french lanfi:uafi:e is composed?
"* langue composer ^'^f,
(What is) a noun?
Qu'est'Ce que (y) nom f
(How many®), sorts of nouns do we'® distinguish in g^rammar?
Combien n.b. k.b. distinguei' en grammairef
(How^ many) genders (are there) in french ?
ir.B.
848
How do we^ know the gender of the names of the beings without
iM N.B. connaitre nom itre
life, which are commonly called** things?
9 •• appeler
(How^ many) numbers (are there) ? How do you make the plural
w.B. **« 1*5 former plurieK
number of nouns ?
Has this rule any exceptions ? What are they ?
(What is) an article ?
Cy)
What are the words which are commonly called article in french?
88 - 98
What agreement does the article require with the noun?
accord demander
What sign do we use, when the noun which follows the article
signe employer,
is (in the) singular, and begins with a vowel, or an k mute ?
au , par toyelley mu^ttef
When several nouns which require the article meet in the same
plusieurs demander se rencontrer
* The learner must translate these question^ into french, as he has done the foregoing* exercises ; and
ne must also write in french an answer to every question, with au explanation of the rule, and two or
three appropriate examples from his own imagination. This exercise would perhaps be useless to grown
persons who have read the rules wUh attention^ but I think it will be partioulariy useful to all young
learners.
A COMPENDIUM 421
of the PRINCIPAL RULES contained in this treatise,
sentence, is it necessary to repeat the article before each nonn ?
Do the names'** of persons and of towns require the article ?
nom demandw
Do the names of countries require the article ?
*•• pays
Has not this rule some exceptions? -What ^ are they?
\84 • MM
(Is there) not a small number of words which are never excepted,
I. €, which always require the article ? Name them.
*•* Nomjner
What article do common ^names require, when they are used
83 commun , *^ demander, - s*empUn/et
in a general or in a particular sense ?
particulier sens
How is OF expressed before a noun used in a general sense,
183 _ s'expnmer(^tt) M.B.
preceded by a noun used in a partitive sense?
What article do common names require, when we^ use them in a
^** K.B. employer
partitive sense, i. e, to denote only a portion of the thing (spoken of?)
d designer dont on parte f
What sign do we** put before a noun used in a partitive sense, when
signe w«B. partitif ,
t is attended by an adjective which must be placed before that noun ?
accompagni de devoir - se placer
(Are not there) some adverbs in french which require the preposi-
ti^n De, when the words which represent them in english do not re-
, representer
quire any* preposition? ^What are they?
K.B. 8i
How is the numeral article A, an expressed?
IM - (iij N.B.
How are a, an expressed before nouns of measure, weight, number,
- *o*poid8, a>*
and periods of time used in a collective sense ?
«~ J«7 coUectif
What are the words which are called demonstrative article?
w - M dimonstratif
How do we** make in french that local** distinction which is made
N.B. de lieu -sefaire
in english by means of the words this, these ; that, those ?
au moyen
• See note f page 882. t See note • page 19S.
422 A COMPENDIUM
pfthe PftTNCiPAL RULES Contained in this treatise.
What are the words which we«<* call possessive article ?
^ K.B. possessif^*
Is not the possessive article my, thy, ma, her, our, your> thkir^
sometimes expressed by the definite article lb. La, zes ?
Are not the possessive words my, thy, n%^ her, qur, your, thrir,
- 184
t
sometimes ei^pressed by 4U, a ^a* aius?
(ii) N.B.
Do not the French sometime^ use ifout jra> M^ before a nour,
13* 18* employei'
when the corresponding^ signs are not used in english?
qui y eorrespandent - (iijv^m
In what instances are the signs called article (lefl out) in french ?
cos - ^'* s*omettre
When two nouns govern each other, which of the two nouns is to
be placed the first in french ?
**3 se placer (ii) n.b. premier
By what preposition are these nouns united together?
- 1** 8*unir ensemble f
How is OF expressed before the proper names of countries?
^^ - (ii) N-B. 7iom
Do not the French sometimes us^ the name of a country, when
134 184 empUyer
the English use the adjective derived from that name?
d^riv^
What is an adjective?
(y) adjectiff
What agreement does^the adjective require i^ith the poun?
accord ^** demander
How is the feminine gender of an adjective , formed?
- - se former (ii) n.b.
(Are there) any exfveptions to this rule, and what are they?
E4« 9 • 83 6S
How is the plural number of adjectives formed ?
When an adjective qualifies two nouns, of what gender ^nd numbei
qualifier , •
must that adjective be?
iewiir
Are adjectives placed in french before or after the noun ?
184 jg placet' (ii) w-b.
* Repeat here Of what before number.
A COMPENDIUM 423
of the PRINCIPAL RULES Contained in this treatise.
Has not this rule some exceptions?
184
What place do the adjectives of impiber keep with the noun?
place *•*' tenir
How are the adjectives of number expressed and where are they
- s'exprimer,(ii)v.B* ou —
placed, when they are used to distinguish some personage?
se placer, - s^ employer • personnagef
How are the adjectives of measure and dimension long^ broads
^ Ipng, large,
high, deep, Sfc, placed with the number in frenoh?
haut, profond, S^c, se placer (it J »•»•
Do not the French often use the substantive of dimension instead ot
IS* 18* substantif
the adjective? Is the same verb used with the substantive oi
dimension as with the adjective?
que
Can the adjective be separated from the noun by an article in french
as it^ sometimes is in english?
eomme *•* ^
May*78 i^ot the adjective be sometimes used as a substantive?
Pouvoirf »»* - (iijv.n.
How is an adjective made comparative? — How is it made superlative?
•* comparatiff •* su,perlatif?
When the comparison is made, not between two substantives,
- se faire, (ii) w.b. entre
but between two parts of a sentence ; as, the more difficult a
partie . phrase; ,
THING is> THE MORE MERIT THERE IS IN DOING IT; what difference
(is there) in the arrangement of the words in french ?
Are the adverbial particles^ which serve to form the comparative
" particuU servir
and superlative repeated in french ?
' se rSpSter (ti) k-b.
Do not some*^ of the comparative adjectives and adverbs require
*** 88 ^ demander
ffs before the verb which follows them?
How are by and than expressed afler a comparative?
18* - (n)vB.
• See note * pa^ S82. f See note * pag« 138.
424 A COMPENDIUM
of the PRINCIPAL RULES contained in this treatise.
How is IN expressed after a superlative?
What mood does the superlative require, when it is followed by 'a
•* mode dmander, •• dt
relative pronoun?
relatif
What is a pronoun?
(y) pnmom f
How many« sorts of pronouns do we*® distinguish ?
H.B. • v.B, disHngutrf
How do you express the pronouns i, thou, he, she, it, we, you
THEY, when they are the nominative of a verb?
nominatif
How do you express the same words i, thou, he, she, we, you«
mimes
THEY, when they are joined^* to another substantive for the nomina
f joindre substantif -
tive of the same verb, or when the verb is understood?
f toiu-entendre f
How do you express the pronouns me, thee, ub, you, him, her,
IT, THEM, when they arc the object of a verb ?
, objet
What place do the pronouns objects of the verb keep with the
place *** tenir
verb, when the tense is simple ?
, terns simple? ' ' ■
What place do these pronouns require when the tense is compounded
*** demander cotlfpose
of the auxiliary" verb Avoir or js^re, and of a past* participle ?
auxiliiure , pasU participef
Where are the pronouns objects of the verb placed, when the
Oii - se placer, (ii) v,b,
verb commands, and how are me and thee expressed?
commander, *** - (ii) n.b.
How are me, thee, us, you, him, her, them expressed, and where
'W - . (ii)V'B.,
are they placed, when they are governed by a preposition?
- (iiJv.B.^ rSgir par
Is not the preposition A in french, like ihe preposition to in englisli,
IM
often implied in the pronoun ? When is Jl^^ to be expressed ?
renfermie **' "* s'exprimerf
When several proiouns of different persons are the object of the
phmeurt
A COMPENDIUM 425
of the PRINCIPAL tivi/e,^' contained in this treatise.
same verb, what order do these pronouns keep with one another?
, ordre ^^ tenir "*
As (there are) in french only two genders, the masculine and the
Comme il n*y a qtie ,
feminine, how is the english neuter^ pronoun it expressed in french?
, - »a neutre ^^ fiij h.b.
Explain the different uses of the pronoun it.
Expliquer usages
May'7« LUi, LEUR, be used for things?
Pouvoir* ^" - s* employer 5^
May LUI, ELLE, Eux, ELLEs be used for things afler a prepositibn?
» 184 I 7
How are the pronouns he, she, it, they expressed before the verb
185 . 184 (^ii^ K.B. «0«
BE, when that verb is followed by a substantive?
MO
9
How are the pronouns he, she, thev, him, her, them expressed,
- (ii)v.'a. ,
when they do' not relate to any noun (mentioned before), but
t M rapporter aticun dont on a fait **' mention, ' *^'
** refer to the word person understood?
se rapporter sous-entendre f
Are not the pronouns le, la, lbs, en, y frequently used, when
- "* souvent^^ s^employer,
the words which represent them are not used in english ?
reprdsenter - (iij w-b.
Do these pronouns agree with the words which they represent?
s*accorder
How do you express the pronouns who, whom, whose, that,
WHICH, when they relate to a noun (mentioned before)?
, se rapporter dont on a fait mention 7
What place does the relative keep with the noun to which it relates ?
place relatif tenir 7*
Is not the relative pronoun sometimes understood in english, when
81 184 184
it can not (be left out) in french?
s*omettre
How are who, whom, whose expressed, when they relate to the
- *•* , t (ii)v*B.^ te rapporter
word PERSON understood?
How are whom and which expressed, when they are governed by
(ii) W.B., rSgir
a preposition?
* See nota * pag;e 138. t These words in this sense may be considered as nonns.
t Express Not hy ne only, becaase aucun that follows is a negative expression which takes the place
tapai.
42t> A COMPENDIUM
of the PRINCIPAL RULES cojiiained in this treatise.
How IS WHICH expressed after a preposition, when it relates
*** - s*exprimer(iiji''.9» , terapporUf
to the word trino?
How is WHICH expressed after a preposition, when It relates tp a place?
How is WHICH interrogative expressed?
- interrogatif (it) n.b.
Explain the different ways of expressing the pronoun what,
Eipliqv£r maniire ***
How do vre^ express the possessive pronouns m^we, tqine, his, hers,
w.B. possessif^
OURS, YOURS, THEIRS, when they relate to a noun (mentioned before) ?
, dont on a fait mention ?
How are the possessive pronouns mine, thine, his, qers, ours, &c
. as '
expressed, when they are used instead of the personal pronouns ms,
K.B., - $* employer
THEE, USj VOU, HIM, U^R, THEM; ^S, THIS BOOI^ U MINE?
', , THIS BOOK is MINHf
How are the possessive pronouns i^ine, thine, his, heus, &c. ex-
pressed, \yhen they ar^ joinefl by the preposition of to the noun to
(ii) N.B., OF
which they relate ; as, a roo|( of mine, &c. ?
; , A BOOK of MINE, S^p.f
How ^re the demonstrative prouQuns tuis^ that, these, those,
- dimonstratif^
expressed? — How is the distinction made between these words in french ?
(ii)v.9, - •■ entre
How are this, that expressed, when they relate to the word
- C'U "•"•» ^ rapporter
THING understopd?
Explain the different properties of this, that, these, those.*
propri^tS
How do we*^ express the words PNE, we, thet, people, when they
do not refer to any particular" person ?
u rapporter aucune en partictdier personne
How are the indefinite expressions such as these; it is thought,
ind^fini^* »" tellet que » ; ,
IT is SAID, ei^pre^sed in french?
, (ii) N.B.
How are these other indefinite expressions i have been told, i
- autre •* •
« See note (hh) page 217.
A COMPENDIUM 427
of the PRINCIPAL RULBs Contained in ihU treatise,
WAS ADVISED, &c. expressed in french?
What is a verb?
(y) verbe f
What agreement does the verb require with its nominative?
."* accord demander son 'nominatif?
When two substantives of different persons afe the nominative o«
substantif*
the same verb, of what number and person must the verb be ?
, ■* t devoir
Of what person is the verb, when it has oui for its nominative ?
Of what person must the verb be, when qui relates to two sub-
devoir se rapporter
stantives ot different persons?
Of what number must the verb be, after the collective substantives
coUectif^
La plupart, infinitkt Nomhre, Quantith^ rrottpe. Multitude?
Of what number is the verb, after le Quart, le riers^ La uoitie ?
What is the place lof the nominative with the verb, in an interro-
®* place ,
gative sentence, when the nominative is a personal pronoun?
phrase, **
What is the place of the nominative, in an interrogative sentence, when
that nominative is a noun, or any other word but a personal pronoun ?
, tout autre que
When is the present of the indicative used**?
- employer
When do we"* use the compound of the present?
K.B. composS
When do we** make use of the perfect tense of the verb?
H.B. tuage parfait -
Explain the different uses of the imperfect.
Kxpliquer usage
When is the future used? Is not the present sometimes used
futur " - »8*
for the future? Does not the french language require the future,
*^ demander
in some instances (in which) the English use the present ?
X cas oil
How are will, would expressed after the conjunction if?
iM . s^exprimer MPf
9 Gee note pnge 205. t Of what mast be repetUed before person. i See note f page 282*
428 A COMPENDIUM
of the PRINCIPAL RULES Contained in this treatise
Mention the different instances in which the subjunctive :*s used
Kapporter cas 76 subjanctif - •*
When is the present of the subjunctive used ?
When is the perfect of the subjunctive used?
•4
Doeg the present participle ag^ree with the words that attend it ?
^ participe s^accorder accompagner
How is the en^Hsh participle in ing expressed, after a preposition?
— ^ s*expri7ner,
How is the english present participle expressed, when it is joined
to the auxiliary verb be?
BEf
Does the past participle agree with the noun to which it is joined
82 iw 76 joindre?
m
When a past participle comes after the auxiliary verb Etre^ to be,
does it require any agreement, and with what word does it agree?
quelque accord, s'accorder
When a past participle comes after the auxiliary verb Avoir, to have,
does it require any agreement, and with what word does it agree?
Does the past participle agree after Avoir, when it is followed by
de
another verb in the infinitive? Explain this rule.
d Expiiquer ^
How is TO, the sign of the infinitive in english, expressed in french ?
(Are not there) some instances in which this preposition is left out
**• t cas 70 - 8*omettra
in french? Name them.
Nommer
Is will'^ always the sign of the future, and would the sign cf
tVILL , WOULD
the conditional of the verb which follows it?
cojiditionnel
How are will have, would have expressed ? — Explain these words.
(ii)v.B,
How do we** express should; should have, ought to have'
N.B.
<
How do we^ express may, might; could have, might have?
N.B.
• See, pages 236, 237, ^38, the different ways of expressing TO before an infinitive, and peruse ofti»
ite list of those verbs. f !^ee note t page 282.
A COMPENDIUM 429
ofi}u PRINCIPAL RULES Contained in this treatise.
How is WISH expressed when it is followed by another verb
(in the) imperfect, or (in the) conditional?
a V imparfaitf au amditionnel f
How is MUST expressed, and what mood does it govern?
- CiiJ N.B.J mode r^gir
How rausU^' we express must have in the sense of beino in need?
NB. gem
What is an adverb ?
Cy) adverbe ?
What place do the adverbs keep with the verb?
place ^^ tenir
Which are the words that we** call nep^ative adverbs?
y» N.B. nSgatif^
How are the negative adverbs placed with the verb? "
- ttt placer (ii) n«b.
How are they placed, when the verb is in the infinitive?
(ii) N.B. a
Are not pas,^ »Qini sometimes left out ?
- *** '•* t'omettre(ii)v.B.
How are no, not expressed without a verb?
(ii) K.B.
How is not expressed with the verb take care, prendre garde?
(ii)v.B, ,
(Are there) not in french some words which require A'e, when
**• , * demander •< ,
(there is) no negation in english? Which are these words?
248 79
How do we** express but in the sense of the adverb only ?
N.B. BUT ONLY f
How is BUT expressed in the sense of a relative pronoun?
- BUT (u)V.B. %
What is a preposition ?
(y) p^ipositionf
Are the prepositions always expressed by the words which generally
_ 184 . 184
c(trrespond to one another in both languages ? ^Mention the words
te corretpondre *■* les deux Rapporter
the most irequently used**' with which the prepositions differf?
*w empliryer 7« diffdrer?
Do not some verbs require a preposition in english, when the
• demander ,
corresponding" words do not require any in french ? Name them.
qui y correspondent (p) Nommer
• See note f page S83. f See, pages 247. S48, S49, 250 251, a list of the words with which ihs
prepositions di£ter, and pemse it often.
430 A COMPENDIUM
of the PRINCIPAL RULES contatrted in thia treatise,
(Are there) not (on the) contrary some verbs which require a pre.
■*• au contraire •
position in french, when the corresponding" wotds do not require
, qui V corrupmidetii
any in engh'sh ?— Name them.
fp)
May the prepositions be placed In fi'etich, lis they sdmetimes are
t ^** " se plucer (ii) v.ii. ^ w iw
placed in english, either before or after the words which they ffOTern ?
Are the prepositions repeated before all the words which they govern?
- *** se rfyiter ••
Explain the following" prepositions: for. before. bt.
ExpUquer suivant **
Explain at, to, from with verbs denoting being*" at, going^**,
7 qui d^signent Stre d, alter ,
or coming to, going or coming from a person's** house?
venir d, de - quelqu*un
Explain the different properties ef in, into. tN, before the dif-
propriitS IN, INTO, in,
ferent parts of the day ; and on before the days of the week.
partie ; on
What is a conjunction?
Cy^ conjonction t
Which are the conjunctions that gov<irn the indicative mood?
^ rigi'^ indieatiff -
Which are the conjunctions that govern the subjunctive?
y» 7* suhjonetif?
When a conjunction governs several verbs, is it«" necessary to re-
plusieurs , n.b. »«
peat it before each verb?
» OS lOS
(Is there) not something to be remarlced about the conjunction ai, if ?
«« «« ausujetde ,
May not some conjunctions (be left out) in english^ when the con-
t • *** iomettre ,
junctions which represent them can not (be left out) in iirench?
Explain the conjunctions both. either, or. — — NEItHBR, Kor.
Explain the conjunctions whether. — though, although, IF even.
-BUT FOR, IF IT WERE NOT FOR, IF IT HAD NOT BESN FOR, &C«
* 8oe note \ page S88. f Sae note * page 13S.
A COMPENDIUM 431
of the PRINCIPAL RULES contained in ihii treatise,
IDIOMS
Explain the difTerent ways of expressing the word people.
ExpliqxLer maniei'€ ***
Explain the different meanings of the words country. time.
tignifieation
What difference between an, ann£e ; — —jour, journ^e ; matin
entre
matinee; soiR, soiriSe ; nuit, soir ; midi, minuit?
When is the auxiliary verb have expressed by the auxiliary EtreY
- ^84 s^exprimer par
When is the auxiliary verb be expressed by the auxiliary Avoir ?
(ii) N.B.
When is be expressed by Faire? When is be expressed by
- 184 «
ie porter ? When is be expressed by Devoir ?
Is not the verb be sometimes led out ?
*•* *®* s'omettre
How do we*® express to be just, to have just ?
185 N.B.
How do we^ express was near, W£re near, had like ?
K.B.
How do we^ express there is, there are ; it is far, it is long
K.B.
ago; it is since; atid this, these, (pointing out) a period of time?
disignant
How do we^^ express here is, here are ; this is, these are ;
M B.
THERE IS, THERE ARE ; THAT 18, THOSE ARE, when they serve
to (point out) an object?
**• designer
Explain the different meanings of the word Let. let know.
signification
Explain the different meanings of the verb make.
Explain to cause, to have, to get. to cause to be done
or made; to have or get done or made ; to order, to bespeak.
Explain the verbs to ask, to desire. to look.
Explain the different meanings of the verbs to suppose. — to hope.
432 A COMPENDIUM
of the PRINCIPAL RULES Contained in this treatise.
Explain the di£ferent meanings of the verbs to take. to bring
aignifiGatUm
TO USE,— TO HELP. TO ATTEND. TO WANT.
Explain the verbs to marry.— —to ride. to walk. to
COME. TO RETURN. TO CALL,
Explain the verbs to break. to like. to keep. ■■> t o get.
to spend. to charge.
How do we»o express to go to meet. wto bring near, to go
i8» H.B.
NEAR, TO COME NEAR. TO HEAR?
How do we^ express it is with.-^— whatever, in vain, to
N.B.
NO purpose. TO FIND FAULT WITH.— —TO TAKE IT KINDLY.
TO TAKE IT UNKINDLY ?
How do we** express to do without, to be easy without.
N.JS.
WHAT is the matter, WHAT IS IT ABOUT, WHAT IS IT. IS IT, IS
IT NOT ; DOES IT, DOBS IT NOT ; HAVE I, HAVE I NOT ?
I^P* The learner having gone through the Svntctx, and being able to answer the foregoing
questionSf with appropriate examples to each of tnenif there can be ^lo doubt but he understands
the rules toell ; he should now try to write something of his own composition in french, such as
letters, dialogues, short histories, or anecdotes, either that he has read or heard, or from hU
own imagination. This he will perhaps find difficult at first ; but if he wilt persevere in it for a
few days, he will find it easier and more profitable than translating from a book; for unless he
has read a great deal offrench, he will be apt to commit many anglicisms, owing to the differ^
ence in the idiom of the two languages, i. e. he will put together a number of french words
which separately have a meaning, but which, wJien put together, have hardly any meaning at
all. His attention sliouUt be called entirely to recollect thefrench words which he has seen to
express the same ideas, and even the english dictionary should be used as seldom as possible.
If he finds himself deficient in some of the rules, he must wiHte over again the recapitulatory
exercise on those parts of speech which are not familiar to him, and there is little doubt that
afier a second attentive perusal, he will be sufficiently acquainted with them
THE END
Loudon ; Printed by W. Clowss and Sons, Stamford-street.
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11